Rewriting Dialectal Arabic Prehistory
Rewriting Dialectal Arabic Prehistory
Rewriting Dialectal Arabic Prehistory
Studies in
Semitic Languages
and Linguistics
Editorial Board
volume 105
By
Alexander Borg
LEIDEN | BOSTON
Detail from the Procession of the Aamu, from the north wall of the Tomb of Khnumhotep II
(BH 3, 19th century BCE) in Beni Hassan, Egypt. Public domain.
Typeface for the Latin, Greek, and Cyrillic scripts: “Brill”. See and download: brill.com/brill-typeface.
ISSN 0081-8461
ISBN 978-90-04-47212-9 (hardback)
ISBN 978-90-04-47213-6 (e-book)
Copyright 2021 by Alexander Borg. Published by Koninklijke Brill NV, Leiden, The Netherlands.
Koninklijke Brill NV incorporates the imprints Brill, Brill Nijhoff, Brill Hotei, Brill Sense, Brill Schöningh,
Brill Fink, Brill mentis, Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht, Böhlau Verlag and V&R Unipress.
Koninklijke Brill NV reserves the right to protect this publication against unauthorized use. Requests for
re-use and/or translations must be addressed to Koninklijke Brill NV via brill.com or copyright.com.
Acknowledgments vii
Abbreviations and Symbols viii
Introduction 1
1 Aim and Scope of the Glossary 1
2 Prehistory of Arabic 11
3 Diachronic Approaches to Arabic 18
4 Ancient Egyptian and Arabic 21
5 Linguistic Archaeology 22
6 From Etymology to History 25
7 Ancient Egypt and Western Arabia 31
8 A Paradigm Shift in Arabic Dialectology 34
9 From Ancient Egyptian to Old Arabic 37
10 Cognitive Approaches to the Lexicon 41
11 Summing Up 44
References 49
Ġ 243
F 250
Q 261
K 276
L 290
M 304
N 318
H 337
W 343
Y 363
Index 365
Acknowledgments
The conceptual framework at the basis of the present study linking the pre
history of Arabic to Ancient Egyptian was elaborated in the course of a stint of
comparative linguistic research conducted under the auspices of an Alexander
von Humboldt fellowship at the University of Leipzig in 2015, whose initial
results have been published in WZKM 109.
I here renew my thanks to the Humboldt Foundation for its continued gener-
ous support of my research into the history of the Arabic language, and to Prof.
Ekkehard Schulz at the Oriental Institute of the University of Leipzig for his
sponsorship of my research project. I am also indebted to Prof. Hans-Werner
Fischer-Elfert at this university’s Institute of Egyptology for his collegial sup-
port and for access to the institute library.
This work’s specific focus on the internal history of dialectal Arabic rests on
recognition of the latter’s pivotal function in the mammoth task of embarking
on a prehistory of this ancient and important world language. The present pio-
neering glossary is a modest initial step towards the attainment of that grand
design. My involvement in this research domain has long been animated by
the insights and encouragement I experienced in the course of my doctoral
studies at the Hebrew University of Jerusalem under the guidance of the late
Prof. Haim Blanc.
The comparatist engaged in research involving the Arabic vernaculars is
dependent on the quality and scope of the ethnolinguistic sources at his dis-
posal. Documentation of the Arabic Sprachraum has been tangibly enriched
in the course of the last few decades by the endeavours of field researchers
delving into native speech patterns across the Arab world. The present venture
owes its inspiration in no small measure to the industry of Dr. Peter Behnstedt,
whose original and stimulating documentation of the Yemenite lexicon, in
particular, has been frequently and profitably utilized throughout the present
research.
For inclusion of this volume into the present Brill monograph series I am
profoundly indebted to Prof. Aaron Rubin of Penn State University and his co-
editor Prof. Ahmad Al-Jallad of Ohio State University. Dr. Beata Sheyhatovitch
of Tel-Aviv University earned my profound thanks for her technical assistance
in the task of readying the final text. I also express my sincere gratitude to the
two anonymous readers of my MS for their encouraging constructive com-
ments and recommendations, and to the Brill linguists Elisa Perotti and Jorik
Groen, whose brisk and efficient handling of my monograph facilitated its
preparation for publication.
Abbreviations and Symbols
Sab Sabaean
Saf Safaitic
Soq Soqoṭrī
Sum Sumerian
Taym Taymanic
Tham Thamudic
Ugar Ugaritic
Urk. Urkunden
⟨…⟩
vn verbal noun
enclose orthographic representations
/…/ enclose phonological representations
[…] enclose phonetic representations
</> derives etymologically from/yields
{…} morphophonemic representations
~ cognate/dialectal variant
Bibliographical Abbreviations
AA American Anthropologist
AAE Arabian Archaeology and Epigraphy
AJSLL American Journal of Semitic Languages and Literatures
AO Aula Orientalis
ARA Annual Review of Anthropology
BDB A Hebrew and English Lexicon of the Old Testament
BO Bibliotheca Orientalis
BSL Bulletin de la Société linguistique de Paris
BSOAS Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies
CAD Chicago Akkadian Dictionary
CDA Concise Dictionary of Akkadian
CE Chronique d’Égypte
CO Culture and Organization
CSD Concise Syriac Dictionary
DAF Dictionnaire arabe-français
DLE Dictionary of Late Egyptian
DUL Dictionary of the Ugaritic Language
EALL Encyclopedia of Arabic Language and Linguistics
EB Economic Botany
EVO Egitto e Vicino Oriente
GBS Göttinger Beiträge zur Sprachwissenschaft
x Abbreviations and Symbols
∵
1 Aim and Scope of the Glossary
The present glossary of Ancient Egyptian and dialectal Arabic is, to my knowl-
edge, the first of its kind to appear in the discipline of comparative Afroasiatic
linguistics – its specific vantage point being the innovative diachronic stance
proposing a prehistoric Egyptian diaspora in the evolution of the Arabic
language – by way of accounting for the impressive hard core of lexical and
morpholexical strata shared by these two ancient Near Eastern idioms. The
salient mutual link between them proposed in this research is also something
of a novelty from an Egyptological standpoint, despite the latter discipline’s
well-established dependence on Arabic as a vital source of comparative lin-
guistic data.
The field of Egyptological linguistics has long been the pursuit of a rather
closed circle of scholars. Writing in the seventies of the preceding century, the
Egyptologist Hans J. Polotsky stated:
More recently, another scholar, also expressing an insider’s viewpoint, has con-
ceded that
over the last decades we have preferred to engage in a dialog among our-
selves rather than with the broader audience of comparative and general
linguists, and we have developed conceptual and terminological conven-
tions that often appear opaque if not downright incomprehensible to the
non-initiated. (Loprieno 1995: xii)
1 Human history viewed through the prism of symbiotic aspects of language and culture across
an ancient Near Eastern context involving Ancient Egypt appeals to a broad readership. The
following commentary has, consequently, been formulated in non-technical language with
the general reader in mind.
Introduction 3
The present work’s specific rationale and methodology should be fairly self-
evident to a linguistic observer: Ancient Egyptian and Arabic are the two best-
documented venerable idioms of the Afroasiatic macrofamily yielding the
language historian an ample database enriched, in the case of Arabic, with
a virtually unlimited corpus drawing on the living speech of some 300 mil-
lion speakers across the Near East and Africa. The present glossary adduces a
corpus of well over 800 shared lexemes drawing on the modern vernaculars to
exemplify the etymological links of this Semitic language to Ancient Egyptian
clarifying the early prehistory of Arabic as it emerges from its often subtle sym-
biotic interaction with the Ancient Egyptian word stock at different attested
stages of this language, helping to extrapolate tell-tale traces of polygenesis
and convergence, rather than merely generating a rigid taxonomic algorithm.
Recent maverick research yielding the first comprehensive comparative survey
of the Semitic word stock has been conducted in Kogan (2015) within a lexico-
static framework, though again aiming at a genealogical classification of this
language family.
The broad range of etymological correlates between Ancient Egyptian and
spoken Arabic mustered for this glossary in effect renders possible a tenta-
tive exposition of the sound correspondences between these two idioms,
possibly clarifying internal aspects of Ancient Egyptian historical phonology
expounded in previous work, such as Rössler (1971), Osing (1980), Peust (1999),
Satzinger (2002), Kammerzell (1998, 2005), and Allen (2020).
The theoretical concern here with lexical as opposed to morphological
aspects of the phylogenetic relationship between Ancient Egyptian and Arabic
finds a close methodological precedent in Vergote (1975: 171):
Implied in this statement forefronting the role of the lexicon is the notion that
the structural typology of affiliations among language congeners (especially
along a longue durée trajectory) can range from a conspicuous to a remote
4 Introduction
A special case that has gained some attention in recent years is what may
be called split transmission: the non-genetic formation of a mixed lan-
guage by deriving particular subsystems from one language, while others
are supplied from a different source.
Taken at face value, the historical reality emerging from my afore-cited explor-
atory endeavour contrasts strikingly with the conventional narrative of Arab
cultural and linguistic development as chronicled in canonical documentary
sources with their customary focus on the later period of Near Eastern history.
Lewis (1995: 24), for example, states:
As will become clear in the course of this introduction, Yemen here turns
out to be quite central to the prehistory of spoken Arabic since salient lexical
continuities linking the Old Egyptian word stock from the early Dynastic or
pre-Dynastic period to modern Yemeni Arabic can be extensively documented
(cf. §7).3 The methodological issues entailed in this comparative framework –
reconstructing the past from the present – will be addressed below.
Analytical focus on the set of pandialectal structural traits adduced above
proffers concrete evidence of an organic grammatical nature, beyond merely
random lexical correspondences, arguing for the early scenario of close con-
tact between Middle Egyptian and Arabic proposed here. In effect, this evokes
a prehistoric encounter logically presupposing the abiding presence of an
Arabic-speaking community on Egyptian soil throughout the entire historical
period evoked by the lexical correspondences recorded in this glossary, includ-
ing lemmata mustered on the basis of Old, Middle, and Late Egyptian lexico-
graphic sources. From the vantage point of lexical history, it also yields what
is, in effect, the oldest epigraphic evidence predating so-called ‘neo-Arabic’
usage.4 Thus the present study sets out to provide linguistic research with the
raw data for revising the canonical narrative of Arabic language history.
The formal impact on Ancient Egyptian of the proposed case of linguistic
interaction is a separate though closely related topic outside the immediate
scope of this research, pertaining to the complex of regional and cultural net-
works undergirding the lexical strata of Ancient Egyptian – extending from the
Arabian Peninsula, across the Levant to Nubia and the Horn of Africa.
As will be argued below, the diachronic scenario emerging from the data-
base provided here logically invites further in-depth comparative study of
selected shared lexemes, delving beyond the purely etymological and dialec-
tal correlations addressed in the main body of this work. Intended here is the
deployment of a cognitive approach to the linguistic archaeology of Arabic
venturing upon a species of evolutionary cybernetics ideally fusing linguis-
tic insights with intuitions drawing on anthropology, ethnography, and Near
Eastern archaeology with the aim of anchoring the linguistic record within a
realistic historical context. As noted in Gray et al. (2011: 1090),
3 The diachronic distinctiveness of Old Egyptian as both a dialect and a historical stage of the
language is highlighted in Allen (2015: 1); hence the significance of its overlaps with region-
ally defined Arabic vernaculars.
4 In this connection, see Larcher (2010).
Introduction 7
This research has been undertaken in the hope that the overlapping reso-
nances evoked by this cross-linguistic lexicographical project will lure special-
ists from these two pivotal branches of the Afroasiatic phylum to engage in
creative interdisciplinary dialogue aimed at unravelling the complex strands
of linguistic history bridging the evolutionary links of Old Arabic to Ancient
Egyptian.
The need for the brand of linguistic discourse exemplified in this compara-
tive glossary is best vindicated by recognition of the fact that Arabic has long
confronted diachronically oriented scholarship with the anomaly evoked in
the following apothegm:
Despite the fact that Arabic is the best known of the classical Semitic
languages, and in the present state of things is likely to remain so, there
persist nevertheless many problems connected with its long and compli-
cated history that still await solution, and in some cases even recognition.
(Hopkins 1984: xxxvii)
One of the most glaring diachronic problems relates to its arcane prehistory.
The extensive reliance throughout this data-driven study on Arabic lexical
strata amassed from the Arabic vernaculars may convey an impression that
the Arabic language is here deemed to be the main Semitic idiom to have inter-
acted with Ancient Egyptian. Calice (1931: 36) has attributed the salience of
Arabic Sprachgut in comparative studies of Ancient Egyptian to the easy avail-
ability of sources for this language:
given the expanse of the Arabic dialect continuum, the spatial dimension
here itself licenses not merely a reconstruction but, more accurately, a
recovery of the past from the present on the robust basis provided by the
rich dialectal Arabic database at one’s disposal and its heterogeneity – in
effect, ranging from the parlance of nomadic, rural, and urban speakers
to past and present isolated and culturally diversified pockets of Arabic
speech surviving along the periphery of the Arab world in Spain, Sicily,
Malta, Cyprus, Iran, Central Asia and Central Africa whose lexical heri-
tage often yields unique historical insights. (Borg 2019a: 43)
Die Mehrzahl der Araber ausserhalb Arabiens wich damals von diesem
Muster schon stark ab und sprach namentlich nicht mehr die zur Kasus-
und Modusbezeichnung dienenden vokalischen Endungen.
Introduction 9
Incidentally, the affinities to the sublime conjured by the popular Muslim per-
ception of classical Arabic as a scriptural code finds a close cultural parallel in
Ancient Egypt where, for instance, the god Ptah, creator of the world, is por-
trayed as having been
well pleased after he had created all things and all hieroglyphs. (Assmann
2007: 27)
The upshot of the present sally into the arcane prehistory or, more accurately,
linguistic archaeology of the Arabic language, is that the task of implementing
a genuine probe into the pre-Islamic diachronic stages of this major world lan-
guage should ideally deploy an alternative methodology to the conventional
reliance, primarily on its early literary manifestations. The task of confronting
5 An analogous situation obtained in the early study of the Indo-Germanic languages. Wang
(1979: 353) states, in this respect: “Before (William) Jones, discussions on language history
were mostly mired in philosophical and theological speculations.”
10 Introduction
the highly diversified dialectal Arabic continuum across much of the Near East
and North Africa ideally calls for the conceptualization of dialects as “impli-
cational constellations rather than as entities bounded by isoglossic bundles”
(C.-J. Bailey 1980).
A salient outcome of the scientifically obsolete thought climate in conven-
tional research on Arabic has, in fact, been a degree of aloofness on the part of
Arabic specialists towards the mainstream language sciences, manifested par-
ticularly in their marginalization of the structure and historical significance of
the spoken language as retained in the modern Arabic vernaculars.6 Typically,
a great deal of analytical work undertaken on individual varieties of colloquial
Arabic does not envision any purpose beyond description7 – in effect, passively
endorsing a historicist vacuum while ignoring the primacy of spoken over writ-
ten language as an object of linguistic analysis in empirical diachronic research.
In the words of the Indo-Europeanists Osthoff & Brugmann (1878: iii–iv),
man denke dabei nicht an die Sprache auf dem Papier denn auf dem
Papier ist alles möglich.
6 For an exposition of the traditional narrative, see W. Fischer (1995). In Borg (2019a: §13), I also
raise the issue of a possible typological impact of Afroasiatic on modern Egyptian Arabic.
7 The point at issue here is the question as to whether language structure can be adequately
described in purely synchronic terms (cf. C.-J. Bailey 1992: 208).
8 For further detail on this shift, see §9 below.
Introduction 11
2 Prehistory of Arabic
Given the fact that Epigraphic South Arabian provides the most ancient doc-
umentation of South Semitic, the lexical evidence of Bronze Age linguistic
and cultural interaction between ancient Egypt and Arabia adduced in Borg
(2019a) and, more extensively, in the present glossary, insinuates the presence
of Old Arabic within a realistic perception of the Arabian Peninsula’s prehis-
toric linguistic landscape evoked in Avanzini (2009: 215):
While focusing on the ancient Arabian linguistic and cultural landscape, the
breadth of such a debate ideally encompasses a regional dimension, ultimately
extending across the Red Sea to Sinai and the Egyptian mainland. In view of
the archaeologically established land and sea routes linking Ancient Egypt to
western Arabia (cf. Zarins 1989; Sperveslage 2016), the salient Yemenite lexi-
cal commonalities with Old and later Egyptian emerging from this research
(see data in §7 below) yield concrete new testimony shedding fresh light on
the actual horizons of this ancient Near Eastern cultural and geolinguistic
continuum.9
An overriding theoretical concern in this work (here evoked by the
Bergsonian premise cited at the head of this introduction) has been that of
endorsing throughout this pioneering endeavour a dynamic and open-ended
evolutionary cycle in relation to the diachrony of Arabic, compatible with the
longue durée approach adopted here reaching as far back as Old Egyptian.
Linstead & Mullarkey (2003: 3) portray Henri Bergson (1859–1941) as a “philos-
opher of time” but also as “a philosopher of creativity, invention, or intuition”;
hence his theoretically impelling relevance to a study of linguistic evolution
conceptualized as a constructive and dynamic cultural process in preference
to a reductive Darwinian fortuity:
9 Cognate terms from the Old Egyptian ship-building jargon (cf. §10 below) may pertain to be
a maritime lingua franca isogloss, significantly, retained across the Arabic dialect area (see
glossary, under d-f-f ). Seidlmayer (2007: 52–59) has shown that from the earliest stages of
Ancient Egyptian history, Arabia supplied the dynastic rulers with exports of certain com-
modities. Serpico & White (2000) address the incense trade during the New Kingdom sug-
gesting links to Arabia.
12 Introduction
Culture arises as much from the shared interaction and practice of bodies
as from the shared symbols of minds. Embedded in durée, or experienced
duration, it must be constantly in process and change, affected by and
in a movement of tension and relaxation with and between individuals,
and characterized by the working out of creative evolution, or cultural
innovation, within the wider unfolding of time. (op. cit., p. 4)
This study of the prehistory of Arabic sets out, accordingly, to address language
as lived cultural experience across place and time;10 consequently, in prefer-
ence to the overly simplistic conventional narrative dictated essentially by the
formal split between written and spoken codes of the Arabic language – a fac-
tor that has oddly dominated and slanted past analytic and historical discourse
(e.g., in Fück 1950) – the principal concern of this research has been to fore-
ground its spoken dialects in place of a temporally ‘immutable’ and idealized
literary code (the classical language). Literary Arabic has been designated in
Larcher (2010) as a ‘construct’ – in reality, the outcome of a language stan-
dardization process generated by the descriptive and prescriptive linguistic
endeavours of the medieval Arab grammarians. Wolfdietrich Fischer (2006:
397) states in this regard:
Incidentally, the artificiality of the parallel divide assumed in the realm of gen-
eral Arab history has been insightfully exposed in Simonsen (2000: 241), who
argues that
the idea of dividing the history of the Arabian Peninsula into a pre-
Islamic period to be followed by an Islamic one seriously violates our
understanding of the social dynamics shaping both pre-Islamic and post-
Islamic Arab history.
The present work’s preoccupation with diachronic aspects of the Arabic lexi-
con inevitably highlights the ethnocultural dimension across time and place
enacted by its speakers, such that its proposed contact with Ancient Egyptian
and the emerging semantic continuum cumulatively documented in the
10 On the theory and practice of portraying lived language histories, see §6 below.
Introduction 13
Arabic dialectal lexicon can be said to map out the historical process of creat-
ing meaning and associated behavioral patterns11 under the assumption
11 This cultural stance evokes a humanistic aspect of mankind roughly analogous to that
visualized in A. Quételet’s contention: “L’homme que je considère ici est, dans la société
l’analogue du centre de gravité dans les corps; il est la moyenne autour de laquelle oscil-
lent les éléments sociaux” (1835: 21).
14 Introduction
One of the most recent developments in linguistics has been the devel-
opment of a concept of the linguistic area and the detailed study of the
distribution of linguistic forms in space. Linguistic area refers here not to
the distribution in space of a single language, but of related features in a
larger group of languages.
it is quite normal … for one tribe to have sedentary and bedouin sections
living in a symbiotic relationship and for both to use exactly the same
dialect (the Omani Durūʿ are an example). (Holes 2018: 21)
(i) ḫw/ḫwi҆ (Pyr) ‘to protect, exclude oneself from quarrels; set aside, pre-
vent; avoid, safeguard’ (Faulkner 1962: 185) ~ Rwala xu ‘protector’; ax
‘the clan’s brother to whom it pays (yaxīh) an annual sum’; xūwa/xwa
‘tax paid by weaker tribes to a stronger one; tax for protection’; xāwi (n)
‘fellow traveller; a comrade who offers protection to a stranger’ (Musil
1928: 600, 280, 136, 59, 30, 440) ~ Baghdad xāwa ‘protection, protection
money’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 149) ~ Najd xuwwah ‘brotherhood’
(Kurpershoek 1999: 366) ~ Palest xuwwah ‘Bruderschaft’ (Bauer 1957: 67);
(ii) ḫnm (Pyr) ‘to join, unite with’ (Faulkner 1962: 202) ~ Ar xālama ‘mit
Einem Freundschaft schließen’ (Wahrmund I 619);
(iii) zmꜣ (Pyr) ‘vereinigen, sich gesellen’ (Wb III 453) ~ Egypt zimīl, pl zumala/
zumalāt ‘colleague, comrade’ (Spiro 1895: 256);
(iv) smr (Pyr) ‘Freund (besonders des Königs als Titel oder Rangstufe)
Bekannter’; ‘friend (of king), a court title’: smr tpy ‘First Friend’; śmr.t (OK)
‘Freundin’; ‘companion’; smꜣ ‘unite’; smꜣy ‘companion, confederate’; smꜣyt
‘royal consort’ (Wb IV 138, 139; Faulkner 1962: 225, 226, 229; DLE II 43)
~ Dem smꜣ ‘vereinigen’ (DG 431) ~ Ar sāmir, pl summār ‘companion in
nightly entertainment’ (Lane 1436); mismar, pl masāmir ‘night party’
(Piamenta 1990: 232);
(v) ḫbr (LE) ‘contact, business partner, associate’ (DLE I 354) ~ Dem ḫbr/ẖbr
‘Genosse, Freund’ (DG 354, 379) ~ Yemen ⟨xubrah⟩ ‘compagnie, associa-
tion’ (GD 549).
16 Introduction
Interestingly, the first four lexemes hark back to Old Egyptian being attested
in the linguistic usage of the sixth Dynasty (i.e., c. 2352–2107 BC). This semanti-
cally and cross-culturally significant lexification pattern encoding social rela-
tionships whose Arabic lexemes are commonly associated with male members
of agnatic tribal societies, argues suggestively for a prehistoric scenario of close
existential contact between Ancient Egyptian speakers and Arabic-speaking
pastoral nomads.14
The main body of this glossary records inter alia a lexical muster exceed-
ing three hundred Old Egyptian lexemes with their Arabic counterparts,
comprising in all well over a third of the lemmata included in this work. The
mutual proximity of Old Arabic and Old Egyptian emerging from this work
should lay to rest, once and for all, a perception rife among certain Semitists
and Egyptologists categorically writing off Arabic as a primary comparative
source in lexical research relating to these idioms. Completely ignoring spo-
ken Arabic, the Egyptologist, W.A. Ward (1928–1996), a fervent exponent of this
standpoint, has stated:
14 For further detail on Arab nomadism, see sources surveyed in Kressel (1992).
Introduction 17
ṯnf.t (LE) [< *čnf.t] ‘bag’ (Faulkner 1962: 306; Wb V 308) ~ Najd kinf, pl
knifeh ‘Säckchen’ (Hess 1938: 119) || ṯꜣm (BD) [< *črm] ‘veil (v.): veil the
face = show indulgence (n to)’ (Faulkner 1962: 303) ~ Aleppo karīm, pl
krām ‘généreux’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 714) || kṯm (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘divi-
nation, omen’ (Hoch 1994: 339) ~ Yemen magsūm ‘destino’ (Rossi 1939:
204) < qsm || ṯnf ‘tanzen’ (Wb V 380) ~ Bahrain zafan dance’ (Holes 2001:
222) || ṯkr (20th Dyn.) ‘remember (verb in anthroponym)’ (Hoch 1994:
372) ~ Ar ðakara ‘to remember’ (Hava 1982: 229).
15 Power (2011, 2012) has documented the presence of semi-sedentary Arab settlers wander-
ing in Sinai, the Eastern Delta, and the northern reaches of the Eastern Desert from the
Bronze Age to the Roman period.
18 Introduction
La storia della lingua e strettamente ligata alla storia degli uomini che la
parlano: perciò converrebbe rimontare a tempi assai rimoti ed oscuri, se
ritrovar volessimo l’origine della nostra lingua. (Vassalli 1796: ix)
this respect, Owens (2013: 451–471) visualizes such research as a timely asser-
tion of this discipline’s importance beyond the conventional sphere of com-
parative Semitics:
Taken to its logical conclusion, this viewpoint assigns to literary and ver-
nacular strands of Arabic virtually distinct phylogenetic trajectories; hence the
primary goal of the present glossary is to garner a new comparative database
for the paramount but onerous task of reclaiming the ‘missing millennia’ in the
prehistory of Arabic – amplifying the canonical record presented in standard
works purporting to address, directly or indirectly, diachronic aspects of this
pivotal branch of Afroasiatic.16
As already noted in §1, the Arabic language has been extensively consulted
in research on Ancient Egyptian (cf. Ember 1930, Calice 1936, Hoch 1994,
and especially Takács 1999, 2001, 2007), echoing and elaborating on estab-
lished methodology. The notion of a close phylogenetic link between Ancient
Egyptian and Arabic advanced in this study is, in fact, firmly anchored within
the ambit of a long-standing and still ongoing research paradigm probing the
nature and extent of Semitic strata in the former language. The Semitic links of
Ancient Egyptian were recognized in the earliest descriptive accounts of this
language. Benfey (1844) and Brugsch (1867) paved the way for Adolf Erman’s
classic paper of 1892 assessing the state of the art in this research domain of
Egyptology in his time.17 Subsequent study, particularly in the lexicographic
sphere, undertaken by Adolf Erman and Hermann Grapow of the Berlin
School, and by Ernest Wallis Budge in the United Kingdom, injected renewed
interest in this research domain, notably exemplified inter alia in Ember (1930)
and Calice (1936), often drawing on earlier comparative work by scholars such
as William F. Albright (1891–1971) whose etymological insights drawing specifi-
cally on Arabic are often reflected in these reference works and in the present
glossary. The Arabic language scholar probing the prehistory of this language is
both tantalized by the wealth of comparative data to hand and spurred on by
two caveats voiced in Hoch’s authoritative study (1994: 482, 479):
16 The hypothesis attributing distinct trajectories to classical and vernacular Arabic has been
studiously deliberated in Al-Jallad (2009: 518). The evidence adduced in Borg (2019a) and
throughout this glossary should suffice to establish as historical fact the stance that cer-
tain strata of dialectal Arabic (such as non-classical interrogative particles) long preceded
the emergence of literary Arabic.
17 Erman, A. 1892. Das Verhältnis des Ägyptischen zu den semitischen Sprachen, ZDMG 46:
93–129.
22 Introduction
Lexical isoglosses are fairly difficult to establish given our uneven know-
ledge of the various languages and dialects.
and
Only rarely do the Egyptian texts provide information on the specific ori-
gin of Semitic words. The general Canaanite features of the bulk of the
Semitic words has, of course, long been known. Trying to go beyond the
general is, however, a much more difficult task.
5 Linguistic Archaeology
Comparative data relating to Arabic cited in this work have been assembled
from lexicographic sources and general descriptive studies of a wide vari-
ety of vernaculars spoken along a continuum extending from Arabia across
Greater Syria and Egypt to North and Central Africa. The lexical corpus cited
also draws on peripheral regions outside the Arab world such as Al-Andalus,
Malta,18 S.E. Anatolia, and Cyprus.
Fortunately for this research, the aforementioned appearance of extensive
lexicographic works on the Arabic dialects in the course of the last decades
offers new possibilities for comparative lexical study on a more ambitious
scale than ever before. Above all, the word stock underpinning this research
sets the stage for a simultaneous engagement with etymological, areal, and
cultural aspects of linguistic archaeology, thereby providing new insights into
the phylogenetic profile of the Arabic language as a whole from an Ancient
Egyptian vantage point.
As noted in the previous section, a telling factor to emerge from the detailed
lexical displays adduced in the course of this introduction is the degree of
lexico-semantic convergence obtaining between Old Egyptian and modern
18 In the case of Maltese, I have often resorted to Vassalli (1796) on account of its intrinsic
historical interest in relation to lexical and semantic usage.
Introduction 23
19 This would seem to suggest that the factor of religious affiliation throughout the ancient
period of polytheism may correlated with linguistic boundaries.
24 Introduction
More recently, the virtual axial character of Yemeni vernaculars for a deep his-
tory of Arabic has been insightfully highlighted in Müller (2014: 89) stressing,
furthermore, their important diachronic links with Sabaean:
Words that have survived from Sabaean belong mainly to the semantic
fields of geographical features, agriculture, irrigation, architecture, build-
ing materials, culture history, and foodstuffs.
The present glossary records numerous lexical parallels linking both Arabian
idioms to Ancient Egyptian exemplified in this display:
g=ru₂=n (NK) ‘threshing-floor’ (Hoch 1994: 352) ~ Sab grnh ‘id.’ (Biella
1982: 77) || dq.w/dq (Med) ‘flour, powder’ (Faulkner 1962: 316) ~ Sab dqqm
‘flour’ (Biella 1982: 85) ~ Yemen daqq ‘trebbiare il grano’ (Rossi 1939: 293)
|| drp/dꜣp (Pyr) ‘to feed s.o.’ (Faulkner 1962: 315) ~ Sab rfd ‘support, help’
(Biella 1982: 493) ~ Daθīna rifdah ‘secours, aide’ (GD 1333) || rḫj.t (Pyr)
‘subjects of king, common folk, mankind’; ‘Untertanen, Volk’ (Faulkner
1962: 152; Wb I 447; Brockelmann 1932: 109) ~ Sab rʿt ‘flock, herd’; rʿy ‘shep-
herd, herdsman’ (Biella 1982: 491) || ʿryt (NK) ‘dwelling, home’ (Faulkner
1962: 45)20 ~ Sab ʿrrtm ‘ummauerte mit Befestigungen’ (Avanzini 1980:
107) ~ Yemen ʿalāli ‘rooms in a house’ (Piamenta 1991: 339).
The ancient lexical correspondences with Safaitic are arguably also relevant
here since the original homeland of its speakers is assumed to have been in
Yemen (Peters 1978; Stein 1940: 95):
ḥb (MK) ‘to grieve, mourn’; ‘trauern’ (Ember 1930: 78; Faulkner 1962: 167;
Wb III 61; Hannig 1995: 522) || Saf ḥwb/ḥyb ‘to lament’ (Al-Jallad 2015: 323)
~ Yemen ḥawb ‘urging cry’ (Piamenta 1990: 112) || dꜣf ‘eine unbekömmli-
che Speise’ (Sethe 1962: 182); dꜣf ‘etwas verbrennen, erhitzen, kochen, ver-
branntes Fleisch’ (Hannig 1999: 994–995) ~ Saf ðfr ‘stench, stink’ (Winnett
& Lankester Harding 1978: 636) || ḫbꜣ ‘destroy, lay waste’ (Faulkner 1962:
187) ~ Saf ḫbl ‘mess up, damage’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 634).
20 Cf. Heb ֵמ ֲע ִליו ָׂתיוmēʿ ălyōtāw ‘from his upper chambers’ (Psalm CIV 13).
Introduction 25
Both literary and colloquial Arabic lexical sources have been routinely con-
sulted throughout this study – with a distinct methodological focus on the
latter. Whereas many Arabic lexemes can be shown to occur in literary and
spoken usage, the latter source often retains lexical strata, apparently not
recorded in written usage, displaying strikingly close cognacy with Ancient
Egyptian terms. Thus the register cline between vernacular and literary usage
is largely irrelevant to the lexical prehistory of Arabic.
Noting a limitation of standard archaeology, Kandler & Crema (2019: 83)
state:
Conversely, the rich, often dateable, language corpora to hand for ancient and
modern offshoots of Afroasiatic render feasible areally extensive, in-depth
assessment of formally and culturally significant interstitial clues clarifying
cross-linguistic regional dynamics, such as the internal stratification and rela-
tive chronology enacted by individual idioms within this highly multifaceted
and ethnolinguistically prolific phylum.
The interactive profile of Old Arabic with its Near Eastern ecology remains,
however, to this day, an obscure chapter of its diasporic prehistory that has
yet to be seriously tackled with appropriate research tools calculated to high-
light this ancient idiom’s formal, lexical, grammatical, and cognitive overlaps
(inevitably interspersed with elements of entropy) specifically with its oldest
Afroasiatic congener – Ancient Egyptian.
Braced with this suggestive empirical agenda, the lexical focus of the present
research yields the historian an evocative record conjuring discourse functions
Introduction 27
and cultural categories shared by Ancient Egyptian and the Arabic vernacu-
lars, thereby enriching the archaeological linguistic record while endorsing the
empirical legitimacy of the bottom up methodological strategy.
The diachronist’s basic methodological tool is etymology, which the noted
philologist Walter W. Skeat (1912) designated ‘a science.’ Etymology ordinarily
entails collation of phonological forms and pertinent meaning patterns shared
by genetically related idioms or geographically interrelated languages. Much
comparative lexical research commonly confines itself to cognate word sets
sharing the most salient formal phonological and semantic traits – in essence,
excluding from consideration potential cognates of a lexeme reflecting chrono-
logically more remote evolutionary stages. As noted in Borg (2019a, §§4.1–4.3),
the Ancient Egyptian word stock furnishes the Arabist numerous opportuni-
ties to elaborate etymological hypotheses and to progress from mere linguistic
‘book-keeping’ to creative analytical insights into dynamic sound shifts affect-
ing cross-linguistic word sets.
Given its complex structural links across the Afroasiatic phylum and beyond,
the historical phonology of Ancient Egyptian is in many respects still unclear
despite numerous analytic studies undertaken in the course of the last century.
Hence the utility of etymological research exploring links with Arabic which is
known to have retained an archaic phonological typology.
Observe, by way of example, the phonological correspondences of the
Ancient Egyptian grapheme ⟨ꜣ⟩ in lexical strata shared with Arabic. As can be
deduced from the following display, these comprise not only Arabic /r/ and /l/,
as is often supposed, but also /y/, instantiated as final segment of a triliteral
root morpheme:
nḏꜣ ‘parch with thirst’ (Faulkner 1962: 144) ~ Ar naǧara ‘von heftigem
Durst ergriffen werden’ (Wahrmund II 986) || ḫbꜣ ‘destroy, lay waste, rav-
age’ (Faulkner 1962: 187) ~ Ar xabāl ‘ruin’ (Wahrmund I 572; Hava 1982:
157) || Middle Egyptian wḫꜣ ‘empty out, shake out’; ‘ausleeren’ (Faulkner
1962: 67; Wb I 353) ~ Ar xawiya ‘être vide’ (DAF I 651–2).
Root-final /y/ in the last lexeme cited here actually also materializes in the surf-
face phonology of the Coptic cognate ϣⲟⲩⲉⲓⲧ ‘to empty’ (Crum 1939: 602b)
continuing Old Egyptian šwꜣ ‘poor’ ~ šw ‘be empty, lacking; needy man’; ‘leer
sein, leer machen’ (Ember 1930: 42; Albright 1918: 248; Faulkner 1962: 263; Wb
IV 426, 428). At all events, the data adduced here call into question the blanket
statement in Takács (2005: 89) to the effect that Egyptian ⟨ꜣ⟩ and Ar /y/ “do not
correspond at all.” Middle Egyptian here interestingly retains the diachronically
28 Introduction
older lexeme wḫꜣ (= *xwy) ‘empty out, shake out’; ‘ausleeren’ (Faulkner 1962: 67;
Wb I 353), representing the phonologically closer cognate of Arabic xawiya.
Incidentally, the semantic range of the Ancient Egyptian lexeme is also striki-
ingly retained across the Arabic dialect area:
Old Egyptian šwꜣ ‘poor’ ~ Rwala ayyām al-xawaʾ ‘years of want’ (Musil
1928: 16) ~ Egypt xawyān ‘hungry’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 270) ~ Algeria
xayy ‘faim’ (Lentin 1959: 77) ~ Djidjelli xwa ‘fait d’avoir faim’ (Ph. Marçais
1956: 222).
wḏꜣ ‘heil sein’ (Wb I 399) ~ Aleppo wað̣ ð̣a (< wð̣ y < wḍʾ) ‘purifier’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 899) || ḏfꜣ ‘reinigen’ (Wb V 571) ~ Egypt ṣāfi ‘clear,
pure’ (Spiro 1895: 341) || ʿḏꜣ ‘Unrecht’ (Wb I 241) ~ Palmyra ʿēṣi ‘qui a mau-
vais caractère’ (Cantineau 1934 II 9).
Old Egyptian – drp (Pyr) ‘offer to god’ (Faulkner 1962: 315) ~ Najd
rafdeh, pl rufāyid ‘Geschenke an Kleinvieh’ (Hess 1938: 101) || ḏʿ (OK)
‘storm, storm-wind’ (Faulkner 1962: 320) ~ Sinai ʿaǧǧih ‘dustcloud’
(Stewart 1990: 197) || śmn (Pyr) ‘Nile goose’; ‘Art Gans’ (Faulkner 1962: 228)
~ Rwala sammūne ‘a small dark-gray bird’ (Musil 1928: 40) || ḥyt/ḥwyt/
ḥw.t (Pyr) ‘der Regen, Sturm und Regen’ (Wb III 49; Hannig 1995: 515)
~ Rwala ḥaya ‘a copious rain’ (Musil 1928: 542) || ḏd (Pyr) ‘say, speak, recite’
(Faulkner 1962: 325; Wb V 622) ~ Najd ṣida ‘voice, cry’ (Kurpershoek 1999:
404) || thj (Pyr) ‘abweichen vom Wege’ (Wb V 319) ~ Rwala tāh, itīh ‘lose
one’s way, to stray’ (Musil 1928: 318) || ḏꜣj (Pyr) ‘sich widersetzen’; ḏꜣyw
‘opponent’ (Wb V 514; Faulkner 1962: 318) ~ Najd ṣāleh ‘Feind’ (Hess 1938:
100) || ḥfn (OK) ‘great quantity’; ‘Hunderttausende (= Unzählige)’ (Ember
Introduction 29
1917: 87; 1930: 53; Faulkner 1962: 192, 168; Wb III 74) ~ Najd ḥāfil, pl ḥiffal
‘flowing copiously, abounding with, overflowing with’ (Kurpershoek
1999: 354) || ʿnḫ.t (OK) ‘Ziege (oder allgemeines Wort fur Kleinvieh)’;
‘goat, small livestock’ (Wb I 205; Faulkner 1962: 44) ~ Marazig ʿanāg,
pl ʿanāyeg ‘chèvrette toute jeune’ (Boris 1958: 421) || ḏbn (OK) ‘Art
Antilope’ (Wb V 568); ḏbnw ‘Kuh-antilope’ (Hannig 1995: 1005) ~ Rwala
beden ‘ibex’ (Musil 1928: 25) [< badan] ~ Ḥesbān badan, pl bdūn ‘ibex’
(Palva 1978: 88);
Middle Egyptian – nwy (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘to return to (r) a place’
(Faulkner 1962: 127) ~ Sinai nāwā ‘to return to one’s home (camel)’
(C. Bailey 1991: 454) || mi҆w ‘cat’ (Faulkner 1962: 104) ~ Copt ⲉⲙⲟⲟⲩⲉ
‘cat’ (Crum 1939: 55b) ~ Yemen mawwē/mawwa, ymawwi ‘miagolare’
(Rossi 1939: 219) || swbn ‘overflow’ (Faulkner 1962: 68) ~ Rwala wabel ‘a
downpour for several days, inundating whole plains’ (Musil 1928: 11) ||
ḏdb ‘sting’ (Faulkner 1962: 323) ~ Najd ʿaṭab ‘Einem eine tiefe Wunde
schlagen’ (Socin 1901 III 292) || wšd ‘to question s.o.’ (Faulkner 1962: 71)
~ Najd našad ‘fragen’ (Socin 1901 III 314) || tkk/tktk (MK) ‘take by violence;
attack, assail’; ‘angreifen’; tkkw ‘attackers’ (Ember 1930: 112; Faulkner
1962: 302; DLE II 221; Wb V 331, 336) ~ Rwala katt ‘to rush upon, assault’
(Musil 1928: 598);
Late Egyptian – ṯnf.t [< *čnf.t] ‘bag’ (Faulkner 1962: 306) ~ Najd kinf, pl
knifeh ‘Säckchen aus Schafleder um Gewürz aufzubewahren’ (Hess 1938:
119) || ʿrq ‘to bind’ (DLE I 73) ~ Najd ʿagal ‘to tether’ (Sowayan 1992: 285)
|| bʿj ‘beachten, berücksichtigen’ (Wb I 446) ~ Rwala nabġī waṭanna ‘we
long for our country’ (Musil 1928: 219) || wbg ‘to light, shine (of the sun)’;
‘leuchten, scheinen (von der Sonne); erleuchten, hellen’ (Faulkner 1962:
82; Wb I 296; Hannig 1995: 189) ~ Najd nbāǧ ‘to become resplendent,
to appear in its lustre, to dawn’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 336) || bš ‘rapid (of
water)’; bši҆ ‘spit out’; bšw ‘spittle’ (Faulkner 1962: 84, 85) ~ Najd ⟨bašša⟩
‘ausströmen lassen (Schweiss)’ (Socin 1901 III 248).
21 In Borg (2014), for instance, I addressed historical and comparative aspects of colour cat-
egorization in certain varieties of Semitic.
22 Cf. also Holes (2018: 114f) focusing on the Gulf dialects. Bedouin vernaculars interestingly
also retain a striking Akkadian trait in the infinitive verbal scheme faʿāl as in Rwala raṣāṣ
‘inflammation of a camel’s hoof’ (Musil 1928: 369); Negev Arabic sadād ‘implementation
Introduction 31
This comment highlights – if only by inference – the glaring need for indepen-
dent, chronologically dateable sources of lexical and other types of language
data, and evaluation of their potential significance by the comparatist engaged
in diachronic study of Arabic. Rabin (loc. cit.) further notes that Yemen “is the
most clearly defined of all regions of Arabia” adding that we are “from the lexi-
cographical aspect, better informed about Yemenite than about any other dia-
lect”; hence its paramount import in the present comparative context.23
Though it remains to be seen to what extent the narrative relating to the
prehistory of Arabic can be attuned to the different periods of Ancient
Egyptian, the interest and incentive to pursue the present line of inquiry were
initially sparked off by the discovery that certain patterns of lexification and
phraseology in the modern parlance of Peninsular (e.g., Yemeni) speakers of
Arabic are anticipated in Old Egyptian, the language of the Pyramid Texts and
later lexical strata exemplified in this display:
of blood vengeance’; kafān ‘hunger’; cf. Akkadian ʾakālu(m) ‘to eat’; barāqu(m) ‘lighten,
shine, flash (eyes)’; ḫasāsu(m) ‘be conscious, remember’ (Black et al., 2000: 9, 38, 109).
23 The modern descriptive linguistic literature on this regional dialect complex is particu-
larly impressive, yielding for the present purpose, a rich source of lexical data: Landberg
(1910, 1920–40), Goitein (1934), Rossi (1939), Behnstedt (1984, 1985, 1987, 1993, 2006),
Piamenta (1990, 1991).
32 Introduction
‘district (?), estate (?)’; ḫrp ‘controller, administrator’ (Wb III 329; cf.
Faulkner 1962: 196) ~ Yemen mixlāf ‘province, region’ (Müller 2014: 91).
Yemen’s regional distinctiveness in the ancient Near East was ensured by its
association with the South-Arabian culture, rendering it “the most clearly
defined of all regions of Arabia” (Rabin 1951: 25). Visualized from a specifically
linguistic angle, Avanzini’s position on Yemen (1980: 2) echoes the basic insight
thematized in Rabin’s classic study spotlighting the pre-classical vernacular of
Western Arabia characterized
This probe into the prehistory of Arabic foregrounding the ancient presence
of this language in the Afroasiatic convergence area invalidates the histori-
cal model mediated by Charles A. Ferguson’s influential (1959) paper on the
Arabic koiné, whose central thesis rests on the following stance:
It has usually been assumed that the modern Arabic dialects are on the
whole lineal descendants of Classical Arabic or of a variety very similar
to this. (Ferguson 1959: 616)
This viewpoint has had the unfortunate outcome of belittling the intrinsic
value of historical approaches to the vernaculars by relegating their origins to
relatively late Arabic language strata.
A major paradigm shift, in this regard, was ushered in by the appear-
ance of Blanc (1964), exemplifying for the first time in Arabic language
research, an epistemic methodology combining an analytical approach to the
24 Note, in particular, the highly suggestive historical and cultural picture emerging from
research on the so-called Sabir culture in Vogt & Sedov (1989) relating to coastal Yemen
in the 2nd millennium BC, as well as evidence for prehistoric long distance trade contacts
along the Red Sea reviewed in (Zarins 1989).
Introduction 35
dialectal Arabic database and its historical and regional dimensions insight-
fully collated with data provided in the commentaries of the medieval Arab
grammarians.25 A salient outcome of Blanc’s pragmatic approach has been the
scholarly permutation of a purely descriptive linguistic agenda to a synoptic
discipline fusing the analytical dimension with regional Near Eastern history
focusing, in this case, on the Mesopotamian and Syrian continuum extending
to S.E. Anatolia – in effect, providing an interpretive framework for the descrip-
tive data culled in dialectal fieldwork in this entire region. Blanc’s research
showed how linguistic field data can become a vital informative tool in the
quest to reconstruct historical and demographic processes underpinning the
contemporary geolinguistic landscape stretching from the two rivers across
the deep hinterland of the Eastern Mediterranean littoral. As indicated in Borg
(1985: 150–159), this linguistic continuum extends to Cyprus.26
A further consequence of Blanc’s research is the realization that the Arab
grammarians’ perspective widely encompassed the norms of spoken Arabic
usage, ranging from mundane to rhetorical speech registers, entailing, at the
same time, recognition of their traditional character associated with regional
and/or ethnolinguistic (i.e., tribal) speaker affiliation. Following in Blanc’s
footsteps, Levin (1994) has, in detailed fashion, demonstrated that the ana-
lytical methodology undergirding Kitāb Sībawayhi (8th c.) is oriented towards
explicating the norms of spoken usage and is, accordingly, replete with refer-
ences to speech patterns illustrating normative or atypical usage observed, for
instance, in southern Iraq. Thus, though Sībawayhi’s ultimate objectives were
not diachronic, his descriptive analysis – for instance, as displayed in the pho-
nological sphere – insightfully elaborates schemas of cause and effect identify-
ing dynamic processes, such as specific sound shifts which often yield salient
historical developments in the Arabic vernaculars of his time and their mod-
ern offshoots.27
The synoptic perspective on the Arabic Sprachgebiet attained in Blanc
(1964) can be said to have actualized an objective envisioned in a more gen-
eral context in Bergsträßer’s aforecited seminal statement. Spurred on by the
A methodological problem that has often surfaced – and not only in the
study of Semitic words in Egyptian transcription – is the all too frequent
comparison to obscure lexical items especially in the Arabic dictionaries.
Arabic is a language with a rich lexical heritage, but it is often subject to
abuse. (Hoch 1994: 8)
A question sometimes confused with, but really quite distinct from that
of the origins of the Classical language is the role it played in the lin-
guistic set-up of pre-Islamic Arabia. Here there is substantial agreement
among European scholars that to most or all of those who employed it for
writing poetry, Classical Arabic was to some extent a foreign idiom which
had to be acquired. The situation among the ancient Bedouin was in this
respect just the same as among the Arabs of our own days, who compose
their poetry in archaic and extraneous dialects.
In point of fact, the Arabic dialect area yields the comparatist a virtually unlim-
ited source of historically crucial lexical data:
alia,’ extensive lexicographical data from the Middle Ages up to the pres-
ent time, rendering it by far the best attested and most accessible branch
of the Afroasiatic phylum. The evident utility of Arabic for etymologi-
cal research on Egyptian logically also implies recognition of their close
mutual relationship, the extent of which has yet to be determined and
accounted for. (Borg 2019a: 2)
The parallels between Arabic and Egyptian postulated throughout this study
provide an extensive database highlighting a new approach to the comparative
study of Arabic addressing its prehistoric stage. Given a situation where virtu-
ally unlimited lexical data are available, it becomes desirable and practicable
to work with word sets generated along the trajectory defined by a particular
lexeme (e.g., along a dialectal continuum) as opposed to an exclusive one-to-
one pairing of alleged etymological cognates.
As noted above, dialectal Arabic lexical and semantic patterns define the
focal element in the implementation of this work’s diachronic objectives,
since many Arabic roots shared with other Semitic languages can yield lexi-
fication patterns apparently shared uniquely with Egyptian, e.g., Semitic nwm
‘(to) sleep’ > Yemeni manāmah ‘bed’ is anticipated by Old Egyptian mnm.t.
‘id.’ Nevertheless, the task of pairing Arabic terms with respective Ancient
Egyptian cognates can sometimes be a complex process, since delving into the
phylogenetic prehistory of Arabic entails an engagement with a set of unclear
systemic variables (e.g., in phonological terms) allowing for different degrees of
certitude attainable in the realm of etymological matching; not least of which
is the unclarity surrounding the sound values of individual Ancient Egyptian
graphemes. Observe, for instance, the Arabic phonological correspondences
with Ancient Egyptian ⟨ḏ⟩ which range across the entire Old Arabic emphatic
consonant series, but also include reflexes of ǧīm:
ḏrʿ ‘to lay low’ (Hoch 1994: 343) ~ Ar ṣarraʿa ‘to fling down’ (Hava 1982:
394) || wḏb ‘Ufer’ (Wb I 409) ~ Ar ḍaffah ‘bank’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964:
18) || ḏfḏf ‘to drip’ (Faulkner 1962: 322) ~ Ar ṭafṭaf ‘to drip from the side of
a container’ (Masliyah 2017: 79) || sḏ ‘to break’ (Faulkner 1962: 257) ~ Ar
šað̣ iya ‘to be split (wood)’ (Hava 1982: 366) || ḏšr ‘Schiffsbau, Baum’ < *šḏr
~ Ar šaǧarah ‘tree, shrub’ (Hava 1982: 352).
38 Introduction
Lebanon žeft ‘résidu d’olives’ (M. Feghali 1928: 239, fn 2; Frayha 1973: 38)
~ Palest ǧift ‘Öltreber als Brennmaterial’ (Bauer 1957: 224) ~ Oman ǧift/
yift ‘(pearl) oil used to soften leather diving gloves (xubaṭ) at the begin-
ning of the diving season’ (Holes 2001: 88); ǧaft/yift ‘a mixture concocted
from alum and pomegranate peel, crushed into fine powder mixed with
sugared water’ (Agius 2005: 148).
The vernacular data cited here instantiate in phonological and semantic terms
unbroken continuity with an Ancient Egyptian and Semitic lexeme apparently
foreign to classical Arabic usage which here shows exclusively the Aramaic
loanword zift ‘moût d’olives qui reste dans le sac après le pressage’ (Denizeau
1960: 221).
The Arabic dialects retain an extensive lexical range of correspondences for
Arabic ǧīm correlating with Ancient Egyptian ⟨ḏ⟩:
nḏy ‘to save’ (Faulkner 1962: 143) ~ Aleppo naǧǧa ‘sauver’ (Barthélemy
1935–69: 817) || nḏr ‘chips of stone’ (Faulkner 1962: 144) ~ Yemen naǧar
‘scalpellare pietra tenera o legno’ (Rossi 1939: 235) ~ Malta naǧar ‘asciare
le pietre apparecchiandole per la fabbrica’ (Vassalli 1796: 530) || wḏnw
Introduction 39
‘flood’ (Faulkner 1962: 76) ~ Ar waǧīl ‘a pool of water’ (Hava 1982: 853)
|| wnḏw ‘associates’ (Faulkner 1962: 63) ~ Ar walīǧah ‘follower, partisan’
(Hava 1982: 892) || nḏꜣ ‘parch with thirst’ (Faulkner 1962: 144) ~ Ar naǧara
‘von heftigem Durst ergriffen werden’ (Wahrmund II 986) || ḏsr ‘to sup-
port, raise’ (Faulkner 1962: 324) ~ Iraq ǧisir, pl ǧsūra ‘beam’ (Clarity et al.,
1964: 16) || nbḏ ‘destructive’ (Faulkner 1962: 130) ~ N. Yemen labaǧ ‘stark
schlagen’ (Behnstedt 1987: 298) || ḏnḥ ‘wing’ (Faulkner 1962: 222) ~ Oman
ǧnāḥ ‘Flügel’ (Reinhardt 1894: 46) || ʿnḏ ‘unguent’ (Faulkner 1962: 45)
~ Mardin ʿəlāǧ ‘Medikament’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 286) || ʿḏʿḏ ‘jubeln’
~ Palest ǧaʿǧaʿa ‘Geräusch (Schreien)’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 11).
The diachronic significance of these comparative data is that they attest to the
palatalization of the Semitic voiced velar stop *g already in Ancient Egyptian,
yielding a striking unrecognized parallel with Arabic *ǧ, whose internal dia-
chrony in literary and vernacular usage has been addressed in Haim Blanc’s
landmark 1965 study on the so-called qāl-gāl split:
Arabic is the only Semitic language which has, since early times and in
nearly all dialects, exhibited a general fronting of Semitic g to [gy], [dy],
[ǧ], [ž] and the like. It is also the only Semitic language to exhibit, at least
in many dialects, a general voicing of q to [g]. The two phenomena are
not coextensive, but their unique co-occurrence in Arabic has led to
two independent attempts to establish a connection between them.
(Blanc 1965: 7)
The systemic consequences of this sound change and of the further shift of
*q > *g > *ǧ in Ancient Egyptian and several Arabic vernaculars spoken in the
Arabian Peninsula and beyond warrant further analysis of their precise impact
on the linguistic strata affected by these shifts; cf. Ar waraq ‘leaves, foliage’
> *wrǧ ~ ME wꜣḏ ‘papyrus plant, green’; cf. Iraqi ġamīg/ġamīǧ ‘deep’ (Clarity
et al.,1964: 51) ~ Ar ġamīq ‘deep’ (Hava 1982: 536).
Reviewing fronting phenomena addressed by the Arab grammarians, Rabin
(1951: 50) discusses the trait called šinšinnah in Suyūṭī’s Muzhir I 34 referring
to the specific shift k > š attributed to certain speakers of Yemeni Arabic. Rabin
here insightfully endeavours to contextualize the data furnished by medieval
sources within a broad regional continuum extending from southern Arabia
to Ethiopia.
The gist of the following remarks is that the phonological and gram-
matical features that Ancient Egyptian can be shown to share with Arabic
40 Introduction
vernaculars (both ancient and modern) may well exemplify salient systemic
traits pertaining to a regionally defined typological profile represented to
this day across the Arabian Peninsula in the speech patterns of Arabic and in
South Arabian.
Consequently, the patterns of segmental fronting exemplified in Ancient
Egyptian yielding, for instance, the Old Egyptian shift of ḫ > š (Allen 2015: 3),28
invite close comparison with parallels noted in Arabic and modern languages
of Southern Arabia. Interestingly, in this regard, Leslau’s descriptive sketch of
the consonant system of Soqoṭri (1938: 42) has identified a salient palatalizing
trend (mouillure) affecting specifically certain plosives and spirants:
A parallel trend has also been noted for another South Arabian congener,
Ḥarsūsi, where the segments č and ǧ in a lexical stratum shared with Arabic
continue Semitic *k and *g, respectively:
ačil ‘food’ < akl; čīs ‘pouch’ < kīs; čabdin ‘liver’ < kabd; yann ‘madness’ <
ǧann; deyāyeh ‘chicken’ < daǧāǧah; yayb ‘pocket’ < ǧayb; yēš ‘army’ < ǧayš;
ǧayb; yezīreh ‘island’ < ǧazīrah; fayr ‘dawn’ < faǧr (Johnstone 1977, s.v.).
The proclivity to palatalization affecting velar and back velar plosives in cer-
tain phonetic environments, e.g., before front vowels, was also addressed by
the medieval Arab grammarians in relation to a specific case of morphopho-
nemic fronting of *k occurring in the second person pronominal suffix {-ik}
(f). This Arabian dialectal trait was designated by the terms kaškaša and kas-
kasa referring to the respective shifts of the voiceless velar plosive kāf to š or
s (Rabin 1951: 21). There has been a tendency in diachronic work on Arabic to
address this trait in relative isolation on account of its grammatical associa-
tion. The present stance suggests that this phenomenon is ultimately a mani-
festation of a more general phonotactic trait shared cross-linguistically with
Ancient Egyptian. Note, for instance, the palatalization of OA kāf yielding [č]
in the N. Arabian vernacular of the Rwala Bedouin:
28 Cf. Cairene labbiš ‘to confuse’ (Spiro 1895: 216) < labbax, conceivably, reflecting Coptic
ⲁⲃⲏϣ ‘to mix’ (Crum 1939: 3a).
Introduction 41
Rwala čaff ‘hand’ < kaff; čelwa ‘kidney’ < kilwā (Musil 1928: 115, fn 7) ||
N. Yemen čahif- ‘Höhle’ (Behnstedt 1987: 191, 297) < kahf.
Significantly, the fronting rule affecting the velar stop in Ancient Egyptian
commonly occurs in lexemes with Arabic cognates:
ṯph.t [*čpht] (Pyr) ‘cavern’ (Faulkner 1962: 304) ~ Ar kahf ‘grotto, cav-
ern’ (Hava 1982: 668) || ṯs [*čs] (OK) ‘der Hals’ (Wb V 400); ṯst [*čst]
‘Wirbelknochen des Nackens, Rückens’ (Wb V 400) ~ Ar kusʾ ‘hinder part’
(Hava 1982: 653) || snṯ [*snč < skn] (MK) ‘to found house’ (Faulkner 1962:
234; Wb IV 178) ~ Ar sakan ‘dwelling’ (Hava 1982: 329) || ṯz [*čz] (Pyr)
‘to tie a knot’; ‘etwas knoten, knüpfen’ (Faulkner 1962: 307; Wb V 396)
~ Ar kazza ‘reunir sur un seul point’ (DAF II 943).
These data invite a systematic historical and comparative study of the pala-
talization trend across the peninsular languages from an Ancient Egyptian
perspective.
29 This study focused on the treatment of the green and blue colour categories in these lan-
guages against the background of ancient Semitic.
30 This metonymic usage in relation to the concept of ‘green’ has also commonly noted in
other languages (cf. Conklin 1955).
Introduction 43
dpt (Pyr) ‘Schiff zum Transport (auch grosses Schiff zum Transport
einer Obelisken); Fahrschiff im Jenseits’; dpt nṯr ‘sacred bark’; dpt
‘build, construct boats’;31 dpw (Pyr) ‘Steuerruder’; dpy ‘Ruderführer (im
Sonnenschiff), Schiff anfertigen’; iry dpt ‘keeper of the boat’ (Faulkner
1962: 312; Wb V 446, 447; Jones 1988: 66; Hannig 1995: 977).32
Whereas the Old Egyptian lexeme ḫwy (Borg 2019b) yielded an ethnographic
perspective reflecting shared mental representations of a sociocultural nature
in the scenario of cross-linguistic interaction, the Old Egyptian term dpt (Pyr)
‘ship’ and its numerous dialectal Arabic cognates reviewed in Borg (to appear)
suggestively evoke a prehistoric maritime relationship between early dynas-
tic Egypt and Arabia. Initially a Sumerian loanword in several branches of
Afroasiatic, this lexeme significantly appears to retain its Old Egyptian mari-
time semantics mainly in Hebrew, Syriac, Cushitic and, very extensively, in the
Arabic vernaculars:
The emerging picture yields a cohesive and areally suggestive word family
plausibly lexifying an isogloss of a maritime lingua franca evoking Ancient
Egyptian commercial traffic with ports along the Red Sea down to the Horn of
Africa and the adjacent coast of Arabia. The available lexical documentation
for this lexeme further endorses the intuition advanced in Borg (2019a, b) that
Ancient Egypt was, from the Bronze Age onwards, if not earlier, a strategic site
in the diasporic prehistory of the Arabic language.
Cultural continuities linking Ancient Egyptian specifically to modern
Egyptian Arabic reflect striking unsuspected cognitive parallels in their respec-
tive Weltbilder. In Borg (2019: 5), for instance, I suggested that the Old Egyptian
term sn for ‘brother’ in the former language is cognate with the homophone sn
31 This work (p. 23) postulates the construction of wooden boats (as opposed to papyrus
craft) by the end of the Predynastic period.
32 For further detail, see Jones (1988) and Esposito (2018).
44 Introduction
meaning ‘two’ (cf. Heb. ֵׁשנִ יšēnī ~ Ar. θānī). The underlying cognitive stance in
this lexification pattern confers on the neonate the status of ‘otherness,’ here
implying a sequence whereby the child is perceived as a sibling preceded by its
twin, the afterbirth. The background to this ancient popular stance is articu-
lated in Rice (2003: 109–10):
For the early Egyptians the placenta was evidently invested with excep-
tional power. The King’s placenta was carefully retained and protected
throughout his lifetime on the evidence of examples in the tombs of
lesser figures of the state…. The reason for the placenta’s exceptional sta-
tus is not difficult to find. Because of its uniquely intimate connection
with the living body of the god-king, protecting him from the moment of
conception, growing with him in the womb and, in a very real sense, giv-
ing him life, it was conceived as another emanation of the King himself.
The placenta was thus seen as a form of twin, the witness of the King’s
alter ego, which, at his birth, was born into the realm of the gods. As his
twin it coexisted eternally with the king and so the King himself was at
the instant of his birth, two indivisible entities.
The child’s sibling relationship to the afterbirth here proposed for Ancient
Egyptian interestingly shows up (albeit reversed) in a modern vernacular spo-
ken in Upper Egypt: il-walad ittāni ‘Nachgeburt’ (Behnstedt 1999: 270).
Systematic analytical study of lexico-semantic continuities obtaining across
a broad range of cultural categories would seem to furnish the comparatist
engaged in longue durée research relating to the early history of the Arabic lan-
guage a valuable alternative to a purely structural taxonomic approach.
11 Summing Up
This study set out to deploy an innovative approach to the early prehistory of
Arabic by presenting a concrete database calculated to throw fresh light on
its evolutionary trajectory. The sheer scope and complexity of the research
domain awaiting further inquiry precludes its being anything but an initial
step forward in what will hopefully become a well-trodden path leading to a
epistemic study of the phylogenetics of spoken Arabic.
The chief objective of the present glossary has been the task of proposing and
documenting the viewpoint that the earlier prehistory of the Arabic language
cannot be adequately clarified in isolation from an Afroasiatic context with
Introduction 45
when compared with the rich linguistic sources proffered by Ancient Egyptian
that have yet to be seriously studied, specifically, from an Arabic diachronic
perspective.
Adopting a longue durée perspective, this study has ventured into virtu-
ally untrodden territory of diachronic lexical research on Arabic against the
backcloth of a geolinguistic landscape extending across the ancient Near East.
Ultimately, as already suggested in Borg (2019a: 88–94), the ethnolinguis-
tic narrative adduced in this research presupposes ancient migratory trends
whose likely prime-mover was international trade entailing language contact
between Ancient Egyptian and Arabic, conceivably within the context of “a
transregional Arabian diaspora comprising brokers or labourers from the
resource-rich peninsula” (Borg 2019a: 89).
In relation to historical time, the structure of contemporary Egyptian Arabic
dialects has led Behnstedt & Woidich (2018: 64) to evoke the following nomadic
scenario:
The formation of the Egyptian Arabic (EA) dialect area several linguis-
tic layers and the immigration of several Arab tribes over the course of
history, but also the forced settlement of bedouin from one province to
another.
At present, the artefacts from the Arabian Peninsula provide insights into
the intercultural contacts between Egypt and Arabia. The inhabitants of
the oasis settlements dominated the trading networks as active parties.
Forming their own identities within the framework of these networks,
they developed a taste for prestigious objects of the nearby high cultures,
integrating foreign elements into new contexts. In this respect, Egyptian
influence seems to have been a prevalent factor – among the elites, and
probably also among people of lower social classes. (p. 330)
A salient socio-linguistic issue evoked by the Arabic data cited in this research
relates to the containment of Arabic speech communities in Ancient Egypt.
As already noted, it is an uncontested fact that both the character and content
of literary texts in Ancient Egypt were essentially and exclusively the creation
and cultural currency of a small social coterie whose literary concern was con-
formity to an elite ideal of refined speech; as noted in Goody (1986: 3), it was
ultimately a case of “writing concentrated in priestly hands.” Wilkinson (2001:
303) states in this regard:
Thus the historical significance for both Arabic specialists and Egyptologists
of the documentation provided throughout the present glossary relates to the
circumstance that it evokes the presence and integration into the social fabric
33 If this continuity of nomadic presence in Egypt can be certified, the incidence of Ancient
Egyptian typological features in modern Egyptian Arabic etched in Borg (2019a: 84–86)
may turn out to be genuinely ancient substratal traits.
48 Introduction
Beyer, Klaus. 1998. Die aramäischen Inschriften aus Assur, Hatra und dem übrigen
Ostmesopotamien. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.
Bezold, Carl. 1926. Babylonisch-Akkadisches Glossar. Heidelberg: Carl Winter.
Biella, Joan C. 1982. Dictionary of Old South Arabic. Harvard Semitic Studies: Scholars
Press.
Birkeland, Harris. 1952. Growth and Structure of the Egyptian Arabic Dialect. Oslo: Jacob
Dybwad.
Blanc, Haim. 1964. Communal Dialects in Baghdad. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University
Press.
Blanc, Haim. 1965. The fronting of Semitic G and the Qāl-Gāl split. PICSS. Jerusalem.
Israel Academy of Sciences and Humanities: 7–37.
Blanc, Haim. 1970. The Arabic Dialect of the Negev Bedouins. Proceedings of the
Academy of the Israel Academy of Sciences and Humanities IV/7: 112–150.
Blau, Joshua. 1955. Etymologische Untersuchungen auf Grund des palestinischen
Arabisch. VT V: 337–343.
Blau, Joshua. 1966–7. A Grammar of Christian Arabic, 3 vols. Louvain: Secrétariat du
Corpus SCO.
Blau, Joshua. 1969. Some problems of the formation of the Old Semitic languages in
the light of Arabic dialects. PICSS. Jerusalem: The Israel Academy of Sciences and
Humanities: 38–44.
Bloch, Ariel. 1989. Plurals of multiplication, plurals of division. JSAI 12: 118–134.
Bocthor, Ellious. 1864. Dictionnaire français-arabe (revu et augmenté par Caussin de
Perceval), 3rd edn. Paris.
Boivin, Nicole, R. Blench & D. Fuller. 2009. Archaeological, linguistic and historical
sources on ancient seafaring: a multidisciplinary approach to the study of early
maritime contact and exchange in the Arabian peninsula. In: Petraglia, M. &
J.I. Rose (eds.), The Evolution of Human Populations in Arabia. Netherlands: Springer
Academic Publishers.
Bordreuil, Pierre & Dennis Pardee. 2009. A Manual of Ugaritic. Winona Lake:
Eisenbrauns.
Borg, Alexander. 1985. Cypriot Arabic. Stuttgart: Franz Steiner.
Borg, Alexander. 1999. Linguistic and ethnographic observations on the color cate-
gories of the Negev Bedouin. In: Borg, A. (ed.), The Language of Color in the
Mediterranean. Stockholm: Almqvist & Wiksell International: 121–147.
Borg, Alexander. 2004. A Comparative Glossary of Cypriot Maronite Arabic. Leiden: Brill.
Borg, Alexander. 2006. Lexical Aramaisms in nomadic Arabic vernaculars. In:
Procházka, Stephan & Veronika Ritt-Benmimoun, Between the Atlantic and Indian
Oceans: Studies in Contemporary Arabic Dialects. Proceedings of the 7th AIDA
Conference, held in Vienna from 5–9 September 2006. LIT: 89–112.
54 References
Borg, Alexander. 2014. Towards a historical and cultural atlas of colour terms in the
Near East. In: Anderson, Wendy, Carole P. Biggam, Carole Hough & Christian Kay
(eds.), Colour Studies. A Broad Spectrum. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.
Borg, Alexander. 2019a. At the edge of Arabic language history: The vernaculars and the
Middle Egyptian connection. WZKM 109. Band: 39–111.
Borg, Alexander. 2019b. From etymology to diachrony: The semantics of ḫwy ‘to pro-
tect’ in Old Egyptian and Bedouin Arabic. LA 27: 1–16.
Borg, Alexander & Sasson Bar-Zvi (forthcoming). A Concise Glossary of Negev Arabic.
Borghouts, J.F. 1978. Ancient Egyptian Magical Texts. Leiden: Brill.
Boris, Gilbert. 1958. Lexique du parler arabe des Marazig. Paris: Klincksieck.
Bravmann, Max. 1977. Studies in Semitic Philology. Leiden: Brill.
Breasted, Henry James. 1909. Burckhardt’s Altkanaanäischen Fremdworte. AJSLL
XXV/4: 319.
Breasted, Henry James. 1918. The Development of Religion and Thought in Ancient Egypt.
New York: Harper.
Breasted, Henry James. 1930. The Edwin Smith Surgical Papyrus, vol. I. Chicago:
University Press.
Brockelmann, Carl. 1928. Lexicon Syriacum, editio secunda et emendata. Halle: Max
Niemeyer.
Brockelmann, Carl. 1932. Ägyptisch-semitische Etymologien. ZSVG VIII: 97–117.
Brockett, A.A. 1985. The Spoken Arabic of Khābūra on the Bāṭina of Oman. Manchester:
Journal of Semitic Studies Monograph.
Brose, Marc. 2014. Grammatik der dokumentarischen Texte des Mittleren Reiches. Lingua
Aegyptia Studia Monographica 13. Hamburg: Widmaier Verlag.
Brugsch, Heinrich Karl. 1867. Hieroglyphisch-demotisches Wörterbuch. Leipzig: Bruhl.
Brugsch, Heinrich Karl. 1877. Geschichte Ägyptens. Leipzig: J.C. Hinrichs.
Budge, Wallis Ernest Alfred. 1920. An Egyptian Hieroglyphic Dictionary, 2 vols. London:
John Murray.
Bybee, Joan. 2007. Diachronic Linguistics. In: Geeraerts, Dirk & Hubert Cuyckens,
Cognitive Linguistics. Oxford: OUP: 945–987.
CAD – 1958–2010. Chicago Akkadian Dictionary. Chicago. Oriental Institute. Glückstadt:
J.J. Augustin.
Calice, Franz. 1931. Über semitisch-ägyptische Sprachvergleichung. ZDMG 85: 25–37.
Calice, Franz. 1936. Grundlagen der ägyptisch-semitischen Wortvergleichung. Eine kri-
tische Diskussion des bisherigen Vergleichsmaterials, herausgegeben von Heinrich
Balcz. Wien: Beihefte zur „Wiener Zeitschrift für die Kunde des Morgenlandes.“
Caminos, Ricardo A. 1954. Late Egyptian Miscellanies. London: OUP.
Cantineau, Jean. 1934. Le dialecte arabe de Palmyre. Vocabulaire et textes (tome II):
Beyrouth: Memoires de l’Institut Français de Damas.
References 55
Coolidge, F.L., Th. Wynn, K.A. Overmann & J.M. Hicks. 2015. Cognitive archaeology and
the cognitive sciences. In: Bruner, E. (ed.), Human Paleoneurology, vol. 3: 177–208.
Berlin: Springer.
Corriente, Federico. 1988. El léxico árabo andalusí según P. de Alcalá. Madrid:
Universidad Complutense.
Corriente, Federico. 1989. El léxico árabo Andalusí según el “Vocabulista in Arabico.”
Madrid: Universidad Complutense.
Corriente, Federico. 1993. Léxico estándar y andalusí del Diwan de Ibn Quzman.
Zaragoza: Universidad de Zaragoza.
Corriente, Federico. 1997. A Dictionary of Andalusi Arabic. Leiden: Brill.
Corriente, Federico, Christophe Pereira, Ángeles Vicente. 2017. Dictionnaire du faisceau
dialectal arabe andalou. Berlin: De Gruyter.
Cowell, Mark W. 1964. A Reference Grammar of Syrian Arabic. Washington, D.C.:
Georgetown University Press.
Crum, William Ewing. 1939. A Coptic Dictionary. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
CSD – Payne-Smith, Jessica. 1903. A Compendious Syriac Dictionary founded upon the
Thesaurus Syriacus of R. Payne-Smith, D.D. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
Czapkiewicz, Andrzej. 1973. Ancient Egyptian and Coptic Elements in the Toponymy of
Contemporary Egypt. Cracow: Jagellonian University.
DAF – Kazimirski de Biberstein, Albert. 1860. Dictionnaire arabe – français. Paris:
Maisonneuve.
Dallet, J.M. 1985. Dictionnaire Kabyle–Français. Paris: SELAF.
Dalman, Gustaf. 1928–39. Arbeit und Sitte in Palästina, 7 vols. [reprint., 1964] Hildesheim:
Georg Olms.
Dalman, Gustaf. 1938. Aramäisches-Neuhebräisches Handwörterbuch zu Targum,
Talmud und Midrasch [reprint 1967]. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.
D’Alverny, André. 1964. Petite introduction au parler libanais. Second Fascicule:
Vocabulaire. Beyrouth: Imprimerie Catholique.
Day, John. 2013. The Recovery of the Ancient Hebrew Language: The Lexicographical
Writings of D. Winton Thomas. Sheffield: Phoenix Press.
Deines, Hildegard von & Wolfhart Westendorf. 1961. Wörterbuch der medizinischen
Texte. Berlin: Akademie–Verlag.
de Jong, Rudolf Erik. 2011. A Grammar of the Bedouin Dialects of Central and Southern
Sinai. Leiden: Brill.
Denizeau, Claude. 1960. Dictionnaire des parlers arabes de Syrie, Liban, et Palestine.
Paris: G.-P. Maisonneuve.
Depuydt, Leo. 2009. Review of Takács 2008. JAOS 129/4: 679–682.
Destaing, Edmond. 1920. Vocabulaire français-berbère. Paris: E. Leroux.
DG – Erichsen, Wolja. 1954. Demotisches Glossar. Copenhagen: Ejnar Munksgaard.
References 57
Dickson, H.R.P. 1949. The Arab of the Desert. London: George Allen & Unwin.
Dieterici, Friedrich. 1894. Arabisch-deutsches Handwörterbuch zum Koran und Thier
und Mensch vor dem König der Genien. Leipzig: J.C. Hinrichs.
DLE – Lesko, L.H. & B. Switalski-Lesko. 2002–04. A Dictionary of Late Egyptian. 2 vols.
B.C. Scribe Publications.
Doughty, Charles Montagu. 1888. Travels in Arabia Deserta, 2 vols. Cambridge: CUP.
Dozy, Reinhardt. 1881. Supplément aux dictionnaires arabes, 2 vols. Leiden: Brill.
Driver, Godfrey R. 1925. A Grammar of the Colloquial Arabic of Syria and Palestine.
London: Probsthain & Co.
Drower, Ethel Stefana & Rudolf Macuch. 1963. A Mandaic Dictionary. Oxford: OUP.
DUL – del Olmo Lete, Gregorio & Joaquin Sanmartín. 2015. A Dictionary of the Ugaritic
Language in the Alphabetic Tradition, 2 vols., 3rd revised edition (translated and
edited by Wilfred G.E. Watson). Leiden: Brill.
Eades, Domenyk. 2011. A transitional Arabic dialect of the northern Omani interior.
ZAL 54: 27–41.
Ebers (papyrus) – Joachim, Heinrich. 1890. Das älteste Buch über Heilkunde. Berlin:
Georg Reimer.
Edel, Elmar. 1955/1964. Altägyptische Grammatik, 2 vols., Analecta Orientalia 34/39.
Rome: Pontificio Istituto Biblico.
Edzard, Lutz. 1998. Polygenesis, Convergence and Entropy. An alternative model of lin-
guistic evolution applied to Semitic linguistics. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.
Edzard, Lutz. 1999. Comparable problems in the reconstruction of “Proto-language”
and the reconstruction of “Urtexts.” In: Edzard, L. & M. Nekroumi (eds.), Tradition
and Innovation: Norm and Deviation in Arabic and Semitic Linguistics. Wiesbaden:
Harrassowitz: 177–192.
Edzard, Lutz. 2013. The philological approach to grammar. In: Owens, Jonathan (ed.),
Oxford Handbook of Arabic Linguistics. Oxford: OUP: 165–184.
Ehret, Christopher. 2001. The African sources of Egyptian culture and language. In:
Cervelló Autuori, J. (ed.), África Antigua. El Antiguo Egipto, una Civilización Africana.
Actas de la IX Semana de Estudios Africanos del Centre d’Estudis Africans de
Barcelona, 18–22 de Marzo de 1996. Aula Aegyptiaca Studia 1: 121–8.
Ehret, Christopher. 2011. History and the Testimony of Language. Berkeley: University
of California Press.
El-Hajjé, Hasan. 1954. Le parler arabe de Tripoli (Liban). Paris: Klincksieck.
Elias, E.A. & Ed. E. Elias. 1974. Elias’ Modern Dictionary: English-Arabic, 19th ed. Cairo.
Elton, Geoffrey R. 1969. The Practice of History. London: Fontana Press.
Ember, Aaron. 1911. Kindred Semito-Egyptian words. ZÄS 49/1–2: 87–92.
Ember, Aaron. 1912. Notes on the relation of Egyptian and Semitic. ZÄS 50: 86–90.
Ember, Aaron. 1913. Kindred Semito-Egyptian words (New Series). ZÄS 51: 110–121.
58 References
Ember, Aaron. 1914. Mehri parallels to Egyptian stems with prefixed ḥ. ZÄS 51: 138–39.
Ember, Aaron. 1917. Kindred Semito-Egyptian words (New Series). ZÄS 53: 83–90.
Ember, Aaron. 1926. Partial assimilation in Old Egyptian. Oriental Studies Published
in Commemoration of the Fortieth Anniversary (1883–1923) of Paul Haupt as the
Director of the Oriental Seminary of the Johns Hopkins University. Baltimore; Hopkins
University Press: 300–312.
Ember, Aaron. 1930. Egypto-Semitic Studies (ed. Frida Behnk). Leipzig: Alexander
Kohut Memorial Foundation.
Englund, Gertie. 1995. Middle Egyptian, An Introduction. Uppsala: Uppsala University.
Eph’al, Israel. 1982. The Ancient Arabs, Nomads on the Borders of the Fertile Crescent:
9th–5th centuries BC. Jerusalem: Magnes Press.
Erman, Adolf. 1885. Ägypten und ägyptisches Leben im Altertum. Tübingen:
H. Lauppschen.
Erman, Adolf. 1892. Das Verhältnis des Ä gyptischen zu den semitischen Sprachen.
ZDMG 46: 93–129.
Erman, Adolf. 1904. Aegyptisches Glossar: Die häufigeren Worte der ägyptischen
Sprache. Berlin: Reuther & Reichard.
Erman, Adolf. 1933. Neuägyptische Grammatik. Leipzig: Lokay.
Esposito, Serena. 2019. Riverboats and seagoing ships: Lexicographical analysis of nau-
tical terms from the sources of the Old Kingdom. In: Manzo et al.: 30–52.
Ess, van John. 1918. The Spoken Arabic of Iraq. London: OUP.
Fagnan, Edmond. 1923. Additions aux dictionnaires arabes. Beirut. Libraire du Liban.
Fassberg, Steven. 2009. The Jewish Neo-Aramaic Dialect of Challa. Leiden: Brill.
Faulkner, Raymond O. 1958. An Egyptian Book of Hours. Oxford: Griffith Institute.
Faulkner, Raymond O. 1962. A Concise Dictionary of Middle Egyptian. Oxford: OUP.
Faulkner, Raymond O. 1969. The Ancient Egyptian Pyramid Texts. Oxford: Clarendon
Press.
Feghali, Michel. 1919. Le parler de Kfarʿabīda (Liban-Syrie). Paris: Imprimerie nationale.
Feghali, Michel. 1928. Syntaxe des parlers arabes actuels du Liban. Paris: Imprimerie
nationale.
Feghali, Michel. 1933. Textes libanais. Paris: Maisonneuve.
Feghali, Michel. 1935. Contes, légendes, coutumes populaires du Liban et de Syrie. Paris:
Maisonneuve.
Feghali, Michel. 1938. Proverbes et dictons syro-libanais. Paris: Institut d’Ethnologie.
Ferguson, Charles Albert. 1959. The Arabic koine. Language 35/4: 616–630.
Figueras, Pau. 2000. From Gaza to Pelusium: Materials for the Historical Geography
of North Sinai and South-West Palestine, 332 BC–640 CE. Beer Sheva: Ben-Gurion
University.
Fink, Andreas. 2017. Der arabische Dialekt von Hasankeyf am Tigris (Osttürkei).
Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.
References 59
Gray, Russell, Quentin D. Atkinson & Simon J. Greenhill. 2011. Language evolution
and human history: What a difference a date makes. In: Whiten, A., R.A. Hinde,
C.B. Stringer & K.N. Laland. Culture Evolves. Oxford: OUP: 1090–1100.
Griffini, Eugenio. 1913. L’arabo parlato della Libia. Milano: Ulrico Hoepli.
Grigore, George. 2007. L’arabe parlé à Mardin. Bucarest: The University.
Grotzfeld, Heinz. 1964. Syrisch-arabische Grammatik: (Dialekt von Damaskus).
Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.
Gzella, Holger. 2014. Peoples and languages in the Levant during the Bronze and
Iron Ages. In: Steiner, M.L. & A.E. Killebrew (eds.), The Oxford Handbook of the
Archaeology of the Levant c.8000–332 BC. Oxford: OUP: 24–34.
Halloran, James Alan. 2006. Sumerian Lexicon. Los Angeles: Logogram Publ.
Hannig, Rainer. 1995. Ägyptisches Wörterbuch. Mainz am Rhein: Philipp von Zabern.
Hannig, Rainer. 2003. Ägyptisches Wörterbuch I. (altes Reich und erste Zwischenzeit).
Mainz am Rhein: Philipp von Zabern.
Hannig, Rainer. 2006. Ägyptisches Wörterbuch II (mittleres Reich und zweite
Zwischenzeit). Mainz am Rhein: Philipp von Zabern.
Hannig, Rainer & Petra Vomberg. 1999. Kulturhandbuch Ägyptens. Wortschatz der
Pharaonen in Sachgruppen. Mainz am Rhein: Philipp von Zabern.
Harfouche, Joseph. 1923. Le dragoman arabe. Guide pratique de l’arabe parlé pour la
Syrie, la Palestine et l’Egypte. Beyrouth.
Harrell, Richard Slade. 1966. A Dictionary of Moroccan Arabic: Moroccan-English (edited
by R.S. Harrell; compiled by Thomas Fox et al.). Washington, D.C.: Georgetown
University.
Harris, Zellig S. 1947. Structural Linguistics. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Harris, Zellig S. 1951. Methods in Structural Linguistics. Chicago: University of Chicago
Press.
Hava, J.G. 1982. Al-Faraid – Arabic-English Dictionary. Beirut. Dar el-Machreq.
Heath, Jeffrey. 2002. Jewish and Muslim Dialects of Moroccan Arabic. London:
RoutledgeCurzon.
Heath, Jeffrey. 2004. Hassaniya Arabic (Mali)–English–French Dictionary. Wiesbaden:
Harrassowitz.
Heggarty, Paul & Colin Renfrew. 2014. Afro-Asiatic. Cambridge World Prehistory, vol. I:
315–320.
Helck, Wolfgang. 1962. Die Beziehungen Ägyptens zu Vorderasien im 3. und 2. Jahrtausend
v. Chr. Ägyptologische Abhandlungen (ÄA). Band 5; 1971 (verbesserte Auflage).
Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.
Henkin, Roni. 2010. Negev Arabic: Dialectal, Sociolinguistic, and Stylistic Variation.
Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.
Herbin, François René. 1994. Le livre de parcourir l’éternité. Leuven: Peeters.
References 61
Hess, Johann Jakob. 1938. Von den Beduinen des inneren Arabiens. Zurich: Max Niehaus.
Hillelson, Sigmar. 1935. Sudan Arabic Texts with Translation and Glossary. Cambridge:
CUP.
Hinds, Martin & El-Said Badawi. 1986. A Dictionary of Egyptian Arabic, Arabic–English.
Beirut: Librairie du Liban.
Hoch, James E. 1994. Semitic Words in Egyptian Texts of the New Kingdom and Third
Intermediate Period. Princeton: University Press.
Hodge, Carleton T. 1981. Comparative evidence for Egyptian phonology. In: Young,
Dwight W., Studies Presented to Hans Jakob Polotsky. Beacon Hill, East Gloucester,
MA: Pirtle & Polson: 401–413.
Hodge, Carleton T. 2004. Afroasiatic Linguistics, Semitics, and Egyptology: Selected
Writings of Carleton T. Hodge (ed. S. Noegel & A.S. Kaye). CDL Press.
Holes, Clive. 2001. Dialect, Culture, and Society in Eastern Arabia, vol. I: Glossary. Leiden:
Brill.
Holes, Clive. 2018. Arabic Historical Dialectology. Oxford: OUP.
Hommel, Fritz. 1879. Die Namen der Säugetiere bei den südsemitischen Völkern. Leipzig:
Hinrichs.
Hommel, Fritz. 1901. Geographie und politische Geschichte des klassischen Altertums:
mit einer Einleitung über die Geographie und Geschichte des Orients bis zu den
Perserkriegen. Munich: C.H. Beck.
Hopkins, Simon. 1984. Studies in the Grammar of Early Arabic (based upon papyri dat-
able to before A.H. 300/A.D. 912). Oxford: OUP.
Hoyland, Robert. 2001. Arabia and the Arabs. From the Bronze Age to the Coming of
Islam. London: Routledge.
Ingham, Bruce. 1982. North East Arabian Dialects. London: Kegan Paul International.
Ingham, Bruce. 1994. Najdi Arabic: Central Arabian. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.
Jamme, Albert. 1962. Sabaean Inscriptions from Mahram Bilqis (Marib). Baltimore:
Johns Hopkins University Press.
Jansen-Winkeln, K. 1996. Spätmittelägyptische Grammatik der Texte der 3. Zwischenzeit
in alten Ägypten. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.
Janssen, J.J. 1975. Commodity Prices from the Ramessid Period. Leiden: Brill.
Jastrow, Marcus. 1886. Dictionary of the Targumim, The Talmud Babli and Yerushalmi,
and the Midrashic Literature. London: Luzac [reprint., 1903, Philadelphia].
Jastrow, Otto. 1973. Daragözü (eine arabische Mundart der Kozluk-Sason-Gruppe;
Süd-westanatolien). Nürnberg: Verlag Hans Carl.
Jastrow, Otto. 1981. Die mesopotamisch-arabischen Qəltu-Dialekte, 2. Band. Wiesbaden:
Harrassowitz.
Jastrow, Otto. 1985. Lehrbuch der Ṭuroyo-Sprache. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.
Jastrow, Otto. 1986. Alles über Qat: Ein Text im arabischen Dialekt von Jiblih
(Nordjemen). ZDMG 136: 22–55.
62 References
Jastrow, Otto. 1990. Der arabische Dialekt der Juden von ‘Aqra und Arbîl. Wiesbaden:
Harrassowitz.
Jastrow, Otto. 2005. Glossar zu Kinderib. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.
Jayakar, A.S.G. 1889. The O’mánee Dialect of Arabic. JRAS 21/3: 649–687.
Jespersen, Otto. 1924. The Philosophy of Grammar. London: George Allen & Unwin.
Jiha, Michel. 1964. Der arabische Dialekt von Bišmizzīn. Wiesbaden: Franz Steiner.
Johnstone, Paul. 1980. The Seacraft of Prehistory. London: Routledge.
Johnstone, T. Muir. 1963. The affrication of kāf and gāf in the Arabic dialects of the
Arabian peninsula. JSS 8: 210–226.
Johnstone, T. Muir. 1967. Eastern Arabian Dialect Studies. London: OUP.
Johnstone, T. Muir. 1977. Ḥarsūsi Lexicon. London: OUP.
Johnstone, T. Muir. 1987. Mehri Lexicon. London: SOAS.
Jones, Dilwyn. 1988. Glossary of Ancient Nautical Titles and Terms. London: Kegan Paul.
Kammerzell, Frank. 1998. The sounds of a dead language: Reconstructing Egyptian
phonology. In: GBS, Heft 121–41.
Kammerzell, Frank. 2005. Old Egyptian and Pre-Old Egyptian: Tracing linguistic diver-
sity in archaic Egypt and the creation of the Egyptian language. In: Seidlmayer, S.J.
(ed.), Texte und Denkmäler des ägyptischen alten Reiches, Berlin: Achet, Dr. Norbert
Dürring: 165–247.
Kampffmeyer, Georg. 1936. Glossar zu den 5000 arabischen Sprichwörtern aus Palästina.
Berlin: Reichsdruckerei.
Kandler, Anne & Enrico R. Crema. 2019. Analysing cultural frequency data: Neutral
theory and beyond. In: Prentiss, Anna (ed.), Handbook of Evolutionary Research in
Archaeology: 83–108.
Kane, Thomas Leiper. 1990. Amharic–English Dictionary, 2 vols. Wiesbaden:
Harrassowitz.
Kane, Thomas Leiper. 2000. Tigrinya–English Dictionary. Hyattsville, Maryland:
Dunwoody Press.
Keimer, Ludwig. 1924. Die Gartenpflanzen im alten Ägypten, 1. Bd. Hamburg: Hoffmann
& Campe.
Kessler, Dieter. 2001. Eastern Desert and Red Sea. OEAE, vol. I: 418–422.
Khan, Geoffrey. 2008. The Neo-Aramaic Dialect of Barwar, vol. 1. Leiden: Brill.
Kitchen, Kenneth. 1971. The land of Punt and how to get there. Orientalia NS 40:
184–207.
Kitchen, Kenneth. 1999. Poetry of Ancient Egypt. Jonsered: Paul Aströms forlag.
Klinkott, H., S. Kubisch & R. Wollermann (eds.). 2007. Geschenke und Steuern, Zölle und
Tribute. Antike Abgabeformen in Anspruch und Wirklichkeit. Leiden: Brill.
Kloekhorst, Alwin. 2008. Etymological Dictionary of the Hittite Inherited Lexicon.
Leiden: University Centre.
References 63
Omar, Margaret K. 1975. Saudi Arabic, Urban Hijazi Dialect. Washington, D.C.: Office
of Education.
Osing, Jürgen. 1976. Die Nominalbildung des Ägyptischen, 2 vols. Mainz: Philipp von
Zabern Verlag.
Osing, Jürgen. 1980. Lautsystem. In: Lexikon der Ägyptologie, Band III (W. Helck &
W. Westendorf eds.) Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.
Osing, Jürgen. 2001. Review of Takács (1999). BO 58: 565–581.
Osthoff, Hermann & Karl Brugmann. 1878. Morphologische Untersuchungen auf dem
Gebiete der indogermanischen Sprachen, I. Leipzig: S. Hirzel.
Owens, Jonathan. 1985. A Grammar of Harar Oromo (N.E. Ethiopia). Hamburg: Helmut
Buske.
Owens, Jonathan. 2003. Arabic dialect history and historical linguistic mythology.
JAOS CXXIII: 715–740.
Owens, Jonathan. 2009. A Linguistic History of Arabic. Oxford: OUP.
Owens, Jonathan. 2013. History. In: Oxford Handbook of Arabic Linguistics. Oxford.
OUP: 451–471.
Owens, Jonathan. 2018. Dialects (speech communities), the apparent past, and gram-
maticalization. In: Holes: 206–256.
Pairman Brown, John. 1995. Israel and Hellas. Berlin: de Gruyter.
Palva, Heikki. 1965. Lower Galilean Arabic. Helsinki: Finnish Oriental Society.
Palva, Heikki. 1978. Narratives and poems from Ḥesbān: Arabic texts recorded among
semi-nomadic al-Aǧārma tribe (Al-Balqāʾ district, Jordan). Göteborg: Acta Univer
sitatis Gothoburgensis.
Palva, Heikki. 1992. Artistic Colloquial Arabic. Helsinki: Finnish Oriental Society.
Parpola, Simo. 2007. Akkadian–English–Akkadian Dictionary. Helsinki: The Neo-
Akkadian Text Corpus Project.
Parthey, Gustav. 1844. Vocabularium coptico-latinum et latino-copticum. Berlin:
F. Nicolai.
Patai, Raphael. 1999. Children of Noah. Princeton: University Press.
Paul, Hermann. 1880. Prinzipien der Sprachgeschichte. Tübingen: Niemeyer.
Peust, Carsten. 1999. Egyptian Phonology. An Introduction to the Phonology of a Dead
Language. Göttingen: Peust & Gutschmidt Verlag Gbr.
Piamenta, Moshe. 1990–91. Dictionary of Post-classical Yemenite Arabic, 2 vols. Leiden:
Brill.
Piamenta, Moshe. 2000. Jewish life in Arabic and Jerusalem Arabic in Communal
Perspective. Leiden: Brill.
Plas, Dirk van der & Borghouts, J.F. 1998. Coffin Texts Word Index, Publications Inter
universitaires de Recherches Égyptologiques Informatisées, Vol. VI. Paris.
Pokorny, Julius. 1959. Indogermanisches etymologisches Wörterbuch, 2 vols. Berne:
A. Francke.
References 67
Polotsky, Hans J. 1970. Coptic. In: Sebeok, T.A. (ed.), Current Trends in Linguistics 6.
Berlin: De Gruyter Mouton: 558–569.
Pommerol, Patrice Jullien de. 1999. Dictionnaire arabe tchadien–français. Paris:
Karthala.
Porten, Bezalel & Ada Yardeni. 1999. Textbook of Aramaic Documents from Ancient
Egypt. vol. 4, Ostraca and assorted inscriptions newly copied, edited and translated
into Hebrew and English. Jerusalem: Magnes Press.
Potts, D.T. & S. Blau. 1998. Identities in the East Arabian region, Mediterranean
Archaeology, vol. 11: Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean in Antiquity: Pro-
ceedings of a conference held at the Humanities Research Centre in Canberra
10–12 November 1997: 27–38.
Power, Timothy. 2011. The material culture and economic rationale of Saracen settle-
ment in the eastern desert of Egypt. JEA 88: 187–225.
Power, Timothy. 2012. ‘You shall not see the tribes of the Blemmyes or of the Saracens’;
On the other ‘barbarians’ of late Roman Eastern Desert of Egypt. In: Barnard, Hans
& Kim Duistermaat, The History of the Peoples of the Eastern Desert. Los Angeles:
Cotsen Institute of Archaeology Press: 323–339.
Prémare, A.-L. de. 1993–99. Dictionnaire Arabe-Français. 12 vols. Paris: Harmattan.
Pring, J.T. 2000. The Pocket Oxford Greek Dictionary. Oxford: OUP.
Procházka, Stephan. 2002. Die arabischen Dialekte der Çukurova (Südtürkei).
Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.
Qafisheh, A. Hamdi. 2000. Yemenite Arabic-English Dictionary. Lincolnwood, IL: NTC
Publishing Company.
Quack, Joachim Friedrich. 2005. The Demotic and Greco-Egyptian Literature. Münster:
Lit.
Quack, Joachim Friedrich. 2012. To clothe or to wipe? On the semantics of the verb nms,
in: E. Grossman, St. Polis, J. Winand (eds.), Lexical Semantics in Ancient Egyptian,
Lingua Aegyptia Studia Monographica 9. Hamburg: Widmaier Verlag: 379–386.
Quételet, Adolphe. 1835. Sur l’homme et le développement de ses facultés, ou essai de
physique sociale. Paris: Bachelier.
Rabin, Chaim. 1951. Ancient West-Arabian. London: Taylor’s Foreign Press.
Rabin, Chaim. 1963. The origin of the subdivisions of Semitic. In: Thomas, Winton, D.
and W.D. McHardy (eds.), Hebrew and Semitic Studies Presented to Godfrey Rolles
Driver in Celebration of His Seventieth Birthday. Oxford: Clarendon Press: 104–115.
Radionov, Mikhail A. 2007. The Western Hað̣ ramawt: Ethnographic Field Research,
1983–91. Halle: Orientwissenschaftliches Zentrum.
Ranke, Hermann. 1935. Die ägyptischen Personennamen, Bd. 1: Verzeichnis der Namen.
Glückstadt: J.J. Augustin.
Redford, D.B. 1992. Egypt, Canaan and Israel in Ancient Times. Princeton: University
Press.
68 References
Reichmuth, Stefan. 1983. Der arabische Dialekt der Šukriyya im Ostsudan. Hildesheim:
Georg Olms.
Reinhardt, Carl. 1894. Ein arabischer Dialekt, gesprochen in Oman und Zanzibar.
Stuttgart: W. Spemann.
Reinisch, Leo. 1893. Die Beḍauye-Sprache in Nordost-Afrika II. Wien: F. Tempsky.
Renfrew, Colin. 1987. Archaeology and Language: The Puzzle of Indo-European Origins.
Cambridge: CUP.
Retsö, Jan. 2003. The Arabs in Antiquity. London: RoutledgeCurzon.
Rhodokanakis, Nikolaus. 1911. Der vulgärarabische Dialekt im Dofar (Zfar). Wien: Alfred
Hölder.
Richter, Tonio Sebastian. 2017. Whatever in the Coptic language is not Greek, can
wholly be considered Ancient Egyptian: Recent approaches toward an integrated
view of the Egyptian-Coptic lexicon. JCSCS 9: 9–32.
Ritt-Benmimoun, Veronika. 2005. Phonologie und Morphologie des arabischen Dialekts
der Marazig (Sudtunesien). Wien (Dissertation).
Roset, Caroline. 2018. A Grammar of Darfur Arabic. Amsterdam: LOT.
Rossi, Ettore. 1939. L’arabo parlato a Ṣanʿāʾ. Roma: Istituto per l’Oriente.
Rössler, Otto. 1971. Das Ägyptische als semitische Sprache. In: Altheim, F. & R. Stiehl
(eds.), Christentum am Roten Meer, 1. Band. Berlin: De Gruyter: 263–326.
Roth-Laly, Arlette. 1969–70. Lexique des dialectes arabes tchado-soudanais. Paris: CNRS.
Rubin, Aaron. 2004. An Outline of comparative Egypto-Semitic morphology. In:
Takács, Gábor (ed.), Egyptian and Semito-Hamitic (Afro-Asiatic) Studies in Memo
riam Werner Vycichl. Leiden: Brill: 454–486.
Sabar, Jona. 2002. A Jewish Neo-Aramaic Dictionary. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.
Sanders, William. 1962. Cultural ecology of nuclear Mesoamerica. AA 64: 34–44.
Satzinger, Helmut. 2002. The Egyptian connection: Egyptian and the Semitic lan-
guages. IOS 20: 227–264.
Satzinger, Helmut. 2015. A lexicon of Egyptian lexical roots (project). QVO IX: 213–224.
Scheele-Schweitzer, K. 2014. Die Personennamen des alten Reiches: Altägyptische
Onomastik unter lexicographischen und sozio-kulturellen Aspekten. Philippika 28.
Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.
Schenkel, Wolfgang. 1990. Einführung in die altägyptische Sprachwissenschaft.
Darmstadt: Wissenschaftliche Buchgesellschaft.
Schipper, B.U. 2005. Die Erzählung des Wenamun. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.
Schmidt, Hans & Paul Kahle. 1918–1930. Volkserzählungen aus Palästina, gesammelt bei
den Bauern von Bir-Zet, 2 vols. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.
Schmidt, Johannes. 1872. Die Verwandtschaftsverhältnisse der indogermanischen
Sprachen. Weimar: Böhlau.
Schwiderski, Dirk. 2008. Die alt- und reichsaramäischen Inschriften. Berlin: de Gruyter.
Segal, J.B. 1983. Aramaic Texts from North Saqqāra. London: Egypt Exploration Society.
References 69
Seidlmayer, S.J. 2007. Gabe und Abgaben im Ägypten des alten Reiches. In: Klinkott
et al.: 31–63.
Serpico, Margaret & R. White. 2000. The botanical identity and transport of incense
during the Egyptian New Kingdom. Antiquity 74: 884–897.
Sethe, Kurt. 1962. Übersetzung und Kommentar zu den altägyptischen Pyramidentexten,
VI (Index). Hamburg: J.J. Augustin.
Shweder, Richard A. 1991. Thinking Through Cultures: Expeditions in Cultural Psychology.
Cambridge, MA & London: Harvard University Press.
Simonsen, Jørgen Bæk. 2000. Mecca and Medina: Arab city-states or Arab caravan-
cities? In: Hansen, Mogens Herman (ed.), A Comparative Study of Thirty City-state
Cultures. Copenhagen: C.A. Reitzels Forlag: 241–249.
Simpson, R.S. 1996. Demotic Grammar in the Ptolemaic Sacerdotal Decrees. Oxford:
Griffith Institute.
Singer, Hans-Rudolf. 1984. Grammatik der arabischen Mundart der Medina von Tunis.
Berlin: Walter von Gruyter.
Skeat, Walter W. 1912. The Science of Etymology. Oxford: OUP.
Sobelman, H. & R.S. Harrell. 1963. A Dictionary of Moroccan Arabic. Washington, D.C.:
Georgetown University Press.
Socin, Albert. 1882. Die neu-aramäischen Dialekte von Urmia bis Mossul. Tübingen:
H. Laupp.
Socin, Albert. 1898. Die Sprache der Kurden. Straßburg: Karl J. Trübner.
Socin, Albert. 1901. Diwan aus Centralarabien (Teil III) (hrsg. von Hans Stumme).
Leipzig: B.G. Teubner.
Sokoloff, Michael. 2002. A Dictionary of Jewish Palestinian Aramaic of the Byzantine
Period, 2nd ed. Ramat Gan; Bar-Ilan Univ. Press; Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University
Press.
Sokoloff, Michael. 2009. Syriac Dictionary. Winona Lake: Eisenbrauns/Gorgias Press.
Sowayan, Saad Abdullah. 1985. Nabaṭi Poetry: The Oral Poetry of Arabia. Berkeley:
University of California Press.
Sowayan, Saad Abdullah. 1992. The Arabian Oral Historical Narrative. An Ethnographic
and Linguistic Analysis. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.
Sperber, Daniel. 1986. Nautica Talmudica. Ramat Gan: Bar Ilan University & Leiden:
Brill.
Sperveslage, Gunnar. 2016. Intercultural contacts between Egypt and the Arabian
Peninsula at the turn of the 2nd to the 1st millennium BC. In: Moreno Garcia, J.C.
(ed.), Dynamics of Production in the Ancient Near East 1300–500 BC. Oxford: Oxbow
Books: 303–330.
Spiegelberg, Wilhelm. 1921. Koptisches Handwörterbuch. Heidelberg: Carl Winter.
Spiro, Socrates. 1895. An Arabic–English Dictionary of the Colloquial Arabic of Egypt.
Cairo.
70 References
Spitta, Wilhelm. 1880. Grammatik des arabischen Vulgärdialectes von Aegypten. Leipzig:
J.C. Hinrichs.
Stace, Edward Vincent. 1893. An English–Arabic Vocabulary. London: B. Quaritch.
Stein, Peter. 2010. Die altsüdarabischen Minuskelinschriften auf Holzstäbschen aus
der Bayerischen Staatsbibliothek in Mūnchen. 1. Die Inschriften der mittel- und spät-
sabäischen Periode. Verzeichnisse und Tafeln. Epigraphische Forschungen auf der
Arabischen Halbinsel, 5. Tübingen: Wasmuth.
Steiner, Richard C. 2011. Early Northwest Semitic Serpent Spells in the Pyramid Texts.
Winona Lake: Eisenbrauns.
Stewart, Devin. 1999. Color terms in Egyptian Arabic. In: Borg, A. (ed.), The Language of
Color in the Mediterranean. Stockholm: Almqvist & Wiksell International: 105–120.
Stewart, Frank. 1990. Texts in Sinai Bedouin Law. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.
Stowasser, Karl & Moukhtar Ani. 1964. A Dictionary of Syrian Arabic. Washington, D.C.:
Georgetown University Press.
Stumme, Hans. 1896. Grammatik des tunisischen Arabisch (Tunis). Leipzig: J.C. Hinrichs.
Taine-Cheikh, Catherine. 1990. Dictionnaire Ḥassāniyya-français. Paris: Paul Geuthner.
Tait, W.J. 1977. Papyri from Tebtunis in Egyptian and in Greek. London: Egypt Exploration
Society.
Takács, Gábor. 1999. Etymological Dictionary of Egyptian, vol. 1. A phonological intro-
duction. Leiden: Brill.
Takács, Gábor. 2001. Etymological Dictionary of Egyptian, vol. 2. b-, p-, f-. Leiden: Brill.
Takács, Gábor. 2005. Recent problems of Semitic-Egyptian and Semito-Cushitic and
Chadic consonant correspondences. AO 23/1–2: 207–231.
Takács, Gábor. 2005b. Aaron Ember and the establishment of Egypto-Semitic phono-
logical and lexical comparison (Part I). AOV 6/2: 78–101.
Takács, Gábor. 2006. Aaron Ember and the establishment of Egypto-Semitic phono-
logical and lexical comparison (Part II). AOV 7/11–22: 145–188.
Takács, Gábor. 2007. Etymological Dictionary of Egyptian, vol. 3, m-. Leiden: Brill.
Takács, Gábor. 2011a. Semitic-Egyptian relations. In: Weninger, Stefan (ed.), The Semitic
Languages: An International Handbook. Berlin/Boston: De Gruyter Mouton: 7–18.
Takács, Gábor. 2011b. Lexica Afroasiatica X. RO LXIV/2: 73–86.
Takács, Gábor. 2011c. Lexica Afroasiatica XI. JLR VI/1: 141–172.
Takács, Gábor. 2015. Questions of Egyptian historical phonology and Afro-Asiatic. BO
72/5–6: 565–585.
Takács, Gábor. 2016. Layers of the oldest Egyptian lexicon II. RO 19/1: 59–124.
Tal, A. 2000. A Dictionary of Samaritan Aramaic, 2 vols. Leiden: Brill.
Talay, Shabo. 1999. Der arabische Dialekt der Khawētna, vol. 1 (Grammatik). Wiesbaden:
Harrassowitz.
Talay, Shabo. 2002. Der arabische Dialekt von Hasköy (Dēr Khāṣ) Ostanatolien, Teil II
Texte und Glossar. ZAL 41: 46–86.
References 71
Talay, Shabo. 2003. Der arabische Dialekt der Khawētna, vol. 2 (Texte und Glossar).
Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.
Talay, Shabo. 2009. Die neu-aramäischen Dialekte der Khabur-Akkader in Nordostsyrien.
Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.
Talmoudi, Fathi. 1980. The Arabic Dialect of Sūsa (Tunisia). Gothenburg: Acta
Universitatis Gothoburgensis.
Tamis, Rianne & Janet Persson. 2013. A Concise Dictionary (Sudanese Arabic–English/
English–Sudanese Arabic). Dallas: SIL International.
Tapiéro, Norbert. 1971. Manuel d’arabe algérien moderne. Paris: Klincksieck.
Te Velde, H. 1967. The cat as sacred animal of the goddess Mut. In: Bleeker, C.J., Egyptian
Festivals. Leiden: Brill: 127–137.
Thacker, T.W. 1954. The Relationship of the Semitic and Egyptian Verbal Systems. Oxford:
Geoffrey Cumberlege.
ThS – Payne-Smith, R. 1879. Thesaurus Syriacus. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
Ullmann, Manfred. 1957–2009. Wörterbuch der klassischen arabischen Sprache.
Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.
Uphill, Eric P. 1988. An ancient Egyptian maritime link with Arabia. In: Proceedings of
the Twenty-first Seminar for Arabian Studies held at Durham on 28th–30th July, 1987,
vol. 18: 163–170. Oxford: Archaeopress: 111–118.
Urk. IV – Kurt Sethe & Wolfgang Helck. 1906–1958. Urkunden des aegyptischen
Altertums: Abteilung IV: Urkunden der 18. Dynastie. Leipzig/Berlin.
van den Brink, E.C.M. & Thomas E. Levy (eds.). 2002. Egypt and the Levant: Interrelations
from the 4th through the Early 3rd Millennium B.C.E. London: Leicester University
Press.
Vanhove, Martine. 1995. Notes on the Arabic dialect of Yāfi (Yemen). PSAR 25. Oxford:
Archaeopress: 141–152.
Vassalli, Mikiel Anton. 1791. Mylsen phoenico-punicum sive grammatica melitensis.
Rome: Antonio Fulgoni.
Vassalli, Mikiel Anton. 1796. Lexicon Melitense Latino-Italum. Roma: Antonio Fulgoni.
Vergote, J. 1945. Phonétique historique de l’égyptien. Paris: Le Muséon.
Vergote, J. 1975. La position intermédiaire de l’ancien égyptien entre l’hébreu et l’arabe.
In: Bynon, James & Theodora, Hamito-Semitica. Proceedings of a colloquium held
by the Historical Section of the Linguistics Association (Great Britain) at the SOAS,
University of London, on the 18th, 19th and 20th of March 1970. Berlin: De Gruyter
Mouton: 171–192.
Vittmann, Günter. 1991. Zum koptischem Sprachgut im Ägyptisch-Arabischen. WZKM
81: 197–227.
Vittmann, Günter. 1996. Semitisches Sprachgut im Demotischen. WZKM 86: 435–447.
Vocke, Sybille & Wolfram Waldner. 1982. Der Wortschatz des anatolischen Arabisch.
Erlangen: Palm & Enke Verlag.
72 References
Vogt, Burkhard & Alexander Sedov. 1989. The Sabir culture and coastal Yemen during
the 2nd millennium BC – in the present state of discussion. PSAS 28: 261–270.
Vycichl, Werner. 1983. Dictionnaire étymologique de la langue copte. Leuven: Peeters.
Vycichl, Werner. 1989. Die hamitosemitische Bezeichnung der “Zunge.” MLR 4–5: 23–41.
Wahrmund, Adolf. 1898. Handwörterbuch der neuarabischen und deutschen Sprache,
2 vols. Giessen: J. Ricker.
Wang, William S.-Y. 1979. Language change – A lexical perspective. ARA 8: 353–371.
Ward, Cheryl. 2001. Ships and shipbuilding. OEAE III: 281–284.
Ward, William A. 1960. Some effects of varying phonetic conditions on Semitic loan
words in Egyptian. JAOS 80/4: 322–327.
Ward, William A. 1985. Reflections on methodology in Egypto-Semitic lexicography. In:
Tubb, Jonathan N. (ed.): Palestine and the Bronze and Iron Ages. Papers in Honour of
Olga Tufnell. London: Institute of Archaeology: 232–248.
Watson, Janet C.E. 2002. The Phonology and Morphology of Arabic. Oxford: OUP.
Wb = Erman, Adolf & Hermann Grapow. 1926–61. Wörterbuch der ägyptischen Sprache.
Berlin: Akademie-Verlag.
Wehr, Hans. 1979. A Dictionary of Modern Written Arabic. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.
Weißbach, Franz. 1930. Beiträge zur Kunde des Irak-Arabischen. Leipzig: J.C. Hinrichs.
Wengrow, D., M. Dee, S. Foster, A. Stevenson & C.B. Ramsey. 2015. Cultural Convergence
in the Neolithic of the Nile Valley: a Prehistoric Perspective on Egypt’s Place in Africa.
Cambridge: CUP.
Weninger, Stefan. 2009. Der Jemen als lexikalisches Strahlungszentrum in der Antike.
In: Arnold, W. et al.: 395–410.
Werbeck, Wolfgang. 2001. Laut- und Formenlehre des nordjemenitisch-arabischen
Dialekts von Manārk. Münster: Rhema.
Wetzstein, Johann Gottfried. 1906. Die Liebenden von Amasia: Ein damascener Schat
tenspiel. Abhandlungen für die Kunde des Morgenlandes, Band 12/2 (hrsg. G. Jahn).
Leipzig: F.A. Brockhaus.
Wiener, Norbert. 1961. Cybernetics, 2nd ed. Cambridge, MA: M.I.T. Press.
Wilkinson, Toby. 2001. Social stratification. OEAE, vol. 3: 301–305.
Williams, Raymond. 1958. Culture and Society: 1780–1950. London: Chatto & Windus.
Wilson, C.W. & H.S. Palmer. 1869. Ordnance Survey of the Peninsula of Sinai. London:
H.M. Stationery Office.
Winnett, Fred V. & A. Lankester Harding. 1978. Inscriptions from Fifty Safaitic Cairns.
Toronto: University of Toronto Press.
Winnett, Fred V. & W.L. Reed. 1970. Ancient Records from North Arabia. Toronto:
University of Toronto Press.
Winton Thomas, David. 1939. The Recovery of the Ancient Hebrew Language. Cambridge,
CUP.
References 73
Wittrich, Michaela. 2001. Der arabische Dialekt von Āzəx. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.
Woidich, Manfred. 2006. Das Kairenisch-Arabische. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.
Woodhead, D.R. & W. Beene. 1967. A Dictionary of Iraqi Arabic. Washington, D.C.:
Georgetown University Press.
Yahuda, A.S. 1933. The Language of the Pentateuch in its Relation to Egyptian.
London: OUP, H. Milford [= Die Sprache des Pentateuch in ihren Beziehungen zum
Aegyptischen. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter, 1929].
Yoseph, Jean. 2012. Der arabische Dialekt von Mharde (Zentralsyrien). Wiesbaden:
Harrassowitz.
Zadok, Ran. 1979. The Jews in Babylonia during the Chaldean and Achaemenian periods
according to the Babylonian sources. Haifa.
Zadok, Ran. 1981. Arabians in Mesopotamia during the late-Akkadian, Chaldaean,
Achaemenian and Hellenistic periods chiefly according to cuneiform sources.
ZDMG 131: 42–84.
Zadok, Ran. 2002. The Earliest Diaspora. Tel Aviv: Diaspora Research Institute.
Zadok, Ran. 2013. The onomastics of the Chaldean, Aramean, and Arabian tribes in
Babylonia during the first millennium. In: Berlejung & Streck: 261–336.
Zarins, Juris. 1989. Ancient Egypt and the Red Sea: The case for obsidian in the predy-
nastic and archaic periods. In: Leonard, Albert & Bruce Beyer Williams (eds.), Essays
in Ancient Civilization Presented to Helene J. Kantor. Chicago: Oriental Institute of
the University of Chicago: 339–368.
Zimmern, Heinrich. 1917. Akkadische Fremdwörter als Beweis fur babylonischen Kultur
einfluss. E., … vermehrte Ausgabe. Leipzig: Edelman.
Glossary
(Ancient Egyptian – Arabic)
∵
ʾ
1 ʾ-b-y
ꜣbj (MK) ‘wünschen’; ‘desire, wish for’; ‘désirer, souhaiter’ (Wb I 6; Faulknerَ
أ
1962: 2; Meeks 2010: 31) ~ Heb ָא ָבהʾābā ‘to be willing, consent’ (BDB 2) || Ar � ب�ى
ʾabā ‘to refuse’ (Hava 1982: 2);
~ Ḥassāniyya ābe, yābe ‘refuser’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 127) ~ Kfarʿabīda tʾabba
‘s’enorgueillir’ (M. Feghali 1919: 16) ~ N. Najd abyah ‘I want it (f)’ (Ingham 1982:
67) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨abī⟩ ‘I refuse’ (Corriente 1997: 3).
2 ʾ-θ-r
wsr (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘strong, powerful; a wealthy man’; ‘mächtig, stark sein,
der Mächtige, reich; einflußreich, ranghoch’; wsrw ‘strength, power’ (Faulkner
ْ
1962: 68, 69; Calice 1936: 138; Hannig 2003: 381; Hannig & Vomberg 1999: 415)
~ Dem wsr/wsj/ws ‘stark sein’ (DG 100, 99) || Ar. إ� ث�را ءʾiθrāʾ ‘das Reichsein,
Reichtum’ (Wahrmund I 16); cf. 838. y-s-r;
~ Andalusi Ar ⟨maʾāθir⟩ ‘glorious deeds’ (Corriente 1997: 4).
3 ʾ-θ-l
4 ʾ-ǧ-n
i҆kn (Pyr) [< *lkn] ‘cup, jar’; ‘Schale, Napf; ein Gefäß (aus Syrien)’ (Faulkner
1962: 32; Wb I 140) ~ Akkad agannu ‘a large bowl’ (CAD I/1 142) ~ Aram aggānā
78 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
ّ ة أ
‘basin, kettle’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 13); cf. Gk λεκάνη ~ λακάνη ‘dish, pot, pan’ (GEL
1037) || Ar ��� إ� ج��ا نʾiǧǧānah, pl � � ج��ا ج�ي�� نʾaǧāǧīn ‘urn, amphora’ (Hava 1982: 12);
~ Yemen laǧan ‘catino’ (Rossi 1939: 154) ~ Palmyra lagen, pl lgūn ‘grand
bassin en cuivre’ (Cantineau 1934 II 38) ~ Aleppo laqən, pl lqūn ‘grande cuvette
ou bassin de cuivre peu profond pour le pétrissage, le blanchissage et d’autres
usages domestiques’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 763) ~ Kəndērīb lagan, pl laganāt
‘Bottich (aus Kupfer)’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 133) ~ Lebanon lakan, pl lkān ‘wash
basin’ (Frayha 1973; 173) ~ Bišmizzīn lagin, pl lgūni ‘Waschbecken’ (Jiha 1964:
118) ~ Palest lagan, pl lgūne ‘Waschgefäß (oval oder rund tief)’ (Bauer 1957: 354)
~ Egypt laggāna ‘große Teigwanne, Buttertopf’; laggān ‘Eselkorb’; malgōn, pl
malagīn ‘topfförmiges Körbchen mit Deckel’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 436).
5 ʾ-x-t
أ أخ
ʾa₂=ḫi=ta (NK) ‘sister [in anthroponym]’ (Hoch 1994: 32) ~ Akkad ʾaḫātu ‘id.’
� خ�� تʾuxt, pl �
(Parpola 2007: 259) || Ar � � � ا تʾaxawāt ‘sister’ (Hava 1982: 5); (cf.
و
x-w-y);
~ Aleppo ʾəxt, pl xawāt ‘sœur’; xayye « petite sœur, sœurette » (Barthélemy
1935–69: 4, 227) ~ Damascus ʾəxt, pl ʾəxwāt banāt ‘sister’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964:
212) ~ Kəndērīb əxt, pl xəwāt ‘id.’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 7) ~ Palest ʾuxt, pl ʾuxwāt/
xawāt ‘Schwester’ (Bauer 1957: 270).
6 ʾ-d-y
wdi҆ (OK) ‘send forth’; ‘absenden, ausreisen, Sachen absenden; die Reise’;
‘mettre, poser, placer (dans), pousser, jeter, expulser’; wd ‘legen, setzen, geben,
darbringen, stoßen, werfen’; wḏyt ‘campaign, expedition’ (Faulkner 1962: 72, 112;
ّأ
Wb I 385, 386, 397–398; Lambert 1925: 99) ~ Dem wty ‘senden, fortschicken’
(DG 106) || Ar � د �ىʾaddā ‘he made it, or caused it, reach, arrive, …’ (Lane 38);
~ Aleppo wadda ‘faire parvenir soi-même, porter (qqe), conduire, mener
(un enfant, un animal) ʿala ou la- ‘à qqn, à un endroit’ (Barthélemy 1935–69:
889) ~ Suxne adda, yiddi ‘führen’ (Behnstedt 1994: 202) ~ Daragözü wadda,
īwaddi ‘wegbringen’ (O. Jastrow 1973: 53, 13) ~ Āzəx waddāni ‘er brachte mich’
(Wittrich 2001: 32) ~ Kəndērīb wadda ‘fortbringen, wegbringen, hinbringen’
(O. Jastrow 2005: 151) ~ Mardīn wadda, ywaddi ‘emporter’ (Grigore 2007: 124)
~ Mzāb ddēyna ‘nous avons transporté’; nəddi ‘je transporte’ (Grand’Henry
1976: 19, 39).
5. ʾ -x-t – 9. ʾ -s-t 79
7 ʾ-r-y
i҆҆ri҆҆ (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘to create, beget’; ‘machen, anfertigen, herstellen’
أ
(Faulkner 1960: 25; Wb I 108) ~ Copt ⲉⲓⲣⲉ ‘to make, do’ (Crum 1939: 83a) ||
Ar � ر �ىʾarā ‘to produce honey (bee)’ (Hava 1982: 7).
8 ʾ-z-r
sꜣr.w/zꜣr.w (Pyr) ‘Fesseln, Bande’ (Wb III 422; Hannig 2003: 1065) ~ Heb ָאזַ ר
أ�ز
ʾāzar ‘to gird, encompass’ (BDB 25) ~ Ugar uzr ‘clothed, enrobed’ (DUL 137) ||
Ar � رʾazara ‘envelopper le corps du vêtement ou voile appelé izār’ (DAF I 28);
~ Kfarʿabīda ʾzāṛ ‘voile (de mariée)’ (Feghali 1919: 4) ~ Oman uzār
‘Lendentuch, Lendenschurz’ (Reinhardt 1894: 47, 254) ~ Yemen izre ‘bedsheet’;
lizār ‘shoulder shawl’ (Piamenta 1990: 7) ~ E. Arabia wizār, pl wzira ‘sarong
worn by men’ (Holes 2001: 557) ~ Najd wizərih ‘his loincloth’ (Ingham 1982: 58)
~ Khābūra wizār ‘a long loincloth’ (Brockett 1985: 218) ~ Tunis iẓāṛ, pl -āt ‘drap
de lit’ (D. Cohen 1975: 191) ~ Morocco iẓaṛ, pl iẓuṛ ‘bedding, sheet’ (Sobelman
& Harrell 1963: 20, 176) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨izār, pl uzur⟩ ‘loincloth or shawl (used
by Christians)’ (Corriente 1997: 12) ~ Malta ⟨liżar, pl lożor⟩ ‘mantello, lenzuolo’
(Vassalli 1796: 442).
9 ʾ-s-t
10 ʾ-s-s
ّ أ أ
s.t (Pyr) ‘seat, throne, place, ground of house’; ‘Sitz, Wohnsitz, Platz; Ort, Stelle’
(Faulkner 1962: 206; Wb IV 1; Calice 1936: 79) || Ar � ��سʾuss, pl � ��س�ا ��سʾasās ‘foun-
dation, principle, basis’ (Hava 1982: 8);
~ Damascus ʾasās, pl -āt ‘foundation’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 97) ~ S.E.
Anatolia assas ‘gründen, bauen auf’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 9) ~ Palest uss,
pl sās ‘fond, base’ (Denizeau 1960: 6) ~ Egypt assis ‘to found, establish’ (Spiro
1895: 11) ~ Tripoli (Libya) sās ‘base, terreno’ (Griffini 1913: 27, 286) ~ Algeria
sās ‘fondement’ (Ben Sedira 1910: 236) ~ Ḥassāniyya sās, pl sīsān ‘fondation’
(Taine-Cheikh 1990: 70) ~ Malta ⟨sies, pl sisien⟩ ‘terre’ (Vassalli 1795: 615).
11 ʾ-f-d
i҆fd (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘flee’; ‘davonrennen (wie Wild), eilen, fliehen’; m i҆fd ‘eilig,
أف
eilende’ (Faulkner 1962: 17; Wb I 72; Calice 1936: 50; Hannig 1995: 46) ~ Ḥar ʾafōd
‘to leap’ (Johnstone 1977: 1) || Ar � ��دʾafada ‘to hurry’ (Hava 1982: 11).
12 ʾ-f-r
أف
ꜣfr(y) (Ebers) ‘to boil’; ‘sieden, kochen’ (Faulkner 1962: 3; Wb I 9) || Ar � �رʾafara
‘sieden, heiß sein, heftig sieden’ (Brockelmann 1932: 100; Wahrmund I 100);
~ Ḥassāniyya āffāṛ ‘vapeur’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 151) ~ Yemen fār ‘bollire’
(Rossi 1939: 196); fawwar (v/t) ‘boil’ (Piamenta 1990: 381) ~ Aleppo fār ‘bouillon-
ner’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 625) ~ Damascus fār ‘boil, boil with rage’ (Stowasser
& Ani 1964: 25) ~ Kəndērīb fāṛ ‘überlaufen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 108) ~ Najd fār
‘boil over, gush forth’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 440) ~ Rwala fōrt ad-damm ‘seething
of the blood’ (Musil 1928: 490) ~ Lebanon fawwer ‘faire bouillir’ (Feghali 1938:
811) ~ Palest fār ‘überkochen’; fōret ed-damm ‘Blutaufwallung’ (Bauer 1957: 63)
~ Egypt fār ‘boil’ (Spiro 1895: 440) ~ Djidjelli tifwīr ‘fait de cuire à la vapeur’ (Ph.
Marçais 1956: 230) ~ Algeria fawwar ‘évaporer’ (Ben Sedira 1910: 205) ~ Tangier
fōwaṛ ‘dégager de la vapeur’ (W. Marçais 1911: 418) ~ Malta ⟨far, ifur⟩ ‘bollire’
(Vassalli 1796: 203).
10. ʾ -s-s – 15. ʾ -n-f 81
13 ʾ-k-f
ꜣṯp (OK) ‘be heavy-laden’; ‘Schiff beladen (jemanden, ein Tier, ein Schiff)’; ꜣṯpw
أ ف
‘load (n), cargo’ (Faulkner 1962: 6; Wb I 23; Brockelmann 1932: 100) ~ Aram
ف
ʾukkāp̄ ā ‘saddle’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 25) || Ar �� كا
� � إʾikāf, pl ����
� كʾukuf ‘Sattel (Pferd,
Esel)’ (Wahrmund I 110);
~ Egypt ḥmār lukāf ‘donkey for burden’ (Spiro 1895: 102); likāf ‘Eselsattel’;
lukāf, lukf ‘Lastsattel des Esels’; nukāfa ‘id.’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 437;
1999: 398) ~ Andalusi Ar ⟨ʾikāf, pl ʾakiffah⟩ ‘packsaddle for asses’ (Corriente
1997: 22).
14 ʾ-m-s
mśj.t/msj.t (Pyr) ~ msw.t (MK) ‘supper, evening meal’; ‘Abendbrot, zur Zeit des
Abendbrots’ (Faulkner 1962: 17; Wb II 142; Erman 1904: 55; Calice 1936: 100)
ْ َأ
~ Akkad mūšu(m)/mušītu(m) ‘Nacht’; mūšiš ‘bei Nacht’ (AHW 687, 683) ~ Ge
masya ‘become evening’ (Leslau 1987: 368) || Ar � �م��سʾams ‘preceding day; yes-
terday’ (Ambros 2004: 28);
~ Ḥaḍramawt ams ‘hier dans la journée’ (Landberg 1901: 523) ~ Oman mse
‘Abend’; gāy mumsi ‘ich komme spät’ (Reinhardt 1894: 41, 422) ~ N. Yemen amis/
amsi/amseh ‘gestern’ (Behnstedt 1987: 229) ~ Najd masayyan ‘gegen Abend’
(Socin 1901 III 311) ~ ʿAnazeh māsi ‘le coucher du soleil’ (Landberg 1940: 76)
~ Aleppo ams ‘hier (pendant la journée)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 14) ~ Syria ams
‘gestern’ (Behnstedt 1997a, map 305) ~ S.E. Anatolia ams ‘gestern’ (Vocke &
Waldner 1982: 17) ~ Šukriyya misa ‘Abend’ (Reichmuth 1983: 260).
15 ʾ-n-f
أف
nfj (LE) ‘ausatmen, hauchen’; nf ‘Hauch des Mundes, Wind’; nft ‘breath, wind’;
nfyt ‘fan’; nfꜣ ‘blow’; m ‘(out of) nose’ (Wb II 250; Faulkner 1962: 131) || Ar ����� ن
أ ف
ʾanf, pl �� � ن�اʾanāf ‘nose’ (Hava 1982: 15); cf. 747. n-f-f;
Some N. African cognates of this lexeme cited below show a long vowel in the singular
form, e.g., nīf < (?) *ʾunīf (cf. Marçais 1908: 33).
~ S.E. Anatolia nāfi ‘Nase’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 19) ~ Cherchell nīf ‘nez’
(Grand’Henry 1972: 78) ~ Djidjelli nīf ‘id.’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 255) ~ Mzāb ən-nēf
‘le nez’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 133) ~ Ūlād Brāhīm nēyf ‘nez’ (W. Marçais 1908: 33)
~ Palest naff ‘sich schneuzen’ (Bauer 1957: 263) ~ Sinai naff ‘to sniff, pant, be
82 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
short of breath’ (Stewart 1990: 251) ~ S.E. Anatolia ənf/nāfi ‘Nase’ (Vocke &
Waldner 1982: 19) ~ Damascus ʾənf, pl ʾnūf ‘nose’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 158)
~ Lebanon ʾənf, pl ʾnūf ‘nez’ (Feghali 1928: 11).
16 ʾ-n-y
i҆ni҆/i҆n (ME) ‘verweilen, langsam gehen, zögern etwas zu tun’ (Wb I 92;
Brockelmann 1932: 101); si҆n ‘to wait, َwait for’ (Caminos 1954: 579; DLE II 12)
أن ّأ ن
|| Ar � �ىʾanā ‘rechtzeitig kommen’; ت�� �ىtaʾannā ‘to act slowly, to procrastinate’
(Wahrmund I 143; Hava 1982: 15);
~ Aleppo tʾanna ‘agir avec lenteur, temporizer, prendre son temps’; stanna
‘attendre’ (qqn ou qqe)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 18) ~ Damascus tʾanna ‘to bide
one’s time’; stanna ‘warten auf’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 22, 152) ~ Sinai taná ‘to wait for
someone’ (Stewart 1990: 271); tiwanna ‘tarry’ (C. Bailey 1991: 430) ~ Oman teénne
‘sich verspäten’ (Reinhardt 1894: 229) ~ Rwala tawanna/tawāna ‘become
tired, slacken’ (Musil 1928: 273) ~ Palest istanna/ittanna ‘warten auf’ (Bauer
1957: 353): battanna fīk ‘ich erwarte dich’ (Schmidt & Kahle 1918 I 270) ~ Egypt
itanna/istaanna/istanna ‘to wait, expect’ (Spiro 1895: 22) ~ Khābūra twanna
‘to be late (a bedu word)’ (Brockett 1985: 223) ~ Hijaz astanna ‘to wait for’
(Omar 1975: 253) ~ Sudan assanna/istanna ‘wait for’ (LDA 39) ~ Tunis štənna
‘il a attendu’ (D. Cohen 1975: 132) ~ Algiers stenna ‘attendre’ (Tapiéro 1971: 151)
~ Morocco tsenna ‘to expect’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 67).
17 ʾ-h
ꜣh (MK) ‘misery, trouble, pain, injury, illness’; ‘traurig sein; in elender Zustand
أ ّأ
sein’; ꜣhw ‘sufferer’; ‘körperliches Leid, Schmerz, Kummer, Traurigkeit’ (Faulkner
1962: 3, 4; Wb I 12; Osing 2001: 568) || Ar � هʾah ‘Ach!’; � هʾahh ‘bekümmert sein’
(Wahrmund I 144);
~ Najd aḥḥayyh ‘a word expressing feelings of being hurt and pain’
(Kurpershoek 1995: 324) ~ Lebanon ʾāh ‘hélas’ (Feghali 1938: 572) ~ Egypt ʾah
‘Ah!’ (Spiro 1895: 23) ~ Malta ⟨aħ⟩ (vox dolentis) ‘Ahi’ (Vassalli 1796: 4).
18 ʾ-h-ā
i҆hj (Pyr) ‘(Klageruf): i҆hj n ‘Wehe über’ (Wb I 118); yhy ‘Oho!’; i҆hhy ‘rejoicing, joy,
jubilation’; i҆hy ‘jubilating crowd’ (Faulkner 1962: 28; DLE 42; Caminos 1954: 529)
16. ʾ -n-y – 20. ʾ -y-š 83
19 ʾ-w-n
wnwt ‘hour, division of time’ (Faulkner 196.2: 61); nw (Pyr) ‘time’; ‘Zeit,
Zeitpunkt’ (Ember 1914: 86; Wb II 219) ~ أDem wnw.t ‘Stunde’ (DG 90) ~ Copt
ن
ⲟⲩⲛⲟⲩ ‘hour’ (Crum 1939: 484b) || Ar � � واʾawān ‘time, moment, season’ (Hava
1982: 17);
~ Iraq ʾawān, pl ʾāwina ‘time’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 20) ~ Najd ðelwān
‘jetzt’ (Socin 1901 III 107) ~ Egypt ʾān ‘to be time’; ʾawān ‘time, season’; ʾel-ān
‘now, at present’ (Spiro 1895: 20) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ʾānā⟩ ‘some time, once’
(Corriente 1997: 33).
20 ʾ-y-š
(i) i҆ḫ (LE) ‘(Fragewort) was? (als Subjekt, Objekt, Predikat)’; ‘what?’ [~ non-
enclitic i҆ḫ ‘then, therefore, so that; thus (proclitic particle)’] (Wb I 123; Gardiner
أ
1957: 427, 554–55, 176): i҆ḫ r.k ‘what do you mean?’ (Caminos 1954: 529) ~ Copt
ⲁϣ ‘who, what?’ (Crum 1939: 22a) || Ar ��� � ي� شʾayš ‘was’; ‘what?’ (A. Fischer 1905;
Hava 1982: 18);
~ Iraq ʾēš ‘what?’; ʿal-ēš/ʿala-wēš ‘why? what for?’; l-ēš/lu-wēš/ʾil-wēš ‘what
for? why?’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 21) ~ Sine ayš/aš- ‘was’: áš-fe ‘was gibt
es?’ (Talay 2015: 285) ~ Ᾱzǝx haza ašnu ‘was ist das?’ (O. Jastrow 1981: 172);
šayš ‘warum, wozu’ (Wittrich 2001: 42) ~ Sinai ʾēh ‘what?’ (Stewart 1990: 214)
~ Yemen lēh ‘warum’ (Behnstedt 2006: 1135).
(ii) i҆ḫ.t/i҆š.t ‘Habe, Besitz, auch Speise’ (Wb I 134, 135).
Edel (1955: 9, 53, 127) posited the allomorphic shift ḫ > š “vor allem mit Possessiv-
suffixen” (e.g., jḫtjj/jštj snty ‘meine beiden Speisen’; ibid.).
84 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
~ Yemen šīt, pl ʾašyēʾ ‘cosa’ (Rossi 1939: 202) ~ Aleppo šēt/šayyt/šayyet, pl šayyūt
‘chose ou objet appartenant à’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 422) ~ Damascus šīt,
pl šyāt ‘of’ (Cowell 1964: 490) ~ N. Syria šīt/šīyit (Genitivexponent, map 249;
Behnstedt 1997: 499) ~ Çukurova šayt ‘etwas’ (Procházka 2002: 173).
(iii) ri҆ḫ ‘weswegen, wozu?’ (Hannig 1995: 97) || Ar *lāš/h (cf. Borg 2019a: §5);
~ Palest lēš/lēh ‘warum’ (Bauer 1957: 353) ~ Egypt lē ‘warum’ (Woidich 2006:
50) ~ Susa lāh ‘why?’ (Talmoudi 1981: 139) ~ Tripoli (Libya) lwāh ‘warum?’
(Stumme 1898: 273) ~ Takrūna lāh (probablement emprunté aux parlers
bédouins) ‘pourquoi’; lwāš ‘pour quelle raison; dans quel but; pour quelle fin’
(W. Marçais and A. Guîga 3584, 3705) ~ Djidjelli liyyeš ‘vers, à quoi’ [ailleurs =
liyyah/liyyāš/lāš] (Ph. Marçais 1956: 587) ~ Sidi Bel Abbès liyyah/lāš/lāh ‘pour-
quoi?’ (Madouni-La Peyre 2003: 465) ~ Cherchell lāš ‘pourquoi’ (Grand’Henry
1972: 162) ~ Tlemcen liyyāh/liyyāš ‘pourquoi?’ (W. Marçais 1902: 174) ~ Tangiers
ʿlāš ‘pourquoi, parce que’ (W. Marçais 1911: 389).
21 b-
m- (OK) (prep.) ‘in, with, by means of’ (Faulkner 1962: 100); mi҆ḫ ‘on what?’:
mi҆ḫ/mi҆šś.t as in ʿnḫ.k i҆rf mi҆šś.t ‘on what wilt thou live?’ (Gardiner 1957: 408) ||
Ar �ِ بbi- (Hava 1982: 19);
~ Suxne bēš/bʾēš ‘womit?’ (Behnstedt 1994: 207) ~ Sidi Bel Abbès bāš/bāh
‘avec quoi?’ (Madouni-La Peyre 2003: 465) ~ Ḥassāniyya bāš? ‘en quoi, en
quelle matière?’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 124) ~ Cherchell bāš tǝxdǝm ‘avec quoi
travailles-tu?’ (Grand’Henry 1972: 140) ~ Malta ⟨biex sa tgħix?⟩ ‘what will you
live on?’ (own obs.).
22 b-ʾ-r
bjꜣw (OK) ‘Grube, Bergwerk, Steinbruch’; ‘mining region, mine’ (Wb I 438;
Faulkner 1962: 80; Ember 1913: 112; Calice 1936: 60) ~ biʾru, pl biʾrōtu (nominal
component in toponym) ‘well’ (Hoch 1994: 91) ~ Akkad būru ‘well’ (CAD II 342)
آ
~ Sab bʾr ‘puits’; ‘dig a well, provide with wells’ (Avanzini 1980: 123; Biella 1982:
35) || Ar ب�ئ��رbiʾr, pl � ب�ا رʾābār ‘well’ (Lane 145);
~ Aleppo bīr, pl byāra ‘puits’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 72) ~ Damascus bīr, pl
byār ‘well’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 261) ~ Iraq bīr, pl byār ‘id.’ (Woodhead &
Beene 1967: 49) ~ Yemen bīr, pl būr/abyār ‘pozzo’ (Rossi 1939: 228).
21. b- – 26. b-ḥ-z-ǧ 85
23 b-t-k
btk (Gr) ‘(Feinde) niedermachen, schlachten’ (Wb I 485) ~ Heb ִב ֵתקbittēq ‘cut,
cut off, cut down’ (BDB 144) ~ Akkad batāqu to cut off, to take away (by cutting
off)’ (CAD II 161) || Ar ب�ت��كbataka ‘to detach violently, to cut off’ (Hava 1982: 20);
~ Aleppo hal-batak bataki māhu batakak ‘ce coup est le mien et non le tien’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 28) ~ Lebanon batak ‘cutting (vn)’ (Frayha 1973: 5).
24 b-ḥ-θ
bḥs (NK) ‘hunt’; ‘jagen (Löwen, Elefanten, Wild)’ (Faulkner 1962: 34; DLE I 138;
Wb I 469) ~ Dem wʿ rmt bḥs ‘ein Jägersmann’ (DG 121) ~ Copt ⲡⲁϩⲥ ‘prey’ (Crum
1939: 281a) || Ar �ح� ث
� بbaḥaθa ‘to be in quest of’ (Hava 1982: 21);
�
~ Yemen baḥaθ ‘cercare’ (Rossi 1939: 199) ~ Aleppo baḥat ‘gratter la terre
pour y chercher sa nourriture, farfouiller, remuer avec désordre’ (Barthélemy
1935–69: 29) ~ Palest baḥaθ ‘untersuchen’ (Bauer 1957: 324) ~ Egypt baḥas ‘to
search, look for, examine’ (Spiro 1895: 32) ~ Marazig bḥat ‘enquêter, grater,
fouiller le sol’ (Boris 1958: 23) ~ Djidjelli beḥt ‘enquête’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 86)
~ Mzāb bḥat ‘il a cherché’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 100) ~ Morocco bḥat ‘interroger
minutieusement qqn’ (Prémare I 142).
25 b-ḥ-r¹
26 b-ḥ-z-ǧ
~ Dem bḥs ‘id.’ (DG 121) ~ Copt ⲃⲁϩⲥⲉ ‘heifer’ (Crum 1939: 48a) || Ar ح�ز ج
bḥz (Urk.V) ‘calf’; ‘das Kalb’ (Faulkner 1962: 84; Wb I 469; Albright 1918: 231)
� بbaḥzaǧ
�
86 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
27 b-d-r
ꜣbd (OK) ‘month’; ‘mois, mois lunaire’ (Faulkner 1962: 2; Meeks 2010: 42) ||
Ar ب��د رbadr, pl ب��د ورbudūr ‘lune, surtout pleine lune’ (DAF I 95);
~ S. Arabia badr ‘pleine lune’ (Landberg 1909: 527) ~ Najd badir ‘full moon’
(Ingham 1982: 59) ~ Damascus badr, pl bdūr ‘id.’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 152)
~ Lebanon badr ‘pleine lune’ (Feghali 1938: 739) ~ Palest badr, pl bdūr(a)
‘Vollmond’ (Bauer 1957: 345) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨badr, pl budūr⟩ ‘full moon’
(Corriente 1997: 40).
28 b-d-n
ن
ḏbn (OK) ‘Art Antilope’ (Wb V 568); ḏbnw ‘Kuhantilope’ (Hannig 1995: 1005) ||
Ar � ب��دbadan ‘le bouquetin des Alpes’ (dans l’Arabie Pétrée)’ (Dozy I 50);
~ Rwala beden ‘ibex’ (Musil 1928: 25) ~ Palest beden ‘Steinbock, Capra
nubiana’ (Dalman VI 77) ~ Ḥesbān badan, pl bdūn ‘ibex’ (Palva 1978: 88).
29 b-r-r
bnr (NK) ‘das Außen, außerhalb, draußen’; n bnr ‘nach außen, hinaus’; r-bnr(w)
‘outside; away’ (Wb I 461; Faulkner 1962: 83; DLE I 134) ~ *ballu/balla/bal ‘out-
side; outdoors, open land’ (Hoch 1994: 119) ~ Dem bl/bnr ‘das Aussen’ (DG 119)
ًّ
~ Copt ⲃⲟⲗ ‘the outside’ (Crum 1939: 33b) ~ Sab brr ‘terrain decouvert, cam-
pagne’ (Avanzini 1980: 181) || Ar ب�راbarran ‘outside’ (Lane 176);
~ S. Arabia barr al-ʿrab ‘pays des arabes’ (Landberg 1909: 529) ~ Aleppo
barra ‘dehors’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 36) ~ Damascus barra ‘outside’: barrāt
ǝl-balad ‘outside the city’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 165) ~ Nabk baṛṛōt ‘außerhalb’
(Gralla 2006: 60) ~ Ᾱzǝx barrāt ǝl-balad ‘außerhalb der Stadt’ (Wittrich 2001:
117) ~ S.E. Anatolia lǝbaṛṛa ‘hinaus, nach draußen’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 33)
~ Bišmizzīn lbarra ‘hinaus’ (Jiha 1964: 169) ~ Sudan berr ‘terre, continent’ (LDA
45) ~ Tunis baṛṛ ‘contrée’ (D. Cohen 1975: 142) ~ Marazig lbaṛṛa ‘nach draußen,
hinaus’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2005: 114) ~ Djidjelli baṛṛa ‘campagne’ (Ph. Marçais
1956: 252) ~ Mzāb ǝl-baṛṛ ‘dehors’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 101).
27. b-d-r – 32. b-r-k ² 87
30 b-r-q
bꜣq/bqꜣ (Pyr) ‘bright, white, be bright’; ‘hell sein, klar sein’ (Faulkner 1962: 79;
DLE I 127, 137, 141; Wb I 424; Hannig 1995: 257) ~ Ugar brq ‘lightning’ (DUL 238)
~ Akkad barāqu ‘lighten, shine, eyes (to flash)’ (CAD II 38) ~ Sab brq ‘send light-
ق
ning’ (Biella 1982: 58); ‘pluie orageuse, saison des pluies’ (Avanzini 1980: 179) ||
Ar � ب�رbaraqa ‘shine, gleam, glisten’ (Lane 190);
~ Aleppo baraq, yǝ́breq ‘faire des éclairs’; barrāqa ‘tout objet étincelant’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 38) ~ Damascus baraq ‘light up’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964:
138) ~ Palest abraqat: btibriq id-dinya ‘blitzen’ (Bauer 1957: 63) ~ Egypt baraq,
yubruq ‘to glitter’; barq ‘lightning’ (Spiro 1895: 41) ~ Tunis bṛoq ‘il est devenu
brillant’ (D. Cohen 1975: 51) ~ Malta ⟨berraq, iberraq⟩ ‘lampeggiare’ (Vassalli
1796: 38).
31 b-r-k¹
brk (LE) ‘knien (in Hüldigung)’ (Wb I 466) ~ Ugar brk ‘kneel’ (DUL 237) || Ar ب�رك
baraka ‘to kneel (camel)’ (Hava 1982: 30);
~ Rwala mabrak (or manāx) ‘a place where a camel is rested’ (Musil 1928:
357) ~ S. Arabia bārik ‘couché sur les genoux’ (Landberg 1909: 529) ~ Najd
bārik, pl brūk ‘a camel lying down’; mabrak ‘a place where camels lie down
(Kurpershoek 1995: 326) ~ Sinai barák ‘to kneel’ (Stewart 1990: 206) ~ Aleppo
barak ‘s’asseoir’; barrak ‘faire agenouiller (un chameau)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69:
39) ~ Damascus barrak ‘to make knee’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 135) ~ Egypt
barak ‘to knee’ (Spiro 1895: 42) ~ Tripoli (Libya) brak ‘inginocchiarsi’ (Griffini
1913: 151) ~ Mzāb brǝk ‘il s’est accroupi’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 101) ~ Ḥassāniyya
brǝk ‘il s’est accroupi (chameau)’ (D. Cohen 1963: 123).
32 b-r-k²
33 b-r-k³
brk.t (LE) ‘Teich’; ‘pond, pool, lake’ (Wb I 466; DLE I 137) ~ Dem brkt/blkt/blgt
‘der Teich, der See’ (DG 119, 120) ~ Copt ⲃⲉⲣϭⲟⲟⲩⲧ (Sa‘idic) (Vittmann 1996: 438)
~ Sab brkt(n) ‘cistern’ (Biella 1982: 58) ~ brʾk ‘canale d’écoulement’ (Avanzini
1980: 177) ~ Ugar brkt/y ‘pool, swamp’ (DUL 238) || Ar ���
ة
ب�ركbirkah, pl ب�ركbirak
‘pool, tank, pond, puddle’ (Hava 1982: 30);
~ Aleppo bǝrke, pl bǝrak ‘bassin de mâçonnerie’ (Barthélemy 1935–69:
39) ~ Damascus bǝrka, pl bǝrak ‘pool’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 176) ~ S.E.
Anatolia bǝrke, pl bǝrak ‘étang’ (Grigore 2007: 195) ~ Bišmizzīn burkat mwayy
‘Wasserbassin’ (Jiha 1964: 163) ~ Oman berke ‘Teich’ (Reinhardt 1894: 42) ~ Iraq
burka/birka, pl birak ‘puddle, pool’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 32).
34 b-r-k⁴
bꜣk (OK) ‘to work, carry out a task, enslave, servant; serve, offer, present’;
‘arbeiten (insbesondere von schwerer körperlicher Arbeit); Diener, Unter
gebener’; brkt/bꜣkt ‘work, task, labour’; ‘Arbeit’; bꜣk (OK) ‘jemanden dienstbar
machen, versklaven’ (Faulkner 1962: 78; Caminos 1954: 541; DLE I 137; Wb I 426,
123, 124) || Ar إ� ب�ت��ركʾibtaraka ‘sich eifrig auf eine Sache verlegen’; ‘he hastened,
427; Hannig 2003: 411–12; Ember 1930: 16) ~ Dem bk ‘arbeiten, die Arbeit’ (DG
or sped, and strove, laboured, or exerted himself’ (Wahrmund I 206; Lane 193);
~ Egypt barkik/barbik ‘mit der Hand machen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994:
20); barāk ‘den gedroschenen Reis einbringen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 2012:
387) ~ Marazig bārak ‘écraser qqn à la lutte’ (Boris 1958: 31) ~ Tangier bārak
‘s’occuper sans relâche d’une chose’ (W. Marçais 1911: 230) ~ Malta ⟨ħabrek,
iħabrek⟩ ‘essere molto attivo’ (Vassalli 1796: 240) [< *ḥa + brk].
On the Maltese prefix ḥ- (shared with Mahrī and Ancient Egyptian), see Ember (1914:
138–39) and Leslau (1938, 1962).
35 b-z-q
ق
|| Ar � ب����ص قbaṣaqa/� ب��زbazaqa/� ب���س قbasaqa ‘to spit’ (Lane 212);
pśg/psg (Pyr) ‘spit (on, at), spittle’; ‘der Speichel’ (Faulkner 1962: 95; Wb I 555)
36 b-š-š
bš (LE) ‘rapid (of water)’; bsi҆ ‘flow forth (of water)’; bši҆ ‘spit out’; ‘speien; (Gr)
vom Nil und von der Überschwemmung’; bšw ‘spittle’ (Faulkner 1962: 84, 85;
Wb I 477) ~ Dem bš ‘Speichel’ (DG 123) || Ar ��� ب� ش���� ب� شbašbaša ‘suinter (eau)’
(Beaussier 1871: 36);
(i) ~ Najd ⟨bašša⟩ ‘ausströmen lassen (Schweiss)’ (Socin 1901 III 248)
~ Aleppo bašbaš ‘pisser’; baššāša/bašbāša ‘nom enfantin de l’organe urinaire’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 44, 45) ~ Iraq bašš ‘to run, blot’; hal-waraq, ybišš bī l-ḥibir
‘ink runs on this paper’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 35) ~ Egypt bašbiš ‘to soak;
to sprinkle with water’; yibišbēš ‘anfeuchten’ (Spiro 1895: 46; Badawi & Hinds
1986: 76; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 24) ~ Tripoli (Libya)bešbeš ‘mormorare
(ruscello, pioggia)’ (Griffini 1913: 178) ~ Morocco bǝšš ‘pisser’; baššāša ‘qui
pisse beaucoup’ (Prémare I 239) ~ Malta ⟨bexx, ibexx⟩ ‘aspergere, spruzzare’;
⟨bexbex⟩ ‘piovigginare, spruzzolare’; ⟨tbexbix⟩ ‘spruzzamento’ (Vassalli 1796:
39, 87).
The Arabic lexical variants bxx/bšš enact the Old Egyptian shift of ḫ > š (addressed in §6
of the introduction).
ّ
(ii) ~ Jibb baxx ‘to make a spitting sound (chameleon)’ (Johnstone 1981: 31) ||
Ar ب�خbaxxa (u) ‘Tabak mit Wasser bespritzen (aus dem Munde); fein regnen’
�
(Wahrmund I 180);
~ Aleppo baxx, ybǝxx ‘asperger avec de l’eau rejetée en pluie fine par la
bouche (une étoffe, du fil de soie, du cuir, du tabac: tailleur, tisserand, cordon-
nier ou tanneur, etc.)’ (Barthélemy 1935–54: 30) ~ Damascus baxx ‘besprühen’
(Grotzfeld 1965: 152) ~ Lebanon maxmax ‘se rincer la bouche’ (Feghali 1919:
61) ~ Palest baxx (u) ‘fein spritzen, zerstäuben’; buxbēxa ‘feiner Regen’ (Bauer
1957: 284, 241); buxbēxa ‘feiner Regen’; baxxāx ‘id.’ (Bauer 1957: 240; Dalman I/1:
126) ~ Egypt baxx, yubuxx ‘to spout forth, squirt’ (Spiro 1895: 33) ~ Sinai ybuxx
‘he spits’ (de Jong 2011: 30) ~ Sudan baxx ‘to spray’ (Roth-Laly 1969: 43, 63)
~ Cypriot Ar paxx, pipuxx ‘to squirt moisture (saliva, water, or wine) over s.th.’
(own obs.) ~ Malta ⟨baħbaħ, ibaħbaħ⟩ ‘sciacquare’ [< *bxx] (Vassalli 1796: 15).
37 b-ṣ-b-ṣ
ّ
nbḏbḏ (Pyr) ‘shine, glitter’ (Ember 1930: 43; Wb II 247) || Ar ب����صbaṣṣa ‘to
shine, gleam’; ب�����ص ب�����صbaṣbaṣa ‘strahlen, zurückstrahlen’ (Hava 1982: 35;
Wahrmund I 220);
~ Aleppo baṣbūṣet nār ‘petit morceau de braise, charbon ardent’ (Barthélemy
1935–69: 46) ~ Damascus bṣīṣ ḍaww ‘a faint gleam’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 103)
90 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
38 b-ṣ-l
Dem mḏ(w)l ‘onion’ (DG 195) ~ Copt ⲙϫⲱⲗ/ⲉⲙϫⲱⲗ ‘onion’ (Crum 1939: 213b)
~ Sab bṣl ‘oignon’ (Avanzini 1980: 187) || Ar ب����ص�لbaṣal ‘onions’ (Hava 1982: 36);
~ Aleppo baṣal, n.un. -e ‘oignon’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 47) ~ Egypt buṣal, pl
ibṣala ‘Zwiebeln’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 25) ~ Yemen buṣlī/buṣṣālī, coll.
baṣal ‘id.’ (Piamenta 1990: 33) ~ Iraq buṣal, pl ʾabṣāl ‘onion(s)’ (Woodhead &
Beene 1967: 36).
39 b-ṭ-x
ّ
(Faulkner 1962: 36; Keimer 1924 I 133; Wb I 488) || Ar ب���ط��ي�� خbiṭṭīx ‘courge (en
bddw-kꜣ (MK) ‘watermelon’; ‘eine offizinell verwendete Pflanze oder Frucht’
�
général); melon’ (DAF I 135);
~ Aleppo baṭṭīx n.coll., pl bṭēṭīx, n.un. baṭṭīxa ‘melon’ (Barthélemy 1935–
69: 48) ~ Damascus baṭṭīxa (ḥamra), coll./pl baṭṭīx (aḥmar) ‘watermelon’
(Stowasser & Ani 1964: 259).
40 b-ṭ-r
btꜣ (NK) ‘wrong, crime’; ‘Verbrechen, Untat, Sünde’ (Faulkner 1962: 85; Wb I
483; Calice 1936: 62) || Ar ب���طرbaṭar ‘insolence, carelessness’ (Hava 1982: 37);
~ Daθīna ⟨ba/iṭir⟩ ‘être insolent, arrogant, éffronté’; ⟨baṭrah⟩ ‘insolence’;
⟨baṭrān⟩‘impétueux (homme)’ (GD 177) ~ Yemen buṭūr ‘permissiveness, not
abiding by traditional moral standards’ (Piamenta 1990: 33) ~ Iraq baṭṭār ‘to
make restless’; tbaṭṭar ‘to be dissatisfied with one’s lot’; buṭar ‘dissatisfaction’
(Woodhead & Beene 1967: 37) ~ Palest baṭṭār ‘très gai, insouciant’ (Denizeau
1960: 35) ~ Egypt itbaṭṭar ‘to be discontented’ (Spiro 1895: 49).
38. b-ṣ-l – 43. b- ʿ -l 91
41 b-ʿ-b-ʿ¹
bʿbʿ (Pyr) ‘von etwas trinken (besonders vom Blut des geschlachteten Bösen
saufen), überflutet sein’; ‘⟨plonger, baigner (dans)⟩ plutôt que ⟨boire⟩’; bʿbʿ(t)
‘le flot qui baigne (les terres), l’inondation’ (Meeks 1980: 115; Wb I 448) ~ Copt
ّ
ⲃⲉⲉⲃⲉ ‘pour forth, bring forth (rain), to bubble, well up (of a spring)’ (Crum
ة
1939: 28b) || Ar � بbaʿʿ ‘to fall from a cloud (rain)’; ‘reichlich ausgießen’; ��ب��ع ب���ع
ع
baʿbaʿah ‘gurgling’; ب��ع�اbaʿāʿ ‘water in a cloud’ (Wahrmund I 229; Hava 1982: 38);
ع
~ Negev baʿbaʿ, bibaʿbiʿ fil-ṃayyih ‘to play in the water (child)’ (Borg &
Bar-Zvi).
42 b-ʿ-b-ʿ²
ة
bʿbʿ ‘to converse, to speak in a contradictory manner’ (Wallis Budge 212)
~ Copt ⲃⲁⲁⲃⲉ ‘be foolish (of words)’ (Crum 1939: 28b) || �� ب��ع ب���عbaʿbaʿah ‘fluency
of speech’; ‘Zungenfertigkeit’ (Hava 1982: 38; Wahrmund I 229);
~ Egypt baʿbaʿ ‘to give vent to one’s feelings; to complain vociferously’;
baʿbaʿa ‘grunt of a camel; loud protestation, angry bluster’ (Hinds & Badawi
1986: 85) ~ Palest baʿbaʿ ‘blöken’; maʿʿa ‘meckern’ (Bauer 1958: 63, 202) ~ Djidjelli
boʿboʿ ‘bêler’; tboʿbīʿ ‘fait de bêler’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 235) ~ Yemen baʿʿaʿ ‘blöken’
(onomat.); yitbaʿʿaʾ ‘rulpsen (wohl Pausal-form zu yitbaʿʿā)’ (Behnstedt 1992:
92); baʿāʿ ‘ram’ (Piamenta 1990: 34) ~ Morocco baʿbaʿ ‘bêler (en parlant d’un
mouton); kā-iʿayyeṭ baʿʿ ‘patent, manifeste, c’est une vérité criante, c’est mani-
feste aux yeux de tous’ (Prémare I 258) ~ Damascus maʿʿa ‘bleat’ (Stowasser &
Ani 1964: 24) ~ Lebanon baʿʿ ‘bêler, jaser, parler beaucoup’ (Denizeau 1960: 36)
~ Al-Andalus ⟨baʿbar⟩ ‘to growl (dog); to coo (a dove)’ (Corriente 1997: 57).
43 b-ʿ-l
bʿr/b=ʿ=ra (LE) ‘der semitische Gott Baal; Bel’; ‘Lord, Master’ (Wb I 447; Hoch
1994: 93) ~ Heb ַּב ַעלbaʿal ‘the god Baal’ (BDB 128) || Ar ب��ع�لbaʿl ‘terres hautes qui
ne reçoivent d’autre arrosement que les eaux du ciel’ (Fagnan 1923: 13);
~ Palest arḍ baʿl ‘die von Baal dem himmlischen Herrn durch Niederschläge
befruchtete (weibl.) Erde’; baʿl ‘unbewässerte Gemüse’; (Bauer 1957: 317, 187)
~ Lebanon baʿl ‘terrain arrosé par la pluie et qui n’a pas besoin d’être irrigué
artificiellement ou ne peut l’être’ (Denizeau 1960: 39).
92 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
44 b-ġ-ḍ
45 b-ġ-y
bʿj (LE) ‘beachten, berücksichtigen’ (Wb I 446) ~ Heb ָב ָעהbāʿā ‘to inquire’ (BDB
(Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 631) ~ Ar ب� غ��ىbaġā ‘covet, request, desire’
126) ~ Akkad buʾû ‘to look for, search for’ (CAD II 360) || Saf bġ ‘to wish for’
46 b-q-r
ة
1982: 53) || Ar � ب���ق��رbaqarah ‘cow’ (Hava 1982: 40);
pa₂=ra=ku (NK) ‘cattle (toponym)’ (Hoch 1994: 121) ~ Sab bqrm ‘cattle’ (Biella
44. b-ġ-ḍ – 48. b-k-r ¹ 93
47 b-q-ʿ
bi=qa=ʿa (NK) ‘ravine, gully’ (DLE I 141; Hoch 1994: 112) || Ar ب���ق���اbiqāʿ ‘Platz, Ort,
ع
Niedergrund mit Wasser’ (Wahrmund I 239);
~ Daθīna ⟨buqʿah⟩ ‘endroit, place’ (GD 190) ~ Palest buqʿit il-anbya ‘der
Ort der Propheten’ (Schmidt & Kahle 1918 I 4) ~ Egypt buqʿa ‘location, spot’
(Badawi & Hinds 1986: 90) ~ Takrūna buqʿa ‘lieu, endroit, place’ (Marçais &
Guîga 1958–61: 359).
48 b-k-r¹
bkꜣ (MK) ‘be pregnant’; ‘schwanger sein / werden’; bkꜣ.t ‘pregnant woman’; ‘die
schwangere’ (Faulkner 1962: 85; Wb I 481); bk ‘pregnant’; bꜣkꜣ ‘breeding cow’
(DLE I 141, 128) ~ Dem bk ‘schwanger, trächtig’ (DG 125) ~ Copt ⲃⲟⲕⲓ ‘conceive’
(Crum 1939: 31a) ~ Sab bkr ‘firstborn’ (Biella 1982: 42) ~ Soq bēkir ‘premier-né,
أ
vierge’ (Leslau 1938: 86) || Saf bkrt ‘young female camel’ (Winnett & Lankester
Harding 1978: 631) ~ Ar �ر � � ب� كʾabkār ‘virgin’; ‘femme ou femelle à son
� ب� كbikr, pl ��ا ر
premier enfantement’ (Lane 240; DAF I 153);
~ Rwala bikr ‘a virgin’; bakra ‘a she-camel not yet eight years old’ (Musil
1928: 197, 548) ~ Aleppo bǝkr/bukr ‘vierge, pucelle; premierné’ (Barthélemy
1935–69: 58) ~ Baghdad bāker ‘virgin’ (Blanc 1964: 25) ~ Oman bekr ‘Jungfrau’;
bekra ‘junges Kameel’; bukra ‘Schäfchen’; weibliche kleine Ziege’ (Reinhardt
1894: 41, 56, 42, 59) ~ Kuwait bakara ‘young female camel’ (Dickson 1949: 624)
~ Yemen bakra ‘das weibliche Kameljunge’ (Behnstedt 1993: 33) ~ Damascus
bǝnt bǝkr, pl banāt bǝkkar ‘virgin’ (Stowasser & Ani 1957: 256) ~ Palest bint
bikr ‘Jungfrau’ (Bauer 1957: 167) ~ Egypt bikr ‘virgin, eldest born’ (Spiro 1895:
54); bikriyya ‘Jungkuh’; bákara ‘Jungkamelin’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 32;
1999: 361) ~ Malta ⟨bikri⟩ ‘primogenito’ (Vassalli 1796: 46) ~ Marazig bekra, pl
bekrāt ‘vierge’ (Boris 1958: 44); bakṛa ‘weibl. Kameljunges bis zu vier Jahren’
(Ritt-Benmimoun 2005: 241) ~ Ḥassāniyya sabkaṛ ‘déflorer une fille’ (D. Cohen
1963: 132).
94 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
49 b-k-r²
bkꜣ (Pyr) ‘the morrow, morning’; ‘der zweite Tag, das Morgen, der Morgen
(neben Tagesmitte und Abend); morgen’ (Faulkner 1962: 85; Ember 1911: 88; Wb
� ب� كbakara ‘es war zur Zeit der Morgendämmerung’
I 481; Sethe 1962: 120) || Ar �ر
(Wahrmund I 242);
~ Aleppo bǝkra/bukra ‘demain’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 57) ~ Damascus bǝkra
‘morgen, bald’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 153) ~ Palest bukra ‘Morgen (adv.)’ (Bauer 1957:
209) ~ Egypt bukra/bakir ‘tomorrow’ (Spiro 1895: 55) ~ Cyrenaica (Libya)
bukra ‘domani’ (Griffini 1913: 93) ~ Djidjelli bākur ‘morgen’ (Ph. Marçais
1956: 43) ~ Sudan bākiriyya ‘morning’ (LDA 57) ~ S. Arabia bākir ‘de bonne
heure’ (Landberg 1909: 533) ~ Khābūra bēkir ‘tomorrow, tomorrow-morning’
(Brockett 1985: 61) ~ Oman bākur ‘morgen’ (Reinhardt 1894: 43) ~ Ḥassāniyya
bakkaṛ ‘partir de bonne heure’ (D. Cohen 1963: 124).
50 b-l-ǧ
brg (LE) ‘leuchten, glänzen (von den Augen)’ (Wb II 466) || Ar ب��ل��جbalaǧa
�
‘schimmern, leuchten (Morgenröte)’ (Wahrmund I 248);
~ Marazig blag ‘apparaître (aube, jour)’ (Boris 1958: 31) ~ Najd ablaǧ ‘blitzend
(vom Schwert)’ (Socin 1901 III 249) ~ Palest balǧa ‘la nuit de 3 à 4’ (Denizeau
1960: 486) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨balaǧ⟩ ‘to shine’ (Corriente 1997: 61).
51 b-l-d
ن
bnd/bꜣd.t (Gr) ‘Acker’ (Wb II 464) || Ar ب��ل�دbalad, pl � ب��ل�د اbuldān ‘land, village’;
‘Stadt, Provinz, Land’ (Hava 1982: 44; Wahrmund I 250);
~ Lebanon balad ‘lieu, endroit, pays’ (Feghali 1919: 97, 27) ~ Palest balad,
pl buldān ‘Dorf’ (Bauer 1957: 77) ~ Kǝndērīb balad ‘id.’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 18)
~ Ḥassāniyya bled ‘lieu’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 91) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨balda⟩ ‘town’
(Corriente 1997: 62).
52 b-l-ġ
~ Najd al-bilġih ‘anyway; the point is’ (Sowayan 1992: 249) ~ Aleppo balaġ
‘atteindre l’âge de puberté’; ballaġ ‘faire parvenir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 61)
~ Marazig bǝlaġ ‘atteindre, parvenir, arriver’ (Boris 1958: 46).
53 b-l-l
(i) bꜣj (Med) ‘feucht sein (unter Anderem vom Schweiß)’; bꜣy ‘foot ewer’; bꜣi҆w
‘damp (adj.)’ (Wb I 417; Faulkner 1962: 77) ~ Akkad balālu ‘to blend, mingle,
ّ
concoct’; ballu ‘mixed (medicinal and aromatic substances)’ (Parpola 2007: 13;
CAD II 63) || Ar ب�لballa ‘to moisten’ (Lane 242);
~ Aleppo ball ‘mouiller complètement en plongeant un court instant
dans l’eau’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 62) ~ Damascus nball ‘naß, feucht werden’
(Grotzfeld 1965: 153) ~ Palest ball ‘naß machen’; balle ‘Nässe’ (Bauer 1957: 216;
Kampffmeyer 1936: 6) ~ Yemen ball ‘bagnare’ (Rossi 1939: 194) ~ Najd blāl ‘mois-
ture’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 328) ~ Iraq ballal ‘wet, soak’ (Woodhead & Beene
1967: 43) ~ Awlād ʿAli blīle, pl blāyil ‘Thräne’ (Hartmann 1899: 74) ~ Ḥassāniyya
bell ‘humecter’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 81) ~ Morocco mbellel ‘moist’ (Sobelman &
Harrell 1963: 126).
(ii) brbr (LE) ‘kochen; Art Flüssigkeit in einem Kyphirezept; Getränk oder
Speise’ (Wb I 466; Hannig 1995: 256) ~ Copt ⲃⲣⲃⲣ ‘to boil’ (Crum 1939: 42) ||
< Ar *balbal;
~ Tangier belbūla ‘orge ecrasée, mouillée et cuite à la vapeur’ (W. Marçais
1911: 235) ~ Aleppo balbal rīqo ‘humecter sa langue pour étancher sa soif (: ani-
mal)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 58) ~ Egypt balbil ‘moisten’; balbila ‘act of moisten-
ing, wetting’ (Spiro 1895: 55).
54 b-n-ḥ
i҆mnḥ (NK) ‘Schlächter’; ‘butcher’ (Wb I 87, II 84; Hannig 1995: 340; Ember 1930:
62) || Ar �� بbanaḥa ‘concidit in partes et divisit (carnem)’ ‘zerschneiden, in
نح
Portionen zerlegen’ (Freytag 1837: 45; Wahrmund I 259).
55 b-n-n¹
bnn (LE) ‘to beget, become erect (of male)’; ‘begatten; erzeugen; Bezeichnung
des Phallus’; bnbn ‘als eine sexuelle Betätigung’ (Faulkner 1962: 82; Wb I 459,
96 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
460; Hannig 1995: 254) || Ar. banā ‘cohabiter avec une / sa femme, avoir des fils,
des enfants mâles, adopter quelqu’un pour fils, en faire son fils’ (DAF I 168);
~ Daθīna ⟨bannan⟩ ‘élever un enfant’ (GD 210) ~ Syria binn ‘Sohn’
(Kampffmeyer 1936: 7) ~ Damascus tbanna ‘to adopt’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 4)
~ Aleppo ʾǝbǝn, pl bnīn ‘fils’ (Barthélemy 1935–54: 65); ǝbǝn ‘Sohn’ (Sabuni 1980:
178) ~ Palest bint mitbannte ‘das jungfräuliche Mädchen’ (Schmidt & Kahle 1918
I 272) ~ Mardin ǝbǝn, pl bnīn ‘Sohn, Junge, Knabe’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 48)
~ Malta ⟨benniena⟩ ‘culla’; ⟨bennen⟩ ‘muovere la culla, indurre sonno ai fan-
ciulli’ (Vassalli 1796: 36).
56 b-n-n²
bnr (OK)‘(be) sweet, pleasant; dates’; ‘süss sein, süss; angenehm)’: bnrt ‘sweet-
ness’; bnr.tw ‘Süßigkeiten’; ‘confection’; bnr ‘die Dattel als Nahrungsmittel’; bnr
mrw.t ‘lovable’ (Faulkner 1962: 83; DLE I 135; Wb I 461, 462, 463; Brockelmann
ّة ن
(AHW I 138) || Ar. ��� ب�نbannah, pl � ب�ن��اbinān ‘sweet or pleasant odour’ (Lane 258);
1932: 105) ~ Dem bn ‘süss, angenehm; Süsse’ (DG 117) ~ Akkad bunnu ‘das Gute’
57 b-n-n³
bnn (MK) ‘bead, pellet’; ‘boulette, pilule’; ‘Kügelchen der ‘Myrrhe’ als Medi
kament; kleine Perle aus Stein’ (Faulkner 1962: 83; Lacau 1972: 339; Wb II 460)
~ Dem bnn.t ‘Kugel’ (DG 118) || Ar. bunn ‘Kaffeebohne’ (Wahrmund I 258);
~ Aleppo bǝnn ‘café vert ou torréfié en grains ou en poudre’ (Barthélemy
1935–69: 64) ~ Damascus bǝnn ‘coffee’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 44) ~ Palest
binn ‘Kaffeebohnen’ (Bauer 1957: 168) ~ Sudan bunn ‘(coffee) beans’ (LDA 60)
~ Oman bunn ‘Kaffee’ (Reinhardt 1894: 42, 269).
56. b-n-n ² – 61. b-w-ḥ ² 97
58 b-w-b
bꜣbꜣ(w) (Pyr)/bbt (BD) ‘hole, cave’; ‘Loch, Höhlung’ (Ember 1930: 43; Calice 1936:
أ
60; Faulkner 1962: 43, 82; Wb II 419) ~ Akkad bābu ‘door, entrance’
ن
(CAD II 14)
~ Copt ⲃⲏⲃ ‘cave’ (Crum 1939: 28) || Ar � ب�ا بbāb, pl � � ب�وا بʾabwāb/� ب���ي ب��اbībān
‘door, gate, place of entrance’ (Lane 272);
~ Aleppo bāb, pl bwāb ‘porte’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 67) ~ Suxne bāb, pl
būb ‘Tür’ (Behnstedt 1994: 217) ~ Nabk bōb ‘id.’ (Gralla 2006: 40) ~ Palest bāb,
pl ibwāb ‘id.’ (Bauer 1957: 308) ~ Egypt bāb, pl bwāb ‘door’ (Spiro 26) ~ Malta
⟨bieb, pl bwieb⟩ ‘porta’ (Vassalli 1796: 42).
59 b-w-ǧ
ّ ���ت
wbg (LE) ‘to light, shine (of the sun)’; ‘leuchten, scheinen (von der Sonne);
erleuchten, hellen’ (Faulkner 1962: 82; Wb I 296; Hannig 1995: 189) || Ar بو ج
�
tabawwaǧa ‘to flash all over the sky (lightning)’ (Hava 1982: 50);
~ Najd nbāǧ ‘to become resplendent, to appear in its lustre, to dawn’
(Kurpershoek 1999: 336).
60 b-w-ḥ¹
bꜣḥ ‘front, phallus’; ‘das männliche Glied, insbesondere die Harnröhre’ (Ember
1930: 44; Wb I 419) ~ Copt ⲃⲁϩ/ⲡⲁϩ ‘penis (?)’ (Crum 1939: 47b) ~ Sab bḥt
‘phallus’ (Avanzini 1980: 149) || Ar ب�وbūḥ ‘Wurzel, Ursprung, Geschlechtsteil’
ح
(Wahrmund I 271).
61 b-w-ḥ²
mḥyt (Pyr) ‘Flut’: mḥ.t wr ‘die grosse Flut’ (Wb II 122); mḥj ‘be flooded, drown,
be drowned’; mḥ ‘overflow (of Nile), inundate, swim’; mḥt ‘flood waters’; smḥy
ة
‘to flood land’ (Ember 1930: 60; Faulkner 1962: 114, 229); cf. i҆bḥ (MK) ‘feucht
sein’; i҆bḥw ‘Wasser sprengen’ (Wb I 64) || Ar �� ب�ا حbāḥah, pl ب�وbūḥ ‘great quan-
ح
tity of water’; ‘haute mer’ (Hava 1982: 51; Dozy I 126);
~ Lebanon bāḥa ‘water’; bawwaḥ ‘boire beaucoup d’eau’; bawwaḥ l-ʾarḍ ‘irri-
guer la terre jusqu’à ce qu’elle soit submergée’ (Denizeau 1960: 52) ~ N. Yemen
bāḥ ‘hinunterfließen’ (Wasser); mabāḥ as-sayl ‘Stelle, wo der Sturzbach hinun-
terstürzt’ (Behnstedt 1992: 118).
98 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
62 b-w-r
bꜣ (OK) ‘hack up the earth, hoe crops’; ‘hacken, aufhacken’ (Wb I 415; Faulkner
أ ض
1962: 77) ~ br ‘Steingebiet’ (Hannig 2011: 256) ~ Syr būrā ‘uncultivated land’
(Sokoloff 2009: 130) ~ Akkad bāru ‘open country’ (CDA 39) || Ar )� ر��) ب�ور
(ʾarḍ) bawr ‘land not sown’ (Lane 274);
~ Palest būr ‘Brachland’ (Dalman II 39), ʾarḍ būr ‘Brachfeld’ (Bauer 1957: 65)
~ Egypt ʾarḍĭ būr ‘wasteland’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 111).
63 b-w-ʿ
bʿḥ (LE) ‘to flood, overflow, supply; flood, inundation, well irrigated land’ (DLE
I 132);
~ Lebanon bawwaʿ ‘to absorb a lot of water’; tbawwaʿ ‘be full of water, be
submerged under water (terrain)’ (Frayha 1973: 18); cf. 60. b-w-ḥ¹.
64 b-y-t
65 b-y-n
wbn (OK) ‘appear, rise, shine’; East, Levant; ‘aufgehen, glänzen; scheinen
(von der Sonnen und Gestirne)’: wbnj ‘der Leuchtende als Bezeichnung des
Sonnengottes’ (Faulkner 1962: 41; DLE I 97; Wb I 292, 294; Ember 1913: 120);
i҆ʿḥ-wbn(.w) (Personennamen) ‘der Mond leuchtet’ (Ranke 1935: 12): mi҆ Rʿ wbn
‘like Re when he shines’ (Davies 1997: 274) ~ Dem i҆w i҆ʿḥ wbn ‘wenn der Mond
ن
aufgeht’ (DG 85) ~ Akkad būnu ‘appearance’ (CAD II 320) || Saf bn ‘to be mani-
fest’ (Al-Jallad 2015: 309) ~ Ar � ب�اbāna ‘it became distinct, apparent, … clear,
plain’ (Lane 286);
62. b-w-r – 68. t-r-b 99
~ Sudan bayyan ‘rise (of moon)’ (LDA 67) ~ Yemen bān ‘apparire’ (Rossi
1939: 192) ~ Aleppo bān ‘paraître, devenir visible’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 76)
~ Palest bayyan ‘zum Vorschein kommen’ (Bauer 1957: 348) ~ Rwala abyen
‘more visible’ (Musil 1928: 343) ~ Sinai bayyin ‘clear’ (Stewart 1990: 208) ~ Egypt
bān ‘become manifest or visible’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 118) ~ Tripoli (Libya)
bān ‘apparire’ (Griffini 1913: 15).
66 t-b-t
tb.t ‘Kasten’; cf. dbꜣt (MK) ‘Sarkophag, Steinsarg; Schrein, Sarg; Götterschrein’
(Wb V 261) ~ Dem tb.t ‘Kasten’; tbj.t ‘Sarg, Schrein, Kasten’ (DG 618, 622) ~ Copt
67 t-b-n
Copt ⲥⲱⲟⲩⲃⲉⲛ ‘grass’ (Crum 1939: 369a) || Ar � ت�ب�� نtibn ‘straw’ (Hava 1982: 56);
~ Aleppo tǝbǝn, pl tbān ‘paille hachée’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 80) ~ Mharde
tǝbǝn ‘Stroh’ (Yoseph 2012: 153) ~ Iraq tibin ‘straw’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967:
54) ~ S. Arabia ⟨tibl⟩ [= tibn] ‘paille’ (Landberg 1909: 536).
68 t-r-b
besmirched’ (Crum 1939: 410) || Ar � ت�ر بtarb/turb/� ت�را بturāb ‘earth, dust’ (Hava
tnm (ME) ‘Schmutz’ (Wb V 312) ~ Copt ⲧⲱⲗⲉⲃ/ⲧⲁⲗⲉϥ/ⲧⲱⲗⲙ ‘be defiled,
1982: 58);
~ Oman trāb ‘Erde’ (Reinhardt 1894: 44) ~ Aleppo ṭrāb, pl ṭrēyeb ‘de la terre,
de la poussière’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 473) ~ Palmyra tṛāḅa ‘argile’ (Cantineau
1934 II 26) ~ Damascus ṭṛāb ‘earth’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 75) ~ Palest turbe
‘Grab’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 8) ~ Nabk tṛōb ‘Staub, Erde’ (Gralla 2006: 16)
100 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
~ Iraq ṭġāb ‘dust’ (Abu-Haidar 1991: 29) ~ Malta ⟨trab⟩ ‘terra, polvere’ (Vassalli
1796: 134).
69 t-r-t-r
Dem tryꜣ ‘tremble’ (DG) ~ Copt ⲧⲣⲣⲉ ‘to be afraid’ (Crum 1939: 431b) || Ar ت�رت�ر
ت
tartara ‘bewegen, schütteln’ (Wahrmund I 312); ت���رت�رtatartara ‘to be shaken’
(Hava 1982: 570);
~ Palest tartar ‘erstarren vor Kälte, Furcht’ (Bauer 1957: 102) ~ Malta ⟨terter,
iterter⟩ ‘patir freddo, tremare’ (Vassalli 1796: 94).
70 t-f-ḥ
ف
‘Apfel’ (DG 680) ~ Copt ϫ(ⲉ)ⲙⲡⲉϩ ‘apple’ (Crum 1939: 771b) || Ar ت������اtuffāḥ, pl
ḏpḥ/tpḥ (NK) ‘der Apfel’ (Wb V 568; Hannig 1999: 1005) ~ Dem ḏmpḥ/ḏpḫ
تف ف ح
����� ������اtafāfīḥ ‘apples’ (Hava 1982: 60);
يح
~ Aleppo tǝffāḥ n.coll., n.un. -a, pl -āt ‘pomme, pommier’ (Barthélemy
1935–69: 86) ~ Palest tuffāḥ ‘Äpfel’ (Bauer 1957: 22) ~ Egypt tuffāḥ/tiffāḥ ‘apples’
(Badawi & Hinds 1986: 130) ~ Malta ⟨tuffieħ⟩ ‘apples’ (Aquilina 1990: 1486).
71 t-f-f
tf (Pyr) ‘der Speichel, ausspeien (besonders mit Bezug auf die Schöpfung der
ّف
Hannig 1999: 923; DLE II 207) ~ Copt ⲧⲁϥ ‘spittle’ (Crum 1939: 453a) || Ar ����ت
Göttin Tefnut durch Atum); spucken, vomieren’; tpi҆ ‘spew out’ (Wb V 297;
72 t-k-k
tkk/tktk (MK) ‘take by violence; violate frontier, attack, assail’; ‘angreifen’; tkkw
ّ
‘attackers’ (Ember 1930: 112; Faulkner 1962: 302; DLE II 221; Wb V 331, 336); tkk/
tktk ‘angreifen’ || Ar ت��كtakka ‘zerschneiden, zu boden treten’ (Wahrmund I
340); cf. 580. k-t-t²;
~ Rwala katt ‘to rush upon, assault’ (Musil 1928: 598) ~ Daθīna katt
⟨katt⟩‘démolir, abattre, ruiner’ (GD 2554) ~ Palest takk/katt, tkitt, bikitt ‘läßt
herunterfallen, herunterkommen, abfallen’ (Bauer 1957: 331, 336; Kampffmeyer
1936: 63) ~ Lebanon takk, ytikk ‘secouer, faire tomber de’; taktek ‘taper à
petits coups (sur un vêtement, un tapis, etc., pour en faire tomber la pous-
sière)’ (Denizeau 1960: 65) ~ Iraq katt ‘throw out’; kattit ‘send off, shoo away’
(Woodhead & Beene 1967: 734) ~ Ḥesbān katt ‘to dash away’ (Palva 1978: 99)
~ Kǝndērīb katt ‘(Flüssigkeit), eingedickt, reduziert werden’ (O. Jastrow 2005:
121) ~ Sinai takk ‘to empty something out’ (Stewart 1990: 271).
73 t-l-l
ṯnn (NK) ‘Ort wo Kraut wächst’; ‘mounds, heaps’ (Wb V 384; Hoch 1994: 356)
ّ
~ Copt ⲧⲁⲗ ‘heap, hillock’ (Crum 1939: 408a) ~ Akkad tilu(m)/tillu/telu ‘(ruin)
mound; heap of grain’ (CDA 406) || Ar ت�لtall, pl tilāl ‘Hügel’ (Wahrmund I 343);
~ Aleppo tall, pl tlūl ‘colline’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 91) ~ Palest tall, pl tlūl/
tlāl ‘Hügel’ (Bauer 1957: 161) ~ Egypt tall, pl tilāl/tulūl ‘hill, heap’ (Spiro 1895: 81)
~ Marazig talla/tall ‘le haut Tell’ (Boris 1958: 62).
74 t-m-s-ḥ
msḥ/mzḥ (LE) ‘crocodile’ (Faulkner 1962: 117; DLE I 205): ʿḥʿ.n i҆ṯj n si҆ msḥ
ت
‘Daraufhin ergriff sie ein Krokodil’ (Lepper 2008: 54) ~ Dem msḥ ‘der Krokodil’
(DG 179) ~ Copt ⲙⲥⲁϩ ‘id.’ (Crum 1939: 187b) || Ar �م��س�اtimsāḥ ‘Krokodil’
ح
(Wahrmund I 250);
~ Aleppo ǧǝld timsāḥ ‘peau de crocodile’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 92)
~ Damascus tǝmsāḥ, pl tamasīḥ ‘crocodile’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 57) ~ Palest
mtamsiḥ ‘(Haut) so hart wie eine Krokodilshaut’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 9)
~ Egypt timsāḥ, pl tamasīḥ ‘crocodile’ (Spiro 1895: 84) ~ Morocco timsaḥ ‘croc-
odile’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 42).
102 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
75 t-m-m
76 t-n-r
trr (NK) ‘der Ofen des Bäckers’; ‘oven’; ta=ru₂=ru₂ (Wb V 318; Hoch 1994:
ّ
‘portable stove or firepot’ (BDB 1072) || Ar ��ت ن�ورtannūr, pl ��ت ن��ا ن�ي��رtanānīr ‘Ofen,
359; DLE II 162) ~ Akkad tinūru ‘oven’ (Parpola 2007: 125) ~ Heb ַתּנּורtannūr
77 t-w-r
i҆trw (Pyr) ‘river’; ‘der Fluss’ (Faulkner 1962: 333; Wb I 146) || Ar ت�ا رtāra ‘fließen
(Wasser)’ (Wahrmund I 360).
78 t-w-h
thj (Pyr) ‘cross, transgress, err; be forgetful (of heart), disobey’; ‘übertreten,
sündigen, falsch handeln, abweichen vom Wege, übertragen vom Herzen, ver-
gesslich sein’: i҆b th ‘the heart is astray’ (Ember 1917: 86; Faulkner 1962: 300; Wb
75. t-m-m – 81. θ-w-r 103
V 319; Hannig 2003: 1434) || Ar ت�ا هtāha ‘go astray’; ‘am Verstande getrübt sein;
zerstreut sein’ (Hava 1982: 265; Wahrmund I 357, 363);
~ Damascus tāh ‘to lose one’s bearings’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 20)
~ Negev tāh, bitūh ‘to be lost’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Egypt tāh, yutūh ‘to lose
one’s way, go astray’ (Spiro 1895: 67) ~ Sudan tāh ‘go astray’; tāih ‘vain, con-
ceited’ (LDA 82) ~ ʿAnazeh tāwah ‘perdre’ (Landberg 1940: 8) ~ Rwala
tāh, itīh ‘lose one’s way, to stray’; tāyih, pl tiyāha ‘wandering around’; lā
yetīhen ‘they err not’; tiht ‘I lost my way’ (Musil 1928: 318, 399, 520, 327)
~ Najd ⟨tīhī, pl tayāhā⟩ ‘wildes Kamel’ (Socin 1901 III 251).
79 θ-d-y
80 θ-n-y
ّ
230) || Ar �ٍ ث�ا نθānin ‘second’; ث� ن�ىθannā ‘to repeat, reiterate an action’ (Hava
(i) snw (Gr) ‘the number two’; snnw ‘(ordinal number) second’ (Faulkner 1962:
1982: 73);
~ Palest θāni ‘der Zweite; der andere’ (Bauer 1957: 385, 14) ~ Damascus tāni
‘other’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 164) ~ Kǝndērīb θēni ‘nächster’ (O. Jastrow 2005:
28) ~ Malta ⟨tieni⟩ ‘secondo’ (Vassalli 1796: 114).
(ii) sn (Pyr) ‘brother’; ‘Bruder’; snw ‘companion, fellow, equal’ (Faulkner
1962: 230; Wb IV 150); snsn ‘sich vereinen mit, sich gesellen; sich verbrüdern’
(Hannig 2003: 1159; Lepper 2008: 54).
81 θ-w-r
sr (Pyr) ‘sheep, ram’; ‘Schafbock, Widder’ (Faulkner 1962: 235; Wb III 462)
ث
~ Heb ׁשֹורšōr a head of cattle’ (BDB 1004) ~ Amh sawr ‘Taurus (zodiac)’ (Kane
1990: 571) || Saf θr ‘bull’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 638) ~ Ar �ورθawr,
ن
pl � ث�ي��راθīrān ‘bull’ (Hava 1982: 74);
104 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
~ N. Yemen θawrin ‘Stier’ (Behnstedt 1987: 239) ~ Oman θōr, pl θīrān ‘id.’
(Reinhardt 1894: 73) ~ Đ̣ far θōr, pl θīrān ‘id.’ (Rhodokanakis 1911: 7) ~ S.E.
Anatolia θawṛ, pl θwāṛ ‘Stier, Ochse’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 81) ~ Āzǝx sawṛ, pl
sīrān/swāṛ ‘Stier’ (Wittrich 2001: 114, 105, 21) ~ Sine sawr, pl swēr ‘Ochse’ (Talay
2015: 280, 281) ~ Palest θor, pl θīrān ‘Stier’ (Bauer 1957: 290).
82 ǧ-b-b¹
ة
gbb (Pyr) ‘earth’; ‘Name des Erdgottes Geb; auch für Erdboden’ (Faulkner 1962: 288;
Wb V 164) || Ar �� ج���بو�بǧubūbah ‘morceau, motte de terres, de boue’ (DAF I 246).
~ Yemen ǧabūbah ‘Berg, Hugel’; ǧibb/ǧubb ‘Terrasse’ (Behnstedt 1992: 162).
83 ǧ-b-b²
ّ
ꜣgb (Pyr) ‘Wasserfülle, Flut, Überschwemmung’ (Wb I 22) || Ar � ج�� بǧubb, pl
� ج� ب���ا بǧibāb ‘well, cistern, pit’ (Hava 1982: 75);
~ Egypt žibb ‘unterirdische Wasserleitung’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994:
55) ~ Rwala ǧubb ‘an artificial well with spring water’; ǧebb ‘a deep rain well
or cistern, wider at the bottom than at the top’ (Musil 1928: 678) ~ Aleppo
ǧǝbb, pl ǧbāb ‘puits; silo (à la campagne); réservoir (pour conserver l’huile)’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 101) ~ Palmyra cubb, pl cbūb ‘puits, fosse’ (Cantineau
1934: 118) ~ Mharde ǧbēb ‘Brunnen’ (Yoseph 2012: 158) ~ Kǝndērīb ǧǝbb, pl ǧbēb
‘Zisterne’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 29) ~ Yemen ǧubb ‘cellar, basement’ (Piamenta
1990: 59).
84 ǧ-b-ǧ-b
gbj (NK) ‘schwach, elend sein, schwach sein (von Personen)’; gbgb (Med)
‘lahm sein’; ‘be lame’ (Wb V 161; Faulkner 1962: 289); Calice 1936: 41) ~ Dem
ّ
gbj ‘schwach’ (DG 578) ~ Amh žäbbäbä ‘to wobble, totter’ (Kane 1990: 1865) ||
Ar � ج�� بǧabba ‘sich fürchten’ (Wahrmund I 402);
~ Iraq tǧabǧab ‘to be unsure, hesitant, timid, shy’ (Woodhead & Beene
1967: 66) ~ Damascus mžabžab ‘craintif, qui reste à l’écart’ (Denizeau 1960: 73)
~ Aleppo mǧafǧaf ‘qui a honte, qui éprouve de l’embarras, gêné en présence de
(qqn)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 114) ~ Lebanon džabžab ‘to distance oneself from
82. ǧ-b-b ¹ – 87. ǧ-b-h 105
society’ (Frayha 1973: 24) ~ Palest innās ǧabǧabat šway ʿan baʿḍha ‘Die Leute
hielten sich ein wenig voneinander zurück’ (Schmidt & Kahle II 12, 14).
85 ǧ-b-r
ḏbꜣ (Pyr) ‘ersetzen, vergelten’; ‘restore, replace, repay’ (Wb V 555; Faulkner 1962:
321) || Ar ج���برǧabara ‘to be restored to a former state’ (Hava 1982: 76);
~ Egypt gabar ‘repair’ (Spiro 1895: 92) ~ Tangier žbaṛ ‘trouver’ (W. Marçais
1911: 247) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨anjabar⟩ ‘be restored’ (Corriente 1997: 88) ~ S. Arabia
⟨ǧabar⟩ ‘contenter, satisfaire (chez tous les Bédouins d’Arabie)’ (Landberg
1909: 540) ~ N. Yemen ǧabar ‘beistehen, erhalten’ (Behnstedt 1992: 163)
~ Kǝndērīb ǧabaṛ ‘zwingen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 29) ~ Aleppo ǧabar ‘obliger, assis-
ter qqn dans le besoin’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 101) ~ Damascus ja žāber ‘o (Gott)
der du Gedeihen gibst’ (Bergsträßer 1924: 107) ~ Lebanon jabar ‘faire avoir de
bonheur par faire profiter de (fî)’; jabr ‘compensation, bonheur’ (Feghali 1935:
64; 1938: 589) ~ Palest žabar ‘to console’ (Piamenta 2000: 199); ǧabr ‘zufrieden-
stellen’ (Kampffmeyer 1 936: 10); maǧbūr il-xāṭir ‘höchst zufrieden’ (Schmidt &
Kahle 1918 I 273) ~ Ḥassāniyya jbaṛ ‘trouver’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 147) ~ Malta
⟨ġabar⟩ ‘cogliere, raccogliere, risarcire, ristaurare’ (Vassalli 1796: 207).
86 ǧ-b-l
dbn (MK) [< *dbl < *ǧbl] ‘builder’s mortar’; ‘etwas das Maurer und Töpfer
gebrauchen’ (Faulkner 1962: 311; Wb V 438); dbn n jqdw ‘Ton des Töpfers; Dung
des Maurers (zum Bau des Hauses)’ (Hannig 1995: 975) || Ar ج� ب���لǧabala ‘for-
men, bilden, schaffen’; ‘mix water with clay’ (Wahrmund I 406; Hava 1982: 76);
~ Kǝndērīb ǧǝbbālǝt ṭīn ‘Lehmmörtel’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 29) ~ Aleppo ǧabal
‘délayer avec de l’eau (du plâtre, du mortier); pétrir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69:
102) ~ ʿAqra yǝǧbǝl ‘anrühren’ (O. Jastrow 1990: 331) ~ Palest ǧabal ‘Mörtel
anmachen, bereiten’; ǧabbāl ‘Mörtelzurichter’; maǧbal ‘Mörtelplatz’ (Bauer
1957: 210; Dalman VII 45).
87 ǧ-b-h
ة
gmḥt (MK) ‘forehead’; ‘Locke oder Flechte des Haares’ (Ember 1930: 80; Wb V
171) ~ Jibb gǝbhέt ‘brow’ (Johnstone 1981: 69) || Ar �� ج����ب�هǧabhah ‘forehead’ (Hava
1982: 77);
106 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
88 ǧ-θ-θ
ḏt/ḏs (Pyr) ‘body of person, image, bodily form of god’; ‘Leib’ (Faulkner 1962:
317, 251; Wb V 503, 199): jp.n.f ḏt.f ‘er hat, seinen Leib bezahlt’ (Assmann
ة ّ || ثSaf ǧθ ‘body, corpse’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 633)
1969: 113)
~ Ar ����� جǧuθθah ‘corps, taille et volume du corps (tout de l’homme que des
animaux …)’ (DAF I 251);
~ Yemen ǧiθθeh ‘cadavere’ (Rossi 1939: 197) ~ Lebanon žette ‘corps’ (Feghali
1938: 748) ~ Palest ǧiθθe ‘Körper’ (Bauer 1957: 180) ~ Egypt gitta, pl gitat ‘car-
cass, corpse, body’ (Spiro 1895: 94); ǧitta ‘Körper’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994:
56) ~ Marazig žetta ‘cadavre d’homme mort depuis quelque temps déjà’ (Boris
1958: 76).
89 ǧ-ḥ-š
gḥś (OK) ‘gazelle’; ‘Gazelle (gazella dorcas)’ (Ember 1930: 91; Wb V 191; Hommel
90 ǧ-ḥ-m
gmḥ (MK) ‘catch sight of, espy, look at’; ‘sehen, erblicken; weit blicken (vom
�� ǧaḥama ‘to open
Auge)’ (Faulkner 1962: 289; Wb V 170; Ember 1930: 79) || Ar �ح
ج م
(the eyes)’; ‘die Augen öffnen und auf etwas richten’ (Hava 1982: 78; Wahrmund
I 413).
91 ǧ-d-l
mktr/mkdr/mgdr (LE) ‘tower’ (Wb V 631) ~ Copt ⲙⲓⲕⲧⲟⲗ ‘tower’ (Crum 1939:
�جمmiǧdal, pl ��ا د ل
214b) ~ Heb ִמגְ ָּדלmigdāl ‘tower’ (BDB 153) || Ar ��د ل �جمmaǧādil
‘castle’ (Hava 1982: 81);
~ Greater Syria maǧdal, pl maǧādil ‘entre dans la composition d’un grand
nombre de noms de villages libanais et syriens avec le sens de ⟨tour⟩’ (Denizeau
1960: 77).
92 ǧ-r-b
gꜣb/gꜣbw (LE) ‘basket’ (Janssen 1975: 357; DLE II 184) ~ Sab grm ‘waterskin,
waterbag’ (Biella 1982: 76) || Ar � �ج�را بǧirāb, pl � �ج�ر بǧurub/ǧurb ‘Ledersack’
(Wahrmund I 422); cf. 535. q-r-b;
~ Daθīna ⟨ǧarm⟩, pl ⟨ǧirām⟩ ‘pellisse en peau de mouton’ (GD 279) ~ Yemen
ǧarm, pl ǧirūm ‘pelliccia dei gabīlī (rozze casacche o mantelli)’ (Rossi 1939:
226) ~ Negev girbih ‘waterskin’ (Henkin 2010: 238) ~ Oman qarbe, pl qrāb
‘Schlauch’ (Reinhardt 1894: 70) ~ Kuwait ǧirāb ‘small gazelle skin bag for
carrying coffee on march’ (Dickson 1949: 636) ~ Aleppo ǧrāb ‘sac de cuir’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 106) ~ Iraq girba, pl girab ‘water skin; water bag made
of canvas; clay water jug’; grāb ‘sheath, scabbard (for a knife or sword)’; ǧrāb,
pl ǧurbān ‘Schlauch mit Griffen für Eßwaren’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 386;
Weißbach 1930) ~ Lebanon ǧrāb ‘sac de voyage’ (Feghali 1938: 749) ~ Palest
ǧrāb, pl ǧurbān ‘Ledertasche für Mehl; Hirtentasche, der Schafschlauch;
Hirtentasche, Brotbeutel’ (Bīr Zēt; Schmidt & Kahle 1918: I 273; Bauer 1957: 191,
302, 158) ~ Tunis gǝrba ‘outre en peau’ (D. Cohen 1975: 28).
Cf. Gk κίρβα ‘leather pouch’ (Beekes 2010: 702).
108 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
93 ǧ-r-r
gr (Pyr) ‘be silent, be quiet, still; cease, desist’; ‘schweigen (und nicht reden),
verstummen’; grw ‘silent man’; ‘der
ّ أschweigende’ (Faulkner 1962: 290; Wb V
�
179, 180; Calice 1936: 85) || Ar � �ج رʾaǧarra ‘to prevent s.o. from speaking’ (Hava
1982: 83);
~ Yemen staǧarr ‘ruminare’ (Rossi 1939: 234) ~ Iraq ǧurr nafsak min hal-
qað̣ iyya ‘Get out of that affair!’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 70) ~ Ḥassāniyya
žaṛṛ ‘il a ruminé’ (D. Cohen 1963: 25).
94 ǧ-r-n
95 ǧ-r-y
gr/garaya (NK) ‘stream’ (DLE II 191; Hoch 1994: 350) ~ Ḥar gerō ‘to flow’
(Johnstone 1977: 162) || Ar �ج�ر�ىǧarā ‘fließen’ (Wahrmund I 429);
~ Aleppo ǧara ‘couler (: eau, sang repandu)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 110)
~ Kǝndērīb ǧǝri ‘fließen’: ṃayy ǧāri ‘fließendes Wasser’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982:
86; Jastrow 2005: 30) ~ Palest ǧiri/ǧara ‘fließen’ (Bauer 1957: 113) ~ Egypt giri
‘to run, flow’ (Spiro 1895: 100) ~ Malta ⟨ilma ġieri⟩ ‘flowing water’ (own obs.).
96 ǧ-s-r¹
guššuru ‘superior in strength’ (CAD V 56, 108, 143) || Ar ج���سرǧasara ‘oser quelque
chose, être hardi et courageux’ (DAF I 293);
~ Palest ǧasūr ‘kühn, mutig’; ǧasāra ‘Kühnheit, Mut’; itǧāsar ‘wagen’
(Bauer 1957: 184, 212) ~ S.E. Anatolia ǧāsūr ‘mutig’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 87)
~ Palmyra ssečṛa ‘avoir l’audace de, oser’ (Cantineau 1934 II 9) ~ Aleppo ǧasūr
‘hardi, audacieux, téméraire’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 112) ~ Damascus žasāra
‘boldness’; itžāsar ‘to dare’; žasūr ‘bold, brave’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 25, 60)
~ Iraq ǧasūr ‘hero’ (van Ess 1918: 152); ǧisar ‘to venture, dare’ (Woodhead &
Beene 1967: 72) ~ Oman gesūr ‘mutig’ (Reinhardt 1894: 62) ~ Najd ǧassar ‘to
embolden’ (Sowayan 1992: 254) ~ Yemen ǧasāra ‘coraggio’ (Rossi 1939: 201)
~ Sinai ǧassār ‘intrepid’ (C. Bailey 1991: 432) ~ Egypt gasūr ‘daring, coura-
geous, brave’; diyāba ǧāsara ‘angriffslustige Wölfe’ (Spiro 1895: 103; Behnstedt
& Woidich 1994: 64) ~ Morocco ḍṣara ‘impudence’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963:
104; cf. W. Marçais 1911: 441) ~ Algeria žesāra ‘hardiesse’; beddesāra ‘hardiment’
(Ben Sedira 1910: 280) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨jasar⟩ ‘daring, boldness’ (Corriente 1997:
96) ~ Ḥassāniyya dṣāṛa ‘effronterie’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 58).
97 ǧ-s-r²
ḏsr (Pyr) ‘support, raise, support’; ‘den Weg freimachen, freihalten’ (Ember
1930: 74; Faulkner 1962: 324; Wb V 615) ~ Akkad gišru/gušūru ‘beam, log, planks,
timber; bridge’ (M. Cohen 2011: 17, 27) || Ar ج���سرǧasara ‘construire un pont ou
une chaussée’ (DAF I 293);
~ Aleppo ǧǝsǝr, pl ǧsūra/dsūra ‘grand poutre placé en travers des solives
d’un plafond pour les soutenir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 112) ~ Damascus žǝsǝr, pl
žsūra ‘beam, bridge’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 19, 60, 28) ~ Palest ǧisr, pl ǧsūr(a)
‘Brücke, Balken’; ǧsūra Böschungen’ (Bauer 1957: 67, 40, 212; Kampffmeyer
1936: 11) ~ Iraq ǧisir, pl ǧsūra ‘beam’ (Clarity et al., 1964: 16) ~ Egypt ǧisr ‘Ufer
eines kleinen Kanals’; ǧisir ‘Damm, Feldrain, Feldweg’ (Behnstedt & Woidich
1994: 64).
98 ǧ-s-s
gś (NK) ‘salben’; ‘anoint someone’ (Wb V 201; Faulkner 1962: 291; Albright 1918:
251) ~ Heb [ ]גששgāšaš ‘to feel with the hand, stroke’ (BDB 178) || Ar ǧassa ‘to
feel with the hand’ (Hava 1982: 90);
~ Damascus yžǝss ǝn-nabḍ ‘tâter le pouls’ (Cantineau & Helbaoui 1953: 49)
~ Egypt gass ‘to feel, touch, take soundings’ (Spiro 1895: 102) ~ Al-Andalus
⟨nijassas⟩ ‘to feel or touch’ (Corriente 1997: 96)
110 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
99 ǧ-ṣ-ṣ
qḏ (NK) ‘Gips, Stuck’; ‘gypsum, plaster’ (Wb V 82; DLE II 162, 163); qa=ḏa/qi=ḏa
ّ ّ ق
‘gypsum, plaster’ [*gaṣṣ/giṣṣ] (Hoch 1994: 307) ~ Akkad gaṣṣ ‘gypsum’ (CAD
V 54) ~ Sab qṣm ‘plaster’ (Biella 1982: 464) || Ar ج����صǧaṣṣ/ ����صqaṣṣ ‘gypsum’
(Hava 1982: 76, 91, 607) [< *gaṣṣ] (Rabin 1951: 125);
~ Yemen guṣṣ ‘gesso, calce’ (Rossi 1939: 211, 158) ~ Kuwait ǧaṣṣ ‘lime, gyp-
sum’ (Dickson 1949: 636) ~ Iraq ǧuṣṣ ‘Gips’; ‘lime, mortar, plaster’ (Weißbach
1930: 337; Woodhead & Beene 1967: 73); taǧṣīṣ ‘plastering’ (van Ess 1918: 197)
~ Damascus ṭabʿo žaṣṣ ‘sein Charakter ist wie Gips’ (Bergsträßer 1924: 108)
~ Lebanon ǧaṣṣ ‘to become hard and dry (soil)’; ǧuṣṣ ‘lime mixed with water
for construction’ (Frayha 1973: 27) ~ S.E. Anatolia ǧaṣṣ ‘Gips’ (Vocke & Waldner
1982: 87).
100 ǧ-f-t
ḏft (LE) ‘kind of oil [oil of Alasia (i҆rs)]’ (Papyrus Anastasi IV 15, 2–4; Caminos
1954: 608; Hannig 1995: 1006) ~ Heb ּגֶ ֶפתgepet ‘peat made of olive peels; waste
of honeycombs’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 263; Klein 1987: 107);
This lexeme (omitted in Yahuda 1933: 303 and Koch 1994: 541) appears to be an ancient
N. West Semitic (Canaanite) lexeme.
~ Lebanon žeft ‘résidu d’olives’; žaffat ‘presser, écraser (les olives, le raisin)’
(M. Feghali 1928: 239, fn 2) ~ Bišmizzīn žifǝt ‘die Rückstände’ (Jiha 1964: 80)
~ Palest ǧift ‘Öltreber als Brennmaterial’ (Bauer 1957: 224); zift ‘moût d’olives
qui reste dans le sac après le pressage’ (Denizeau 1960: 221; Dalman IV 17)
~ Oman ǧift/yift ‘(pearl) oil used to soften leather diving gloves (xubaṭ) at the
beginning of the diving season’ (Holes 2001: 88); ǧaft/yift ‘a mixture concocted
from alum and pomegranate peel, crushed into fine powder mixed with sug-
ared water’ (Agius 2005: 148).
101 ǧ-l-ǧ
ḏꜣḏꜣ (MK) ‘head’; ‘Kopf’ (Faulkner 1962: 319; Wb V 533) ~ Dem ḏꜣḏꜣ ‘Kopf’
(DG 673) || Ar ج���ل��جǧalaǧ ‘Schädel’ (Wahrmund I 447).
�
Cf. Palest ǧimǧime ‘Schädel’ (Bauer 1957: 253) ~ Yemen ǧamǧama ‘id.’ (Behnstedt
1987: 241).
99. ǧ-ṣ-ṣ – 104. ǧ-l-l 111
102 ǧ-l-ǧ-l
ḏꜣḏꜣt (MK) ‘lyre’; ‘Harfe’ (Faulkner 1962: 320; Wb V 533; Hannig 1999: 997); ḏnḏn
‘das Klapper des Sistrum’ (Calice 1936: 89) || Ar ج���ل�� ج��لǧalǧala ‘erklingen lassen
(Tamburin, Castagnetten, Glöckchen)’ (Wahrmund I 447);
~ Oman gilgil ‘Klingel’ (Reinhardt 1894: 54) ~ Iraq ǧanāǧil/ǧnāǧil ‘gold or
silver anklets with bells attached’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 77) ~ S.E. Anatolia
čančan ‘klingeln’; ǧǝnēǧīl ‘Glöckchen (pl)’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 105, 92)
~ Azex ǧǝnǧǝl, pl ǧanēǧǝl ‘Glocke’ (Wittrich 2001: 103, 104) ~ Egypt gilgil/gingil,
pl galāgil ‘small bell, jingle bell’; galgil ‘resound, reverberate’: ʾir-raʿd galgil ‘the
thunder rumbled’ (Spiro 1895: 105; Badawi & Hinds 1986: 165) ~ Al-Andalus
⟨ǧulǧal⟩ ‘sleigh bell’ (Corriente 1997: 99) ~ Tunis žalžūl ‘grelot’ (D. Cohen 1975:
170) ~ Marazig želžel ‘grelot’ (Boris 1958: 87) ~ Djidjelli čenčūna, pl čnāčen
‘clochette’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 284, 363) ~ Malta ⟨čenčil⟩ ‘il sonare campanelli’;
⟨ġolġol/ġilġel, pl ġnieġol⟩ ‘sonaglio, sonagliuzzo’ (Vassalli 1796: 229, 219).
Cf. Yemen ṭanṭan ‘play the lute’ (Piamenta 1991: 309).
103 ǧ-l-d
ḏnd (Pyr) ‘be angry; angry like a baboon (i.e., noisy), or like a bull (i.e., menac-
ing), infuriated, wrath, angry man’; ‘zornig sein, wüten’ (Faulkner 1962: 320; Wb
V 471, 577, 579; Calice 1936: 225; DLE II 270; Goldwasser 2002: 17); dnd ‘name of
a demon’ (Breasted ت 1930: 474) ~ Copt ϭⲱⲛⲧ ‘anger, rage, wrath’ (Crum 1939:
� �
�
923b) || Ar �ج �ا ل�دtaǧālada ‘gegen einander fechten’ (Wahrmund I 449); cf. ج��د ل
ǧadila ‘to be quarrelsome’ (Hava 1982: 81);
~ Kǝndērīb ǧǧālad ‘losstürzen, angreifen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 30) ~ Aleppo
ǧalad ‘choc’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 116) ~ Bišmizzīn žādal ‘streiten mit’ (Jiha
1964: 132) ~ Malta ⟨ġlied⟩ ‘lotta, duello’ (Vassalli 1796: 222).
Note also the suggestively similar meaning patterns of the Egyptian lexemes ḏnḏn (108)
and qnd (536).
104 ǧ-l-l
ّ
ḏꜣyt (Pyr) ‘loincloth, robe’; ‘Zeugstoff, Kleid, Binde’ (Faulkner 1962: 319; DLE
II 261; Wb V 519); ḏꜣi҆w ‘loincloth’ (Faulkner 1962: 309) || Ar ج��لǧall ‘Decke,
Schleier’ (Wahrmund I 445);
~ Sinai ǧilāl ‘a rough cloth tied around a camel to protect it from flies; a cloak
work by destitute bedouin’ (C. Bailey 1991: 433) ~ Negev ǧilāl ‘a rough cloak’
112 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
(C. Bailey 1982: 152, fn 70) ~ Rwala ǧallalat ‘she wrapped herself in the ǧelāl
(blanket on which the horse or ass’s saddle is laid)’ (Musil 1928: 178) ~ Kǝndērīb
ǧlēl ‘Kleider’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 30) ~ Aleppo ǧlēl ‘housse, couvre-lit’; ǧallal
‘garnir (un lit) d’un couvre-pied’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 118) ~ Khawētna ǧlēl
‘Sattelzeug’ (Talay 1999: 81) ~ Palest ǧlāl ‘voile de visage (de femme)’ (Denizeau
1960: 86; Dalman V 325) ~ Egypt žlāl ‘mit Stroh gefüllter Sack als Ersatz für einen
Sattel; Decke unter dem Tragsattel, aber über dem Polster (Esel)’ (Behnstedt
& Woidich 1994: 68) ~ Ḥassāniyya žlāl ‘sash worn over one’s shoulder with a
ḥawli’ (Mali; Heath 2004: 307) ~ Ḥaḍramawt ⟨ğall⟩ ‘voile’ (Landberg 1901: 543)
~ Al-Andalus ⟨julli⟩ ‘horse-trappings’ (Corriente 1997: 100).
105 ǧ-m-r
qrmt (LE) ‘ashes, cinders, embers; smouldering embers’ (Hoch 1994: 301; DLE
II 156) ~ Dem krb ‘Asche’ (DG 565) ~ Copt ⲕⲣⲱⲙ ‘fire’; ⲕⲣⲱⲙ ‘smoke’; ⲕⲉⲣⲙⲉ
ة
‘ash, soot, dust’ (Crum 1939: 115b,116a) ~ Aram mgmr ‘live coals’ (Fitzmyer &
Harrington 1978: 326) || Ar � ج��مرǧamrah, pl ج��مرǧamr ‘burning coal’ (Hava
1982: 98);
~ Egypt gamra ‘ember, live coal’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 169) ~ Aleppo ǧamǝr
‘charbon ardent, braise allumée’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 120) ~ Iraq ǧamur (coll.)
‘embers, live coals’; n.un. ǧamra, pl -āt (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 76) ~ Rwala
ǧamra ‘red-hot coal’; ǧamrijje ‘bread baked on hot ashes’ (Musil 1928: 6, 92)
~ Djidjelli žmāṛ ‘braise’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 385) ~ Ḥassāniyya meǧmāṛ, pl
mǧāmǝṛ ‘réchaud’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 125) ~ Malta ⟨ġamra⟩ ‘bracia’ (Vassalli
1796: 208).
106 ǧ-m-l
1967: 76); ǧamāl ‘beauty’ (Blanc 1964: 39) ~ Damascus ʿal-ǝž-žmāl ‘all in all’;
žamāl ‘beauty’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 6, 20) ~ Tripoli (Libya) žmel ‘addizion-
are’ (Cesàro 1939: 204) ~ Tunis žǝmla ‘ensemble’ (D. Cohen 1975: 22) ~ Morocco
jǝmmǝl mǝn ‘compléter, parfaire, porter à son comble’; tjemmel ʿlā ‘rendre un
service, accorder un faveur’; jmīl ‘service signalé, service rendu; joli, charmant’
(Prémare II 233–4).
107 ǧ-n-b
ḏnb (MK) ‘deflect’; ‘abbiegen (vom Wege)’ (Faulkner 1962: 322; Breasted 1930:
574; Wb V 576; Calice 1936: 226; Hannig 1995: 1007) ~ Sab gnb ‘be on the side
of’ (Biella 1982: 73) ~ Ḥar b-ayámb ḏ- ‘beside’ (Johnstone 1977: 155) || Ar �ج���ن� ب
ǧanaba ‘se mettre à l’écart, s’éloigner en se plaçant à côté; éviter quelqu’un, le
fuir; se tenir à l’écart de quelque chose’ (DAF I 333);
~ Takrūna žannǝb ‘faire s’écarter qq., se déplacer lateralement’ (Marçais &
Guîga 1958–61: 655) ~ ʿAnazeh ǧannab ʿan ‘eviter’ (Landberg 1940: 10) ~ Sinai
ǧanīb ‘left (side, direction)’ (C. Bailey 1991: 433) ~ Najd ǧannab ‘to keep away
from’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 346) ~ Ḥama maʿ canab ‘abseits’ (Lewin 1966: 203)
~ Damascus ʿala žanab ‘aside’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 13) ~ Aleppo ǧamb ‘à
côté de (qqe ou qqn)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 122) ~ Iraq ǧannab ‘to avert from,
ward away from’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 91) ~ Oman gānib ‘Seite’; gembo
‘auf seiner Seite’ (Reinhardt 1894: 43, 404) ~ Yemen ǧanb ‘accanto’ (Rossi 1939:
190, 209) ~ Djidjelli tažnīb ‘s’écarter’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 233) ~ Tangier žumb, pl
žnāb ‘côté’ (W. Marçais 1911: 253).
108 ǧ-n-ḥ
ḏnḥ (Pyr) ‘wing, blade of oar’; ‘der Flügel, Blatt des Steuers’ (Ember 1930: 67;
Jones 1988: 195; Faulkner 1962: 322; Wb V 577, 578) ~ Dem ḏnḥ ‘Arm, Unterarm’;
tnḥ ‘Flügel’ (DG 682, 640) ~ Copt ϫⲛⲁϩ ‘forearm’; ⲧⲛϩ ‘wing of birds, angels’
أ أ
(Crum 1939: 777a, 421a) ~ Jibb gέnaḥ ‘wing’ ~ Soq ganḥ ‘side’ (Johnstone 1981:
ة ����� � ج� نʾaǧniḥah/ ���� � ج� نʾaǧnuḥ ‘Flügel, Schwinge, Schulter,
77) || Ar ج� ن���اǧanāḥ, pl ��ح
ح ح
Arm, Hand’ (Wahrmund I 459);
~ Ḥassāniyya ǧnāḥ, pl ǧǝnḥa ‘aile, bras’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 22, 33) ~ Rwala
al-ǧanāḥ ‘the wing’ (Musil 1928: 533) ~ Yemen ǧanāḥ, pl ǧanāḥāt ‘ala’ (Rossi
1939: 353) ~ Oman gnāḥ/ǧināḥ, pl ǧinḥān ‘Flügel’ (Reinhardt 1894: 46, 353)
~ Aleppo ǧǝnḥ, pl ǧnāḥ ‘aile’ (d’oiseau, d’insecte)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 123)
~ Damascus žnāḥ, pl -āt/ažniḥa ‘wing’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 264) ~ Lebanon
114 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
ǧāneḥ ‘aile’ (Denizeau 1960: 90) ~ Palest ǧanāḥ, pl ǧinḥān ‘Flügel’ (Schmidt &
Kahle 1918 I 273) ~ Egypt gināḥ, pl agniḥa ‘wing’/ǧināḥ ‘Flügel (des Hahns)’
(Spiro 1895: 115; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 71) ~ Tunis žǝnḥ, pl žnāḥ/žwānaḥ
‘aile’ (D. Cohen 1975: 200) ~ Marazig žnāḥ, pl žinḥin ‘Flügel’ (Ritt-Benmimoun
2005: 245) ~ Djidjelli žǝnḥ, pl žnāḥ ‘id.’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 347, 359) ~ Morocco
ženḥ/žneḥ ‘wing’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 223) ~ Malta ⟨ġewnaħ, pl ġwienaħ⟩
‘ala’ (Vassalli 1796: 215).
109 ǧ-n-n
ḏnḏn ‘be angry’ (Faulkner 1962: 323); ḏnn ‘be tormented, strive, to exert one-
self, conspire; wrath’; ‘der Zorn, das Wüten’ (Wb V 470; DLE II 252) ~ Ge gānen
1977: 157, 167) || Saf ngn ‘to go insane’ (Al-Jallad 2015: 315) ~ Ar �ّ ج�� نǧanna ‘être
‘demon’ (Leslau 1987: 198) ~ Ḥar genni ‘demon’; yann ‘madness’ (Johnstone
possédé du démon, être fou’; ‘sich vor Zorn, Freude nicht fassen können’ (DAF
I 332; Wahrmund I 459);
~ Takrūna žann ‘devenir fou, perdre l’ésprit, être éperdu, devenir hors de soi’
(Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 651) ~ E. Arabia ǧann/yinn ‘to go mad’ (Holes 2001:
92) ~ Rwala ǧinn ‘earth spirits’ (Musil 1928: 18) ~ Yemen ǧanan ‘impazzire’;
ǧinān ‘pazzia’ (Rossi 1939: 214, 226) ~ Oman gnūn ‘Wahnsinn’; ginn ‘Dämonen’
(Reinhardt 1894: 45, 413) ~ Iraq ǧann ‘to be or become insane’ (Woodhead
& Beene 1967: 78) ~ Kǝndērīb ǧann ‘verrückt werden’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 21)
~ Aleppo ǧann ‘devenir fou, … s’affoler (de joie, de colère, de peur, de cha-
grin)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 125) ~ Palest nǧann ‘wird rasend (wie unsinnig)’
(Kampffmeyer 1936: 12); maǧnūn ‘irrsinnig’ (Bauer 1957: 337) ~ Egypt gann ‘to
be mad, insane’; lamma ṭilʿet gannūntoh ‘when he became exasperated’ (Spiro
1895: 109) ~ Tunis žǝnn ‘djinn’ (D. Cohen 1975: 141) ~ Tripoli (Libya) žnūn ‘follia’;
mažnūn ‘matto (spiritato; invasato dal žinn)’ (Griffini 1913: 122, 169) ~ Marazig
ǧann ‘être fou, perdre la raison’ (Boris 1958: 92).
110 ǧ-w-b
ḏb ‘antworten, erwidern’; ‘reply’ (Hannig 1995: 1001; DLE II 265); cf. wšb ‘answer,
avenge’: ʿn wšb ‘antworten’ (DLE I 114; Erman 1892: 108); ḫn n wšb ‘a song of
responses’ (Kitchen 1999: 422) [~ Ar *wǧb] || Ar � ج��ا و بǧāwaba ‘to answer (a
question)’ (Hava 1982: 103);
~ Aleppo ǧāwab, iǧēweb ‘répondre’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 127) ~ Bišmizzīn
žwāb ‘Antwort’ (Jiha 1964: 158) ~ Palest ǧāwab ‘antworten’ (Bauer 1957: 22)
~ Egypt gāwib ‘to answer’; agāb ‘to answer, respond’ (Spiro 1895: 91) ~ Tunis
109. ǧ-n-n – 113. ǧ-w-f 115
žāwǝb ‘il a répondu’ (D. Cohen 1975: 101, 119) ~ Djidjelli wāžǝb ‘répondre’; žwāb
‘réponse, lettre’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 354) ~ Mzāb žāwǝb ‘il répondit’ (Grand’Henry
1976: 97, 22) ~ Algiers žwāb ‘réponse’ (Tapièro 1971: 167) ~ Malta ⟨wieġeb,
iwieġeb⟩ ‘to answer, reply’ (Aquilina 1990: 1531).
111 ǧ-w-r
qrj (LE) ‘bei jemandem sein’; ‘to dwell, take up temporary residence’ (Wb V 59;
Hoch 1994: 295) ~ Heb גּורgūr ‘to sojourn’ (BDB 157) || Ar ج��ا رǧāra ‘in der Nähe
sein, Einem in Schutz und Klientel nehmen’ (Wahrmund I 470);
~ Aleppo ǧawār ‘devenir ou être voisin de qqn, avoisiner’ (Barthélemy
1935–69: 128) ~ Damascus žāwar ‘to adjoin’; žiwār ‘neighbourhood’ (Stowasser
& Ani 1964: 3, 157) ~ Najd ⟨ǧār⟩ ‘Schutzsuchender’ (Socin 1901 III 255) ~ Yemen
ǧawwar ‘proteggere’ (Rossi 1939: 230) ~ Egypt ǧīra ‘Nachbarschaft’ (Behnstedt
& Woidich 1994: 74) ~ Ḥassāniyya tjāwǝṛ ‘se mettre au voisinage de’ (Taine-
Cheikh 1990: 154) ~ Malta ⟨ġar, pl ġirien⟩ ‘neighbour’ (Aquilina 1987: 378).
112 ǧ-w-l
ḏꜣj (Pyr) ‘ferry someone across water’; ‘kreuzen, besonders, den Fluß beim
Überfahren’ (Faulkner 1962: 318; Wb V 511) ~ Sab gyl ‘course, period’ (Biella 1982:
71) || Ar ج��ا لǧāla ‘to ramble’ (Hava 1982: 105);
~ Najd ǧāl ‘to migrate’ (Sowayan 1992: 256) ~ Iraq tǧawwal ‘to wander
around, roam, rove about’; ǧawla ‘tour, excursion’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 81)
~ Palest yetǧāwal ‘aller à la rencontre l’un de l’autre’; ǧawwāl ‘Wanderer’; ǧāl
‘umhergehen’ (Denizeau 1960: 95; Bauer 1957: 353, 314) ~ Tripoli (Libya) tǧawwol
‘girovagare’ (Cesàro 1939: 230) ~ Tunis žayla ‘bête de somme’ (D. Cohen 1975:
67) ~ Ḥassāniyya jowle, ijowli ‘contourner’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 43).
113 ǧ-w-f
i҆wf (Pyr) [< *ǧwf ] ‘flesh of man, meat’; ‘Fleisch des Menschen, Körper, Leib,
ف
Leiche (eines Gottes)’ (Faulkner 1962: 13; Wb I 51) ~ Heb ּגּוףgūp ‘body, corpse’
(BDB 157) ~ Ḥar gawf ‘chest’ (Johnstone 1977: 157) || Ar �� ج�وǧawf ‘Bauch,
فة
Eingeweide’; cf. ������ ج�يǧīfah ‘Leiche, Aas’ (Wahrmund I 472, 475);
~ Kǝndērīb ǧwāf ‘Darm, Pansen, Mägen (der Schlachttiere)’ (O. Jastrow
2005: 31) ~ Egypt gōf, pl gwāf ‘bowels’; gīfa ‘carrion, carcass’ (Spiro 114, 115)
~ Malta ⟨ġuf⟩ ‘ventre, utero’ (Vassalli 1796: 224).
116 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
114 ǧ-w-n
gwn/gꜣwꜣn (LE) ‘Sack’ (Wb V 160; Helck 1971: 524; DLE II 186; Hannig & Vomberg
1999: 544) ~ Copt ϭⲟⲟⲩⲛⲉ ‘hair-cloth, sacking, sack’ (Crum 1939: 836a);
~ Palest ǧūne ‘Korb (gross, flach aus Stroh, meist mit Leder bezogen)’ (Bauer
1957: 180) ~ Oman gūniyye, pl gewāni ‘burlap bag’; ‘Sack’ (Reinhardt 1894: 74)
~ Yemen gūniye, pl gawāni ‘sacco’ (Rossi 1939: 234) ~ Iraq gūniya, pl gwāni ‘bur-
lap bag’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 396) ~ Arbil gūniye ‘Sack (aus Wolle oder
Jute)’ (O. Jastrow 1990: 405).
115 *ǧ-r-g
ḏꜣd ‘(Pyr) ‘throat’; ‘abkehlen’ (Wb V 527; Hannig 1995: 996) ~ Ugar grgr ‘throat’
(?) (DUL 307) ~ Heb ּגַ ְרּגֶ ֶרתgargeret ‘throat’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 264)
Cf. Gk γαργαρέον ‘uvula’ (GEL 339) ~ Lat gurgulio ‘gullet, throat’ (OLD 778).
~ Syria zardūm ‘Kehle’ (Behnstedt 1997a: 127) ~ Egypt zirdimme ‘Adamsapfel’
(Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 184) ~ Daθīna ⟨qarǧūma⟩ ‘gorge’ (GD 2472)
~ Rwala ǧarǧūr ‘throat’ (Musil 1928: 155, fn 7) ~ Tripoli (Libya) garžūma ‘golo’
(Griffini 1913: 137) ~ Sidi Bel Abbès gerzi, pl grāzi/gerjūma, pl grājem ‘gorge,
gosier’ (Madouni-La Peyre 2003: 405) ~ (Berber, Beni Snous) á-geržum ‘gorge’
(Destaing 1920: 143) ~ Sfax garžuma, pl grāžim ‘throat’ (Zwari & Sharfi 1998:
570) ~ Tunis geržūma ‘gorge’ (D. Cohen 1975: 199) ~ Marazig garžūṭa ‘gosier
(des mammifères)’ (Boris 1958: 488) ~ Djidjelli geržūma ‘gosier’ (Ph. Marçais
1956: 284) ~ Malta ⟨gerżuma, pl grieżem⟩ ‘gola’ (Vassalli 1796: 310) ~ Ḥassāniyya
gerjūme, pl grājīm ‘gorge’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 75).
Mand gurgma ‘gueule, gosier’ (Macuch & Drower 1963: 523).
116 ǧ-m-ǧ-m
gmgm (LE) ‘Art töricht zu reden’ (Wb V 527; Hannig 1995: 901); ngmgm ‘to con-
spire’ (Faulkner 1962: 142) ~ Aram gamgēm ‘hesitate, stammer’ (M. Jastrow 1886:
251) || Ar �� ج��م�� جǧamǧama ‘parler inintelligiblement, baragouiner’; ġamġama
م
‘être inintelligible, parler d’une manière obscure’ (DAF I 323; II 507);
~ Damascus klām mġamġam ‘langage incompréhensible’ (Denizeau 1960:
378) ~ Yemen biyġamġimu ‘man will vertuschen’ (Goitein 1934: 2) ~ Egypt gam-
gam ‘to mutter’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 169) ~ Sudan taqamqam ‘to grumble’
(LDA 75) ~ Tunis gǝmgǝm ‘il a grommelé’ (D. Cohen 1975: 112, 31) ~ Morocco
gemgem ‘to grumble’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 92) ~ Ḥassāniyya gemgem
114. ǧ-w-n – 118. ḥ-b-l 117
117 ḥ-b-s
ḥbś (Pyr) ‘clothe, be clothed, don garment; hide, cover up; apparel, clothing,
linen, strips of linen, swabs, plugs, tampons of linen’; ‘bekleiden, verhüllen;
bedecken’ (Ember 1930: 87; Faulkner 1962: 167; Allen 1994: Breasted 1930: 549;
Tait 1977: 115; Wb III 64; DLE I 308); ḥbs ‘Gewand, Kleid, Deckel (für Gefäß)’;
‘linen’; ḥbst ‘Schmuckstück’; ḥbsw ‘clothes’; ḥḏ ḥbs.w ‘white of clothes’ (Hannig
1995: 524; Caminos 1954: 549; Landgráfová 2011: 316) ~ Copt ϩⲱⲃⲥ ‘cover, be cov-
ered’ (Crum 1939: 658b) ~ Heb ָח ַבשׁḥābaš ‘to bind’ (BDB 289) || Ar ح� ب���سḥabasa
‘to veil a thing; zurückhalten, abhalten’ (Hava 1982: 109; Wahrmund I 486);
ḥabbasa ‘envelopper et serrer une chose dans une autre’ (DAF I 367);
~ Egypt maḥbas ‘clasp’ (Spiro 1898: 121) ~ Palest maḥbas ‘Ehering’ (Bauer
1957: 83) ~ Lebanon maḥbis ‘engagement ring’ (Frayha 1973: 31) ~ E. Arabia
ḥabas ‘to tie up, restrain’ (Holes 2001: 100) ~ Iraq maḥbas ‘ring’ (Avishur 2009:
372) ~ Tripoli (Libya) maḥbes ‘vaso’ (Griffini 1913: 297) ~ Tunis maḥbǝš ‘pot
(de fleurs)’ (D. Cohen 1975: 201) ~ Marazig maḥbas ‘cuvette’ (Boris 1958: 100)
~ Algiers ḥbes ‘s’arrêter’ (Tapiéro 1971: 151) ~ Cherchell maḥbǝs ‘pot’
(Grand’Henry 1972: 83) ~ Morocco ḥbes ‘coop up’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963:
40) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨maħbas, pl maħābis⟩ ‘vessel’ (Corriente 1997: 114).
118 ḥ-b-l
ḥnb (NK) ‘Ackerland; vom Vermessen des Landes’; ḥnbt ‘abgemessenes Feld’;
ḥnb.t.t ‘Ackeranteil’; ḥnb.ꜣḥt ‘ein Ackerland’ (Wb III 112; Hannig 1995: 539);
ḥnbwt ‘confines of district’ (Faulkner 1962: 172); ḥnb.t.t (MK) ‘Acker, Gartenland’
�
~ Ugar ḥbl ‘cord, rope’ (DUL 707) ~ Heb ֶח ֶבלḥebel ‘territory’ (BDB 286) || Ar ح ب���ل
ḥabl ‘langgestreckter Sandhügel’ (Wahrmund I 483);
~ Aleppo ḥabl ‘part qu’un cultivateur a dans la propriété d’un terrain’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 144) ~ Palest ḥabale, pl ḥabalāt/ḥabāyel/aḥbāle ‘terrain
en terrasse’ (Denizeau 1960: 98; Dalman II 23) ~ Sinai ḥabl ‘share of a piece
of land’ (Stewart 1990: 230; cf. Musil 1928: 293) ~ Kuwait ḥabl ‘sand hills, sand
dune country’ (Dickson 1949: 631) ~ Najd ḥabl ‘Sandhügel’ (Socin 1901 III 255)
~ Rwala ḥabl, pl ḥbāl ‘a narrow long sand drift’ (Musil 1928: 679) ~ Al-Andalus
118 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
⟨ḥabl arḍ⟩ ‘a land measure’ (Corriente 1997: 114–15) ~ Morocco ḥbǝl ‘parcelle
de terre arable beaucoup plus longue que large’ (Prémare III 15) ~ Malta
⟨ħabel, pl ħbula⟩ ‘a strip; stretch or enclosure of land length of a measuring
rope’ (Aquilina 1987: 468).
119 ḥ-t-r
ḥtr (OK) ‘Gespann der Rinder (zum Pflügen)’; ‘yoke of oxen, span of horses’
(Wb III 199; Faulkner 1962: 180; Calice 1936: 74); ḥtri҆ ‘team of horses; ‘yoke’ of
~ Yemen ḥutra ‘Nacken’ (Behnstedt 1992: 233); ḥattar ‘to impede’ (Piamenta
1990: 82) ~ S.E. Anatolia yǝḥtǝr ‘schlagen’ (Vocke & Waldner 1983: 109).
120 ḥ-t-f
ḥtp(w) (MK) ‘to set (of sun), rest, alight, be completed, be satisfied, peace,
rest, reside’; ‘ruhen, sich niederlassen besonders vom Toten der im Grabe (im
Totenreich ruht); Untergehen, Untergang (der Sonne)’; ḥtp m ʿnḫ ‘unterge-
�ف
hen, sterben, aus dem Leben scheiden’ (Ember 1930: 112; DLE I 336; Faulkner
1962: 180; Wb III 190; Hannig 1995: 568) || Ar ���حت ḥaṭf, pl ḥuṭūf ‘death’ (Hava
1982: 125);
~ Al-Andalus ⟨ḥatfī⟩ ‘my death’ (Corriente 1997: 115) ~ Daθīna ⟨ḥataf⟩
‘couper, trancher’ (GD 347) ~ Oman ḥataf ‘ausstoßen’ (Reinhardt 1894: 129)
~ Palest ḥātaf ‘accaparer, s’emparer de’ (Denizeau 1960: 99).
121 ḥ-ǧ-ǧ
ّ
ḥꜣg (MK) ‘be glad’; ‘froh sein’ (Faulkner 1962: 163; Wb III 34) ~ Heb ַָחגḥāg ‘anni-
� ḥaǧǧa ‘to make a pilgrimage’
versary, festival’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 423) || Ar ح
�ج
(Hava 1982: 111);
~ Iraq ḥaǧǧ ‘make the pilgrimage to Mecca’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 91)
~ Palest ḥaǧǧ ‘Pilgern’ (Bauer 1957: 231).
119. ḥ-t-r – 124. ḥ-r-r ¹ 119
122 ḥ-d-r
ḥdj (NK) ‘stromab fahren’ (Brockelmann 1932: 112) || Ar ح�د رḥadara ‘ganz
hinabsteigen’ (Wahrmund I 493);
~ Najd ḥadar ‘to descend, to go, travel in a downward direction’ (Kurpershoek
1999: 351) ~ Palmyra ḥdar, yeḥder ‘faire descendre, faire tomber à terre’
(Cantineau 1934 II 56, 81) ~ Sinai ḥaddar ‘to topple, to cause to fall’ (C. Bailey
1991: 433) ~ Egypt ʾinḥadar ‘to fall down, slide down’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 194)
~ Marazig ḥaddar ‘descendre’ (Boris 1958: 105) ~ Mzāb ḥaddaṛ ‘il descendit’
(Grand’Henry 1976: 106).
123 ḥ-ð-y
ḥsi҆/ḥzi҆ (OK) ‘to turn back’ (r ‘to’ a place), (m) ‘to face aggressively, face an enemy’;
‘sich begeben nach, … gelangen nach …, jemandem entgegen gehen; entgegen,
gegenüber (kommen); grimmig, wild (von Auge); wild, ungezähmt sein; jmden
wild / wütend anblicken’ (Faulkner 1962: 177; Wb III 159; Brockelmann 1932: 110;
Köhler 2016: 353) ~ Ugar ḥðy ‘to see, look, observe’ (DUL 356) ~ Jibb ḥazē ‘to put
aside’ (Johnstone 1981: 123) || Ar ح��ذاḥaðā ‘être en face, vis-à-vis; rivaliser avec
quelqu’un, être son émule, son rival dans quelque chose’ (DAF I 399);
~ Najd taḥaðða ‘to follow closely, to go after’; iḥtiða ‘to harass s.o. in defence
of’; ḥeðāt ‘neben’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 354; Socin 1901 III 256) ~ E. Arabia ḥiða
‘next to’ (Holes 2001: 105) ~ Palest bi-ḥðāy ‘près de moi’; ḥaðiyye ‘part de butin’
(Denizeau 1960: 102, 103) ~ Kaʿbiye ḥadīt ‘gegenüber von, vor, bei’ (Vocke &
Waldner 1982: 110) ~ Kǝndērīb māli ḥðē ʿayni ‘mein Besitz liegt vor meinen
Augen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 35) ~ Marazig ḥaðē ‘être à côté, contigu’ (Boris 1958:
106) ~ Morocco ḥda ‘near’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 128).
Cf. Ghomara (Berber) ḥði ‘to keep an eye on’ (Mourigh 2016: 396).
124 ḥ-r-r¹
125 ḥ-r-r²
ḥr (1st Dyn.) ‘(name of divinity) Horus’: ḥr-nbw ‘Falcon of Gold’ (Faulkner 1962:
أ
173, 174; Wb III 122, 146); ḥr-dšr ‘der rote Horus’ (= Mars)’ (Leitz 2002: 296) ||
Ar � ّر
حḥurr, pl � �ج�را رʾaḥrār ‘frei und edel geboren’ (Wahrmund I 497); (en
Barbarie) ح ّر
� طي��ر �لṭayr al-ḥurr ‘le faucon’ (Dozy I 262);
~ Al-Balqāʾ ḥurr ‘noble falcon, wild hawk’ (Palva 1992: 168) ~ Damascus ḥorr
‘Falke’ (Wetzstein 1906: 28) ~ Palmyra ṭēr ḥorr ‘faucon’ (Cantineau 1934 II 74)
~ Rwala ḥorr ‘a hunting falcon of the best kind’ (Musil 1928: 292, 366) ~ ʿAnazeh
ḥurr ‘aigle’ (Landberg 1940: 12).
126 ḥ-r-š
(i) ḫꜣś.t (Pyr) ‘hill-country, foreign, desert, country’; ‘Bergland (im Gegensatz
zum Flachland); Fremdland (im Gegensatz zu Ägypten); Wüste (als wasserlo-
ses, sandiges u.s.w.) Gebiet’ (Faulkner 1962: 185; DLE I 349–50; Wb III 234, 235;
Calice 1936: 75) ~ Dem ḫꜣs.t ‘Wüste’ (DG 347): wbꜣ nꜣ ḫꜣs.w(.t) ‘against many for-
eign countries’ (Simpson 1996: 226) ~ Heb חֹורׁש ֵ ḥōrēš ‘wood, forest’ (BDB 361)
أ
~ Akkad ḫuršānu ‘mountain (region)’; ḫuršāniš ‘like a mountain’ (CAD 253) ||
Ar ����رش
حḥurš, pl ����را ش
� حʾaḥrāš/����رو ش
حḥurūš ‘wood’ (Hava 1982: 119);
~ Aleppo ḥǝrš ‘bois, forêt’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 151) ~ Syria ḥirš ‘Wüste’
(Behnstedt 1997a: 114) ~ Kǝndērīb ḥǝrrayš ‘ein Kraut’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 36)
~ Bišmizzīn ḥuršāyi, pl ḥuršāyāt ‘Wäldchen’ (Jiha 1964: 70, fn 12) ~ Palest ḥirš,
pl aḥrāš ‘Wald’ (Bauer 1957: 352) ~ Sfax ḥirš ‘stony terrain’ (Zwari & Sharfi 1998:
182) ~ Morocco ḥǝrš ‘terre depourvue de couche arable’ (Prémare III 67).
أ
(ii) Dem ḥrš ‘schwer, schwer sein’; ḥlḫ ‘bedrücken’ (DG 327, 328) ~ Copt
ϩⲣⲟϣ ‘be heavy, slow, difficult, make heavy’ (Crum 1939: 706a) || Ar ����رش
� حʾaḥraš
‘rough to the skin’ (Hava 1982: 110);
~ Al-Andalus ⟨aḥraš⟩ ‘rough’ (Corriente 1997: 121) ~ Malta ⟨ħarex⟩ ‘fierce,
harsh’; ⟨ħarrax⟩ ‘to aggravate’ (Aquilina 1987: 510).
127 ḥ-r-ḍ
أ ض
ḥḏj (MK) ‘injure, destroy, disobey, annul, upset’; ‘schädigen, zerstören, fehlen’
(Faulkner 1962: 181; Wb III 212) || Ar ���ر
� حʾaḥraḍa ‘vernichten, erschöpfen’
(Brockelmann 1932: 110);
125. ḥ-r-r ² – 129. ḥ-r-m 121
128 ḥ-r-q
rkḥ (Pyr) ‘burn, kindle (verb); light, fire’; ‘Feuer anfachen, anlagen; etwas ver-
brennen, brennen’; rqḥw ‘flames’; rqḥt ‘heat’; rqḥ ‘light, fire’ (Ember 1913: 89;
ق
1930: 73; Faulkner 1962: 154; Wb II 458) ~ Dem rkḥ ‘brennen’ (DG 256) ~ Copt
ⲣⲱⲕϩ ‘burn’ (Crum 1939: 293a) || Ar ��ر حḥaraqa ‘burn (trans.)’ (Hava 1982: 119);
~ Oman ḥroq ‘abgebrannt sein’ (Reinhardt 1894: 135) ~ Yemen ḥirig
‘bruciare’ (Rossi 1939: 196) ~ Aleppo ḥaraq ‘brûler (qqe ou qqn)’ (Barthélemy
1935–69: 152) ~ Damascus ḥarīq, pl ḥarāyeq ‘blaze’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 23)
~ Iraq ḥirag ‘burn’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 97) ~ Palest ḥaraq ‘verbrennen’
(Bauer 1957: 329) ~ Morocco ḥreq ‘to burn’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 26).
129 ḥ-r-m
(i) ḥꜣm (Pyr) ‘etwas religiös verbotenes’ (Wb III 31) ~ Akkad ḫarāmu ‘to sepa-
rate, keep apart’ (Parpola 2007: 35) ~ Heb ֵח ֶרםḥērem ‘ban’ (BDB 356) ~ Sab ḥrm
‘to interdict’ (Jamme 1962: 436) ~ Ḥar ḥerōm ‘what is forbidden’ (Johnstone
1977: 162) ~ Soq ḥrm ‘maudire’ (Leslau 1938: 190) || Ar �ر حḥarama ‘éloigner,
م
repousser quelqu’un et le tenir à distance d’une chose; einen zurückweisen’
(DAF I 413; Wahrmund I 503);
Cf. Egyptian ḥꜣm ‘fischen’ (Wb III 31) ~ Heb ֵח ֶרםḥērem ‘fisherman’s net’ (BDB 357).
~ Oman ḥarām ‘verboten’ (Reinhardt 1894: 45) ~ Najd ḥaram ‘to deprive’
(Sowayan 1992: 258) ~ Iraq aḥram ‘to deprive’ (van Ess 1918: 136) ~ Khābūra
ḥaram ‘a house / garden-boundary’ (Brockett 1985: 80) ~ Iraq ḥarram ‘to
declare unlawful, forbid’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 98) ~ Palest ḥarram ʿala
‘verbieten’; ḥirim ‘wird (ist) Sünde’ (Bauer 1957: 328; Kampffmeyer 1936: 14)
~ Kǝndērīb ḥǝṛām ‘religiös verboten’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 36) ~ Egypt ḥarram ‘to
forbid, prohibit’ (Spiro 1895: 131) ~ Tunis ḥoṛm ‘l’action d’interdire (du point
de vue religieux)’ (D. Cohen 1975: 82) ~ Douz ḥiṛam ‘jemandem etwas vor
enthalten’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2014: 296) ~ Algiers ḥrām ‘illicite’ (Tapiéro 1971:
159) ~ Djidjelli ḥṛām ‘chose defendue, illicite’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 266).
(ii) ḫnr (OK) [< *ḫrn < ḫrm] ‘der Harem und seine Insassinnen’; ḫnr (MK)
‘der Gefangene, einsperren’; ḫnrwt ‘women of the harem’ (Wb III 297; Faulkner
122 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
أ
1962: 193; Brockelmann 1932: 111) ~ Akkad ḫarīmtu ‘prostitute’ (CAD VI 101) ||
Ar �ر
حḥaram, pl �را
� حʾaḥrām ‘Frauen, Frau, Harem’ (Wahrmund I 503);
م م
~ N. Yemen ḥurma ‘Frau’ (Behnstedt 1987: 244) ~ Damascus ḥarīm ‘harem’
(Stowasser & Ani 1964: 112) ~ Palest bēt/dār il-ḥarīm ‘Harem’ (Bauer 1957: 149);
maḥrame ‘Frauenraum (im Zelt)’ (Dalman VI 13) ~ Egypt ḥarīm ‘ladies’ apart-
ments’ (Spiro 1985: 132) ~ Negev maḥram, pl maḥārim ‘women’s living quarters
located in the southern section of the tent separated from the men’s section
(šigg) by means of a partition (maʿnad)’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi).
130 ḥ-z-r
Ar ��ز ر
ḥzꜣ (Pyr) ‘grimmig, wild (vom Auge)’ (Wb III 161; Brockelmann 1932: 110) ||
حḥazara ‘avoir un air sévère, austère’; ‘ein saures Gesicht machen, die
Stirne runzeln’ (DAF I 419; Wahrmund I 506);
~ Lebanon ḥōzar ‘se fâcher contre (ʿala)’ (Denizeau 1960: 129) ~ Marazig
ḥazzar ‘garder jalousement (ʿala)’; ḥāzer ‘jaloux’; ḥazra ‘jalousie’ (Boris 1958:
111) ~ Tripoli ḥzar ‘esser geloso’ (Cesàro 1939: 197) ~ Daθīna ⟨ḥazar⟩ ‘estimer’
(GD 412) ~ N. Yemen ḥazar ‘schauen’ (Behnstedt 1987: 244) ~ Egypt ḥezāṛa
‘Auge’; maḥzūṛa ‘verbotene Zone’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 84, 113).
131 ḥ-z-q
132 ḥ-z-m
mḏḥ (OK) ‘girdle, fillet’; ‘Gürtel’ (Ember 1930: 78; Faulkner 1962: 123; Wb II 189)
133 ḥ-z-n
ن
ḥḏn (LE) ‘unwillig sein’ (Wb III 189) || Ar � ��ز
حḥazina ‘to be grieved’ (Hava
1982: 122);
~ Damascus ḥizin ‘trauern’ (Bauer 1957: 304) ~ Egypt ḥizin ‘to grieve’ (Spiro
1895: 133) ~ Ḥassāniyya ḥazīn ‘triste’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 146).
134 ḥ-s-b
(i) ḥśb (Pyr) ‘berechnen, rechnen, zählen; mit jemandem abrechnen’; ‘reckon
with’; ḥsb (v) ‘count’; ḥsbw ‘account’ (Wb III 166–167; DLE I 332; Faulkner 1962:
178); Ḥqꜣw-nw-ḥsb ‘Die Herrscher der Berechnung’ (Leitz 2002: 535) ~ Heb ָח ַׁשב
� ḥasaba ‘reckon, number’ (Hava
ḥāšab ‘to think, account’ (BDB 362) || Ar �ح����س� ب
1982: 122);
~ N. Yemen ḥasab ‘berechnen’ (Behnstedt 1987: 244) ~ Aleppo ḥasab
‘compter, calculer’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 156) ~ Damascus ḥasab ‘calculate’
(Stowasser & Ani 1964: 33) ~ S.E. Anatolia mǝḥāsǝb ‘comptable’ (Grigore 2007:
294) ~ Kǝndērīb ḥasab ‘zählen, aufzählen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 37) ~ Morocco
ḥseb ‘to count’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 41).
� بbi-ḥasabi
�
(ii) Dem ḥsb.t ‘corresponding to’ (Simpson 1996: 224) || Ar. �ح����س� ب
‘according to.’
124 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
~ Damascus ḥasab ṭalabak ‘in accordance with your request’ (Stowasser &
Ani 1964: 33) ~ Palest ḥasab rājo ‘nach seiner Ansicht’ (Bauer 1957: 213) ~ Egypt
da bi-ḥasab ‘this depends’ (Spiro 1895: 135).
135 ḥ-ḍ-r
ḥḏ (Pyr) ‘chapel’; ‘Wohnung eines Gottes, Kapelle’ (Faulkner 1962: 181; Wb III
209; Brockelmann 1932: 110) ~ Heb ָח ֵצרḥāṣēr ‘court, yard, private property’
� ة فḥaḍrat al-firdaws ‘Wohnung im Paradiese, Residenz’
(M. Jastrow 1886: 496) ~ Ḥar ḥeḍīreh ‘place apart’ (Johnstone 1977: 56) ||
Ar ح� �ض�� ر� ا �ل����رد و��س
(Wahrmund I 521);
~ Egypt ḥaḍīr ‘einzelner Raum oben auf dem Dach; Dachterrasse (umge-
ben von Räumen des zweiten Stock); zweiter Stock des Hauses’; ‘hall, unroofed
room’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 87; Spiro 1895: 140) ~ Najd ḥaḍār
‘kleine Hütte aus Palmzweigen’ (Socin 1901 III 257) ~ Daθīna ⟨ḥaḍḍar⟩ ‘enclore
pour une haie, faire une ḥaḍīrah’ (GD 432) ~ Khābūra ḥiḍār ‘a fence between
houses / gardens; the collection of palm-frond huts on a settlement’s edge’
(Brockett 1985: 82) ~ Yemen ḥað̣ īreh, pl ḥað̣ āʾir ‘giardino’; ‘vineyard’ (Rossi
1939: 211; Piamenta 1990: 97) ~ Palest ḥað̣ īreh, pl ḥað̣ āyir ‘enclos pour les bes-
tiaux’ (Denizeau 1960: 114) ~ Kǝndērīb ḥað̣ ra, pl -āt ‘Scheune, Heuscheuer’
(O. Jastrow 2005: 37) ~ Ūlād Brāhīm ḥoẓīr ‘campement isolé’ (W. Marçais 1908:
50) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ḥaḍīr, pl ḥaḍāyir⟩ ‘fence’ (Corriente 1997: 130).
136 ḥ-ṭ-b
mḏḥ (MK) ‘hew (timber, stone), hewer of stone, build ships’; ‘Holz behauen’;
mḏḥ ‘der Zimmermann, der Tischler’; mḏḥ.t ‘behauenes Holz’ (Faulkner 1962:
126; Wb II 190, 191; Calice 1936: 159) ~ Heb ָח ַצבḥāṣab ‘to hew’ (M. Jastrow 1886:
� ḥaṭaba ‘Brennholz hauen’ (Wahrmund I 522);
493) || Ar �ح��ط� ب
~ Najd ḥṭuba ‘firewood’ (Ingham 1982: 37) ~ Oman ḥaṭab ‘wood’ (Eades
2011: 31) ~ N. Yemen ḥaṭṭab ‘Brennholz schlagen’ (Behnstedt 1987: 244)
~ Palmyra ḥaṭab ‘bois à bruler’ (Cantineau 1934 II 32) ~ Aleppo ḥaṭṭab
‘abattre du bois dans une forêt et le transporter chez soi’ (Barthélemy 1935–69:
163) ~ Kǝndērīb ḥaṭab ‘Brennholz, Holz’: ḥaṭab ṭawīl ‘lange Stangen (beim
Bau)’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 38) ~ Damascus ḥaṭab ‘firewood’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964:
91) ~ Palest ḥaṭṭābe ‘ramasseuse de bois’ (Dalman IV 2) ~ Negev ḥaṭṭab ‘collect
brushwood’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Egypt ḥaṭab ‘dry stalks of harvested crops, and
other vegetable refuse, used for fodder and kindling’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986:
211) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨naḥṭab, ḥaṭabt⟩ ‘to gather firewood’ (Corriente 1997: 130).
135. ḥ-ḍ-r – 140. ḥ-f-l 125
137 ḥ-ṭ-m
138 ḥ-ð̣ -w
� �ظ ة
ḥḏ (Pyr) ‘die Keule mit rundem Knauf (als Waffe, als Abzeichen des Königs)’
(Wb III 206; Calice 1936: 181) || Ar �ح��و ḥað̣ wah ‘small rod, arrow’ (Hava
1982: 131).
139 ḥ-f-f
140 ḥ-f-l
141 ḥ-f-n
142 ḥ-q-r
ḥqr (Pyr) ‘hungry man’; ‘hungern, fasten’; sḥqr ‘make hungry’ (Faulkner 1962:
143 ḥ-q-q
ّ� � ق
III 170) ~ Heb חֹקḥōq ‘a statute’ (BDB 349) || Ar �ح ق ḥaqq, pl �ح��ق��و
ḥqꜣ (Pyr) ‘to rule over, govern’; ‘herrschen, beherrschen’ (Faulkner 1962: 178; Wb
ḥuqūq ‘jus-
tice’ (Hava 1982: 133);
~ Aleppo ḥaqq ‘droit’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 167) ~ Damascus ḥaqq, pl ḥqūq
‘right’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 193) ~ Lebanon ḥaqq ‘responsabilité’ (Feghali
1935: 10) ~ Palest ḥaqq ‘Preis’ (Bîr Z„t; Schmidt & Kahle 1918 I 275) ~ Tunis ḥaqq
‘Recht’ (Stumme 1896: 40) ~ Algiers ḥaqq ‘justice’ (Tapiéro 1971: 160) ~ Malta
⟨ħaqq⟩ ‘tribunale’ (Vassalli 1796: 245).
141. ḥ-f-n – 147. ḥ-l-l ¹ 127
144 ḥ-q-l
� ḥaql, pl ح��ق��ول
1962: 436) || Ar ح��ق���ل
ḥqr (LE) ‘field, territory’ (Hoch 1994: 235; DLE I 334) ~ Sab ḥql ‘country’ (Jamme
� ḥuqūl ‘fertile field’ (Hava 1982: 135);
~ Aleppo ḥaqle ‘champ cultivé’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 167) ~ Lebanon ḥaqle
‘champ’ (Feghali 1938: 756); cf. ḥaql/ḥaqlah ‘champ’ (Dozy I 308) ~ Bišmizzīn
hal-ḥaʾlit il-ʾamḥ ‘dieses Weizenfeld’ (Jiha 1964: 127) ~ Egypt ḥaql ‘Feld’
(Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 90).
145 ḥ-k-l
146 ḥ-l-ḥ-l
ḥꜣḥꜣ (MK) ‘go astray, stumble’; ‘den Boden verlieren (beim unsicheren Gehen)’
(Faulkner 1962: 163; Wb III 32) || Ar ح�ل ��� ح��لḥalḥala ‘vom Platze wegstoßen’
(Wahrmund I 538);
~ Aleppo ḥalḥal ‘se déplacer, se disloquer’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 171)
~ Lebanon šaʿart bǝtḥǝlḥǝl bǝjrēye ‘j’ai senti un relâchement dans les jambes,
les jambes m’ont manqué’ (Denizeau 1960: 120) ~ Morocco tḥalḥǝl ‘se déplacer
avec lourdeur en se balançant gauchement (en parlant d’une personne forte)’
(Prémare III 191).
147 ḥ-l-l¹
ّ
ḥr (LE) ‘encamp; prepare, make ready’; ‘sich bereiten’ (Ember 1930: 75; Faulkner
1962: 176; Wb III 146) ~ Jibb ḥell ‘to settle’ (Johstone 1981: 108) || Ar ح�لḥalla ‘to
alight’ (Hava 1982: 137);
128 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
~ Najd ḥall ‘to alight at, to make a place one’s abode’ (Kurpershoek 1999:
355) ~ Morocco ḥall ‘s’établir, s’installer (sens propre et figuratif); avoir lieu,
survenir’ (Prémare III 224) ~ Ḥaḍramawt ḥall el-baqīʿ ‘(he) settled in al-baqīʿ ’
(Radionov 1994: 166) ~ ʿAnazeh ḥall ‘s’arrêter’ (Landberg 1940: 13) ~ Yemen ḥall
‘abitare’ (Rossi 1939: 190) ~ Khābūra ḥille ‘a small settlement’ (Brockett 1985: 84)
~ Kǝndērīb mḥalle, pl mḥallāt ‘Stadtviertel’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 40) ~ Damascus
maḥall ‘place’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 174) ~ Egypt maḥall ‘place, site’ (Spiro
1895: 148).
148 ḥ-l-l²
wḥꜣ.t (Med) ‘cauldron, cooking pot, kettle’; ‘Kessel zum Kochen von Fleisch,
ّة
Wasser, Salben und Wohlriechenden’ (Faulkner 1962: 76; Ember 1930: 21; Wb I
347) || Ar �� ح�لḥallah ‘großer Korb oder Kessel’ (Wahrmund I 540);
~ Egypt ḥalla, pl ḥilal ‘metal cooking pot’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 221)
~ Damascus ḥalle ‘flache Schüssel, flacher Kessel’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 155)
~ Lebanon ḥalle ‘large brass cauldron’ (Frayha 1973: 47) ~ Khābūra ḥill ‘a
large earthenware pot’ (Brockett 1985: 84) ~ Levantine Ar ḥulle ‘chaudière’
(Denizeau 1960: 118) ~ Aleppo ḥalle ‘grande bassine de cuivre de peu de pro-
fondeur’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 173) ~ Palest ḥille, pl ḥilal ‘Kessel zum Waschen’
(Bauer 1957: 172).
149 ḥ-l-l³
ّة
ḥꜣti҆ (Pyr) ‘cloak’; ḥꜣtyw ‘fine linen’; ‘Art feines Leinen’; wḥꜣ.t ‘garment’ (Faulkner
1962: 163; Ember 1930: 21; Wb III 28) || Ar �� ح�لḥullah, pl ح�ل�لḥulal/ ح�لا لḥilāl ‘set
of clothes’ (Hava 1982: 137);
~ Morocco ḥulla mzyāna ‘un beau costume’ (Prémare III 207) ~ Al-Andalus
⟨ḥulla, pl ḥulal⟩ ‘purple tunic’ (Corriente 1997: 136) ~ Rwala ḥelle ‘furnishings’
(Musil 1928: 64) ~ Takrūna ḥella, pl ḥellāt ‘atours (vêtements, parures et bijoux
d’apparat)’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 901).
150 ḥ-l-m¹
ة
ḫnm.t.t (NK) ‘wet nurse, nurse’; ‘Wärterin, Amme, Dirne’ (Faulkner 1962: 193;
Wb III 381; Hannig 1995: 604) ~ Copt ⲉⲗⲙⲓ ‘Zitze’ (Kosack 2013: 304) || Ar ��ح�ل�م
ḥalamah ‘nipple’ (Hava 1982: 139);
148. ḥ-l-l ² – 154. ḥ-m-s 129
~ Kǝndērīb ḥalama ‘Brustwarze’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 40) ~ Palest ḥalmet il-bizz
‘Brustwarze’; ḥalame ‘Zitze’ (Bauer 1957: 68, 377) ~ Egypt ḥalama ‘teat’ (Spiro
1895: 150).
151 ḥ-l-m²
Dem ḥlm ‘Käse’ (?) (Vittmann 1996: 441) ~ Copt ϩⲁⲗⲱⲙ ‘cheese; Käse’ (Crum
1939: 670a; Quack 2005: 318).
Quack (2005: 318–319) states: “Allerdings wäre zu erwägen, ob nicht tatsächlich das ara-
bische Wort aus dem Koptischen übernommen ist, da einerseits eher kopt. ⲱ als ara-
bisches ū erscheinen kann als umgekehrt, andererseits das arabische Wort vornehmlich
im ägyptischen Dialekt zu Hause ist.” Cf. also Vittmann (1991: 222, fn 50a).
~ Lebanon ḥallūm ‘sorte de fromage’ (Denizeau 1960: 121) ~ Egypt ḥālūm
(17th c.) ‘du fromage salé qu’ils (les Egyptiens) appellent dgibn halum’ (Dozy
I 318); gibnet ḥalūm ‘weicher weisser Käse’ (Spitta 1880: 257; X, fn 2); ḥalūm
(Coptic) ‘mild white cured cheese, sometimes braided’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986:
222) ~ Tunis ḥallūma, pl ḥlālǝm ‘petite pâte pour potage’ (D. Cohen 1975: 199).
152 ḥ-m-r¹
ḥmr (LE) ‘ass’ (Hoch 1994: 312) ~ Heb ֲחמֹורḥămōr ‘he-ass’ (BDB 331) || Ar ح�م�ا ر
ḥimār, pl ح�مي��رḥamīr ‘ass’ (Hava 1982: 142);
~ Aleppo ḥmār, pl ḥamīr ‘âne, de grande taille’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 175)
~ Palest ḥmār, pl ḥamīr ‘Esel’ (Bauer 1957: 104) ~ Egypt ḥumār, pl ḥimīr ‘donkey’
(Spiro 1895: 152).
153 ḥ-m-r²
mrḥ ‘der Asphalt’ (Wb II 111) ~ Copt ⲁⲙⲣⲏϩⲉ ‘asphalte’ (Vycichl 1983 11) || Ar ح�مر
ḥumar ‘bitumen’ (Elias 1974: 85);
~ Damascus ḥummar ‘Erdpech’ (Wetzstein 1906: 122) ~ Palest ḥumar ‘id.’
(Bauer 1957: 97).
154 ḥ-m-s
ḫmṯ (LE) ‘Gewalttat’ (Wb III 285) ~ Heb ָח ַמסḥāmas ‘to treat violently’ (BDB
329) || Ar ح�م��سḥamasa ‘höchst tapfer im Kampfe sein’ (Wahrmund I 545);
130 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
155 ḥ-m-ḍ
156 ḥ-m-m
šmm/šꜣm/ḫmm (OK) ‘be warm, hot, be feverish, burn’; ‘eigentlich ḫnm (so
belegt nur im Kausativ sḫnm); seit MR auch ḫm’; šmmt ‘fever, inflamma-
tion’ (Ember 1930: 84; Faulkner 1962: 261, 267; Wb IV 468); šꜣm/šmm ‘heiß
sein’ (Hannig 1995: 803) ~ Dem ẖmm ‘heiss, heiss werden, Hitze’; šmm ‘heiss’
ّ�
(DG 380) ~ Copt ϩⲙⲙⲉ ‘fever’ (Crum 1939: 677a, b) ~ Heb ָחםḥām ‘warm, hot’
(M. Jastrow 1886: 475) || Ar. �ح
م
ḥamma ‘to heat’ (Hava 1982: 140);
~ Rwala ḥamm as-sheyl ‘heat before the rise of Canopus’ (Musil 1928: 17)
~ Aleppo ḥamm, yḥǝ́mm ‘avoir une forte fièvre’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 178)
~ Lebanon ḥamm ‘avoir chaud’; nḥamm, yenḥamm ‘avoir de la fièvre’ (Denizeau
1960: 122) ~ Palest ḥumma ‘Fieber’ (Bauer 1957: 111) ~ Tripoli (Libya) ḥemma
‘febbre’ (Griffini 1913: 113) ~ Morocco ḥomm ‘forte fièvre’ (Prémare III 236).
157 ḥ-m-w
~ Aleppo ḥamu ‘père du mari par rapport à la femme, père de la femme par
rapport au mari’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 178) ~ Palest dār ilḥama ‘Schwiegereltern’
(Bauer 1957: 270) ~ Cypriot Ar xawm ‘father-in-law’ (own obs.) ~ Kǝndērīb
ǝlḥamu ‘der Schwiegervater’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 21) ~ Tunis ḥmūya ‘mon beau-
père’ (D. Cohen 1975: 73).
158 ḥ-n-k¹
ḥngg/ḥnkk (LE) ‘der Schlund (in dem die Zunge sitzt)’; ḥnk (ME) [Substantiv,
verglichen mit der Kehle des weissen Stiers] (Wb III 121, 385; Calice 1936:
73) || Ar ح ن���ك
� ḥanak ‘Gaumen, Unterkinn’ (Wahrmund I 542); ḥalq ‘Kehle,
Rachenhöhle; Gaumen’ (Wahrmund I 552, 589);
~ Rwala ḥnūk ‘jaws’ (Musil 1928: 115, fn 7) ~ N. Yemen ḥanak ‘Kehle’ (Behnstedt
1987: 246) ~ Kǝndērīb ḥanak ‘Kinn’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 41) ~ Aleppo ḥanak,
pl ḥnāk ‘chacune des deux moitiés de la mâchoire inférieure de l’homme’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 181) ~ Damascus ḥanak, pl ḥnāk/ḥnūk ‘jaw’; ḥalq, pl ḥlūq
‘throat’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 128, 241) ~ Palmyra ḥanak, pl ḥŭnūk ‘menton’
(Cantineau 1934 II 1) ~ Palest ḥnāk ‘Kieferknochen’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 16)
~ Egypt ḥanak ‘mouth’ (Spiro 1895: 155) ~ Egypt ḥanak ‘mouth’ (Spiro 1895: 154)
~ Al-Andalus ⟨ħanak⟩ ‘palate’ (Corriente 1997: 142) ~ Tunis ḥnǝk ‘mâchoire’
(D. Cohen 1975: 79) ~ Djidjelli ḥenk ‘pommette’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 87) ~ Ūlād
Brāhīm ḥank ‘joue’ (W. Marçais 1908: 62) ~ Malta ⟨ħanek⟩ ‘mascella’ (Vassalli
1796: 249).
Cf. Ghomara (Berber) lḥinka ‘chin’ (Mourigh 2016: 397).
159 ḥ-n-k²
ḥnk (Pyr) ‘to present s.o. with (m), to offer something; offerings’; ḥnkw ‘diplo-
matic gifts; donated land’; ‘schenken, beschenken’ (Faulkner 1962: 173; DLE I
319, 320; Wb III 117, 118); mḥnk (OK, MK) ‘Beschenkter’ (Wb II 129); ḥnkt ‘Opfer
(mit zwei Wasserkrügen und Tierköpfen von Gans und Rind)’ (Hannig 2003:
848) ~ Dem ḥnk ‘schenken’ (DG 315) ~ Heb ָחנַ ְךḥānak ‘dedicate; train up’; ֲחנֻ ָּכה
ḥănukkāh ‘dedication’ (cf. Nehemiah XI 27); ָחנִ יְךḥānīk ‘trained, tried, experi-
enced’ (BDB 335) ~ Aram ḥnkh ‘dedication’ (Fitzmyer & Harrington 1978: 320)
~ Ge ḥanaka ‘understand, comprehend, perceive’; ḥanik ‘prudence, wisdom’
(Leslau 1987: 237) || Ar ح ن���ك
� ḥanaka ‘Einen verständig machen’ (Wahrmund
I 552): ḥanaka al-šayʾa ‘he understood the thing, knew it soundly, thoroughly’
(Lane 659);
132 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
160 ḥ-n-n
161 ḥ-n-y
ّ
hnn (MK) ‘neigen, beugen’ (Wb II 494; Calice 1936: 173) || Ar ح ن���ا
� ḥannā ‘to bend,
to curve a.th.’ (Hava 1982: 147) ~ Syr ḥ nā ‘to bend a bow’ (CSD 149);
ǝ
~ Baghdad ḥina ‘bow, bend forward, tilt forward’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967:
122) ~ Kfarʿabīda nḥana ‘être courbé, se plier’ (Feghali 1919: 180) ~ Palest ḥana
‘Knie beugen’ (Bauer 1957: 58) ~ Egypt ḥana ‘to bend, curve’ (Spiro 1895: 155)
~ Al-Andalus ⟨naḥni, ḥanayt⟩ ‘to bend, turn (intrans.)’ (Corriente 1997: 142).
162 ḥ-w-b
ḥb (MK) ‘to grieve, mourn’; ‘trauern’ (Ember 1930: 78; Faulkner 1962: 167; Wb III
�
61; Hannig 1995: 522) || Saf ḥwb/ḥyb ‘to lament’ (Al-Jallad 2015: 323) ~ Ar �حو ب
ḥawb ‘tristesse, douleur’ (DAF I 507);
160. ḥ-n-n – 165. ḥ-w-l 133
163 ḥ-w-r¹
ḥwrw (MK) ‘poor, humble man’; ‘der Schwache’; ḥwrw i҆b ‘poor of understand-
ing’ (Faulkner 1962: 166; Wb III 55) || Ar ح�ا رḥāra ‘to be perplexed’ (Hava 1982:
148); ‘verblüfft, verwirrt, erstaunt sein’ (Wahrmund I 555); ‘he returned from a
good state to a bad; he became confounded, perplexed, and was unable to see
the right course’ (Lane 665);
~ Aleppo ḥār ‘être embarassé, perplexe’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 187)
~ Damascus ḥtār ‘be at a loss’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 142) ~ Palest miḥtār fi
amro ‘gänzlich unwissend’ (Bauer 1957: 366) ~ Egypt iḥtār/iḥtayyar ‘to be per-
plexed, bewildered’ (Spiro 1895: 116) ~ Kǝndērīb ḥār ‘nicht mehr weiter wissen’
(O. Jastrow 2005: 41) ~ Petra hadāk ð̣ uʿun il-ḥabāyib fi-l-ḥamād iḥtār ‘Da ist ja
eine Karawane mit Freunden, die sich in der Wüste verirrten’ (Musil 1908: 220).
164 ḥ-w-r²
ḥr (Pyr) ‘be distant, be far from (r)’ (Faulkner 1962: 175); ḥrj (Pyr) ‘weit sein, sich
entfernen’ (Calice 1936: 179) || Ar ح�ا رḥāra ‘to return, to go down’ (Hava 1982:
148); ‘seinen Weg verloren haben; zurückkehren, wiederkommen’ (Wahrmund
I 555; 562);
~ Daθīna ⟨ḥār⟩ ‘rentrer dans l’aprés-midi ou le soir’ (GD 509) ~ Yemen ḥār
‘to turn’ (Piamenta 1990: 112) ~ Palest ḥār ‘retourner, revenir’ (Denizeau 1960:
128); bitḥūr ‘kehrt zurück’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 16).
165 ḥ-w-l
َ َ
(i) ḥꜣ (Pyr) ‘around’; ‘um … herum’: pḫr ḥꜣ ‘gehen, zirkulieren um, herumgehen
�
um’; r-ḥꜣ ‘[präp.] hinter’ (Ember 1930: 78; DLE I 295; Hannig 1995: 502) || Ar حول
ḥawla ‘rund herum’ (Wahrmund I 559);
~ Daθīna ⟨ḥāwal⟩ ‘tout autour’ (GD 525) ~ Yemen ḥawl ‘attorno’ (Rossi 1939:
194) ~ Hijaz ḥawāli ‘about, approximately’ (Omar 1975: 253) ~ Iraq ḥawl (prep.)
134 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
‘around, about, in the area of’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 124) ~ Najd maḥālih
‘water wheel’ (Sowayan 1992: 296) ~ Kǝndērīb ḥawl ‘um … herum’ (O. Jastrow
2005: 42) ~ Al-Balqāʾ miḥīl ‘turning away’ (Palva 1992: 168) ~ Palest ḥawal ‘faire
cercle’ (Denizeau 1960: 131) ~ Egypt ḥawalēn ‘around, about’ (Badawi & Hinds
1986: 234).
(ii) mḥn (Pyr) ‘coil (n. & v.), (of serpents)’; ‘sich ringeln’ (Faulkner 1962: 114;
Calice 1936: 64);
~ Rwala maḥālah, pl maḥāl ‘wooden roller of a water hoist’ (Musil 1928:
339) ~ Najd maḥāla ‘oberes Querholz der Schöpfmaschine’ (Socin 1901 III
259) ~ Palest ḥawl ‘ringsum’ (Bauer 1957: 245); mḥāle ‘rouleau, roulette, poulie’
(Denizeau 1960: 132) ~ Egypt ḥawwil ‘to change, turn from, transfer’ (Spiro 1895:
118) ~ Ḥassāniyya ḥawli, pl ḥwāle ‘turban’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 147).
166 ḥ-w-y¹
� ة
ḥw (Pyr) ‘food’; ‘Nahrung, Speise’ (Faulkner 1962: 164; Wb III 44; Calice 1936:
175) || Ar � حي���ا ḥayāh ‘life’; ح�اي�اḥāyā ‘to nourish’ (Hava 1982: 152);
~ Oman ḥāyāt ‘food supplies’ (Eades 2011: 40) ~ Damascus ḥayāt ‘life’
(Stowasser & Ani 1964: 138) ~ Kǝndērīb ḥayāt ‘Leben’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 42)
~ Palest ḥayāto ‘sein Leben’ (Bauer 1957: 190) ~ Egypt ḥayā ‘life’ (Spiro
1895: 157).
167 ḥ-w-y²
sḥwy (caus.) ‘rassembler’ (Meeks 1981: 242) || Ar حو�ى� ḥawā ‘to gather’ (Hava
1982: 151);
~ Najd ḥawa ‘to collect, encompass’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 350) ~ Lebanon
ḥewe, yeḥwa ‘contenir, posséder’ (Denizeau 1960: 132) ~ Palest iḥtawa ‘enthalten’
(Bauer 1957: 93) ~ Kǝndērīb ḥawa, yǝḥwi ‘bei sich zu Hause haben’ (O. Jastrow
2005: 42).
168 ḥ-w-y³
wḥy.t (MK) ‘Stamm der Beduinen Syriens’; wḥyt (MK) ‘family, kindred’; ‘Familie’;
wḥy (NK) ‘Niederlassung in Fremden Ländern’ (Wb I 346; Faulkner 1962: 66);
295) || Ar ح َو�ى
ḥwt-sr ‘mansion of the prince’ (DLE I 304) ~ Heb ַחוָ הḥawāh ‘tent-village’ (BDB
� ḥawā ‘sammeln, versammeln’; ḥayy ‘grosse Stammabteilung,
Nachbarn von gleichem Stamme’ (Wahrmund I 560, 561);
166. ḥ-w-y ¹ – 170. ḥ-y-n 135
~ Rwala ḥayy ‘tribe, kin’: ḥayyeh ‘his people’ (Musil 1928: 165, 359, 578)
~ Sinai ḥayy ‘an encampment’ (C. Bailey 1991: 435) ~ Najd ḥaya ‘green pas-
ture’ (Sowayan 1992: 261) ~ Aleppo ḥayy ‘lieu où campe un tribu arabe; d’où,
quartier où l’on habite’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 189) ~ Ḥama ḥayy ‘Stadtviertel’
(Lewin 1966: 205) ~ Damascus ḥayy ‘neighborhood’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964:
157) ~ Kǝndērīb ḥawa ‘sich halten (Tiere)’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 42) ~ Marazig
ḥay (sans pl) ‘gens, groupe de gens (en nomadisation seulement)’ (Boris
1958: 135) ~ Morocco ḥayy ‘campement, quartier d’une ville’ (Prémare III 301)
~ Al-Andalus ⟨ḥayy, pl aḥyā⟩ ‘tribal community’ (Corriente 1997: 146).
169 ḥ-y-r
ḥrj.t-š (LE) ‘Gartenanlage bei einem Tempel’ (Wb III 135); ḥrt-i҆b ‘central hall
َْ
of temple’ (Faulkner 1962: 175) ~ Sab ḥyrt ‘encampment’ (Jamme 1962: 436) ||
Ar حي��رḥayr ‘garden, enclosure’ (Hava 1982: 152);
~ Damascus ḥāra ‘Gasse, Viertel’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 156) ~ Ḥama ḥāra
‘Stadtviertel’ (Lewin 1966: 205) ~ Lebanon ḥāra ‘grande maison’ (Barthélemy
1935–69: 187) ~ Palest ḥāra ‘Stadtviertel’ (Bauer 1957: 285) ~ Egypt ḥāra ‘lane,
quarter’ (Spiro 1895: 117) ~ Djidjelli ḥāra ‘quartier’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 255)
~ Khābūra ḥāra ‘[the] housing-area of a settlement’ (Brockett 1985: 86)
~ Yemen ḥāreh ‘quartiere di città’ (Rossi 1939: 231) ~ Daθīna ⟨ḥayr⟩, pl ⟨ḥyār⟩
‘enclos’; ⟨ḥāra⟩ ‘quartier d’une ville’ (GD 534, 535) ~ Najd ḥēr, pl ḥyūr ‘fenced
palm garden’ (Sowayan 1992: 261).
170 ḥ-y-n
ḥn.t (MK) ‘space of time, life, lifetime’; ‘Zeitraum, Frist (zumeist im Sinne von
lange Zeit)’ (Faulkner 1962: 171; Wb III 106); ḥn ‘eilen, gehen’ (Hannig 1995: 536)
|| Ar � حي�� نḥīn ‘time, space of time, opportunity’ (Hava 1982: 153);
~ ʿAnazeh hal-ḥīn ‘maintenant’ (Landberg 1940: 16) ~ Sinai ḥyān ‘sometimes’
(Stewart 1990: 235) ~ Negev halḥīn ‘now’ (Henkin 2010: 242) ~ Khābūra el-ḥīne
‘now, nowadays’ (Brockett 1985: 88) ~ Hijaz al-ḥīn/daḥḥīn ‘now’ (Omar 1975:
252, 256) ~ Yemen mā-ḥīn ‘allorché’ (Rossi 1939: 192) ~ Egypt ḥīn, pl aḥyān
‘time, occasion’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 236) ~ Šukriyya daḥīn ‘nun, also, jetzt’
(Reichmuth 1983: 126) ~ Tripoli (Libya) ḥīnma ‘appena che’ (Griffini 1913: 16)
~ Tunis ḥīna ‘maintenant’ (D. Cohen 1975: 151) ~ Marazig fi-l-ḥīn ‘sofort’ (Ritt-
Benmimoun 2005: 121) ~ Algiers ḥīn ‘moment’ (Tapiéro 1971: 163) ~ Morocco
ḥīn/ḥēn, pl aḥyān ‘moment (court, instant)’; ḥēnen/ḥēnma ‘dès que, au moment
136 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
où’ (Prémare III 198, 137); fe-l-ḥin ‘on the spot’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 189)
~ Malta ⟨x’ħen hu?⟩ ‘what’s the time?’ (own obs.).
171 ḥ-y-y
ḥyt/ḥwyt/ḥw.t (Pyr) ‘rain (n. & vb.)’; ‘der Regen, Sturm und Regen, Regenwasser,
Flut (des Nils)’; ḥy ‘Flut (eines Gewässers)’; ḥwyt ‘rain (vb.)’ (Caminos 1954:
568; Ember 1930: 78; Faulkner 1962: 165; DLE I 303; Wb III 49; Hannig 1995: 515)
ً�
~ Dem ḥwj ‘regnen’; ḥw ‘der Regen’ (DG 295) ~ Copt ϩⲱⲟⲩ ‘rain’ (Crum 1939:
732a) || Ar حي���ا ḥayan ‘Regen’ (Wahrmund I 561);
~ Rwala ḥaya ‘a copious rain’ (Musil 1928: 542) ~ Najd ḥaya ‘abundant rains’
(Kurpershoek 1995: 350); ⟨ḥayā⟩ ‘Regen’ (Socin 1901 III 260) ~ Syrian Ar ḥayyet
el-mā ‘conduite d’eau’ (Denizeau 1960: 132).
172 x-b-b
ّ
1981: 128) [< *bḫbḫ < *xbxb] || Ar � خ�� بxabba ‘to be crafty, mischievous’ (Hava
bẖbẖ (MK) ‘Hochmut, Frechheit’; ‘insolent, impudent’ (Wb I 472; Meeks
1982: 154).
173 x-b-r
‘sich begrüssen’ (Reinhardt 1895: 51) ~ Najd xubra rabʿ ‘one’s own group’
(Kurpershoek 1999: 360) ~ Kfarʿabīda tḥāber ‘il s’est associé avec’ (Feghali 1919:
63) ~ Sinai xibra, pl xabāriy ‘an area inhabited by bedouin’ (C. Bailey 1991: 435).
174 x-b-l
machen (Traurigkeit, Liebesschmerz); Einem den Kopf verrückt machen’; خ� ب���ا ل
xabāl ‘ruin’ (Wahrmund I 572; Hava 1982: 157);
~ Najd axbal, pl xibil ‘stupid, foolish, insane’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 351) ~ Iraq
xaḅḅaḷ ‘drive insane’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 129) ~ Palest nxabal ‘avoir le
cerveau dérangé’ (Denizeau 1960: 136) ~ Marazig xabbal ‘emmêler’; xtǝbal
‘devenir fou’ (Boris 1958: 139) ~ Egypt xabal/xabbil ‘to confuse, perplex, puzzle’
(Spiro 1895: 162) ~ Morocco xabbǝl ‘emmêler, embrouiller, rendre inextricable’
(Prémare IV 15) ~ Malta ⟨ħabbel, iħabbel⟩ ‘confuse’ (own obs.).
175 x-t-m
ḫtm (OK) ‘seal (vb. & n.), contract’; ‘Vertrag, gesiegelte Rechtsurkunde, das
Siegel, siegeln, versiegeln; verschliessen, einschliessen’; ḫtmj ‘Siegler’ (Faulkner
خت
1962: 199; Breasted 1930: 555; Wb III 350–52; Hannig 1995: 625) || Heb [] ָח ַתם
ḥātam ‘to seal’ (BDB 367) || Ar �� xatama ‘to seal, stamp’ (Hava 1982: 157);
م
~ Damascus xatam ‘to seal’; xǝtǝm, pl xtūme ‘seal (n)’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964:
194) ~ Palest xitm/xtūme ‘Siegelabdruck’; xatam ‘siegeln’ (Bauer 1957: 275, 276)
~ Egypt xatam ‘to seal, sign’; xitm, pl axtām ‘seal (n)’ (Spiro 1895: 163).
ت
ָ ḥōtām ‘seal, signet-ring’ (BDB 368) || Ar � خ��اxātim ‘signet-ring’
ḫtm.t (LE) ‘Fingerring (aus Gold)’ (Wb III 350) ~ Dem ḫtm ‘Ring’ (DG 372)
م
~ Heb חֹותם
(Hava 1982: 157);
~ Oman xātum ‘Ring’ (Reinhardt 1894: 43) ~ Aleppo xātǝm, pl xwētǝm
‘cachet enchâssé dans une bague’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 193) ~ Damascus
xātem, pl xawātem ‘ring’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 194) ~ Kǝndērīb xātǝm ‘Ring’
(O. Jastrow 2005: 43) ~ Egypt xātim, pl xawātim ‘finger-ring’ (Spiro 1895: 162)
~ Tripoli (Libya) xātem ‘anello’ (Griffini 1913: 13) ~ Djidjelli xāṭǝm ‘anneau,
138 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
bague’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 263) ~ Morocco xatem, pl xwatem ‘ring’ (Sobelman &
Harrell 1963: 164).
176 x-ð-m
�ذ
Ar �� خxaðama ‘he cut it, he cut it off’ (Lane 714); cf. 426. x-ṭ-b;
ẖdb (MK) ‘töten, niedermetzeln im Kampf’ (Wb III 403; Calice 1936: 189) ||
م
~ Al-Andalus mixðam ‘knife’ (Corriente 1997: 151).
177 x-r-ʾ
ḥ-()r-ja (LE) ‘getrockneter Mist’ ~ ḥri҆t ‘dung’ (Helck 1962: 566; DLE 323) ~ Heb
178 x-r-b¹
ة
‘waste land’ (CAD VI 87, 98, 100) || Ar ��� �خ�ربxirbah, pl � �خ�ر بxirab ‘ruins’ (Hava
ḫrb (LE) ‘desert’ (Hoch 1994: 249) ~ Akkad ḫarābu ‘to lie waste’; ḫarbu/ḫarībtu
1982: 160);
~ N. Yemen xarāba ‘Ruine’ (Behnstedt 1987: 248) ~ Palest xirbe, pl xirab
‘Ruine’; xarābe ‘baufalliges Haus’; xrābih ‘klein verlassener Brunnen’ (Bauer
1957: 248, 67; Kampffmeyer 1936: 18) ~ Kǝndērīb xǝṛbe ‘Ruine’ (O. Jastrow 2005:
43) ~ Najd xarāb ‘ruin’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 360) ~ Tunis xarba ‘bâtiment en
ruines’ (D. Cohen 1975: 28) ~ Malta [*xirbä] ⟨ħerba⟩ ‘ruina’ (Vassalli 1796: 283).
179 x-r-b²
(Parpola 2007: 35) ~ Heb ָח ֵרבḥārēb ‘be waste, desolate’ (BDB 351) || Ar ��خ� ّر ب
Dem ḫrb ‘destroy’ (Hoch 1994: 249) ~ Akkad ḫarābu ‘be deserted, be waste’
~ Aleppo xarab ‘détruire, ruiner, dévaster (un pays, une ville, une mai-
son)’ (Barthélemy 195) ~ Damascus xarrab ‘destroy’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964:
65) ~ Egypt xarab ‘destroy, ruin’ (Spiro 1895: 164) ~ Mzāb xarrab ‘il a détruit’
(Grand’Henry 1976: 109).
180 x-r-r¹
319; Calice 1936: 76) || Ar �خ� ّرxarra ‘to fall down, collapse’ (Ambros 2004: 85);
ḫr (Pyr) ‘to fall’; ‘fallen, fällen’ (Faulkner 1962: 195; Caminos 1954: 576; Wb III
~ Iraq xarr ‘to fall, fall down, drop, dive, swoop down’ (Woodhead &
Beene 1967: 132) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨yanxarru⟩ ‘to fall’ (Corriente 1997: 153)
~ Palest xarr ‘Gurgel vom Eindringen des Wassers’ (Bauer 1957: 144) ~ Egypt
xarr ‘to leak, trickle, drop’ (Spiro 1895: 164) ~ E. Arabia xarr ‘to fall, leak’ (Holes
2001: 143) ~ Sinai xurr ‘a channel for water caused by continual dropping’
(Wilson & Palmer 1869: 306) ~ Najd xarr ‘traufen’ (Socin 1901 III 260) ~ Aleppo
xǝrr ‘couler (: eau courante), tomber (étoile filante)’ ~ Oman xarr ‘auslaufen’
(Reinhardt 1894: 178) ~ Palest xuṛṛ ‘leak water’ (de Jong 2011: 30).
181 x-r-r²
šr.t (Pyr) ‘nose’; ‘die Nase’ (Ember 1930: 96; Wb IV 523) [< *xr.t] || Ar �خ�ر�خ�ر
xarxara ‘to snore’ (Hava 1982: 160);
~ Tripoli (Lebanon) xarr ‘siffler, murmurer’ (El-Hajjé 1954: 138) ~ Damascus
šaxar ‘snore’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 215) ~ Palest šaxxar/šaxwar ‘schnarchen’
(Bauer 1957: 263).
182 x-r-d
ẖrdt (OK) ‘Tochter’ (Hannig 2003: 1023); ẖrd (Pyr) ‘child; be, become a child’;
‘das Kind’; ‘rajeunir’; ẖrdw ‘chilhood’; tꜣ ẖrd ‘die Tochter’; ẖrd.w ꜣ ‘drei Kinder’
183 x-r-f¹
ẖꜣp.t/šꜣp.t (Pyr) ‘Umwetter’ (Wb III 362, IV 410) ~ Akkad ḫarpu ‘early harvest’
ف
ḫrf ‘autumn’ (Jamme 1962: 437) || Ar ��� �خ�ر�يxarīf ‘autumn’ (Hava 1982: 164);
(M. Cohen 2011: 99) ~ Heb ח ֶֹרףḥōrep ‘harvest-time, autumn’ (BDB 358) ~ Sab
184 x-r-f²
ف أ فة
ḫrp (20th Dyn.) ‘Rinder’ (Wb III 329) || Ar �� �خ�روxarūf, pl ��� � �خ�رʾaxrifah ‘lamb,
calf; colt (six months old)’ (Hava 1982: 164);
~ Najd xarūf, pl xirfān ‘das erwachsene männliche Tier (auch allgemeine
Bezeichnung für das männliche Geschlecht)’ (Hess 1938: 82) ~ Kǝndērīb xāṛūf,
pl xǝwērīf ‘Lamm’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 44) ~ Damascus xarūf, pl xawārīf/xurfān
‘lamb’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 133) ~ Palest xarūf izġīr ‘Lamm’ (Bauer 1957: 187).
185 x-r-m
ḫꜣm ‘un arbre’ (Meeks 1981: 270) || Ar �خ�رxarm ‘leaves and branches of a tree’
م
(Hava 1982: 165).
~ Palest xǝrma ‘dattes’ (Denizeau 1960: 142) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨xurram⟩ ‘Aster
tripolium’ (Corriente 1997: 155).
186 x-z-y
ẖsy (MK) ‘coward’; ẖs(y) ‘weak, feeble, humble (of rank)’ (Faulkner 1962:
204); ẖsy ‘schwach sein, versagen; gering an Ansehen oder an Tüchtigkeit’;
ẖsy.t ‘Schwäche, Feigheit’ (Hannig 2003: 1023; Wb III 398–99; Calice 1936: 78;
183. x-r-f ¹ – 189. x-ṭ- ʾ 141
187 x-s-l
(Faulkner 1962: 198; Wb III 338; Albright 1918b: 240) || Ar خ���س�لxasala ‘jeter loin
ḫśr (Pyr) ‘to dispel, drive away (darkness, evil)’; ‘beseitigen, vertreiben’
de soi avec mépris’; ‘to exile’ (DAF 573; Hava 1987: 167);
~ Al-Andalus ⟨naxzal xazl⟩ ‘cut asunder’ (Corriente 1997: 155).
188 x-š-m
ḫnš (Med) [< *xmš < *xšm] ‘stinken’; ‘to stink, rot; to make stink’ (Wb III 301;
~ Copt ϣⲛⲟϣ ‘stink’ (Crum 1939: 573b) || Ar ��� خ� شxašima ‘to stink’ (Hava
Ember 1930: 93; Faulkner 1962: 193; DLE 366) ~ Dem ḫnš ‘stinken’ (DG 363)
1982: 169);
م
~ Aleppo xǝšǝm ‘cartilages du nez’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 204) ~ Palmyra
xešem, pl xšūm ‘nez’ (Cantineau 1934 II 1) ~ Iraq xašim, pl xšūm ‘nose’
(Woodhead & Beene 1967: 135) ~ Rwala xašm, pl xšūm ‘nose or steep spur of a
ridge’ (Musil 1928: 679) ~ Najd ⟨xašm⟩ ‘Nase des Kamels’ (Socin 1901 III 261).
189 x-ṭ-ʾ
ḫtj (MK) ‘zurückweichen’; ḫtḫt ‘stray, lose the way; verloren gehen, abhanden
kommen’ (Ember 1930: 82; Faulkner 1962: 199; Wb III 342, 348; Hannig 1995:
(M. Cohen 2011: 191) || Ar خ���ط�ئxaṭiʾa ‘to fail, make a mistake’ (Hava 1982: 173);
627) ~ Heb ָח ָטאḥāṭāʾ ‘miss (a goal or way)’ (BDB 306) ~ Akkad ḫaṭû ‘to sin’
142 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
~ Oman xṭiyye ‘Sünde’ (Reinhardt 1895: 54) ~ Sinai xaṭá ‘misdeed’; mixṭiy
‘wrongdoer’ (Stewart 1990: 283) ~ E. Arabia xaṭa ‘error, fault, mistake’ (Holes
2001: 152) ~ Iraq xiṭaʾ ‘to make a mistake’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 138) ~ Rwala
axṭa ‘to commit an error, to do wrong’ (Musil 1928: 647) ~ Lebanon xṭiyye, pl
xṭāya ‘péché’ (Bauer 1957: 109) ~ Damascus ʾaxṭa ‘sündigen’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 27)
~ Palest axṭa ‘fehlschlagen’ (Bauer 1957: 109) ~ Tunis txaṭṭa ‘il a été penalisé’;
xṭiyya ‘amende’ (D. Cohen 1975: 128, 160) ~ Djidjelli xṭa ‘erreur’ (Ph. Marçais
1956: 258) ~ Tangier xṭā ‘manquer (ne pas atteindre le but)’ (W. Marçais 1911:
282) ~ Ḥassāniyya xaṭye ‘injure’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 84).
190 x-ṭ-r
ḫt (Pyr) ‘wood, timbers’; ‘Holz (als Teil des Baumes), Nutzholz, Baum; Stab,
Stock zum Prügeln’ (Faulkner 1962: 198; Wb III 339, 340; Calice 1936: 77; Albright
1918: 240) ~ Akkad ḫaṭṭu(m)/ḫuṭaru/ḫuṭuru ‘Stab, Szepter, Zweig’ (von Soden
I 337, 362) ~ Aram ḥuṭrā ‘Stab, Szepter’ (Gesenius & Buhl 1915: 225) ~ Phoen
Buhl 1903: 131) ~ Syr ḥuṭrā ‘virga, baculus’ (Brockelmann 1928: 228) || Ar خ���طر
ḥṭr ‘sceptre’ (Krahmalkov 2000: 181) ~ Heb ח ֶֹטרḥōṭer ‘Zweig, Reis’ (Gesenius &
أ
xiṭr, pl � خ���ط�ا رʾaxṭār ‘branch of a tree’ (Lane 764);
~ Yemen xiṭarī ‘upright plant like a palm twig, fig’ (Piamenta 1990: 132)
~ Rwala muxṭar ‘iron rod holding holding the wooden roller of a water hoist’
(Musil 1928: 339) ~ Egypt xiṭr, pl axṭār ‘Pfosten des Schöpfbaums’ (Behnstedt
& Woidich 1994: 117) ~ Djidjelli xṭēṛa (poet.) ‘rameau’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 270)
~ Malta ⟨ħatar, pl oħtra⟩ ‘asta, bastone; bacchetta da perscuotere’ (Vassalli
1796: 269).
Neo-Aram: Challa (Jew) xuṭṭa ‘stick, rod’ (Fassberg 2009: 305) ~ Ṭuroyo ḥaṭro, pl ḥaṭróθe
‘Knüppel’ (O. Jastrow 1985: 219) ~ Kurdistan xuṭra ‘stick, staff, rod, sceptre’ (Maclean
1895: 94) ~ N.W. Iraq (Jew) xáṭra ‘rod’ (Sabar 2002: 195) ~ Mand huṭra ‘staff, sceptre, flail’
(Drower & Macuch 1963: 135).
191 x-ṭ-ṭ
ّخ
ḫti҆ (MK) ‘carve, engrave’; ‘einritzen, einschneiden (Inschriften, Bilder)’; ḫtj
‘der Graveur’ (Albright 1918: 95; Faulkner 1962: 198; Wb III 348) || Ar ���طxaṭṭa
‘Linien oder Striche ziehen’ (Wahrmund I 602);
~ Iraq xaṭṭ ‘to draw (a line)’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 139) ~ Kǝndērīb
xaṭṭ ‘Linien ziehen, einritzen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 45) ~ Sinai xaṭṭ ‘to draw a line’
(Stewart 1990: 287); maxaṭṭ ‘tatooed’ (C. Bailey 1991: 435) ~ Egypt xaṭṭ ‘to draw
190. x-ṭ-r – 194. x-f-r 143
a line, write’ (Spiro 1895: 174) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨xaṭṭ⟩ ‘to make a furrow’ (Corriente
1997: 160).
192 x-ṭ-m
ḫnt (Pyr) ‘face, brow’; ‘das Gesicht’ (Ember 1930: 71; Faulkner 1962: 194; Wb
2007: 261) || Ar � خ���طxaṭm ‘beak (of a bird), muzzle, nose’ (Hava 1982: 176);
III 302) ~ Heb ח ֶֹטםḥōṭem ‘nose’ (BDB 310) ~ Akkad ḫuṭimmu ‘snout’ (Parpola
م
~ Najd xṭām ‘noseband, halter’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 363) ~ Lebanon xaṭṭam
‘se couvrir la tête et le visage en ne laissant paraître que les yeux’ (Denizeau
1960: 149) ~ Palest mexṭame/maxṭemiyye ‘chaînette métallique de la muserolle’
(Denizeau 1960: 149; Dalman II 107).
193 x-ṭ-w
ḫtj.w (Pyr) ‘Terrasse mit Treppe’; ‘terraced hillside’ (Wb III 348; Faulkner 1962:
ة ً
199) || Ar � خ���طوxuṭwah, pl خ���طىxuṭan ‘step’ (Hava 1982: 176);
~ Iraq xiṭa ‘to step’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 138) ~ Sinai xuṭwah ‘pace, step’
(Stewart 1990: 283) ~ Yemen xaṭwah ‘passo’ (Rossi 1939: 226) ~ Rwala xaṭwa
zēna ‘light, regular, long step (of riding camel)’ (Musil 1928: 356) ~ Damascus
xaṭwe ‘step’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 224) ~ Egypt xaṭwah ‘Meter’; xaṭṭa ‘über-
schreiten, überspringen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 119; Spiro 1895: 176)
~ Kǝndērīb xaṭwe ‘Schritt’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 45) ~ Palmyra xaṭwaṭ ‘faire des sil-
lons’ (Cantineau 1934 II 149) ~ Palest xaṭwe ‘Schritt’ (Bauer 1957: 266) ~ Tunis
xaṭwa ‘pas’ (D. Cohen 1975: 149) ~ Djidjelli xoṭwa ‘enjambée’ (Ph. Marçais 1956:
259) ~ Ūlād Brāhīm stxaṭṭa ‘enjamber’ (W. Marçais 1908: 109).
194 x-f-r
(Biella 1982: 208) || Ar خ���ف��رxafara ‘beschützen, Schutz und Hilfe leisten’; خ���ف��ي��ر
Brockelmann 1932: 112) ~ Sab hḫfr ‘give protection, aid’; ḫfr ‘(divine) protection’
ف
xafīr, pl خ�����را ءxafarāʾ ‘Beschützer, Geleitsmann’ (Wahrmund I 608, 610);
~ Egypt ġafīr/ġafar ‘Feldschutz, Flurwächter’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994:
338) ~ Aleppo ġafīr, pl ġǝfara ‘sentinelle, un garde, [pour xafīr]’ (Barthélemy
144 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
195 x-f-ʿ
ف
76) || Ar ����� خxafaʿa ‘schlagen’ (Wahrmund I 609).
ḫfʿ (Pyr) ‘fist’; ‘der Faust, der Griff’ (Faulkner 1962: 190; Wb III 272; Calice 1936:
ع
196 x-f-y
(Wb IV 455) || Ar ����� خxafiya ‘to conceal oneself’ (Hava 1982: 178);
špy [< *ḫpy] ‘be ashamed’ (Ember 1930: 95); šf ‘jemanden verächtlich machen’
ف�ي
~ Rwala xafiyyāt ‘hidden things’ (Musil 1928: 289) ~ Damascus ḥāwal yǝxfi
irtibāko ‘he tried to hide his embarassment’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 116) ~ S.E.
Anatolia xtafa ‘verschwinden’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 142) ~ Palest xtafa
‘s’égarer’ (Denizeau 1960: 150) ~ Egypt xtafa ‘to hide oneself’ (Spiro 1895: 177)
~ Al-Andalus ⟨balxafi⟩ ‘secretly’ (Corriente 1997: 161).
197 x-l-b
ḫꜣb (Pyr) ‘bend, be bent, crooked’; ‘gekrümmt, gebückt sein; beugen’; ḫꜣbb
582) || Ar ��خ�ل� ب
مmaxlab, pl ���خ�ا �ل
‘crookedness’; ḫꜣbw ‘sickle’ (Faulkner 1962: 184; Ember 1930: 21; Hannig 1995:
� م
� بmaxālib ‘claws, clutches, talons, reaping hook’
(Hava 1982: 179);
~ Khābūra xalab ‘to seize with the claws’ (Brockett 1985: 93) ~ Rwala
maxāleb ‘claws’ (Musil 1928: 607) ~ Iraq mixlāb, pl maxālib ‘claw, talon’ (1967:
141) ~ Damascus maxlab, pl maxāleb ‘claw’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 42) ~ Palest
maxlab, pl maxālib ‘Kralle’ (Bauer 1957: 182) ~ Negev maxālīb ‘clutches of pred-
ator birds’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Egypt xālib, pl xawālib ‘Klauen’ (Behnstedt &
Woidich 1994: 119) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨maxlab⟩ ‘claw’ (Corriente 1997: 162).
195. x-f- ʿ – 200. x-l-f ¹ 145
198 x-l-x-l
~ Copt ϣⲱϣ ‘scatter, spread’ (Crum 1939: 605) || Ar �مت���� خ���ل�� خ��لmutaxalxil ‘épar-
winnow’ (DLE I 373) ~ Syr ḥalḥal ‘to move to and fro, shake violently’ (CSD 142)
199 x-l-ʿ
ḫꜣʿ (Pyr) ‘throw, cast off (bonds), thrust, eject from, reject’; ‘werfen (auf den
Boden, ins Wasser werfen), legen etwas an einer Stelle, fortwerfen’; ḫꜣʿw ‘dis-
ḫꜣ(ʿ) ‘werfen, lassen, verlassen, aufgeben’ (DG 345) || Ar خ���لxalaʿa ‘to pull off’
charges’ (Faulkner 1962: 183, 184; Ember 1930: 20; DLE I 346; Wb III 227) ~ Dem
ع
(Hava 1982: 181);
~ Egypt xalaʿ ‘to dislocate, unhinge, depose, strip’; ‘herausnehmen, ent-
fernen’; xallaʿ ‘ausreißen’ (Spiro 1895: 180; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 120)
~ Iraq xalaʿ ‘to dislocate, wrench, remove, dismiss’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967:
143) ~ Lebanon xalaʿ ‘deboîter (un membre)’; xaleʿ ‘arracher’ (Feghali 1935: 43;
1938: 762) ~ Aleppo xalaʿ ‘arracher, déraciner, ébranler’ (Barthélemy 1935–69:
212) ~ Palest mxallaʿ/mxalwaʿ ‘wackelig, aus den Fugen’ (Kampffmeyer 1936:
19); xalaʿ ‘to lose one’s wits, to shake’ (Piamenta 2000: 205) ~ Ḥassāniyya
xlaʿ ‘faire peur’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 113) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨xalaʿ⟩ ‘he took off his
clothes’ (Corriente 1997: 163).
200 x-l-f¹
ḫrpw (Gr) ‘Ländereien’; ‘district (?), estate (?)’; ḫrp ‘controller, administrator’
� ف مmixlāf, pl ��خ�ا ��لي� ف
(Beeston et al., 1982: 60) || Ar �� �خ�لا
(Wb III 329; cf. Faulkner 1962: 196) ~ Sab ḫlf ‘region, the vicinity of a town’
مmaxālīf ‘province’ (Hava
�
1982: 182);
~ Yemen mixlāf ‘province, region’ (Müller 2014: 91).
146 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
201 x-l-f²
(i) ḫpr (Pyr) ‘come into being, become, change, grow up, come to pass’; ‘werden,
entstehen, geboren werden; sein, existieren’; ḫpr.w ‘die Kinder’ (Ember 1930: 75;
Wb III 260, 263, 264; Caminos 1954: 574, 575; Calice 1936: 76; Albright 1918: 227);
ف
47) || Ar � خ���لxalafa ‘suivre, être derrière, succéder à quelqu’un’ (DAF I 618);
ḫpr mw n.w(=i҆fdw) mḥ 4 ‘das Wasser von vier Ellen entsteht …’ (Lepper 2008:
~ Sinai xilf ‘offspring’ (C. Bailey 1991: 436); mxaḷḷafāt ‘offsprings’ (Stewart
1990: 281) ~ Palest xallafat ‘gebären’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 19) ~ Lebanon xǝlf
‘fruits qui mûrissent, ou feuilles qui poussent’ (Denizeau 1960: 152) ~ Najd xalaf
‘to be different, contradictory’; ixtalaf galbih ‘his heart changed’ (Kurpershoek
1999: 364) ~ Negev xilf ‘in addition to’ (Henkin 2010: 274) ~ Kǝndērīb xalf
‘hinter’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 46) ~ Egypt xalaf ‘to change, alter, succeed’; xalf
‘behind’ (Spiro 1895: 180).
خ فة ف
befohlen war)’ (Faulkner 1862: 196; Wb III 264) || Ar ����� ���ليxalīfah, pl خ���ل���ا ء
(ii) ḫpr (Pyr) ‘govern, control, administer’; ‘etwas tun, etwas ausführen (was
202 x-l-q
ẖꜣk (OK) [< *ḫlq] ‘missbilligen, feindlich sein (r gegen)’ (Hannig 2003: 997);
ẖꜣkw-i҆b (MK) ‘disaffected person; rebel, perverse of heart, evil doer’; ‘listig, ver-
(Wb III 363, 364; Faulkner 1962: 201; DLE I 380, 349) || Ar � خ���ل قxulq/xuluq, pl
schlagen sein, feindlich sein gegen; übelgesinnter, verschlagener; Trauer, Ärger’
أخ ق
� � ��لاʾaxlāq ‘Zorn, Aufwallung, Tapferkeit’ (Wahrmund I 619);
~ Lebanon xelq ‘colère, mauvais caractère’: ṭeleʿ xelqu ‘il s’emporta’; txalleq
‘il se fâcha, il se mit en colère contre quelqu’un’ (M. & J. Feghali 1978: 25, fn 1);
ʾexlāq ‘caractère (moral)’ (Feghali 1938: 557) ~ Syria xulqa ‘Gesicht’; mitxallaq
‘verärgert’ (Behnstedt 1997a: 118) ~ Aleppo xǝlq, pl xlāq ‘caractère, naturel,
colère’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 214) ~ Palest xulq ‘Gewohnheit, Temperament’;
mitxalliq ‘der einen veränderlichen Charakter hat’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 19)
~ E. Arabia axlāq/axlāk ‘morals, manners, customs’ (Holes 2001: 158) ~ Cypriot
Ar xork [< *xulq] ‘anger, bad temper, bad humour’ (Borg 2004: 226) ~ Yemen
xulug ‘natura, carattere’ (Rossi 1939: 222) ~ Rwala xalqeh ‘his heart, nature, solic-
itude’ (Musil 1928: 180) ~ Iraq xulug ‘mood, temper, disposition’ (Woodhead &
Beene 1967: 144) ~ Ḥassāniyya xlāg ‘tempérament’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 142).
201. x-l-f ² – 205. x-m-r ¹ 147
203 x-l-m
ẖnm ‘sich gesellen zu’; ẖnmw (LE) ‘associates’; ‘to join, unite with’; ẖnm ‘herd’
(Faulkner 1962: 193: 202; DLE I 383; Calice 1936: 189; Wb III 377; Caminos 1954:
gen mit, sich vereinigen mit’ (DG 384) || Ar خ��ا لxālama ‘mit einem Freundschaft
578; Gardiner 1957: 585); ḫnms ‘friend’ (Faulkner 1962: 193) ~ Dem ẖnm ‘vereini-
أ م
schließen’; خ���لxilm, pl � خ��لاʾaxlām ‘Freund, Kamerad’ (Wahrmund I 619);
م م
~ Sinai xulḅah ‘group’ (Stewart 1990: 281) ~ Egypt xulba, pl xulab ‘bundle,
bunch’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 259).
204 x-l-y
ḫꜣj (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘die Masse eines Gebäudes, eines Gebietes’; ḫꜣ (Gr)
ة
ber’ (Beeston et al., 1982: 60) || Ar � خ���لوxalwah ‘recess, retired place; Temple
‘office, bureau’ (Wb III 223; Faulkner 1962: 183) ~ Sab ḫlt ‘a funeral cham-
205 x-m-r¹
أخ
Copt ϣⲉⲙⲏⲣ ‘leaven’ (Crum 1939: 567a) [< *ḫmr] ~ Heb ֲח ִמירḥămīr ‘leavened
bread’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 477) || Ar � ��مرʾaxmara ‘to leaven (the dough)’ (Hava
1982: 184);
~ Palest xamīre ‘Sauerteig’ (Bauer 1957: 252) ~ Lebanon xamāyer ‘levure’
(Denizeau 1960: 154) ~ Kǝndērīb xamīre ‘Hefe’; xamīr ‘Sauerteig’ (O. Jastrow
2005: 47) ~ Egypt ximir/ixtamar ‘to leaven, rise (dough)’ (Spiro 1895: 182)
~ Ḥassāniyya xmīre ‘levain’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 90) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨xamīrah⟩
‘leaven, yeast’ (Corriente 1997: 167).
148 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
206 x-m-r²
mḫr (OK) ‘die Kornspeicher; Vorratskammer’; mẖr (MK) ‘Speicher für Korn’;
‘granary, storehouse, barn’; ‘grenier’ (Wb II 132, 134; Edel 1955/1964: XXXVI;
Calice 1936: 157; Ember 1930: 84; Faulkner 1962: 115; Meeks 1981: 171) ~ Akkad
خ
ḫamru ‘sacred precinct’ (CAD VI 70) || Saf ḫmr ‘hiding (act. part.)’ (Winnett &
Lankester 1978: 635) ~ Ar ��مرxamara ‘to conceal, hide’; ‘bedecken, verdecken,
verstecken’ (Hava 1982: 184; Wahrmund I 623); xumur ‘veils, scarves’ (Ambros
2004: 91);
~ Palest maxmara ‘Dörrplatz’; xamīr ‘das getrocknete Getreide’ (Dalman III
278) ~ S.E. Anatolia mxammoṛ ‘bedeckt’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 145) ~ Egypt
xammaṛ ‘die Saat nach Bewässerung trocknen lassen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich
1994: 122).
207 x-m-l¹
خ
ḫml (MK) ‘be unable, not to do’ (Ember 1930: 58) || Ar ��م�لxamila ‘ohnmächtig,
schwach sein’ (Wahrmund I 625);
Cf. Gk χᾰμηλός ‘diminutive, trifling’ (GEL 881).
~ Aleppo xǝmel, f xǝmle ‘mou, lâche, nonchalant; poltron, couard’ (Barthélemy
1935–69: 218) ~ Lebanon xǝmel, yexmal ‘se trouver dans une situation difficile,
avoir un accident, tomber dans le malheur’ (Denizeau 1960: 155).
208 x-m-l²
ḫm (MK) ‘know not, be ignorant of, ignorance, ignorant man’; i҆ḫmw ‘ignorant
ones’; ‘der Unwissende, ungelehrt; Nichtskönner’; ḫmi҆ ‘be unable; not to do’
~ Dem ḫm ‘nicht kennen’ (DG 359) || Ar خ��ا �م�لxāmil ‘obscur, qui n’est pas
(Faulkner 1962: 190, 191, 29; Caminos 1954: 575); Wb III 280; Hannig 2003: 947)
209 x-m-m¹
ḫnm (MK) ‘smell odours’; ‘riechen, einatmen’; ḫnmw ‘smell’; ‘der Geruch’
(Ember 1930: 82; Faulkner 1962: 192, 193; Wb III 292, 293; Caminos 1954: 575)
خ ّ
|| Ar � ��م� نxaman ‘stink’ (Hava 1982: 186); � � خxamma ‘verdorben sein und stinken
~ Dem ḫnm ‘riechen’ (DG 362) ~ Copt ϣⲱⲗⲙ ‘to smell (intr.)’ (Crum 1939: 559b)
م
(Fleisch, Wasser, Milch vom Schlauch)’ (Wahrmund I 622);
~ Negev al-mayyih l-wāgfih bitximm ‘stagnant water stinks’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi)
~ Aleppo xamm ‘exhaler une odeur de relent, sentir légèrement mauvais, com-
mencer à se gâter (viande, crue ou cuite, aliment)’; xmām ‘articles de com-
merce de qualité inférieur, camelote’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 218) ~ Lebanon
xamxam ‘être gâté, fétide (mets, eau)’ (Denizeau 1960: 154) ~ Palest xāmme
‘sauerei’ (Bauer 1957: 252); bitximm ‘stinkt’; xamāxīm ‘verdorbene Speisereste’
(Kampffmeyer 1936: 20) ~ Palmyra xām ‘étoffe de coton écru’ (Cantineau
1934 II 32) ~ Iraq xamxam ‘to become spoiled, tainted’ (Woodhead & Beene
1967: 145) ~ Kǝndērīb (ǝl-bǝrġǝl) txǝmm ‘die Weizengrütze gärt, wird sauer’
(O. Jastrow 2005: 47) ~ Marazig xamm ‘se gâter (viande)’ (Boris 1958: 156)
~ Mzāb xamxām, pl xamxāmīn ‘qui mange n’importe quoi’ (Grand’Henry
1976: 110).
210 x-m-m²
ḫmw (Pyr) [< *ḫmm] ‘dirt, dust’; ‘der Staub, der bei der Arbeit, beim Gehen
aufwirbelt’ (Ember 1930: 58; Faulkner 1962: 190; Wb III 277; Calice 1936: 103;
Albright 1918: 246, fn 2); ḫmy ‘(?) Sandfloh (Phlebotomus papatasii); (?)
ّ
~ Akkad ḫummētu ‘sweepings’ (CAD VI 235) || Ar � � خxamma ‘to sweep a house’
Sandmücke’ (Hannig 1995: 600); ḫm ‘demolish buildings’ (Faulkner 1962: 191)
م
(Hava 1982: 184);
~ Khābūra xmām ‘sweepings’ (Brockett 1985: 94) ~ E. Arabia xamma/xmām
‘(household) sweepings, (farm) rubbish, debris’; xamxam ‘sweep a lot, gobble
food up’ (Holes 2001: 160).
211 x-n-z-r
‘sow’ (CDA 123) ~ Heb ֲחזִ ירxăzīr ‘swine, boar’ (BDB 306) || Ar خ���ن�ز ي�رxinzīr, pl
sow’ (Helck 1971: 505; Hoch 1994: 254; DLE I 378) || Akkad ḫuzīru ‘pig’; ḫuzirtu
خ ن �ز
����ا ي�رxanāzīr ‘pig’ (Hava 1982: 187);
150 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
212 x-n-s
ّ�ن
ḫnz (Pyr) ‘traverse region’; ‘durchziehen, durchfahren’; Ḫnsw ‘moon-god
Khons’ (Faulkner 1962: 193; Wb III 299) || Ar خ����سxunnas ‘Planeten (besonders
Venus und Merkur)’; ‘the five stars, Saturn, Jupiter, Mars, Venus and Mercury’
(Wahrmund I 628; Lane 816).
213 x-n-f-s
ʿpšꜣy (NK) ‘Käfer; Kakerlake (Blatta orientalis)’; ‘beetle; grasshopper’ (Wb I 181;
خ ف
Hannig 1995: 138; DLE I 65; Hoch 1994: 66) ~ Copt ⲉⲡϣⲉ ‘beetle’ (Černý 1976:
ִ ִחḥippūšīt ‘beetle’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 459) || Ar � ن������س�ا ءxunfusāʾ,
خ� ن �ف
37) ~ Heb ּפּוׁשית
pl ���ا ��سxanāfis ‘schwarzer Mistkäfer’ (Wahrmund I 629);
~ E. Arabia xanfūs, pl xanāfis ‘beetle’ (Holes 2001: 163) ~ Yemen xanfsūdeh
‘scarafaggio’ (Rossi 1939: 162) ~ Iraq xunfisān (coll.) ‘beetles’ (Woodhead &
Beene 197: 147) ~ Damascus xǝnǝfse, pl xanāfes ‘beetle’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964:
20) ~ Lebanon xénefse, pl xnāfes ‘scarabée’ (Feghali 1938: 763) ~ Palest xunfse,
pl xanāfis ‘Aaskäfer, großer schwarzer Käfer’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 20) ~ Egypt
xunfisa ‘black beetle’ (Spiro 1895: 183) ~ Morocco xenfusa, pl xnafes ‘beetle’
(Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 20) ~ Ḥassāniyya xanvūs ‘blatte (coll.)’ (Taine-
Cheikh 1990: 31) ~ Malta ⟨ħanfusa, pl ħniefes⟩ ‘beetle’ (Aquilina 1987: 496).
214 x-w-t
ḫꜣwt (LE) ‘rasend, in Verzüchung sein, der Rasende’ (Wb III 226/9–10)
139) ~ Egypt xawat ‘to annoy, bother, disturb’ (Spiro 1895: 184) ~ Bišmizzīn xiwit
‘aufgeregt, verrückt machen’ (Jiha 1964: 70, fn 10) ~ Baskinta axwit, f xawta
‘mad’ (Abu-Haidar 1979: 61, 12) ~ Palmyra axwaθ, f xūθīn/xūθēn, f xōθe, pl xōθēt
‘sourd’ (Cantineau 1934 II 5) ~ Suxne axwaθ ‘schwerhörig’ (Behnstedt 1994:
252) ~ Mosul ⟨axwaθ, f xōθa⟩ ‘out of one’s senses’ (Al-Bakrī 1972: 41).
215 x-w-y¹
ḫw/ḫwi (Pyr) ‘to protect, exclude oneself from quarrels; set aside, prevent;
avoid, safeguard’; ‘schützen, behüten, regieren’; ḫw.(t) ‘protection’; ḫwt ‘sanc-
tuary’; ‘Schutz, Schützerin’; ḫyt ‘shelter’; ḫwt ‘sanctuary’; ḫjj ‘Kind, Bursche’;
ḫw.tjw ‘Schützgötter (besonders des Osiris)’; ẖ.t ‘Körperschaft (der
Götterneunheit und ähnlich)’ (Faulkner 1962: 185, 186; Breasted 1930: 554; DLE I
353; Sethe 1962: 164; Wb III 244–246, 271, 357; Hannig 1995: 588); anthroponyms:
Ḫwj (schöner Name) (Goedicke 1967: 91); Khu ‘protected’ (BM EA 571); Ḫw( j)-
wj-Ptḥ ‘möge Ptah mich schützen’; Ḫw( j)-wj-Rʿ.w ‘möge Re mich schützen’
(anthroponyms; Scheele-Schweitzer 2014: 590); Ḫw-Tꜣ-mḥw ‘Der Unterägypten
beschützt’ (Leitz 2002: 663) ~ Dem ḫwj ‘schützen’ (DG 352) ~ Akkad aḫu ‘(real)
brother; colleague, fellow, associate (as term for a specific social, political, legal,
or emotional relationship)’ ~ aḫû (adj.) ‘strange (person), foreigner, outsider,
alien (object)’ (CAD I/1: 195, 210) ~ aḫḫūtu (adj.) ‘fraternity’ (Parpola 2007: 193)
~ aḫītu ‘circle of acquaintances’ ~ aḫātūtu ‘adoptee’ (M. Cohen 2011: 2, 3) ||
Tham ʾx ‘brother’ (Winnett & Reed أ1970: 193) ~ Saf twḫy ‘to be considered a
brother’ (Al-Jallad 2015: 198) ~ Ar � خ��اʾaxā ‘être frère de quelqu’un, se montrer
frère’ = vulg. wāxā; xayy ‘brother, friend, companion, match’ (DAF 17; Hava 1982:
5); cf. x-y-y;
The semantics of the Semitic lexeme designating ‘brotherhood’ in Old Egyptian is
closely reminiscent of Arabic usage among Bedouin speakers. For further detail, see Borg
(2019b).
~ Rwala xu ‘protector’: xu quṭne ‘protector of the Qutne’; ax ‘the clan’s brother
to whom it pays (yaxīh) an annual sum’; xūwa/xwa ‘tax paid by weaker tribes
to a stronger one; tax for protection’; xāwi (n) ‘fellow traveller’; ‘a comrade who
offers protection to a stranger’ (Musil 1928: 600, 280, 136, 59, 30, 440) ~ Najd
ixu ‘brother’; xāwih ‘a Bedouin institution whereby a weak tribe seeks the pro-
tection of a stronger tribe through the payment of a regular tax in the form
of camels, sheep, butter etc.’; xawiy ‘comrade, road companion, fellow travel-
ler’ (Sowayan 1992: 245) ~ Aleppo xāwa ‘traîter comme un frère ou une sœur,
fraterniser avec (qqn)’ [Arabes nomades]; xuwwe ‘alliance fraternelle, pacte
de fraternité conclu à la porte de la Caaba (xuwwe ʿala bāb ǝl-kaʿbe (Mslm);
152 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
xawī ‘allié, coalisé [Arabes nomades]’; xuwwe ‘tribut imposé par les Arabes
nomades aux populations sedentaires en échange de la protection accordée
par eux à leurs propriétés’; xuwwe ‘tribut imposé par les Arabes nomades
aux populations sedentaires en échange de la protection accordée par eux à
leurs propriétés’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 4, 223–4) ~ Iraq xuwa ‘to extort money
from’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 149); xāwa ‘protection, protection money’;
xūya (familiar form of address): pal, buddy, friend’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967:
7) ~ S.E. Anatolia xwa bǝxwá ‘einander’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 146) ~ Najd
xawiyy ‘Verbündeter’ (Socin 1901 III 263); xāwa ‘to accompany s.o. on a jour-
ney, a raid’; xuwwah ‘a small group of three to six men who go on a plundering
expedition, any small group of travel companions who eat and sleep together;
brotherhood, fraternity’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 365) ~ Oman xweyye, pl xweyyāt
‘Schwester’ (Reinhardt 1894: 68) ~ ʿAnazeh txāwa ‘fraterniser’; xawiyya ‘sœur’
(Landberg 1940: 18) ~ Damascus ʾuxuwwe ‘brotherhood’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964:
30) ~ Palmyra xawīk ‘ton petit frère’ (Cantineau 1934 I 181) ~ Lebanon wāxa
‘traiter quelqu’un comme un frère’ (Denizeau 1960: 550); xawayyāti (pl) ‘égaux’
(Feghali 1933: 56) ~ Palest axawiyye ‘Bruderschaft, Verein’, (abstrakt) xuwwe
[uxuwwe]; xāwa ‘Bruderschaft schließen’; txāwa ‘sich verbrüdern’; mxāwā(t)
‘Verbrüderung’ (Bauer 1957: 67, 329); xāwate ‘sie verschwisterte sich mit ihm’
(Schmidt & Kahle 1918 I 269) ~ Egypt xāwa ‘to be intimate with’; ʾitxāwa ‘to have
a close relationship with each other’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 270) ~ Marazig
xwāya ‘proche parenté (de sang)’ (Boris 1958: 6) ~ Morocco xāwa ‘traiter qqn
en frère’; xāwa bīn ‘faire fraterniser deux personnes, les faire vivre en harmonie’
(Prémare 179, 180) ~ Cherchell xu ‘frère’ (Grand’Henry 1972: 87) ~ Ḥassāniyya
xūwe ‘fraternité’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 71).
216 x-w-y²
šwꜣ (Pyr) ‘poor’; šw ‘be empty, lacking, devoid; needy man’; ‘leer sein, leer;
leer machen, entleeren’; šwt ‘emptiness’; šꜣ.t ‘die Untiefe eines Gewässers; ein
innerer Körperteil des Menschen’ (Ember 1930: 42; Albright 1918: 248; Faulkner
1962: 263; Wb IV 426, 428, 401, 402) ~ Dem šw ‘leermachen, leer’ (DG 495)
~ Copt ⲱⲟⲩⲉⲓⲧ ‘to empty’ (Crum 1939: 602b); [< *ḫwy; cf. wḫꜣ ‘throw off earth,
خ
etc. from oneself, empty out, shake out’; ‘ausleeren’ (Faulkner 1962: 67; Wb I
353)] || Ar �و��يxawiya ‘être vide, désert, inhabité (se dit d’une maison); avoir le
ventre vide et être pressé par la faim (se dit d’une accouchée quand elle n’a
pas encore pris de nourriture depuis ses couches; creuser un trou en terre …)’;
xawāyah ‘cavité (dans le corps humain)’; xawiyyah ‘aliment qu’on prépare et
fait prendre à l’accouchée’; xawāʾ ‘emptiness of the belly, gap, interstice; to
bring forth (woman)’ (DAF I 651, 652; Hava 1982: 190); cf. 793. w-x-y²;
216. x-w-y ² – 217. x-y-l 153
~ Rwala ayyām al-xawaʾ ‘years of want’ (Musil 1928: 16) ~ Lebanon xewa ‘être
troué, transpercé’ (Denizeau 1960: 158) ~ Mosul xiyyū ‘inner part, intention’
(Al-Bakrī 1972: 203) ~ Daθīna ⟨xāwī⟩/⟨xawyān⟩ ‘qui a le ventre vide)’ (GD 662)
~ Yemen axwa ‘to make desolate’ (Piamenta 1990: 140) ~ Egypt xiwi ‘to become
empty’; xawyān ‘hungry’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 270); xāwya, pl xuwyān ‘Höhle’
(Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 127) ~ Tunis xwa/xawwa ‘il a vidé’ (D. Cohen 1975:
105, 117) ~ Algeria xayy ‘faim’ (Lentin 1959: 77) ~ Djidjelli xwa ‘fait d’avoir faim’
(Ph. Marçais 1956: 222) ~ Morocco xwa, ixwa ‘devenir vide, se vider’; xwa, ixwi
‘rendre vide, vider’; xwa ‘éspace vide, cavité’; xawya ‘état de vacuité’: X ʿaqlo
xāwi ‘X a la cervelle vide’ (Prèmare 177–179); xewya ‘gap’ (Sobelman & Harrell
1963: 81) ~ Ḥassāniyya xwe, yǝxwi ‘vider (une arme)’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 153)
~ Al-Andalus ⟨yaxwā, xawwā⟩ ‘to be empty’ (Corriente 1997: 169).
Ghomara (Berber) xwa ‘to be empty’ (Mourigh 2016: 434).
ḫi҆ (Pyr) ‘placenta (?), (be a) child’ (Faulkner 1962: 182; Ember 1930: 81); cf. šw
خ
(Pyr) ‘leer sein’ [< *ḫw] (Wb IV 426); ḫt (Pyr) ‘Leib, Bauch, Mutterleib; zur Welt
kommen’ (Wb III 356) ~ Dem ḫj ‘das Kind’ (DG 349) || Ar �و��يxawiya ‘avoir le
ventre vide et ëtre pressé par la faim (se dit d’une accouchée quand elle n’a
pas encore pris de nourriture depuis ses couches; xawwā ‘Geburtshilfe leisten’;
xawāyah ‘cavité (dans le corps humain)’; xawāt ‘espace entre le pis et le vagin
(chez les animaux)’; xawāʾ ‘leeren Bauch haben, nicht schwanger sein (Frau),
oder eben geboren haben’ (DAF I 651, 652; Wahrmund I 634); cf. 793. w-x-y²;
~ Takrūna xwāt ‘placenta, délivre’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 1958) ~ Marazig
xawe ‘maigrir, avoir le ventre creux’ (Boris 1958: 160) ~ Morocco xwātāt ‘arrière-
faix’ (membranes et placenta après l’accouchement)’ (Prémare IV 182) ~ Najd
xwa ‘a piece of leather which is laid in a hollow that has been dug in the ground
and in which water is poured for camels to drink’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 366).
217 x-y-l
śḫꜣ (Pyr) [< *s-ḫl] ‘to remember, call to mind, think about, mention’; śḫꜣw
1962: 240; Wb III 232) || Ar خ��ا لxāla ‘sich vorstellen oder einbilden’ (Wahrmund
‘remembrance, memory’; ‘sich erinnern, gedenken’ (Ember 1914: 87; Faulkner
I 637–8);
~ Damascus xayāl/taxayyol ‘imagination’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 122)
~ Palest quwwet et-taxayyul ‘Einbildungskraft’ (Bauer 1957: 85) ~ Najd xayyal
‘to imagine, think, believe’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 366) ~ Rwala axīleh ‘I judge it’
(Musil 1928: 146) ~ Egypt itxāyil ‘to fancy’ (Spiro 1895: 185) ~ Ḥassāniyya txayyel
‘imaginer’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 82) ~ Malta ⟨stħajjel, jistħajjel⟩ ‘to imagine’
(Aquilina 1990: 1363).
154 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
218 x-y-y
ḫy (ḫw) ‘Kind’ (Hannig & Vomberg 1999: 577); ḫjj (BD) ‘Kind, ḫjj (BD) ‘Kind,
ّخ
Bursche’; ḫ.t ‘kleines Mädchen’ (Wb III 217, 357; Sethe 1962: 164) ~ Dem ḫj ‘das
Kind’ (DG 349) || Ar ���يxayy ‘brother, friend, companion, match’ (Hava 1982: 5);
~ Sinai axayy ‘little brother’ [term also used for one who is not a brother]
(Stewart 1990: 195) ~ Aleppo xayy ‘ami, camarade’; xuwwe ‘alliance fraternelle,
pacte de fraternité conclu à la porte de la Caaba – xuwwe ʿala bāb ǝl-kaʿbe
(Mslm) – tribut imposé par les Arabes nomades aux populations seden-
taires en échange de la protection accordée par eux à leurs propriétés’; xawī
‘allié, coalisé [Arabes nomades]’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 4, 223–4) ~ Lebanon
xawayyāti (pl) ‘égaux’ (Feghali 1933: 56) ~ Ḥama xayyo ‘die Anrede an einem
Mann einleitend, auch die einer Mutter an ihren Sohn’ (Lewin 1966: 206)
~ Mharde xayy ‘Bruder’: xayye ‘mein Bruder’ (Yoseph 2012: 149) ~ Hatāy xayy
‘Bruder’ (Arnold 1998: 314) ~ Çukurova xayy/xayyt- ‘id.’ (Procházka 2002: 127)
~ Lebanon xayyu ‘son frère’ (Feghali 1938: 677) ~ Egypt xayy ‘Brüderchen’
(Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 2, 127) ~ Morocco xeyy ‘petit frère, frérot’; xōya
‘mon frère (à moi)’ (Prémare 179, 180) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨uxuwwah⟩ ‘brotherhood’
(Corriente 1997: 7).
219 d-b-b
ّ
db(y) (Pyr) ‘hippopotamus’; ‘das Nilpferd’ (Faulkner 1962: 311; DLE II 243, 244;
Wb V 433; Goldwasser 2002: 84) ~ Akkad dabû ‘bear’ (CAD III 17) || Ar �د ب
أ ّة ّة ّ
dubb, pl � � د ب�ا بʾadbāb/ ��� د بdibbah ‘bear’; ��� د ا بdābbah, pl � د وا بdawābb ‘beast of
burden’ (Hava 1982: 194);
~ Oman dābbe ‘Tier’ (Reinhardt 1895: 44) ~ Damascus dabbe, pl dawābb
‘bêtes de la ferme en général (âne, bœuf, cheval, chèvre, poule)’; dǝbb, pl dǝbab
‘bear’ (Denizeau 1960: 160; Stowasser & Ani 1964: 19) ~ Rwala dābb ‘any kind of
long snake’ (Musil 1928: 317) ~ Iraq dābba, pl dawābb ‘beast’; dibba, pl dibaba/
dbāb ‘bear’ (Clarity et al., 1964: 16) ~ Aleppo dǝbb, pl dǝbab ‘ours’; dabbe, pl
dawāb ‘bête de somme (: cheval, âne, mulet; monture, bête de selle’; dabbābāt
‘quadrupèdes’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 229) ~ Palmyra dēbbe, pl dawēb ‘animal
domestique’ (Cantineau 1934 II 62) ~ Lebanon dibb ‘bear’ (Nasr 1966: 166)
~ Palest dubb/dibb, pl dbāb ‘Bär’ (Bauer 1957: 41) ~ Al-Balqāʾ dabība ‘animal,
mount’ (Palva 1992: 169) ~ Egypt dibb/dibba, pl dibab ‘bear’ (Spiro 1895: 190)
218. x-y-y – 222. d-b-l ² 155
~ Djidjelli dābb ‘bête de somme’; dābba ‘ânesse’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 262, 264)
~ Malta ⟨debba⟩ ‘cavalla’ (Vassalli 1796: 154).
220 d-b-r¹
dbꜣ (OK) ‘umfallen (von Personen)’; ‘to die’ (Wb V 435; Ember 1930: 15; DLE II
267; Hannig 1995: 1003) ~ Akkad dibīru ‘pestilence’ (M. Cohen 2011: 154) ~ Heb
ֶּד ֶברdeber ‘pestilence’ (BDB 184) || Ar د ب�رdabara ‘sterben’ (Wahrmund I 645);
~ Palest dabar ‘blessure’ (Denizeau 1960: 161) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨yudbir⟩ ‘to take
a turn for the worse’ (Corriente 1997: 173).
221 d-b-l¹
dbn.t (LE) ‘Haarflechte, besonders die des Kindes (Seitenzopf); flechten’; nbd.t
‘Haarflechte, Flechtwerk, Geflochtenes (Korb, Sieb)’ (Wb V 438; II 246) ~ Ge
dabala ‘bring together, gather, make braids, plait’ (Leslau 1987: 120) || Ar د ب�ل
dabala aš-šayʾa ‘to collect a.th. with the fingers’; ‘zusammenbringen, sammeln’
(Lisān XI 234; Lane 849; Hava 1982: 196; Wahrmund I 646); cf. 622. l-b-d¹.
222 d-b-l²
dbn (Pyr) ‘go round a place’; ‘der Ring, der Kreis; Umkreis von etwas (beim
Messen); kreisförmiges Feldstück’; dbnw ‘der Umkreis des Himmels’; dbnt
‘circuit of ocean’; dbnw ‘circumference of sky’ (Faulkner 1962: 311; Wb V 436):
ة
Ḥry-i҆b-dbn.f ‘Der inmitten seines Kreises ist’ (Leitz 2002: 355) ~ Amh däbäläl
‘round (like a pumpkin)’ (Kane 1990: 1777) || Ar �� د ب��لdablah, pl د ب�لdabal ‘grosser
gerundeter Bissen, Konfekt etc.’ (Wahrmund I 646);
~ E. Arabia dibla ‘(wedding) ring’ (Holes 2001: 169) ~ Palest dible ‘Ring ohne
Stein, Ehering’ (Bauer 1957: 245, 83) ~ Baghdad daʿbal ‘he rolled’ (Blanc 1964:
110) ~ Kfarʿabīda daʿbel ‘il arrondit’ (M. Feghali 1919: 22) [< *dbl] ~ Lebanon
daʿbūl ‘rond arrondit’; daʿbūle ‘petite pierre ronde’ (Denizeau 1960: 169) ~ Negev
ðablih, pl -āt ‘simple thin ring worn by women’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Egypt dibla,
pl dibal ‘betrothal ring’ (Spiro 1895: 192) ~ Algeria dbūl ‘ruban’ (Lentin 1959: 79)
~ Ḥaḍramawt dubla/dubna ‘boulette d’une chose mangeable’ (Landberg 1901:
1760) ~ Khābūra bedle ‘a nose ring’; deble ‘a plain finger-ring’ (Brockett 1985: 55,
96) ~ Ḥassāniyya bedle ‘boucle d’oreille’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 32).
156 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
223 d-b-l³
ن
dbn (LE) ‘dung’ (DLE II 245) ~ Heb ּד ֶֹמןdōmen ‘dung’ (BDB 199; 2 Kings IX 37) ||
Ar د ب�لdabala/ د �م�لdamala ‘to manure’; � د �م� نdimn/� د �م�اdamān ‘manure’ (Hava
1982: 196, 216, 217);
~ Ḥaḍramawt dmn/dml ‘fumer la terre, engraisser’ (Landberg 1901: 1760)
~ N. Yemen daman ‘düngen’; dimin ‘Mist’ (Behnstedt 1992: 389) ~ Najd damman
‘to cover with droppings’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 360) ~ Rwala dimne, pl demān
‘dry camel’s manure’ (Musil 1928: 78, 126) ~ Palest damal ‘couvrir, enfouir sous
terre; tas de fumier’; dimna ‘tas de fumier’ (Denizeau 1960: 177, 178) ~ Malta
⟨demel⟩ ‘sterco, concime’ (Vassalli 1796: 158).
224 d-ǧ-ǧ
ة
dgyt (MK) ‘bird, bat’; ‘als Name eines kleinen Vogels’ (Faulkner 1962: 317; Wb V
499) ~ Ḥar deyāyeh ‘chicken’ (Johnstone 1977: 157) || Ar ��� د ج��ا جdaǧāǧah ‘a fowl’
(Hava 1982: 197);
~ Lebanon dǝǧǧ ‘pinson’ (Denizeau 1960: 163) ~ Yemen mdaǧǧ ‘pollaio’
(Rossi 1939: 228) ~ Mosul daǧ ‘chicks’ (Al-Bakrī 1972: 214) ~ Oman dgāge/
digāge, pl degāgāt, coll. dgāg ‘Huhn’ (Reinhardt 1894: 52, 59, 85); dayāy/daǧāy
‘chicken’ (Eades 2011: 31) ~ Iraq diǧāǧ (coll.) ‘chickens’ (Woodhead & Beene
1967: 66) ~ Egypt gidāda ‘Huhn’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 57).
225 d-ǧ-y
dgj (MK) ‘to hide’; ‘sich verstecken, verborgen sein’ (Faulkner 1962: 316; Wb V
496; Calice 1936: 88) || Ar د ج��اdaǧā ‘bedecken, einhüllen’ (Wahrmund I 649);
~ Najd diǧa ‘darkness, darkness of night’ (Kurpershoek 1994: 258) ~ Palest
diǧā ‘darkness’ (Saarisalo 1933: I 7) ~ Daθīna ⟨daǧǧ/daǧǧā⟩ ‘passer la nuit hors
de la maison, découcher (courant chez les Bédouins d’el-Ḥoǧarieh, Yeman)’
(GD 703).
226 d-ḥ-m
~ Najd daḥam ‘to push, shove, hustle’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 357) ~ Daθīna
⟨daḥmal⟩ ‘faire rouler par terre; démolir’ (GD 713) ~ Damascus zdaḥam ‘to
push’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 183) ~ Egypt daḥmas ‘auf der Erde hier und her
scheuern’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 130) ~ Marazig daḥam ‘faire des efforts
de l’accouchement’ (Boris 1958: 166).
227 d-ḥ-w
ḥdy (LE) ‘umspannen; fliegen; ausbreiten (von Himmel)’ (Wb III 205; Calice
1936: 75) ~ Heb ָּד ָחהdāḥā ‘to push, thrust’ (BDB 190) || Ar د ح�اdaḥā ‘poussant
violemment en portant à quelqu’un un coup par derrière’ (DAF I 676);
~ Daθīna ⟨daḥā⟩ ‘étendre’ (GD 715) ~ Aleppo daḥa ‘faire disparaître; dis-
suader qqn de qqc.’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 232) ~ Marazig dḥe ‘écarter, enlever
de sa place pour s’y mettre’ (Boris 1958: 166) ~ Morocco dḥa ‘pousser pour faire
entrer, introduire, fourrer, enfoncer’ (Prémare IV 230) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨daḥani⟩
‘he pushed me’ (Corriente 1997: 174).
228 d-r-ǧ
dgꜣ (NK) ‘walk’; ‘schreiten’ (Wb V 631; Faulkner 1962: 316; Calice 1936: 43)
ق
~ Akkad daraggu ‘path’ (CAD III 108) ~ Heb ָּד ַרגdārag ‘to leap, step’ (M. Jastrow
1886: 320) || Ar د ر جdaraǧa ‘schreiten, vorwärtsschreiten, gehen’; � د رdaraqa
�
‘eilen’ (Wahrmund I 655, 658);
~ Najd daraǧ ‘to move, go; to walk; to plod, trudge along’ (Musil 1928: 76)
~ Negev al-walad ṣār yudruǧ ‘the child has begun to walk’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi)
~ Damascus daraže daraže ‘step by step’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 224) ~ Marazig
darraž ‘ménager (le troupeau), le faire avancer par petites étapes’ (Boris 1958:
168) ~ Egypt dārig ‘current, usual’ (Spiro 1895: 195) ~ Ḥama ddarraž ‘gehen,
schreiten’ (Littmann 1924: 24) ~ Aleppo daraǧ, pl drāǧ/drūǧāt ‘escalier’; daraǧ
‘passer dans l’usage (: coutume)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 234, 235) ~ Al-Andalus
⟨daraǧ⟩ ‘to let in’ (Corriente 1997: 176).
229 d-ʿ-s
tḥs (LE) ‘zermalmen, zermalmt sein’; ‘crush, pulverize’ (Wb V 323; Hannig 1995:
938; Hoch 1994: 361) || Ar د �ع��سdaʿasa ‘tread upon, press, repel’ (Hava 1982: 206);
158 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
~ Aleppo daʿas ‘fouler aux pieds (qqn, qqe)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 240)
~ E. Arabia diʿas ‘shove, ram’; daḥas ‘fill’ (Holes 2001: 170, 176) ~ Iraq diʿas ‘run
over, knock’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 158) ~ Palest daʿas/dās ‘treten’ (Bauer
1957: 305) ~ Egypt daʿas ‘press, cram, cause to be crowded’ (Spiro 1895: 199).
230 d-f-f¹
231 d-f-f²
ّف
wdf (OK) ‘zögern, langsam sein, trödeln’ (Wb I 388; Calice 1936: 28) || Ar �� د
daffa ‘langsam einherschreiten’ (Wahrmund I 668);
~ Daθīna ⟨diffah⟩ ‘entreprise, tâche’ (GD 807) ~ Malta ⟨deffa⟩ ‘the most dif-
ficult part of the work’ (Aquilina 1987: 219).
232 d-f-y
ّف
fd (Gr) ‘to sweat’; fd.t ‘sweat’; ‘Schweiß’; ‘sueur’; fd ‘schwitzen’ (Ember 1930:
54; Faulkner 1962: 99; Herbin 1994: 530; Wb I 582) || Ar د ��يdafiyy ‘warm’
(Wahrmund I 671);
~ Iraq dafu/difu ‘warmth’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 100) ~ Kǝndērīb
dafi ‘wärme’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 50) ~ Damascus daffa ʿala ‘sich wärmen an’
(Grotzfeld 1965: 157) ~ Palest daffa ‘warmen’ (Bauer 1957: 353) ~ Egypt daffa
‘to make warm’; dafa ‘warmth’ (Spiro 1895: 293) ~ Hasankeyf dǝfa ‘Heizung,
Erwärmung’ (Fink 2017: 291) ~ Malta ⟨difa⟩ ‘tepidezza’ (Vassalli 1796: 164).
233 d-q-r¹
dqrw (MK) ‘fruit, fruit-trees’; ‘Frucht, als allgemeine Bezeichnung für essbare
Früchte; Früchte von Bäumen; Weihrauch (besonders in der Verbindung:
Gottesfrucht)’ (Faulkner 1962: 316; Wb V 495; Hannig 1995: 988) ~ Heb ֶּד ֶקל
Ar د ن���ق��رdanqira ‘wohl bewässert sein und und reiche Vegetation haben (Ort)’
deqel ‘date-palm, palm’ (BDB 200) ~ Aram dīqlā ‘a kind of palm’ (BDB 200) ||
ق
(Wahrmund I 672); د �رdaqr ‘luxuriant verdant garden’ (Hava 1982: 211);
~ Egypt digrān, pl dagārīn ‘Stütze fur den Fruchtstand der Palme’ (Behnstedt
& Woidich 1994: 137) ~ Lebanon medqra ‘(terre) dure, difficile à cultiver’;
deqqār, pl dqaqīr ‘terrain aride et rocheux orienté vers l’Ouest’ (Feghali 1935:
40, 146).
234 d-q-r²
dqr (Med) ‘press’ (?) r (against)’; ‘angeheftet sein an etwas’; dgꜣ (LE) ‘etwas
ق
ankleben (mit m) an etwas’ (Faulkner 1962: 316; Wb V 496, 499) ~ Heb ָּד ַקר
dāqar ‘pierce through’ (BDB 200) || Ar د �رdaqara ‘to touch’ (Hava 1982: 211);
160 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
~ Egypt daqqar ‘press one thing against another’ (Spiro 1895: 202)
~ Kǝndērīb daqaṛ ‘drücken gegen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 51) ~ Najd digal ‘to hit (with
a fist), strike, pound, slam’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 369) ~ Aleppo daqaṛ ‘toucher
légèrement (qqn.)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 244) ~ Sinai daggar ‘to bite (a dog)’
(C. Bailey 1991: 436) ~ Damascus lā tǝdqor ʾīdi ‘don’t touch my arm!’ (Stowasser
& Ani 1964: 217) ~ Palest tudqur ‘sie stieß auf’ (Schmidt & Kahle 1918 I 278)
~ Iraq digar ‘to bump, joggle’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 162) ~ Lebanon ndaqar
‘être touché’ (Feghali 1938: 766) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨daqara⟩ ‘faire de sillons en une
terre, la labourer et assillonner, couvrir des herbes sous le rayon’ (Dozy I 452).
235 d-q-q
dq.w/dq (Med) ‘Pulver, Mehl; zerkleinern, mahlen’; ‘flour, powder’ (Wb V 494;
Hannig & Vomberg 1999: 678; Faulkner 1962: 316) ~ Ugar dqq ‘tiny, fine’ (DUL
قق
277) ~ Akkad duqququ ‘to crush’ (CAD III 190) ~ Sab dqqm ‘flour’ (Biella 1982:
85) || Ar � د ��اduqāq ‘flour’ (Hava 1982: 211);
~ Āzǝx daqēq ‘Mehl’ (O. Jastrow 1981: 64) ~ Egypt diʾīʾ ‘flour’ (Badawi & Hinds
1986: 296) ~ Yemen dagg ‘trebbiare il grano’ (Rossi 1939: 293) ~ Takrūna dqīq
‘farine de la mouture séparée du son à l’aide du tamis à mailles larges’ (Marçais
& Guîga 1958–61: 1300).
236 d-l-ʿ
ʾdalga (LE) ‘sweet melon’ (Hoch 1994: 47) ~ Aram דלעdlʿ ّ‘Kürbis; gourd’
(Schwiderski 2008: 211; Porten & Yardeni 1999: xliii) || Ar د لاdullāʿ ‘water-
ع
melon’ (Hava 1982: 214);
~ Tunis dellāʿ ‘Wassermelonen’ (Singer 1984: 540) ~ Djidjelli dellāʿa
‘pastèque’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 277) ~ Morocco dellaḥa ‘watermelon’ (Sobelman
& Harrell 1963: 29) ~ Malta ⟨dulliegħa, coll. dullieħ⟩ ‘water-melon’ (Aquilina
1987: 266).
237 d-l-l
1962: 309; Wb V 419; Hannig 1995: 969; DLE II 239; Caminos 1954: 604) ||
Ar د لا لdalāl ‘lascive oder durch scheinbares Wiederstreben herausfordernde
Coquetterie’; dallah ‘verliebte Coquetterie’ (Wahrmund I 675, 678);
~ Egypt dalāl ‘amorous gesture, coquetry, feigned coyness’ (Spiro 1895: 204)
~ S.E. Anatolia ḍalāl ‘Geliebter’ [< *dll]; dǝlāl ‘sehr nett’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982:
158, 253) ~ Iraq dallal ‘to spoil, indulge’ (Abu-Haidar 1991: 187) ~ Aleppo dalāl
‘soins tendres, gâteries’; dēllīye ‘coquetterie, familiarité’ (Barthélemy 1935–69:
248, 249) ~ Damascus dallal ‘verwöhn-en’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 157) ~ Lebanon
dallal ‘caresser’ (Denizeau 1960: 175) ~ Palest mdallal ‘verwöhnt’ (Schmidt &
Kahle 1918 I 278) ~ Negev dalāl (name of the beloved in folk poetry); daldala
‘vacillation’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Najd ⟨dlīlah⟩ ‘Geliebte (oder Eigenname?)’
(Socin 1901 III 265) ~ Marazig mdallal ‘choyé, gâté’; ḍelāl ‘chose aimée et bien-
faisante’ (Boris 1958: 177) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨dallah⟩ ‘coquetry, coddling’ (Corriente
1997: 183).
238 d-m-y
i҆dmj.t ‘Leinenstoff von roter Farbe’ (Wb I 153) ~ Akkad ada(m)mu ‘red (gar-
ment)’ (CDA 4) ~ Ge ʾaddāmāwi/ʾadim ‘red (color)’ (Leslau 1987: 729) ~ Amh
dämmǝma ‘crimson, bright red’; dama ‘dark red; horse’s coat’ (Kane 1990: 1716,
1719, 1720); adim ‘leather strip tainted red’ (Leslau 1969: 89) ~ Aram ʾĂdām
‘blood’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 17) || Ar دdam ‘blood’ (Hava 1982: 217);
م
~ Aleppo damm, pl dmūm et dmūmāt ‘sang’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 250)
~ Damascus damm, pl ʾǝdǝmye ‘blood’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 24) ~ Palest
damm ‘Blut’ (Bauer 1957: 63) ~ Malta ⟨demm, pl dmija⟩ ‘blood’; ⟨aħmar
demm⟩ ‘blood red’ (own obs.).
239 d-n-n
dni҆t (MK) ‘bowl, basket’; ‘Korb’ (Faulkner 1962: 314; Calice 1936: 222); ḏn-i҆b (OK)
‘ein Gefäß (unter Hausrat angeführt)’ (Wbّ V 575) ~ Akkad dannu ‘vat’ (CAD III
ن ن
98) ~ Ugar dn ‘vessel, vat’ (DUL 226) || Ar � دdann, pl � د ن�اdinān ‘earthenwarre
jar with a tapering bottom’ (Hava 1982: 217);
~ N. Yemen dann ‘großes Tongefäß zur Wasserkühlung’ (Behnstedt 1987:
254) ~ Aleppo dǝnn, pl dnān ‘grande jarre à vin’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 252)
~ S.E. Anatolia dann, pl dnēn ‘irdenes Faß’; ‘une grande jarre’ (Vocke & Waldner
1982: 159; Grigore 2007: 63).
162 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
240 ð-b-ḥ
dbḥ.w (OK) ‘der Bedarf an etwas’; dbḥ.w ‘zum Kultus nötige Dinge’; ‘things nec-
essary for an offering’; dbḥt-ḥtp ‘funerary meal, altar’ ~ Heb [ ִמזְ ֵּב ַחmizbēaḥ]
‘altar’ (Wb V 440–441; Hodge 1981: 406; Faulkner 1962: 312; BDB 258; Takács
�ذ
1999: 248) ~ Sab ðbḥ ‘sacrifice an animal ritually; kill, murder’ (Biella 1982: 90)
|| Ar � بðabaḥa ‘to slaughter’ (Hava 1982: 226);
ح
~ Aleppo dabaḥ ‘égorger (un animal)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 229) ~ Oman
ðbīḥa ‘Schlachtvieh’ (Reinhardt 1894: 5) ~ Najd ðibaḥ ‘to slaughter, kill’; ðabbāḥah
‘those who slaughter much, i.e., generous entertainers of guests’ (Kurpershoek
1999: 372–73) ~ Kǝndērīb ðabaḥ ‘schlachten (Tiere); abschlachten, umbringen
(Menschen)’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 55) ~ Palest ðabaḥ ‘schlachten’ (Bauer 1957: 258).
241 ð-r-r
sꜣ/zꜣ (Pyr) ‘son (in expression of filiation)’; ‘der Sohn (in genealogischen
ّ �ذ
Angaben); männlicher Nachkomme’ (Faulkner 1962: 207; Wb III 408; Hannig
1995: 651) ~ Sab ðr ‘to spread, scatter’ (Jamme 1962: 431) || Ar رðarra ‘répandre
�ذ �ذ
du sel’; ر رðarðara ‘répandre, semer’ (DAF I 766, 768);
~ Aleppo dǝrriyye ‘postérité, progéniture’; dardar ‘éparpiller, répandre’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 235) ~ Lebanon derriyye ‘postérité’ (Feghali 1938: 766)
~ Palest ðuriyye ‘Nachwelt’ (Bauer 1957: 214) ~ Rwala ðurriyye ‘descendants’
(Musil 1928: 50) ~ Najd ðarr ‘to sprinkle, scatter’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 373)
~ Egypt daṛṛa ‘Euter’; dirriyya ‘Nachkommenschaft’ (Behnstedt & Woidich
1994: 131); zurriyya/durriyya ‘offspring, posterity’ (Spiro 1895: 249) ~ Takrūna
ðerr ‘enfants, grand nombre d’enfants’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 1378) ~ Douz
ðirr ‘Kinder’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2014: 10) ~ Djidjelli dǝrriyya ‘descendance’; drāri
‘enfants’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 362, 341) ~ Morocco derri, pl drari ‘child’ (Sobelman
& Harrell 1963: 33).
242 ð-r-y
ḏnw (NK) ‘die Tenne’ (Wb V 575) ~ Dem ḏꜣj.t/ḏrj.t ‘Tenne’ ~ ḏlꜣ ‘sich zerstreuen’
(DG 672, 683, 684) ~ Copt ϫⲏⲣⲉ ‘threshing-floor’; ⲥϫⲱⲱⲣⲉ ‘scatter, disperse’
�ذ
(Crum 1939: 782a) ~ Akkad zarû ‘to winnow’ (M. Cohen 2011: 232) ~ Ge zarawa
‘winnow’ (Leslau 1987: 644) || Ar ر �ىðarā ‘to winnow’ (Hava 1982: 228);
240. ð-b-ḥ – 245. ð-y-b 163
~ S.E. Anatolia ð/zarra ‘worfeln’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 169) ~ Palest ðara/
ðarra ‘worfeln’ (Bauer 1957: 369) ~ Aleppo darra ‘monder, vanner le (blé) en le
jetant en l’air avec une fourche sur l’aire à dépiquer’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 238).
243 ð-f-r
dꜣf ‘eine unbekömmliche Speise’ (Sethe 1962: 182); dꜣf ‘etwas verbrennen; erhit-
zen, kochen; verbranntes Fleisch’ (Hannig 1999: 994–995) ~ ḏfꜣ ‘Nahrung, Speise’
(Wb V 522, 569; DLE II 265) ~ Akkad zapāru ‘become rotten, stink’; zaprūtu
‘bad smell’; zupru ‘decay, putrefaction, rot’; ṣaripu ‘pungent’ (Parpola 2007: 135,
�ذ ف
251, 103) ~ Sab ðfr ‘ill-smelling plants’ (Biella 1982: 98) || Saf ðfr ‘stench, stink’
(Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 636) ~ Ar �رðafira ‘be pungent (odour)’;
zaffara ‘eat fatty food’ (Hava 1982: 291, 208); dafir ‘stinking’ (Lane 890); dafira
‘to become maggoty (food)’ (Hava 1982: 209); cf. 440. ð̣ -f-r;
~ Damascus tẓaffar ‘schmutzig, fettig werden’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 163) ~ Aleppo
ẓaffar ‘graisser, poisser de gras, … faire manger gras (en temps de carême ou
pendant les jours maigres)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 502) ~ Palest zafar ‘Fett
speise’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 29) ~ Cypriot Ar zaffer ‘serve meat-based or fatty
food during the Lenten fast)’ (own obs.) ~ Egypt zifir ‘greasy, filthy’ (Badawi &
Hinds 1986: 108).
244 ð-k-r
245 ð-y-b
s/zꜣb (Pyr) ‘jackal’; ‘der Schackal’ (Faulkner 1962: 209; Wb III 420) ~ Akkad zību
�ذ �ذ �ذ
‘jackal’ (Parpola 2007: 211) ~ Ge zǝʾb ‘hyena’ (Leslau 1987: 701) || Saf ðʾb ‘wolf’
(Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 636) ~ Ar � �ئ� بðiʾb/� �ي� بðīb, pl � ي�ا بðiyāb
‘loup’ (DAF 760);
164 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
~ Damascus dīb, pl dyāb ‘wolf’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 265) ~ Najd ðīb, pl
ðyāb ‘id.’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 375) ~ S.E. Anatolia ðǝyb ‘loup’ (Grigore 2007: 193)
~ Aleppo dīb, pl dyāb ‘id.’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 260) ~ Egypt dīb, pl diyāb ‘id.’
(Spiro 1895: 210) ~ Palest ðīb, pl ðyāb ‘Wolf’ (Bauer 1957: 368).
246 r-ʾ-s
ꜣjs/ꜣs (Med) ‘Gehirn (des Menschen und der Tiere)’; rši҆ ‘der Gipfel eines Berges’
أ
(Wb I 2, II 455; Hannig 1995: 2); i҆ꜣs ‘bald’ (Faulkner 1962: 9) ~ Heb רֹאׁשrōš ‘head’
(BDB 910) ~ Sab rʾs ‘head’ (Biella 1982: 474) || Ar ر� ��سraʾs, pl ر �ؤ و��سruʾūs ‘head;
head of cattle, individual’ (Hava 1982: 234);
~ Aleppo rāṣ, pl rūṣ ‘tête’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 264) ~ Palest rās, pl rūs
‘Kopf’ (Bauer 179) ~ Egypt rās, pl rūs ‘head’ (Spiro 1895: 240) ~ Malta ⟨ras, pl
rjus⟩ ‘testa’ (Vassalli 1796: 567).
247 r-ʾ-y
i҆rw (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘shape, form, nature’ (Faulkner 1962: 27); cf. (NK) i҆r ‘das
Sehen als Personifikation – neben sḏm “das Hören”; mꜣw (MK) ‘aspect, appear-
ance’ (Faulkner 1962: 27; Wb I 108) ~ Amh raʾǝy ‘vision,’ rǝʾǝy ‘complexion’
(Kane 1990: 388);
~ Damascus rǝʾye ‘visage’ (Denizeau 1960: 188) ~ S.E. Anatolia ṛawwīye
(inf of ṛawwa) ‘zeigen’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 172) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨marʾa, pl
marāʾī⟩ ‘view, sight’ (Corriente 1997: 197) ~ Cypriot Ar rvie ‘appearance’ (Borg
2004: 242).
248 r-b-l
rnpi҆ (Pyr) ‘be young, fresh, green, flourish, grow, be fresh’; ‘jung werden, sich
ّ
verjüngen (in der Verbindung: frisches Wasser), sich erneuern’ (Faulkner 1962:
150; Wb II 432; Ember 1930: 51) || Ar رب�لrabala ‘to multiply’ (Hava 1982: 239); رب�ل
rabbala ‘produire sa tige (herbe), pousser des rejetons’; رب�لrabal ‘herbe odori-
ferante et huileuse, qui croît sur les montagnes et dont l’odeur est semblable à
celle de la menthe’ (Dozy I 505);
246. r- ʾ -s – 251. r-ḥ-m 165
249 r-t-m
rdmt (MK) ‘a plant’; ‘eine Wüstenpflanze’ (Faulkner 1962: 156; Calice 1936: 102)
ت
~ Heb ר ֶֹתםrōtem ‘a species of broom, growing in deserts’ (M. Jastrow 1886:
1503) || Ar � رratam ‘Genista, broom-plant, Esparto’ (Hava 1982: 240);
م
~ Sinai rtēmih (dim. of ratamah) ‘retem’ (Stewart 1990: 259) ~ Palest ratam
‘Ginster’ (Dalman I/1: 74) ~ Tripoli (Libya) rtam ‘ginestra’ (Griffini 1913: 132)
~ Algeria retem ‘genêt’ (Ben Sedira 1910: 259) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ratam abyaḍ⟩
‘Genista scoparia’ (Corriente 1997: 201).
250 r-ḥ-l
ʿḥꜣ (OK) ‘go to war’; kämpfen, Kampf’; ʿḥꜣ.w ‘Waffen’ (Faulkner 1962: 46; Wb I
215, 216) || Ar رح�لraḥala ‘mit dem Schwerte schlagen’ (Wahrmund I 744).
251 r-ḥ-m
mrḥ (LE) ‘have compassion’ (DLE I 318) || Ar �ح � raḥima ‘mitleidig, gütig,
ر م
gnädig sein’ (Wahrmund I 744);
~ Najd raḥām ‘mercy, compassion’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 366) ~ Damascus
raḥme ‘mercy’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 148) ~ Kǝndērīb b-raḥmǝ́tu ‘mit Gottes
Erbarmen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 57) ~ Egypt raḥam ‘have pity, have mercy’ (Spiro
1895: 220) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨raḥam, yarḥam⟩ ‘have compassion’ (Corriente 1997:
204).
166 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
252 r-x-m
253 r-d-d
254 r-d-y¹
rd ‘foot’; ‘der Fuß’; rdw (Pyr) ‘stairway’; ‘Treppe (eigentlich Tritte, Stufen)’; ‘foot,
heels’ (Faulkner 1962: 154; Wb II 461, 462; DLE I 281; Albright 1918: 235) ~ Dem rt
‘der Fuß’ (DG 258) ~ Copt ⲣⲁⲧ ‘foot’ (Crum 1939: 302) || Ar رد �ىradā ‘to beat the
ً
ground (running horse)’, �مرد �ىmardan, pl �مرا ٍدmarādin ‘legs of horses, camels,
elephants’ (Hava 1982: 248); ‘den Boden mit den Hufen stampfen’ (Wahrmund
I 752); ‘fouler le sol de ses sabots (se dit d’un cheval)’ (DAF I 849);
~ Najd rada ‘to beat the ground with the feet’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 368)
~ Egypt ṛada ‘überschüssiger Ackerboden, der in den Viehstall unter die
Tiere gelegt wird, um Dünger zu gewinnen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 162)
~ Marazig ṛadda ‘marcher en sautillant sur trois pattes, un antérieur étant
252. r-x-m – 258. r- ʿ -r- ʿ 167
entravé par l’oʿgāḷ’ (Boris 1958: 209) ~ Morocco rda ‘avancer en sautillant à
cloche-pieds; lever les deux pattes antérieures d’un seul mouvement comme
pour sauter (en parlant d’un cheval)’ (Prémare V 101) ~ Ḥassāniyya redye ‘sau-
ter par dessus’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 134) ~ Yemen ridi ‘bis zum Knie einsinken’
(Behnstedt 1996: 441).
255 r-d-y²
256 r-ṣ-w
rwḏ (Pyr) ‘hard, firm, strong, enduring, permanent’; ‘fest sein, dauerhaft’
(Faulkner 1962: 148; Wb II 410; Calice 1936: 255) || Ar ر�ص�اraṣā ‘befestigen’
(Wahrmund I 755);
~ Marazig ṛaṣṣa ‘se fixer’; ṛṣē ‘maintenir sa place, fixer, empêcher de
s’éloigner’ (Boris 1958: 214).
257 r-ʿ-š
nʿš (LE) ‘fierce, raging’; ‘laut (vom Geschrei, Gebrüll des Kriegers und des
Löwen)’ (Hoch 1994: 183; Wb II 209) ~ Heb ָר ַעׁשrāʿaš ‘quake, shake (of earth by
� شraʿaša ‘zittern, beben’
trampling of warriors)’ (Isaiah IX 4; BDB 950) || Ar ���ع ر
(Wahrmund I 771);
~ Aleppo raʿaš, yǝrʿeš ‘faire tressaillir de peur’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 285)
~ Palest rʿāš ‘frissons de froid’ (Denizeau 1960: 200) ~ Takrūna rʿaš ‘trembler’
(Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 1524) ~ Egypt raʿaš, yirʿiš ‘to cause to tremble’; irtaʿaš
‘tremble, quake, be frightened’; yitraʿēš ‘zittern’ (Spiro 1895: 229; Behnstedt &
Woidich 1994: 165) ~ Tripoli (Libya) rʿaš ‘tremare’ (Griffini 1913: 290).
258 r-ʿ-r-ʿ
rʿ (Pyr) ‘sun, sun-god Re’; ‘die Sonne als Gestirn und als Gottheit, der Sonnengott
Re’; rʿ.t ‘sun-goddess (of queen)’ (Faulkner 1962: 147; Wb II 401) || Ar ر�عرraʿraʿa
ع
‘briller’ (DAF 881); �ل�ع��لlaʿlaʿa ‘schimmern’ (Wahrmund II 641);
ع
168 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
259 r-ʿ-f
ف
jʿf/ʿfj (MK) ‘Feuchtes auspressen’; ‘wring out (clothes); squeeze out’ (Wb I 41,
138; Faulkner 1962: 11) || Ar ��� ر�عraʿifa ‘couler (se dit du sang du nez qui coule)’
(DAF I 882);
~ Aleppo rǝʿef ‘saigner du nez’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 285) ~ Al-Andalus
⟨raʿaf⟩ ‘to have a nose-bleed’ (Corriente 1997: 211) ~ Ḥassāniyya ʿrǝv ‘saigner du
nez’; ʿarrev ‘faire saigner du nez’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 133).
260 r-ʿ-y
261 r-ġ-b
ʿꜣb (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘selfish’; ʿꜣbt ‘selfishness’; ʿꜣbt ‘food, provisioning’ (Faulkner
1962: 38); ꜣfʿ ‘be greedy, gluttonous, voracious’ (Ember 1930: 55); ꜣḫf ‘Esslust
(?)’; ‘fever of appetite’ (Wb I 19; Faulkner 1962: 5; Rössler 1971: 296) ~ Heb ָר ֵעב
259. r- ʿ -f – 263. r-f-d 169
�غ
rāʿēb ‘be hungry’ (BDB 944) ~ Ge rǝḫba ‘be hungry’ (Leslau 1987: 468) || Ar �ر � � ب
�غ �غ ة
raġiba ‘vouloir, désirer, rechercher, avoir du penchant, de l’inclination pour …’;
� ر � ��ي� بraġīb ‘qui désire ardemment quelque chose; très-avide, très-vorace’; ����ر � ب
raġbah ‘object of desire’ (DAF I 887; Hava 1982: 259);
~ Kǝndērīb yǝrġab ‘begehren’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 58) ~ Palest marġūb ‘wün-
schenswert’ (Bauer 1957: 370) ~ Egypt raġab ‘wish, desire’; ruġbah ‘desire,
wish, eagerness’ (Spiro 1895: 229) ~ Tunis rġab ‘il a supplié’ (D. Cohen 1975: 28)
~ Malta ⟨regħba⟩ ‘avidità grande’ (Vassalli 1796: 571).
262 r-ġ-f
أ �غ ف ة
ḥrf (Urk. IV) ‘kind of bread’; ‘ein Brot’ (Faulkner 1962: 176; Hannig & Vomberg
�غ ف
1999: 434) || Ar ��� ر � يraġīf, pl ������ � � رʾarġifah ‘loaf of bread, round cake’ (Hava
1982: 260);
Commenting on the kinds of bread baked by the Rwala Bedouin, Musil (1928: 92) notes
that when the bread designated by the term raġīf “is as thin as paper it is called rahīf.”
~ Constantine ġṛāif (pl/coll.), n.un. qurṣa-ġṛāif ‘sortes de crêpes épaisses
généralement mangées au miel’ (W. Marçais 1911: 312) ~ Sūsa ġrayyba ‘cakes
made of semolina, sugar and oil’ (Talmoudi 1981: 129) ~ Rwala raġīf sāj ‘bread’
(Musil 1928: 92) ~ Egypt raġīf ‘Backplatte’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1999: 373)
~ N. Yemen raġīf ‘Brotlaib’ (Behnstedt 1987: 258) ~ Oman raġīf, pl ruġfān
‘Semmel’ (Reinhardt 1894: 73).
263 r-f-d
drp/dꜣp (Pyr) ‘offer to a god, feed s.o. ; present dues, make offering’; ‘beschen-
ken (mit Speisen), spenden’; drpw ‘offerings’ (Faulkner 1962: 315; Wb V 476;
ف
Brockelmann 1932: 116; Hannig & Vomberg 1999: 426) ~ Sab rfd ‘support, help’
(Biella 1982: 493) || Ar ر��دrafada ‘als Geschenk geben, schenken; helfen, unter-
stützen’ (Wahrmund I 777–78);
~ Najd rafdeh, pl rufāyid ‘Geschenke an Kleinvieh, Geld usw., die man von
Verwandten und Freunden nach Kriegsverlust oder Unglück erbittet’ (Hess
1938: 101) ~ Daθīna ⟨rifdah⟩ ‘secours, aide, assistance, soutien’ (GD 1333)
~ Algiers rfed ‘lever’ (Tapiéro 1971: 161) ~ Morocco rfed ‘to accommodate’
(Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 2) ~ Ḥassāniyya reffād ‘porteur’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990:
116) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨yarfad⟩ ‘to sustain or help’ (Corriente 1997: 213).
170 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
264 r-f-ʿ¹
fꜣj (OK) ‘hochheben, tragen’; fꜣ.t ‘das Auftragen der Speisen’; fꜣj.t (OK) ‘Last
(eines Schiffes)’; fri҆ ‘raise, lift up’; fꜣyt ‘portable shrine’ (Wb I 572, 574; Faulkner
1962: 97) ~ Sab yfʿ ‘to raise up’ (Jamme 1962: 438) || Ar � ر ��فrafaʿa ‘to raise, lift’
ع
(Hava 1982: 262);
~ Kǝndērīb rafaʿ ‘aufheben, wegbringen, abräumen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 58)
~ Damascus rafaʿ ‘to raise’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 186) ~ Palest rafaʿ ‘aufeben’
(Bauer 1957: 27) ~ Egypt rafaʿ ‘raise, lift up, take off’ (Spiro 1895: 231)
~ Al-Andalus ⟨narfaʿ arfaʿ⟩ ‘raise, pick, preserve’ (Corriente 1997: 213).
265 r-f-ʿ²
fꜣw (OK) ‘Macht, Ansehen (oder ähnlich) einer Person’ (Wb I 575) || Ar ��ر ��ف��ع
ة
rafʿah/rifʿah ‘elatio dignitatis, honoris celsitudo’; ‘haut, élevé en rang, illustre’
(Freytag 1837: 232; DAF II 898);
~ Palest rafʿa ‘Anhöhe, Gipfel’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 27).
266 r-f-f
nfnf (LE) ‘schleichendes Gewürm’ (Wb I 252; Brockelmann 1932: 104) ~ Heb
ف ف
ָר ַפףrāpap ‘to be loose, vacillate’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 1491) ~ Amh räfärräfä ‘to
strew plentifully’ (Leslau 1969: 16) || (?) Ar �� ر�رrafrafa ‘to flutter (bird)’ (Hava
1982: 261);
~ Damascus trafraf ‘flap’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 92) ~ Palest rafraf ‘flattern’;
raff ‘Vögelschwarm’ (Bauer 1957: 113, 268) ~ Najd rifīf ‘fluttering, flickering,
flash, flare’; rafrāf ‘schnelle Bewegung (vom Kamel)’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 379;
Socin 1901 III 269) ~ Negev raff ar-rafarīf ‘the flapping of tent-canvas’ (Henkin
2010: 298) ~ Egypt raff ‘to flutter’ (Spiro 1895: 230) ~ Marazig raff ‘avoir un fort
mouvement de tremblement (agonisant, doigt)’; rafraf ‘flotter au vent’ (Boris
1958: 218).
267 r-f-h
ف
srf (LE) [< *s+rfh] ‘zur Ruhe bringen’; ‘take one’s ease; rest, relief’ (Wb IV 197;
Faulkner 1962: 236) || Ar ر��هrafaha ‘jouir du bien-être, vivre tranquillement et
commodément’ (DAF I 902);
264. r-f- ʿ¹ – 271. r-k-y ¹ 171
~ Damascus rafāha ‘luxury’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 143) ~ Palest rafahiyya
‘Luxus’ (Bauer 1957: 197) ~ Egypt rafahiyya ‘luxury’ (Spiro 1895: 230) ~ Al-
Andalus ⟨taraffuh⟩ ‘to enjoy luxury’ (Corriente 1997: 214) ~ E. Arabia raffah
‘rendre la vie plus aisée’ (Denizeau 1980: 203).
268 r-q-b
قة ق
mnqbj.t (MK) ‘Art Halsschmuck’ (Wb II 91) ~ Akkad gubāru ‘nape’ (M. Cohen
2011: 117) || Ar ���� ر� بraqabah, pl � ر��ا بriqāb ‘nape of the neck’ (Hava 1982: 264);
~ N. Yemen ragabah ‘Hals’ (Behnstedt 1987: 258) ~ Kǝndērīb raqbe ‘Hals’
(O. Jastrow 2005: 59) ~ Lebanon rqābīna ‘nos cous’ (Feghali 1935: 1935: 10)
~ Palest raqabe, pl riqāb ‘Hals’ (Bauer 1958: 147).
269 r-q-y¹
قة
jꜣq (Pyr) ‘emporsteigen zum Himmel; emporklimmen, hinaufsteigen’; mꜣq.t
‘Leiter’ (Wb I 33; Hannig 1995: 25) || Ar ر �ق�يraqiya ‘to ascend gradually’; � �مر��ا
marqāt ‘ladder’ (Hava 1982: 266);
~ Al-Andalus ⟨marqā, pl marāqî⟩ ‘ladder, stair’ (Corriente 1997: 216) ~ Najd
riga ‘to climb, ascend’; marga ‘ascent, climb’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 380) ~ Rwala
ma yarqaʾ ‘he will never rise’ (Musil 1928: 449) ~ Aleppo traqqa ‘monter en
grade’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 292) ~ Egypt traqqa ‘be promoted, advanced’
(Spiro 1895: 233) ~ Tripoli (Libya) rgā ‘arrampicarsi’ (Griffini 1913: 18) ~ Marazig
rgi ‘monter’ (Boris 1958: 222) ~ Morocco rqa ‘s’élever’ (Prémare V 190).
270 r-q-y²
ّق
rk (LE) ‘(als Zauberwort)’ (Wb I 458) || Ar ر �ىraqqā to enchant s.o.’ (Hava 1982:
قة
266); ���� ر�يruqyah ‘a charm, spell (uttered or written)’ (Lane 1140);
~ Lebanon riqe ‘faire des sortilèges, jeter des sorts’ (M. Feghali 1938: 772)
~ Al-Andalus ⟨narqî raqayt⟩ ‘to charm, to cure with spells’; ⟨raqwah⟩ ‘spell,
incantation’ (Corriente 1997: 216).
271 r-k-y¹
rk (OK) ‘time (of king, ancients)’; ‘die Zeit jemandes, die Zeit von etwas’
(Faulkner 1962: 153; Wb II 457) || cf. Ar كا
� رrakā ‘to put off’ (Hava 1982: 268).
172 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
272 r-k-y²
ꜣṯ.t (OK) ‘das Bett,ّ auch von der Bahre des Osiris’ (Wb I 23; Hannig & Vomberg
1999: 576) || Ar ت�ركىtarakkā ‘to rely upon’ (Hava 1982: 268);
~ Daθīna riki ‘s’appuyer sur’; ⟨rākā⟩ ‘soutenir’ (GD 1413–14) ~ Palmyra itṛaka,
betṛakei ‘être couché, allongé’ (Cantineau 1934 II 6) ~ Najd rika ‘to lean on,
push (with the breast and legs)’; ‘anlehnen (eine Lanze)’ (Kurpershoek 1999:
381; Socin 1901 III 270); irtika ‘to lean’ (Sowayan 1992: 271) ~ Rwala irtika ‘to lean
against, push’ (Musil 1928: 306) ~ Palest irtaka ‘sich lehnen auf’ (Bauer 1957:
191) ~ Negev marka, pl marāki ‘cushions placed on one side of a reclining guest
to lean on; spot where something is placed’; mírtiki ‘leaning’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi)
~ Lebanon rekkāye ‘coussin sur lequel on s’appuie’ (Denizeau 1960: 207).
273 r-m-ḥ
mrḥ (LE) ‘die Lanze’ (Wb II 112) ~ Heb ר ַֹמחrōmaḥ ‘spear, lance’ (BDB 942)
~ Copt ⲙⲉⲣⲉϩ ‘spear, javelin’ (Crum 1939: 184a) || Ar ر مrumḥ, pl ر�م�اrimāḥ/
أ ح ح
� ر�م�اʾarmāḥ ‘spear’ (Hava 1982: 269);
ح
~ Rwala rumeḥ ‘eines lange Lanze’ (Musil 1928: 104) ~ Oman rumḥ
‘Speer’ (Reinhardt 1894: 57) ~ Aleppo rǝmǝḥ, pl rmāḥ ‘lance de bois flexible’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 294) ~ Damascus rǝmḥ, pl rmāḥ/rmūḥ ‘spear’ (Stowasser
& Ani 1964: 219) ~ Palest rumḥ, pl rimāḥ ‘Speer’ (Bauer 1957: 281).
274 r-m-s
275 r-m-ʿ
rmi҆҆ (Pyr) ‘weep, to flow (tears)’; ‘weinen’; rmw ‘weeping’; rmy.t/rmw.t ‘tears’
(Faulkner 1962: 149; Caminos 1954: 547; Wb II 416) ~ Copt ⲣⲓⲙⲉ ‘weep’ (Crum
1939: 294) || Ar ر�مramaʿa ‘to issue (tears from the eyes)’ (Hava 1982: 271);
ع
~ Lebanon rāmūʿ ‘pluie qui succéde au tonnerre; se dit surtout pour la pluie
tardive’ (Frayha 1973: 207).
276 r-m-n
i҆njmn (Urk. IV 731) ‘Granatapfel’ (Helck 1971: 505); i҆nhmn (Med) ‘pomegranate
(tree and fruit)’; ‘ein Obstbaum und dessen Früchte’ (Faulkner 1962: 24; Wb I 98)
~ Copt ϩ(ⲉ)ⲣⲙⲁⲛ/ⲗⲉϩⲙⲉⲛ/ⲉⲣⲙⲁⲛ ‘pomegranate tree or fruit, Punica granatum’
ّ ن
(Crum 1939: 703a) ~ Ugar lrmn ‘pomegranate’ (DUL 499) ~ Akkad armannu/
lurmu/lurimtu/urimtu/nurmû ‘id.’ (Parpola 2007: 238; Cohen 2011: 89) || Ar � ر�م�ا
ّ ة
rummān, u.n. ��� ر�م�ا نrummānah ‘pomegranate (fruit and tree)’ (Hava 1982: 271);
~ Oman rummān ‘Granatäpfel’ (Reinhardt 1894: 48) ~ Aleppo rǝmmān ‘gre-
nades, seins, mamelles d’une femme’; rǝmmāne ‘une grenade; un grenadier’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 295) ~ Damascus rǝmmāne ‘pomegranate’ (Stowasser &
Ani 1964: 176) ~ Palest rummān ‘Granatäpfel’ (Bauer 1957: 141) ~ Iraq ġǝmmān
‘pomegranate’ (Abu-Haidar 1991: 68) ~ Djidjelli rommwān ‘grenades’ (Ph.
Marçais 1956: 5) ~ Malta ⟨rummien (coll.), sg. -a⟩ ‘pomegranates’ (Aquilina
1987: 1242).
277 r-n-n
rnn ‘rejoice; extol’; ‘jubeln, jemanden preisen (m über)’: rnnwt ‘joy, exultation’;
rnnt ‘fortune, destiny’ (Faulkner 1962: 150; Wb II 435; DLE I 274; Brockelmann
ّن
1932: 109; Hannig 1995: 472) ~ Heb ָרנַ ןrānan ‘give a ringing cry’ (BDB 143) ~ Jibb
rinn ‘to reverberate, to ring’ (Johnstone 1981: 214) || Ar � رranna ‘to resound’
(Hava 1982: 272);
~ Najd rannah ‘din, noise, hubbub’; rannān ‘thundering, reverberating’
(Kurpershoek 1999: 381) ~ Daθīna ⟨rann⟩ ‘produire un son, tinter, cliqueter,
résonner’ (GD 1464) ~ Iraq rann ‘to ring, resound’; rannān ‘resounding speech’
(Woodhead & Beene 1967: 196) ~ Aleppo rann, yrǝnn ‘résonner (cuivre, cris-
tal), avoir du retentissement’: šī birǝ́nn rann ‘une chose … qui restera fameuse’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 296) ~ Damascus birinn min kull žiha ‘er klingt auf allen
174 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
Seiten’ (Bergsträßer 1924: 106) ~ Lebanon rann, yrǝnn ‘gémir, se lamenter; être
gai à l’excés’; rnīn ‘bruit’ (Denizeau 1960: 208) ~ Palest rann ‘klingeln (vom
Ton)’ (Bauer 1957: 175) ~ Egypt rann, yirinn ‘tinkle, re-echo; copulate’ (Spiro
1895: 238) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nirannan⟩ ‘to hum a tune to s.o.’ (Corriente 1997: 220).
278 r-h-n
rhn (MK) ‘to lean, rely on, trust in; support’; ‘sich stützen auf, gestützt sein (ḥr
auf)’ (Faulkner 1962: 151; DLE I 274; Wb II 440; Hannig 1995: 473; Calice 1936: 70)
|| Ar � ر�ه� نrahana ‘to last, to continue’ (Hava 1982: 275);
~ Najd rhūn ‘pawns, pledges’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 381) ~ Damascus rahǝn, pl
rhūne ‘security’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 203) ~ Egypt rahan ‘to pledge’ (Spiro
1895: 238) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨rahan⟩ ‘pawn, security’ (Corriente 1997: 221).
279 r-w-ḥ
śrwḫ (caus.) (NK) ‘cure, bring relief’; ‘Krankheit, Schmerz vertreiben’ (Wb IV
193; Ember 1930: 74) || (?) Ar رrāḥa ‘Beruhigung empfinden’ (Wahrmund I
اح
806);
Malta ⟨serraħ, iserraħ⟩ ‘dar riposo’ (Vassalli 1796: 606) [< *srwḥ].
280 r-w-ḍ
wꜣḏ (MK) ‘papyrus plant; green, pale (of lips), make green, fresh, raw (of food),
green stone’; m wꜣḏ ‘successfully’; wꜣḏ.t ‘green linen’; ‘grün, grün sein (von den
ض
Pflanzen, und vom Felde); allgemein von Dingen grüner Farbe; frisch, Frisch
sein’ (Faulkner 1962: 55; Wb I 151) || Ar �� روrawḍ ‘etwas Wasser; Ort wo Wasser
�ض ��ةrawḍah ‘luxuriant garden’ (Hava 1982: 278).
steht, daher gras- und krautreich; Wiese, Gemüsegarten’ (Wahrmund II 809);
�رو
An alternative etymology for wꜣḏ is proposed under 800. w-r-q below.
281 r-w-q
282 r-w-y
jwj (MK) ‘(das Feld) bewässern, (Flüssigkeit) ausgießen’ (Wb I 49) ~ Heb ָרוָ ה
rāwā ‘to be moist, saturated’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 1458) ~ Sab yhrwy(n) ‘provide
with irrigation’ (Biella 1982: 482) || Ar رو��يrawiya ‘draw water’ (Hava 1982: 279);
~ Najd riwi ‘to quench one’s thirst’ (Sowayan 1992: 272) ~ N. Yemen rawī
‘trinken’ (Behnstedt 1987: 259) ~ Āzǝx ṛawa ‘Boden-feuchtigkeit’ (Vocke &
Waldner 1982: 186) ~ Aleppo rawwa ‘arroser suffisamment, abreuver (un terrain,
une plante)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 302) ~ Damascus rawa ‘to water (horses)’
(Stowasser & Ani 1964: 259) ~ Syria rawwāya ‘großer Wasserkrug’ (Behnstedt
1997a: 126) ~ Lebanon rāyye ‘ondine’ (M. Feghali 1938: 774) ~ Palest riwi ‘durst
stillen’ (Bauer 1957: 81) ~ Rwala en mā thayye min θamānah trawweyt ‘I did not
succeed in drinking my fill from her eight teeth’; rāwiyye, pl rwāy ‘water bag’
(Musil 1928: 168, 70) ~ Najd rāwiyye, pl rawāya ‘Wasserschlauch’ (Socin 1901 III
271) ~ Sudan arwa ‘to irrigate’ (LDA 25) ~ Egypt rawa ‘to quench, water, irrigate’
(Spiro 1895: 239) ~ Djidjelli ṛwa ‘être humide (terre)’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 69)
~ Ḥassāniyya ṛwa ‘s’abreuver’ (D. Cohen 1963: 108).
283 z-x-x
sḫ/zḫ (Pyr) ‘schlagen’; sḫ.t ‘der Schlag’ّ (Calice 1936: 79; Wb III 466); zḫi҆ (Pyr) ‘to
�ز
hit, smite’ (Faulkner 1962: 239) || Ar خzaxxa ‘von oben hinabstoßen, hinab-
�
stürzen, hinabwerfen’ (Wahrmund I 826);
~ Iraq zaxx ‘to rain heavily’; zaxxa ‘heavy shower’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967:
202) ~ Damascus bitzixx zaxx ‘it’s raining cats and dogs’; zaxxa ‘downpour’
(Stowasser & Ani 1964: 186, 71) ~ Lebanon zaxx ‘faire agenouiller un chameau’
(Feghali 1938: 670) ~ Palest zaxxa ‘Wolkenbruch’; bitzixx fid-dinya ‘es gießt’;
zaxxa/zaxxat maṭar ‘Platzregen’ (Bauer 1957: 368, 138, 232) ~ Egypt zaxx ‘to rain
heavily, pour’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 367).
284 z-x-m
285 z-r-b¹
�ز
sꜣb/zꜣb (Pyr) ‘drip, gush out’; ‘fließen, rinnen’ (Faulkner 1962: 209; Wb III 420)
~ Aram ּבּוביתִ זַ ְרzarbūbīt ‘Kanal’ (Levy I 552) || Ar � ر بzariba ‘couler (se dit de
l’eau)’; ‘fließen (Wasser), auslaufen’ (DAF I 983; Wahrmund I 829);
~ Oman mǝrzāb ‘gutter’ (Eades 2011: 31) ~ Aleppo zarab ‘couler, fuir, perdre
son contenu (: vase)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 300) ~ S.E. Anatolia mizrīb ‘gout-
tière’ (Grigore 2007: 40) ~ Lebanon zarzab ‘dégoutter, dégouliner’ (Denizeau
1960: 217) ~ Palest zarab ‘rinnen’; mizrāb ‘Rinne’ (Bauer 1957: 245) ~ Egypt
zarab ‘to flow, to relieve nature’ (Spiro 1895: 247); il-bagara tuzṛub ‘die Kuh trat
Durchfall’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 182) ~ Algeria zreb ‘haie’ (Ben Sedira
1910: 278) ~ Morocco zerba ‘hurry (n)’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 103) ~ Tangier
zreb ‘se dépêcher’ (W. Marçais 1911: 318).
286 z-r-b²
�ز
snb.t/znb.t (Pyr) ‘Mauer, Zinne, Mauerzinne (auch von Gebäude)’ (Brockelmann
1932: 113; Hannig 1995: 717) || Ar � ر بzaraba ‘to pen, to enclose’ (Hava 1982:
286);
~ Iraq zirrība, pl zarāyib ‘pen, corral, stockade, fold’ (Woodhead & Beene
1967: 207) ~ Aleppo zrābe/zrēbe ‘frais de parcage du bétail’ (Barthélemy
1935–69: 309) ~ Damascus zrībe, pl zarāyeb ‘pen’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 171)
~ Lebanon zrībe ‘enclos où l’on parque le bétail’ (Denizeau 1960: 217) ~ Palest
zarab ‘einpferchen’ (Bauer 1957: 87) ~ Egypt zarbiyya ‘hedge, fence’ (Spiro 1895:
247); zarb ‘Zaun (Hecke)’; zarība ‘Pferch, Viehstall’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994:
183) ~ Sétif zarb ‘entourage de meule’ (Lentin 1959: 10) ~ Morocco ẓeṛb ‘hedge’
(Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 193) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨zarîbah, pl zarāʾib⟩ ‘pen, cor-
ral’ (Corriente 1997: 227) ~ Ḥassāniyya zerreb ‘entourer d’une clôture’ (Taine-
Cheikh 1990: 62).
285. z-r-b ¹ – 289. z- ʿ -q 177
287 z-r-d
�ز
Wb V 527) || Ar ردzarada ‘to strangle with a rope’; �م�ز ردmazrad ‘throat, gullet’
ḏꜣd (Pyr) ‘kill, entangle’; ‘Schlachtopfer abstechen, abkehlen’ (Ember 1930: 15;
288 z-ʿ-z-ʿ
�ز
1962: 213) ~ Heb זְ וָ ָעהzǝwāʿāh ‘trembling, terror’ (BDB 266) || Ar �ع�زzaʿzaʿa
śʿj (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘zittern, in Angst sein’ (Wb IV 43); sʿ3y ‘tremble’ (Faulkner
�ز ع
‘erschüttern, heftig schütteln’; �ع�زاzaʿzāʿ ‘orkanartig (Wind)’ (Wahrmund I
ع
707, 832–33);
~ Ḥaḍramawt zāʿ ‘secouer, agiter’; zawwaʿ ‘faire trembler’ = zaʿzaʿ (Landberg
1901: 1705–06) ~ Iraq zaʿzāʿ ‘to shake violently, rock’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967:
203) ~ Daθīna tzaʿzeʿū-ši rāsek ‘wackele nicht mit deinem Kopfe’ (GD 1838)
~ Yemen zaʿzaʿ ‘to raise one’s voice loudly’ (Piamenta 1990: 200) ~ Rwala ðaʿðaʿ
bel-qowm ‘he has shaken the enemy’ ~ zāʿ ‘leap up, jump up’ (Musil 1928: 536,
157) ~ Aleppo zaʿzaʿ ‘secouer, s’ébranler, remuer violemment’; zaʿzaʿa ‘secousse,
ébranlement’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 313) ~ Palest zaʿzaʿ ‘erschüttern’; zaʿzaʿa
‘Erschütterung’ (Bauer 1957: 102) ~ Sinai ðaʿðaʿ ‘to flutter’ (Stewart 1990: 212)
~ Takrūna zaʿʿez ‘faire sursauter qq’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 1673)
~ Al-Andalus ⟨zaʿzaʿ, pl zaʿāziʿ⟩ ‘storm’ (Corriente 1997: 230).
Cf. Ghomara (Berber) zeʿzeʿ ‘to tremble’ (Mourigh 2016: 435).
289 z-ʿ-q
ḏʿq (LE) ‘cry out’; ‘schreien, rufen’ (r zum Himmel); ḏʿqt ‘Geschrei’ (Wb V 541;
�ز
(Leslau 1938: 155) || Ar � �ع قzaʿaqa ‘shriek, cry out’ (Hava 1982: 289);
Hannig 1995: 999, 1001) ~ Heb ָצ ַעקṣāʿaq ‘cry out’ (BDB 858) ~ Soq zaʿáq/saʿáq
~ Sinai zaʿʿag ‘to scream, yell, cry’; ziʿāg ‘screaming, crying’ (Stewart 1990:
285) ~ Kǝndērīb zaʿwaq ‘schreien’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 62) ~ Palest zaʿaq ‘rufen’
(Bauer 1957: 248) ~ Lebanon zʿīq ‘criaillerie’ (Feghali 1935: 41) ~ Egypt zaʿaq/
zaʿʿaq ‘cry out, shout, shriek’ (Spiro 1895: 250).
178 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
290 z-f-f
sp/zp (Pyr) ‘time’; ‘Angelegenheit, Fall von, Mal’; sp 3 sp 4 n hrw ‘three or four
a day’ (Faulkner 1962: 221; Wb IIIّ 435; Calice 1936: 78; Loprieno 1995: 72) ||
�ز فّ ة �ز ف
times
Ar ��� zaffah ‘one time, one action’; �� zaffa ‘to hasten; to blow gently (wind)’
(Hava 1982: 290);
~ Rwala zafzāf ‘swift’ (Musil 1928: 254) ~ Marazig zaff ‘passer en sifflant’
(Boris 1958: 246) ~ Oman zeffe ‘Brautzug’ (Reinhardt 1894: 41) ~ Egypt zaffa
‘bridal procession’ (Spiro 1895: 251) ~ Morocco tzǝfzīf ‘sifflement du vent’
(Prémare V 343) ~ Malta ⟨żiffa⟩ ‘impeto; vento subitaneo’ (Vassalli 1796: 675).
291 z-f-n
ṯnf (Gr) ‘tanzen’; ‘enjoyment (?)’ (Wb V 380; Faulkner 1962: 306) ~ Dem ḏnf
�ز ف
‘Musikant’ (DG 682) ~ Ge zafana ‘dance’ ~ Argobba zäfän ‘dance, song, chant’
(Leslau 1987: 632; 1997: 227) ~ Mah zǝfōn ‘dance’ (Johnstone 1987: 512) || Ar ��� ن
zafana ‘mit dem Fuße stoßen, tanzen’ (Wahrmund I 837);
~ Al-Andalus ⟨zafna⟩ ‘dance’ (Corriente 1997: 231) ~ Bahrain zafan dance’
(Holes 2001: 222) ~ Malta ⟨żifen, jiżfen⟩ ‘ballare, saltellare’ (Vassalli 1796: 675)
~ Oman zefen ‘Schwerttänze aufführen’ (Reinhardt 1894: 418) ~ zfn ‘d’abord être
agité et ensuite danser’ (GD 1843).
292 z-l-m
293 z-m-r
zbꜣ (OK) ‘flute’; ‘die Flöte blasen’ (Ember 1930: 48; Wb III 433) ~ Akkad zammāru
‘flute player’ (Parpola 2007: 192) ~ Heb זָ ַמרzāmar ‘to make music’ (M. Jastrow
1886: 405) ~ Ge zammara ‘play a musical instrument’ (Leslau 1987: 639) ~ Amh
�ز
zämära ‘singing’ (Kane 1990: 1615) || Saf zmrt ‘flute-playing girl’ (Al-Jallad 2015:
354) ~ Ar �مرzamara ‘Flöte spielen’ (Wahrmund I 845);
~ Arabia mizmār, pl mizāmīr ‘double reed pipe; (its sound as it were of pro-
fane levity offends the religious ears of good Muslims)’ (Doughty 1888 II 118)
~ Yemen mizmār, pl mazāmīr ‘flauto’; zammar ‘suonare il piffero’ (Rossi 1939:
209, 227) ~ Oman zemor, pl zmūr ‘Pfeife’ (Reinhardt 1894: 71) [< *zmr] ~ Iraq
zammaġ ‘to sound a car horn’ (Abu-Haidar 1991: 200) ~ Aleppo ẓamar, yǝẓmor
‘chanter’; ẓamr, pl ẓmūr(a) ‘flûte double formée de deux roseaux liés ensem-
ble’; ẓammār ‘joueur de cornemuse’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 503) ~ Damascus
zammer tlǝtt marrāt ‘blow the horn three times’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 24)
~ Lebanon zammūr, pl zmāmīr ‘flûte en roseau’ (Denizeau 1960: 226) ~ Hasköy
zǝmmāṛa ‘Hals, Luftröhre’ (Talay 2002: 85) ~ Palest zammar ‘flöten’; zummāru
‘seine Schalmei’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 30) ~ Egypt zummāṛa ‘Flöte’; zimmāṛ
‘Flötenspieler’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 191) ~ Tunis ẓoṃṃaṛ ‘il a sifflé’
(D. Cohen 1975: 24) ~ Algeria zemmār ‘hautbois’ (Ben Sedira 1910: 281) ~ Malta
⟨żammar, jżammar⟩ ‘suonare il piffero’ (Vassalli 1796: 667).
294 z-m-l
�ز ة
zmꜣ (Pyr) ‘vereinigen, sich gesellen’ (Wb III 453) || Ar �� �م�لzumlah ‘party, com-
�ز ة �ز
panions’; �� �م�لzamalah ‘family, household’; �مي���لzamīl ‘fellow rider, colleague’
(Hava 1982: 296);
~ Iraq zāmal ‘be a friend, colleague’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 206) ~ Egypt
zimīl, pl zumala/zumalāt ‘colleague, comrade’ (Spiro 1895: 256) ~ Marazig
zmāla ‘entreprise commune’ (Boris 1958: 252) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨zamîl⟩ ‘compan-
ion’ (Corriente 1997: 233).
180 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
295 z-w-r
zꜣ (Pyr) ‘betake oneself’; ‘sich wohin begehen’ (Faulkner 1962: 207; Calice 1936:
78) ~ Ge tazāwwara ‘go back and forth’ (Leslau 1987: 646) ~ Amh zäyyärä ‘to
visit, to arrive, come to’ (Kane 1990: 1672) || Ar �زا رzāra ‘to visit’ (Hava 1982: 300);
~ Khawētna mazāṛ ‘Wallfahrtsort’ (Talay 1999: 86) ~ Aleppo zār ‘visiter’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 322) ~ Damascus zār ‘pay a call’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964:
33) ~ Palmyra zawwāṛa ‘pèlerins’ (Cantineau 1934 II 82) ~ Lebanon nzār ‘être
visité, recevoir des visites’ (Feghali 1938: 360) ~ Palest zār ‘besuchen’; zyāra
‘Besuch’ (Bauer 1957: 56) ~ Sinai zwārah, pl zuwāyir ‘visitation’ (Stewart 1990:
287) ~ Egypt zār ‘to visit’ (Spiro 1895: 243) ~ Morocco ẓāṛ ‘rendre visite à qqn’
(Prémare V 409).
296 z-w-l
sꜣ (Pyr) ‘sich begeben nach (r)’ (Wb III 413); i҆zy (Pyr) ‘go, hasten!’ (imperative)
(Faulkner 1962: 29; Calice 1936: 122) ~ Heb ָאזַ לʾāzal ‘to go away’ (BDB 23) ||
Ar �زا لzāla ‘to retire (from a place)’ (Hava 1982: 301); cf. 348. s-y-r;
~ Aleppo zāl ‘cesser, s’éloigner’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 323) ~ Egypt zāl ‘to
disappear, cease, remove’ (Spiro 1895: 244) ~ Morocco zuwwel iddik ‘hands
off!’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 94) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨zāl⟩ ‘to disappear, cease, get
away’ (Corriente 1997: 237) ~ Malta ⟨żal, iżul⟩ ‘andar via, allontanarsi’ (Vassalli
1796: 680).
297 z-y-t
ḏ.t/ḏtt (ḏyt) (LE) ‘der Ölbaum; die Olive’; ‘olive tree’ (Wb V 618; Goldwasser
2002: 48) ~ s̱̱e-t ‘Öl’ (Helck 1971: 527) ~ Copt (Sa‘idic) ϫⲟⲉⲓⲧ ‘olive tree, olive’
�ز � تzayt, pl �
�ز � تzuyūt ‘olive oil’ (Hava 1982: 302);
(Crum 1939: 790b) || Saf zt ‘oil’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 638)
~ Ar � �ي يو
~ Aleppo zayt/zēt (n.coll.), pl zyūt ‘huile d’olive’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 324)
~ Damascus zēt ‘Olivenöl’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 159) ~ Palest zēt, pl zētātna ‘unser
Öl’ (Bauer 1957: 223) ~ Tunis zīt ‘Olivenöl’ (Singer 1984: 116) ~ Malta ⟨żejt, pl
żjut⟩ ‘oglio’ (Vassalli 1796: 671).
295. z-w-r – 299. s- 181
298 z-y-n
�ز أ�ز ن
jzn.w ‘etwas Gutes oder Freundliches’ (Wb I 129) || Ar � ي� نzayn, pl � � ي�اʾazyān
‘beauty’ (Hava 1982: 203);
~ Baghdad zēn ‘good’ (Blanc 1964: 34) ~ Oman zēn ‘gut, schön’ (Reinhardt
1894: 117, 42) ~ Āzǝx dzayyen ‘sich fein machen’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 195)
~ ʿAnazeh ez-zēn min en-nās ‘les bons gens’ (Landberg 1940: 29) ~ Iraq zēn ‘good’
(Abu-Haidar 1991: 200) ~ Palest zēn ‘beauté’ (Denizeau 1960: 233) ~ Najd bezēn
‘wohl, in gutem Zustand’; azyan ‘schöner, besser’ (Socin 1901 III 274) ~ Tripoli
(Libya) zēn ‘bellezza’ (Griffini 1913: 29) ~ Mzāb zēn ‘bien, beau’ (Grand’Henry
1976: 115) ~ Cherchell mǝzyān ‘bien portant, florissant’ (Grand’Henry 1972: 84)
~ Ḥassāniyya zeyn ‘beau’; zyān ‘to become good’ (D. Cohen 1963: 123; Heath
2004: 302).
299 s-
s- (causative prefix; Gardiner 1950: 211): sdšr ‘redden’ [← dšr ‘red’] (Faulkner
1962: 257) ~ Heb {h-}: ִה ְק ִּדיׁשhiqdīš ‘he consecrated’ (cf. ָקדֹוׁשqādōš ‘holy’)
~ Aram {h-}: hanpeq ‘he brought out’ (cf. nǝpaq ‘he went out’; M. Jastrow 1886:
�ذ
925–926) ~ Sab {h-}: hšbʿ ‘to satisfy’ (Biella 1982: 510) ~ Soq {š-}: šendér ‘con-
sacrer’ (Leslau 1938: 258) [< *š + ndr] (cf. Ar ن� رnaðara ‘to make a vow’; Hava
1982: 761);
The Ancient Egyptian causative marker {s-} finds the close Semitic phonological equiva-
lent *s¹ and its aforecited reflexes across this language family, e.g., the Akkadian š-stem.
(cf. Rubin 2004: 477).
~ Ḥassāniyya saxḍar ‘faire verdir, teindre en vert’; sakḥal ‘noircir’; saqwam
‘mettre droit’; saʿṛab ‘arabiser, annoblir’; sakbaṛ ‘considérer comme grand’
(D. Cohen 1963: 131).
Cohen (loc. cit., 132) notes, in relation to the lexical productivity of this morphological
device: “Le thème est donc relativement peu représenté. Il ne s’ensuit pas qu’il ne soit
pas productif. Au contraire il semble bien qu’il soit possible de tirer une forme en sa- de
tous les noms de couleurs, des termes d’orientation et des noms des tribus dont quelque
caractéristique est passé en proverbe.”
182 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
300 s-ʾ-l
أ
sꜣr/sꜣr.t (MK) ‘Wunsch, Wunsch sagen’; ‘desire’ (Wb IV 18–19; Ember 1930: 7)
~ Akkad šâlu ‘inquire, interrogate, question’ (M. Cohen 2011: 11) || Ar ��س� لsaʾala
‘to ask’ (Hava 1982: 304);
~ Aleppo sāyal, ysāyel ‘interroger (variante moderne de sāʾala yusāʾilu)’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 324) ~ Egypt sayal ‘fragen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994:
132) ~ Najd sāl, ysāl ‘to ask’ (Ingham 1994: 179) ~ Oman seʾel ‘fragen’ (Reinhardt
1894: 144) ~ Palest saʾal/sāyal ‘fragen jemandem nach’ (Bauer 1957: 116)
~ Tripoli (Libya) shel ‘domandare’ (Cesàro 1939: 203) ~ Douz yashal ‘fragen’
(Ritt-Benmimoun 2014: 296) ~ Djidjelli sāwǝl/sell ‘demander, questionner’ (Ph.
Marçais 1956: 97, 161) ~ Mzāb sawwǝl ‘il a interrogé’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 117)
~ Ḥassāniyya sawwal ‘id.’ (D. Cohen 1963: 121).
301 s-b-ḥ
sbḥ (Pyr) ‘cry out, cry’; ‘schreien’ (Faulkner 1962: 220; Calice 1936: 79; Wb IV 551)
|| Ar ���� ����س بsabaḥa ‘louer, exalter Dieu’ (DAF I 1041);
ح
~ Aleppo sabbaḥ ‘glorifier Dieu’; tasbīḥ ‘glorification de Dieu’ (Barthélemy
1935–69: 330) ~ Lebanon tesebḥa ‘cantique’ (Feghali 1938: 632) ~ Kǝndērīb
sǝbḥān ‘Preis, gepriesen sei’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 64) ~ Palest sabbaḥ ‘preisen’
(Bauer 1957: 234) ~ Egypt sabbiḥ ‘to praise God’ (Spiro 1895: 267).
302 s-b-l
ّ
sbn/zbn (Pyr) ‘glide away’; ‘gleiten, straucheln’ (Faulkner 1962: 220; Wb II 89;
Calice 1936: 191) ~ Heb ְׁש ִבילšəḇīl ‘way, path’ (BDB 987) || Ar ����سب���لsabbala
‘reichlich regen (Himmel)’ (Wahrmund I 874);
~ Damascus sabīl ṃayy ‘fountain’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 97) ~ Palest sibīl
‘Brunnen als Stiftung’ (Bauer 1957: 67) ~ Egypt sibīl ‘fountain’ (Spiro 1895: 268)
~ Al-Andalus ⟨yansabal ansabal⟩ ‘to flow’ (Corriente 1997: 243).
303 s-b-y
ّ
sbi҆ (BD) ‘rebel serpent’; sbj.t ‘Bezeichnung der Uraeusschlange’; śꜣb.t (Pyr)
‘bunte Schlange’ (Faulkner 1962: 220; Wb IV 89, 18) || Ar � �� بسsabiyy ‘peau ôtée,
ّة ّ �ي
��س� ا �لsabiyyu l-ḥayyah ‘the slough of the
�
dépouille du serpent’ (DAF I 1040); ����حي
ب�ي
serpent’ (Lane 1303).
300. s- ʾ -l – 306. s-ǧ-m 183
304 s-t-r
ter’ (Winnett & Reed 1970: 195) || Saf s¹tr ‘shelter’ (Al-Jallad 2015: 343) ~ Ar ��ست��ر
conceal’ (BDB 711) ~ Sab hstr ‘protection’ (Avanzini 1980: 296) ~ Tham strt ‘shel-
305 s-ǧ-r
śd.t (Pyr) [< *sdr < *sǧr] ‘fire, flame, burnt-offering, firewood’; ‘Feuer, Flamme,
Feuer anzünden, Feuer anfachen’ (Faulkner 1962: 257; Wb IV 375; Brockelmann
���جسsaǧara ‘Feuer anzünden’ (Wahrmund I 877);
1932: 114) || Ar �ر
~ Kǝndērīb saǧaṛ, yǝsǧǝṛ ‘anschüren (den Backofen)’; sǧōṛ ‘Brenn-material
für den Backofen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 66) ~ Mosul saǧaġ ‘he lit the fire in the
oven or the hearth’ (Al-Bakrī 1972: 262) [< *sǧr] ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nisaǧǧār
tasǧīr an-nār⟩ ‘to pile up embers with a fire-shovel’; ⟨siǧār⟩ ‘fire-shovel, heat’
(Corriente 1997: 244).
306 s-ǧ-m
gśm (LE) ‘ein Gewässer (im Delta?) das Wellen schlägt’; ‘tempest, rainstorm’
(Wb V 206; Hoch 1994: 350); gsm ‘stormy lake’ (DLE II 194) ~ Dem gsm ‘Sturm’
(DG 593) ~ Copt ϫⲟⲥⲉⲙ ‘tempest’ (Crum 1939: 832b) ~ Akkad šagāmu ‘to thun-
der, resound’ (CAD XVII/1 63) ~ Heb ּגֶ ֶׁשםgešem ‘rain, shower’ (BDB 177) ~ Ugar
gšm ‘rain, downpour’ (DUL 310) || Ar � � ��سsaǧama ‘fließen, strömen, vergos-
�ج م
sen werden (Thränen, Wasser)’ (Wahrmund I 878); saǧam ‘water, tear’ (Hava
1982: 310);
184 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
~ Palest siǧām ud-damʿ min ʿēni ‘le flot des larmes de mes yeux’ (Saarisalo
1932: XIX 1) ~ Najd saǧǧam ‘in sich versunken sein’ (Socin 1901 III 275) ~ Daθīna
⟨saǧam⟩ ‘gronder (tonnerre, eau, torrent, pluie), bruire, murmurer, retentir’
(GD 1903–4).
307 s-ḥ-b
308 s-ḥ-q
šḥq (LE) ‘dust cloud, pulverized grain; chaff’; ‘Spreu, Häcksel’ (Hoch 1994: 288;
DLE II 133; Hannig 1995: 833; Albright 1918: 246) ~ Copt ϣϩⲓϭ ‘dust’ (Crum 1939:
612b) ~ Heb ַש ַחקšaḥaq ‘dust’ (BDB 1007) || Ar �ح ق
��سsaḥaqa ‘he bruised, brayed,
�
pounded’; ‘fricando trivit, et contrivit comminuitve in pulverem’ (Lane 1318;
Freytag 1837: 273);
~ Egypt saḥaq ‘crush, reduce to powder, pulverize’ (Spiro 1895: 671; Badawi
& Hinds 1986: 402) ~ Tunis sḥaq ‘poussier de charbon’ (D. Cohen 1975: 154)
~ Yemen saḥwaq ‘to crush spice-sauce’ (Piamenta 1990: 217) ~ Palest saḥaq
‘pulverisieren, zerreiben’ (Bauer 1957: 236, 374) ~ Djidjelli sḥāq ‘cendre, débris
de charbon’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 266) ~ Morocco sḥaq ‘broyer finement, pulvéri-
ser, triturer, concasser’ (Prémare VI 45) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨saḥaqt⟩ ‘crush, pound’
(Corriente 1997: 246).
309 s-x-r
ḥāžtak maṣxara baqa ‘don’t be ridiculous!’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 193)
~ Aleppo maṣxara ‘objet de dérision; la risée des gens’ (Barthélemy 1935–
69: 429) ~ Lebanon masxar ‘se moquer de qqn’ (Denizeau 1960: 494) ~ S.E.
Anatolia maṣxaṛa ‘Gespött’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 198) ~ Palest masxara,
pl masāxir ‘id.’; masxara ‘Hohn’; tmasxar ‘höhnen’; tmasxar ʿala ‘spotten’
(Bauer 1957: 134, 160, 283); masxara ‘mockery’ (Piamenta 2000: 240) ~ Egypt
itmasxar ‘mock, ridicule, mimic, make fun of’ (Spiro 1895: 567) ~ Tripoli
(Libya) tmasxar ‘burlare’ (Cesàro 1939: 242) ~ Takrūna ṣxaṛ ‘se moquer de, se
jouer de’; tmaṣxor ‘plaisanter, faire de l’esprit’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 2194)
~ Cherchell tmesxǝr ‘il s’est moqué’ (Grand’Henry 1972: 47) ~ Djidjelli tmesxīr
‘fait de se moquer, plaisanterie’; tmesxro ‘moquez-vous’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 235,
95) ~ Morocco soxrēya ‘objet de risée’; mǝsxāra ‘moquerie; plaisanterie de
mauvais goût’ (Prémare VI 50) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nasxar saxart⟩ ‘to mock or scoff’
(Corriente 1997: 246).
310 s-x-n
Ar ��خ� ن
šuḫnu ‘heat’ (M. Cohen 2011: 100) ~ Heb ְׁש ִחיןšǝḥīn ‘boil, eruption’ (BDB 1006) ||
��سsaxana ‘be hot, suffer from fever’ (Hava 1982: 313);
�
~ Yemen sxūn ‘tepido’ (Rossi 1939: 242) ~ Aleppo saxan ‘devenir chaud’;
sxūne ‘fièvre’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 337) ~ Damascus sxūne ‘fever’; saxxan ‘heiß
machen’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 88; Grotzfeld 1965: 159) ~ Lebanon saxne ‘une
maladie’ (Denizeau 1960: 240) ~ Palest sxūne ‘Fieber’ (Bauer 1957: 111) ~ Egypt
saxan ‘to wound, cause pain’; suxūna ‘fever’ (Spiro 1895: 273) ~ Marazig ṣxāna
‘état febrile’ (Boris 1958: 268).
311 s-r-b
sꜣb (MK) ‘cause to tarry’; śꜣb ‘jemanden verweilen lassen’ (Faulkner 1962: 209;
Wb IV 17) || Ar � ��سر بsaraba ‘von etwas abgeleitet werden’ (Wahrmund I 892);
~ Egypt sarrab ‘cause to go astray’ (Spiro 1895: 275) ~ Sinai saráḅ ‘to mis-
lead’ (Stewart 1990: 262); misrāb, pl masārīb ‘path, track’ (C. Bailey 1991: 441)
~ Najd sarrab ‘to raid on horseback; to lead off in a line’; sirb ‘a line of men’
(Kurpershoek 1995: 378; Ingham 1994: 178) ~ Lebanon masrūb ‘a long and nar-
row lane’ (Frayha 1973: 81) ~ Marazig sarrab ‘filer tout droit’ (Boris 1958: 270)
~ Rwala surba, pl sirab ‘troop of horse-riders’ (Musil 1928: 515).
186 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
312 s-r-b-ṭ
šbd/ša-b-d (LE) ‘Stock, zum Prügeln’; ‘staff, rod’ (Wb IV 442; Helck 1962: 570;
Hoch 1994: 277); šꜣbd ‘stock’ (DLE II 109) ~ Dem šbt ‘Stock’ (DG 499) ~ Copt
ϣⲃⲱⲧ, pl ϣⲃⲁⲧⲉ ‘rod, staff’ (Crum 1939: 554a) ~ Mand šibṭa ‘rod, staff (fig.)’
(Drower & Macuch 1963: 459) ~ Barwar šarbǝṭana ‘pliant wooden stick for
driving animals’ (Khan 2008a: 1401) ~ Aram רביטא ָ ַשšarbīṭā ‘staff, scepter’
(M. Jastrow 1886: 1628) || Akkad šabbiṭu ‘staff, scepter’ (CAD XVII/1: 10), ‘trun-
cheon’ (Parpola 2007: 276) || Ar ��سر�ب��طsarbaṭa ‘être long et mince (se dit d’un
melon)’ (DAF I 1078);
Erman (1892: 119) states: “Das ägyptische Wort kommt im neuen Reich vor, wo es wie ein
Lehnwort geschrieben wird.”
~ Arabia sarbūṭ ‘coffee pestle’ (Doughty 1888: 246) ~ Palest sarūṭ, pl sawārīṭ
‘Stab (lang, dick)’ (Bauer 1957: 285) ~ Cypriot Ar šrapít ‘the edible long stem
of certain plants; general term for such plants, e.g., artichokes’ (own obs.)
~ Marazig ssarbaṭ ‘aller en file’; sarbūṭ, pl sarābīṭ ‘file (de gens ou de cha
meaux)’ (Boris 1958: 271) ~ Malta ⟨sarbut, pl srabat⟩ ‘fila di gente o di altri
animali’ (Vassalli 1796: 593).
313 s-r-ḥ
sꜣḥ/śꜣḥ (Pyr) ‘Ort erreichen; sich nähern, herankommen an; frei weidend’;
‘reach, arrive at’ (Wb IV 20; Faulkner 1962: 210) || Ar ��سرsaraḥa ‘conduire le
ح
troupeau au pâturage dès le point du jour’ (DAF I 1344);
~ Khābūra saraḥ ‘to graze freely (of sheep and goats)’ (Brockett 1985: 123)
~ Rwala serārīḥ ‘herders’ (Musil 1928: 212) ~ Aleppo saraḥ ‘errer, paître en lib-
erté (: animal), errer dans la campagne’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 340) ~ Najd saraḥ
‘to roam, to pasture at pleasure’; sarrāḥ ‘der Hirte’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 378; Hess
1938: 62) ~ ʿAnazeh sarraḥ ‘faire sortir le matin, mener paître’ (Landberg 1940:
30) ~ Yemen saraḥ ‘andarsene’; ‘morgens gehen’ (Rossi 1939: 192; Behnstedt
1987: 97) ~ Damascus tsarraḥ ‘entlassen werden’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 28) ~ Suxne
saraḥ, yisraḥ ‘auf die Weide gehen’ (Behnstedt 1994: 281) ~ Palest saraḥ ‘ausge-
hen’ (Schmidt & Kahle 1918 I 282) ~ Egypt saraḥ ‘go to pasture, graze (of ani-
mals), wander, stray (of the mind)’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 407) ~ Sinai saraḥ ‘to
go to, or be at, pasture’ (C. Bailey 1991: 441); sarrāḥ ‘one who is herding’ (Stewart
1990: 262) ~ Mzāb kunt nasraḥ ‘je faisais paître’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 123)
~ Djidjelli saṛḥ ‘fait de paître’; srīḥ ‘paître’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 86, 225) ~ Morocco
sraḥ ‘(le bétail) pour le conduire au pâturage; mener paître’ (Prémare VI 67).
312. s-r-b-ṭ – 316. s-ṭ-r 187
314 s-r-f
śrf (Pyr) ‘warm (sein); die Wärme; Hitze; Fieber’; ‘warm, frisch hergestellt (vom
Brot und Bier)’ (Wb IV 195, 196; V 522; Sethe 1962: 182); srft ‘fever’; srf ‘warm;
fever, inflammation; mood; warmth, temperature, passion’ (Faulkner 1962: 236;
DLE 58; Gardiner 1957: 591; cf. Erman 1892: 118): srf-i҆b (divine name or title)
‘Hot-hearted One’; srfrf ‘be very warm’ (van der Plas & Borghouts 1998: 260)
~ Dem srrf ‘Brand’ (DG 443) ~ Copt ⲥⲣⲁϥ ‘wound, sore’; ⲥⲓⲣⲉϥⲉ ‘(same or) scab’
(Crum 1939: 357a) ~ Aram ṣrp ‘refine’ (Segal 1983: 213) || Heb ָש ַרףśārap ‘burn’
أ
(BDB 976) ~ Ugar šrp ‘burn’ (DUL 831) || Akkad ṣarāpu ‘to burn’ (Parpola 2007:
ف ف
156) || Ar �� ��سرsarifa/�� � ��سرʾasrafa ‘he acted immoderately’ (Lane 1351); ʾasrafa
ʿala nafsihi ‘suivre ses mauvais penchants’ (Dozy I 649);
~ Aleppo tṣarraf fi … ‘avoir un commerce charnel avec (un animal femelle)’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 430) ~ Lebanon ṣeref ‘demander le mâle (vache, etc.)’
(Feghali 1938: 789), ṣarfāna ‘in heat (cow)’ (Frayha 1973: 105) ~ Palest ṣārif
‘brünstig’ (Vieh)’ (Bauer 1957: 67) ~ Egypt sārifa ‘id.’ (Stute), ilbagaṛa ṣarafit ‘die
Kuh ist rinderig geworden’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 206, 263) ~ Al-Andalus
⟨saraf fī⟩ ‘to overdo’ (Corriente 1997: 249) ~ Cypriot Ar serfe, pl -át ‘in heat
(animal)’ (Borg, own obs.).
315 s-r-w
ة
ṯrt (Pyr) ‘willow’; ‘Weide’ (Faulkner 1962: 306; Wb V 385) || Ar � ��سروsarwah
‘Zypresse’ (Wahrmund I 897);
~ Palest sarwe ‘Zypresse’ (Bauer 1957: 386) ~ Egypt saru ‘cypress-tree’ (Spiro
1895: 277).
316 s-ṭ-r
maś-ta-r [*mašṭira] ‘office, chancellery’; ‘Büro’ (Hoch 1994: 154; Helck 1962:
561) ~ Akkad šaṭāru(m) ‘write (down)’ (CDA 364) ~ Aram שטרšṭr ‘document’
(Fitzmyer & Harrington 1978: 339) ~ Sab sṭr(m,n) ‘inscription, document’
(Biella 1982: 332) || Ar ��س��طرsaṭara ‘to write’ (Hava 1982: 320);
~ S. Arabian saṭar ‘scrivere’ ~ Yemen raṣaṭ/raṣaḍ/ṣaḍar ‘scrivere’ (Rossi
1939: 308).
188 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
317 s-ʿ-r
Dem šʿr ‘Preis’ (DG 491) ~ Copt ϣⲁⲁⲣ ‘price’ (Crum 1939: 582b) || Ar ��س�عرsiʿr, pl
أ
� ��س�ع�ا رʾasʿār ‘price’ (Hava 1982: 321);
~ Damascus sǝʿǝr, pl ʾasʿār ‘price’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 179) ~ Levantine
Ar saʿʿar ‘taxer (une marchandise)’ (Harfouche 1928: 444) ~ Palest siʿr, pl asʿār
‘Preis’ (Bauer 1957: 234) ~ Egypt saʿʿar ‘to fix a price’ (Spiro 1895: 279).
318 s-f-d
spd (Pyr) ‘sharp, acute, sharply defined’; ‘spitz sein, spitz (von Waffen: Speer,
Messer)’ (Faulkner 1962:ّ ف223; DLE II 34; � ف ف
Wb IV 108) ~ Heb ַׁשּפּודšappūd ‘Spieß’
� �
(Levy IV 593) || Ar �س��ودsaffūd, pl �س���ا ي���دsafāfīd wooden or iron spit’ (Hava
1982: 323);
~ N. Yemen sfūd ‘Achse’ (Behnstedt 1996: 560) ~ Palest saffūd ‘tisonnier de
forgeron’ (Denizeau 1960: 247) ~ Kǝndērīb saffūd, pl sǝfēfīd ‘eiserner Spieß’
(O. Jastrow 2005: 67) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨saffūd⟩ ‘skewer’ (Corriente 1997: 253)
~ Djidjelli sǝffūd ‘broche’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 276) ~ Malta ⟨seffud, pl sfiefed⟩
‘spiedo, schidone’ (Vassalli 1796: 601).
This Afroasiatic term has several Indo-European cognates; cf. Hittite išpātar ‘spit, skewer,
dagger’ (Kloekhorst 2008: 411) and Gk σποδίζω ‘to roast or bake in ashes’ (GEL 1629)
~ Proto-Germanic spituz > Gothic spiuts > Spieß, Old English spittan, Fr epieu, It spiedo,
and more.
319 s-f-r¹
śpr/spr (Pyr) ‘arrive at (r); to reach someone, arrive, approach’; ‘kommen zu,
gelangen nach, erreichen; zu einem Lande gelangen, dort ankommen’ (Ember
1930: 49; Faulkner 1962: 223; Wb IV 102; DLE II 265): hrw n spr ‘am Tag des
ف
Ankommens’ (Schipper 2005: 43) ~ Akkad šapāru ‘send, dispatch’ (Parpola
2007: 111) || Ar ��س��رsafara ‘set out on a journey’ (Hava 1982: 323);
~ Oman ysāfor ‘er reist’ (Reinhardt 1894: 7) ~ Aleppo sāfar ‘partir pour un
voyage’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 344) ~ Palest sāfar ‘reisen’ (Bauer 1957: 243)
~ Egypt sāfir ‘go on a journey, depart, travel’ (Spiro 1895: 280) ~ Malta ⟨siefer,
isiefer⟩ ‘viaggiare, partire’ (Vassalli 1796: 610).
317. s- ʿ -r – 322. s-k-r 189
320 s-f-r²
śfj (19th Dyn.) ‘ram’; ‘Name des widderköpfigen Gottes von Hierakleopolis’
(Wb IV 457; Ember 1930: 17) ~ Akkad sappāru/šapparu ‘a bovid’ (CAD XV 166)
ف ة
~ Aram ְצ ִפ ָיראṣǝpīrā ‘Bock, Ziegenbock’ (Levy IV 214) ~ Heb ָצ ִפירṣāpīr ‘a he-
goat’ (2 Chronicles 29: 21; BDB 862) || Ar � ��س��رsufrah ‘the thing … upon which
one eats: … a round piece of skin, etc.’ (Lane 1371b);
~ Daθīna ⟨sufra, pl safar⟩ ‘morceau de peau de mouton ou de chèvre’ (GD
1944) ~ Yemen sifrah ‘Schafsfell’ (Behnstedt 560); sifar/sfār ‘fleece’; ṣufra, pl
ṣafar ‘dining table’ (Piamenta 1990: 223, 224) ~ Sinai sufra ‘leather bag for car-
rying food’ (Stewart 1990: 261) ~ Iraq sufra, pl sufar ‘a woven mat placed on the
floor to place food on at meal time’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 219) ~ Al-Balqāʾ
sufra ‘leather tray’ (Palva 1992: 171) ~ Negev saffar, isaffir ‘shear (goat’s hair)’
(own obs.) ~ Palest ṣufra, pl ṣufar ‘Tisch’ (Bauer 1957: 301) ~ Egypt sufra, pl
sufar ‘dining-table’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 46) ~ Tunis ṣufra ‘Esstafel’
(Stumme 1896: 172, 78).
The Arabic dialect forms here replicate the semantic lexification pattern of Egyptian
ḥtp ‘table, natte’ (Lambert 1925: 124) and Heb ֶש ַלחšelaḥ ‘hide, fresh skin’ (M. Jastrow
1886: 1580) > ֻש ְל ָחןšulḥān ‘table’ (< ‘skin or leather mat spread on the ground’; BDB 1020).
321 s-f-k
sfṯ (Pyr) [< *sfč < *sfk] ‘oil’; ‘Name eines der sieben Öle’ (Faulkner 1962: 225; Wb
ف
IV 118) ~ Akkad šapāku ‘to pour’ (M. Cohen 2011: 161) ~ Heb ָׁש ַפְךšāpak ‘to pour,
pour out’ (BDB 1049) || Ar ��س���كsafaka ‘to pour’ (Hava 1982: 324);
~ Al-Andalus ⟨safak⟩ ‘to shed blood’ (Corriente 1997: 253) ~ Yemen skab
‘versare’ (Rossi 1939: 245) ~ Damascus sabak ‘to cast’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964:
35) ~ Egypt sabak ‘to cast metals’ (Spiro 1895: 268) ~ Palest sabak ‘gießen (von
Regen)’; sabak/sakab ‘Metall gießen’ (Bauer 1957: 138).
322 s-k-r
śgr (LE) ‘Kastell’ (Wb IV 324) verschließbarer Kasten (?)’; šgr [s̀i-ka-r] ‘Kastell;
Tor mit Verschluss’ (Wb IV 324; Helck 1962: 576) || Akkad sekēru/sakāru ‘shut
� ��س كsikr,
off, block up’ (CDA 320, 322) ~ Heb ‘ ָסגַ רto shut, close’ (BDB 688) || Ar �ر
pl �ور ��س كsukūr ‘dam’ (Hava 1982: 328);
~ Aleppo sakkar ‘fermer une porte’; sǝkkāra, pl skēkīr ‘serrure de bois’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 349) ~ Kǝndērīb sakkar ‘schließen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 67)
190 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
~ Palest sakkar ‘schließen mit Schlüssel’ (Bauer 1957: 260) ~ Malta ⟨sokra⟩
‘padlock’ (Aquilina 1990: 1340).
323 s-k-k
śkꜣ (Pyr) ‘pflügen, mit Rindern pflügen; Pflugstier; Art Acker; den Acker bestel-
len; die Ernte; der Pflugstier’; skꜣ.t ‘plough, ploughland; cultivate’ (Wb IV
315–316; Faulkner 1962: 251; DLE II 87; Ember 1912: 89) ~ Dem skꜣ ‘pflügen’ (DG
ّة
467) ~ Copt (Sa‘idic) ⲥⲕⲁⲓ ‘plough’; ⲛⲥⲕⲁⲓ ‘to plough with’ (Crum 1939: 328b)
~ Akkad šakāku ‘to harrow’ (CAD XVII/2 433) || Ar ��� � ��س كsikak
��س �كsikkah, pl ��ك
‘ploughshare’ (Hava 1982: 327);
~ Marazig sakk, isekk ‘labourer une terre vierge’ (Boris 1958: 281) ~ S.E.
Anatolia skēk ‘Pflugschar; einmaliges durchpflügen’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982:
204) ~ Aleppo sǝkke, pl sə́kak ‘soc en fer de la charrue; etc.’ (Barthélemy
1935–69: 349) ~ Ṣayda sikka ‘charrue (par synecdoche)’ (Landberg 1883: 384)
~ Bišmizzīn sikki, pl sikak ‘Pflugschar’ (Jiha 1964: 154) ~ Egypt sikka ‘Pflugstrecke
(einmal das Feld hinauf und einmal hinunter)’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994:
228) ~ Morocco sǝkkǝk, isǝkkǝk ‘munir d’un soc (une charrue)’ (Prémare VI 141)
~ Djidjelli sekka ‘soc’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 252) ~ Cherchell sekka ‘soc de charrue’
(Grand’Henry 1972: 77).
324 s-k-n
snṯ (MK) [< *snč < *sčn < skn] ‘Fundament, Grundriß’; sntt ‘foundation, plan’
(Wb IV 178; Faulkner 1962: 334) ~ Akkad šakānu ‘to set up’ (M. Cohen 2011: 186)
~ Heb ִמ ְׁש ָּכןmiškān ‘dwelling-place’ (BDB 1015) || Ar ��� ن
��س كsakan ‘abode, dwell-
ing’ (Hava 1982: 329);
~ Yemen sukn ‘living, dwelling’ (Piamenta 1990: 277) ~ Aleppo sakan ‘habiter
(une maison)’; maskan, pl msēken ‘chambre, pièce d’un logement’ (Barthélemy
1935–69: 350) ~ Palest sakan ‘wohnen’; maskan, pl masākin ‘Wohnhaus’ (Bauer
1957: 367) ~ Egypt maskan, pl masākin ‘residence’ (Spiro 1895: 284) ~ Morocco
skǝn ‘s’établir à demeure’ (Prémare VI 143).
325 s-l-s-l
šꜣšꜣ.t (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘necklace’; ‘Halskette’ (Faulkner 1962: 261, 262; Wb IV
413) || Akkad šeršerru ‘chain’; šeršerratu ‘chain, fetters, shackles’ (CAD XVII/2:
323. s-k-k – 327. s-l-q 191
ة
320, 321); šeršerrutu ‘chain’ (Parpola 2007: 160) ~ Ge sansala ‘chain’ (Leslau
1987: 508) ~ Ḥar senselét ‘chain’ (Johnstone 1977: 157) || Ar �� ��س��ل��س�لsilsilah, pl
��س�لا ��س�لsalāsil ‘chaîne’ (Belot 1890: 171);
~ Najd šelāšil ‘ein kettenförmiges Anhängsel an der Lanze’ (Hess 1938: 104)
~ Yemen sals, pl sulūs ‘catena’ (Rossi 1939: 198) ~ Oman sinsle ‘Kette’ (Reinhardt
1894: 10) ~ Rwala šenāšel ‘chain’ (Musil 1928: 167) ~ Iraq silsila, pl salāsil ‘chain’
(Woodhead & Beene 1967: 222) ~ Damascus sə́nǝsle/sə́lǝsle ‘chain’; sǝlsǝlet ḍahǝr
‘spine’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 38, 221) ~ Palest silsile, pl salāsil ‘Kette’: silsilet
eḍ-ḍahr ‘Wirbelsäule’ (Bauer 1957: 197, 365) ~ Egypt sulsula ‘Kette’ (Behnstedt
& Woidich 1994: 376; 1999: 396) ~ Tunis šǝlšūl ‘colonne vertébrale’ (D. Cohen
1975: 170) ~ Marazig silǝsla ‘Kette’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2005: 87) ~ Djidjelli
sǝnsla ‘chaîne’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 80) ~ Morocco snsla/slsul ‘chain, spinal col-
umn’ (Heath 2002: 148) ~ Malta ⟨sinsla, pl sniesel⟩ ‘spina del dorso’ (Vassalli
1796: 614).
Cf. Ghomara (Berber) asensla ‘spine’ (Mourigh 2016: 421).
326 s-l-f
sf (Pyr) ‘yesterday’; ‘gestern’ (Faulkner 1962: 234; Calice 1936: 196); snf ‘last year’;
‘Vorjahr, vergangenes Jahr; kommendes Jahr’ (Faulkner 1962: 231; Hannig 1995:
ف ف
719) ~ Dem snf ‘gestern’ (DG 429) ~ Copt ⲥⲗϥ ‘yesterday’; ⲥⲛⲟⲩϥ ‘the previous
year’ (Crum 1939: 378b, 348b) || Ar ��� ��س�ا �لsālif, pl � ��س��لsalaf ‘preceding, past
time’ (Hava 1982: 332); salafa ‘to have already happened’ (Ambros 2004: 137);
~ Najd salaf ‘to precede, antecede’ (Sowayan 1992: 275); és-selef ‘Vorhut’
(Hess 1938: 60) ~ Khawetna sālfe ‘Geschichte’ (Talay 1999: 145) ~ Rwala salaf
‘a troop of warriors riding at the head of a migrating tribe’ (Musil 1928: 255)
~ Damascus qabl ǝb-salaf ‘in advance’; sǝlfe ‘an advance’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964:
4) ~ Egypt sālif ‘previous, prior’; aslāf ‘ancestors’ (Spiro 1895: 286) ~ Al-Balqāʾ
silāf ‘vanguard’ (Palva 1992: 171) ~ Lebanon sālfe, pl sawālif ‘conte, histoire’
(Frayha 1973: 85) ~ Morocco sālāf, pl slāf ‘générations antérieures, ascendants’
(Prémare VI 161) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨yaslaf salaf⟩ ‘to be over or bygone’ (Corriente
1997: 258).
327 s-l-q
Wb IV 204) || Ar � ��س��ل قsalaqa ‘to pierce with a spear’ (Hava 1982: 332).
śrq (Pyr) ‘das Skorpion’; (Gk) ‘die Feinde schlachten, sie töten’ (Calice 1936: 80;
192 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
328 s-l-k
329 s-l-m¹
śnb (Pyr) ‘healthy, be healthy, well; heal’; ‘die Gesundheit, das Wohlergehen,
gesund machen, ein Krankheit heilen’ (Faulkner 1962: 231; DLE II 50; Wb IV
159) ~ Akkad šalāmu ‘health’ (M. Cohen 2011: 100);
~ Aleppo salām ‘salut, état d’une personne saine et sauve, sécurité’ (Bar
thélemy 1935–69: 354) ~ Palest salām ‘Friede’ (Bauer 1957: 118) ~ Egypt silim,
yislam ‘to be safe’ (Spiro 1895: 287) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨salīm⟩ ‘safe’ (Corriente 1997:
260).
330 s-l-m²
snbb (Pyr) ‘exchange greetings’; ‘sich begrüßen mit jemandem (eigentlich nach
der Gesundheit fragen), einander treffen, sich unterhalten’ (Faulkner 1962:
231; Wb IV 161; Hannig 1999: 718); śrm ‘(als Segenswunsch um Frieden bitten);
ّ
jemandem mit dem Friedensgruß nahen; die Waffen niederlegen (als Zeichen
des Friedens)’ (Wb IV 588) ~ Heb ָׁשלֹוםšālōm ‘peace’ (BDB 1022) || Ar ��س��ل
sallama ‘to salute’ (Hava 1982: 333); م
~ Kǝndērīb sallam ‘den (islamischen) Gruß sprechen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 68)
~ Palest salāmāt ‘Grüße’ (Bauer 1957: 144) ~ Egypt sallim ‘salute’ (Spiro 1895:
287) ~ Malta ⟨sellem, jsellem⟩ ‘salutare’ (Vassalli 1796: 603) ~ Al-Andalus
⟨salām⟩ ‘greeting’ (Corriente 1997: 260).
331 s-l-m³
smnw (Pyr) ‘rungs of ladder’; ‘als Teilen des Leiter’ (Faulkner 1962: 228; Wb IV
135) ~ Akkad simmiltu ‘ladder’ (Parpola 2007: 213) ~ Heb ֻס ָּלםsullām ‘ladder’
328. s-l-k – 333. s-m-d 193
ّ
(BDB 700) || Ar ��س��لsullam, pl ��س�لا لsalālim/ � ��س�لا �ي�لsalālīm ‘Leiter, Stiege, Treppe,
م م م
Steigbügel’ (Wahrmund I 921);
~ Egypt sillim ‘stairs’; sillim xašab ‘ladder’; sillima ‘step’ (Spiro 1895: 288);
sillāma, pl silalīm ‘Treppenstufe’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 215) ~ N. Yemen
sillamin ‘Treppe’ (Behnstedt 1987: 264) ~ Oman sillum ‘Treppe’ (Reinhardt
1894: 48) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨sullūm, pl salālīm⟩ ‘stair’ (Corriente 1997: 260)
~ Baghdad sellam ‘ladder’ (Blanc 1964: 78) ~ Damascus sǝllom, pl salālem ‘lad-
der’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 133) ~ Aleppo sǝllam, pl slēlem ‘échelle’ (Barthélemy
1935–69: 355) ~ Āzǝx sǝllǝm ‘Treppe (aus Holz)’ (Vocke & Waldner 1983: 207)
~ Palest sillam, pl salālim ‘Leiter’ (Bauer 1957: 192) ~ Tunis šǝllūm ‘échelle’
(D. Cohen 1975: 54) ~ Djidjelli sellūm, pl slālem ‘échelle’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 57,
364) ~ Morocco sellum, pl slalem ‘ladder’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 111).
332 s-m-ǧ
msḏi҆ (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘dislike, hate’; ‘jemanden hassen (auch im Sinne von:
unzufrieden sein), nicht wollen’; msḏḏt ‘what is hateful (of conduct)’; msḏj.t
‘Hassenwertes, Verabscheuliches’ (Faulkner 1962: 118; Wb II 154) ~ Copt ⲙⲟⲥⲧⲉ
ّ
‘hate’ (Crum 1939: 187a); ⲙⲉⲥⲧⲉ, f. ⲙⲉⲥⲧⲏ ‘hated person’ (Černý 1976: 91) ||
Ar ��سم��جsamuǧa ‘to be ugly, foul’ (Hava 1982: 335); ��سم��جsammaǧa ‘häßlich
� �
machen’ (Wahrmund II 924);
~ Rwala masmūǧ ‘despised’ (Musil 1928: 582) ~ Daθīna smug, f sumge
‘nicht zum Loswerden; eine Person die man nicht loswerden kann’ (GD 1975)
~ N. Yemen sāmiǧ ‘unfähig, nutzlos’ (Behnstedt 1996: 578) ~ Palest simiǧ ‘rude,
boorish, cheeky’; samāǧa ‘rudeness’ (own obs.) ~ Egypt simig, pl sumaga ‘boor-
ish, churlish, loutish’; samāga ‘boorishness, loathsomeness’; ʾasmag ‘more /
most boorish’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 428) ~ Lebanon smāje ‘vilenie’ (Denizeau
1960: 255) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨jasmuǧ⟩ ‘it is unseemly’; ⟨sumūǧa⟩ ‘ugliness’
(Corriente 1997: 260).
333 s-m-d
�ذ
Copt ⲥⲁⲙⲓⲧ ‘fine flour’ (Crum 1939: 340b) ~ Akkad samīdu ‘a type of groats’
(CAD XVI 70); samādu ‘grind’ (CDA 314) || Ar ��� ��سميsamīð/ ��سمي���دsamīd ‘white flour,
fine bread, wheat’ (Lane 1424);
~ Aleppo smīd ‘semoule’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 357) ~ Khatūniyya smēd
‘Grieß’ (Talay 2003: 81) ~ Kǝndērīb sǝmd, pl smūde ‘Weizengries’ (O. Jastrow
2005: 68) ~ Palest smīd (urban), smīð (rural) ‘Gries’ (Bauer 1957: 142) ~ Malta
⟨smid⟩ ‘fior di farina’ (Vassalli 1796: 617).
194 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
334 s-m-r
śmr/smr (Pyr) ‘Freund (besonders des Königs als Titel oder Rangstufe)
Bekannter’; ‘friend (of king), a court title’: smr tpy ‘First Friend’; śmr.t (OK)
‘Freundin’; ‘companion’; smꜣ ‘unite’; smꜣy ‘companion, confederate’; smꜣyt ‘royal
ّ
consort’ (Wb IV 138, 139; Faulkner 1962: 225, 226, 229; DLE II 43) ~ Dem smꜣ
‘vereinigen’ (DG 431) || Ar ��س�ا �مرsāmir, pl ��سما رsummār ‘companion in nightly
entertainment’ (Lane 1436);
~ Yemen samar ‘den Abend verbringen, sich abends vergnügen’; ‘passare la
notte in veglia conversando’; mismar, pl masāmir ‘night party’ (Behnstedt 1996:
580; Rossi 1939: 244; Piamenta 1990: 232); istamar ‘den Abend mit Unterhaltung
verbringen’; samrah ‘abendliche Unterhaltung’; masmarin ‘Dorfplatz, wo man
sich zur abendlichen Unterhaltung trifft’ (Behnstedt 1987: 264) ~ Aleppo
tṣāmar, yǝtṣāmar ‘s’entretenir familièrement le soir ou la nuit’ (Barthélemy
1935–69: 444) ~ Ḥama ssāmar ‘id.’ (Denizeau 1960: 256) ~ Sinai sāmir ‘night-
time dances’ (C. Bailey 1991: 441) ~ Najd sāmir ‘staying up at night; taking
part in nightly conversation, entertainment’; ‘ein Gesang von zwei Chören’
(Kurpershoek 1999: 393; Hess 1938: 141) ~ Rwala summayr ‘entertainment’
(Musil 1928: 259) ~ Daθīna samr ‘réunion du soir’ (GD 1977) ~ Tangier smer
‘passer la nuit en causant, passer la nuit dans l’insomnie’ (W. Marçais 1911: 337).
Sinai armas ‘to talk late into the night’ (Stewart 1990: 258) ~ Khābūra ramas ‘spend
the night chattering’ (Brockett 1985: 112) suggest that Ar smr in this lexeme is related to
Aramaic ramšā ‘Abend’ (Levy IV 456).
335 s-m-s-m
šmšm.t ‘eine Pflanze’; ‘hemp (?)’ (Wb IV 488; Faulkner 1962: 267) ~ Akkad
šaman-šammi oily plant’ (CDA 351) ~ Mycenaean Gk (Linear B) sa-sa-ma
(Pairman Brown 1995 I 336) [< W. Semitic; cf. Ugar] || Ar ��سم��سsimsim ‘Sesam,
Koriandersamen’ (Wahrmund I 926);
م
~ Kǝndērīb šǝmāysme ‘eine Wildpflanze’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 69) ~ Lebanon
smēsme ‘bruyère’ (Denizeau 1960: 256) ~ Palest simsim ‘Sesam’ (Bauer 1957:
138) ~ Egypt simsima ‘sesame’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 430).
336 s-m-ʿ
sḏm (Pyr) ‘hear, listen’; ‘hören; etwas verhören’ (Wb IV 384) || Saf smʿ ‘hearing’
(Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 639) ~ Ar ��س��مsamiʿa ‘écouter, entendre
ع
quelque chose’ (DAF I 1139);
334. s-m-r – 339. s-m-n ¹ 195
337 s-m-k
śmkt (LE) ‘Art Balken (aus Cedernholz, von großer Länge)’; ‘beam, girder, rafter’
(Wb IV 144; DLE II 45) ~ Aram סמךsmk ‘lay upon’ (Fitzmyer & Harrington 1978:
331) || Ar ��سم�كsamk ‘roof, ceiling’ (Ambros 2004: 139);
~ Ḥama sāmūk ‘Pfahl’ (Lewin 1966: *25*) ~ Aleppo sāmūk, pl swēmīk ‘bâton
fourchu soutenant la corde sur laquelle on étend le linge’ (Barthé-lemy 1935–69:
359) ~ Lebanon samak, yesmok ‘échalasser, étayer’; masmūk ‘échalas de vigne’
(Denizeau 1960: 257) ~ Palest mismāk, pl masāmīk ‘Weinstockstutz’ (Dalman
IV 315, 9).
338 s-m-m
~ Akkad šammu ‘plant, herb, drug’ (Parpola 2007: 111) || Ar ّ ��سsamma ‘to poi-
smw (Pyr) ‘plants, herbage, vegetables’; ‘Kraut’ (Faulkner 1962: 225; Wb III 119)
م
son’ (Hava 1982: 334);
~ Aleppo samm, pl smūm ‘poison, venin’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 359) ~ Palest
samm ‘Gift’ (Bauer 1957: 138) ~ Egypt simm/summ/samm, pl simūm/sumūm
‘poison’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 432).
339 s-m-n¹
śmn (Pyr) ‘goose, Nile goose’; ‘Art Gans’ (Faulkner 1962: 228; Wb IV 136; DLE II
ن
42) ~ Dem smn ‘id.’ (DG 433) ~ Copt ⲥⲙⲟⲩⲛⲉ ‘Nile goose’ (Crum 1939: 339a) ||
Ar ��سما �ىsumānā ‘the quail, tetrao coturnix’ (Lane 1432);
~ Rwala sammūne ‘a small dark-gray bird’ (Musil 1928: 40) ~ Aleppo sǝmman
‘caille’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 259) ~ Iraq ṣummāna ‘caille’ (Weißbach 1930: 334)
~ Palest simmāne/summāne, coll. summān ‘Wachtel’ (Löhr 1905: 139, 38; Bauer
1957: 350) ~ Egypt sammāna, coll. sammān ‘quail’ (Spiro 1895: 291) ~ Djidjelli
sǝmmuina ‘(une) caille’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 280) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨summān⟩ ‘quail’
(Corriente 1997: 262) ~ Malta ⟨summiena, coll. summien⟩ ‘quaglia’ (Vassalli
1796: 614).
196 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
340 s-m-n²
smj (Med) ‘cream’; ‘fette Milch; Sahne (die sich bildet wenn Milch längere Zeit
gestanden hat)’; ‘curds’ (Ember 1930: 88; Wb IV 130; Faulkner 1962: 227; DLE II
ْ
41) ~ Akkad šamnu ‘cream’ (M. Cohen 2011: 50) ~ Heb ֶׁש ֶמןšemen ‘fat, oil’ (BDB
1032) || Ar � ��سم� نsamn ‘schmolzene Butter, Schmalz; Sahne, Rahm’ (Wahrmund
I 928);
~ Rwala samin ‘clarified butter’ (Musil 1928: 187) ~ Damascus samne ‘id.’
(Stowasser & Ani 1964: 32) ~ Palest samne ‘ausgelassene, sog. Kochbutter oder
Butterschmalz’ (Bauer 1957: 69) ~ Egypt samn ‘melted butter’ (Spiro 1895: 291).
341 s-m-w
sjm ‘cloud’; ‘Nebel’ (Faulkner 1962: 208; Wb IV 14) ~ Akkad samû ‘heaven, sky’
أ
(M. Cohen 2011: 100) ~ Heb ָׁש ַמיִ םšāmayim ‘heavens, sky’ (BDB 1029) || Saf
ة
smw ‘height’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 639) ~ Ar ��سما ءsamāʾ, pl ����� ��سمي
ʾasmiyah/� ��سا ا تsamāwāt ‘sky, cloud, rain’ (Hava 1982: 338);
مو
~ Aleppo sama, pl samāwāt ‘ciel’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 359) ~ Āzǝx sama
‘Himmel’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 209) ~ Palest sama, pl samāwāt ‘Himmel’
(Bauer 1957: 156) ~ Egypt sama ‘sky, heaven’ (Spiro 1895: 289) ~ Malta ⟨sema, pl
smewwiet⟩ ‘sky’ (Aquilina 1990: 1290).
342 s-n-ḥ
msnḥ (MK) ‘turn away’; ‘sich umwenden, drehen, abwenden (Böses)’; snḥ
‘durcheinandergeraten sein’ (Faulkner 1962: 117; Hannig 1995: 721) || Ar ��������سن
ح
sanaḥa ‘to turn away from’ (Hava 1982: 339);
~ Aleppo sanaḥ ‘abandonner, négliger’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 361) ~ Lebanon
sanaḥ ‘faire semblant de ne pas voir, feindre d’ignorer, ne pas se soucier de’
(Denizeau 1960: 258) ~ Egypt sannaḥ ‘to feign not to hear, be indifferent’ (Spiro
1895: 292).
343 s-w-ʾ
sw.t (Pyr) ‘schaden’; sw ‘schädlich, schlecht sein’; ‘be harmful, dangerous (n to)’
(Wb IV 59; Faulkner 1969: 329; Calice 1936: 79); i҆swj (Gk) ‘die Bösen’ (Wb I
ָ ‘devastation’ (BDB 996) || Ar ��س�ا ءsāʾa ‘to be bad, wicked’ (Hava
129) ~ Heb ׁשֹואה
1982: 343);
340. s-m-n ² – 345. s-w-r 197
344 s-w-ḥ
sḫ.t (Pyr) ‘country beside ‘town’; marshland, Field’; ‘das Feld, Gefilde, Flur,
Land (in Gegensatz zur Stadt)’; ʿꜣd n sḫt ‘fertile soil (?)’ (Faulkner 1962: 239, 38;
345 s-w-r
أ
śꜣ.t/sꜣ.t (MK) ‘wall’; ‘Mauer, Festungsmauer, Wand’ (Faulkner 1962: 208; Wb
IV 14; Calice 1936: 194) ~ Heb ׁשּורšūr ‘wall’ (BDB 1004) || Ar ��سورsūr, pl � ��سوا ر
ن
ʾaswār/� ��سي��راsīrān ‘Mauer, Stadtmauer, Wälle’ (Wahrmund I 941);
~ Āzǝx sōṛ ‘Stadtmauer, Wall’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 211) ~ Damascus sūr
‘mur d’enceinte d’une ville’ (Denizeau 1960: 261) ~ Mharde sūr ‘Zaun’ (Yoseph
2012: 150) ~ Lebanon šīr ‘roche’; šwār ‘rebord’ (Feghali 1938: 787) ~ Palest sūr, pl
198 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
aswār ‘Stadtmauer’ (Bauer 1957: 204) ~ Malta ⟨sur, pl swar⟩ ‘rampart’ (Aquilina
1990: 1377).
346 s-w-q
345);
~ Najd sāgah ‘Hinterteil’; besāget flān ‘hinter Jemand; vgl. bes. ḥamā sāgat
flān einen Abwesenden beschützen; Truppe, Kamelherde’ (Socin 1901 III 278)
~ Damascus sāq, pl sīqān ‘leg’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 136) ~ Palest sāq, pl sīqān
‘Bein’ (Bauer 1957: 48) ~ Ḥassāniyya ṣāg, pl ṣīgān ‘calf (of leg)’ (Mali; Heath
2004: 221) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨sāq, pl sāqayn⟩ ‘leg’ (Corriente 1997: 267) ~ Malta
⟨sieq, pl saqajn⟩ ‘piede’ (Vassalli 1796: 612).
347 s-w-y
(i) i҆św/św (OK) ‘reward (n.)’; ‘Preis, Ersatz, Entgelt’: i҆św nn ‘der Lohn dafür’;
mi҆św ‘als Lohn für (mit n oder direktem Genitiv)’ (Faulkner 1962: 30; Erman
1904: 15; Wb I 131; Calice 1936: 122) ~ (NK) šwj.tj ‘der Kaufmann’ (Wb IV 434)
~ Dem i҆sw ‘Quittung (Zahlung)’; i҆swj.(t) ‘Ersatz, Lohn, Preis’; šw ‘geeignet; nüt-
zlich, würdig; Wert’; i҆r šw ‘nützen, taugen’ (DG 44, 493); sw n ‘value of’ (Simpson
1996: 82); i҆sw ‘reward, recompense, price’ (DLE I 21, 45) ~ Copt ⲁⲥⲟⲩ ‘price,
value’; ⲥⲁⲩ ‘use, value’ (Crum 1939: 18a, 599a, 45) ~ Heb ָׁשוָ הšāwā ‘to be even,
equal, alike’ (M. Jastrow 1913: 1532) || Ar ��سو�ىsawā ‘wert sein, gelten, kosten’
(Wahrmund I 944);
~ Aleppo sə́wa/suwi, yə́swa ‘valoir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 368) ~ S.E. Anatolia
sawa ‘wert sein’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 215) ~ Palest siwi ‘kosten’ (Bauer 1957:
197) ~ Tripoli (Libya) swā ‘vale’ (Griffini 1913: 297) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨yaswà, sawà⟩
‘be worth’ (Corriente 1997: 268) ~ Ḥassāniyya swe ‘valoir’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990:
151) ~ Malta ⟨sewa, jiswa⟩ ‘be worth’; ⟨siewi⟩ ‘valuable’; ⟨siwi⟩ ‘value’ (Aquilina
ً
1990: 1300–01).
(ii) jwsw ‘wahrlich’ (Hannig 2006: 147) || Ar ��سو�ىsiwan ‘Gerechtigkeit’
(Wahrmund I 945);
~ Yemen sawāʾ-sawēʾ ‘esattamente’; sawēʾ ‘uguale’ (Rossi 1939: 207, 243)
~ Djidjelli swā-swa ‘exactement’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 588–9) ~ Mzāb m-ǝs-
swiyya ‘également, pareillement’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 10, 117) ~ Khābūra sawa
sawa ‘it’s all the same’ (Brockett 1985: 128) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨sawā⟩ ‘equal, same
346. s-w-q – 349. s-y-f 199
sēw ‘to level’ (Johnstone 1977: 166) || Ar ��س ّو�ىsawwā ‘Eins dem andern gleich
scale (“beams” or “arms” of a scale)’ (Faulkner 1962: 14; DLE I 21, 45) ~ Ḥar
348 s-y-r
sꜣ (MK) ‘to betake oneself (r to)’; ‘sich begeben’ (Faulkner 1962: 207; Hannig
1995: 654); sr [ein Verb der Bewegung] (Calice 1936: 80); swꜣw ‘passer-by’
(Borghouts 1978: 10, 15) ~ Ḥar mesér ‘journey’ (Johnstone 1977: 165) || Saf s¹rn
‘journey, travel’ (Al-Jallad 2015: 343) ~ Ar ��س�ا رsāra ‘to go, travel’ (Hava 1982: 346)
cf. 296. z-w-l;
~ Najd sēr ‘march, regular pace’; misyār ‘visit’; sār ‘to go, march’ (Kurpershoek
1994: 283; 1995: 383) ~ Oman sēra ‘Gehen’; mesīr ‘Gang’ (Reinhardt 1894: 42, 37)
~ N. Yemen sayyar ‘begleiten’ (Behnstedt 1987: 266) ~ Negev msayyir ‘walk-
ing slowly (horse)’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Aleppo sāra ‘se promener de long en
large’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 370) ~ Damascus ma bisāyer ǝl-waqǝt ‘he’s out of
step with the times’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 224) ~ Ḥama msīr ‘Fahrt’ (Littmann
1924: 46) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nisir sirt⟩ ‘to walk, to go’ (Corriente 1997: 269) ~ Ūlād
Brāhīm seyyer ‘marcher au pas’ (W. Marçais 1908: 91) ~ Malta ⟨sejjer, f sejra, pl
sejrin⟩ ‘going (pp)’ (Aquilina 1990: 1272).
349 s-y-f
sft (LE) ‘knife, sword’ (DLE II 36) ~ Dem sjf ‘Schwert, Messer’ (DG 429) ~ Copt
ف ف
ⲥⲏϥⲉ ‘sword, knife’ (Crum 1939: 379a) || Aram saypā ‘sword’ (M. Jastrow 1886:
978); cf. Gk ξίφος ‘sword, blade’ (GEL 1191) || Ar ��� ����سيsayf, pl �� ����س��يوsuyūf
‘Schwert, Säbel’ (Wahrmund I 948);
~ Najd sēf ‘gekrümtes Schwert’ (Hess 1938: 104) ~ Rwala seyf ‘sabre’ (Musil
1928: 133) ~ Yemen sayf, pl siyūf ‘spada’ (Rossi 1939: 238) ~ Oman sēfak ‘dein
Schwert’ (Reinhardt 1894: 22) ~ Damascus sēf ‘Säbel’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 160)
~ Palmyra sēf, pl syūf ‘sabre (du métier à tisser); manche (de la charrue)’
(Cantineau 1934 II 29, 54) ~ S.E. Anatolia sayf, pl syūfe ‘Schwert’ (Vocke &
200 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
Waldner 1982: 218) ~ Palest sēf, pl syūf ‘Schwert’ (Bauer 1957: 271) ~ Egypt sēf,
pl suyūf ‘sword’ (Spiro 1895: 297) ~ Mzāb sēf, pl syūf ‘sabre’ (Grand’Henry 1976:
117) ~ Morocco sif, pl syuf ‘sword’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 200) ~ Malta
⟨sejf, pl sjuf⟩ ‘spada’ (Vassalli 1796: 602).
350 š-b-b¹
ن
sbꜣ (Pyr) ‘star’; ‘Stern’ (Faulkner 1962: 219; Wb IV 82; Calice 1936: 93) ||
Ar � ا لم����ش���بو�ت��اal-mašbūbatān ‘Venus and Mars’ (Hava 1982: 349);
ب
~ Najd šabb/šabbab ‘to light, kindle’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 384).
351 š-b-b²
šbb (Med) ‘gullet’; ‘Rohre als Schilfrohr (durch das man Dampf einatmen soll)’
(Faulkner 1962: 264; Wb IV 439); cf. šnb ‘trumpet’ (Wb IV 514) ~ Dem šnb.t
‘Luftröhre, die Kehle’ (DG 515) ~ Copt ϣⲟⲩⲱⲃⲉ ‘throat’ (Crum 1939: 603a)
ة
~ Akkadian šulpu ‘reed’ ~ *slp ~ Gk σαλπίζω ‘sound the trumpet’ (GEL 1582;
Hoch 1994: 282) || Ar ��� ����ش� ب���ا بšabābah ‘flute, fife’ (Hava 1982: 349);
For the semantic link between ‘gullet’ and ‘flute’, cf. Hasköy zǝmmāṛa ‘Hals, Luftröhre’
(Talay 2002: 85) ~ Lebanon zammūr, pl zmāmīr ‘flûte en roseau’ (Denizeau 1960: 226).
~ Najd šobbūb ‘Rohrstock’ (Socin 1901 III 278) ~ Yemen šabb ‘blasen’ (Behnstedt
II 611) ~ Sinai šabbāba ‘a shepherd’s flute’ (C. Bailey 1991: 443) ~ Aleppo šabbābe
‘flûte champêtre, chalumeau, flûte de berger en roseau’ (Barthélemy 1935–69:
374) ~ Āzǝx šabūbe ‘Holzrohr; Flöte’ (Wittrich 2001: 101) ~ Palest šibbābe ‘Flöte
(rohrig)’ (Bauer 1957: 114) ~ Djidjelli šǝbbǝb ‘jouer la petite flûte’; šǝbbeyba
‘petite flûte’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 363, 280) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨šabbābah⟩ ‘reed flute’
(Corriente 1997: 271).
352 š-b-ʿ
šb.w (Pyr) ‘sich nähren, die Nahrung’; ‘food-offerings’ (Wb IV 437; Faulkner
1962: 264) ~ Akkad šebû ‘to satisfy, gratify’ (M. Cohen 2011: 183) ~ Heb ָׂש ַבעśābaʿ
‘to be sated, satisfied’ (BDB 959) ~ Sab hšbʿ ‘satisfy, sate (with water for irriga-
tion)’ (Biella 1982: 510) || Ar �� ����ش� بšabiʿa ‘to be satisfied’ (Hava 1982: 349);
ع
~ Aleppo šǝbeʿ ‘être rassasié, n’avoir plus faim’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 376)
~ Lebanon šebeʿ ‘se rassasier’ (Feghali 1938: 782) ~ Palest šibiʿ ‘satt werden’
350. š-b-b ¹ – 355. š-ǧ-r ¹ 201
(Bauer 1957: 252) ~ Egypt šibiʿ ‘be satisfied’ (Spiro 1895: 302) ~ Ḥassāniyya
šabbaʿ ‘to sate’ (Heath 2004: 224).
353 š-b-n
šbn (MK) ‘to consort with, mingle with’; ‘vermischt sein (im Sinne von zusam-
men mit …, sich gesellen zu)’ (Faulkner 1962: 264; Caminos 1954: 59; DLE II
117; Wb IV 440) ~ Dem šnb ‘verbinden sich’; šbn ‘sich vereinigen mit’ (DG 515)
~ Aram ššbyn ‘groomsman’ (Hillers & Cussini 1996: 418) || Akkad susabinnu
����ش����ا � نšabāyin ‘godfather’ (Hava
‘best man’ (Parpola 2007: 151) || Ar � ����ش� ب��ي�� نšibīn, pl �ي ب
1982: 350);
~ Palest šbīn, pl šabāyin ‘Pate’ (Bauer 1957: 227) ~ Damascus šbīn ‘id.’
(Grotzfeld 1965: 160) ~ Egypt šibīn, pl šabāyin ‘godfather’ (Spiro 1895: 303)
~ Malta ⟨xbin⟩ ‘compare’ (Vassalli 1796: 629).
354 š-t-m
ت
štm (MK) ‘be quarrelsome, (be) insolent’; ‘verleumden’ (Faulkner 1962: 273; Wb
IV 557) ~ Dem štm ‘(aus)schimpfen’ (Vittmann 1996: 443) || Ar � � � �شšatama ‘to
م
revile, vilify’ (Hava 1982: 351)
~ E. Arabia šatam ‘to insult’ (Holes 2001: 265) ~ Aleppo šatam, yaštom
‘injurier, insulter (qqn)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 378) ~ Damascus šemet b- ‘to
gloat over’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 104) ~ Qarṭmīn šatam, yǝštǝm ‘schimpfen,
beschimpfen’; štimāt ‘Klagen’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 220) ~ Kǝndērīb šattam
‘beschimpfen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 73) ~ Palest šatam ‘beleidigen’ (Bauer 1957: 261)
~ Al-Andalus ⟨šamat⟩ [< *štm] ‘insultar’ (Corriente 1989: 170) ~ Tunis šmet ‘il
s’est réjoui du mal subi par autrui’ (D. Cohen 1975: 21).
355 š-ǧ-r¹
dšr (OK) (als Ausdruck beim Schiffsbau; von der Herstellung eines Schiffes)’;
(LE) ‘ein Baum, dessen Holz zu Tischlerarbeiten verwendet wird’ (Wb V
أ �ش
490, 491; Hannig 1995: 987) ~ Akkad gišru/gušūru ‘beam, log, planks, timber’
�ش ة
(M. Cohen 2011: 17, 27) || Ar � ���ج�رšaǧarah, pl � ���ج��ا رʾašǧār ‘tree, shrub’ (Hava 1982:
352);
~ Sudan šadar/šaǧar, pl ašǧār ‘tree’; šidēra ‘small tree’ (Tamis & Persson
2013: 400) ~ Ḥassāniyya sǝdṛa/sǝdṛāye, coll. ṣdaṛ ‘arbre’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990:
202 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
24) ~ Negev saǧaṛah ‘tree’ (Henkin 2010: 260) ~ Oman šgār ‘Bäume’ (Reinhardt
1894: 7) ~ Yemen šaggar ‘Holz hacken, spalten’; tšaggar ‘gespalten werden’
(Behnstedt 1996: 660) ~ Iraq šiǧra ‘tree, bush, shrub’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967:
236) ~ S.E. Anatolia sǝǧaṛa ‘arbre’ (Grigore 2007: 98) ~ Rwala šaǧar ‘woody
plants’ (Musil 1928: 17) ~ Palest šaǧar, pl ašǧār, šaǧārāt ‘Baum’ (Bauer 1957:
42) ~ Egypt šagar/sagar ‘tree’ (Spiro 1895: 304); šižara ‘Baum’ (Behnstedt &
Woidich 1994: 228) ~ Malta ⟨siǧra, pl siǧar⟩ ‘tree, bush’ (Vassalli 1796: 611).
356 š-ǧ-r²
sqr (Pyr) ‘strike down foes’ (Faulkner 1962: 250) || Ar � �ش� �ا �ج�رšāǧara, ‘to quarrel
with s.o.’ (Hava 1982: 352);
~ Palest mušāǧarah ‘Wortstreit’ (Bauer 1957: 293) ~ Egypt itšāgir ‘to quarrel’;
mušāgra ‘quarrel, row’ (Spiro 1895: 303).
357 š-ḥ-ṭ
šdḥ (MK) [< *šṭḥ] ‘ein dem Wein verwandtes Getränk; Most’; ‘pomegranate
wine’ (Wb IV 568; Calice 1936: 209; Faulkner 1962: 274) ~ Akkad ṣaḫāṭu ‘to
358 š-d-d¹
šadd ‘marriage’ (Heath 2004: 225) ~ Damascus šadd ‘to clamp’; šadīd ‘violent’
(Stowasser & Ani 1964: 42, 256) ~ Aleppo štadd ‘devenir violent’ (Barthélemy
1935–69: 378).
359 š-d-d²
360 š-d-w
šdj (OK) ‘to read’; ‘lesen, vorlesen, rezitieren; erziehen (Kind)’ (Faulkner 1962:
270; DLE II 139; Wb IV 563; Hannig 2003: 1324; Hannig & Vomberg 1999: 413) ||
Ar � �ش� �د اšadā ‘Verse rezitieren’ (Wahrmund I 968);
~ Egypt yišdey ‘singen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 231) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨yašdu
šadā⟩ ‘to chirp or sing’ (Corriente 1997: 277).
361 š-ð-f
�ذ ف
šzp (Pyr) ‘catch (fish)’; ‘empfangen, entgegennehmen, ergreifen’ (Faulkner
1962: 271; Wb IV 530) || Ar �� � � � �شšaðafa ‘atteindre, obtenir’ (DAF I 1208);
~ N. Yemen šaððaf ‘zerbrechen, spalten’ (Behnstedt 1987: 267).
362 š-r-b
Ember 1930: 14) || Ar � � �ش� ر بšariba ‘to drink’ (Hava 1982: 358);
šꜣb (OK) ‘meal, repast’; ‘Tisch mit Speisen’; šꜣb.w (MK) ‘Mahlzeit’ (Wb IV 410;
(Boris 1958: 306) ~ Morocco šṛab ‘wine’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 223) ~ Malta
⟨xorob, jixrob⟩ ‘bere’ (Vassalli 1796: 648).
363 š-r-r¹
ّ
1962: 270; Wb IV 525) || Ar � �ش� رšarr, pl � �ش� رورšurūr ‘Übel, Schlimmes, Schlechtes,
šrr (Pyr) ‘small, lowly man’; ‘klein sein (von Personen, Dingen)’ (Faulkner
364 š-r-r²
śšr (Med) ‘etwas trocknen, dörren (Datteln, Fleisch)’; ‘to dry, dry up; to bleach’;
ّ
70, 248; Ember 1930: 93) || Ar � �ش� رšarra ‘to expose to the sun’ (Hava 1982: 358);
wšri҆ ‘dry up, be barren (of women), be despoiled’ (Wb IV 295; Faulkner 1962:
365 š-r-ṭ
šʿd (Med) ‘cut, cut off’; ‘schneiden, abschneiden; in Stücke schneiden, zer-
schneiden (auch Feinde im Kampf)’ (Faulkner 1962: 262; Wb IV 422) ~ Heb
366 š-r-ʿ¹
šꜣʿ (MK) ‘to begin’; ‘anfangen, beginnen etwas zu tun; Beginn, Anfang von’
‘to begin’ (CAD XVII/3: 358) || Ar � �ش� رšaraʿa ‘to start (an affair)’ (Hava 1982: 360);
(Ember 1930: 13; Faulkner 1962: 261; Wb IV 406; Brose 2014: 179) ~ Akkad šurrû
ع
~ Palest šaraʿ ( fil-ʿamal) ‘unternehmen’ (Bauer 1957: 322) ~ Egypt šaraʿ
‘begin, undertake’ (Spiro 1895: 310) ~ E. Arabia šaraʿ ‘to go’ (Holes 2001: 270)
~ Takrūna šraʿ ‘entreprendre, commencer’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 2019)
~ Al-Andalus ⟨yašriʿu šarʿun⟩ ‘to start’ (Corriente 1997: 280).
367 š-r-ʿ²
šꜣʿ (Gr) ‘Gewässer im Gau von Hermopolis’ (Wb IV 409) ~ Sab šrʿw ‘provide
� �شmašraʿ ‘way to water’ (Hava
water for a settlement’ (Biella 1982: 527) || Ar م�� ر
ع
1982: 361);
~ Najd šarraʿ ‘to water animals’; mašraʿ, pl mašāriʿ ‘places with abundant and
good water’; širʿ ‘watercourse’ (Kurpershoek 1994: 285; 1999: 397) ~ N. Yemen
ŝarraʿ ‘im Brunnen baden’ (Behnstedt 1987: 10) ~ Khābūra mašrūʿ ‘irriga-
tion canal’ (Brockett 1985: 132) ~ Iraq širīʿa, pl -āt ‘an approach to a water
hole’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 240) ~ Rwala šāreʿ beθ-θemāni ‘(my darling)
drank from my teeth’; mešāreʿ ‘watering the herds; places with abundant good
water’ (Musil 1928: 204, 565) ~ Daθīna ⟨šarīʿa, pl šarāyiʿ⟩ ‘flaque’ (GD 2041)
~ Aleppo šarraʿ ‘verser de haut (un liquide) pour le faire mousser’ (Barthélemy
1935–69: 387) ~ Palest mišraʿ ‘Wasserfall’ (Dalman I/2 530) ~ Egypt mašrūʿ
‘Bewässerungskanal’; arḍ mašrūʿāt ‘Felder, die durch einen Kanal ganzjährig
bewässert werden’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 235); baḥr eš-šarīʿa ‘the river
Jordan’ (Spiro 1895: 310).
368 š-r-ʿ³
šꜣʿ ‘container for corn’ (Faulkner 1962: 361) || Ar. *šarāʿ, pl *šarāʾiʿ;
~ Palest šerāʿ ‘petite outre à lait utilisée par les bergers’ (Denizeau 1960: 277;
Dalman VII 241); šrāʿ ‘Buttergestell (klein)’ (Bauer 1957: 690) ~ Negev šarāyiʿ
‘churns’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Petra iš-šrāʿ ‘ein Schlauch aus eine beim Schwanze
offenen Zickleinhaut (die Hirten nehmen ihn für Milch oder Wasser mit und
binden ihn am Halse des Leittieres an)’ (Musil 1908: 137).
206 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
369 š-r-q
ق
(Wb IV 203) ~ Sab šrq ‘rising of a star, rising sun’ (Biella 1982: 528) ~ Ar �� �ش� ر
śrqj ‘als ein Name für den Sonnengott’; śrq.t ‘als ein Gestirn am Nord-himmel’
370 š-ṭ-f
śtf (Med) ‘to clean, purify’; ‘vom sorgsamen Abgießen einer Flüssigkeit bei der
Arzneibereitung; vom Wasser, welches das Land befruchtet; das Wasser auch
vom Traubensaft)’ (DLE I 96; Wb IV 342) ~ Dem stf ‘ausgießen, reinigen’ (DG
478) ~ Copt ⲥⲱⲧϥ ‘purify, strain; cause to drip, pour’ (Crum 1939: 366b) ~ Aram
ف
šṭf (Blau 1955: 344) ~ Heb ָׁש ַטףšāṭap ‘to overflow, rinse, wash off’ (BDB 1009) ||
Ar ��� �ش����طšaṭafa ‘rinse, wash’ (Hava 1982: 365) [< Aram];
~ Aleppo šaṭaf ‘rincer’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 392) ~ Damascus šaṭṭaf ‘aus-
wischen, ausputzen’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 161) ~ Arbīl šaṭaf, yǝšṭǝf ‘(im klaren
Wasser) ausspülen’ (O. Jastrow 1990: 366) ~ Iraq šiṭaf ‘rinse in clean water’
(Woodhead & Beene 1967: 242) ~ Palest šaṭaf ‘abspülen’ (Bauer 1957: 7).
371 š-ð̣ -y
sḏ (Pyr) ‘break, break into, invade, breach wall’ (Faulkner 1962: 257); ‘zer-
brechen, in Stücke brechen’ (Wb IV 373; Calice 1936: 203) || Ar ���� �شšað̣ iya ‘to
ّ �ظ�ي
be split (wood)’; �ش�� �ظ��ىšað̣ ð̣ā ‘to dive, scatter’ (Hava 1982: 366);
~ Kǝndērīb šað̣ ð̣a ‘spalten’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 75) ~ Khābūra šð̣ ð̣ ‘to crack
(e.g., cement)’ (Brockett 1985: 133) ~ Ḥassāniyya šað̣ ye ‘fragment’ (Taine-
Cheikh 1990: 71).
369. š-r-q – 375. š-ʿ-š- ʿ 207
372 š-ʿ-r¹
šr.t (MK) ‘ein bestimmtes Getreide wohl Art Gerste (auch zur Bierbereitung)’
(Wb IV 524); šʿr ‘barley field’ (DLE II 14) ~ Sab šʿrm ‘barley’ (Biella 1982: 521) ||
Ar � �ش� �عي��رšaʿīr (Hava 1982: 367);
~ N. Yemen šaʿīrin ‘Gerste’ (Behnstedt 1987: 268) ~ Aleppo šʿīr ‘orge’ (Bar
thélemy 1935–69: 393) ~ Damascus šʿīr ‘barley’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 8) ~ Iraq
šiʿīr ‘id.’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 243) ~ Kǝndērīb šʿīr ‘Gerste’ (O. Jastrow
2005: 75).
373 š-ʿ-r²
śʿrt (LE) ‘Wolle’ (Wb IV 49) ~ Dem sʿrt ‘Wolle’: sʿrt n ʿr ‘Haar eines Esels’; qrf.t n
sʿlt ‘Beutel aus Wolle’ (DG 411) ~ Copt ⲥⲟⲣⲧ/ⲥⲁⲣⲉⲧ ‘wool of sheep, goat’ (Crum
1939: 356b);
~ Aleppo šaʿr, pl šʿūr ‘cheveux, poils, crins; soies de sanglier’; šaʿr ǝrrāṣ ‘les
cheveux’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 393) ~ Kǝndērīb šaʿǝr ‘Haar, Haare; Ziegenhaar’
(O. Jastrow 2005: 75) ~ S.E. Anatolia šaʿru ‘sein Haupthaar’ (O. Jastrow 1981:
32, 20).
374 š-ʿ-r³
sʿr (LE) ‘scrub country’; ‘Wald Gestrüpp, Dorngestrüpp, Dickicht’ (DLE II 14;
Wb IV 48; Hannig 1995: 670) ~ Heb ֵשעירśēʿīr [der “reich bewachsene”] ‘Name
des edomitischen Berglandes’ (Hommel 1901: 287, fn 1) || Saf s²ʿr ‘herbage’
(Al-Jallad 2015: 343) ~ Ar � �ش� �عرا ءšaʿrāʾ, pl � �ش� �عرšuʿr ‘covered with plants (earth)’
(Hava 1982: 367);
~ Yemen šaʿra, pl šaʿari ‘untilled lands’ (Piamenta 1990: 257, 393) ~ Al-
Andalus ⟨šaʿrā, pl šaʿārī⟩ ‘(place full of) cistus’ (Corriente 1997: 283) ~ Malta
⟨Xagħra⟩ (toponym).
375 š-ʿ-š-ʿ
ّ أ
śšd (NK) ‘flash (vb)’; ‘Gestirn oder Sternbild’ (Faulkner 1962: 249; Wb IV 300)
[< (?) *šḏ] || (?) Ar � � � �شʾašaʿʿa ‘Strahlen aussenden, strahlen (Sonne)’ (Wahr
ع
� �ش� � شšaʿšaʿa ‘to shine (stars)’ (Hava 1982: 366);
mund I 986); ���ع
ع
208 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
~ Najd šaʿʿat eš-šems ‘das Erscheinen der Sonne’ (Hess 1938: 69) ~ Sinai šaʿʿih
‘rays, illumination’ (Stewart 1990: 266) ~ Aleppo šaʿšaʿ ‘replendir, rayonner’;
šʿāʿ ‘rayons de soleil’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 394) ~ Damascus mšaʿšeʿ ‘bright’
(Stowasser & Ani 1964: 29) ~ Lebanon šaʿʿ ‘briller, luire, resplendir’ (Denizeau
1960: 281) ~ Palest šaʿšaʿ ‘leuchten (Sterne)’ (Bauer 1957: 193) ~ Egypt šaʿšaʿ
‘sparkle’ (Spiro 1895: 315) ~ Djidjelli šʿu ‘rayon de soleil’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 258)
~ Ḥassāniyya šʿāʿ ‘light seen from afar’ (Mali; Heath 2004: 240).
376 š-ʿ-ʿ
ّ
šʿ ‘cut off, slaughtering’; ‘schneiden’; šʿt ‘knife’; ‘Verwundung, Gemetzel,
Schlacht’ (Faulkner 1962: 262; Wb IV 415, 416; Calice 1936: 204) || Ar � � �شšaʿʿa
ع
‘mit verteilten Truppen von verschiedenen Seiten anfallen’; ‘to disperse (peo-
ple)’ (Wahrmund I 985; Hava 1982: 366).
377 š-ʿ-l
Dem šʿl ‘Docht’ (DG 491) || Ar � �ش� �ع�لšaʿala ‘light a fire’ (Hava 1982: 368);
~ Aleppo šaʿal ‘allumer (un feu)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 394) ~ Kǝndērīb
šaʿal ‘anzünden, anschüren, schüren’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 76) ~ Palest šaʿʿal
‘Feuer machen’ (Bauer 1957: 111) ~ Egypt šaʿal/šaʿlil ‘kindle’ (Spiro 1895: 315)
~ Algiers šʿal ‘illuminer, briller’ (Tapiéro 1971: 159, 152) ~ Morocco šʿal ‘s’allumer,
s’enflammer’ (Prémare VII 116) ~ Malta ⟨xegħel, jixgħal⟩ ‘accendere’ (Vassalli
1796: 633).
378 š-ʿ-n-n
šn (Amarna) ‘tree’ (Faulkner 1962: 267; WAS IV 498, 499; Goldwasser 2002:
ة
(Crum 1939: 568b) || Ar ��� � �ش� �ع ن����ي نšaʿnīnah, pl � � �ش� �ع�ا ن�ي�� نšaʿānīn ‘Palms, boughs of
51); šn ‘tree’ (DLE II 126) ~ Dem šn/šnn ‘Baum’ (DG 513, 516) ~ Copt ϣⲏⲛ ‘tree’
379 š-ġ-l
ة
(Calice 1936: 207; Wb IV 507); šnʿt ‘storehouse’ (Faulkner 1962: 269) || Ar ��� �ش� �غ� �ل
šnʿ.w (Pyr) ‘Ort wo gearbeitet wird’; (NK) ‘Magazin, Speicher; Arbeitsplatz’
380 š-f-r
ف أ ف
spꜣ (LE) ‘blade’ (DLE II 32) ~ Ar � �ش� ��رšufr/šafr, pl � � �ش� ���ا رʾašfār ‘breite Klinge,
ف ة ف
Messer’; � � �ش� ��رšafrah, pl � �ش� ���ا رšifār ‘edge of a sword’ (Wahrmund I 992);
~ Ḥaḍramawt ⟨šafrah⟩ ‘couteau’ (Landberg 1901: 623) ~ Aleppo šafra, pl
-āt ‘tranchant (d’une lame), fil (d’une epée): bord trenchant, arête vive (d’une
pierre); lame’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 396) ~ Damascus šafra, pl -āt ‘blade’
(Stowasser & Ani 1964: 23) ~ Palest šafra, pl -āt ‘Klinge, Messerklinge’ (Bauer
1957: 175, 238) ~ Najd šafra, pl šfār ‘ein Messer in der Form eines Küchenmessers’
(Hess 1938: 121) ~ Marazig šafaṛ, pl ašfāṛ ‘tranchant, fil de lame’ (Boris 1958: 314)
~ Al-Andalus ⟨šifrah, pl šifar⟩ ‘knife’ (Corriente 1997: 285) ~ Malta ⟨xafra, pl
xfafar⟩ ‘lama o ferro del coltello’ (Vassalli 1796: 624).
381 š-f-f
śp.t (OK) ‘lip (of mouth, vagina, wound), bank of waterway, shore, beach, edge
of horizon’; ‘Lippe; Ufer (Fluß, Meer)’ (Faulkner 1962: 222; DLE II 31; Wb IV 99;
Sethe 1962: 179; Hannig 2003: 1101): spty.st wnw ‘her lips are open’ (Kitchen 1999:
384) ~ Dem sp ‘Lippe’; spt ‘Lippen’ (DG 426) ~ Copt ⲥⲡⲟⲧⲟⲩ (Sa‘idic)/ⲥⲫⲟⲧⲟⲩ
ف � �ش� ف�� ا تšafawāt ‘lip’ (Hava 1982: 370);
(Bohairic) ‘lips, shore’ (Crum 1939: 353a) ~ Akkad šaptu ‘lip’ (M. Cohen 2011: 24)
|| Ar � �ش� ���هšifah, pl � و
~ Damascus šǝffe, pl šǝfaf ‘lip, brim’ (Stowasser 1964: 139, 29) ~ Palmyra šiffe,
dual šifftēn, pl šfēf (Cantineau 1934 II 1) ~ Palest šiffe, pl šfāf ‘Lippe’ (Bauer 1957:
195) ~ Egypt šiffa, pl šifaf ‘lip, border, edge’ (Spiro 1895: 317); šiffa ‘Frauenlippe’
(Behnstedt & Woidich 1985: 87) ~ Tripoli (Libya) šeffa ‘labbro inferiore’ (Griffini
1913: 156) ~ Tunis šǝffa ‘lèvre’ (D. Cohen 1975: 148) ~ Malta ⟨xoffa, pl xuftejn⟩
‘lip’ (Aquilina 1990: 1589).
210 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
382 š-q-r
ة
Faulkner 1962: 316) [< *gšr < *qšr < šqr] || Ar � � �ش� ق��رšuqrah ‘reddish colour’ (Hava
dšr (Pyr) ‘rot, rot sein; rot werden; Röte, Rötung’; dšrw ‘blood’ (Wb V 488, 490;
1982: 372);
~ Sinai ašgar, f šagra, pl šugr ‘tawny (camel), sorrel (horse)’ (C. Bailey 1991: 443)
~ Damascus ašqar, f šaqra, pl šǝqǝr ‘blond’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 24)
~ Aleppo ašqar, f šaqra, pl šuqr ‘blond (: cheveux; personne), alezan (: cheval)’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 398) ~ Palest ašqar, f šaqra, pl šuqr ‘blond’ (Bauer 1957:
63) ~ Egypt ašqar, f šaqra, pl šuqr ‘fair-haired’ (Spiro 1895: 318).
383 š-q-q¹
ّة
śg (LE) ‘marschieren’ (Wb IV 320) || Ar ���� � �ش� قšiqqah/šuqqah, pl � � �ش� ق�� قšiqaq/šuqaq
‘lange, schwierige Reise’ (Wahrmund I 997);
~ Aleppo šaqq ʿala wāḥid ‘aller voir (qqn) pour s’informer de sa santé’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 399) ~ Damascus šaqq ʿala ‘besuchen’ (Grotzfeld 1965:
160) ~ Egypt šaqq ‘to visit’; išugg ʿala wāħid ‘jemanden besuchen’ (Spiro 1895:
317; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 244) ~ Palest šaqq ‘Besuch machen’ (Bauer
1957: 56) ~ Marazig šugg ‘geh weg! (bei Vertreiben eines Ziegenbocks)’ (Ritt-
Benmimoun 2005: 33) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨šaqqa⟩ ‘to go through or traverse’
(Corriente 1997: 286).
384 š-q-q²
śg ‘wollene Decke’ (Wb IV 320); sa=ga (LE) ‘inferior type of cloth, garment or
ّة
blanket, probably sackcloth’ (Hoch 1994: 269) ~ Soq śeqah ‘manteau’ ~ Mah
śeqqāt ‘tablier long’ (Leslau 1938: 432) || Ar ���� � �ش� قšiqqah, pl � � �ش� ق�� قšiqaq ‘piece of
cloth’ (Hava 1982: 371);
~ Negev šuggah ‘segment (of cloth)’ (Blanc 1970: 141) ~ Rwala šuqqa, pl šqaq
‘pieces of coarse black cloth from which the Bedouin tent is made’ (Musil 1928:
61) ~ ʿAnazeh šuqqa, pl šiqāq ‘morceau d’étoffe de tente’ (Landberg 1940: 36)
~ Aleppo šǝqqet ḥarīr ‘écheveau de soie’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 399) ~ Palest
šuqqa, pl šuqaq ‘pièce d’étoffe; bande de tissue formant le toit de la tente, on en
coud plusiers côte à côte’ (Denizeau 1960: 284) ~ Sinai šuggah ‘fishing net’ (de
Jong 2011: 29) ~ Egypt šugga ‘schwarzes Umhangtuch der Frauen; langer Schal
als Kopfbund benutzt’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 242) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨šaqqa,
pl šiqaq⟩ ‘piece of linen’ (Corriente 1997: 286) ~ Malta ⟨xoqqa⟩ ‘panno, tela,
pannina, drappo’ (Vassalli 1796: 647).
382. š-q-r – 387. š-m-x 211
385 š-k-w
sk (MK) ‘Beschwerde’ (Wb IV 313) ~ ski҆ ‘accusation’ (Faulkner 1962: 251) || Saf
s²tky ‘to petition, complain’ (Al-Jallad 2015: 344) ~ Ar ��ا � � �ش� كšakā ‘to complain’
(Hava 1982: 374);
~ Yemen šukāʾ ‘Klage’ (Goitein 1934: 3) ~ Oman šekwe/škiyye ‘Klage’ (Rein
hardt 1894: 42, 46) ~ S.E. Anatolia štaka ‘se plaindre’ (Grigore 2007: 144)
~ Damascus šakwa, pl šakāwi ‘complaint, lament’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 48, 132)
~ Aleppo šakwe/škēwe ‘plainte’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 403) ~ Hasankeyf štaka
‘sich beschweren’ (Fink 2017: 300) ~ Palest yiški ‘beklagt sich’ (Kampffmeyer
1936: 37); šikāwe/šikāye ‘Klage’ (Bauer 1957: 173) ~ Egypt šaka ‘complain, accuse’
(Spiro 1895: 320) ~ Tunis ška ‘il s’est plaint’ (D. Cohen 1975: 105) ~ Djidjelli škāya
‘plainte, litige’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 323) ~ Ḥassāniyya ške ‘se plaindre’ (Taine-
Cheikh 1990: 20).
386 š-l-ḥ
śrḫ (LE) ‘to strip off’ (Hoch 1994: 264) || Ar �� � �ش� ��لšalaḥa ‘undress’ (Hava
ح
1982: 375);
~ E. Arabia šilaḥ ‘strip off, take off clothes’ (Holes 2001: 277) ~ Aleppo
šǝlǝḥ/šalaḥ ‘retirer, ôter, enlever (ses vêtements, ses chaussures, sa coiffure,
sa chemise)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 404) ~ Najd šallaḥ ‘to roll up one’s sleeves’
(Kurpershoek 1999: 399) ~ Palest šalaḥ θiyābo ‘sich entkleiden’ (Bauer 1957:
34) ~ Tangier šellaḥ ‘enlever par éclats ou par lambeaux’; šelḥa ‘un lambeau
d’écorce’ (Marçais 1911: 348).
387 š-m-x
��ش
šmʿw (Pyr) ‘Upper Egypt’; ‘Oberägypten’ (Faulkner 1962: 266) || Ar � م�� خšamaxa
�
und fernes Ziel’; šummax, pl von ( � �ش� �ا مخWahrmund I 1006);
‘hoch sein, hoch in die Luft ragen (Berg, Bau), stolz werden’; šamax ‘hoches
�
~ Najd šāmix ‘high, lofty’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 400) ~ Negev zalama šāmix
‘a proud man’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ ʿAnazeh šāmix ‘fier’ (Landberg 1940: 38)
~ Aleppo šamax ʾǝnfo ‘se montrer fier, dédaigneux’; tšāmax ‘faire le fier’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 407) ~ Lebanon šamax ‘pousser, grandir (plante)’; šǝmx,
pl šmūxa ‘arbre haut’ (Denizeau 1960: 290) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨šāmix, pl šawāmix⟩
‘high, tall, towering’ (Corriente 1997: 290).
212 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
388 š-m-r
Dem šmr ‘Fenchel, Foeniculum capillaceum Gil’ (DG 511; Keimer 1924 I 150)
��ش ة
~ Copt ϣⲁⲙⲁⲣ ‘fennel’ (Crum 1939: 342b) ~ Syr šūmārā ‘Fenchel’ (Brockelmann
1928: 787) || Ar. � � �مرšamrah ‘Fenchel’ (Wahrmund I 1007);
~ Yemen šamār/šemmār ‘finocchio, Anethum foeniculum’ (Rossi 1939:
164; Behnstedt 1998: 120) ~ Damascus šumar ‘fenouil’ (Denizeau 1960: 290)
~ Lebanon šmarmar ‘id.’ (Feghali 1938: 12) ~ Palest šōmar ‘Fenchel’ (Bauer 1957:
110) ~ Egypt šamar/šammar ‘fennel, Foeniculum capillaeum, Gillb.’ (Badawi &
Hinds 1986: 477).
389 š-m-s
šmś (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘follow, accompany, serve’; ‘folgen, begleiten, dienen;
herbeibringen’; šmś.w ‘worship’; ‘Gefolge, Gefolgsmann, Diener’; šmś.w-Ḥr ‘die
Horusdiener’; šmś-t ‘Dienerin’; šmsw ‘messenger, henchman’; smsw ‘senior, fol-
lower, retainer, servant’ (Faulkner 1962: 267; Wb IV 485–487; DLE II 44, 124,
125) ~ Dem šms Wsir ‘dem Osiris folgen’ (DG 511) ~ Copt ϣⲙϣⲉ ‘serve, worship’
ّ
(Crum 1939: 567a) ~ Heb ַׁש ָּמׁשšammāš ‘attendant’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 1602) ||
Ar �ش��ما ��سšammās ‘deacon’ (Hava 1982: 377);
Cf. Neo-Aramaic: Sarspido/Arbuš/Tall Tammǝṛ šamaša ‘Diakon’ (Talay 2008: 353, 387)
~ Mand šmš ‘serve, minister to’; šam(a)ša ‘servant’ (Drower & Macuch 1963: 470).
~ Aleppo šammās ‘clerc ou laïque au service d’une église d’un rite oriental et
qui sert la messe’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 407) ~ Iraq šammāš ‘deacon of a syna-
gogue’ (Avishur 2010: 555), šǝmmās ‘verger’ (Abu-Haidar 1991: 197) ~ Lebanon
šemmās (pl šmāmse) ‘diacre’ (M. & J. Feghali 1977: 107, fn 1) ~ Palest šammās,
f -e, pl šamāmise ‘Diakon’ (Bauer 1957: 75) ~ Tunis šǝmmāš ‘bedeau de la syna-
gogue’ (D. Cohen 1975: 163).
390 š-n-ṭ
šnḏ (MK) ‘acacia’; ‘Holz der Akazie’; šnḏ.t ‘thorny acacia’ (Faulkner 1962: 270;
Wb IV 521; Barns 1956: 18; Hannig 1995: 831; Albright 1918: 250; Goldwasser 2002:
48) ~ Dem šnt.t ‘die Dornakazie’ (DG 516) ~ Copt ϣⲟⲛⲧⲉ ‘Acacia Nilotica, thorn
tree’ (Crum 1939: 573a) ~ Akkad samṭu/šamṭu (foreign name of the acacia)
ْ
(CAD XV 125; XVII/1 339) ~ Heb ִׁש ָּטהšiṭṭāh [< *šinṭāh] ‘acacia tree and wood’
(BDB 1008) || Ar ����سن����طsanṭ ‘mimosa Nilotica also called acacia Nilotica’ (Lane
1445);
388. š-m-r – 393. š-h-b 213
391 š-n-ʿ
šnʿ (OK) ‘ward off, repulse, repel; constable’; ‘abweisen, hindernd in den Weg
tretend, wehren, abwehren’; šnʿw ‘policing’; šnʿt ‘detention’; ‘Feind’; šnʿ(y)
‘Patrouille, Streife’ (Faulkner 1962: 269; Hannig 1995: 828; 2003: 1310) ~ Dem šnʿ
‘abweisen, abhalten von …’ (DG 515) ~ Copt ϣⲱⲱⲛⲉ ‘to exclude’ (Crum 1939:
571a) ~ Sab šnʿ ‘enemy’ (Jamme 1962: 448) || Ar �� ����ش�نšanaʿa ‘to disgrace s.o.; to
ع
charge with foul deeds’; šanuʿa ‘to be ugly’ (Hava 1982: 379);
~ Iraq šinaʿ ‘to expose to disgrace’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 250)
~ Damascus šanīʿ ‘ugly’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 251) ~ Aleppo šannaʿ ‘divulguer
les turpitudes de qqn, diffamer qqn’; šanāʿa ‘aspect repoussant; vilenie, turpi-
tude’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 410) ~ Palest šanīʿ ‘hässlich’; šanāʿa ‘Hässlichkeit’
(Bauer 1957: 150) ~ Tripoli (Lebanon) šannaʿ ‘enlaidir’ (El-Hajjé 1954: 76)
~ Tunis šǝnʿa ‘acte adultère’ (D. Cohen 1975: 147) ~ Marazig šneʿ ‘avoir des
rapports sexuels illicites (homme ou femme)’ (Boris 1958: 325) ~ Al-Andalus
⟨nišannaʿ⟩ ‘to charge with ugly deeds’ (Corriente 1997: 292) ~ Algeria šanīʿ
‘monstrueux’ (Ben Sedira 1910: 391) ~ Ḥassāniyya tǝšnāʿ ‘aggravation’ (Taine-
Cheikh 1990: 21) ~ Malta ⟨xina’⟩ ‘accusare, querelare’ (Vassalli 1796: 644).
392 š-n-k
šnṯ (OK) [< *šnč < *šnk] (Pyr) ‘streiten, kämpfen’ (Wb IV 519) || Ar ����ش�ن���كšanaka
‘to abstain’; ‘ne pas vouloir, refuser’; šunnuk ‘coups reitérés d’armes à feu’ (Hava
1982: 379; Dozy I 792).
393 š-h-b
šhb (Gr) ‘heißer Wind (als Name des Süd- und Ostwindes)’ (Wb
ش أIV 529) ~ Copt
ϣⲱϩⲃ ‘be withered, scorched’ (Crum 1939: 612b) || Ar � � �����ه� بʾašhub ‘Flamme’
(Wahrmund I 1014);
~ Najd mišhāb, pl mišāhīb ‘a kindling’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 401) ~ Palest
mušhāb ‘morceau de bois enflammé, tison’ (Denizeau 1960: 294) ~ Ḥassāniyya
šehbān ‘tison’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 142) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨sanatan šahbā⟩ ‘year of
drought’ (Corriente 1997: 293).
214 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
394 š-w-b
395 š-w-r
396 š-w-ṭ¹
šwty (NK) ‘trader’ (Faulkner 1962: 263); šwj.tj (NK) ‘der Kaufmann’ (Wb IV
484); śwtwt ‘sich ergehen, Spaziergang’ (Brockelmann 1932: 113) ~ Copt ϣⲱⲧ
‘trader, merchant’ (Crum 1939: 590a) ~ Heb �ָשׁ טšāṭ ‘to roam’ (M. Jastrow 1886:
1531) ~ Sab šyṭ ‘handeln’ (Stein 2010: 158) ~ Ar � �ش� ّوطšawwaṭa ‘lange Reise machen’
أ
(Wahrmund I 1020); � �ش� وطšawṭ, pl � � �ش� وا طʾašwāṭ ‘cursus’ (Freytag 1837: 331);
394. š-w-b – 400. š-w-y 215
397 š-w-ṭ²
šdj (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘Acker’; šdyt ‘plot of land’; šdy ‘ditch’ (Wb IV 567; Faulkner
1962: 274) ~ Copt ϣⲱⲧⲉ ‘well, cistern, pit’ (Crum 1939: 595a);
~ Najd šawṭ ‘Talboden’ (Socin 1901 III 282) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨šawṭ, pl ašwāṭ⟩
‘thicket, forest’ (Corriente 1997: 295).
398 š-w-ṭ³
śwt (MK) ‘der Hauch des Westwindes’ (Wb IV 77) ~ Akkad šūtu ‘south, south-
wind’ (M. Cohen 2011: 195);
~ Morocco šōṭa ‘souffle de vent torride, coup de chaleur, coup de sirocco’
(Prémare VII 226).
399 š-w-ð̣
أ
šḏ.t (Pyr) ‘Feuer, Flamme’ (Wb IV 875) || Ar � �ش� و�ظšawð̣ , pl � � �ش� وا�ظʾašwāð̣ ‘smoke-
less blaze; intenseness of fire’ (Hava 1982: 382).
400 š-w-y
šw (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘dry, dried’; ‘trocken werden’ (Faulkner 1962: 263; Wb IV
429) || Ar � �ش� و�ىšawā ‘to roast (meat)’ (Hava 1982: 384);
~ Palmyra šawe ‘rôtir, cuire’ (Cantineau 1934 II 33) ~ Tripoli (Syria) šuwi ‘être
grillé’ (El-Hajjé 1954: 71) ~ Lebanon šewe ‘rôtir’ (Feghali 1938: 787) ~ Palest šawa
‘to grill’ (Piamenta 2000: 217) ~ Egypt šawa ‘to grill’ (Spiro 1895: 328) ~ Algiers
mešwi ‘grillé’ (Tapiéro 1971: 159).
216 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
401 š-y-t
(i) ḫt (Pyr) [< i҆ḫt] ‘thing(s), property, possessions, goods, offerings’; i҆ḫ.t ~ i҆š.t
‘Habe, Besitz, auch Speise’ (Faulkner 1962: 182; Wb I 134, 135; DLE I 343) display-
ing an allomorphic shift ḫ > š ‘vor allem mit Possessiv-suffixen’: jḫtjj/jštj snty
‘meine beiden Speisen’ (Edel 1955: 9, 53, 127): ḫt.i҆ nbt ‘all my property’; i҆št ‘prop-
erty, belongings’ (Gardiner 1957: 308) ~ Dem i҆ḫj ‘Sache, Habe, Besitz’ (DG 42);
~ Yemen šīt, pl ʾašyēʾ ‘cosa’ (Rossi 1939: 202) ~ Kǝndērīb šī ‘etwas, (negiert)
nichts’: šī sabʿīn sane ‘etwa siebzig Jahre’; šī … šī ‘teils … teils’; šīya ‘etwas, irgend-
etwas’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 79) ~ Palest iši/ši/šayy ‘Sache, Ding’; šī ‘irgendein’
(Bauer 1957; 249, 164); šēt, pl šayyūt/šūt ‘of’ (Piamenta 1989: 210) ~ Ḥama šīt,
pl šīyāt mit Pronominalsuffix: ‘gehörend zu’: hāda šīti ‘dies gehört mir’; šīyān
‘nichts’ (Lewin 1966: 213, 214) ~ Damascus šī ‘any’: maʿak šī maṣāri? ‘Do you have
any money with you?’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 9) ~ Egypt šē/šay ‘thing’ (Spiro
1895: 328) ~ Tunis šayy ‘rien, quelque chose’ (D. Cohen 1975: 144, 222) ~ Rwala
šīn ‘nothing’ (Musil 1928: 453) ~ Marazig šayy ‘nichts’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2005:
103) ~ Malta ⟨xejn⟩ ‘nothing’ (Aquilina 1990: 1557).
402 š-y-h
sjw ‘Schaf’ (Calice 1936: 195) ~ Copt ⲉⲥⲟⲟⲩ ‘sheep’ (Crum 1939: 61a) ~ Akkad
šuātu ‘ewe’ (CAD XVII/3 168) ~ Sab š bn ‘sheep or goat’ (Biella 1982: 511) ||
Ar � �ش� �ا هšāh, pl � �ش� �ا ءšāʾ/ ����ش�ي���ا هšiyāh ‘ewe, goat’ (Hava 1982: 383);
~ Najd šāh, pl šyāh ‘das weibliche Schaf’ (Hess 1938: 82) ~ Ḥaḍramawt šāt
‘goat (not sheep)’ (Radionov 2007: 92) ~ Negev šāh ‘goat’ (Blanc 1970: 141)
~ Rwala šāt ‘sheep’ (Musil 1928: 129) ~ Oman šā, pl šawhāt ‘Ziege’ (Reinhardt
1894: 59) ~ Yemen šāh, pl šiyāt ‘pecora’ (Rossi 1939: 162); šāt, pl šuwāt ‘Ziege’
(Behnstedt 1987: 270) ~ Palest šāh, pl šyāh ‘chèvre, brebis’; šuwāwi ‘éleveur
de petit bétail’ (Denizeau 1960: 297) ~ Ḥassāniyya še, pl šyah ‘caprin’ (Taine-
Cheikh 1990: 38).
403 š-y-y
ḫy (Gr) ‘what’: ḫy ‘hail, Oh! what is …?’ (DLE I 350) ~ ḫy qd.k ‘how are you?’; ‘wie
ist dein Befinden?’ (Faulkner 1962: 185; Hannig 1995: 585) ~ ḫy ḏd.t=j ‘Was ist es,
أ
was ich sagen soll?’ (Brose 2014: 86) > [*šī]; sy ‘who?, what?’ (Faulkner 1962: 211)
|| Ar ��� � ي� شʾayš (A. Fischer 1905); cf. 531. q-d-d;
401. š-y-t – 406. ṣ-b-ġ 217
404 ṣ-ʾ-b
ة �ئ ن
sb-t ‘Läuse’ (Erman 1904: 103) ~ Dem sjb ‘Laus’; sb ‘Ungeziefer’ (DG 408, 419)
~ Copt ⲥⲓⲃ ‘tick’ (Crum 1939: 318b) || Ar ��� �ص�ؤا بṣuʾābah, pl � �ص� ب��اṣiʾbān ‘nit, louse’s
egg’ (Hava 1982: 386);
~ Mosul ṣwāb ‘nits, lice eggs’ (Al-Bakrī 1972: 311) ~ Daθīna ⟨ṣīb⟩ ‘progéniture’
(GD 2159); ṣayyab ‘seminare’ (Rossi 1939: 237) ~ Palest ṣībān ‘Lauseeier’ (Bauer
1957: 220) ~ Aleppo ṣībēn ‘lentes, œufs de poux’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 452)
~ Tunis ṣaybān ‘lentes’ (D. Cohen 1975: 38) ~ Algeria ṣayb ‘lentes’ (Lentin 1959:
167) ~ Djidjelli ṣībāna ‘lente de poux’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 287) ~ Ḥassāniyya
ṣībān ‘lentes (coll.)’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 90) ~ Malta ⟨subien⟩ ‘nits’ (Aquilina
1990: 1372).
405 ṣ-b-ʿ
ḏbʿ (OK) ‘finger, thumb, toe; point the finger’; ‘Finger, Fingerbreite (als
أ
Längenmaß)’ (Faulkner 1962: 321; Wb V 562) ~ Dem tbʿ/tb ‘Finger’ (DG 623, 617)
~ Akkad neṣbettu ‘finger’ (M. Cohen 2011: 24) || Ar �� إ� ��ص بʾiṣbaʿ, pl � � �ص�ا بʾaṣābiʿ ‘finger’
ع ع
(Hava 1982: 388);
~ Damascus ʾǝṣbaʿ/ʾǝṣbaʿa, pl ʾaṣābeʿ/ʾaṣābīʿ ‘finger’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964:
90) ~ Kǝndērīb ṣǝbǝʿ, pl ṣābīʿ ‘Finger’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 80) ~ Palest oṣbaʿ/iṣbaʿ,
pl ʾaṣābiʿ/ʾaṣābīʿ ‘id.’ (Bauer 1957: 112) ~ Egypt ṣubāʿ/ṣābiʿ, pl ṣawābiʿ ‘id.’ (Spiro
1895: 332) ~ Oman ṣboʿ ‘Finger’ (Reinhardt 1895: 56) ~ Djidjelli ṣboʿ ‘doigt’ (Ph.
Marçais 1956: 82) ~ Malta ⟨seba’, pl swaba’⟩ ‘finger’ (Aquilina 1990: 1246).
406 ṣ-b-ġ
ḏbg (NK) ‘eintauchen’; ‘dunking, soaking’ (Wb V 568; Hoch 1994: 383) || Ar ��ص ب���غ
ṣabaġa ‘soak’ (Hava 1982: 388);
218 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
~ Iraq ṣubaġ ‘paint, dye, stain, tint, color; shine (shoes)’: ṣubġat šaʿarha
ʾaṣfar ‘she dyed her hair blond’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 257) ~ Aleppo ṣabaġ
‘teindre, attraper, tromper (qqn)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 331) ~ Palest ṣabaġ
‘färben’ (Bauer 1957: 107) ~ Egypt ṣabaġ ‘to dye, tinge’ (Spiro 1895: 444)
~ Ḥassāniyya sbaġ ‘teindre’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 142).
407 ṣ-b-y
sbꜣ (OK) ‘pupil’; ‘Zögling’ (Faulkner 1962: 219; Wb IV 84) ~ Copt ⲥⲓⲃⲟⲩⲓ ‘disciple,
ّ ة ن
apprentice’ (Crum 1939b: 319b) || Ar � � ب�صṣabiyy, pl � ��ص��بوṣibwah/� �ص�ب�ي��اṣibyān
�ي
‘Knabe, angehender Jüngling; Bursche, Diener’ (Wahrmund II 11);
~ Sinai ṣabiy ‘youth, lad’ (Stewart 1990: 264) ~ Najd ṣibiyy ‘youth, lad slave’
(Kurpershoek 1995: 392) ~ E. Arabia ṣbayy, pl ṣbayyān ‘boy, male child’ (Holes
2001: 291) ~ Lebanon ṣeba ‘jeunesse’ (Feghali 1938: 788) ~ Palest ṣabi, pl ṣubyān/
ṣibyān ‘Bube, Knabe, Sohn’; ṣiba ‘Jugend’ (Bauer 1957: 68, 176, 123; Kampffmeyer
1936: 39) ~ Šukriyya ṣabi ‘(Kraftiger) junger Mann’ (Reichmuth 1983: 159)
~ Egypt ṣabi ‘lad youth’ (Spiro 1895: 333) ~ Djidjelli ṣbe, pl ṣobyān ‘jouvenceau,’
f ṣbeyya ‘fillette’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 367, 330) ~ Malta ⟨sabi, pl subien⟩ ‘boy’
(Aquilina 1990: 1248).
408 ṣ-d-f
ف
ḏdf.t (Gr) ‘Wurm’; ‘snake; internal bodily worm’ (Wb V 633; Calice 1936: 227;
Faulkner 1962: 326) || Ar �� �م���ص�د وmaṣdūf ‘veiled, concealed, covered, pro-
�ف
tected’ (Lane 1666); � �ص�دṣadaf ‘sorte de coquille’ (Dozy I 824).
409 ṣ-d-y
ḏd (Pyr) ‘say, speak, recite’; ‘sagen, sprechen, mitteilen’ (Ember 1930: 110;
Faulkner 1962: 325; Wb V 622) ~ Dem ḏd ‘singen, أLied’ (DG 691) ~ Copt ϫⲱ
‘to say’ (Crum 1939: 755b) || Ar �ص�د اṣadā, pl � �ص�د ا ءʾaṣdāʾ ‘echo’ (Hava 1982: 393);
~ Aleppo ṣǝda ‘écho’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 434) ~ Damascus ṣada ‘Echo’
(Stowasser & Ani 1964: 75) ~ Palest ṣada, pl aṣdā ‘Echo’ (Bauer 1957: 82) ~ Egypt
ṣada ‘echo’ (Spiro 1895: 336) ~ Najd ṣida ‘sound that responds to s.o., echo;
sound, voice, cry’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 404).
407. ṣ-b-y – 412. ṣ-r- ʿ 219
410 ṣ-r-r¹
ّ
ḏrt (Pyr) ‘Klageweib, Trauerweib’: ḏrt nt Wsjr ‘das Klageweib des Osiris’ (Wb V
597; Hannig 1995: 1012) || Ar �صرṣarra ‘laut schreien’ (Wahrmund II 22);
~ Najd ṣarrah ‘clamour, din, confused cries’; ṣarārah ‘s.o. who has not
made the pilgrimage to Mecca before, goes on pilgrimage for the first time’
(Kurpershoek 1999: 404) ~ Damascus aṣarr ‘to insist’; mṣǝrr ‘insistent’
(Stowasser & Ani 1964: 125) ~ Palest ṣarr, yṣirr ‘rendre un son éclatant, réson-
ner’ (Denizeau 1960: 304); iṣirr ‘gellt (in schrillem Ton)’ (Kampffmeyer 1936:
39) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨yuṣirr, aṣarr⟩ ‘to insist’; ⟨ṣarrar⟩ ‘to squeak’ (Corriente 1997:
305).
411 ṣ-r-r²
ḏr (Pyr) ‘bundle of grain stalks’; ‘ganz, gesamt; Körperteil des Rindes: wohl am
ّ ّة
Bauch’ (Ember 1930: 74; Wb V 589, 600) ~ Akkad ṣarru ‘sheaf’ (Parpola 2007:
104) ~ Heb ָצ ַררṣārar ‘to bind’ (BDB 864) || Ar �صرṣarra ‘to bind’; � �صرṣurrah, pl
�صررṣurar ‘purse’ (Hava 1982: 393);
~ Najd ṣarr ‘to tie up, put (money into a purse)’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 404)
~ Sinai ṣurr ‘binds for a camel’s teats’ (C. Bailey 1991: 443) ~ Egypt ṣarr ‘tie up,
make a bundle’; ṣurra, pl ṣurar ‘bundle’ (Spiro 1895: 336, 337) ~ Palest ṣurra, pl
ṣurar ‘Bündel, Paket’; ṣarr ‘zusammenpacken’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 39; Bauer
1957: 226, 382) ~ Aleppo ṣarr ‘envelopper (qqe) dans un linge ou un morceau
d’étoffe qu’on noue ensuite’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 429) ~ Lebanon ṣarr ‘join-
dre (le bout des doigts)’ (Denizeau 1960: 304) ~ Marazig ṣurra ‘Stoffsäckchen’
(Ritt-Benmimoun 2005: 237) ~ Takrūna ṣurra ‘petit paquet contenu dans une
étoffe nouée’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 2213) ~ Djidjelli ṣaṛṛa ‘pacquet, bal-
uchon’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 332, 247) ~ Morocco ṣoṛṛ ‘nouer, serrer, envelopper
(qq ch.), dans une étoffe pour en faire un petit ballot, empaqueter qqch. et faire
un nœud par dessus de façon à former un nœud’; ṣorra ‘paquet de linge ou de
vêtements’ (Prémare VIII, 50) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨maṣarr⟩ ‘purse’ (Corriente 1997:
305) ~ Ḥassāniyya ṣarr ‘tie (sth) up (e.g., in a piece of cloth)’ (Mali; Heath 2004:
220) ~ Malta ⟨sorra, pl soror⟩ ‘fagotto’ (Vassalli 1796: 619).
412 ṣ-r-ʿ
ّ
ḏrʿ (20th Dyn.) ‘(von Besiegten) versprengt sein’; ‘lay low, overthrow’ (Wb V
603; Hoch 1994: 393) || Ar �صرṣarraʿa ‘fling a.o. down’ (Hava 1982: 394);
ع
220 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
~ Aleppo tṣaraʿ ‘lutter corps à corps l’un contre l’autre’ (Barthélemy 1935–
69: 430) ~ Palest taṣāraʿ ‘ringen’ (Bauer 1957: 245); jiṣraʿ ‘wirft zu Boden’
(Kampffmeyer 1936: 39) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨inṣirāʿ⟩ ‘wrestler’s wrestling’ (Corriente
1997: 305).
413 ṣ-f-ḥ
ة ف ف ئ
ḏpḥ ‘lumber’ (Janssen 1975: 432) || Ar ��� �ص����ي�� خṣafīḥah, pl �ص���ا �خṣafāʾiḥ ‘thin plank,
�
metallic sheet’ (Hava 1982: 398);
~ Egypt ṣaffaḥ ‘to cover with metal plates’ (Spiro 1895: 340) ~ Tangier ṣuffāḥa
‘rocher large et plat’ (W. Marçais 1911: 356).
414 ṣ-f-y
ّف
ḏfꜣ (NK) ‘reinigen, abwischen’ (Wb V 571) || Ar �ص��ىṣaffā ‘to clarify, filter’ (Hava
1982: 400);
~ Aleppo ṣaffa ‘passer, clarifier, filtrer (un liquide)’: mway mṣaffāye ‘de l’eau
filtrée’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 439) ~ Egypt ṣaffa ‘strain, drain’ (Badawi & Hinds
1986: 506) ~ Tunis ṣfa ‘il est devenu pur’ (D. Cohen 1975: 105) ~ Ḥassāniyya ṣaffe
‘purifier, filtrer’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 121, 69) ~ Malta ⟨saffa, isaffi⟩ ‘chiarire, ren-
dere lucido’ (Vassalli 1796: 586).
415 ṣ-q-r
أ
zkr ‘Gott in Falkengestalt’ (Calice 1936: 193); ‘Seker (falcon god of the Memphite
necropolis)’ || Ar � قص��رṣaqr, pl � � قص��رʾaṣqur ‘kestrel, small falcon’ (Hava 1982: 401);
~ Al-Balqāʾ ṣagr, pl ṣgūr ‘falcon’ (Palva 1992: 172) ~ Najd ṣagur ‘hawk’
(Ingham 1982: 59) ~ Damascus ṣaqǝr, pl ṣqūr ‘hawk’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964:
113) ~ Palest ṣaqr, pl ṣuqūr ‘Falke’ (Bauer 1957: 106) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ṣaqr⟩ ‘fal-
con’ (Corriente 1997: 309) ~ Malta ⟨seqer, pl isqra⟩ ‘uccello di rapina’ (Vassalli
1796: 603).
416 ṣ-m-d
dmḏ (Pyr) ‘addieren, Summe, insgesamt’; ‘total’ (Calice 1936: 88; Faulknerّ
1962: 313; Wb V 457; Schipper 2005: 80) ~ Dem tmt ‘Summe’ (DG 634) || Ar �صم�د
413. ṣ-f-ḥ – 418. ṣ-w-l 221
417 ṣ-n-ǧ
snḏ (Pyr) ‘fear (v)’; ‘fürchten’; snḏ.t ‘fear (n)’ (Faulkner 1962: 234–5; Wb IV 182;
Hannig 2003: 1166) || Ar ��ص ن����جṣanaǧa ‘heimjagen, prügeln’ (Wahrmund II 57);
ن �
� �ص�ا جṣāniǧ ‘colique’ (Dozy I 846);
�
~ Ḥaḍramawt ⟨aṣnaǧ⟩ ‘sourd’ (Landberg 1901: 635) ~ Yemen ṣiniǧ ‘taub
werden’ (Behnstedt 1996: 727) ~ Lebanon ṣannaǧ ‘to contract (muscles)’
(Frayha 1973: 107) ~ Egypt aṣnag ‘deaf’; ṣanag ‘deafness’ (Badawi & Hinds
1986: 511).
418 ṣ-w-l
ḏꜣj (Pyr) ‘sich feindlich in den Weg stellen; sich widersetzen’; ḏꜣyw ‘opponent’
(Wb V 514; Faulkner 1962: 318) || Ar �ص�ا لṣāla ‘einen wütenden Angriff machen’
(Wahrmund II 66); �ص ّوا لṣuwwāl ‘furious assault’ (Piamenta 1990: 290); cf. 438.
ð̣ -r-r;
~ Najd ṣāleh ‘Feind’ (Hess 1938: 100) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨tiṣūl ṣawlah⟩ ‘to domi-
neer, overcome’ (Corriente 1997: 313) ~ Marazig ṣāl ‘attaquer l’homme (ʿala)’
(chameau); ṣawwāl ‘qui entre facilement en fureur’ (Boris 1958: 356) ~ Rwala
ṣāl ‘to move the whole tribe with all its women, children and possessions
and engage in another tribe in a major battle to take possession of its terri-
tory’ (Musil 1928: 540) ~ Lebanon ṣāl ‘atteindre, atrapper’ (Feghali 1933: 76)
~ Morocco ṣāl ‘se dresser orgueilleusement et triomphateur’; ṣōḷ ‘triomphe
insolent / écrasant’ (Prémare VIII 132).
222 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
419 ḍ-b-b
(i) ḏbꜣ (MK) ‘stop up, block’; dbb ‘verstopfen, schmücken, versehen mit’; ḏbί
‘stop up’ (variant of ḏbt ‘brick, ingot, slab of metal’; ‘Ziegel’) (Faulkner 1962: 321,
�ض ّ ةḍabbah ‘baked bricks, doorlatch’ (Lane 1888; Hava 1982: 412);
311; Wb V 436, 553; Hannig 1995: 1001; Brockelmann 1932: 117) ~ Dem tb ‘Ziegel’
(DG 617) || Ar ������ ب
~ Egypt ḍabb ‘to seize, close, shut’ (Spiro 1895: 349) ~ Aleppo ḍabb ‘renfer-
mer’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 455) ~ Najd ð̣ abb ʿala ‘to surround s.th. tightly and
completely’; ð̣ bāb ‘brass rings clasping s.th. tightly and keeping it together’
(Kurpershoek 1999: 413) ~ Lebanon ḍabb lsēno ‘tenir sa langue’ (M. Feghali
1933: 44) ~ Palest dibbiyye ‘große wollene Decke’ (Bauer 1957: 73) [< *ḍbb]
~ N. Yemen ð̣ abbah ‘Türriegel’ (Behnstedt 1987: 273) ~ Aleppo ḍabba ‘serrure
de bois’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 455) ~ Egypt ḍabbah ‘wooden lock’ (Spiro
1895: 349);
(ii) Copt ⲧⲱⲱⲃⲉ ‘brick’ (Crum 1939: 398a);
~ Palest ṭūb ‘Backstein’ (Bauer 1957: 40) ~ Egypt ṭūb ‘bricks, stones’ (Spiro
1895: 375) ~ Ḥassāniyya tūv ‘brique (d’argile séche)’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 33)
~ Al-Andalus ṭūbah ‘sun-dried brick, adobe’ (Corriente 1997: 336).
420 ḍ-r-ḥ
ḏḥr (MK) ‘leather, hide’; ‘Haut eines Tieres, Leder’ (Faulkner 1962: 315; Wb V
481, 605; Calice 1936: 223) ~ Ugar drḫ ‘chamois’ (DUL 281) ~ Akkad turāḫu ‘ibex’
(Parpola 2007: 205) || Ar �ض� رḍarḥ ‘Haut, Leder’ (Wahrmund II 88).
ح
421 ḍ-r-m
ḏꜣb (MK) ‘Kohle’ (Calice 1936: 89) || Ar �ض� رḍarima ‘to burn (fire)’ (Hava
م
1982: 417);
~ Najd mið̣ rim ‘burning fiercely, ardent, violent’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 414)
~ Morocco ḍǝṛṛǝm ‘faire flamber, attiser (un feu)’; ḍāṛǝm ‘qui flambe, qui brûle
intensément; ardent (feu, flamme)’ (Prémare VIII 190) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ḍarīm⟩
‘fire’ (Corriente 1997: 318).
419. ḍ-b-b – 424. ḍ-w- ʾ 223
422 ḍ-f-f
فّ ة
wḏb (MK) ‘Ufer, Uferland’; ‘fold over’ (Wb I 409; Calice 1936: 89) || Ar ���� �
�ضḍiffah
‘side of a valley, side of a river’ (Hava 1982: 419);
~ Damascus ḍaffah, pl ḍfāf ‘bank’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 18) ~ Al-Andalus
ḍaffah ‘bank, shore’ (Corriente 1997: 219).
423 ḍ-m-d
424 ḍ-w-ʾ
dwꜣ.w (MK) ‘dawn, morning, tomorrow, the morrow’; ‘die Morgenfrühe, der
1962: 310; DLE II 242; Wb V 422; Erman 1904: 149; Barns 1956: 41) || Ar � ْوء
morgige Tag; morgens, am Morgen’; dwꜣ ‘to be early’; ḏwꜣ ‘rise at dawn’ (Faulkner
�ضḍawʾ
‘Zwielicht’ (Wahrmund II 108);
~ Bišmizzīn iḍ-ḍaw ‘der Morgen’; ṭiliʿ iḍ-ḍaw ‘der Tag ist angebrochen’ (Jiha
1964: 48, 108, fn 1) ~ Kǝndērīb að̣ ð̣a, yǝð̣ ð̣i ‘hell werden, glänzen’: ǝddǝnya tǝð̣ ð̣i
‘die Morgenröte erscheint; es wird hell’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 116) ~ S.E. Anatolia
ḍaww ‘Licht, Lampe’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 254) ~ Najd ⟨awḍā⟩ ‘leuchten,
strahlen’; ḍāwa (von den Sternen gesagt) ‘nach Sonnenuntergang aufgehen’
(Socin 1901 III 293; Hess 1938: 71) ~ Damascus ḍawa ‘to flash’ (Stowasser & Ani
1964: 92) ~ Egypt ḍawa ‘to light’ (Spiro 1895: 354) ~ Tripoli (Lebanon) ḍuwi ‘être
éclairé’ (El-Hajjé 1954: 71) ~ Palest ḍaww ‘Licht der Lampe’; ḍawa ‘leuchten’
(Bauer 1957: 192, 193) ~ Djidjelli ḍāwi ‘luisant’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 324) ~ Mzāb
224 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
ḍow/ḍu ‘lumière’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 24, 21) ~ Morocco ḍuw ‘light’ (Heath 2002:
159) ~ Malta ⟨dawl⟩ ‘luce’ (Vassalli 1796: 251).
425 ḍ-y-ʿ
ḏʿ (LE) ‘wüst liegen’ (Wb V 534) || Ar � �ا �ضḍāʿa ‘to perish, be lost’ (Hava 1982:
ع
423);
~ Palmyra ḍāʿ ‘se perdre’; ḍayyaʿ ‘perdre’ (Cantineau 1934 II 6) ~ Aleppo
ḍāʿ ‘être perdu, se perdre’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 465) ~ Damascus ḍāʿ ‘be or
get lost’; ḍayyaʿ/ḍawwaʿ ‘lose’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 142) ~ S.E. Anatolia ð̣ āʿ
‘verlorengehen’; ð̣ ayyaʿ ‘verlieren’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 254) ~ Yemen ð̣ āʿ
‘perdersi’: ð̣ āʿat ʿalayya sāʿati ‘ho perduto l’orologio’ (Rossi 1939: 226) ~ Palest
ḍāʿ ‘verlorengehen’; ḍawwaʿ/ḍayyaʿ ‘verlieren’ (Bauer 1957: 335) ~ Egypt ḍayyaʿ
‘lose, cause to be lost, squander’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 526) ~ Tripoli (Libya)
ḍāyaʿ ‘sperduto’ (Cesàro 1939: 65).
426 ṭ-b-x
ẖdb (MK) ‘töten, niedermetzeln im Kampf’ (Wb III 403) ~ Akkad ṭabāḫu ‘to
(BDB 370) || Ar ط ب���� خṭabaxa ‘to cook’ (Hava 1982: 425); cf. 176. x-ð-m;
slaughter’ (M. Cohen 2011: 192) ~ Heb ֶט ַבחṭebaḥ ‘slaughter (animals for food)’
�
~ Aleppo ṭabax ‘cuire, faire cuire (la viande, le riz)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69:
468) ~ Āzǝx ṭabax ‘kochen’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 257) ~ Palest ṭabax ‘kochen
(Gemüse)’ (Bauer 1957: 177) ~ Egypt ṭabax ‘cook’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 529).
427 ṭ-b-ṭ-b
ʿal-kalb ‘he tapped the dog’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 170) ~ Sinai ṭabb al-kaff
‘slap’ (Stewart 1990: 272) ~ Palest ṭabṭab ‘schlagen mehrmals freundlich auf
die Schulter’ (Bauer 1957: 259); ṭabṭib ʿala ‘schlage auf, klopfe’ (Kampffmeyer
1936: 41) ~ Egypt ṭabṭab ‘zurechtklopfen’; dabdab ‘klopfen, trampeln’; mṭabṭab
‘geklopft’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 128, 279; 1999: 370, 229) ~ Tunis ṭabṭab
‘klappsen’ (Stumme 1896: 37) ~ Djidjelli ṭobṭob ‘toquer à la porte’ (Ph. Marçais
1956: 203) ~ Malta ⟨taptap, itaptap⟩ ‘battere sopra una cosa colla mano’
(Vassalli 1796: 80).
428 ṭ-b-ʿ
ḏbʿ.t (OK) ‘das Siegel’; ḏbʿ (NK) ‘siegeln’ (Wb V 566) ~ Dem tbʿ ‘siegeln’ (DG 623)
~ Copt ⲧⲱⲱⲃⲉ ‘seal’ (Crum 1939: 398a) || Ar �� ط بṭabaʿa ‘to print; to coin money’
ع
(Hava 1982: 425);
~ Damascus ṭabaʿ ‘to print’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 180) ~ Palest ṭabaʿ
‘drucken’ (Bauer 1957: 79) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ṭabaʿ⟩ ‘to seal; to hallmark (precious
metals)’ (Corriente 1997: 324).
429 ṭ-b-l
أ
tbn (Gr) ‘Handpauke, Trommel’; ‘tambour’ (Wb V 262; Herbin 1994: 549) ||
Ar ط ب���لṭabl, pl ط��بولṭubūl/ � ط ب���ا لʾaṭbāl ‘drum’ (Hava 1982: 426);
~ Oman ṭabel ‘trommeln’; ṭabil ‘Trommel’ (Reinhardt 1894: 144, 43) ~ Yemen
ṭumbulah, pl ṭanābil ‘tamburo’ (Rossi 1939: 241); yiḍambul ‘he drums’ (Watson
2002: 284) ~ Iraq ṭabul, pl ṭubūl ‘drum’; ṭabbāl ‘drummer’ (Woodhead &
Beene 1967: 287) ~ Damascus ṭabl, pl ṭbūl(e) ‘drum’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964:
73) ~ Kfarʿabīda ṭabl ‘tambour’ (M. Feghali 1919: 67) ~ Lebanon ṭǝbbayle ‘petit
tambour’ (Feghali 1938: 314) ~ Sinai ṭabal ‘to tremble, to shiver’ (Stewart 1990:
272) ~ Palest ṭabǝl, pl ṭbūl ‘Trommel’ (Bauer 1957: 306, 192) ~ Egypt ṭabbil ‘to
play the kettle-drum’; ṭabbāl ‘one who plays the kettledrum’ (Spiro 1895: 361)
~ Ḥassāniyya ṭbel/ṭbal ‘tambour’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 141).
430 ṭ-r-ʾ
أ
tr (Pyr) ‘time, season’; ‘Zeit, bestimmte Zeit’ (Faulkner 1962: 300; Wb V 314) ||
Ar � طرṭaraʾa ‘to happen, to fall unexpectedly upon s.o.’ (Hava 1982: 428):
~ Al-Balqāʾ ṭara ‘to come to one’s mind’ (Palva 1992: 173) ~ Negev ṭiri ‘to
happen, occur to one’s mind’; ṭiri ʿa bāli að̣ īfak ‘it occurred to me to visit you’
226 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
(Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Sinai ṭara, yiṭrā ‘to tell’; ṭiryā ‘a mention’ (C. Bailey 1991: 445)
~ Najd ṭara ‘to mention’; ‘einfallen’ (Ingham 1994: 180); ‘to cross one’s mind’
(Sowayan 1992: 280) ~ Rwala ṭāri l-ḥarāyeb ‘tidings of war’; mā jaṭri ʿalēh ‘it will
not occur to him’ (Musil 1928: 513, 516) ~ Tripoli (Libya) ṭrē ‘accadere’ (Cesàro
1939: 232) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ṭarā⟩ ‘to happen unexpectedly’ (Corriente 1997: 326)
~ Ḥassāniyya ṭarra ‘annoncer’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 23).
431 ṭ-f-ṭ-f
ḏfḏf (ME) ‘drip’; ‘träufeln, Tropfen’; dfdf.t ‘drop of liquid’; ‘Tropfen (als Bild der
Winzigkeit)’; ḏfḏ ‘Tropfen’ (Faulkner 1962: 322; Wb V 448, 573) ~ tftf-nwn ‘he
who lets fall Nun (i.e. rain-water) drop by drop [name of deity]’ (Černý 1976:
ّف
44) ~ Copt ⲑⲟϥⲧⲉϥ ‘let fall drop by drop’ (Crum 1939: 69b) ~ Heb ִט ְפ ֵטףṭipṭēp
‘drip, drop’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 548) || Ge ṣafsāf ‘drops’ (Leslau 1989: 235) || Ar ���ط
ṭaff ‘peu, petite quantité’ (DAF I 200);
~ Iraq ṭafṭaf ‘to drip from the side of a container’; ṭafīf ‘small, slight’
(Masliyah 2017: 79; Woodhead & Beene 1967: 290) ~ Najd ṭifṭāf ‘ein kleines
tiefes Wasserloch im Felsen’ (Hess 1938: 66) ~ Lebanon ṭafṭaf, iṭafṭef ‘débor-
der’ (Denizeau 1960: 331) ~ Egypt ṭaff ‘to gush out’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 541)
~ Palmyra ṭaff ‘surnager, flotter, monter à la surface’ (Cantineau 1934 II 40)
~ Marazig taftaf, itaftef ‘glaner de-ci de-là, par petites quantités’ (Boris 1958:
60) ~ Djidjelli tǝftūfa ‘miette, crouton’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 332) ~ Morocco tǝftǝf
‘operer par petits coups; bricoles, babioles, toutes choses menues sans valeur’
(Prémare II 58, 59) ~ Malta ⟨teftef⟩ ‘toccare a poco a poco’; ⟨teftif⟩ ‘cose di
poco’ (Vassalli 1796: 90).
432 ṭ-f-l
أ
tfn (Pyr) ‘child, orphan’; ‘der Waise, Waisenkind, der Vaterlose’ (Ember 1930:
53; Faulkner 1962: 298; Wb V 299; Hannig 1995: 931) || Ar ط��ف���لṭifl, pl � ط��ف���ا لʾaṭfāl
‘new-born child, infant’ (Lane 1860);
~ Yemen ṭufl, pl aṭfāl ‘bambino’ (Rossi 1939: 195) ~ Oman ṭafil ‘Kind’
(Reinhardt 1894: 46) ~ Kǝndērīb ṭǝfǝl, pl ṭfāl ‘Kind’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 87)
~ Damascus ṭǝfǝl, pl aṭfāl ‘child’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 40) ~ Lebanon ṭefl, pl
ṭfāla ‘petit enfant’ (Feghali 1938: 791) ~ Palest ṭifl/ṭafl, pl aṭfāl ‘Säugling’ (Bauer
1957: 252) ~ Mzāb ṭfal ‘enfant’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 121) ~ Djidjelli ṭfol ‘enfant’
(Ph. Marçais 1956: 247) ~ Malta ⟨tifel, f tifla⟩ ‘fanciullo, fanciulla’, pl ⟨tfal⟩
(Vassalli 1796: 108).
431. ṭ-f-ṭ-f – 435. ṭ-w-l 227
433 ṭ-h-r
twr (NK) ‘be clean, cleanse, purify’; ‘reinigen; gereinigt, rein sein, den Tempel
reinigen’ (Faulkner 1962: 295; DLE 202; Wb V 253) ~ Sab ṭhr(m) ‘(ritual) purity’
(Biella 1982: 216) || Saf ṭhr ‘to cleanse’ (Al-Jallad 2015: 350) ~ Ar �ط�هرṭahara ‘to
purify, circumcize’ (Hava 1982: 440);
~ Yemen ṭāhir ‘puro ritualmente’ (Rossi 1939: 231) ~ Palmyra mṭahher ‘cir-
conciseur’ (Cantineau 1934 I 79) ~ Kǝndērīb ṭahāra ‘Schamteile’ (O. Jastrow
2005: 89) ~ Palest ṭāhir ‘rein (rituell)’; ṭahāra ‘Reinheit (Herz)’ (Bauer 1957:
242) ~ Egypt ṭihir ‘to be clean, pure’ (Spiro 1895: 373); ṭihāra ‘Beschneidung (bei
Knaben und Mädchen)’; taṭhīr ‘das Reinigen der Entwässerungsgräben von
Schlamm’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 292) ~ Marazig ṭhar ‘se purifier (avant
de prier)’; ṭhāṛa ‘circoncision’ (Boris 1958: 381) ~ Ḥassāniyya ṭahhar ‘purifier
(au sens religieux)’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 121) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ṭahar⟩ ‘to be pure’
(Corriente 1997: 335).
434 ṭ-w-s
tš (MK) ‘to grind corn, split wood; to mash’; ‘Korn mahlen’; tštš (Ebers) ‘to crush’;
‘zerdrücken, zerquetschen’ (Faulkner 1962: 301; Ember 1930: 114; Wb V 330) || (?)
Ar ط�ا �صṭāsa ‘to tread underfoot’; ‘niedertreten’ (Hava 1982: 441; Wahrmund II
167);
~ Al-Balqāʾ ṭāš ‘to raid’ (Palva 1978: 96).
435 ṭ-w-l
(i) dwn (Pyr) ‘stretch out (legs, hands), be tense; continually’; ‘ausstrecken,
spannen gegen jemanden’ (Faulkner 1962: 311; Breasted 1930: 573; Wb V 431; DLE
II 243) ~ Dem twn ‘sich erheben’ (DG 614) ~ Ḥar ṭawl ‘length’ (Johnstone 1977:
166) || Ar ط�ا لṭāla ‘it was or became long, extended’ (Lane 1895);
~ Rwala seyf ṭāyel ‘a drawn sword’ (Musil 1928: 60) ~ Syria ṭṭawwal ‘sich
hinlegen’ (Behnstedt 1997a: 142) ~ Aleppo ṭuwel ‘s’allonger, devenir grand de
taille’ [“doublet en fə́ʿel de ṭāl, yṭūl formé sous l’influence de ṭawīl”] (Barthélemy
1935–69: 493) ~ Lebanon ṭewel ‘être long’ (Feghali 1938: 795) ~ S.E. Anatolia
ṭāl ‘emporwachsen, lang werden, größer werden’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982:
268) ~ Iraq ṭuwal ‘be or become long’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 296) ~ Tunis
ṭwāl, yiṭwāl ‘lang sein’ (Stumme 1896: 31); ṭawl ‘longueur’ (D. Cohen 1975: 67)
~ Morocco ṭuwwel ‘to prolong’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 151) ~ Malta ⟨twal,
jitwal⟩ ‘farsi o divenir lungo’ (Vassalli 1796: 137).
228 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
The following entries exemplify grammaticalization of the Old Egyptian noun dwn paral-
leled in the Arabic dialects.
(ii) m-dwn (of motion) ‘straight on; (of time) from then on’ (Faulkner 1962: 311);
~ Hijaz ʿala-ṭūl ‘straight ahead’ (Omar 1975: 252, 256) ~ Damascus ʿala ṭūl
‘along, for good’; ṭūl- ‘throughout’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 7, 106, 241) ~ Negev
ʿa-ṭūl ‘on the spot’ (Henkin 2010: 286) ~ Egypt ʿala ṭūl ‘straight ahead, straight-
away’ (Wehr 1979: 673) ~ S.E. Anatolia ṭūl ʿǝmri ‘toute la vie’ (Grigore 2007:
298) ~ Tripoli (Libya) ṭūl ‘durante’ (Cesàro 1939: 76) ~ Marazig ʿala ṭūl ‘durch-
gehend, immer’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2005: 121) ~ Malta ⟨matul⟩ ‘during’ [< *maʿ
ṭūl] (own obs.).
436 ṭ-w-y
Ɖ̣
437 ð̣ -b-l
438 ð̣ -r-r
~ Yemen ð̣ arr ‘danno’ (Rossi 1939: 203) ~ E. Arabia ḍarr/ð̣ arr ‘to harm’ (Holes
2001: 309) ~ Damascus ḍarr ‘to harm s.o.’; nḍarr ‘Schaden haben’ (Stowasser
& Ani 1964: 112; Grotzfeld 1965: 161) ~ Rwala meẓarra ‘evil’ (Musil 1928: 494)
~ Lebanon ḍarr ‘nuire à’ (Feghali 1938: 791) ~ Palest ḍarr ‘schaden jemandem’
(Bauer 1957: 253) ~ S.E. Anatolia ḍarr/ẓarr ‘schaden’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982:
251) ~ Tunis ḍaṛṛ ‘il a nui à’ (D. Cohen 1975: 100) ~ Morocco ḍḍǝṛṛ ‘to get hurt’
(Harrell 1965: 383) ~ Mzāb ḍǝrr ‘il a fait du mal’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 120) ~ U̅ lād
Brāhīm ð̣ aṛṛ ‘faire du mal’ (W. Marçais 1908: 81).
439 ð̣ -r-y
�ظ
rḏw (Pyr) ‘efflux of body’; ‘Flüssigkeit; gewöhnlich, Ausfluss aus den Körper’
(Faulkner 1962: 156; Wb II 469; Calice 1936: 172) || Ar ر�ىð̣ arā ‘to flow (water)’;
ð̣ arā baṭnuhu ‘to suffer from diarrhoea’; ‘fluxit aqua, fluxione laboravit venter’
(Hava 1982: 445; Freytag 1837: 387);
~ Yemen tað̣ riyeh ‘laxative’ (Piamenta 1991: 295).
440 ð̣ -f-r
ḏꜣf ‘heat (v), burn’; ‘verbrennen (beim Opfern; Feind); kochen’; ḏꜣfḏꜣf ‘(die
Feinde) verbrennen’ (Faulkner 1962: 319; Wb IV 195, 196; V 522; Sethe 1962: 182);
‘erhitzen, kochen; in Brand stecken; verbranntes Fleisch’ (Hannig 1999: 994,
995) || Akkad zarāpu/ṣarāfu ‘burn (intrans.)’; zapāru ‘become rotten, stink’;
zaprūtu ‘bad smell,’ zupru ‘decay, putrefaction, rot’; ṣaripu ‘pungent’ (CAD XVI
102; Parpola 2007: 135, 251,103; CDA 444) ~ Heb ָש ַרףśārap ‘to burn’ (BDB 976)
~ E. Mesop Aram srp ‘verbrennen’ (Beyer 1998: 181) ~ Saf ðfr ‘to stink’ (Winnett
& Lankester 1978: 636); cf. 243. ð-f-r;
Palest ẓaffar ‘cook or lay in a utensil meat, animal fat, or fowl, making it ritu-
ally unlawful for holding dairy food or drink’ (Jerusalem; Piamenta 2000: 210)
~ Damascus tẓaffar ‘schmutzig, fettig werden’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 163) ~ Iraq zufar
‘grease, animal fat’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 204).
441 ð̣ -m-ʾ
ḏmʿ (NK) ‘to be thirsty / parched’; ‘dünn (von der Wüste, vom Acker), dürr, ode’
(Hoch 1994: 386; Wb V 574); DLE II 269; Hannig 1995: 1006) ~ Akkad ṣamû ‘be
thirsty’ (CAD XVI 95) ~ Heb ָצ ֵמאṣāmēʾ ‘thirsty’ (BDB 854) ~ Sab ð̣ mʾw ‘becomeأ
�ظ
thirsty’ (Biella 1982: 227); ṣmʾ ‘drought’ (Jamme 1962: 446) || Ar � ءð̣ imʾ, pl � �ظ��م�ا ء
م
ʾað̣ māʾ/ �ظ��م�ا ءð̣ amāʾ ‘thirst’ (Ambros 2004: 179);
230 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
~ Rwala ð̣ umaʾ ‘thirst’ (Musil 1928: 156) ~ Yemen ð̣ ama ‘Durst’ (Behnstedt
1996 II 756); ð̣ aṃyān ‘thirsty’ (Piamenta 1991: 313) ~ ʿAnazeh ḍama ‘soif’
(Landberg 1940: 48) ~ Najd ḍuma ‘thirst’; ḍāmi ‘unwatered’ (Ingham 1994: 180);
ð̣ imi ‘to get thirsty’ (Sowayan 1992: 282); ð̣ umā ‘Durst’ (Hess 1938: 168) ~ Negev
ð̣ ama ‘thirst’ (Henkin 2010: 268) ~ Syria mið̣ mi ‘dürstig’ (Behnstedt 1997a: 142)
~ Egypt ḍama ‘unbebautes Land, Brache; trockener Boden’; sana ḍama ‘ein
Jahr, in dem die Nilüberschwemmung mager ausfiel’ (Behnstedt & Woidich
1994: 277) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ð̣ aṃān⟩ ‘thirsty’ (Corriente 1997: 341) ~ Marazig
ð̣ amā ‘grande soif’ (Boris 1958: 389).
442 ʿ-b-b
ّ
ʿm (LE) ‘to swallow, absorb’; ‘verschlucken’ (Ember 1930: 61; Faulkner 1962:
42; Wb I 183) || Ar � �ع� بʿabba ‘humer, boire, aspirer l’eau, sans interruption,
boire comme boivent les bestiaux’ (DAF II 148); ‘to gulp, swallow water in one
draught’; ġabbah ‘draught, gulp’ (Hava 1982: 449, 515); cf. 484. ġ-b-b.
443 ʿ-b-r
ʿbꜣ (Pyr) ‘der Stab (zum schlagen und als Herrschaftszeichen)’; ‘sceptre’ (Wb I
176; Faulkner 1962: 40) || Ar ع��برʿibr/ʿabr/ʿubr ‘sturdy, strong’ (Hava 1982: 450);
~ Palest ʿabr ‘poutre ronde’; ʿabbāra ‘poutre horizontale’; ʿibri ‘sarment
coupé’ (Denizeau 1960: 341, 342) ~ Egypt ʿubbāra ‘Rohre von einem Graben
zum anderen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 300) ~ Yemen ʿubar ‘Türrahmen aus
Holz’; ʿābir ‘dicker Aufsatz Holz’ (Behnstedt 1996: 798) ~ Daθīna ʿibrāh ‘le sup-
port sur lequel pivote le mizān’ (GD 2261).
444 ʿ-b-y
ة
ʿb/ʿbʿ (MK) ‘sich, rühmen’; ‘boast, boasting, exaggeration’; ʿbʿb ‘prahlen, Prahlerei’
(Wb I 177, 178; Calice 1936: 25; Faulkner 1962: 41) || Ar ���� �ع ب��يʿibiyyah ‘Hochmut,
eitles Prahlen’ (Wahrmund II 202);
~ Aleppo tʿabba ‘monter la tête à qqn’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 510) ~ Palest
ʿtaba ‘se faire remarquer’ (Denizeau 1960: 343).
442. ʿ -b-b – 447. ʿ -ǧ-l 231
445 ʿ-ǧ-ǧ
446 ʿ-ǧ-ʿ-ǧ
ʿḏʿḏ (LE) ‘jauchzen, jubeln, zwitschern, sich laut freuen, jemandem zujubeln’
(Brockelmann 1932: 103; Wb I 241) || Ar ���ع��ج �ع�جʿaǧʿaǧa ‘laut und wiederholt
�
schreien’ (Wahrmund II 215);
~ Palest ǧaʿǧaʿa ‘Geräusch (Brummen, Schreien, monotone Geräusche)’
(Kampffmeyer 1936: 11) ~ Egypt gaʿgaʿ/gaʿʿar ‘to howl, roar, shout, yell’; gaʿgaʿa
‘howl, roar’ (Spiro 1895: 103) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ǧaʿǧaʿ⟩ ‘to vociferate’ (Corriente
1997: 97).
447 ʿ-ǧ-l
ة ��جعʿaǧalah
ʿgrt (LE) ‘Karren’ (Wb I 236) ~ Heb ֲעגָ ָלהʿăgālāh ‘cart’ (BDB 722) || Ar ��� �ل
‘cart, wheel, pulley’ (Hava 1982: 456);
~ Damascus ʿažale, pl -āt ‘wheel’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 262) ~ Palest ʿaǧal,
pl iʿǧāl/ʿaǧalāt ‘Wagenrad’ (Bauer 1957: 237) ~ Egypt ʿagal ‘wheels, rollers,’
sg ʿagalah (Spiro 1895: 386) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ʿaǧalah⟩ ‘water wheel’ (Corriente
1997: 345).
232 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
448 ʿ-d-s
ʿršn (LE) ‘lentils’; ‘Linsen’ (Wb I 211) ~ Heb ֲע ָד ָׁשהʿădāšāh ‘lentil’ (BDB 727) ||
Ar ع�د ��سʿadas ‘lentils’ (Hava 1982: 457);
~ Aleppo ʿades ‘lentilles’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 516) ~ Kaʿbīye ʿadas ‘Linsen’
(Vocke & Waldner 1982: 275) ~ Palest ʿadas ‘Linsen’ (Bauer 1957: 194) ~ Egypt
ʿads ‘lentils’ (Spiro 1895: 387) ~ Djidjelli ʿdes ‘des lentilles’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 85).
449 ʿ-d-w
أ
ʿdt (LE) ‘conspiracy’ (DLE I 82; Hoch 1994: 105) ~ Heb ֲע ָדאʿădāʾ ‘to make spoil’
ة
(M. Jastrow 1886: 1044) || Ar � ع�د ا وʿadāwah ‘hostility’; ع�د ّوʿaduww, pl � ع�د ا ءʾaʿdāʾ
‘foe, enemy’ (Hava 1982: 459);
~ Lebanon ʿdu ‘ennemi’ (Feghali 1938: 797); ʿdāwe ‘inimitié’ (Feghali 1919: 10)
~ Damascus ʿadūw ‘Feind’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 55); ʿedwān ‘aggression’ (Stowasser
& Ani 1964: 5) ~ Rwala maʿādi ‘enemy’ (Musil 1928: 537) ~ Oman ʿado ‘Feind’
(Reinhardt 1894: 72); ʿadūyi ‘mein Feind’ (Reinhardt 1894: 23) ~ Aleppo ʿadu,
pl ʿǝde/ʿdā/ǝʿdye ‘ennemi’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 517) ~ Palest ʿaduw(w), pl
ʿaduwwīn ‘Feind’ (Bauer 1957: 109) ~ Egypt ʿadū ‘enemy’ (Spiro 1895: 389)
~ Tunis ʿdu ‘ennemi’ (D. Cohen 1975: 161) ~ Marazig ʿaduww, pl iʿādi/ʿedyān/
aʿda ‘ennemi’ (Boris 1958: 397) ~ Tripoli (Libya) ʿadū ‘nemico’ (Griffini 1913:
182) ~ Morocco ʿdu, pl ʿedyan ‘enemy’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 63) ~ Malta
⟨għadu, pl għedewwa⟩ ‘nemico’ (Vassalli 1796: 333).
450 ʿ-ð-r¹
�ذ
ʿḏꜣw (MK) ‘guilty man, wrongdoer’; ‘unrecht’ (Faulkner 1962: 51; Wb I 240) ||
Ar ع� رʿaðr/ʿuðr ‘schuld- und schmachbedeckt’ (Wahrmund II 225);
~ Rwala ʿaððar ‘to excuse’ (Musil 1928: 162) ~ N. Yemen iʿtaðar ‘sich entschul-
digen’ (Behnstedt 1987: 278) ~ Palest hū maʿðūr ‘er ist entschuldigt’ (Bauer 1957:
95) ~ Ḥassāniyya ʿðer ‘excuser’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 65).
451 ʿ-ð-r²
jdr (OK) ‘herd of cattle’; ‘Herde (vom Vieh und Geflügel)’ (Faulkner 1962: 35;
DLE I 54; Wb I 154) ~ Heb ֵע ֶדרʿēder ‘flock, herd’ (BDB 727) ~ Aram ʿaðrā ‘fold,
pen, flock’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 1046);
448. ʿ -d-s – 454. ʿ -r-y 233
452 ʿ-r-b
ʿꜣm (MK) ‘Asiatic’; ‘das asiatische Nachbarvolk der Ägypter’; ʿꜣmt ‘Asiatic woman;
Asiatin, Semitin’; cf. ʿpr ‘an Asiatic people’; ‘Art fremdländischen Arbeiter’
(Faulkner 1962: 38, 42; Wb I 168–7, 181) ~ Dem ꜣrbj ‘Arabien’ (DG 6) ~ Copt ⲁⲙⲉ
أ
‘herdsman’ (Crum 1939: 7a) ~ Heb ֲע ַרבʿărab ‘nomad(s), steppe-dwellers of
ن
N. Arabia (BDB 787) || Ar � �عر بʿurb/ʿarab, pl � � �عر بʾaʿrub/� �عرو بʿurūb/� �عرب�ا
ʿarbān ‘Arabs of the desert, Bedouins’ (Hava 1982: 462);
~ ʿAnazeh ʿarab ‘Bédouins’ (Landberg 1940: 49) ~ Sinai ʿaráḅ, pl ʿurḅān
‘Bedouin, people, tribe, family, group’ (Stewart 1990: 199) ~ Yemen ʿarab, pl
aʿrāb ‘tribú nomadi’ (Rossi 1939: 141) ~ Najd ʿarab/ʿirbin ‘bedouins, tribesmen’
(Kurpershoek 1995: 410) ~ Rwala ʿarab ‘those who dwell in movable tents’;
ʿorbān membership of various clans or tribes’ (Musil 1928: 44) ~ Bišmizzīn ʿarab
‘Beduinen’ (Jiha 1964: 119) ~ Palest ʿarab ‘Beduinen’ (Bauer 1957: 22) ~ Egypt
ʿarab ‘bedouin’ (Spiro 1895: 390) ~ Tunis ʿṛab ‘bédouins’ (D. Cohen 1975: 81).
453 ʿ-r-ḍ
ض
ʿꜣḏ (MK) ‘bewässertes Land, Boden’ (Wb I 168; Calice 1936: 52); ʿꜣdw ‘Rand (eines
Feldes)’ (Hannig 1995: 130) || Saf ʿrḍ ‘a valley’ (Al-Jallad 2015: 304) ~ Ar ���عرو
ْض
ʿarūḍ, pl �� �عرʿurḍ ‘shore, road’ (Hava 1982: 465); ʿurḍ, pl ʿirāḍ ‘versant d’une
montagne, vallée dans laquelle il y a des villages, de l’eau et des arbres’ (DAF
II 220);
~ Yemen ʿārð̣ ah ‘Regenwassergraben in den Bergen (um Regenwasser auf
die Felder zu Leiten), Damm’; ʿarð̣ ah ‘Querdamm’; ʿarīð̣ , pl ʿawārið̣ ‘Wand,
Hausmauer’; ʿarað̣ ah ‘Ufer eines (großeren) Flusses’ (Behnstedt 1996: 818)
~ Lebanon ʿurḍ ‘vallée, route au pied d’une montagne’ (Denizeau 1960: 349).
454 ʿ-r-y
ḥꜣj (OK) [~ *ʿry] ‘be naked’; ‘nackt sein, entblößen’: ḥꜣ ‘obdachlos’; ḥꜣwt ‘naked-
ness’; ḥꜣwy ‘naked man’ (Faulkner 1962: 161; Wb III 14: 1–3) || Ar �عر��يʿariya ‘être
nu, depouillé de ses vêtements’ (DAF II 238);
234 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
455 ʿ-š-r
ʿšꜣ (LE) ‘many, numerous’; ‘viel sein; (als Adjektiv), reich an …’; ʿšꜣt ‘multitude of
persons; company of guests’; ‘die Menge (immer von Personen)’ (Faulkner 1962:
49; Wb I 228, 229) ~ Copt ⲁϣⲏ ‘multitude’ (Crum 1939: 22b) ~ Akkad ešēru(m)
‘to be / go well; be successful (of crop, harvest, animal breeding; human repro-
duction, birth)’ (CDA 82) ~ Sab ʿšrt ‘clan, groupe sociale qui a pour fondement
�ش ة
une généalogie, opposé à šaʿb qui a pour fondement son territoire’ (Avanzini
1980: 111) || Ar �ع���ي��ر �م� �شmaʿšar ‘company or collective
ʿašīrah ‘a man’s kinsfolk,’ ع�� ر
body, community’ (Lane 2053);
~ Damascus ʿašīre, pl ʿašāyer ‘tribe’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 248) ~ Palest ʿišre
‘freundschaftlicher Verkehr’ (Bauer 1957: 372; Kampffmeyer 1936: 47) ~ Egypt
ʿišra ‘society, social intercourse, intimacy’; ʿaššar ‘to copulate, cause to be preg-
nant’ (Spiro 1895: 297) ~ Sinai muʿaššar ‘a pregnant camel mare’ (C. Bailey 1991:
447) ~ Rwala ʿāširak ‘thy beloved’ (Musil 1928: 79) ~ Najd ʿašīr ‘friend’; ʿāšar
‘to befriend’ (Sowayan 1992: 284) ~ Marazig ʿašīr, pl ʿašrāwa ‘étranger installé
dans la tribu, dans le pays’ (Boris 1958: 404) ~ Aleppo ʿāšir ‘fréquenter (qqn)’;
ʿašret, tǝʿšer ‘devenir grosse (: jument femelle qui porte dix mois)’ (Barthélemy
1935–69: 529).
Cf. Ghomara (Berber) ʿeššer ‘to beget’ (Mourigh 2016: 384).
456 ʿ-ṣ-y
ʿḏꜣ (LE) ‘Unrecht, Unrecht handeln, schuldig sein, Frevler’; ‘guilt(y)’ (Wb I 241;
Brockelmann 1932: 102; DLE I 84) ~ Dem ʿḏ ‘Unrecht, Lüge’ (DG 74) ~ Copt ⲟϫⲓ
‘iniquity’ (Crum 1939: 258b) ~ Syr ʿǝṣā ‘to compel, constrain, force’ (CSD 422)
~ Ge ʿaṣawa ‘to close, confine, stop’ (Leslau 1987: 75) || Ar �ع���صىʿaṣā ‘gegen Einen
widerspenstig, rebellisch sein’ (Wahrmund II 266);
~ Sinai ʿāṣiy ‘stubborn, recalcitrant, contumacious, refusing to give what is
due’ (Stewart 1990: 200); ʿāṣiy, pl ʿāṣiyyāt ‘a wild animal, game’ (C. Bailey 1991:
447) ~ Yemen ʿāṣī ‘colpevole’ (Rossi 1939: 200) ~ Marazig ʿāṣi ‘dur, pas mûr’
(Boris 1958: 406) ~ Damascus ʿaṣa ‘to disobey’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 68)
~ Najd iʿtiṣa, yiʿtiṣi ‘to twist, to be difficult to control, rebel against, disobey’
(Kurpershoek 1999: 424) ~ Egypt ʿiṣi, yiʿṣa ‘to disobey, rebel, revolt’ (Spiro
1895: 499).
455. ʿ -š-r – 459. ʿ -q-l ² 235
457 ʿ-ṭ-b
ḏdb (NK) ‘sting, incite’; ‘stechen’ (Faulkner 1962: 323; Wb II 384) || Ar ��ع��ط� ب
ʿaṭaba ‘couper, retrancher en coupant, séparer d’un coup’ (DAF II 277);
~ Rwala ʿaṭb al-aṣāwīb ‘a torment to the wounded, because the wounds
caused by his blows were slow in healing’ (Musil 1928: 584) ~ Najd ʿaṭab ‘Einem
eine tiefe Wunde schlagen’ (Socin 1901 III 292); maʿāṭīb ‘marksmen who hit
the target’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 424) ~ Algeria ʿṭab ‘couper, blesser’ (Lentin 1959:
199) ~ Morocco ʿṭǝb ‘endommager (qqch.), estropier, mutiler’ (Prémare IX 143).
458 ʿ-q-l¹
ʿqꜣ (LE) ‘rope’; ‘Seil, Art Tau, besonders an Schiffen’ (Ember 1930: 18; Calice 1936:
26; Faulkner 1962: 50; Wb I 234); ʿqꜣ.w ‘Stricke, Tau des Re’ (Altenmüller 1975:
~ E. Arabia ʿagil ‘rope, tie, bind’ (Holes 2001: 356) ~ Khābūra ʿiqāḷ ‘a rope
binding a camel’s ankle tightly to its thigh’ (Brockett 1985: 161) ~ Najd ʿagaḷ
‘to tether’ (Sowayan 1992: 285) ~ Sinai ʿgāḷ ‘camel hobble’ (Stewart 1990: 197)
~ Al-Balqāʾ ʿgān ‘head-band’ (Palva 1992: 173) ~ Negev yaʿagiḷ ‘he tethers’ (Blanc
1970: 138) ~ Kuwait ʿagal ‘head cord’; ʿaggal ‘hobbling a camel’ (Dickson 1949:
670) ~ Baghdad ʿgāl ‘rope for headdress’ (Blanc 1964: 79) ~ Palmyra ʿaqal, pl
ʿoqle/ʿuqol ‘gros bourrelet de laine noire qu’on place sur la tête pour retenir le
châle’ (Cantineau 1934 II 27) ~ Aleppo ʿaqal, pl ʿuqol ‘cordon dont on se ceint la
tête pour retenir la coiffe – chez les nomades ʿagēl’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 541)
~ Palest ʿqāl ‘Kopfschnur’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 48) ~ Egypt ʿaqal ‘tie the feet
of a camel, etc.’; ʿuqāl ‘foot rope’; ʿigāl ‘Kniefessel’ (Spiro 1895: 405; Behnstedt
& Woidich 1994: 319) ~ Rwala ʿaqqal/yaʿqel ‘fetter a camel’s left foreleg with a
short rope above the knee’ (Musil 1928: 337, 367, 425).
459 ʿ-q-l²
ʿrq/ʿqr (MK) ‘know, perceive, be wise, skilled’; ‘klug sein, verständig; erfahren’:
Hannig & Vomberg 1999: 82) || Ar �ع��ق���لʿaqala ‘to be intelligent’ (Hava 1982: 488);
ʿkꜣ ‘richtig sein’; ʿqꜣ-i҆b ‘wise, intelligent’ (Faulkner 1962: 45; Wb I 212, 233, 234;
~ Bišmizzīn ʿāʾil ‘vernünftig’ (Jiha 1964: 158) ~ Aleppo ʿǝqel, yǝʿqal ‘devenir
raisonnable, s’assagir’; ʿaqǝl, pl ʿqūl ‘raison, bon sens’ (Barthélemy 1935–69:
541) ~ Damascus ʿaqlāt ‘brains’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 27) ~ Kǝndērīb ʿaqǝl
‘Verstand’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 96) ~ Palest ʿaqel ‘id.’ (Bauer 1957: 340) ~ Egypt ʿaʾl,
236 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
pl ʿuʾūl ‘mind, reasoning power, sense’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 590) ~ Tunis ʿqal
‘intelligence’ (D. Cohen 1975: 145) ~ Morocco ʿqel ‘brains’ (Sobelman & Harrell
1963: 24) ~ Ḥassāniyya ʿqal ‘intelligence’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 84).
460 ʿ-q-m
Dem ʿqm ‘traurig’ (DG 73) || Ar � �ع��ق��يʿaqīm ‘gloomy (day); barren, devastating’
م
(Hava 1982: 490; Ambros 2004: 192);
~ Yemen ʿaqīm ‘ganz gelähmt’ (Behnstedt 1996: 852) ~ Al-Andalus ʿuqm ‘bar-
renness’ (Corriente 1997: 360).
461 ʿ-k-b-r
ʿ=k=b=ra (an anthroponym) (LE) ‘mouse’ (Hoch 1994: 81) ~ Akkad akburu ‘id.’
(Parpola 2007: 225) || Heb ַע ְכ ָּברʿakbār ‘mouse’ (BDB 747);
~ Yemen ʿakbarī, coll. ʿakbar ‘topo di campagna’ (Rossi 1939: 14) ~ ʿIkbār
[anthroponym], ʿakbār, pl ʿakābīr ‘souris, gros rat’ (GD 2315).
462 ʿ-l-ǧ
ʿnḏ (OK) ‘Art Salbe oder Wohlgeruch’ (Ember 1930: 68; Wb I 208); ʿnd (Urk.) ‘an
unguent’ (Faulkner 1962: 45) || Ar ع�لا جʿilāǧ ‘treatment of a disease; efficacious
�
medicine’; ‘Arznei’ (Hava 1982: 493; Wahrmund II 293);
~ Yemen ʿilāǧ ‘rimedio’ (Rossi 1939: 219) ~ Khābūra ʿlg ‘to treat, make better’:
ma tʿelleg ‘[leprosy] is incurable’ (Brockett 1985: 161) ~ Lebanon ʿālež ‘soigner’
(Feghali 1938: 800) ~ S.E. Anatolia ʿǝlāǧ ‘Mittel, Lösung, Arznei, Medikament’
(Vocke & Waldner 1982: 286) ~ Palest ʿālaǧ ‘behandeln’ (Bauer 1957: 46) ~ Egypt
ʿālaǧ ‘pflegen (Pflanze, d.h. dungen und bewässern)’ (Behnstedt & Woidich
1994: 320) ~ Tripoli (Libya) ʿalāž ‘cura medica’ (Griffini 1913: 73) ~ Ḥassāniyya
ʿilāž ‘traitement’ (D. Cohen 1963: 28) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ʿilāǧ⟩ ‘treatment, care’
(Corriente 1997: 361).
460. ʿ -q-m – 465. ʿ -l-w 237
463 ʿ-l-q
(Wahrmund II 97);
~ ʿAnazeh ʿallaq ‘attacher’ (Landberg 1940: 52) ~ Sinai maʿlūg, pl maʿālīg
‘saddlebags’ (C. Bailey 1991: 447) ~ Damascus ʿǝleq ‘to be or get tied up’
(Stowasser & Ani 1964: 242) ~ Kǝndērīb ʿalaq ‘anheften, anbinden, annähen’
(O. Jastrow 2005: 96) ~ Yemen ʿallag ‘attaccare, appendere’ (Rossi 1939: 192, 194)
~ Najd ʿalaq ‘Anhängsel; was am Kamelsattel hängt’ (Socin 1901 III 293); ʿallag
‘to attach’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 415) ~ Tunis ʿlaq ‘sangsues’ (D. Cohen 1975: 146)
~ U̅ lād Brāhīm ʿalleg ‘suspendre’ (W. Marçais 1908: 89).
464 ʿ-l-m
ʿm (NK) ‘to know, take cognizance’; ‘wissen, erfahren, kennen’ (Ember 1930:
32; Caminos 533: 1954; Wb I 184); ʿm i҆b ‘be discreet’; ʿmm ‘brain’ (Faulkner 1962:
42, 43) ~ Dem ʿm ‘wissen’ (DG 60) ~ Copt ⲉⲓⲙⲉ ‘know, understand’ (Crum 1939:
77b) || Ar ع��لʿalima ‘to know’ (Hava 1982: 495);
م
~ E. Arabia ʿalam ‘to know’ (Holes 2001: 359) ~ Palest ʿilim ‘wissen’ (Bauer
1957: 365) ~ Egypt ʿilim ‘to know’ (Spiro 1895: 409) ~ Kǝndērīb aḷḷa ʿālǝm ‘Weiss
Gott!’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 97) ~ Damascus tʿallam ‘to learn’ (Stowasser & Ani
1964: 135).
465 ʿ-l-w
(i) i҆ʿr/ʿr (MK) ‘mount up, ascend’; ‘aufsteigen’ (Faulkner 1962: 45; Wb I 41, 208;
Ember 1930: 75) ~ Dem ʿl ‘hinaufsteigen, aufheben, holen’ (DG 67) ~ Copt
ⲁⲗⲉ ‘monter’ (Vycichl 1983: 60) || Saf ʿly ‘to go to upper Arabia’ (Winnett &
Lankester Harding 1978: 629) ~ Ar ع�لاʿalā ‘hoch sein’ (Wahrmund II 300);
~ Damascus ʿāli ‘high’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 116) ~ Hasankeyf ʿalla ‘heben’
(Fink 2017: 305) ~ Lebanon ʿtala ‘s’élever’ (Denizeau 1960: 362).
(ii) ʿi҆rt/ʿr(r)wt/ʿryt (NK) ‘dwelling, home; hall of judgement’; ‘Wachstube,
Heim; Götterwohnung; hochgeladenes Gemach, Söller: als Raum im Hause’
~ ʿrrwt (f) ‘dwelling, home, lintel’; ‘Tor des Hauses, des Palastes, des Tempels’
(Faulkner 1962: 45; Hannig 1995: 905; Wb I 42, 210) ~ ʿa=ra=ta (LE) ‘upper cham-
bers’ (Hoch 1994: 86); ʿrrwt/ʿrryt ‘landing-stage, quay, wharf; commissariat
238 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
466 ʿ-l-y
ḥr- [preposition] ‘upon, in, at, from, on account of, concerning’ (Faulkner 1962:
174): ḥri҆ḫ ‘why?’ (Gardiner 1957: 408) ~ Ar *ʿalāš ‘why?’ < *ʿalā + āš; cf. Borg
(2019: 66–67);
~ Iraq ʿal-ēš/ʿala-wēš ‘why? what for?’ ~ Palest ʿal-ēš ‘warum?’ (Bauer 1957:
353) ~ Tripoli (Libya) ʿal-āš ‘perchè?’ (Griffini 1913: 208) ~ Djidjelli ʿlíyyeš
[= ʿlāš panmaghrébin] ‘pourquoi’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 587) ~ Sidi Bel Abbès ʿlāš/
ʿlāh ‘pourquoi?’ (Madouni-La Peyre 2003: 465) ~ Ḥassāniyya ʿlāš? ‘pourquoi’
(Taine-Cheikh 1990: 117).
467 ʿ-m-d
ʿa=ma₂=di (LE) ‘chariot parts; supports’ (Hoch 1994: 70) || Ar �ع�م�دʿamada ‘durch
einen Pfeiler, eine Säule stützen’ (Wahrmund II 304);
~ Oman ʿamūd ‘Wagebalken’ (Reinhardt 1894: 45) ~ Palest ʿamūd, pl ʿamawīd/
ʿawamīd ‘Säule’; ʿumde, pl ʿimdān ‘Art Stütze’ (Bauer 1957: 252) ~ Egypt ʿamūd,
pl ʿawamīd/ʿamawīd/ʿimdān ‘column, pillar’ (Spiro 1895: 412) ~ Najd ʿamūd, pl
ʿimdān/ʿimmād ‘tent pole, stake’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 416).
466. ʿ -l-y – 471. ʿ -n-q ¹ 239
468 ʿ-m-q
ʿmq ‘Talgrund, Tiefe Ebene’ (Hannig 1995: 141) ~ Akkad ḫamqu �غ
70) ~ Heb ֵע ֶמקʿēmeq ‘vale’ (BDB 770) || Ar � �ع�م قʿumq/� ��م قġumq ‘depth’ (Hava
‘valley’ (CAD V
1982: 553);
~ Sinai ġamīg ‘deep, profound’ (C. Bailey 1991: 448) ~ Yemen ġumg ‘Tiefe’
(Behnstedt 1996: 727) ~ Iraq ġamīg/ġamīǧ ‘deep’ (Clarity et al., 1964: 51)
~ Aleppo lʿamǝq ‘nom d’une vaste dépression entre Alep et Ntakye’ (Barthélemy
1935–69: 553) ~ Kǝndērīb ʿǝmq ‘Tiefe’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 98) ~ Hasankeyf ʿǝmq
‘Tiefe’ (Fink 2017: 305) ~ Palest ġumq/ʿumq ‘Tiefe’ (Bauer 1957: 301) ~ Egypt
ġumq ‘depth’ (Spiro 1895: 534) ~ Djidjelli ġmiq ‘profond’; ġmūqa ‘fait d’être pro-
fond’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 268, 226) ~ Morocco ʿmiq ‘deep’ (Sobelman & Harrell
1963: 47).
469 ʿ-n-b
ʿnb (LE) ‘Weintraube’; ‘grapes’ (Calice 1936: 129; Helck 1971: 505); ʿ=n=bu ‘grapes
(in topon.)’ (Hoch 1994: 72) ~ Sab ʿnb ‘vineyard’ (Jamme 1962: 445) || Ar ��ع��ن� ب
أ
ʿinab, pl � � �ع ن���ا بʾaʿnāb ‘grapes’ (Hava 1982: 503);
~ Damascus ʿǝneb ‘grapes’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 107) ~ Palest ʿinab/ʿinib/
ʿunub ‘Trauben’ (Bauer 1957: 304) ~ Kǝndērīb ʿǝnǝb ‘Wein-trauben’ (O. Jastrow
2005: 98).
470 ʿ-n-f
ف
nf (ME) ‘wrong, wrongdoing’; ‘Böses, Unrechtes’; m nf ‘unrechterweise’ (Faulk
ner 1962: 131; Wb II 252; Brockelmann 1932: 106) || Ar ��� �ع نʿanf ‘roughness, vio-
lence’ (Hava 1982: 506);
~ Iraq ʿunf ‘violence’; ʿanīf ‘fierce’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 326) ~ Najd ʿanīf
‘cruel, grievous, severe’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 427) ~ Palest taʿnīf ‘harter Vorwurf’
(Kampffmeyer 1936: 50) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ʿanf⟩ ‘violence’ (Corriente 1997: 367).
471 ʿ-n-q¹
ʿnḫ.t (OK) ‘Ziege (oder allgemeines Wort fur Kleinvieh)’; ‘goat, small livestock’
(Wb I 205; Faulkner 1962: 44; Goldwasser 2002: 36*; Albright 1918: 253) ~ Dem
240 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
ق
ʿnḫ.t ‘die Ziege’ (DG 64) || Ar � �ع ن���اʿanāq, pl � �ع ن�� قʿunuq ‘petite chèvre’ (Hava
1982: 553);
~ N. Yemen ʿanāg ‘weibl. Lamm, Zicklein, sehr junges Zicklein’ (Behnstedt
1987: 282) ~ Najd ʿanāg ‘Kleines weibliches Zicklein bis etwa zu einer Woche’
(Hess 1938: 82) ~ Negev ʿanēgih, pl ʿanigāt ‘young goat’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi)
~ Marazig ʿanāg, pl ʿanāyeg ‘chèvrette toute jeune’ (Boris 1958: 421) ~ Collo
ʿannāqa ‘jeune chèvre’ (Lentin 1959: 205) ~ Djidjelli ʿnāqa ‘chèvrette’ (Ph.
Marçais 1956: 269) ~ U̅ lād Brāhīm ʿanegga ‘petites chèvres’ (W. Marçais 1908:
67) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ʿanāqah, pl ʿināq⟩ ‘she-kid’ (Corriente 1997: 368).
472 ʿ-n-q²
~ Najd ʿānag ‘to embrace, be attached to’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 417) ~ Iraq
ʿtinaq ‘to embrace’; ʿunig, pl ʿunūg ‘neck’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 326)
~ Tunis ʿonq, pl ʿnāq ‘cou’; mʿannaq ‘embrassant’; ʿonq ‘cou’ (D. Cohen 1975:
115, 118) ~ Djidjelli ʿonqūq ‘cou (volaille)’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 282) ~ Morocco
ʿenq, pl ʿnuq/ʿnaq ‘neck’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 129) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ʿunq, pl
aʿnāq⟩ ‘neck’ (Corriente 1997: 368) ~ Malta ⟨għannaq⟩ ‘abbracciare’; ⟨għonq,
pl għenuq⟩ ‘collo’ (Vassalli 1796: 347, 362).
473 ʿ-n-n¹
ʿn (MK) ‘turn back, come back, return’; ‘sich umwenden, umkehren’ (Faulkner
1962: 43; Wb I 188; Calice 1936: 43) ~ Dem ʿn ‘umwenden, umkehren; wiederum,
255b) || Ar � �ع� نّ� �ع� نʿanna ʿan ‘to turn aside from’ (Hava 1982: 502);
wieder, auch, ebenfalls’ (DG 61, 62) ~ Copt ⲟⲛ ‘again, also, still’ (Crum 1939:
~ Daθīna ʿanna ‘échapper’ (GD 2332) ~ Marazig ʿnān, pl ʿenna ‘rêne’ (Boris
1958: 420) ~ Morocco X rxa ʿnāno ‘il est devenu voûté, incapable de se redresser
(en parlant d’un vieillard ou d’un malade)’ (Prémare IX 265) ~ Al-Andalus
⟨ʿanna⟩ ‘it came into sight’ (Corriente 1997: 368).
472. ʿ -n-q ² – 476. ʿ -w-r 241
474 ʿ-n-n²
ʿnʿn (LE) ‘complain, complaint’; ‘sich beschweren’ (Faulkner 1962: 43; Wb I 191)
(Clines I 353) || Saf ʿnn ‘moan’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 630) ~ Ar �ّ�ع� ن
~ Akkad unninu ‘prayer, supplication’ (CAD XX 162) || ~ Heb ָענִ יןʿānīn ‘sighing’
ʿanna (for ʾanna) ‘moan, sigh frequently’; ‘das ءwie aussprechen’ (Hava 1982:
ع
503; Wahrmund II 315); cf. 831. w-n-n;
~ Aleppo ʿann ‘gémir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 558) ~ Khatūniyya ʿann, yʿǝnn
‘murren’ (Talay 2003: 360) ~ Iraq ʿann ‘id.’ (Weißbach 1930: 360) ~ Palest ʿann
bi ‘sich beschweren’ (Bauer 1957: 54) ~ Oman ēnīn ‘stöhnen’ (Reinhardt 1895:
46) ~ Yemen ʾann ‘lamentarsi’ (Rossi 1939: 216) ~ Damascus ʾann ‘groan, moan’;
wanne ‘hum’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 108, 152, 119) ~ Negev wannih ‘lament’
(Henkin 2010: 302).
475 ʿ-n-y
i҆ʿnw (MK) ‘Kummer (oder ähnlich); klagender Ausruf’ (Wb I 41; Calice 1936: 113)
|| Ar � �عʿuniya ‘to be anxious about’ (Hava 1982: 505);
ن�ي
~ Najd ʿanna ‘to burden s.o., make s.o. suffer’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 428)
~ Palest ʿana ‘gêne, besoin’ (Denizeau 1960: 366) ~ Rwala mʿanna ‘suffering,
troubled, distressed, grieving’ (Musil 1928: 501) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ʿannaytuh⟩ ‘to
cause to toil, to torment, pester’ (Corriente 1997: 368).
476 ʿ-w-r
ʿwꜣ (Pyr) ‘go bad, rot’; ‘verderben, faulen, garen, sauer werden’ (Faulkner 1962:
39; Wb I 172; Hannig 1995: 132); cf. ḥwꜣ.w ‘rot; putrefy; be foul, offensive’ (Wb
477 ʿ-w-f
ʿpy (ME) ‘to fly’; ‘fliegen (vom Vogel; von der geflügelten Sonne)’; pʿy ‘fly’
ف
(Faulkner 1962: 41; Wb I 179; Tait 1977: 114) ~ Ge ʿof ‘bird’; ʿofa ‘to fly’ (Leslau
1987: 663, 693) || Ar �� ع�اʿāfa ‘planer au-dessus de quelque chose (se dit, d’un
oiseau qui voltige et décrit des cercles au-dessus de l’eau ou d’un proie, avec
l’intention de se précipiter dessus)’ (DAF II 409).
478 ʿ-w-l
ʿwn (MK) ‘be covetous, despoil’; ‘betrügen, ungerecht sein’ (Faulkner 1962: 40;
Wb I 172; Calice 1936: 127) || Ar ع�ا لʿāla ‘to exceed the bounds of justice (tax
gatherer)’ (Hava 1982: 511);
~ Egypt ʿiwāla ‘meanness’; ʿawīl ‘one who lives at the expense of others’
(Spiro 1895: 379) ~ Rwala ʿāl ʿala flān ‘he hurt somebody’; ʿayle ‘an evil deed’
(Musil 1928: 225) ~ Marazig ʿāl ‘se tromper’ (Boris 1958: 425) ~ Najd ʿawīl ‘wail-
ing’ (Sowayan 1992: 285).
479 ʿ-w-n
ة
Calice 1936: 127) || Ar ��� �عوا نʿawānah ‘lofty palm tree’ (Hava 1982: 511).
ʿwn.t (MK) ‘Art Baum und dessen Holz (als Material zu Stöcken)’ (Wb I 173;
480 ʿ-y-r
ʿꜣ (OK) ‘ass’; ‘Esel’ (Faulkner 1962: 38; Wb I 165) ~ Dem ʿꜣ ‘Esel’ (DG 54) ~ Copt
ⲉⲓⲱ ‘ass’ (Crum 1939: 75b) ~ Heb ַעיִ רʿayir ‘male ass (young and vigorous)’ (BDB
747) ~ Taym ʿyr ‘ass’ (Winnett & Reed 1970: 192) ~ Ḥar ḥayr ‘donkey’ (Johnstone
1977: 160) || Saf ʿr ‘ass, donkey’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 641) ~ Ar عي��ر
أ
ʿayr, pl � �عي���ا رʾaʿyār ‘domestic and wild ass’ (Hava 1982: 512);
~ Sinai ʿayr, pl ʿyārah ‘donkey’ (Stewart 1990: 202) ~ Lebanon ʿiyyār ‘bête
forte et résistante qui ne se laisse pas dépasser par une autre’ (Bauer 1957:
237) ~ Al-Balqāʾ ʿāyir ‘thoroughbred camel’ (Palva 1992: 174) ~ Najd ʿayrah
‘edles Kamel’ (Socin 1901 III 295) ~ Marazig ʿīr eʿyerra ‘jeune chameau mâle’
(Boris 1958: 427) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ʿayr, pl aʿyār⟩ ‘a (wild) ass, onager’ (Corriente
1997: 372).
477. ʿ -w-f – 484. ġ-b-b ¹ 243
481 ʿ-y-l
أ
Dem ʿlw ‘das Kind’ (DG 68) ~ Copt ⲁⲗⲟⲩ ‘youth, maiden’ (Crum 1939: 5a) ~ Heb
ّ ة
ֲעוִ ילʿăwīl ‘boy’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 1049) || Ar �عي���لʿayyil, pl �� � �عي���لʾaʿīlah ‘wer zur
Familie gehört’ (Wahrmund II 331);
~ Egypt ʿayyil, pl ʿiyāl ‘boy, child’ (Spiro 1895: 378) ~ Najd ʿyāl ‘children,
sons, youth’ (Sowayan 1992: 286) ~ Kǝndērīb ʿyāl ‘Kinder, Familienangehörige’
(O. Jastrow 2005: 100) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ʿiyāl⟩ ‘offspring’ (Corriente 1997: 371).
482 ʿ-y-n¹
ʿ(y)n (LE) ‘Quelle’; ‘well, spring’; ʿnj ‘Name von Gewässern’ (Sethe 1962: 105;
ن
Hoch 1994: 59; DLE 62, 67; Wb I 189) || Heb ַעיִ ןʿayin ‘eye, spring’ (Clines VI 355,
364) || Ar � عي�� نʿayn, pl � ا عي�� نaʿyun/� �ع��يوʿuyūn ‘water-spring’ (Hava 1982: 514);
~ Palest ʿēn, pl ʿiyūn/ʿuyūn/ʿayūn ‘Quelle’ (Bauer 1957: 237) ~ Mzāb ʿayn
‘puits’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 23) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ʿayn, pl aʿyān⟩ ‘spring, source’
(Corriente 1997: 372) ~ Malta ⟨għajn, pl għejun⟩ ‘fontana’ (Vassalli 1796: 338).
483 ʿ-y-n²
ʿn ‘the pleasant man’; ‘schön sein, schön handelnd, gütig’ (Faulkner 1962: 43;
أ
WAS I 190); ʿjnw ‘respectable persons’ (Ember 1930: 115; Brockelmann 1932: 102)
ن ن
|| Ar � ال� �عي���اal-ʾaʿyān ‘die Vornehmen’; � �ع��يوʿuyūn ‘das Beste’ (Wahrmund II 332,
333);
~ Ḥassāniyya ʿayyin, pl aʿyān ‘notable’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 102) ~ Egypt
aʿyān ‘notables, distinguished persons’ (Spiro 1895: 422) ~ Damascus ʿala ʿēni
‘gern’ (Bergsträßer 1924: 71) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨muʿayyan⟩ ‘distinguished, impor-
tant’ (Corriente 1997: 373).
Ġ
484 ġ-b-b¹
ّ �غ
ʿm (LE) ‘to swallow, absorb’; ‘verschlucken’ (Ember 1930: 61; Faulkner 1962: 42;
Wb I 183) || Ar � � � بʿabba ‘to gulp, swallow water in one draught’ (Hava 1982:
ة ّ ��غ
449); ���� بġabbah ‘draught, gulp’ (Hava 1982: 515);
244 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
485 ġ-b-b²
ّ �غ
gbj (LE) ‘schwach, elend sein; schlimm, beschwerlich’ (Wb V 161) || Ar �� � ب
ّ �غ
ġabba ‘sentir mauvais, être gâté (se dit des viandes)’; � � ب��� بġabbaba ‘become
corrupt’ (DAF II 429; Lane 2221);
~ Lebanon ġabb ‘s’évanouir, se trouver mal, perdre connaissance’; ġabbe
‘évanouissement’ (Denizeau 1960: 370) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ḥumma ġibb⟩ ‘tertian
fever’ (Corriente 1997: 374).
486 ġ-d-r
�غ
mḥḏrt (LE) ‘Fischteich’ (Wb II 128) [< *m+ġdrt (see below)] || Ar �دي�رġadīr, pl
�غ �غ ن �غ أ
�د رġudur/� �د راġudrān/ � �د رʾaġdir ‘pool left by the rain; river torrent’ (Hava
1982: 518);
~ Aleppo ġadīr mwāy ‘torrents de pluie’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 570) ~ Palest
ġadīr, pl ġudrān ‘Teich mit Abfluss’ (Bauer 1957: 299) ~ Sinai ġadīr, pl ġudrān
‘rainpool’ (C. Bailey 1991: 448) ~ Kǝndērīb ġadīr, pl ġǝdrān ‘Pfütze, Lache’
(O. Jastrow 2005: 100) ~ Marazig ġadīr, pl ġǝdrāwa ‘étang, mare, eau stagnante’
(Boris 1958: 433) ~ Takrūna ġdīr, pl ġdūr/ġudrān ‘mare d’eau dans un terrain
légèrement encaissé’; maġder, pl mġāder ‘bas-fond où se forment des mares’
(Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 2793) ~ Tangier ġaddar ‘remplir un vase jusqu’au
bord (= remplir comme un ġadīr)’ (W. Marçais 1911: 401) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ġadīr, pl
aġdur⟩ ‘estanque, remanso de rio’ (Dozy II 202) ~ Malta ⟨għadira, pl għadajjar⟩
‘lago, stagno’ (Vassalli 1796: 324).
485. ġ-b-b ² – 489. ġ-r-q 245
487 ġ-r-b¹
ʿꜣb (MK) ‘(of things) pleasing, desirable, pleasant; wonderful, strange, extraor-
�غ
dinary’; ‘wohlgefällig sein’ (Faulkner 1962: 38; Ember 1917: 85; 1930: 14; Allen
2013: 35; Wb I 167) ~ Heb ָע ֵרבʿārēb ‘sweet, pleasant’ (BDB 787) || Ar � � ر�ي� بġarīb
‘seltsam, außergewöhnlich’; ġarāʾib ‘wunderbare Sachen’ (Wahrmund II 343);
~ Tunis ġrība ‘chose étonnante’ (D. Cohen 1975: 160) ~ Morocco ġrīb ‘étrange,
extraordinaire; curieux, merveilleux’ (Prémare IX 347) ~ Aleppo ʿaǧāyeb
ġarāyeb ‘choses merveilleuses et surprenantes’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 571)
~ Lebanon ġarīb ‘étranger’ (Denizeau 1960: 372) ~ Palest ġarīb ‘außergewöhn-
lich’ (Bauer 1957: 37) ~ Egypt ġarīb ‘extraordinary’ (Spiro 1895: 427) ~ Djidjelli
ġrīb ‘étrange’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 268).
488 ġ-r-b²
�غ
ʿꜣb.t (Pyr) ‘Krug zum Waschen’ (Ember 1914: 85; Wb I 167; Calice 1936: 98) ||
Ar � � ر بġarb ‘grand sceau ou grande outre à eau’; ‘a vessel of the kind termed
qadaḥ’ (DAF II 450; Lane 2242);
~ Ḥaḍramawt ⟨ġarb⟩ ‘grande outre pour l’eau’ (Landberg 1901: 669) ~ Yemen
ġarbin ‘Wasserschlauch’; ġarb, pl ġurub ‘grosser Wasserschlauch; Wassersack’
(Behnstedt 1996: 895; 1987: 283) ~ Oman qarbe ‘Schlauch’ (Reinhardt 1894: 70)
~ Najd ġarb, pl ġrūb/ġawārīb ‘large, elongated bucket drawn by the sānyah’
(Kurpershoek 1999: 431); ‘Eimer’ (Socin 1901 III 295) ~ Rwala ġarb ‘a reservoir
from which water is distributed’ (Musil 1928: 682).
489 ġ-r-q
�غ ق
ʿgꜣ (LE) ‘drown, capsize’ (DLE I 81) ~ ʿkꜣ ‘kentern (mit dem Schiff), ertrinken’
(Wb I 235)’ ~ Jibb ġerq ‘to drown’ (Johnstone 1981: 88) || Ar � � رġariqa ‘to
drown’ (Hava 1982: 539);
~ Rwala layāli-l-ġaraq ‘the nights of flood’ (Musil 1928: 390) ~ S. Arabia
⟨ġaraq⟩ ‘l’état d’un terrain d’être si léger que le pied s’y enfonce’ (Landberg
1909: 670) ~ Yemen ġirig ‘adirarsi, affondare, naufragare’; ġurg ‘profondità’
(Rossi 1939: 191, 230); ġarig ‘untergehen (Mond, Sonne)’ (Behnstedt 1987: 283)
~ Oman ġroq ‘ertrinken’ (Reinhardt 1894: 134) ~ S.E. Anatolia ġǝrǝq ‘se noyer’
(Grigore 2007: 110) ~ Aleppo ġǝreq, yǝġraq ‘être submergé’ (Barthélemy 1935–
69: 573) ~ Lebanon ġereq ‘se noyer’ (Feghali 1938: 805) ~ Palest ġiriq ‘ertrinken’
246 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
(Bauer 1957: 103) ~ Tripoli (Libya) ġreq ‘annegare’ (Cesàro 1939: 207) ~ Tunis
ġroq ‘il s’est noyé’; ġorq ‘profondeur’ (D. Cohen 1975: 95, 141) ~ Tripoli (Libya)
ġreg ‘annegarsi’ (Griffini 1913: 14) ~ Marazig ġreg, yaġrag ‘s’embourber, se
noyer’ (Boris 1958: 436) ~ Djidjelli ġarqān ‘noyé, trempé’ (Ph. Marçais 1956:
286) ~ Morocco ġṛeq ‘to drown’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 59).
Cf. Ghomara (Berber) leġraq ‘bottom’; ġreq ‘to drown’ (Mourigh 2016: 393).
490 ġ-f-r
ʿfn (MK) ‘cover (v), headcovering’; ‘umhüllen, umhüllen sein (besonders von
den verbundenen Augen)’; ʿfn.t (Pyr) ‘royal headcloth’; ‘Kopftuch’ (Ember
ف
apāru ‘to cover the head’ (M. Cohen 2011: 49) || Ar � �غم�����رmiġfar ‘helmet’ (Hava
1914: 120; Faulkner 1962: 43; Wb I 183; Calice 1936: 91; Hannig 1995: 138) ~ Akkad
1982: 530);
~ Levantine Ar ġafar/xafar ‘garder’ (Denizeau 1960: 149, 375) ~ Aleppo
ġaffāra ‘long et grand manteau’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 578) ~ Palest ġafra
‘Schlafdecke’ (Dalman VI 22) ~ Najd xafrāt ‘chaste, veiled women’ (Sowayan
1992: 263) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨maġfir, pl maġāfir⟩ ‘helmet or mail headcover under
it’ (Corriente 1997: 380).
491 ġ-l-f
ʿrf (MK) ‘pack, envelop, enclose; contain; bag’; ‘Beutel, Säckchen (für Schminke,
Goldstaub); einhüllen, einpacken, umschliessen’ (Gardiner 1957: 308; Faulkner
1962: 45; Breasted 1930: 521; Wb I 210–211; van der Plas & Borghouts 1998: 55)
~ Dem ʿrf ‘einschliessen, einwickeln (besonders von der Mumie); Binde’ (DG
66) ~ Copt ⲱⲣ(ⲉ)ⲃ ‘be enclosed, apart, quiet’ (Crum 1939: 528a) ~ Akkad ullupu
ف
‘a leather garment or cover’ (CAD XX 86) ~ Ugar ġlp ‘husk, lit., sheath; sea snail
(shell), murex’ (DUL 316) ~ Heb ָע ַלףʿālap ‘to cover’ (BDB 763) || Ar � ع��لġalafa
�غ ف
‘to envelop’; �� �لاġilāf ‘scabbard, case, sheath’ (Hava 1982: 533)
~ Iraq ġallaf ‘to put in a cover, envelope or case’ (Woodhead & Beene
1967: 338) ~ Aleppo ġlāf ‘fourreau (de sabre)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 580)
~ Al-Andalus ⟨ġilāf, pl ġuluf⟩ ‘foreskin’ (Corriente 1997: 382) ~ Tunis ġlāf ‘ce
qui enveloppe’ (D. Cohen 1975: 154) ~ Marazig ġlāf, pl -āt ‘couche de bourre
(līf ) enveloppant la palme non encore ouverte du palmier et d’ou naissent les
spathes (ð̣ eleʿ)’ (Boris 1958: 443) ~ Djidjelli ġlāf ‘envelopper’ (Ph. Marçais 1956:
266) ~ Malta ⟨għlief⟩ ‘lolla, guscio, veste del grano’ (Vassalli 1796: 325).
490. ġ-f-r – 494. ġ-l-l 247
492 ġ-l-q¹
ʿrq (MK) ‘vollenden (Lebenszeit); aufhören zu (tun); Ende, Grenze (des Lebens)’
(Hannig 1995: 151); ʿrqy (MK) ‘last day of the month’; ‘der letzte Monatstag’; ʿq
ّ �غ
‘elapse’ (Wb I 212; Faulkner 1962: 46; DLE I 80) ~ Dem ʿlq ‘aufhören’ (DG 68)
~ Copt ⲁⲗⲕⲉ ‘last day of the month’ (Crum 1939: 5b) || Ar � ��ل قġallaq ‘achever,
clore, terminer’ (Dozy II 224);
~ Aleppo ssāʿa tlāte ġalaq ‘il est trois heures juste’; ġallaq ‘conclure, ter-
miner; compléter’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 581) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨inġilāq θalāθīn
sanah⟩ ‘lapse of thirty years’ (Corriente 1997: 382) ~ Malta ⟨għalaq ħamsin
sena⟩ ‘he turned fifty’ (own obs.) ~ Tunis ġalaq ‘il a fermé’ (D. Cohen 1975: 97)
~ Morocco ġlaq ‘shutter’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 178).
493 ġ-l-q²
�غ
ʿrq/ʿnq ‘basket’ (DLE I 74; Faulkner 1962: 46) || Ar � ��ل قġalaq ‘basket’ (Hava
1982: 533);
~ Egypt ġalaq, pl ġulqān ‘native small basket, pannier’ (Spiro 1895: 434); ġilāʾ
‘mittelgroßer Korb’; ġalag ‘Tasche, Korb aus Reifengummi (für Erdarbeiten)’
(Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 339).
494 ġ-l-l
jꜣrrt ‘grapes’ (Wb I 183) ~ Dem ꜣllj ‘Weintrauben’ (DG 6) ~ Copt ⲉⲗⲟⲟⲗⲉ ‘grape’
ّ أ�غ
(Crum 1939: 54b) ~ Heb [* ] ָע ַללʿālal ‘glean (grapes or olives)’; עֹולֹלת
ֵ ʿōlēlōt
‘gleanings (of grapes and olives)’ (BDB 759, 760) || Ar � �لʾaġalla ‘to yield a good
crop’ (Hava 1982: 530);
~ Damascus ġalle, pl ġlāl ‘crop, harvest’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 57, 112)
~ Aleppo ġalle ‘récolte qu’on attend’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 581) ~ Lebanon
ġallīl ‘récolte abondante’ (Denizeau 1960: 376) ~ Tunis ġalla ‘fruit(s)’ (D. Cohen
1975: 60) ~ Takrūna ġalla arð̣ iyya ‘cucurbitacées et tomates’ (Marçais & Guîga
1958–61: 73) ~ Morocco ġella ‘fruit’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 80) ~ Djidjelli
ġolla ‘fruits, récolte’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 252) ~ Malta ⟨għalla, pl għelejjel⟩
‘prodotto della terra annuale’ (Vassalli 1796: 318).
248 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
495 ġ-m-m¹
�غ ّ ة
ʿmt (Gr) ‘Gewölk’ (Wb I 187) || Ar �� ��مġammah ‘wolkig oder sehr heiß’ (Wahr
mund II 366);
~ Damascus ġēme, pl ġyūm ‘cloud’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 44); ġmāme, pl
ġmām ‘nuage’ (Denizeau 1960: 377) ~ Egypt ġamām ‘clouds’ (Spiro 1895: 434,
438) ~ Tunis ġmām ‘brouillard’ (D. Cohen 1975: 155) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ġamāmah⟩
‘cloud’ (Corriente 1997: 383).
496 ġ-m-m²
gmw (MK) ‘grief, mourning’; ‘traurig, Traurigkeit’ (Ember 1930: 107; Faulkner
1962: 289; Wb V 169; Calice 1936: 214) ~ Sab ġmm ‘affliger’ (Avanzini 1980: 271)
‘ �غchagrin, ennui’ (Leslau 1938: 110) || Saf ġmt ‘sorrow’ (Al-Jallad
2015: 316) ~ Ar ّ � ġamm ‘affliction, distress, anxiety’ (Ambros 2004: 203);
~ Soq gamgamah
م
~ Iraq maġmūm ‘unhappy’ (van Ess 1918: 245) ~ Najd ġamm ‘grief, sor-
row, unhappiness, distress, anxiety’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 45) ~ Yemen ġamm,
pl ġumūm ‘preoccupazione’ (Rossi 1939: 191) ~ Syria maġmūm ‘verärgert’
(Behnstedt 1997a: 148) ~ Aleppo ġamm ‘chagrin, chagriner (qqn): (proprement)
couvrir le cœur; étouffer (le feu) en le recouvrant’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 584)
~ Damascus ġamm, pl ġmūm ‘distress’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 69) ~ Lebanon
ġamġam ‘to weigh on the heart’ (Frayha 1973: 125) ~ Palest ġamm ‘beküm-
mern jemanden; Harm’ (Bauer 1957: 50, 149) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ġumma⟩ ‘worry’
(Corriente 1997: 383) ~ Malta ⟨għomma⟩ ‘dolore o pena interna’ (Vassalli
1796: 327).
497 ġ-m-w
ʿmʿm (Med) ‘smear (vb.)’; ‘(die Füsse) reiben’; ʿmt ‘mud, muddy ground, mud
flat’; ʿmj ‘verschmieren (Weinkrüge mit Lehm)’; ʿmʿ ‘(die Füsse) reiben, frot-�غ
tieren’; ʿmʿ.t ‘Salbe zum [ein-]reiben’ (Faulkner 1962: 42; Wb I 185, 186) || Ar ��م�ا
ġamā ‘bedecken,�غdecken (Haus oder Dach mit Lehm und Schindeln)’ (Wahr
ً
mund II 366); ��مىġiman ‘the roof of a house; the covering of the roof, consist-
ing of earth, etc.’ (Lane 2299).
495. ġ-m-m ¹ – 501. ġ-w-r ¹ 249
498 ġ-m-y
gmwt (MK) ‘weakness’; gm.w ‘Schwäche (des Körpers, in den Gliedern), auch�غ
vom Herzen (das im Schwäche ist)’ (Faulkner 1962: 289; Wb V 169) || Ar ��مى
ġamā ‘tomber en défaillance, avoir un évanouissement’ (DAF II 508);
~ Aleppo ġǝmi ‘défaillir, avoir une faiblesse, se pâmer’; ġamma ‘causer une
défaillance à (qqn)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 585) ~ Palest ġimi ‘ohnmächtig
werden’ (Bauer 1957: 223) ~ Egypt ġimi ‘to faint’; iġma ‘fainting fit’ (Spiro 1895:
435).
499 ġ-n-y
�غ
‘musicians’ (Faulkner 1962: 192; Wb III 288; Lepper 2008: 48) || Ar �ّ � � نġannā ‘to
ḫny (Pyr) ‘to play music’; ‘tanzen’; ḫny.t/ḫnw (MK) ‘musizierende Tänzerinnen’;
500 ġ-n-m
�غ ن أ �غ
H̱ nmw (OK) ‘Khnum’; ‘Chnum (widderköpfiger Gott)’ (Faulkner 1962: 202;
Wb III 381; Calice 1936: 189; Loprieno 1995: 35) || Ar � � ġanam, pl � � ن���اʾaġnām
م م
‘Schaf, Hammel, Kleinvieh’ (Wahrmund II 368);
~ Najd ġanam, pl aġnām ‘sheep and goats, small cattle’ (Kurpershoek 1999:
435) ~ Egypt ġanam, pl aġnām ‘sheep’ (Spiro 1895: 432) ~ Palest ġanam ‘Schafe’
(Bauer 1957: 253) ~ Lebanon ġennām ‘berger (de moutons)’ (Denizeau 1960:
378).
501 ġ-w-r¹
ʿwꜣj (OK) ‘steal goods, rob s.o.’; ‘rauben’; ʿwꜣj ‘robber’; ʿwꜣt ‘robbery’ (Ember
1930: 34; Faulkner 1962: 39; Wb I 171) ~ Dem ʿwj ‘rauben’ (DG 58) ~ Sab ġwr ‘to
250 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
�غ
plunder’; hġr ‘faire un raid’ (Jamme 1962: 445; Avanzini 1980: 274) || Ar �ا رġāra
‘faire une excursion, une expédition contre une tribu, sur le territoire ennemi,
et y enlever les troupeaux’ (DAF II 515);
~ Marazig yġūr ‘überfallen, einen Raubzug machen’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2005:
24) ~ Najd aġār ‘to attack’ (Sowayan 1992: 287) ~ Aleppo ġāṛa, pl -āt ‘course
au galop contre l’ennemi, incursion’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 58 7) ~ Yemen ġār
‘difendere persona o cosa’ (Rossi 1939: 204) ~ Rwala ġāra ‘an attack’: maġārī
‘raids’ (Musil 1928: 251, 593) ~ ʿAnazeh ġār ‘courir en avant (pour attaquer ou
pour aider), se jeter sur’ (Landberg 1940: 57) ~ Sinai ġār ‘to run’ (Stewart 1990:
227); mġīr ‘running fast’ (de Jong 2011: 98) ~ Damascus ġāra ‘raid’ (Stowasser
& Ani 1964: 186); mǝġwār, pl maġawīr ‘Sturmtrupp, Stoßtrupp’ (Grotzfeld 1965:
165) ~ Egypt ġāyra, pl ġawāyir ‘raid, quarrel’ (Spiro 1895: 423) ~ Tripoli (Libya)
ġār ‘depredare’ (Griffini 1913: 79) ~ Ḥassāniyya ġāra ‘attaque’ (Taine-Cheikh
1990: 26).
502 f-t-t
ّف� ت
ptt (LE) ‘broken up (?)’ (DLE I 159) ~ Heb ָּפ ַתתpātat ‘to break, crumble’ (M.
Jastrow 1886: 1256) || Ar � � fatta ‘casser, broyer en petits morceaux, piler’ (DAF
II 531);
~ Kǝndērīb fatt ‘zerkrümmen, zerpflücken’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 104) ~ Aleppo
fatt, yfə́tt ‘réduire en menus morceaux (du pain, un biscuit); émietter’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 593) ~ Palest fatt ‘hat zerbröckelt’ (Kampffmeyer 1936:
53) ~ Egypt fatt/fattit/fatfit ‘cut into small pieces’ (Spiro 1895: 332) ~ Malta
⟨fettet, ifettet⟩ ‘cut (bread, etc.), dunk’ (Aquilina 1987: 329).
503 f-t-q
fdq (MK) ‘sever, divide, part, cut apart, cut off, sunder’; ‘zerteilen, ein Land ver-
ف
166; Wb I 583) || Ar � �ت�� قfataqa ‘fendre, rompre, défair, découdre’ (DAF II 535);
wüsten, etwas abreissen’; fdq ‘slice’; fdqw ‘sections’ (Faulkner 1962: 99; DLE I
~ Iraq fitag ‘slit, split open, a seam, undo the stitching; break out, break
through (liquids)’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 344) ~ Yemen fitaq ‘Bruch (med.)’
(Behnstedt 2006: 924) ~ Najd ⟨fattaq⟩ ‘öffnen’ (Socin 1901 III 298) ~ Damascus
ftāq ‘hernia’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 115) ~ Aleppo fataq ‘découdre’ (Barthélemy
1935–69: 593) ~ Palest fataq ‘auftrennen’ (Bauer 1957: 30) ~ Djidjelli fetteq
502. f-t-t – 506. f-ǧ-r 251
‘désunir, séparer’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 180) ~ U̅ lād Brāhīm fdeg ‘découdre’
(W. Marçais 1908: 21) ~ Malta ⟨fetaq⟩ ‘fendere, spaccare, scucire’ (Vassalli
1796: 187).
504 f-t-l
ف ة
ptr (LE) ‘Schnur’ (Wb I 565) ~ Akkad pitiltu ‘cord, lace, rope, string’ (Parpola
2007: 84) ~ Heb ָּפ ִתילpātīl ‘cord, thread (twisted)’ (BDB 836) || Ar �� ���تي���لfatīlah, pl
فت ئ
����ا �لfatāʾil ‘mèche de lampe ou de bougie’ (DAF II 538);
~ Yemen fatlah ‘Faden’ (Behnstedt 2006: 925); ftīleh ‘acciarino’ (Rossi 1939:
190) ~ Aleppo ftīla, pl ftēyel ‘mèche tortue ou tricotée de lampe, de bougie,
de chandelle, de veilleuse’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 594) ~ Tunis ftīla ‘mèche’
(D. Cohen 1975: 160) ~ Djidjelli ftīla ‘id.’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 79) ~ Malta ⟨ftila, pl
ftejjel⟩ ‘stoppino’ (Vassalli 1796: 185).
Cf. Ghomara (Berber) ftel ‘to spin’ (Mourigh 2016: 387).
505 f-ǧ-ǧ
ّف
pšš (Pyr) ‘straddle, spread’; psš ‘divide, division’; ‘ausspreizen, teilen’ (Faulkner
1962: 94; Wb I 560, 542) ~ Copt ⲡⲱϣ ‘to divide’ (Crum 1939: 277a)|| Ar � جfaǧǧa
�
‘to part the legs; he had the knees wide apart’ (Hava 1982: 546; Lane 2339); faǧǧ
‘mountain pass, defile’ (Ambros 2004: 209); fuǧāǧ chemin spacieux entre deux
montagnes’ (DAF 543);
~ Lebanon faǧǧ ‘fendre, briser; labourer pour la première fois’ (Denizeau
1960: 381) ~ Najd fiǧǧ (sg. afaǧǧ) ‘dessen Oberschenkel weit auseinanderstehen
(vom Kamel)’ (Socin 1901 III 298); faǧǧ, pl fǧūǧ ‘gap, mountain pass, a hollow
of some width between two hills, with a road running through it’ (Musil 1928:
678); ‘to cleave, to rip open’ (Sowayan 1992: 287) ~ Negev fuǧūǧ ‘open spaces’
(Bailey 1982: 136, fn 13) ~ Daθīna faǧǧ, pl fuǧūǧ ‘chemin entre deux montagnes,
défilé, recoin’ (GD 2398).
506 f-ǧ-r
fgn (Med) ‘sich entleeren, vom Menschen (mit فBezug auf Kot und Harn)’; ‘to
� �جfaǧara ‘donner une issue à l’eau
defecate’ (Wb I 580; Faulkner 1962: 99) || Ar �ر
et la faire couler’ (DAF II 544);
252 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
507 f-ḥ-ǧ
� فfaḥaǧa ‘marcher
�
pḥḏ (Med) ‘trennen (eins vom anderen)’ (Wb I 542) || Ar ح��ج
�
en écartant les talons et en rapprochant le devant des pieds’; ‘beim Gehen die
Zehen gegen einander, die Fersen auswärts kehren; die Füße des Thieres beim
Melken auseinander thun’ (DAF II 547; Wahrmund II 388);
~ Najd faḥḥaǧ ‘to spread one’s legs’ (Sowayan 1992: 287) ~ Daθīna faššax
‘écarter les jambes’ (Landberg 1909: 360) ~ Rwala faḥḥaǧ ‘to stand proudly on
one’s legs; to part hind legs (camel)’ (Musil 1928: 306, 333) ~ Mosul faḥḥaǧ ‘to
part one’s legs’ (Al-Bakrī 1972: 359) ~ Iraq faxxaǧ ‘walk with legs wide apart’
(Woodhead & Beene 1967: 346) ~ Syria afǧaḥ ‘lahm, hinkend’ (Behnstedt 1997a:
149) ~ Ḥama fašax ‘einen Schritt tun’ (Lewin 1966: 220) ~ Palest faḥaǧ, yefḥaǧ
‘schreiten mit grossen Schritten’ (Bauer 1957: 265); ‘franchir le seuil de la mai-
son sans poser le pied dessus; marcher en faisant de grands pas; exagérer’;
mfaḥḥǧe ‘assise les jambes écartées’ (Denizeau 1960: 382, 387); afkaḥ ‘mit krum-
men Füßen’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 56) ~ Kfarʿabīda faršex, ifaršex/faššex ‘écarter
les jambes’ (Feghali 1919: 31) ~ Egypt farǧaḥ ‘die Beine spreizen’ (Behnstedt &
Woidich 1994: 347); faršaḥ ‘to bestride’; fasxa ‘step, pace, stride’ (Spiro 1895:
456); fašax ‘to spread open (legs), open wide’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 657)
~ Marazig faḥḥaž ‘écarter les jambes, enjamber’ (Boris 1958: 454) ~ Djidjelli
feḥḥež ‘enjamber’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 177) ~ Collo faḥǧa ‘écartement des jambes’
(Lentin 1959: 217) ~ Malta ⟨ferċaħ, iferċaħ⟩ ‘spread one’s legs’ (Aquilina
1987: 323).
508 f-x-x
pḥꜣ (LE) ‘die Vogelfalle aus Holz’; grg pḥꜣ ‘die Falle stellen’ (Wb I 543) ~ Dem
pḫ ‘die Falle, die Schlinge’ (DG 139) ~ Copt ⲡⲁϣ ‘trap, snare’ (Crum 1939: 277a)
ف
~ Heb �ַּפ חpaḥ(ḥ) ‘bird trap’ (BDB 809) ~ Syr paḥḥā ‘snare, gin’ (CSD 440) ||
Ar � خfaxx ‘Schlinge, Schneuse, Fangnetz’ (Wahrmund II 390);
�
507. f-ḥ-ǧ – 510. f-r-x 253
~ Yemen faxx ‘Falle, Schlinge’ (Behnstedt 2006: 928) ~ Lebanon faxx, pl fxūx
‘piège à oiseaux’ (Denizeau 1960: 383) ~ Palest faxx, pl fxāx ‘Falle, Mausfalle’
(Bauer 1957: 107) ~ Kǝndērīb fǝxxa, pl fǝxax ‘Falle’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 104)
~ Egypt faxx, pl fuxūx/afxāx ‘trap, snare’ (Spiro 1895: 445).
Cf. Ghomara (Berber) lfexx ‘trap for birds’ (Mourigh 2016: 389).
509 f-x-ð
510 f-r-x
prḫ (LE) ‘aufblühen, sich entfalten (von Blüte und Blatt); ausbreiten; die Blüte’;
‘bloom’ (Wb I 532; DLE I 152): kṯ prḫw ‘the safflower blooms’ (Kitchen 1999:
ف
shoot’ (BDB 827) || Ar � ّر خfarraxa ‘to sprout (plant)’ (Hava 1982: 553);
388) ~ Akkad parāḫu ‘to sprout’ (CAD XII 145) ~ Heb ָּפ ַרחpāraḥ ‘to bud, sprout,
�
~ Lebanon farrex ‘pousser, germer’ (Feghali 1935: 121) ~ Palest farrax ‘sproßen’
(Bauer 1957: 284) ~ N. Yemen faṛx- ‘Küken’ (Behnstedt 1987: 286) ~ Kǝndērīb
farrax ‘Junge zur Welt bringen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 104) ~ Tenḥara (Yemen) fuxrī
‘poulet’ (Vanhove 1995: 265) ~ Oman nté farx ‘du bist ein Jüngling’ (Reinhardt
1894: 21) ~ Aleppo farrax ‘hatch ( farraxat al-bayḍah)’ (Al-Asadī VI 39) ~ Egypt
farxa ‘hen’ (Bauer 1895: 448) ~ Tunis fǝrx ‘pigeon’ (D. Cohen 1975: 141) ~ Malta
⟨ferħ, pl frieħ⟩ ‘polledro’ (Vassalli 1796: 193).
Cf. Ghomara (Berber) afrux ‘small chicken; boy, girl’ (Mourigh 2016: 388).
254 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
511 f-r-r
pꜣ (LE) ‘to fly, fly up’; ‘fliegen, auffliegen, fortfliegen’ (Faulkner 1962: 87; Wb I
494); prpr ‘umherspringen’; npꜣpꜣ ‘to flutter’; ‘fliegen (?) im Sinne von zittern’
ف
1939: 624a) ~ Ḥar fer ‘to fly’ (Johnstone 1977: 162) || Ar � ّرfarra ‘fly, escape’ (Hava
(Faulkner 1962: 130; Wb I 532, 248) ~ Copt ϥⲟⲣϥⲉⲣ ‘to fall, rush down’ (Crum
1982: 552);
~ Aleppo farr, yfǝrr ‘s’envoler pour fuir (: oiseau)’; rafraf ‘battre des ailes
avant de prendre son essor (oiseau)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 599, 286) ~ N. Yemen
farr ‘weglaufen’ (Behnstedt 1987: 286) ~ Palest farr ‘fliehen, herumstreichen’;
rafraf ‘flattern’ (Bauer 1957: 113, 155); farr ‘fureter pour trouver quelque chose’
(Denizeau 1960: 384); firr ‘Wachtel’ (Dalman I/1: 168) ~ Kǝndērīb farr ‘fliege,
wegfliegen’; farfare ‘Schmetterling’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 104, 105) ~ S.E. Anatolia
farr ‘fliegen’; farfar ‘fliegen lassen, aufscheuchen’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 309,
312) ~ Rwala farrat qaṭāt ‘the flight of the qaṭaʾ birds’; jifarfer ‘(the falcon) lifts
its wings’ (Musil 1928: 362, 33) ~ Yemen farr ‘fuggire’; ‘weglaufen, entfliehen’
(Rossi 1939: 210; Behnstedt 2006: 931) ~ Oman firār ‘entrinnen’ (Reinhardt 1894:
45) ~ Najd farr ‘flee, run, escape’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 436) ~ Kǝndērīb paṛpaṛ,
jpaṛpǝṛ ‘flattern (: Vogel)’; fǝrfāre ‘Schmetterling’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 22, 105)
~ Lebanon farfar ‘to try to fly’ (Frayha 1973: 128) ~ Egypt farr, yifirr ‘to escape’;
farfar ‘to flutter, flap the wings’; ‘weglaufen, davon fliegen’; faṛṛ, yifuṛṛ ‘flattern’
(Spiro 1895: 446; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 348) ~ Malta ⟨farfar⟩ ‘scuotere,
sbattere, scacciare da se’; ⟨perper, jperper⟩ ‘sventolarsi in quá e in lá’ (Vassalli
1796: 182, 559); ⟨ferfer⟩ ‘to flutter’; ⟨parpar, iparpar⟩ ‘to leave in a hurry’ (own
obs.); cf. Aram ַּפ ְר ֵּפרparpēr ‘move about’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 1236).
512 f-r-z/d
ف �ز ف
Dem prḏ ‘trennen’ (DG 137) ~ Copt ⲡϣⲣϫ ‘divide, be divided’ (Crum 1939: 271b)
|| Ar �رfaraza ‘to separate, to set apart’; �ردfarida ‘to be alone’ (Hava 1982:
554, 553);
~ Palest faraz ‘trennen’ (Bauer 1957: 305) ~ Lebanon faraz ‘défaire les ger-
bes et les étendre sur l’aire’ (Denizeau 1960: 385) ~ Egypt farad ‘to separate, set
aside’; faraz ‘to sort, select’ (Spiro 1895: 448) ~ Ḥassāniyya vṛad ‘séparer l’un
de l’autre’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 135) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nafraz, farazt⟩ ‘to separate
or set apart, to distinguish’; ⟨fard⟩ ‘unique’ (Corriente 1997: 398, 393) ~ Malta
⟨fired, jifred⟩ ‘separare’ (Vassalli 1796: 199).
511. f-r-r – 515. f-s-x 255
513 f-r-š
prḫ (Gr) ‘die Flügel ausbreiten’ (Wb I 532) ~ Dem prḫ ‘ausbreiten’ (DG
ف
(M. Cohen 2011: 197) ~ Heb ָּפ ַרׁשpāraš ‘spread out, spread’ (BDB 831) || Ar ����رش
136) ~ Copt ⲡⲱⲣϣ ‘be spread’ (Crum 1939: 269b) ~ Akkad parāsu ‘spread’
514 f-r-y
prj (MK) ‘ferocious bull; champion, hero; famous’; ‘als Bezeichnung eines
Streitlustigen; als Bezeichnung des Kampfstiers’; prj-ʿ ‘gewalttätig sein’; prj-ʿk
‘streng dich an’, adjektivisch: ‘tüchtig (an der Arbeit), tapfer (im Kampf)’; prj-
ʿk-i҆b ‘tapfer, kühn’ (Faulkner 1962: 91; Wb I 526–528; Hannig 1995: 285) ~ Heb
فأ أف
ֶּפ ֶראpereʾ ‘wild ass’ (BDB 825) ~ Aram ‘ פריהrevenge’ (Tal 2000: 707) ~ Mah farʾ
ف
‘brave’ (Johnstone 1987: 97) || Ar � �رfaraʾ/ �را ءfarāʾ, pl � �را ءʾafrāʾ ‘wilder Esel oder
dessen erwachsenes Junges’ (Wahrmund II 394);
~ Palest farā ‘Wildesel’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 54) ~ Egypt muftari ‘ruthless’
(Spiro 1895: 454; Badawi & Hinds 1986: 654) ~ Jihēna, Luxor imfiri ‘verwildert’:
albsās imfiriyya ‘die Katzen sind verwildert’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 353)
~ Tunis fra ‘il a transpercé’ (D. Cohen 1975: 28) ~ Najd fara ‘to rip open, to cut
wide open’ (Sowayan 1992: 287; Kurpershoek 1994: 318) ~ Yemen fārī ‘savage’
(Jayakar 1889: 268; GD 2416).
515 f-s-x
psḫ (MK) ‘disarray one’s hair; (intrans.) be distraught; be strewn’; ‘vom verwirrt
herabhängenden Haar; vom Herzen, das aus Angst in Verwirrung gerät’; psš
(Pyr) ‘divide’; psšt ‘sharing out, share, portion’; psšty ‘part, division’ (Faulkner
1962: 94, 95; Wb I 550) ~ Copt ⲡⲱϣ ‘divide, be separate’ (Crum 1939: 227a)
ف ف ة
Ar ���س�� خfasaxa ‘disjoindre, séparer, disloquer’ (DAF II 592); ��� ���س�� خfasxah ‘por-
~ Akkad šapāḫu ‘to scatter, disperse; confound, disrupt’ (CAD XVII/1: 3) ||
�
tion, share, bit’ (Hava 1982: 562);
256 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
~ Lebanon infasax ‘se disloquer’ (M. Feghali 1938: 84) ~ Palest fasax
‘décharger (une bête de somme)’ (Denizeau 1960: 391); tfassax ‘absplittern’
(Bauer 1957: 7) ~ Oman fasax ‘ausziehen’ (Reinhardt 1894: 144) ~ Marazig f ǝsex,
yafsax ‘enlever qq.ch.’ (Boris 1958: 464) ~ Morocco fsax ‘disjoindre, défaire;
rompre (une association)’; fsīx ‘abolition, abrogation’ (Prémare X 101).
516 f-z-ʿ
pzḫ (MK) ‘verwirrt sein’ (Wb I 550); psḫ ‘be distraught; be dishevelled, disar-
rayed’ (Ember 1930: 85; Faulkner 1962: 94) || Ar �ف�زfazaʿa ‘to fear’ (Hava 1982:
ع
561);
~ Oman fzŭʿ ‘fürchten’ (Reinhardt 1894: 135) ~ E. Arabia bazzaʿ ‘frighten’
(Holes 2001: 40) ~ Egypt fazaʿ ‘to fear’; yitfazzaʿ ʿala ‘jemanden drohen’ (Spiro
1895: 454; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 353) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨fazaʿ⟩ ‘be scared or
frightened’ (Corriente 1997: 398) ~ Malta ⟨beza’, jibza’⟩ ‘aver paura’ (Vassalli
1796: 29).
517 f-ḍ-x
pḥḏ (Med) ‘to cut up, cut open, sever; (intr) burst open (of cist)’; ‘aufschneiden
(ein Geschwür, ein Tier)’ (Faulkner 1962: 93; Wb I 542) ~ Heb ָפ ַצחpāṣaḥ ‘cause
ف
1204) || Ar � �� خ
to break or burst forth’ (BDB 822) ~ Aram pṣaḥ ‘to burst open’ (M. Jastrow 1886:
����ضfaḍaxa ‘zerschlagen, zertrümmern; sich öffnen (Geschwür)’;
� ف
‘to break (anything hollow)’ (Wahrmund II 417; Hava 1982: 655); �� ��ي�� خ
����ضfaḍīx
�
‘exprimé par la pression (raisin)’ (DAF II 606);
~ Yemen faðax ‘aufspalten, öffnen’ (Behnstedt 2006: 931) ~ Sinai fað̣ ð̣ax
‘to split open’ (Stewart 1990: 215) ~ Najd mitfaḍḍax ‘ruptured, broken, rent’
(Kurpershoek 1995: 425) ~ Tunis faḍīx ‘l’huile produite par le commencement
de la pression’ (Dozy II 273).
518 f-ṭ-s
pḏś (OK) ‘to stamp flat, flatten’; ‘(Gesicht, Nase) breitdrücken (eigentlich zer-
treten); zerstören, breitschlagen’ (Faulkner 1962: 96; Wb I 566; Hannig 1995:
ف
299; Calice 1931: 37) ~ Heb ַּפ ִּטיׁשpaṭṭīš ‘forge-hammer’ (BDB 809) ~ Copt ⲡⲱⲧⲥ
‘divide, split, crack’ (Crum 1939: 276b) || Ar ���ط��سfaṭisa ‘to be flat-nosed’ (Hava
516. f-z- ʿ – 520. f-k-k 257
519 f-ʿ-y
أ
ḥfꜣ.w (Pyr) ‘snake, serpent’; ‘Schlange’; ḥfꜣ.t ‘crawling posture’ (Faulkner 1962:
168; DLE I 309; Wb III 72) ~ Copt ϩⲟϥ ‘serpent’ (Crum 1939: 740b) || Ar � ��ف��عىʾafʿā,
أف
pl ٍ � ��اʾafāʿin ‘viper’ (Hava 1982: 569);
ع
~ Rwala afāʿi ‘short snakes’ (Musil 1928: 191) ~ Oman faʿ(á), pl foʿyān
‘Schlange’ (Reinhardt 1894: 57, 73) ~ Palest afʿā, pl afāʿi ‘Otter’ (Bauer 1957: 225)
~ Tunis lǝfʿa ‘vipère’ (D. Cohen 1975: 185) ~ Djidjelli lǝfʿa ‘id.’ (Ph. Marçais 1956:
327) ~ Cypriot Ar ʿafa, pl faʿi ‘snake, viper’ (Borg 2004: 372) ~ Marazig l-lifʿa,
pl alfāʿ ‘Viper’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2005: 101) ~ Ḥassāniyya lvāʿ ‘vipère’ (Taine-
Cheikh 1990: 154) ~ Malta ⟨lifgħa⟩ ‘vipera, serpe’ (Vassalli 1796: 439).
520 f-k-k
ّ ف
Dem pk ‘trennen’ (DG 141) ~ Ḥar fek ‘to loose’ (Johnstone 1977: 167) || Ar ��ك
fakka ‘trennen, lösen (Bande)’; ‘dégager, defaire le bouton (pour deboutonner
l’habit); séparer, disjoindre deux objets’ (Wahrmund II 427; DAF II 623);
~ Damascus fakk ‘to take apart’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 10) ~ Aleppo fakk
‘délier, dénouer, défaire, disjoindre’; fakfak ‘délier, défaire plusiers choses ou en
plusiers fois (une chose)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 618) ~ Lebanon fakk ‘he undid’
(Nasr 1966: 170); fakk ‘dételer (une bête de trait)’; fakkak ‘dévisser, faire dévisser’
(Denizeau 1960: 396) ~ Palest fakk ‘losmachen’ (Bauer 1957: 196) ~ Kǝndērīb
fakk ‘id.’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 106) ~ Arabia fukk er-rīj ‘loose the fasting spittle’
258 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
(Doughty 1888 II 595) ~ Hijaz fakk ‘to take apart’ (Omar 1975: 258) ~ Najd
mafakk ‘Handgelenk’ (Socin 1901 IIi 300) ~ Yemen fakk ‘liberare’ (Rossi 1939:
216) ~ ʿAnazeh fakk ‘délivrer, sauver’ (Landberg 1940: 59) ~ Iraq fakk ‘to unhar-
ness’ (van Ess 1918: 245) ~ Rwala fakkeh ‘he liberated [him]’ (Musil 1928: 448)
~ Sinai fakāk ‘resolution, settlement, of a dispute’ (Stewart 1990: 216) ~ Egypt
fakk ‘to untie, unscrew, take to pieces (a machine)’ (Spiro 1895: 462) ~ Tripoli
(Libya) fakk ‘difendere, liberare’ (Griffini 1913: 83, 161) ~ Tunis fǝkk ‘il a disjoint,
arraché’ (D. Cohen 1975: 99) ~ Djidjelli fekk ‘séparer, s’interposer’ (Ph. Marçais
1956: 160) ~ Morocco tfekk ‘come apart’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 36) ~ Malta
⟨fekkek, ifekkek⟩ ‘dislogare, scompaginare’ (Vassalli 1796: 190).
Cf. Ghomara (Berber) fekk ‘to rescue’ (Mourigh 2016: 386).
521 f-l-ǧ
plḏ (LE) ‘divide’ (Tait 1977: 114) ~ Dem plg ‘Wunde’; cf. Gk πληγη (DG 137)
~ Heb [ ] ָּפ ַלגpālag ‘split, divide’ (BDB 811) ~ Syr plag ‘to divide, part in two’ (CSD
ف
446) ~ Akkad palāku ‘to divide off’ (Parpola 2007: 79) ~ Jibb flg ‘to split open’
(Johnstone 1981: 57) || Ar ���ل��جfalaǧa ‘fendre en deux, partager en deux, romper’;
�
‘paralysis; hemiplegia or paraplegia’ (DAF II 627; Lane 2437);
~ Najd falag ‘to hit on the head’ (Sowayan 1992: 288) ~ Ḥaḍramawt falaǧ
‘tunneling’ (Radionov 2007: 79) ~ Iraq faliǧ ‘palsy, paralysis’ (van Ess 1918: 192)
~ Palest fāliǧ ‘Lähmung durch Schlaganfall’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 56).
522 f-l-q
ف
palāqu(m) ‘strike down; divide off’ (CDA 261, 147) || Ar � ���ل قfalaqa ‘he split it,
pa-l₂-ga ‘teilen’ (Helck 1971: 512) ~ Copt ⲡⲟⲗⲕ (Goodwin 1869: 146) ~ Akkad
523 f-l-y
ف ة
py/pi҆i ҆ (Med) ‘flea’; ‘der Floh’ (Faulkner 1962: 88; Ember 1930: 30; Wb I 502)
~ Copt ⲡⲏⲓ ‘leaper, flea’ (Crum 1939: 260b) || Ar ��� ��لايfilāyah ‘delousing of the
head’ (Hava 1982: 575);
~ Aleppo falla ‘épouiller’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 620) ~ Palest falla ‘lausen’
(Bauer 1957: 42) ~ Egypt falla, yfalli ‘pick out vermin (from the head, dress, bed,
etc.)’ (Spiro 1895: 465).
524 f-n-š
fnḏ (Pyr) ‘nose’; ‘Nase (als Ganzes von Mensch und Tier), Nase des Nilpferds,
der mit der Nase d.h. mit einem langen Schnabel (“Nase”)’; fnḏy ‘Beaky (epithet
of Thoth); fnḏ nb ‘jede Nase (= alle Leute)’ (Faulkner 1962: 98; Wb I 577–78;
ة ف ف
Hannig 2006: 966, 306; cf. DLE I 164) ~ Dem fnt ‘die Nase’ (DG 145) ~ Amh
afǝnčʾa ‘nose’ (Kane 1990: 1358) || cf. Ar �� � ن����ط��ي��سfinṭīsah, pl � ن���ا ط��ي��سfanāṭīs ‘dog’s
or wolf’s muzzle, pig’s snout’ (Hava 1982: 577);
~ Egypt manaxīr mifanniša ‘wide, flaring nostrils’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986:
111) ~ Morocco fneš ‘flat-nosed’ (Harrell 1966: 37) ~ Marazig feneš ‘mauvais
mulet’ (Boris 1958: 472) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨finnīš, pl fanānīš⟩ ‘mule’ [cf. Kabyle
afǝnniš ‘flat-nosed’] (Corriente 1997: 407) ~ Tunis fenneš ‘den Mund aufsperren’
(Stumme 1896: 176) ~ E. Arabia fansīn ‘flat-nosed’ (Qafisheh 1979: 249) ~ Najd
fannūs/afnas ‘mit eingedrückter Nase’ (Socin 1901 III 300) ~ Iraq fansa ‘eine
mit eingedrückter Nase’ (Meissner 1903, §26) ~ Mosul afnaṣ ‘a person with a
thick nose’ (Al-Bakrī 1972: 50) ~ Djidjelli netfenzer ‘je saignerai du nez’ (Ph.
Marçais 1956: 89).
525 f-n-d
fnḏ (22nd Dyn.) ‘be angry with’; ‘verachten, mißachten, zürnen (eigentlich
ف
‘schnauben’)’ (Wb I 577–78; IV: 115; Hannig 2006: 966, 306; cf. DLE I 164) || cf.
Ar � ن���دfanida ‘donner un démenti à quelqu’un, le déclarer menteur’ (DAF II 637);
ّف
� ن���دfannada ‘to contradict; to point out the faults of’; ‘to consider or to declare
s.o. a doting foolish babbler’ (Hava 1982: 576; Ambros 2004: 216);
~ Oman fened ‘be unjustly partial towards’: fened ʿAli ʿanni ane ‘he unjustly
preferred Ali to me’ (Brockett 1985: 173) ~ Egypt fannid ‘criticize’ (Badawi &
Hinds 1986: 466) ~ Lebanon fandal ‘mettre dans la perplexité, dans l’embarras’
(Denizeau 1960: 400) ~ Ḥaḍramawt fannad ‘distinguer, spécifier’ (Landberg
1901: 678).
260 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
526 f-n-y
ف ف
fn (MK) ‘be weak, infirm, faint’; ‘schwach sein’ (Ember 1930: 53; Faulkner 1962:
98; Wb I 576) || Ar � ن�ىfanā ‘to be worn out, to pine, to fade away’; �� faniya
ن�ي
‘schwinden, verschwinden’ (Hava 1982: 577; Wahrmund II 436);
~ Yemen fānī ‘Greisin, alte Frau’ (Behnstedt 1987: 287) ~ Najd fāni ‘vast
and empty; ceasing to exist’ (Kurpershoek 1994: 320) ~ Aleppo fǝni ‘périr’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 623) ~ Lebanon fene ‘s’épuiser’ (Feghali 1938: 448)
~ Palest tfāna ‘se dévouer, se consacrer à qqn, quelque chose’ (Denizeau
1960: 400) ~ Egypt infana ‘perish, cease to exist’ (Spiro 1895: 467) ~ Tunis fna
‘état de ce qui est passager’ (D. Cohen 1975: 156) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨fanā⟩ ‘perish’
(Corriente 1997: 407) ~ Ḥassāniyya vne ‘périr’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 112) ~ Malta
⟨fena, jifni⟩ ‘to wear out, weaken, waste’ (Aquilina 1987: 320).
527 f-h-d
mꜣfd.t (OK) ‘ein Katzenartiges Tier mit scharfen Krallen (Art Gepard?), eine
ف ف
Göttin; Pantherkatze’; ‘Mafdet, a cat-(?)goddess’ (Wb II 29; Brockelmann
1932: 105; Faulkner 1962: 103) || Ar ����ه�دfahd, pl ����هودfuhūd ‘Jagdpanther, Gepard’
(Wahrmund II 436);
~ Rwala fahad ‘panther’ (Musil 1928: 20, 549) ~ Damascus fahǝd, pl fhūd(e)
‘cheetah’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 40) ~ Palest fahid, pl fhūde ‘Pantherkatze,
Leopard’ (Bauer 1957: 226, 193) ~ Egypt fahd, pl fhūd ‘panther’ (Spiro 1895: 467)
~ Al-Andalus ⟨fah(a)d, pl fuhūd⟩ ‘cheetah, panther’ (Corriente 1997: 407).
528 f-w-l
pr/pu-l (NK) ‘die Bohne’ (Wb I 531); pu₂=-r (n/pl) ‘beans’, pwr/pri҆҆ ‘bean’ (Hoch
1994: 118; DLE 1 48, 151) ~ Copt ⲫⲉⲗ ‘beans’ (Crum 1939: 514a) ~ Akkad pūlu
ف
‘legumes’ (M. Cohen 2011: 123) ~ Heb פּוֹלpōl ‘bean’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 1141) ||
Ar �ولfūl ‘broad beans’ (Hava 1982: 580);
~ Aleppo fūl ‘des fèves, fève (en général)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 627)
~ Damascus fūl ‘broad bean’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 19) ~ Egypt fūl ‘id.’ (Spiro
1895: 468) ~ Douz fōla ‘eine Saubohne’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2014: 23) ~ Djidjelli
fūla ‘fève’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 256) ~ Morocco ful, u.n. -a ‘beans’ (Sobelman &
Harrell 1963: 20) ~ Ḥassāniyya vūl ‘fève (coll.)’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 69).
526. f-n-y – 531. q-d-d 261
529 q-b-r
qmꜣ (Pyr) ‘mourn’; ‘jemanden beklagen’; gmꜣ ‘mourning’ (Faulkner 1962: 278,
ق
289; Wb V 37; Hannig 1995: 856) ~ Akkad qebēru ‘to bury’ (M. Cohen 2011: 29)
~ Heb ָק ַברqābar ‘to bury’ (BDB 868) || Ar ���برqabara ‘enterrer, ensevelir’ (DAF
II 658);
~ Baghdad gabur ‘grave’ (Blanc 1964: 37) ~ Aleppo qabar ‘mettre au tom-
beau, enterrer’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 632, 243) ~ Damascus qabar ‘bury’
(Stowasser & Ani 1964: 31) ~ Lebanon qabber ‘enterrer’ (Feghali 1935: 765)
~ Qarṭmīn qabaṛ ‘begraben’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 324) ~ Egypt qabar ‘bury
the dead’ (Spiro 1895: 434).
530 q-ḥ-ḥ
531 q-d-d
(i) qd (Pyr) ‘Wesen, Art, Gestalt, Figur; nach Art von …, wie; in Ausdrücken für
ganz, durchaus’; ‘form, nature, reputation, character, disposition, extent’; qd.t
262 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
532 q-d-r
qd (Pyr) [< *qdr] ‘pot; use the potter’s wheel’; ‘Töpfe formen, bauen; der Topf’
(Faulkner 1962: 281; Wb V 72) ~ Copt ⲕϣⲧⲉ ‘turn, go round’ (Crum 1939: 124a)
ق ق
~ Akkad qadurtu ‘small pot’ (Parpola 2007: 239) ~ Soq žaðér ‘pot’ (Leslau 1938:
26) || Ar ��د رqidr, pl ��د ورqudūr ‘earthen pot, urn’; ‘chaudron, marmite en
cuivre’ (Hava 1982: 591; DAF II 686);
532. q-d-r – 535. q-r-b 263
~ Sinai gidr ‘large cooking-pot’ (Stewart 1990: 219) ~ Rwala židr ‘large kettle’
(Musil 1928: 70) [< *gdr < *qdr] ~ Oman qador ‘irdener Kochtopf’ (Reinhardt
1894: 43) ~ Iraq jidr ‘kettle’ (van Ess 1918: 166) ~ Yemen gidir, pl gudūr ‘mar-
mitta’ (Rossi 1939: 155) ~ E. Arabia ǧidir ‘pot’ (Johnstone 1967: 34) ~ Kǝndērīb
qǝdre ‘Tontopf’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 111) ~ Tangier qodra, pl qudūr ‘marmite’
(W. Marçais 1911: 422) ~ Ḥassāniyya gǝdra, pl gdūr ‘large round earthenware
water jar’ (Mali; Heath 2004: 65).
533 q-d-s
ق
qdš (NK) ‘syrische Göttin’ (Wb V 82) ~ Akkad quddušu ‘to consecrate’ (CAD XIII
46) ~ Heb ָקדֹוׁשqādōš ‘sacred, holy’ (BDB 872) || Ar ��د ��سquds/qudus ‘holiness’
(Hava 1982: 591);
~ Aleppo qaddīs ‘saint’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 642) ~ Palest qadāse ‘Heiligkeit’
(Bauer 151) ~ Egypt quds ‘holiness’ (Spiro 1895: 478) ~ Malta ⟨qdusija⟩ ‘santità,
beatitudine’ (Vassalli 1796: 417).
534 q-d-m
ق
qdm (MK) ‘das Ostland’ (Wb V 82) ~ Heb ִק ְד ָמהqidmāh ‘eastwards’ (BDB 870) ||
Ar ��دqudm ‘le devant, la première ligne’ (DAF II 690);
م
~ Aleppo qǝddām ‘en avant, devant’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 643) ~ Kǝndērīb
qǝddām ‘vor (örtlich)’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 112) ~ Palest quddām ‘in front of’ (Spiro
1895: 479).
535 q-r-b
ق ة
gꜣb ‘basket’ (Janssen 1975: 357) ~ Ge gǝrāb ‘leather bag’ (Leslau 1987: 660) ||
Ar �� �ر�بqirbah ‘grande outre’ (DAF II 704); cf. 92. ǧ-r-b;
~ Ḥaḍramawt qirbah ‘waterskin’ (Radionov 2007: 103) ~ Palest qirbe, pl
qirab ‘Schlauch (mittelgross für Wasser)’ (Bauer 1957: 258) ~ Negev ǧṛāb ‘goat-
skin’ (Henkin 2010: 264) ~ Iraq girba, pl girab ‘water skin; water bag made of
canvas; clay water jug’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 386) ~ qerrāba ‘flask’ (Blanc
1964: 20) ~ Rwala ǵirbah, pl grab ‘goatskin (holding 50 litres)’ (Musil 1928: 71)
~ Petra ǧerāb ‘ein Schlauch für Butterschmalz oder Mehl’ (Musil 1908: 138)
~ Sinai girbih, pl ágṛab ‘waterskin’ (de Jong 2011: 29, 53) ~ Oman qarbe, pl qrāb
‘Schlauch’ (Reinhardt 1894: 70) ~ Yemen girbeh, pl girab ‘otro di pelle; ghirba’
264 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
(Rossi 1939: 224, 211); ġarbin ‘Wasserschlauch’ (Behnstedt 1996: 895) ~ Tunis
gerba ‘id.’ (Stumme 1896: 45) ~ Sidi Bel Abbès gerba, pl greb ‘outre (peau de
bouc ou de chèvre)’ (Madouni-La Peyre 2003: 404) ~ Algiers gǝrba ‘outre’
(M. Cohen 1912: 166) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨qi/arbah, pl qirab⟩ ‘waterskin’ (Corriente
1997: 419).
536 q-r-d
qnd (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘baboon; be angry, furious; angry man’; ‘wütend werden,
ق ق
1962: 280; Wb V 579; Allen 2013: 49) || Ar � ْردqird, pl �رودqurūd ‘baboon, ape; the
in Zorn geraten, zürnen (vom Pavian gebraucht)’ (Ember 1930: 97; Faulkner
537 q-r-r
qrr (LE) ‘frog’; ‘der Frosch’ (Ember 1930: 97; Wb V 61; Hannig 1995: 863) ~ Dem
qrr/qll ‘der Frosch’ (DG 544, 546) ~ Copt ⲕⲣⲟⲩⲣ ‘frog’ (Crum 1939: 117a) || Ugar
ق
qr ‘noise, murmur’ (DUL 707) || Aram ‘ �ַק�ְר�ַק רcackle, quack; cry out’ (M. Jastrow
1886: 1427) || Ar � ّرqirr ‘Laubfrosch’; ‘grenouille’ (Wahrmund II 470; DAF II 699);
قق
�ر�رqarqara ‘coo, grumble’ (Hava 1982: 595);
~ Oman qorra, pl qrīr ‘Frosch’ (Reinhardt 1894: 74) ~ S.E. Anatolia qaṛṛ
‘Geräuschlaut’; qaṛqōra ‘Rassel’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 331) ~ Baghdad
ʿaqrōqa ‘frog’ (Blanc 1964: 86) ~ Khawētna gargar ‘schwatzen’ (Talay 1999: 144)
~ Lebanon qerr ‘grenouille’; qarr ‘coasser’ (Feghali 1938: 814) ~ Egypt yiqarqar
‘quacken (Frosch)’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 374); ǧaṛōṛa ‘Frosch’ (Behnstedt
& Woidich 1987: 60) ~ Mzāb gǝrr ‘il a roucoulé (pigeon)’ (Grand’Henry 1976:
128) ~ Sudan karkār ‘growl of camel’ (LDA 414) ~ Tunis gaṛgaṛ ‘grogner’
(D. Cohen 1975: 31) ~ Djidjelli qerqer ‘faire du bruit en roulant’ (Ph. Marçais
536. q-r-d – 539. q-r-ṣ 265
1956: 283) ~ Morocco qerqer ‘croak’ (Harrell 1966: 116) ~ Malta ⟨gerger, igerger⟩
‘far romore confuso’ (Vassalli 1796: 309).
538 q-r-š
ق
Dem qrš ‘zerbrechen’ (DG 545) || Ar ��� �رشqaraša ‘knirschen (mit den Zähnen)
knabbern, zerkauen; abschneiden, benagen’ (Wahrmund II 475); (cf. q-r-m-š);
~ Aleppo qaraš ‘croquer (une laitue, une gimblette)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69:
648) ~ Palest qaraš/qarqaš ‘knirschen beim Essen von Trockenem, Hartem’;
qarraš, iqarreš ‘faire croquer, faire broyer (avec les dents)’ (Bauer 1957: 176, 51;
Denizeau 1960: 411).
539 q-r-ṣ
kršt (LE) ‘sorte de pain’; ‘Art Gebäck’ (Lambert 1925: 132; Wb V 82) ~ Akkad
karāṣu ‘pinch off, break off, nip’ (Parpola 2007: 47) ~ Copt ⲕⲱⲣϫ ‘cut off, break
off’; ⲕⲣⲟⲩϫ ‘a baked or fried cake’ (Crum 1939: 119a, b) ~ Heb �ָק�ַר ץqāraṣ ‘cut
ق
dough’ (BDB 902) ~ Amh qwärräsä ‘tear off a piece of ǝnǧara-bread to eat’
(Kane 1990: أ722) ~ Mah qǝrūṣ ‘to nip’ (Johnstone 1987: 236) || Ar �ر�صqurṣ, n.un.
ق ة ق ق
-a, pl � �را �صʾaqrāṣ/�� �ر�صqiraṣah/ �را �صqirāṣ ‘round cake of bread’ (Hava 1982:
598; cf. Dozy II 336);
~ Najd girṣ ‘flat loaf of unleavened bread made of flour, water and salt’; ‘das
ungesauerte Brot in Fladen’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 429; Hess 1938: 113) ~ Yemen
gurṣ ‘pane in generale’ (Rossi 1939: 139); gurṣoh ‘sein Laib Brot’ (Goitein 1934:
109) ~ Sinai gurṣ ‘a small round of bread baked under the embers of a fire;
a type of bread’ (Stewart 1990: 17, 222) ~ Aleppo qǝrṣ, pl qrāṣ ‘petite galette’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 648) ~ Çukurova qirṣ, pl qrūṣ ‘Teigklumpen, den man
dann zu Fladen ausrollt’ (Procházka 2002: 177) ~ Lebanon qǝrṣ (pl qrāṣ) bayḍ
‘petit pain dont la farine est pétrie avec un œuf, et qui est tout rond’ (M. & J.
Feghali 1978: 52, fn 1) ~ Palest qurṣ, pl (a)qrāṣ ‘Brotfladen vom ṣāj- und mälle-
Brot; Scheibe’; qurṣa, pl qrāṣ ‘Klößchen’ (Bauer 1957: 67, 255, 175, 160), qur(u)ṣ,
pl iqrāṣ ‘Aschenbrot’ (Bīr Zēt; Schmidt & Kahle 1918 I 294), ‘gesäurte oder ung-
esäuerte Kuchen’ (Dalman VI 61) ~ Tunis qoṛṣa ‘pain rond’ (D. Cohen 1975:
147) ~ Mosul qōṣa, pl qǝraṣ ‘runder Brotlaib’ (O. Jastrow 1979: 72) ~ Iraq gurṣa,
pl guraṣ ‘flat loaf (of bread)’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 386) ~ ʿAqra qōṣa, pl
qǝwaṣ ‘kleinerer, dickerer Fladen’ (O. Jastrow 1990: 396) [< qrṣ].
266 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
540 q-r-ʿ
ق
qrʿ (19th Dyn.) ‘der Schild’ (Wb V 59) || Ar �رqaraʿa to strike’ (Hava 1982: 599);
ع
~ Lebanon maqrēʿa ‘fouet’ (M. Feghali 1933: 1) ~ Najd garaʿ ‘bespringen’
(Hess 1938: 83) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨naqraʿ, qaraʿt⟩ ‘to hit, to knock at the door’
(Corriente 1997: 423).
541 q-r-f¹
krp (Amarna) ‘scrape out (inscription); efface’; ‘eine Inschrift zu tilgen’ (Faulkner
1962: 288; DLE II 175; Wb V 135) ~ Dem qrp ‘enthüllen’ (DG 543) ~ Heb ָק ַלףqālap
ق ف
‘scrape, peel, pare’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 1381) ~ Ge qarafa ‘peel off’ (Leslau 1987:
441) || Ar �� �رqarafa ‘entrinden, abhäuten, bloslegen (Geschwür)’; ‘enlever
l’écaille, la croûte, par exemple, de la plaie’; ‘peel off (fruit)’ (Wahrmund II 479;
DAF II 720; Hava 1982: 600);
~ Aleppo qaraf ‘rompre le bout de (qqe)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 651)
~ Diyarbakır qaṛaf ‘brechen, abbrechen’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 335) ~ Malta
⟨giref, jigref⟩ ‘to scratch’ (Aquilina 1987: 437).
542 q-r-f²
qrf.t/qrff (Med) ‘chest, bag’; ‘Beutel (aus Leinen) für Medikamente und für
Gold, Silber, etc.’ (Faulkner 1962: 280; DLE II 156; Wb V 60) ~ Dem qrft ‘Beutel’
ق ف
(DG 411, 544) ~ Akkad karpu ‘pot, earthenware container’ (CAD VIII 221) ~ Sab
krf ‘basin, cistern’ (Beeston et al., 1982: 79) || Ar �� �رqarf ‘larder for meat’ (Hava
1982: 600);
~ Najd garf, pl grūf ‘Schlauch aus Kamelleder’ (Hess 1938: 119) ~ Daθīna
qārūfa ‘seau en métal pour traire’ (GD 2483) ~ Oman qfīr, pl qfor ‘Korb’
(Reinhardt 1894: 71) ~ Rwala qarf, pl qarāf ‘small leather cannister for coffee
beans’ ~ Kǝndērīb qaffōra ‘Korb’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 116) ~ Palest qafīr, pl qufrān
‘Korb (groß, aus Bast, konisch)’ (Bauer 1957: 180) ~ Marazig garfa, pl grāf ‘sac
en peau de chameau ou de mouflon’ (Boris 1958: 491).
543 q-r-q
grg/gng (OK) ‘falsehood, lie’; ‘Lügen, Unwahrheit, Unrecht’; grg ‘snare wild-
fowl’; grgy ‘liar’; ‘Lügner’; grg.t ‘Lügnerin, Frevlerin’; mgrg ‘der Lügner (als
Bezeichnung des Seth)’ (Ember 1930: 74; Hannig 2003: 1372; Faulkner 1962:
540. q-r- ʿ – 546. q-r-m 267
قق
290, 291; Wb V 189, 177; II 164; Schipper 2005: 99) || Ar � �رqaraqa ‘tromper
quelqu’un’ (DAF II 722);
~ Malta ⟨qerq⟩ ‘inganno, frode’ (Vassalli 1796: 419) ~ Lebanon qarraq ‘taqui-
ner, se moquer de, railler, plaisanter’ (Denizeau 1960: 414) ~ Egypt qarraq ‘say
witty vulgar things with play on words’ (Spiro 1895: 484).
544 q-r-q-r¹
qꜣqꜣw (OK) ‘Art Schiff’; ‘bateau’ (Calice 1936: 104; Vycichl 1972: 218); qr (LE) ‘Art
Lastschiffe für Korn’ (Wb V 21) ~ qrr ‘ship’; qwrw ‘ships’ (DLE II 157, 377); qꜣqꜣ
قق ق ق
(pWestcar) ‘Flussschiff’ (Lepper 2008: 44) ~ Dem qrj ‘Art Schiff’ (DG 543) ||
Ar �ر�ورqurqūr, pl �را �ي��رqarāqīr ‘vaisseau long et grand’ (DAF II 723);
~ Al-Andalus ⟨qurqūrah, pl qarāqir⟩ ‘sorte de vaisseau marchand qui par-
fois etait d’une grandeur enorme’ (Dozy II 335).
545 q-r-q-r²
gꜣgꜣ (LE) ‘cackle’; ‘schnattern (der Gans)’ (Faulkner 1962: 288; DLE II 185; Wb
V 157; Caminos 1954: 596; Hannig 1995: 895); cf. Ancient Gk κροκκάω ‘cluck (of
قق
birds)’ (GEL 997) ~ Aram ‘ ַק ְר ַקרcackle, quack; cry out’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 1427)
|| Ar �ر�رqarqara ‘gémir, roucouler (se dit des pigeons); grogner’ (DAF II 722);
~ N. Yemen gurrārah ‘Frosch’ (Behnstedt 1987: 289) ~ Aleppo qarqar ‘faire
entendre un gargouillement; gargouiller (ventre)’; qarqūr, pl qaraqīr ‘vieux
coq; agneau’; qruqqa ‘poule qui glousse’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 653, 652) ~ Iraq
karkar ‘burst into loud laughter’ (Masliyah 2017: 72) ~ Lebanon qarqar, yqar-
qar ‘se plaindre, grommeler, murmurer’ (Denizeau 1960: 414) ~ Egypt yikirkēr
‘kollern (Truthahn)’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1999: 396) ~ Morocco qerqer ‘croak’
(Harrell 1966: 116) ~ Djidjelli qeṛqāṛa ‘qui glousse, qui fait du bruit en roulant’;
afqaṛqāṛ ‘crapaud’; agṛo ‘grenouille’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 31, 313) ~ Malta ⟨gerger,
igerger⟩ ‘grugnire, far romore confuso’; ⟨qarqar, jqarqar⟩ ‘sonum cum mur-
mure edit venter’ (Vassalli 1796: 309).
546 q-r-m
ka=ma=-r (LE) [*garma] ‘tusks, ivory’ (Hoch 1994: 321) ~ Heb גֶ ֶרםgerem ‘bone’
ق
~ Aram gǝram ‘bone, stripped bare (skeleton, bone)’ (BDB 175; M. Jastrow 1886:
270) || Ar �رqarama ‘to gnaw’ (Hava 1982: 601);
م
268 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
~ Aleppo qaram ‘couper avec les dents’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 643) ~ Iraq
garmaṭ ‘nibble, munch, chew’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 388) ~ Lebanon
gargam ‘dépouiller un os de sa viande’ (Denizeau 1960: 78) ~ Egypt ǧarǧam ‘be
mean, stingy’ (Spiro 1895: 484) ~ Malta ⟨gerrem, igerrem⟩ ‘to gnaw’ (Aquilina
1987: 432).
547 q-r-m-š
ق
� � شqarmaša
ṯꜣmś (LE) [< *črmš < *krmš] ‘essen, verzehren’ (Wb V 355) || Ar ���م ر
‘to eat anything dry’ (Hava 1982: 601);
~ Aleppo qarmaš, yqarmeš ‘manger qqe de dur, de croquant’ (Barthélemy
1935–54: 653) ~ Egypt qaraš/qarmiš ‘eat (crisp or dry bread, etc.)’ (Spiro 1895:
482) ~ Sfax garmiš ‘id.’ (Zwari & Sharfi 1998: 576) ~ Malta ⟨qarmeċ, iqarmeċ⟩
‘scrosciare il cibo’ (Vassalli 1796: 408).
548 q-s-m
ق ة
kṯm (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘Prahlereien’; ‘divination, omen’ (Wb V 148; Hoch 1994:
339) ~ Heb ֶק ֶסםqesem ‘divination’ (BDB 890) || Ar �� ���س���مqismah ‘Portion, Loos,
Geschick’ (Wahrmund II 489);
~ Damascus qisme ‘fate’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 87) ~ Palest qisme ‘Fatum’
(Bauer 1957: 108); qasam ‘conjuration’ (Denizeau 1960: 418) ~ Egypt qisma ‘fate’
(Spiro 1895: 486) ~ Najd magsūm, pl magāsīm ‘fated’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 445)
~ Yemen magsūm ‘destino’ (Rossi 1939: 204).
549 q-š-š
gꜣš (LE) ‘Schilfrohr (als Pflanze die im Wasser wächst; als Material zu Körben,
auch beim Bauen verwendet)’ (Erman 1904: 139; Wb V 156) ~ Dem gš ‘Rohr,
Schilf’ (DG 68) ~ Copt ⲕⲁϣ ‘reed, stalk, pen’; ‘Schilfrohr, Schreibrohr, Pfahl’
ّ ق
(Crum 1939: 130a; Kosack 2013: 111)] ~ Heb ַקׁשqaš(š) ‘stubble, chaff’ (BDB 905)
|| Ar ��� � شqašš ‘stubble, straw, rush’ (Hava 1982: 606);
~ Lebanon qǝšš ‘kind of rush for weaving mats, wicker chairs and tables’
(Wehr 1979: 894) ~ Palest qašš samār ‘joncs’ (Denizeau 1960: 418; cf. Dalman VI
164) ~ Najd gašših ‘straw’ (Sowayan 1992: 290) ~ Aleppo qašš ‘brins de paille’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 658) ~ Damascus qašš ‘straw’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964:
227) ~ Egypt gašš ‘Stroh’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1985: 117).
547. q-r-m-š – 552. q-ṭ-f 269
550 q-ṣ-ṣ
i҆qś ‘abschneiden’ (Wb I 138; Calice 1936: 24); cf. Heb [* ] ָק ַצץqāṣaṣ ‘cut off’ (BDB
ّ ق
893) || Akkad kaṣāṣu ‘cut short, trim’ (Parpola 2007: 48); gaṣṣu ‘cut, hewn’
(M. Cohen 2011: 53) || Ar ����صqaṣṣa ‘cut off, clip’ (Hava 1982: 607);
~ Aleppo qaṣṣ ‘couper avec des ciseaux’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 660) ~ Palest
qaṣṣ ‘abschneiden mit der Schere’ (Bauer 1957: 7) ~ Tunis qaṣṣ ‘il a coupé’
(D. Cohen 1975: 51).
551 q-ṭ-ʿ
ق
qa=ḏa=ḥa (LE) ‘cut off, break’ (Hoch 1994: 312) || Ar �����طqaṭaʿa ‘cut; intercept;
ع
cross (river), etc.’ (Hava 1982: 614);
~ Aleppo qaṭaʿ ‘couper, en deux seulement; trancher; faire cesser; traverser’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 667) ~ S.E. Anatolia qaṭaʿ ‘schneiden, abschneiden,
durchschneiden’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 340) ~ Egypt qaṭaʿ ‘cut’ (Spiro 1895:
493).
552 q-ṭ-f
qḏf (MK) ‘gather flowers, sayings’; ‘abpflücken: bildlich vom Sammeln von
Sprüchen; abreißen (Pflanzen); Nachlese’ (Faulkner 1962: 282; Wb V 81; Hannig
1995: 869) ~ Copt ⲕⲱⲧϥ ‘gather (corn, fruit, wood)’ (Crum 1939: 129b) ~ Akkad
qatāpu ‘pluck, pick’ (CAD XIII 164) ~ Heb ָק ַטףqāṭap ‘to pluck off’ (BDB 882)
ق ف
~ Amh qäṭṭäfä ‘pick (flowers, leaves, fruit)’ (Kane 1990: 841) ~ Ge qaṭafa ‘pick,
pluck’ (Leslau 1987: 453) || Ar ��� ���طqaṭafa ‘gather (grapes); pluck (fruit)’; ‘cuel-
lir, enlever le raisin sur un cep de vigne; déchirer quelque chose avec les ongles’
(Hava 1982: 616; DAF II 772);
~ Aleppo qaṭaf ‘ceuillir (des fleurs, des fruits)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 670)
~ Damascus qaṭaf ‘pick (fruit)’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 172) ~ Arbǝl qaṭaf
‘pflücken’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 341) ~ Palest qaṭaf ‘id.’ (Bauer 1957: 230)
~ Egypt qaṭaf ‘pluck (flowers or fruits)’ (Spiro 1895: 494) ~ Malta ⟨qartaf, jqar-
taf⟩ ‘tagliar le cime, sfiorare’ (Vassalli 1796: 406).
270 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
553 q-ṭ-n
ْق
Dem gtn/gdn ‘ein Gewand’ (DG 594) ~ Akkad kitinnû ‘linen’ (CAD VIII 465)
~ Heb ְכתֹנֶ תkǝtōnet ‘coat’ (BDB 509) || Ar � ���ط� نquṭn ‘coton, vêtement en étoffe
de coton’ (DAF II 774);
~ Aleppo qǝṭǝn ‘coton’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 670) ~ Kǝndērīb qǝṭǝn
‘Baumvolle’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 116) ~ Palest quṭun ‘id.’ (Bauer 1957: 42) ~ Egypt
quṭn ‘cotton’ (Spiro 1895: 495) ~ Djidjelli qṭan ‘coton’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 85).
554 q-f-z
ق
ḏpq (LE) ‘Tänzer’ (Wb V 568; Hoch 1994: 385) ~ Heb ָק ַפץqāpaṣ ‘(Pi.) hop, spring’
(BDB 891) || Ar �����ف�زqafaza ‘to spring (gazelle)’; qafiṣa ‘be lively, nimble’ (Hava
1982: 620);
~ Aleppo qafaz ʿala ‘couvrir, saillir (une femelle: chien, chat)’ (Barthélemy
1935–69: 672) ~ Damascus qafaz ‘spring’; qamze/qavze ‘leap (n)’ (Stowasser &
Ani 221: 135) ~ Khawētna gēmaz ‘springen’ (Talay 1999: 31) ~ Kǝndērīb qafaz
‘springen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 116) ~ Oman gemez ‘überspringen’ (Reinhardt 1894:
144) ~ Palest qafaz ʿan ‘springen über’ (Bauer 1957: 284) ~ Egypt qafaz ʿala
‘jump, spring, skip’; itqammiz ‘skip about’ (Spiro 1895: 495; 501) ~ Al-Andalus
⟨naqfaz, qafazt⟩ ‘to jump or hop’ (Corriente 1997: 435) ~ Malta ⟨qabbież⟩ ‘bal-
lerino’ (Vassalli 1796: 390).
555 q-l-b
qnb (OK) ‘bend, bow itself; subjugate’ (Faulkner 1962: 280); qꜣb (Med) ‘zusam-
menfalten; verdoppeln (neben verdreifachen, vervierfachen; auch in dem
Ausdruck: zehnfältig); Windung, Krümmung’; ‘fold over, double over’ (Erman
1904: 132; Wb V 8; Rössler 1971: 304; Faulkner 1962: 275, 280; van der Plas &
ق
Borghouts 1998: 287): qꜣb–n.f-rʿ ‘möge Re ihm (die Lebenszeit?) verdoppeln!’
(Ranke 1935: 45) ~ Copt ⲕⲱⲃ ‘be doubled’ (Crum 1939: 98b) || Ar � ��ل� بqalaba
‘tourner, retourner (un objet dans un sens ou dans un autre, ou dans tous les
sens)’ (DAF II 796);
~ Sinai tigāḷabaw ‘each tried to throw the other to the ground’ (Stewart 1990:
220) ~ Iraq qilab ‘change’; giḷab ‘turn, turn over’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 376,
393) ~ Aleppo qalab ‘tourner dans l’autre sens; se renverser (: voiture); chavirer
(: barque)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 674) ~ Palest qalab ‘umwenden’ (Bauer 1957:
553. q-ṭ-n – 558. q-l- ʿ¹ 271
315) ~ Egypt qalab ‘to turn over, upset, overturn’ (Spiro 1895: 497) ~ Tunis aqlǝb
‘retourne!’ (D. Cohen 1975: 98).
The following entries exemplify grammaticalization of Old Egyptian noun qꜣb and of its
Arabic cognates.
m-qꜣb ‘in the midst of’; ‘im Inneren von …; innerhalb von …’ (Faulkner 1962:
275; Wb V 10); m-qb ‘midst’ (DLE II 147); m-qꜣb ‘à l’intérieur de; parmi’ (Herbin
1994: 531) ~ Akkad qerbuْ‘middle’ (M. Cohen 2011: 134) ~ Heb ‘ ֶק ֶרבinward part,
ق ق
midst’ (BDB 899) || Ar � ���ل� بqalb, pl � ���لو بqulūb ‘heart’ (Hava 1982: 323);
~ Egypt fi qalb bētoh ‘inside his house’ (Spiro 1895: 498) ~ Mharde b-qalb ‘in
der Mitte von, innerhalb von’ (Yoseph 2012: 62) ~ Lebanon bel-qelb ‘à l’envers’
(Feghali 1938: 409) ~ Bišmizzīn mʿabba b-ʾalb hal-kyās ‘die in die Tuchen gefüllt
wird’ (Jiha 1964: 80) ~ Malta ⟨qalb⟩ ‘tra, fra, infra’ (Vassalli 1796: 399); ⟨bil-
maqlub⟩ ‘upside down’ (own obs.).
556 q-l-x
ّق
Dem qlẖ ‘schlagen, klopfen’ (DG 547) ~ Copt ⲕⲱⲗϩ ‘to strike, knock’ (Crum
1939: 106b) || Ar ���ل�� خqallaxa ‘to lash with a whip’; ‘heftig peitschen’ (Hava 1982:
�
623; Wahrmund II 518);
~ Lebanon qalḥan ‘couper les branches d’un arbre’ (Denizeau 1960: 429).
557 q-l-s
ق
qi҆s/qi҆ś/qꜣś (Med) ‘to vomit’; ‘sich erbrechen, das Erbrechen’ (Faulkner 1962:
276; Wb V 17; Ember 1930: 18) || Ar ���ل��سqalasa ‘cracher ou vomir, jeter quelque
ْق
chose hors de la bouche en une seule fois’; ���ل��سqals ‘vomitus’ (DAF II 800;
Wahrmund II 520);
~ Lebanon qalas ‘to remove the crust of a wound’ (Frayha 1973: 143)
~ Al-Andalus ⟨alqalasu⟩ ‘vomit’ (Corriente 1997: 438).
558 q-l-ʿ¹
ّ
qꜣʿ (MK) ‘vomit’; ‘ausspeien, sich erbrechen’ (Faulkner 1962: 275; Wb V 7) ||
ق
Ar ���لqallaʿa ‘arracher une chose de sa place’ (DAF II 802);
ع
~ Malta ⟨qalla’, iqalla’⟩ ‘cause to vomit’ (Aquilina 1987: 648) ~ Al-Andalus
⟨qallaʿ⟩ ‘dégoûter, soulever le cœur’ (Dozy II 396).
272 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
559 q-l-ʿ²
ق ة
qa=ra=ʿa (LE) ‘shield’ [*qilʿa] (Hoch 1994: 298) ~ Heb ֶק ַלעqelaʿ ‘curtain’ (BDB
887) || Ar �� ���ل�عqalʿah ‘sail of a ship’ (Hava 1982: 625);
~ Palest qalaʿ, pl qulūʿ ‘Segel’ (Bauer 1957: 271) ~ Egypt qalaʿ, pl qulūʿ ‘sail’
(Spiro 1895: 499); gilʿa ‘Segel’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 392).
560 q-l-q-s
561 q-l-l¹
qꜣj ‘tall, high, be high’ (Faulkner 1962: 275); qꜣj.tّ ‘hochgelegenes Land, Hügel’
ق
(Wb V 6); qꜣ ‘être élevé’ (Herbin 1994: 547) || Ar ��لqalla ‘to lift, raise’ (Hava 1982:
ة ّ�قن ن ق
622); ���� qunnah, pl � ��� نqunan ‘Bergspitze’ (Wahrmund II 532);
~ Ḥaḍramawt qall/qann ‘monter’ (Landberg 1901: 1763) ~ N. Yemen Gullit
Masʿūd ‘Name eines Berges’ (Behnstedt 1987: 292) ~ Najd igtall ‘to rise up’
(Kurpershoek 1999: 448) ~ Rwala qenna ‘an isolated conical hill on top of which
a beacon is lit whenever the enemy means to attack herds grazing far from
the camp’ (Musil 1928: 680) ~ Ḥassāniyya gǝnniyye, pl gnāni ‘sommet’ (Taine-
Cheikh 1990: 137) ~ Aleppo qǝlla, pl qǝlal ‘tour fortifiée’ (Barthélemy 1935–69:
678) ~ Egypt gall ‘hochheben’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 393) ~ Marazig gaḷḷ
‘soulever, emporter’ (Boris 1958: 505).
562 q-l-l²
gꜣw (Pyr) ‘be narrow, constricted; lack, be lacking, deprive’; ‘eng sein, beengt
sein; Mangel, Not’; gꜣj (LE) ‘jemanden schmähen; schmähende Rede’; n gꜣw
559. q-l- ʿ² – 564. q-m-ḥ 273
‘through lack of’; gꜣwt ‘lack, want’ (Faulkner 1962: 287, ّ ق288; Wb V 151, 152 149)
~ Heb [ ] ָק ַללqālal ‘be slight, trifling’ (BDB 886) || Ar ��لqalla ‘wenig, in geringer
Menge oder Zahl sein; sich vermindern’ (Wahrmund II 516); qallala ‘to lessen,
diminish’; qilla ‘paucity, smallness, rarity’ (Hava 1982: 622);
~ Palest qallal ‘schmälern’; qalīl il-ʿarḍ ‘schmal’ (Bauer 1957: 261); qilla
‘Knappheit’ (Bauer 1957: 176) ~ Sinai gaḷḷ mugdārna ‘he slighted us’; gillit N
‘lack of N’ (Stewart 1990: 221) ~ Najd gall ‘to be little, scarce’ (Kurpershoek
1995: 433) ~ Baghdad gella ‘dearth’; qalīl ‘a little’ (Blanc 1964: 39) ~ Yemen gilleh
‘scarsità’ (Rossi 1939: 235) ~ Egypt qilla ‘scarcity, want, paucity’ (Spiro 1895: 497)
~ Marazig gella ‘absence totale, manqué absolu’ (Boris 1958: 505) ~ Ḥassāniyya
glīl ‘rare’ (D. Cohen 1963: 34) ~ Djidjelli qellīla ‘indigente’ (Ph. Marçais 1956:
279).
563 q-l-l³
قّ ة ق
gꜣw (LE) [< *gll] ‘Napf, Schale aus Ton’ (Wb V 150) || Ar �� ��لqullah, pl ��لا لqilāl
‘irdener Wasserkrug, besonders großer’ (Wahrmund II 522);
~ Marazig goḷḷa, pl gḷāḷ ‘cruche, gargoulette’ (Boris 1958: 505) ~ Egypt qulla
‘native water-bottle’; ‘Wasserkrug’ (Spiro 1895: 500; Behnstedt & Woidich
1994: 393) ~ Tripoli (Libya) gulla ‘boccia (d’argilla, per acqua)’ (Griffini 1913:
32) ~ Tunis qolla, pl qlǝl ‘cruche’ (D. Cohen 1975: 304, 194) ~ Marazig guḷḷa
‘Tonkrug’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2005: 35) ~ El-Ḥāmma de Gabès guḷḷah ‘amphore’
(Cantineau 1960: 221) ~ Djidjelli qella ‘cruche’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 252) ~ Malta
⟨qolla⟩ ‘broccone, vaso grande di terra’ (Vassalli 1796: 423).
564 q-m-ḥ
qmḥ (Pyr) ‘Art Brot’; ‘loaf, wheat bread’ (Wb V 40; Faulkner 1962: 279) ~ Akkad
qêmu‘ قflour’ (M. Cohen 2011: 85) ~ Heb ֶק ַמחqemaḥ ‘flour, meal’ (BDB 887) || Ar
�� ��مqamḥ ‘wheat’ (Hava 1982: 626);
ح
~ Aleppo qamǝḥ ‘blé’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 680, 177) ~ Damascus qamǝḥ
‘wheat’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 262), pl of mult. qamḥāt (Bloch 1989: 128)
~ Nabk ʾumiḥ ‘Weizen’ (Gralla 2006: 168) ~ Tunis qamḥ ‘blé’ (D. Cohen 1975: 81)
~ Malta ⟨qamħ, pl qmuħ⟩ ‘grano’ (Vassalli 1796: 402).
274 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
565 q-m-r
qmꜣ (OK) ‘to throw’; ‘etwas zu Boden werfen; worfeln (als Tätigkeit beimق
Getreidebau); das Wurfholz werfen’ (Faulkner 1962: 278; Wb V 33) || Ar ��مر
qamara ‘mit Einem Würfel oder ein Hasardspiel spielen’ (Wahrmund II 626);
~ Kǝndērīb tqāmaṛ ‘ein Glückspiel spielen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 118) ~ Aleppo
qmār ‘jeu de hasard’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 681) ~ Damascus qāmar ‘to gamble’;
‘jouer de l’argent’; qmārji ‘joueur’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 100; Denizeau 1960:
432) ~ Palest luʿb il-qimār ‘Hasardspiel’ (Bauer 1957: 149).
566 q-n-ʾ
قأ
qnj.t (NK) ‘gelbe Farbe’; qni҆t (BD) ‘a yellow pigment’ (Wb V 52; Faulkner 1962:
280; Albright 1918: 230) ~ Assyr uqnâtu ‘blue’ (M. Cohen 2011: 23) || Ar ��� � نqanaʾa
ق
‘sehr rot sein, rotgefärbt sein (Haar, Hand)’; �� ن�ءqanʾ ‘den Bart schwarz färben’
(Wahrmund II 529); cf. Gk κυάνεος ‘dark’ (GEL 454).
567 q-h-r
khꜣ (MK) ‘raise the voice, utter a bellow; rage furiously’; ‘Geschrei, Gebrüll aus-
ق
stoßen; stark wehen (vom Sturm); rasen (vom Feuer)’ (Faulkner 1962: 286; Wb
V 138) || Ar ����هرqahr ‘überwältingender Zorn’ (Wahrmund II 534);
~ Oman gahar ‘laut widersprechen’ (Reinhardt 1894: 164) ~ Yemen gahr
‘anger, grief’; gahra ‘insult’ (Piamenta 1991: 415) ~ Palest qahr ‘Ärger’ (Bauer
1957: 23); byiqhar ‘er ärgert’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 61) ~ Najd gahar ‘repel, ward
off’ (Sowayan 1992: 292) ~ ʿAnazeh gahar ‘saisir, empoigner’ (Landberg 1940:
66) ~ Aleppo qahar ‘chagriner, peiner’: māt mǝn qahro ‘il est mort de chagrin …’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 686) ~ Damascus sabab qāhar ‘force majeure’ (Stowasser
& Ani 1964: 95) ~ Lebanon qāhar ‘se disputer, se quereller’ (Denizeau 1960:
435) ~ Palest qahaṛ ‘compulsion’ (Palva 1965: 30) ~ Egypt qahar ‘to offend, to
grieve’; ‘faire enrager qqn’; qahr ‘grief, sorrow’; ‘chagrin’ (Spiro 1895: 503; Dozy
II 423) ~ Ḥassāniyya qahṛ ‘obligation’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 105).
Cf. Mand qahr ‘anger, wrath, trouble’ (Drower & Macuch 1963: 399).
565. q-m-r – 570. q-w-q 275
568 q-w-r
ق
1962: 281; DLE II 147) ~ Sab qwr ‘to engrave’ (Biella 1982: 451) || Ar � ّورqawwara
qrr.t (MK) ‘cavern’; ‘Höhlung, Loch, Höhle’; ‘cavern, miner’ (Wb V 62; Faulkner
569 q-w-s
gwš (LE) ‘become askew, bent, twisted; turn away’ (Breasted 1930: 568; Faulkner
1962: 288; DLE II 186); ga-wa-ša ‘krumm sein, schief sein’; ‘be crooked, turn
ق
away; crookedness’ (Wb V 160; Hoch 1994: 347–48) ~ Akkad qaštu/qassu ‘bow’
(CAD XIII 147; Parpola 2007: 87) ~ Heb ֶּק ֶׁשתqešet ‘bow’ (BDB 905) || Ar ��ا ��س
qāsa ‘courber, cambrer comme un arc; être vouté, cambré’ (DAF II 833);
~ Damascus qōṣ, pl qwāṣ ‘bow’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 27) ~ Aleppo qōṣ, pl
qwāṣ ‘arc, instrument de tir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 688) ~ Khawētna gās ‘tref-
fen (beim Schießen)’ (Talay 1999: 30) ~ Lebanon qaws ‘arc’ (Feghali 1938: 818)
~ Yemen gows, pl ʾagwās ‘arco’ (Rossi 1939: 193) ~ Tunis qūṣ ‘Bogen’ (Singer
1984: 176); qawš ‘voûte, arc’ (D. Cohen 1975: 67) ~ Djidjelli qōṣ, pl qwāṣ ‘arc,
arcade’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 67) ~ Cherchell qūs ‘arc’ (Grand’Henry 1972: 98)
~ Morocco qewṣ, pl qwaṣ ‘arch’; teqwiṣa ‘stoop (n)’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963:
12, 194) ~ Ḥassāniyya qaws ‘arche’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 25).
570 q-w-q
قق
gwg (NK) ‘shout (?)’; ‘einer redet mit (? nach?) dem anderen’ (Faulkner 1962:
288; Wb V 161) || cf. Ar � ��اqāqa ‘glousser (se dit des poules)’ (DAF II 836);
~ Yemen gāgah ‘Gackern’; mitgōgig ‘gackernd’ (Behnstedt 1987: 293) ~ Najd
⟨qawqā⟩ ‘pfeifen (vom Sperling)’ (Socin 1901 III 305) ~ Aleppo qawqa/qōqa,
iqōqi ‘cacqueter, crételer, codater (poule qui va pondre)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69:
690) ~ Palest qāqa ‘gackern’ (Bauer 1957: 121) ~ Egypt qawwaq/gawwag ‘to
cackle’; ‘krächzen’ (Spiro 1895: 504; Behnstedt & Woidich 194: 400) ~ Malta
⟨qaqa, iqaqi⟩ ‘schiamazzare, gracchiare’ (Vassalli 1796: 399).
276 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
571 q-w-y
ّ ق
gwꜣ/gw (NK) ‘von Schädigen eines Schwachen zu gunsten (mit Dativ) eines
Starken’ (Wb V 160); gwꜣwꜣ ‘stranglehold’ (Faulkner 1962: 288) || Ar �و��يqawiyy,
أق ق
pl � �و�يا ءʾaqwiyāʾ ‘strong’ (Hava 1982: 636); �و�ىqawā ‘l’emporter sur quelqu’un
pour le forcer; être de force à lutter contre quelqu’un’ (DAF 842);
~ Egypt qiwi ‘be strong, powerful’ (Spiro 1895: 504) ~ Najd gawa ‘to be able
to’; giwiyy ‘strong, powerful’ (Sowayan 1992: 292) ~ Damascus qawi, pl qawāya
‘strong’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 228) ~ Kǝndērīb qawi ‘stark’ (O. Jastrow 2005:
120) ~ Djidjelli qūyān ‘fait d’être fort, force’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 227).
572 k-ʾ-b
573 k-ʾ-s
أ
kṯ (LE) ‘Krug aus Metall (unter Anderen zum Trinken)’ (Wb V 148) ~ Akkad
kāsu ‘goblet, cup, beaker’ (Parpola 2007: 48) ~ Heb ּכֹוסkōs (BDB 468) || Ar ك� ��س
kaʾs ‘cup’ (Hava 1982: 639);
~ Aleppo kās ‘verre à boire, coupe’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 697) ~ Damascus
kāset ṃayy ‘a glass of water’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 103) ~ Iraq kāsa ‘bowl’
(Woodhead & Beene 1967: 397) ~ Palest kās ‘Kelch’ (Bauer 1957: 172) ~ Egypt
kās ‘cup, glass’ (Spiro 1895: 507) ~ Djidjelli kās ‘verre’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 253).
571. q-w-y – 576. k-b-r-t 277
574 k-b-b
ّ
qb (Pyr) ‘pour out (water); pour a libation’; ‘eine Libation darbringen’ (Faulkner
1962: 115, 277; Wb V 24; Hannig 2003: 1329) || Ar �� ب � �كkabba ‘overturn; pour liq-
uid’ (Hava 1982: 639);
~ S. Arabia ⟨kabb⟩ ‘verser, répandre, verser à boire’ (Landberg 1901: 699)
~ Najd kabb ‘to overturn, throw away’ (Ingham 1994: 183) ~ Oman kebub ‘aus-
gießen’ (Reinhardt 1894: 43) ~ Aleppo kabb ‘jeter (de l’eau sale, des ordures …)’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 698) ~ Damascus kabb ‘spill’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 220)
~ Palest kabb ‘ausschütten’ (Bauer 1957: 267).
575 k-b-r
ṯmꜣ (OK) [< *čmr < *kbr] ‘mit kräftigem Arm; mächtig sein’ (Wb V 367; Calice
1936: 220); Ḥr-ṯmꜣ ‘Der starke Horus’ (Leitz 2002: 294) ~ Akkad kabāru ‘to be
strong’ (M. Cohen 2011: 203) ~ Heb ַּכ ִּבירkabbīr ‘great, mighty’ (BDB 460) || Ar
ْ
���بر
كkabura ‘to grow big, become famous’ (Hava 1982: 640); �ب��ر
كkibr ‘Größe,
Macht’ (Wahrmund II 552);
~ Palest kbīr/čbīr ‘groß’ (Bauer 1957: 142); kubra ‘Stolz, das sich Emporheben’
(Kampffmeyer 1936: 63) ~ Aleppo kə́bǝrya ‘orgueil’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 700)
~ Egypt kibir ‘to be large, great; to grow, age’ (Spiro 1895: 508) ~ Malta ⟨kiber,
jikber⟩ ‘crescere, ingrandirsi’ (Vassalli 1796: 377).
576 k-b-r-t
kbrt (LE) ‘sulphur, brimstone’ (DLE II 172) ~ Akkad kibrītu ‘sulphur’ (CAD VIII
��� � ت
333) || Ar � ك بر�يkibrīt ‘sulphur, brimstone’ (Hava 1982: 641);
~ Iraq kibrīt ‘sulphur’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 198) ~ Aleppo kabrīt/kǝbrīt
‘allumettes’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 700) ~ Mharde kabrīt ‘Streichholz’ (Yoseph
2012: 163) ~ Kǝndērīb kabrīt ‘Zündhölzer, Streichhölzer’ (O. Jastrow 2005:
121) ~ Bišmizzīn kabrīt ‘Zündhölzer’ (Jiha 1964: 160) ~ Palest kibrīt ‘Schwefel’;
kibrīte ‘Zündholz’ (Bauer 1957: 269, 380) ~ Ḥassāniyya kǝbrīt ‘soufre’ (D. Cohen
1963: 31).
278 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
577 k-b-k-b
�� ك
ṯbṯb [*čbčb < *kbkb] ‘baumeln’ (Calice 1931: 37) || Ar ��� ب �كبkabkaba ‘to upset, to
turn upside down’ (Hava 1982: 640);
~ Al-Andalus ⟨nikabkab kabkabt⟩ ‘to hurl or fling down’ (Corriente 1997:
454).
578 k-b-w
kꜣp (Pyr) ‘räuchern’; ‘burn incense, cense gods, fumigate patient’ (Wb V 103;
Calice 1936: 212; Faulkner 1962: 284) ~ Akkad kabû ‘dung (of animals)’ (CAD III
28) || Ar كا
�� بkabā ‘to smoulder in the ashes’ (Hava 1982: 642);
~ Yemen kabba ‘to collect dung for fuel’ (Piamenta 1991: 425); kibyah, pl
kibā ‘getrocknete Dungfladen (Brennmaterial)’ (Behnstedt 2006: 1053); ⟨kibāʾ⟩
‘espèce d’encens’ (GD 2554).
579 k-b-y
qby (MK)/qb (NK) ‘jar for beer’; ‘Krug aus Ton oder Metall für Flüssigkeiten’
(Faulkner 1962: 277; Wb V 25) ~ Copt ⲕⲏⲃⲓ ‘jar, pitcher’ (Crum 1939: 113b)
ّ قأ ّة
~ Akkad kappu ‘drinking bowl’ (Parpola 2007: 46) ~ Heb ַקבqab(b) ‘dry mea-
sure’ (BDB 866) || cf. Ar � �و� بqawʾabiyy ‘large vessel’; ���كاي
�� بkubbāyah ‘drinking-
�ي
glass, tumbler’ (Hava 1982: 642);
~ Egypt qubbāye ‘glass, tumbler’ (Spiro 1895: 508) ~ Damascus kǝbbāye
‘glass’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 103) ~ Palest kubbāye ‘Trinkglas’ (Bauer 1957: 306)
~ Daθīna ⟨kubbāyah⟩ ‘verre à boire’ (GD 2554).
580 k-t-t¹
ktt/kt (MK) ‘small, trifling, a trifle, pettiness’; ‘der Kleine, der Geringe, ein kurzer
ّ� ت
Tag’; ‘be small, few’; ktkt ‘mit kleinen, kurzen Schritten ein-hergehen’ (Ember
1930: 100; Faulkner 1962: 287; Wb V 147) || Ar � � �كkatta ‘mit kleinen Schritten
eilen’ (Wahrmund II 554);
~ Palest kata/kettet z-zarʿa ‘petit tas de céréales’ (Dalman III 54) Kǝndērīb
katt, ikǝtt ‘(Flüssigkeit:) abnehmen, eingedickt, reduziert werden’ (O. Jastrow
2005: 121) ~ Lebanon katt, ykitt ‘s’user, s’effilocher’ (corde)’; ktīt ‘paille finement
hachée’ (Feghali 1938: 23).
577. k-b-k-b – 583. k-r-š ¹ 279
581 k-t-t²
582 k-r-r
ّ
nṯṯ (OK) [< *rčč < *rkk < *krr] ‘die Fessel, fesseln’ (Wb II 367); nṯr (Gr) ‘Mumi
enbinde; einwickeln’; nṯrj ‘Faden, Schnur’ (Wb II 365) || Ar �ر كkarra ‘sich
ة
abwickeln, ablaufen (aufgewickelter Faden)’; ‘rouler, faire rouler’; ����ر ا �ل��ط�ا ب
ك
ّ
‘dérouler un peloton’ (Wahrmund II 566; Dozy II 459); �ر كkarr, pl �رور
كkurūr
‘rope used as a ladder’ (Hava 1982: 648);
~ Damascus karrār ‘reel’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 188) ~ Egypt karr ‘undoing
a reel of cotton’ (Spiro 1895: 514) ~ Palest karr ‘aufziehen (Strumpf)’ (Bauer
1957: 31).
583 k-r-š¹
kns.t (Med) ‘Körperteil der Bauchgegend’ (Wb V 134; Calice 1936: 105) ~ Akkad
503) || Ar ����رش
كkirš/kariš, pl ����رو ش
karšu ‘stomach, belly, womb’ (CAD VIII 223) ~ Heb [ ] ָּכ ֵרשkārēš ‘belly’ (BDB
كkurūš ‘stomach of ruminants; paunch’ (Hava
1982: 650);
~ Iraq kariš, pl krūš ‘pot belly’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 402) ~ Palmyra
kerše ‘estomac, panse’ (Cantineau 1934 II 2) ~ Lebanon kirš, pl krūš ‘stomach’
(Frayha 1973: 150) ~ Bišmizzīn kirš ‘Bauch (des Menschen)’; kirši/kiršāyi, pl krūš
‘Innereien’ (Jiha 1964: 74, fn 12) ~ Palest mikriš ‘bauchig’; karš, pl -āt ‘Tiermagen’
(Bauer 1957: 42, 198) ~ Egypt kirš/kirša/karš/kurša ‘Bauch, Gekröse’ (Behnstedt
& Woidich 1985: 119) ~ Cherchell kerš ‘ventre’ (Grand’Henry 1972: 28) ~ Morocco
kerš, pl kruš ‘stomach’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 193) ~ Ḥassāniyya kerš ‘ventre’
(Taine-Cheikh 1990: 152) ~ Malta ⟨kirxa⟩ ‘stomaco’ (Vassalli 1796: 381).
280 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
584 k-r-š²
krś (LE) ‘to frisk, leap’; ‘springen (von Ziegen)’ (Hoch 1994: 332; Wb V 136);
ka-ra-šú ‘springen’ (Helck 1962: 573); krs ‘dance, skip’ (DLE II 176) ~ Akkad
168) || Ar ����رش
garāšu/qarāšu ‘darauf gehen, koitieren’; ‘copulate’ (AHW I 282; Parpola 2007:
� إ� ن� كʾinkaraša ‘tomber sur quelque chose de manière à se coucher
dessus avec sa poitrine’ (DAF 884);
~ Yemen karaš ‘coire, hinauswerfen; rausschmeißen’; ‘have sexual inter-
course’; karšah ‘coitus’ (Behnstedt 2006: 1064; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 412;
Piamenta 1991: 428) ~ Marazig kaṛṛaš, ikarreš ‘agripper (qqn, qq. ch. pour le
retenir), se cramponner à (pour ne pas tomber)’ (Boris 1958: 527) ~ Cairo karaš
‘drive away, hurry’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 743) ~ Aleppo ����رش كkaraš ‘chasser
devant soi’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 711) ~ Malta ⟨gerrex, igerrex⟩ ‘cacciare uno
con improprietà’ (Vassalli 1796: 309).
For the semantic pattern in the Yemenite form, cf. Neo-Aram ṭāḥ, yṭīḥ ‘springen, besprin-
gen, beschlafen’ (Arnold & Behnstedt 1993: 81) < Aram ṭwḥ (Dalman 1938: 167; M. Jastrow
1886: 522) and Egyptian nhp ‘jump up; copulate’ (DLE I 240; Faulkner 1962: 135).
585 k-r-m¹
ṯꜣm (BD) [< *črm] ‘veil (v.): veil the face = show indulgence (n to)’; ‘nachsichtig
sein gegen jemanden’ (Faulkner 1962: 303; Wb V 354; Calice 1936: 219) || Saf (h)
krm (impv.) ‘to be generous’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 649) ~ Ar ��ري ك
م
karīm ‘noble, generous’ (Hava 1982: 652);
~ Kǝndērīb kaṛam ‘Ehre’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 122) ~ Damascus karīm, pl krām
‘noble’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 158) ~ Aleppo karīm, pl krām ‘généreux, libéral,
large’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 714) ~ Palest karim en-nifs ‘großmütig’ (Bauer 1957:
143) ~ Egypt akram, yikrim ‘to honour, respect’ (Spiro 1895: 516) ~ Djidjelli krīm
‘généreux’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 268).
586 k-r-m²
kꜣmw (NK) ‘vineyard, orchard’; ‘der Garten, die Weinernte’ (Faulkner 1962: 284;
Wb V 106) ~ Dem kꜣm ‘Garten’ (DG 557) ~ Copt ϭⲱⲙ ‘garden, vineyard, prope-
erty’ (Crum 1939: 817b) ~ Heb �ֶּכ�ֶר םkerem ‘vineyard’ (BDB 501) ~ Aram karmā
‘vineyard’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 671) || Ar �ر كkarm, pl �رو كkurūm ‘vineyard’ (Hava
م م
1982: 652);
584. k-r-š ² – 589. k-z-z ³ 281
587 k-z-z¹
ّ
ṯz (Pyr) [< *čzz < *kzz] ‘to tie knot, cord; tie on fillet; join, rejoin’; ‘knoten, ver
knüpfen; etwas zusammenknoten’ (Faulkner 1962: 307; Wb V 396) || Ar ��ز ك
kazza ‘zusammenpressen, verengen, festmachen’ (Ullmann 1970: 165); cf. 615.
k-w-z;
~ Lebanon kazz/kazkaz ‘serrer, presser quelque chose’ (Denizeau 1960: 452)
~ Sinai kazz ‘to stop, repulse; to spur on’ (Stewart 1990: 245; Bailey 1991: 451)
~ Rwala kazz ‘to fold’ (Musil 1928: 180) ~ Marazig kazz ‘cesser d’être généreux,
devenir regardant’ (Boris 1958: 530) ~ Ḥassāniyya kazz ‘il a serré’; nkazz ‘être
bien serré’ (D. Cohen 1963: 96).
588 k-z-z²
أ
ṯs/ṯs.t (MK) [< *čs < *kzz] ‘der Zahn’; ‘tooth’ (Wb V 401, 409; Faulkner 1962: 307)
ّ
|| Ar ��ز ع��لى � ����سن���ا ن��ه
كkazza ʿalā ʾasnānihi ‘to gnash the teeth’ (Hava 1982: 653); ��ك����س��س
kasasa ‘kleine kurze Zähne haben’ (Wahrmund II 575);
~ Lebanon tkazkaz ‘grincer des dents’ (Denizeau 1960: 452).
589 k-z-z³
ّ
ṯz (OK) [< *čzz < *kzz] ‘trockene Stelle’; m ṯz ‘in drought’ (Wb V 401; Faulkner
1962: 307) || Ar ��ز
كkazza ‘être sec, desseché, et se contracter’ (DAF II 893);
~ Lebanon kazz/kazkaz ‘sécher, se recroqueviller’ (Denizeau 1960: 452)
~ Takrūna kazz ‘durcir en se desséchant (terre, pâte, fruit); devenir, se mon-
trer dur à la desserre; devenir pénible, dur (état, situation)’ (Marçais & Guîga
1958–61: 3410) ~ Yemen kazz ‘verbrennen, blenden’ (Behnstedt 2006: 1067)
~ Marazig kazz ‘cesser d’être généreux, devenir regardant’; kzūz ‘qui ne donne
pas du lait qu’avec une forte pression du pis; mauvaise laitière (chèvre); qui ne
282 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
donne qu’avec parcimonie’ (Boris 1958: 530) ~ Ūlād Brāhīm kēyzez ‘être chiche
de’ (W. Marçais 1908: 107).
590 k-s-ʾ
ṯs (OK) [< *čs < *ks] ‘der Hals’; ṯst ‘Wirbelknochen, Wirbelknochen des Nackens,
Rückens’; ‘neck’ (Wb V 400; Faulkner 1962: 307) || Ar ��ك��سءkusʾ/ ��ك��سوءkusūʾ, pl
أ
���ك��س�ا ءʾaksāʾ ‘hinder part’ (Hava 1982: 653).
591 k-s-b
ṯsm/ṯzm (MK) [< *čsm/čzm < *ksb] ‘hound’; ‘Windhund, Hund, als Jagdhund,
als Wächterhund, als Begleithund’ (Faulkner 1962: 308; Calice 1936: 221; Wb V
ّ
409) || Ar � ��ك��س�ا بkasāb ‘wolf, hunting-bitch’ (Hava 1982: 654); � ��ك��س�ا بkassābun
(als Name eines Jagdhundes)’ (Ullmann 1970: 172).
592 k-s-ḥ
ḥsq (Pyr) ‘abschneiden’; ‘cut off (head)’; ḥsqt ‘chopper’ (Wb III 169; Faulkner
1962: 178) || Ar �� ��ك��سkasiḥa ‘Bäume ausputzen’ (Wahrmund II 575);
ح
~ Lebanon kasaḥ ‘to cut the branches of a tree; to strike s.o.’; ‘frapper
qqn’ (Frayha 1973: 103; Feghali 1918: 26) ~ Aleppo kaseḥ ‘émonder (un arbre)’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 716).
593 k-s-s
ّ
ks (Pyr) ‘the female organ’ (Breasted 1930: 568) || Ar ��ك��سkuss ‘les parties hon-
teuses de la femme’ (DAF 894) [~ Gk κυσός ‘die weibliche Scham’ (Ullmann I
167)];
~ Palmyra kuss ‘vulve’ (Cantineau 1934 II 2) ~ Aleppo kəss, pl ksūs ‘vulve,
vagin’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 718) ~ Palest kuss ‘Vulva’ (Bauer 1957: 255) ~ Sinai
kuss, pl aksās ‘pudenda’ (C. Bailey 1991: 451) ~ Egypt kuss, pl aksās ‘sexual organ
in the female’ (Spiro 1895: 518).
590. k-s- ʾ – 596. k- ʿ -k 283
594 k-s-w
kṯt (LE) ‘Decke’; ‘garment, covering’ (Wb V 148; Hoch 1994: 341) ~ Akkad kusītu
‘robe’ (CDA 170) ~ Ugar kst ‘a type of robe or cloak’ (2003: 466) ~ Heb ְּכסּותkəsūt
‘covering, clothing’ (BDB 492) ~ Sab kśwy ‘clothes, garments’ (Biella 1982: 254) ||
ة
Ar � ��ك��سوkiswah ‘set of clothes’ (Hava 1982: 655);
~ Oman kiswe ‘Anzug’ (Reinhardt 1894: 42) ~ Aleppo kasa, yəksi ‘habiller
(qqn) à ses frais’; kəswe, pl kasāwi ‘habillement, vêtement’ (Barthélemy
1935–69: 718) ~ Damascus kasa ‘to clothe’; vn kəswe (Stowasser & Ani 1964:
44) ~ Palest kasa ‘bekleiden’ (Bauer 1957: 49) ~ Kuwait kiswah/čiswah ‘gift of
clothing’ (Dickson 1949: 638) ~ Tripoli (Libya) kiswa ‘corredo (vestito)’ (Griffini
1913: 67) ~ Oman kiswe ‘Anzug’ (Reinhardt 1894: 42) ~ Tunis kəšwa ‘costume’
(D. Cohen 1975: 149) ~ Algiers keswa ‘costume’ (Tapiéro 1971: 154) ~ Morocco
keswa ‘suit’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 198) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨kaswa⟩ ‘dress’
(Corriente 1997: 461).
595 k-ʿ-b
kꜣbt (MK) ‘breast’; ‘die Brust (als ganzes)’ (Faulkner 1962: 276; Wb V 11) ~ Copt
ⲉⲕⲓⲃⲉ ‘breast’ (Crum 1939: 54a) || Ar ���ع� ب
كkaʿaba ‘schwellende Brüste haben
(Mädchen)’ (Wahrmund II 581);
~ Al-Andalus ⟨kāʿib, pl kawāʿib⟩ ‘buxom’ (Corriente 1997: 463).
596 k-ʿ-k
ʿkk (LE) ‘Art Brot’ (Wb I 235) ~ Dem kʿkʿ ‘id.’ (DG 561) ~ Copt ⲕⲁⲕⲉ ‘baked loaf,
cake’ (Crum 1939: 843b) || Ar ��ع�ك كkaʿk ‘cake, biscuit’ (Hava 1982: 658);
~ Yemen kaʿke ‘dolce di zucchero, uova, farina e burro’ (Rossi 1939: 160)
~ Aleppo kaʿk ‘gimblette, craquelin’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 721) ~ Kəndērīb
kaʿk ‘Feingebäck, Plätzchen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 123) ~ Iraq kaʿak ‘type of pretzel-
like pastry’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 407) ~ Bišmizzīn kaʿki ‘Gebäckart’ (Jiha
1964: 151) ~ Palest kaʿk bsimsim ‘Sesamkringel’ (Dalman I/2: 607) ~ Egypt kaḥk
‘Bretzel’ (Spitta 1880: 24); kaḥkī ‘Kuchenbäcker’ (Littmann 1950: 120) ~ Sudan
kaʿk ‘cake’ (LDA 421) ~ Tunis kaʿk ‘petits gâteaux en forme de couronne’
(D. Cohen 1975: 150) ~ Yemen kaʿkeh, coll. kaʿk ‘dolce di zucchero, uova, farina
e burro’ (Rossi 1939: 160) ~ Djidjelli koʿk ‘gâteau’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 86) ~ Malta
⟨kagħka, pl kagħak⟩ ‘ciambella; cibo di farina intrisa fatto a foggia d’anello’
(Vassalli 1796: 368).
284 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
597 k-f-r
kꜣp (NK) ‘to cover, roof over, hide oneself’; ‘Dach eines Gebäudes, sich ver-
stecken’; kꜣpw ‘roof’; kꜣpwt ‘covers’; kꜣpꜣp ‘to cover’; ‘bedecken’ (Faulkner 1962:
284; Wb V 104, 106; Takács 1999: 218) ~ Heb ִּכ ֵּפרkippēr ‘cover over, pacify, make
ف
propitiation’ (BDB 497) || Ar �����ر
كkafara ‘bedecken, zudecken, verbergen, ver-
stecken’ (Wahrmund II 585);
~ Negev kuffāṛa ‘lid (of cooking pot)’; kafáṛ ‘to turn an empty cup upside
down’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi).
598 k-f-f¹
kp (LE) ‘hand’ (Ember 1930: 49; Calice 1936: 105) ~ Dem kp ‘fassen, ergreifen’
ّف
(DG 578, 562) ~ Akkad kappu(m) ‘hand, palm of hand’ (CDA 147) ~ Heb ַּכף
kap(p) ‘hollow or flat of the hand, palm, sole of foot, pan’ (BDB 496) || Ar ����
ك
ف ف
kaff, pl �������و
كkufūf ‘palm of the hand, hand (to the wrist)’ (Hava 1982: 658);
~ Rwala čaff ‘palm’ (Musil 1928: 115, fn 7) ~ Oman keff ‘Hand’ (Reinhardt 1894:
417) ~ Aleppo kaff, pl kfūf ‘paume, creux de la main’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 722)
~ Kəndērīb kaff ‘Handfläche, Handschuh; ballen (Faust), zusammenklappen’
(O. Jastrow 2005: 123) ~ Palest kaff, pl kfūf ‘Handfläche’; čaff ‘Hand’ (Schmidt &
Kahle 1918 I 285) ~ Malta ⟨ċapċap, iċapċap⟩ [< *kpp] ‘to clap’ (Aquilina 1987:
164).
599 k-f-f²
ّف
kfj (Pyr) ‘entblössen, enthüllen, ein Kleid ausziehen, Kopftuch abnehmen’; kf
‘zurückweisen’ (Wb V 119; Calice 1936: 84) || Ar ���� كkaffa ‘éloigner, repousser
quelqu’un; se contenir et s’abstenir de quelque chose’ (DAF II 909);
~ Najd kaff ‘to desist from, stop doing something, renounce, check, hinder’
(Kurpershoek 1999: 452) ~ Daθīna inkaff ‘s’abstenir de’ (Landberg 1942: 2577)
~ Iraq kuff ʿanni ‘Get off my back!’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 407) ~ Aleppo
kaff ‘détourner (un malheur)’; kəff ʿanni ‘laisse-moi tranquille’ (Barthélemy
1935–69: 722) ~ Egypt kaff ‘to cease’ (Spiro 1895: 521) ~ Marazig kaff ‘cesser de
faire qq.ch. (mən ou ʿala)’ (Boris 1958: 534) ~ Takrūna kaff ‘repousser qq. ou
qq.ch.’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 3441) ~ Morocco kaff ‘repousser (de la paume
de la main) pour replier/rabattre/recouvrir; pour écarter/éviter/détourner’
597. k-f-r – 602. k-l-ḥ 285
(Prémare X 607) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨kaff⟩ ‘keep off, stay away, cease’ (Corriente
1997: 464).
600 k-f-l
أف
kfꜣ (Med) ‘hinder parts of bird; bottom of jar’; ‘Hinterteil (eines Vogels)’ (Faulkner
ف
1962: 285; DLE II 173; Wb V 120; Ember 1930: 17) || Ar ������ل
كkafal, pl ������ا ل
� كʾakfāl
‘Hinterteil; Croupe des Pferdes (Sitz des Hintermannes)’ (Wahrmund II 586);
~ Aleppo kafal ‘croupe d’un cheval’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 722) ~ Egypt kafal/
kafan ‘hind quarters of a horse or donkey’ (Spiro 1895: 522) ~ Najd kafal, pl
kfūl ‘rump; the heavy laptails of Najdi sheep’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 452) ~ Sudan
kafal ‘croupe (horse), buttocks’ (LDA 422) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨kafal, pl akfāl⟩ ‘rump’
(Corriente 1997: 464).
601 k-l-b
knm-t/klm-t ‘dog’; ‘ein Tier im Kampf mit Pavianen’ (Ember 1914: 111; Hoch 1994:
328; Wb V 132) ~ Copt ⲕⲁⲗⲱⲡⲟⲩ ‘small dog, lapdog’; ⲕⲗⲃⲁⲩⲗⲉ ‘petit chien’
(Crum 1939: 105b; Vycichl 1983: 76) ~ Akkad kalbu ‘dog’ (CAD VIII 68) ~ Soq
ك�ل� تkalb,
kalb ‘chien, loup’ ~ Mah kŏb/koub/kalb ‘chien’ (Leslau 1937: 218) || Ar �
pl �كلا ب
� kilāb ‘dog’ (Hava 1982: 662);
~ Aleppo kalb, pl klēb ‘chien’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 723) ~ Egypt kalb, pl kilāb
‘dog’ (Spiro 1895: 523) ~ Djidjelli kəbb ‘chien’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 383) ~ Malta
⟨kelb, pl klieb⟩ ‘cane’ (Vassalli 1796: 374).
602 k-l-ḥ
ّ
ṯḥn (Pyr) [< *čḥl < klḥ] ‘sparkle, flash, gleam’; ‘erhellen, erheitern’ (Faulkner
� ت� كtakallaḥa ‘to flash repeatedly
1962: 306; Wb V 393; Ember 1930: 104) || Ar �����ل
ح
(lightning)’ (Hava 1982: 663);
~ Aleppo kalaḥ ‘se ternir, perdre un peu de sa couleur (étoffe)’ (Barthélemy
1935–69: 724) ~ Palest kalaḥ ‘zu verblassen (Farbe)’ (Bauer 1957: 328) ~ Egypt
kalaḥ ‘to fade (colour)’ (Spiro 1895: 524) ~ kiliḥ ‘Feuer verlieren, erblassen
(Diamant); Farbe verlieren’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 419) ~ Marazig əkləḥ
‘se dessécher complètement (sol, bouche)’ (Boris 1958: 536) ~ kiliḥ ‘Feuer ver-
lieren, erblassen (Diamant); Farbe verlieren’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 419).
286 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
603 k-l-w
ة ة
gar=yu (LE) ‘kidneys’ (Hoch 1994: 352) ~ Heb ִּכ ְליָ הkilyāh ‘kidney’ (BDB 480)
~ Amh kulalit ‘kidney(s)’ (Kane 1990: 1368) || Ar ��� ك��ليkulyah/ �ك�لو
� kulwah, pl
�ك�ل ا ت
�
و kulwāt ‘kidney’ (Hava 1982: 664);
~ Kəndērīb kəlwe, pl kəlaw ‘Niere’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 125) ~ Damascus kəlwe/
kəlye, pl kalāwi ‘kidney’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 131) ~ Palest kalwe ‘Niere’:
kīlāhā ‘ihre Nieren’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 64) ~ Egypt kilwa ‘kidney’ (Spiro 1895:
525) ~ Yemen kilweh, pl kilaw ‘rene’ (Rossi 1939: 232) ~ Oman kilwe ‘Leber’
(Reinhardt 1894: 42) ~ Tunis klāwi ‘reins’ (D. Cohen 1975: 63) ~ Malta ⟨kilwa, pl
kliewi⟩ ‘kidney’ (Aquilina 1990: 652).
604 k-m-ḥ
mkḥꜣ (MK) ‘back of the head; turn the back to, ignore’; ‘den Hinterkopf; den
Hinterkopf zuwenden; vernachlässigen, sich nicht kümmern um …’; mqḥꜣ (LE)
‘vernachlässigen’ (Faulkner 1962: 119; Wb II 163, 159; Calice 1936: 158) || Ar ���م
�ك
ح
kamaḥa ‘tirer à soi avec la bride la tête du cheval au point qu’il redresse la tête’;
‘to pull in, to check a horse with the bridle’ (DAF II 928; Lane 2360; Hava 1982:
664, 665).
605 k-m-d
qmd (NK) ‘mourn’; ‘beklagen’ (Faulkner 1962: 279; Wb V 40) || Saf kmd ‘to be
sad, heart-sick’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 644) ~ Ar �م�د
� كkamada ‘être
triste, affligé et malade’ (DAF II 928);
~ Egypt inkamad ‘be sad, gloomy’; kamad ‘sorrow, grief, gloominess’ (Spiro
1895: 526) ~ Lebanon kamed ‘ennui’ (Denizeau 1960: 460) ~ Sudan kammad
‘to foment’ (LDA 428) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nkamad⟩ ‘devenir triste’ (Dozy II 488).
606 k-m-r¹
ṯꜣm (MK) [< *črm < *kmr] ‘foreskin; to veil’; ‘sich verhüllen (besonders vom
Gesicht)’; ṯꜣm.t (mit Bezug auf Min)’ (Faulkner 1962: 303; Wb V 354, 355): n fḫ.t=f
m ṯꜣm ‘alors qu’il n’avait pas (encore) été défait par son prépuce’ (Meeks 2015:
50) || Ar ��مر
كkamara ‘verdecken, umhüllen; einen an Größe der Eichel des
Penis übertreffen’ (Wahrmund II 595).
603. k-l-w – 609. k-m-n 287
607 k-m-r²
ََ ن
ṯꜣm (MK) [< *črm < *kmr] ‘Binde’ (Wb V 354, 355) ~ Aram ָקמוֹרqāmōr/ַק ְמ ָרא
qamrā ‘belt’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 1384) || Ar � ��مَرا
كkamarān ‘Gürtel’ (Ullmann 1970:
355);
~ Aleppo kamar ‘ceinture à poches’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 727) ~ Egypt
kamar ‘belt’ (Spiro 1895: 562) ~ Lebanon kamar ‘men’s belt’ (Frayha 1972: 155).
608 k-m-l
أ
km (NK) ‘vollständig machen, vollenden’; ‘total up to, amount to, complete’;
� مʾakmala
kmt ‘completion’ (Wb V 128; Faulkner 1962: 286; Ember 1930: 33) || Ar ك�ل
‘rendre complet et parfait, achever, compléter, additionner’ (DAF II 930);
~ Aleppo kammal ‘compléter’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 728) ~ Damascus kam-
mal ‘continue’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 52) ~ Kəndērīb kammal ‘vollenden,
beenden, fertigmachen’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 372) ~ Palest kammal ‘vollen-
den’ (Bauer 1957: 345) ~ Egypt kimil/stakmil ‘be complete, perfect’ (Spiro 1895:
526).
609 k-m-n
kꜣmn (MK) ‘blind sein, der Blinde, jemanden blenden; dunkel sein’ (WAS V
107); knmt ‘darkness’; knmtyw ‘they who dwell in darkness’ (Faulkner 1962:
286) || Saf kmn ‘to go into hiding’ (Al-Jallad 2015: 324) ~ Ar ��م� ن
� كkamana ‘avoir
les yeux voilés comme d’un brouillard et rouges’ (DAF II 931); ‘sich verbergen,
verstecken’; ��م� ن
� كkumina ‘von Augenschwäche befallen werden’ (Wahrmund II
ة ن �
596); ���� ك�مkumnah ‘Augenkrankheit’ (Ullmann 1971: 364);
~ Najd ćiman ‘to be hidden, concealed’ (Kurpershoek 1994: 331); ačman ‘to
lie in ambush’ (Sowayan 1992: 294) ~ Egypt kaman/kimin ‘to hide’ (Spiro 1895:
526) ~ Negev kamīn ‘hidden’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨makman⟩ ‘hiding
place’ (Corriente 1997: 468).
288 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
610 k-n-f
ṯnf.t (LE) [< *čnf.t] ‘bag’; ṯnfyt ‘Beutel, auch grösserer Sack (für Metallgeräte)’
نف أن ف
(Faulkner 1962: 306; Wb V 308) ~ Dem ḏnf ‘Korb’ (DG 682) ~ Copt ϫⲛⲟϥ ‘bas-
ket, crate’ (Crum 1939: 777a) || Ar ��� �كkinf, pl �� كا
�� � ʾaknāf ‘shepherd’s bag’;
‘Beutel für Utensilien’ (Hava 1982: 667; Wahrmund II 600);
~ Najd kinf, pl knifeh ‘Säckchen aus Schafleder um Gewürz aufzubewahren’
(Hess 1938: 119) ~ Yemen kinfeh ‘Schutz’ (Behnstedt 2006: 1087) ~ Al-Andalus
⟨kanfun⟩ ‘toolbox’ (Corriente 1997: 469); ⟨kanafa⟩ ‘porter’ (Dozy II 502).
611 k-n-n
ṯnnt [< *čnnt < *knnt] ‘sanctuary at Memphis’ (Faulkner 1962: 306) || Ar �ّ� ن
� كkinn
‘Asyl, Zuflucht; das Innere des Hauses’ (Wahrmund II 597);
~ Ḥaḍramawt kĕnān ‘abri’ (Landberg 1901: 1603) ~ Aleppo kankan ‘se cloî-
trer dans sa maison en hiver’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 730) ~ Egypt kann/istakann
‘to rest, repose, conceal oneself’ (Spiro 1895: 567); kinn ‘Entenstall, eine
Schutzhütte auf dem Feld (unter Einbeziehung eines Baumes als Windschutz,
für Feuer und Wärme)’; kunn ‘Hasen-, Hühnerstall’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994:
422) ~ Takrūna kann ‘se mettre à l’abri’; kenn ‘abri (au sens matériel et moral);
protection’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 3499) ~ Malta ⟨stkenn⟩ ‘mettersi al
coperto’ (Vassalli 1796: 598).
612 k-h-m
khb (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘harm s.o., be violent, roar, howl’; ‘gewalttätig sein’
(Faulkner 1962: 287; Wb V 137) || Ar � ��ك�هkahama ‘einen niederdrücken, klein-
م
mütig machen’; ‘to crush’ (Wahrmund II 601; Hava 1982: 668);
~ Morocco khāb, ikhāb ‘devenir vilain’; khāba ‘état de ce qui est vilain /
mauvais’ (Prémare X 646).
613 k-h-f
ṯpḥ.t (Pyr) [< *čhf < *khf ] ‘cavern’; ‘Loch im Boden, Höhle; Loch von Schlangen’
(Faulkner 1962: 304; Wb V 364; Albright 1918: 254) ~ Dem tpḥ ‘Höhle, Loch’ (DG
ف ف
628) ~ Taym khf ‘grave’ (Winnett & Reed 1970: 192) || Ar ��� ��ك�هkahf, pl ����ك�هو
kuhūf ‘grotto, cavern, shelter’ (Hava 1982: 668);
610. k-n-f – 617. k-w-y 289
614 k-w-b
أ
ṯbt ‘vase’ [< *čbt < *kbt]; ṯb ‘crate’ ṯꜣb/ṯb ‘ein Gefäß’ (Faulkner 1962: 304; Wb V
كkūb, pl ��وا ب
354) || Ar ��و ب � كʾakwāb ‘großer Becher ohne Henkel’ (Wahrmund
II 602) ~ Aram kūbā ‘(wine-)cup, tumbler; wine cask’ (Ullmann 1971: 420;
M. Jastrow 1886: 616);
~ Al-Andalus ⟨kūb, pl akwāb⟩ ‘bucket’ (Corriente 1997: 470) ~ N. Yemen kōb
‘Glas’ (Behnstedt 1987: 297) ~ Lebanon kūb, pl kwāb ‘tasse, verre’ (Denizeau
1960: 462).
615 k-w-z
616 k-w-ʿ
qʿḥ (MK) ‘elbow, arm, shoulder’; ‘Ellenbogen’ (Ember 1930: 34; Faulkner 1962:
�ك ن
كkūʿ, pl � �ي��ع�ا
276; Wb V 19) || Ar �و
ع
kīʿān ‘elbow’ (Hava 1982: 663);
~ Rwala kūʿ ‘elbow’ (Musil 1928: 115, fn 7) ~ Oman kōʿ ‘Ellenbogen’ (Reinhardt
1895: 56) ~ Aleppo kūʿ ‘coude’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 732) ~ Damascus kūʿ, pl
kwāʿ ‘elbow’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 77) ~ Palest kūʿ, pl (a)kwāʿ ‘Ellbogen’ (Bauer
1957: 91) ~ Egypt kūʿ, pl kīʿān ‘elbow’ (Spiro 1895: 529).
617 k-w-y
ṯꜣj (Pyr) [< *čwy] ‘Vorwurf, Tadel, Vorwurf erheben gegen jemanden, tadeln,
jemanden strafen’ (Wb V 349) || Ar �وا ء
كkawāʾ ‘Schmähung’ (Wahrmund II 602);
290 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
~ Yemen kayya ‘insolence’ (Piamenta 1991: 440) ~ Takrūna kwē ‘infliger à qq.
une peine cruelle’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 3529) ~ Egypt kawa ‘cause to suf-
fer’ (Spiro 1895: 530).
618 l-b-b
i҆b (Pyr) ‘heart’; i҆b.t ‘Krume des Brotes’; i҆wb.t ‘Teil des Brotes (ob weiche Krume?)’
ّ
(Faulkner 1962: 14; Wb I 59–61) ~ Akkad libbu ‘heart’ (M. Cohen 2011: 24) ~ Heb
ֵל ָבבlēbāb ‘mind, heart’ (BDB 523) ~ Soq ʾílbib ‘cœur’ (Leslau 1938: 61) || Ar ��ل� ب
lubb, pl � ��ل�بو بlubūb ‘heart, core; crumb of bread’; ‘Inneres, Mark, Korn (von
Pflanzen, Früchten, von Getreide usw.)’ (Hava 1982: 674; Wb II/1 82);
~ Iraq libb ‘nucleus’ (Van Ess 1918: 186) ~ Aleppo ləbb ‘mie (du pain)’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 744) ~ Lebanon lebb ‘cœur (de fruit)’ (Feghali 1938:
825) ~ Egypt libb ‘pith, pulp’ (Spiro 1895: 534) ~ Sinai libbih ‘a small round of
bread’ (Stewart 1990: 245) ~ Tunis lbāba ‘Brotkrume’ (Singer 1984: 526) ~ Malta
⟨lbieba⟩ ‘the inside soft part of a loaf’ (Aquilina 1987: 734).
619 l-b-ǧ
nbḏ (OK) ‘destructive’; ‘böse, schädlich’; nbd (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘beschlagen
sein mit (m) Kupfer und ähnlich’ (Faulkner 1962: 130; Wb II 347) || Ar �ل ب����جlabaǧa
�
‘to strike with a stick’ (Hava 1982: 675);
~ N. Yemen labaǧ ‘stark schlagen’ (Behnstedt 1987: 298) ~ Tenḥara (Yemen)
tilbug ‘elle frappe’ (Vanhove 1995: 263) ~ Damascus labaj ‘jeter qqn à terre’
(Denizeau 1960: 468).
620 l-b-x¹
ꜣbḫ (Pyr) ‘mix’; ‘vermischen’; ꜣbḫ.t (Ebers) ‘mix (m ‘into’) (of compounding
drugs)’; ‘offizinell verwendete Flüssigkeit’ (Faulkner 1962: 2; Wb I 8) ~ Copt
ّ
‘salve, lubricant’ (CAD IX 8, 232) || Ar �ل ب���� خlabbaxa ‘to apply a poultice’ (Hava
ⲁⲃⲏϣ ‘to mix’ (Crum 1939: 3a) ~ Akkad lubbuku ‘to moisten with oil’; lubku
�
1982: 675); cf. 626. l-b-k;
~ Yemen labak ‘mischen’ (Behnstedt 1996: 1103, 464) ~ Sfax labbax ‘besmear’
(Zwari & Sharfi 1998: 642) ~ Tunis labxa ‘Breiumschlag’ (Stumme 1896: 45);
618. l-b-b – 622. l-b-d ¹ 291
ləbxa ‘cataplasme’ (D. Cohen 1975: 147) ~ Egypt labbax, ilabbix ‘schmieren’;
‘apply a poultice’; labxa, pl libax ‘poultice’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 427;
Badawi & Hinds 1986: 777); rabak ‘to confuse, perplex’; labbiš ‘confuse’ (Spiro
216, 534; cf. Copt.) ~ Aleppo labbax ‘amollir ou faire fondre sur le feu (les herbes
qui doivent composer un cataplasme)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 744) ~ Lebanon
labxa, pl ləbax ‘cataplasme, compresse’ (Denizeau 1960: 468) ~ Palest labbax
‘Kataplasma auflegen’ (Bauer 1957: 28) ~ Morocco lbixa, pl lbayex ‘plaster cast’
(Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 145).
621 l-b-x²
ṯꜣw ꜣbḫw jwf=sn ‘le soufflé imprègne leur chairs’ (Meeks 2010: 40) ~ Akkad lub-
ّ
buku ‘to macerate (in a liquid)’ (CAD IX 7) || Ar �ل ب���� خlabaxa ‘to beat, strike’; ت��ل ب���� خ
� �
talabbaxa ‘to be bruised with blows’ (Hava 1982: 675);
~ Lebanon labbax ‘rouer qqn de coups’; labbax jismo ‘son corps est con
tusionné, meurtri de coups’ (Denizeau 1960: 468).
622 l-b-d¹
nbd.t (Pyr) (BD) ‘tress of hair, lock of’; ‘sich frisieren, Flechtwerk, die Haarflechte’;
‘plaiting, braiding’ (Faulkner 1962: 130, 311; Wb II 246) ~ Copt ⲛⲏⲃⲧⲉ ‘plait, tress’
ة ّ
(Crum 1939: 222b) ~ Nubian nebíd/nibíd ‘flechten, geflecht’ (Reinisch 1893: 14)
|| Ar � ��لب��دlibdah ‘Mähne (des Löwens)’; ��لب��دlabbada ‘to mat hair’; ��لب��دlabid ‘mat-
ْ
ted hair’; ‘laine ou poil, ou crins mouillés et collés au point d’être aplatis et
foulés’; ��لب��دlibd ‘hair or wool commingled and compacted together, or coherent’
(Ullmann 1983 II/1: 115; Hava 1982: 675; DAF II 958; Lane 2645); �م��لب��دmulbid ‘qui
a une crinière (épithète du lion)’ (Dozy II 519);
~ Palest libde ‘Mähne des Löwen’ (Bauer 1957: 198) ~ Al-Andalus labad
‘wool’ (Corriente 1997: 474) ~ Damascus ləbbād ‘felt’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964:
88) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨libda⟩ ‘felt cap’ (Corriente 1997: 474) ~ Kəndērīb ləbbād
‘Filz, Füllung für den Sattel’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 130) ~ Egypt labbād ‘felt’; labbāda
‘horse-cloth’; libda ‘felt cap’; ‘Filzkappe’ (Spiro 1895: 534; Behnstedt & Woidich
1994: 427) ~ Najd libbādeh ‘Filzfutterung’ (Hess 1938: 128) ~ Tunis ləbda ‘mol-
leton’ (D. Cohen 1975: 59, 147) ~ Algeria lebd ‘feutre’ (Ben Sedira 1910: 224).
292 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
623 l-b-d²
ndb/nbd (MK) ‘band door(s) with metal’; ‘beschlagen sein mit (m) Kupfer und
ähnlich; von Türflügeln und Flaggenstangen’; ndbw.t (MK) ‘area, extent’; ‘die
Fundamente eines Bauwerks und besonders der Erde (die auf ihnen ruht)’;
‘Fundamente, Fläche, Areal’; tꜣ ḥr ndb.f ‘die ganze Erde’ (Faulkner 1962: 130, 143;
Wb II 247, 368; Takács 2011b: 76; Hannig 1995: 446) ~ Heb ר ֶֹבדrōbed ‘mosaic
أ
pavement’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 1455) ~ Ge madab ‘base, projection, wall, elevated
place’ (Leslau 1987: 329) || Ar ��لب��دlabada ‘to stick to the ground’; � � ن��د بʾandaba
‘imprimer une trace sur quelque chose, laisser une empreinte, marquer’ (Hava
1982: 675; DAF 1225);
~ Yemen mandab, pl manādib ‘furrow, a little raised above field level’; ‘läng
liches Feld’; ‘construct, work on’ (Behnstedt 1993: 202; 2006: 1201) ~ Lebanon
labbad ‘trépigner’ (Denizeau 1960: 468) ~ Egypt libid ‘to stick to one’s place’
(Spiro 1895: 534) ~ Aleppo ləbed ‘être comme collé et pressé’ (Barthélemy 1935–
69: 744).
624 l-b-s
rbš (Pyr) ‘die (ledernen) Panzer’ (Wb II 414) ~ la-ba-ša-ja ‘Panzer’ (Helck 1962:
564) ~ ru₂=bi=ša ‘wear a cuirass’ (Hoch 1994: 203); i҆bś (Gr) ‘Kopftuch’; ‘head-
dress of king’ (Wb I 64; Faulkner 1962: 16) ~ Dem lbš ‘bewaffnen, bekleiden
( ;)לבׁשauch Rüstung, Panzer’; lbš ‘Rüstung, Panzer’ (DG 262) ~ Akkad labāšu ‘to
wear’ (M. Cohen 2011: 230) || Ar �ل�ب���سlabisa ‘to clothe oneself’ (Hava 1982: 675);
~ Damascus ləbəs ‘to dress’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 72) ~ S.E. Anatolia ləbəs
‘anlegen, anziehen (Kleidungsstück)’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 388) ~ Djidjelli
bbes, yəbbés ‘vêtir’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 114) ~ Iraq lbēs ‘pants’ (Abu-Haidar 1991:
191) ~ Aleppo ləbes ‘vêtir, mettre, se vêtir d’(un vêtement)’ (Barthélemy 1935–
69: 745) ~ Ḥama lbāse ‘Unterhose’ (Lewin 1966: 224).
625 l-b-ṭ
nmt (Pyr) ‘to stride over, traverse’; ‘das Schreiten, der Ging, der Schritt’ (Faulkner
1962: 133; Wb II 271) || Ar ��لب���طlabaṭa ‘laufen indem die beiden Vorderfüße
zugleich niedergesetzt werden (Pferd)’ (Wahrmund II 618);
~ Palest labīṭ ‘Fußtritt, das Ausschlagen’; yulbuṭ ‘er schlägt aus; gibt Fußtritte’;
labbāṭ ‘Schläger (vom Esel)’; labaṭ ‘mit den Hinterbeinen ausschlagen (Esel)’
(Kampffmeyer 1936: 66; Bauer 1957: 36) ~ Malta ⟨lebbet, ilebbet⟩ ‘to run very
623. l-b-d ² – 628. l-b-w 293
fast’ (Aquilina 1987: 734) ~ Aleppo labaṭ ‘donner une ruade à qqn’ (Barthélemy
1935–69: 746) ~ Lebanon labaṭ ‘he kicked’ (Nasr 1966: 170); labbāṭ ‘qui rue, qui
donne des coups de pied’ (Feghali 1938: 645).
626 l-b-k
r=bi=ka (LE) ‘a fine bread or pastry’; ‘Art Gebäck (Lehnwort); Speise’ < *rabīka
(Hoch 1994: 204; DLE 2004: 270; Wb II 414; Hannig 1995: 464) ~ Akkad rabāku
���ة
‘einrühren, mengen (spez. von Heimkräutern u.s.w.)’ (Zimmern 1917: 49) || Ar
رب�ي� �كrabīkah
َ ‘dates with clarified butter and [the preparation of dried curd
أ
called] ( � قِ���طʾaqiṭ) kneaded together and then eaten; … sometimes water is
poured upon it, and it is drunk …’ (Lane 1022); cf. 620. l-b-x¹;
~ Egypt labak ‘kneten’; yitaṛabak ‘sich beunruhigen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich
1994: 428); rabak/labak ‘confuse, perplex’ (Spiro 1895: 216, 535) ~ Yemen labak
‘mischen’; rammak, yirammik ‘im Schlamm stecken bleiben’; rabak ‘einen in
eine Pfitze werfen’ (Behnstedt 1996: 1103, 464) ~ Ḥaḍramawt rbk/lbk ‘mêler,
embarrasser’ (Landberg 1901: 1769) ~ Lebanon tlabbak ‘s’embrouiller dans une
affaire, être empêtré’; rabbeq ‘asperger d’eau (l’aire du ciment) pour l’amollir
avant de le tasser’ (Feghali 1933: 37).
627 l-b-n
i҆nb (Pyr) ‘wall; to wall off a place’; ‘Mauer (aus Haussteinen oder Ziegeln)’; i҆nbt
‘fence, stockade’; ‘Festung, Sperre’ (Faulkner 1962: 23; Wb I 94, 95) ~ Akkad
libittu ‘brick, mud brick’ (CAD IX 176) ~ Heb ְל ֵבנָ הləbēnāh ‘brick’ (M. Jastrow
1886: 690) || Ar � �لب�� نlibn ‘Backstein’ (Wahrmund II 618);
~ Ḥaḍramawt libn ‘adobe bricks’ (Radionov 2007: 120) ~ Aleppo ləbne, pl
ləban ‘moellon taillé grossièrement, petite pierre à batir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69:
747).
628 l-b-w
ꜣbw (OK) ‘Elefant’; ꜣbj (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘panther’; ‘der Leopard’; ‘léopard,
guépard’; ꜣby.t ‘das weibliche Tier’ (Wb I 7; Faulkner 1962: 2; Meeks 2010; 46)
~ Dem lꜣbj ‘der Bär’; lbj ‘Bär, Löwe’ (DG 260, 262) ~ Copt ⲗⲁⲃⲟⲓ ‘a lioness’ (Crum
ة
1939: 136b) ~ Akkad labbu ‘lion,’ labbatu ‘lioness’; labābu ‘to rage’ (CAD IX 24) ||
Ar � ��ل�بوlabwah/libwah ‘Löwin’ (Wahrmund II 619);
294 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
~ Damascus labwe ‘lionne’ (Denizeau 1960: 470) ~ Negev labʿih [< *labwih]
‘lioness’ (Henkin 2010: 290) ~ Egypt labwa ‘lioness’ (Spiro 1895: 535)
~ Ḥassāniyya ḷabbe ‘lionne’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 91) ~ Algeria lebba ‘id.’ (Ben
Sedira 1910: 353) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨labwah/lawwah⟩ ‘lioness’ (Corriente 1997: 474).
629 l-b-y
��ل�� ت ّأ
ꜣby.t (MK) ‘servante appartenant à la maisonnée’ (Meeks 2010: 33) || Ar � ب
ّْ
labbaʾtu ‘sich Jemandens Befehlen rasch fügen’; �ل ب��ي���كlabbayka ‘hier bin ich zu
deinem Diensten’ (Wahrmund II 619);
~ Negev labba ‘he acceded, granted’: labbayt ṭalabak ‘I granted your request’
(inform) ~ Mosul ⟨labbay⟩ ‘yes’ (Al-Bakrī 1972: 439) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨labbayk⟩
‘at your service’ (Corriente 1997: 476).
630 l-ḥ-f
�ف
ḥꜣp (MK) ‘verhüllen (mit einem Stoff), bedecken’; ‘to hide’ (Wb III 30; Faulkner
1962: 163) ~ Jibb elḥéf ‘bury, cover over’ (Johnstone 1981: 162) || Ar ���ح �لlaḥafa
‘wrap in a garment’; liḥāf, pl luḥuf ‘sheet wrapper, cloth; blanket’ (Hava 1982:
680);
~ Tunis lḥāf ‘vêtement formé d’une pièce d’étoffe dans laquelle on
s’enveloppe’ (D. Cohen 1975: 154) ~ Oman lḥāf, pl lŭḥf ‘Decke’ (Reinhardt 1894:
71) ~ Iraq lḥēf ‘quilt’ (Abu-Haidar 1991: 191) ~ Aleppo lḥēf, pl ləḥf ‘couverture de
lit piquée, en laine ou en coton, sur l’envers de laquelle est cousu un drap blanc
malḥafe’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 748) ~ Palmyra lḥēf ‘drap supérieur’ (Cantineau
1934 II 24) ~ Kəndērīb lḥēf, pl lḥēfāt ‘Steppdecke, Deckbett’: lḥēfātu ‘sein
Bettzeug’; ləffāḥa, pl -āt ‘Kopftuch’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 131) ~ Palest liḥāf, pl luḥuf/
liḥfe ‘Steppdecke’ (Bauer 1957: 289; Dalman VII 179) ~ Egypt laḥāf, pl alḥifa/
liḥafāt ‘bed quilt, cotton blanket’ (Spiro 1895: 536) ~ Djidjelli lḥāf ‘voile’ (Ph.
Marçais 1956: 265) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨liḥāf, pl alḥuf⟩ ‘bedcover’ (Corriente 1997:
477) ~ Rwala yelḥafūnaha ‘they surround them completely’ (Musil 1928: 654).
631 l-ḥ-q
ḥꜣq (MK) ‘to take as booty, plunder goods, capture towns, carry off captives’;
‘erbeuten, gefangen nehmen; Städte und Ländern erobern’; ḥꜣqt ‘plunder (n)’;
ḥꜣqw ‘plunderer’ (Ember 1930: 97; Faulkner 1962: 163; Wb III 32; Ember 1930:
629. l-b-y – 634. l-ḥ-y 295
18); (LE) ma=ra=qi=ḥa=ta ‘flee, flight, retreat’ (Hoch 1994: 142) || Ar �ح ق
�لlaḥiqa
�
‘erreichen, erholen; erwischen, verfolgen’ (Wahrmund I 626);
~ Egypt laḥaq ‘to reach, overtake’ (Spiro 1895: 537) ~ Marazig lḥeg ‘rattraper,
suivre pour rattraper; s’imposer à qqn, dominer par la force, la violence’ (Boris
1958: 553) ~ Najd liḥiǵ, yalḥag ‘catch up, reach, overtake, come to the rescue of’
(Kurpershoek 1995: 440) ~ Aleppo ləḥeq ‘atteindre, rejoindre, rattraper (qqn)
en courant ou en marchant, arriver à temps à un endroit’ (Barthélemy 1935–69:
749); ḥəgəl, yəḥgal ‘bekommen, erwischen’ (Sabuni 1980: 208) ~ S.E. Anatolia
ləḥeq ‘anholen, erwischen’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 389) ~ Oman lḥoq ‘treffen’
(Reinhardt 1894: 29).
632 l-ḥ-m¹
nḥb (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘harness, yoke’; ‘Joch für Pferde und Rinder; Pferde
anschirren’; nḥbw ‘yoke-oxen’ (Faulkner 1962: 136; Wb II 293) ~ Copt ⲛⲟⲩϩⲃ ‘to
�لlaḥama ‘verbinden’
�
yoke (beasts) to the water wheel’ (Crum 1939: 243a) || Ar �ح
م
(Wahrmund II 627); mulāḥim ‘bien tordu et fort (cordon, corde)’ (DAF II 978).
633 l-ḥ-m²
Dem mlẖ/mrẖ ‘Streit, Kampf’; mẖl ‘Kampf, Kämpfer’ (DG 170, 169, 177) ~ Copt
ⲙⲗⲁϩ ‘battle, quarrel’ (Crum 1939: 165b) ~ Heb [ ] ָל ַחםlāḥam ‘to fight, do battle’
(BDB 535);
~ Lebanon malḥame ‘combat sanglant où il y a des morts et des blessés’
(Denizeau 1960: 472) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨malḥama, pl malāḥim⟩ ‘battle’ (Corriente
1997: 478).
634 l-ḥ-y
nẖ (Pyr) ‘jaw’ (Ember 1930: 84) ~ Heb ֶל ִחיleḥī ‘jaw, cheek’ (BDB 534) ~ Ḥar
meleḥáw ‘side of jaw’ (Johnstone 1977: 83) || Ar � �لlaḥy ‘chin’ (Hava 1982: 682);
ح�ي
~ Najd liḥiyy, pl luwāḥi ‘cheeks, jaws’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 455) ~ Damascus
ləḥye, pl ləḥa ‘beard’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 20) ~ Aleppo ləḥye, pl ləḥa ‘barbe’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 750) ~ Palest liḥya, pl liḥa ‘Bart’ (Bauer 1957: 41) ~ Egypt
liḥya ‘beard’ (Spiro 1895: 537) ~ Morocco leḥya, pl lḥi ‘id.’ (Sobelman & Harrell
1963: 20) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨laḥya⟩ ‘id.’ (Corriente 1997: 478).
296 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
635 l-s-b
nsb (Pyr) ‘to bite (snake, scorpion), lap up, lick’; ‘lecken, belecken (auch Kuh
das Kalb), auflecken; verschlingen, lecken’ (Ember 1914: 111; Faulkner 1962: 139;
Hannig 2003: 661; Wb II 334) || Ar � �ل����س� بlasaba ‘to sting’; lasiba ‘to lick’ (Hava
1982: 685).
636 l-s-ʿ
637 l-s-n
ns (Pyr) ‘tongue’; ‘die Zunge, Flamme’ (Ember 1930: 86; Wb II 320; Faulkner
1962: 139; Hannig & Vomberg 1999: 220); nṯ Nebenform zu nś ‘Zunge’ (Sethe
1962: 145) ~ Dem rs/ls ‘Zunge’; ls=k ‘deine Zunge’ (DG 253, 263) ~ Copt ⲗⲁⲥ
أ
‘tongue’ (Crum 1939: 144b; Vycichl 1989: 26) ~ Heb ָלׁשֹוןlāšōn ‘tongue’ (BDB 546)
ن ة
|| Ar � �ل��س�اlisān, pl ���� � �ل����سنʾalsinah ‘language, tongue’ (Hava 1982: 685);
~ Aleppo lsēn, pl -āt/ləsən ‘langue d’animal; langue d’homme; langue qui
se parle, idiome’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 752) ~ Palmyra lsēn, pl lesne ‘langue’
(Cantineau 1934 II 1) ~ Palest lsān, pl -āt/alsine/alsun/ilsin/lisne ‘Zunge,
Sprache eines Volkes’ (Bauer 1957: 380, 283) ~ Egypt lisān, pl alsina ‘tongue,
language’ (Spiro 1895: 539) ~ Malta ⟨ilsien, pl ilsna⟩ ‘lingua, loquela’ (Vassalli
1796: 442).
Cf. Ghomara (Berber) iles ‘tongue’ (Murigh 2016: 404).
638 l-š-l-š
639 l-š-y
ments’ (Faulkner 1962: 140, 141; Wb II 337) || Ar ��� لا شlāšā ‘to destroy, annihilate’
nš (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘to expel’; ‘vertreiben, verdrängen’; nšnš ‘to tear up docu-
640 l-ṭ-ʾ
أ
ndj (Pyr) ‘niederschlagen’ (Wb V 367) || Ar � �ل��طlaṭaʾa ‘to beat s.o. on the back’
(Hava 1982: 686);
~ Aleppo laṭa laḥáda ‘s’embusquer sur le passage de qqn’ (Barthélemy 1935–
69: 756).
641 l-ṭ-m
ndb (Pyr) ‘verwunden (mit den Hörnern)’ (Wb V 367) || Ar � �ل��طlaṭama ‘to slap,
م
knock’ (Hava 1982: 687);
~ N. Yemen laṭam ‘schlagen’ (Behnstedt 1987: 298) ~ Aleppo laṭam ‘heurter
(qqn)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 756) ~ Egypt laṭam ‘to strike the face with the
hands’ (Spiro 1895: 541) ~ Palest tlaṭṭam ‘se frapper’ (Denizeau 1960: 475)
~ Al-Andalus ⟨laṭmah, pl liṭam⟩ ‘slap’ (Corriente 1997: 481).
642 l-ʿ-b
ْ
i҆bꜣ (Pyr) ‘to dance’; ‘tanzen, Tänzer’ (Faulkner 1962: 15; Calice 1936: 24; Wb I 62)
|| Ar � �ل�ع� بlaʿb/liʿb/laʿib ‘Scherz, Unterhaltung, Sport’ (Wahrmund II 640);
~ N. Yemen liʿbin ‘Tanz, Spiel’ (Behnstedt 1987: 299) ~ Najd liʿb, liʿbah ‘song,
playful, dancing movements’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 441); laʿʿābeh ‘spielende
Mädchen’ (Hess 1938: 142) ~ Ḥassāniyya lʿab ‘jouer au tambour’ (Taine-Cheikh
1990: 87) ~ Palest laʿʿāb hal-ḥabl ‘danseur de corde’ (Denizeau 1960: 475;
Schmidt & Kahle I 90).
298 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
643 l-ġ-y
ꜣʿʿ (LE) ‘Dolmetscher, eine fremde Sprache sprechen’ (Wb I 3) ~ Ge lāʿləʿa ‘stam-
644 l-f-f
645 l-q-y
646 l-k-k
nṯṯ (OK) [< *lčč] ‘bonds’; ‘die Fessel, fesseln, gefesselt sein; etwas binden an
etwas anderes (mit m); die Banden mit denen der Mund der ّToten verschlos-
sen ist’ (Faulkner 1962: 143; Wb II 367; Calice 1936: 167) || Ar �ل�كlakka ‘to cuff’
(Hava 1982: 694); ‘compressus, angustus fuit’ (Freytag 1837: 564); ��اك � �ل كlikāk ‘a
pressing or crowding’; ‘Gedränge, Engigkeit’; lakīk ‘fest, kompakt, stark’ (Lane
3013; Ullmann 1991: 1244);
~ Iraq lakk ‘to seal, fasten securely’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 426)
~ E. Arabia lakkak ‘to seal tightly’ (Holes 2001: 482) ~ Lebanon lakk ‘plier sous
la charge (bête de somme)’ (Denizeau 1960: 180) ~ Najd lakk b- ‘to harm, dam-
age, hurt’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 457) ~ Tripoli (Lebanon) lakk ‘chanceler, vaciller’
(El-Hajjé 1954: 26) ~ Morocco lekkek ‘to seal’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 171);
ləkkək ‘sceller à la cire, cacheter’ (Prémare XI 79).
647 l-k-ḥ
Dem lkḥ ‘lecken’ (DG 264) ~ Copt ⲗⲱϫϩ ‘lick’ (Crum 1939: 151a) ~ Akkad
lêku ‘id.’ (CAD IX 116) ~ Ugar lḥk ‘id.’ (DUL 491) ~ Heb ָל ַחְךlāḥak ‘to lick, lap’
�ل كlakaḥa ‘lecken’ (Wahrmund II 651);
(M. Jastrow 1886: 703) || Ar ���
ح
~ Kfarʿabīda laʿwek ‘il mâcha’; lakeḥ/lakkeḥ ‘il lécha’ (Feghali 1919: 24); lakaḥ,
yelkaḥ ‘lécher’ (Denizeau 1960: 480).
648 l-m-m
ّ
ꜣmm (ME) ‘seize, grasp’; ‘mit der Faust ergreifen’; ꜣmm.t ‘der Griff, der Faust’
(Faulkner 1962: 3; Wb I 10, 11) || Ar لlamma ‘rassembler, réunir en ramassant
م
des tous côtés ce qui était dispersé’ (DAF II 1022);
~ Ḥaḍramawt lamlam ‘un intensif de lamm (réunir, ramasser)’ (Landberg
1901: 1726) ~ Sinai ramram ‘to gather bits and pieces together’ (Stewart 1990:
258) ~ Najd lamm ‘to assemble’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 442) ~ Aleppo lamm ‘ras-
sembler, réunir, quêter’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 766) ~ Lebanon lamlam/lamlem
‘zusammensammeln’; ‘ramasser çà et là’ (Jiha 1964: 40; Denizeau 1960: 482)
~ Kəndērīb lamm ‘sammeln, zusammennehmen’; lamlam ‘aufsammeln’ (O.
Jastrow 2005: 133) ~ Palest lamm ‘sammeln’ (Bauer 1957: 251) ~ Sudan lamlam
‘collect’ (LDA 447) ~ Egypt lamm ‘gather, collect’ (Spiro 1895: 547) ~ Tunis ləmm
‘il a amassé’ (D. Cohen 1975: 99).
300 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
649 l-h-b
rhb (ME) ‘Glut des Feuers’ (Wb II 440) ~ Heb ַל ַהבlahab ‘flame, blade’ (BDB
529) ~ Copt ⲗϩⲱⲃ ‘steam, vapour’ (Crum 1939: 149b) || Ar � ��ل�ه� بlahiba ‘to blaze
fiercely’ (Hava 1982: 697);
~ Najd lahūb, pl lahāyib ‘Flamme’; lāhūb, pl lawāhīb ‘Glut, Glamme’ (Socin
1901 III 309) ~ Yemen lahab ‘far fiamma’ (Rossi 1939: 208) ~ Rwala lahīb ‘flame,
blaze’ (Musil 1928: 582) ~ Daθīna lahabeh ‘flamme’ (GD 2648) ~ Palmyra lahīb
‘flammes’ (Cantineau 1934 II 33) ~ Lebanon lahlab ‘allumer du feu, flamber
fort’ (Denizeau 1960: 482); lahhāb ‘qui brûle tout’ (Feghali 1938: 827) ~ Kəndērīb
lahbe ‘Flamme’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 133) ~ Diyarbakır lahbīye ‘Flamme, Glut’
(Vocke & Waldner 1982: 394) ~ Ḥama lahlab bnār ‘in Feuer geraten’ (Lewin 1966:
225) ~ Palest lahabe/lahībe ‘Flamme (lodernd)’; lahhab ‘flammend’ (Bauer 1957:
113; Kampffmeyer 1936: 68) ~ Tripoli (Libya) lehīb ‘fiamma’ (Griffini 1913: 83:
116) ~ Tunis lāləb ‘Il a brulé’ (D. Cohen 1975: 120) ~ Takrūna lheb ‘s’enflammer;
commencer à flamber (feu, combustible)’; lahheb ‘allumer un feu flambant’
(Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 3683).
650 l-h-f¹
أ ف
nhp (Ebers) ‘pulsate, jump up; copulate’; ‘springen’; ‘s’élancer, bondir’ (DLE I
240; Faulkner 1962: 135; Calice 1936: 164; Herbin 1994: 534) || Ar ��� � ��ل�هʾalhafa
‘être avide de …, désirer ardemment quelque chose’ (DAF 1033);
~ Negev lahaf maʿha ‘he had sex with her’; ana malhūf ʿalēha ‘I have a strong
desire for her’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Daθīna ⟨malhūf⟩ ‘famélique, avide’ (GD
2648) ~ Aleppo lahaf ‘désirer avidemment (qqe)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 769)
~ Lebanon lahaf ‘avaler précipitamment’ (Denizeau 1960: 482) ~ Egypt lahaf
‘snatch, swipe’; ‘anstoßen, anschlagen an etwas’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 802;
Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 439).
651 l-h-f²
nhp (MK) ‘care, grieve, care for (ḥr)’; ‘sorgen für, beschützen, behüten’ (Faulkner
1962: 135, 1969: 329; DLE I 9; Wb II 283, 284; Calice 1936: 66) ~ّ Dem nhp ‘trauern’
ف
(DG 221) ~ Copt ⲛⲉϩⲡⲉ ‘to mourn’ (Crum 1939: 245a) || Ar ��� ��ل�هlahhafa ‘to grieve
for s.o.’ (Hava 1982: 698);
~ Aleppo malhūf ʿala ‘qui regrette vivement qqn’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 769).
649. l-h-b – 654. l-w-š 301
652 l-w-b
i҆bi҆ (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘be thirsty; thirst after’; ‘dürsten, dürstig sein’ (Ember
1930: 30; Faulkner 1962: 15; Barns 1956: 36; Wb I 61) ~ Dem ꜣbj ‘dürsten, Durst’
(DG 3) ~ Copt ⲉⲓⲃⲉ ‘to thirst’ (Crum 1939: 76 a, b) || Ar � لا بlāba ‘être altéré de
soif et tourner autour de l’eau, de l’abreuvoir, sans pouvoir en approcher’ (DAF
1086); � �لوا بluwāb ‘Durst; Speichel’ (Wahrmund II 659);
~ Aleppo tlawwab ‘être tourmenté de la soif’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 768)
~ Yemen lāb, yilūb ‘nach etwas dürsten oder verlangen, aber nicht erreichen
können’ (Behnstedt 2006: 1130) ~ Egypt lōbla, ilōbli ‘beim Bewässern mit dem
Schöpfwerk Treiblieder singen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 428).
653 l-w-ḥ
ꜣḫ (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘schön, herrlich, trefflich, nutzlich sein’; ‘glorious, splen-
did’ (Brockelmann 1932: 100; Faulkner 1962: 4); ꜣḫ.t ‘Sonnenglanz’; ꜣḫ.t (NK)
‘Auge, besonders vom Auge der Sonne’ (Wb I 13, 17) || Ar لاlāḥa ‘to appear, to
ح
shine (star), to flash (lightning)’ (Hava 1982: 700);
~ Daθīna lāḥ ‘paraître, briller’; lawḥa ‘apparition d’une chose’ (GD 2655)
~ Rwala lāḥ ‘to appear, to shine, gleam, glitter, flash, sparkle’; xoð min al-fellāḥ
ma lāḥ ‘Take from the fellāḥ whatever ye find (or like)’; miθl al-barad min rūs
mizneten yalūḥi ‘like hail-stones that glitter from the heights of a black cloud’
(Musil 1928: 150, 209, 90, 224) ~ Palest lāḥ ‘(das Firmament) glänzt, funkelt’
(Kampffmeyer 1936: 68) ~ Egypt lāḥ ‘to please, be attractive’ (Spiro 1895: 532).
654 l-w-š
i҆҆wšš (MK) ‘Teig, Brei (als Speise), (ein Medikament) zu einem Brei einrühren
und ähnlich’ (Wb I 58) ~ Copt ⲟⲟⲩϣ ‘knead, bruise’ [*lwš] (Crum 1939: 503a) ||
Aram לוׁשlwš ‘to knead’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 701);
~ Aleppo lāš əṭṭḥīn ‘détremper la farine avec de l’eau avant de la malaxer, de la
pétrir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 769) ~ Lebanon lawwaš ‘détremper la farine’
(Feghali 1935: 24).
302 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
655 l-w-m
i҆m (MK) ‘to moan’; ‘wehklagen, jammern’; i҆mw ‘grief’; ‘Wehklagen’ (Faulkner
1962: 17, 18; Wb I 7) || Ar لاlāma ‘tadeln, schelten, Vorwürfe machen’
م
(Wahrmund II 662);
~ Aleppo lām ‘blâmer, réprimander’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 770) ~ Egypt
lām ‘to blame’ (Spiro 1895: 533) ~ Tunis lawm ‘reproches’ (D. Cohen 1975: 67)
~ Douz lām ‘er tadelte’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2014: 16) ~ Ḥassāniyya lām ‘critiquer’
(Taine-Cheikh 1990: 76) ~ Morocco lām ‘blâmer, réprimander, désapprouver’
(Prémare XI 104) ~ Djidjelli lūma ‘blâme’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 256).
656 l-w-n
i҆҆wn (MK) ‘colour; complexion, nature’; ‘Farbe der Blumen, der Haut; Art, Wesen,
أ ن
Charakter’ (Faulkner 1962: 13; Barns 1956: 36; Wb I 52) ~ Copt ⲁⲩⲁⲛ ‘colour’
ن
(Crum 1939: 20b) || Ar � �لوlawn, pl � � �لواʾalwān ‘colour, hue, appearance’ (Hava
1982: 702);
~ Oman lōn, pl elwān ‘Art’ (Reinhardt 1894: 72) ~ Aleppo lōn, pl lwān ‘cou-
leur, espéce, sorte, manière’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 773) ~ Rwala lown ‘con-
dition, heart’: waš lownak = waš ḥālak ‘how are you?’; lak lōn ‘thou art right’
(Musil 1928: 212, 432) ~ Egypt lōn ‘colour, complexion’ (Spiro 1895: 549) ~ Tunis
lawn ‘couleur’ (D. Cohen 1975: 67) ~ Mzāb lewn ‘couleur’ (Grand’Henry 1976:
131) ~ Djidjelli lūn ‘couleur, espèce’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 254) ~ Tangier nowl, pl
nwāl ‘couleur, espèce’ (W. Marçais 1911: 483) ~ Morocco lun ‘color’ (Sobelman &
Harrell 1963: 35) ~ Malta ⟨lewn, pl lwien⟩ ‘colore’ (Vassalli 1796: 437; Aquilina
1987: 742).
657 l-w-y
rwj ‘go away, depart’; ‘fortgehen, weichen, sich bewegen für jemanden’
(Faulkner 1962: 147; Wb I 406) || Ar �لو�ىlawā ‘biegen, drehen, nach Rechts und
Links wenden’ (Wahrmund II 663);
~ Ḥaḍramawt māwi ‘rentrer chez soi, returner dans son pays’ [< lawā]
(Landberg 1901: 1599) ~ Yemen lawa, yilwi ‘to turn (intr.), to wander, stroll about’
(Piamenta 1991: 455) ~ E. Arabia lawa ‘to go round, visit in turn’; lēwa ‘type of
dance, performed by former slaves’ (Holes 2001: 486, 488) ~ Najd lāwa ‘to move
back and forth; twist, move around; to evade, recoil’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 443)
655. l-w-m – 660. l-y-m 303
~ Palest lawa ‘umbiegen’ (Bauer 1957: 313) ~ Egypt luwa ‘to bend, twist’ (Spiro
1895: 549) ~ Morocco lwa ‘tourner (en marchant), contourner, oblique, passer
le coin d’une rue’ (Prémare XI 108) ~ Malta ⟨lewa, jilwi⟩ ‘torcere, girare, pie-
gare, voltare’ (Vassalli 1796: 441).
658 l-y-s
n.s (negative particle) (Faulkner 1962: 3): ni҆s mi҆tw.k ‘one not thy equal’ (Gardiner
1957: §257); N wśḫ i҆s ‘it was not broad’ (Gunn 1924: 200) || Ar �ل��ي��سlaysa ‘es war /
ist nicht’ (Wahrmund II 665);
~ Oman lēs (Reinhardt 1894: 282) ~ Yemen lāys/lēs ‘there isn’t’; laysayn ‘abso-
lutely not’ (Piamenta 1991: 456); lēs/lēs ‘nichts, es gibt nicht, nein’ (Behnstedt
1993: 191) ~ Marazig lāysa (s’emploie sans nuance pédante, comme particule de
négation à valeur emphatique): ʿāhed ʿāhed lāysa gatli ‘sur ma foi, non certes,
elle ne m’a point dit’ (Boris 1958: 569) ~ Morocco līs (négation): l-məktūb, līs
ʿlīh/menno hṛōb ‘il n’y a pas d’echappature au destin, on ne peut échapper à
ce qui est écrit’ (Prémare XI 113) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨laysa/las/lis⟩ ‘not’: ⟨las lī fīhā
amal⟩ ‘I have no hope regarding her’ (Corriente 1997: 489).
Regarding the uninflected reflexes of laysa in the Arabic vernaculars, see Blau 1966–7
II, 305.
659 l-y-l
nn (Gr) ‘Finsternis, Nacht; auch als Nordgrenze der Welt’ (Wb II 274) || Saf ll
‘night’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 645) ~ Ar ��لي��لlayl ‘night’ (Hava 1982:
704);
~ N. Yemen laylah ‘Nacht’ (Behnstedt 1987: 300) ~ Aleppo lēl ‘nuit’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 769) ~ Palest lēl ‘Nacht’ (Bauer 1957: 214) ~ Egypt lēl
‘night’ (Spiro 1895: 549) ~ Malta ⟨lejl, pl ljieli⟩ ‘night’; ⟨lejla, pl lejliet⟩ ‘evening’
(Aquilina 1987: 738–9).
660 l-y-m
أ
ꜣmj (Med) ‘mix’; ‘mischen, vermengen’ (Faulkner 1962: 3; Wb I 10) || Ar ��إ� ��لت
م
ʾiltaʾama ‘sich versammeln’ (Wahrmund II 614) || Ar � �م�ل��ت ئmultaʾim ‘united, col-
lected’ (Hava 1982: 674);
م
304 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
~ E. Arabia layyam ‘collect, gather together’ (Holes 2000: 151) ~ Najd talāyam
‘to get toget her, assemble’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 444) ~ Al-Balqāʾ lāyam ‘to meet’
(Palva 1992: 176) ~ Rwala layyamnāhom ‘we had them all assembled’ (Musil
1928: 444) ~ Egypt layyam ‘begegnen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1999: 398) ~ Sinai
lāyam ‘to encounter s.o. by chance’ (Stewart 1990: 247) ~ Mzāb ilāymu ‘ils ras-
semblent’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 131) ~ Djidjelli lāyəm ‘il a rassemblé’ (Ph. Marçais
1956: 63) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨atlāʾam⟩ ‘to agree’ (Corriente 1997: 474).
661 m-ā
m (OK) (negative imperative) ‘do not’ (Faulkner 1962: 100) || Ar �م�اmā (negative
particle): mā adrī ‘I do not know’ (Hava 1982: 705);
~ Palest manīš ‘ich bin nicht’ (Bauer 1957: 218) ~ Egypt ma kānš hena ‘he
was not here’ (Spiro 1895: 550) ~ Kəndērīb ṛāḥət u mā ṛaddət ‘sie ging weg und
kehrte nicht zurück’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 135) ~ Cypriot Ar má-paxuta ‘I will not
marry her!’ (own obs.) ~ Malta ⟨ma marrux⟩ ‘they did not go’ (own obs.).
662 m-ā
663 m-x-x
os’ (Boris 1958: 575) ~ Djidjelli moxx ‘moelle, cervelle’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 250)
~ Morocco moxx, pl mxāx ‘cerveau, moelle’ (Prémare XI: 149–150) ~ Malta
⟨moħħ, pl mħuħ⟩ ‘midollo, cervello’ (Vassalli 1796: 514).
664 m-d-d
ّ
mdd (NK) ‘Mass für Wein’ (Wb II 183) ~ Akkad middatu ‘measure of capacity’
(CAD XI 46) ~ Heb ִמ ָּדהmiddāh ‘measure’ (BDB 551) || Ar �م�دmudd ‘measure of
several standards’ (Hava 1982: 712);
~ Palmyra mēdde ‘mesure que l’on fixe sur les bords d’un tissu pour le ren-
dre plus rigide et droit’ (Cantineau 1934 II 31) ~ Tangier mudd ‘une mesure de
capacité en usage pour les légumes secs et pour les céréales’ (W. Marçais 1911:
464).
665 m-d-š
bdš (Pyr) ‘to become faint, weak, exhausted’; ‘ermatten, schlaff werden (Arme,
1936: 30; Wb I 487) || Ar ��� �م�د شmadiša ‘become dim, sunken, through hunger or
Füsse, Herz, Auge); schwach sein’; bdšt ‘weakness’ (Faulkner 1962: 86; Calice
heat (eye)’; ‘sich verdunkeln, trüben (Auge)’ (Hava 1982: 712; Wahrmund II 751).
666 m-r-ḥ¹
mrḥ.t ‘Salbe; Öl, Fett (von Tieren und Pflanzen, als Salbmittel, ..)’; ‘oil’; mrḥ ‘salben’
(Wb II 111; Hannig 1995: 349; van der Plas & Borghouts 1998: 129; DLE I 194)
667 m-r-ḥ²
أ
mꜣḥ (MK) ‘als Ortsbezeichnung’; mꜣḥ ‘pasture’ (Wb II 31; Faulkner 1962: 103) ||
Ar � �مرʾamraḥa ‘lâcher et faire aller au pâturage’ (DAF 1087);
ح
306 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
~ Oman mrāḥ ‘freier Platz’ (Reinhardt 1894: 50) ~ Najd mrāḥ ‘the place near
the tent where where the camels rest at night’ (Sowayan 1992: 296); miriḥ ‘die
Lagerplätze des Viehs in der Nähe der Zelte’ (Hess 1938: 62) ~ Palest yimraḥ
‘Umherlaufen der Schafe’; mrāḥ ‘Umherlaufen’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 69) ~ Sinai
mrāḥ ‘place where the night is spent’ (Stewart 1990: 249) ~ Egypt yitmarraḥ
‘für die Nacht lagern’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1999: 398) ~ Rwala marḥ al-ʿarab
‘an old camping place’; amraḥ ‘to spend the night’ (Musil 1928: 78, 366) ~ Najd
marraḥ ‘to let the animals rest at night’; mrāḥ, pl mirḥ ‘place near the tent
where the camels rest at night’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 459) ~ Al-Balqāʾ imraḥ ‘to
spend the night’ (Palva 1992: 176) ~ Khābūra marāḥ ‘a dry place for the cam-
els to rest’; marraḥ ‘make camels lie down’ (Brockett 1985: 195) ~ Algeria mrāḥ
‘enceinte, cour entourée’ (Lentin 1959: 276).
668 m-r-x
(Crum 1939: 210a,b) || Ar �مر خmarx ‘Baum, dessen Holz leicht Feuer fängt (Salix
mꜣẖ (MK) [< *mrḫ] ‘verbrennen durch Feuer’ (Wb II 31) ~ Copt ⲙⲟⲩϩ ‘to burn’
�
campestris)’ (Wahrmund II 765).
669 m-r-r¹
(Faulkner 1962: 112; Wb II 110) || Saf mr ‘to pass’ (Al-Jallad 2015: 328) ~ Ar �م ّر
mrt/mrrt (MK) ‘street, avenue of statues’; ‘Strasse einer Ortschaft, Häuserviertel’
670 m-r-r²
671 m-r-r³
mr (LE) ‘die hölzerne Hacke (als Schriftzeichen)’ (Wb II 98; Calice 1936: 33);
The triangular shape of the hieroglyph for this Ancient Egyptian lexeme is echoed in the
gloss of the Arabic cognate.
~ Palmyra maṛṛ, pl mṛūṛ ‘bêche dont le fer est triangulaire et le manche
pourvu d’un batonnet transversal’ (Denizeau 1960: 490; Cantineau 1934 II 55)
~ Kəndērīb maṛṛ ‘Spaten, Grabscheit’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 139).
672 m-r-z
�ز
mꜣz (Pyr) ‘Messer; verwunden, schlachten’ (Wb II 31, 32) ~ Akkad masdaru ‘a
knife’ (CAD X 323) || Ar �مرmaraza ‘couper un morceau p. ex., de pâte; frapper
quelqu’un avec la main’ (DAF 1089).
308 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
673 m-r-ʿ
674 m-r-h
675 m-z-n
śnm [*znm] (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘Regenflut, Regenströme’ (Wb IV 165; Calice
1936: 79); snmw ‘squalls of rain’; wꜣwt snm ‘rain-swept roads’ (Faulkner 1962:
232) ~ Sab ðnm ‘rain’; ‘pluie’ (Jamme 1962: 431; Avanzini 1980: 223) ~ Ge zanma
ن
zənam ‘rain’ (Kane 1991: 1650, 1651) || Ar � �م�زmuzn ‘rain cloud’ (Hava 1982: 718);
‘to rain’; zanām ‘rain (n)’ (Leslau 1987: 728) ~ Amh zännäbä ‘to rain’; zənab/
~ Iraq mizna, pl mizan ‘rain, shower’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 438)
~ Rwala mizne ‘a small cloud, originally white, which is joined by many
other similar clouds (yitafāzeʿen) and eventually produces heavy rain’ (Musil
1928: 5, 345) ~ Najd mizin ‘Wolke’; mizin, n.u. miznah, pl mzūn ‘rain clouds’
(Socin 1901 III 115; Kurpershoek 1999: 460) ~ Awlād ʿAli (Libya) el-mizn (= el-
maṭar) (Hartmann 1899: 95) ~ Yemen mizn ‘Regen’; muzn ‘Regenwolke,
Regen’ (Behnstedt 2006: 1157); muzn, pl amzān ‘rain cloud’ (Piamenta 1991:
465) ~ Marazig mazzan ‘paraître s’élever sur l’horizon; brume qui s’élève un
peu au-dessus de l’horizon, surtout le matin après la pluie’ (Boris 1958: 581)
~ Morocco muzn, pl mzān/mzūn; məzna ‘nuage de pluie, pluie bienfaisante’
(Prémare XI 190) ~ Ḥassāniyya məzne, pl mzūn ‘nuage’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990:
103) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨muznah, pl muzan⟩ ‘rain-cloud’ (Corriente 1997: 501).
673. m-r- ʿ – 678. m-s-y 309
676 m-s-ḥ
mśḥ ‘gehen’ (Wb II 147; Quack 2012: 379–386) || Ar �� �م��سmasaḥa fī l-ʾarḍi ‘he
ح
set forth journeying through the land, or earth’; ‘mesurer (la terre, les champs,
ْ
pour en connaître la superficie), … de là, traverser, parcourir, et, pour ainsi dire,
arpenter la terre; marcher toute la journée (se dit des chameaux)’; �� �م��سmisḥ,
ح
pl �م��سوmusūḥ ‘the main part, and middle, of a road’ (Lane 1713; DAF II 1103);
ح
~ Al-Andalus ⟨atamassaḥ⟩ ‘praetereo’ (Dozy II 597) ~ Cypriot Ar tmassex,
pkyitmassex ‘to go away’ [< msḥ] (Borg 2004: 428) ~ Palest masaḥ ‘Land ver-
messen’ (Bauer 1957: 336) ~ Egypt masaḥ el-arḍ ‘he measured the land’; misāḥa
‘land measurement, surface area, survey’ (Spiro 1895: 565) ~ Ḥaḍramawt masaḥ
‘raser = passer tout près, passer sur’ (Landberg 1901: 715).
677 m-s-k
msq (Pyr) ‘leather’; cf. mskꜣ ‘skin, leather’; ‘Haut, Fett eines Tieres; Leder als Stoff
fur Riemen, Schuhe’ (Faulkner 1962: 118; Wb II 150) ~ Akkad mašku ‘leather’ (M.
ة
�م��س �كmasakah ‘Kopfhaut des Neugeborenen’ (Wahrmund
Cohen 2011: 122) || Ar ���
ْ
II 798); �م��س�كmask, pl �م��سوكmusūk ‘freshly flayed skin’ (Hava 1982: 720).
678 m-s-y
msw.t (Pyr) ‘supper, meal’; ‘Abendbrot, Mahlzeit, Speise’ (Faulkner 1962: 117; Wb
II 136, 142; Erman 1904: 55; Calice 1936: 100); msyt ‘repas du soir’ (Herbin 1994:
أ
532) ~ Akkad mūšu(m)/mušītu(m) ‘Nacht’; mūšiš ‘bei Nacht’ (AHW 687, 683)
~ Ge masya ‘to become evening’ (Leslau 1987: 365) || Ar � �م��س�ا ءʾamsāʾa ‘entrer
dans l’heure du soir’ (DAF II 1107);
Ambros (2004: 28) considers Ar ams an “irregular derivate” of msy ‘to be in the evening’.
~ Najd msayyān ‘gegen Abend’ (Socin 1901 III 311) ~ Oman mse ‘Abend, spät’
(Reinhardt 1894: 41, 115) ~ S. Arabia ⟨mamsā⟩ ‘passer la nuit’ (Landberg 1901:
716) ~ Aleppo masa ‘soir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 788) ~ S.E. Anatolia massa
‘Abend werden’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 407) ~ Lebanon māsa ‘aller voir
les gens le soir’; tmassa ‘arriver tard le soir’ (Feghali 1938: 357, 830) ~ Palest
masa/msiyye ‘Abend’ (Bauer 1957: 1; Kampffmeyer 1936: 69) ~ Egypt misa
‘evening’ (Spiro 1895: 567) ~ Marazig məsē ‘soir’ (Boris 1958: 583) ~ Djidjelli
msa ‘id.’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 258) ~ Sudan amsa ‘to be in the evening’
(LDA 36).
310 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
679 m-š-ṭ
mšdd [*mšṭṭ] ‘comb’ (Takács 2008: 642; Hoch 1994: 164) ~ Copt ⲙϣⲧⲱⲧⲉ ‘peigne
(cheveux), peigne (du tisserand)’ (Vycichl 1983: 129) ~ Akkad mušṭu, pl mušṭātu
� شmušṭ ‘comb’ (Hava 1982: 721);
‘comb’ (CAD X 290) || Ar م�����ط
~ Yemen mšoṭṭ ‘pettine’ (Rossi 1939: 227) ~ Damascus məšəṭ, pl mšāṭ ‘comb’
(Stowasser & Ani 1964: 46) ~ Kəndērīb məšṭ, pl amšāṭ ‘Kamm’ (Vocke &
Waldner 1982: 407) ~ Oman mšoṭṭ ‘Kamm’ (Reinhardt 1894: 50) ~ Yemen mšoṭṭ
‘pettine’ (Rossi 1939: 227) ~ Palmyra mušṭ, pl mšūṭ ‘peigne’ (Cantineau 1934 I
204) ~ Palest mušṭ, pl mšāṭ ‘Kamm’ (Bauer 1957: 169) ~ Tripoli (Libya) mšaṭ
‘pettinare’ (Cesàro 1939: 202) ~ Djidjelli mešta ‘peigne à cheveux’; mšeṭ ‘peigne
à carder’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 332, 247).
680 m-š-y
šm (Pyr) ‘go, walk, set out’; ‘gehen’; šmt ‘walking, gait, movements, march (v)’
(Calice 1936: 82; Faulkner 1962: 266; Wb IV 462; DLE II 121) ~ Dem mšʿ ‘gehen’
(DG 181) ~ Copt ⲙⲟⲟϣⲉ ‘to walk, go on land or water’ (Crum 1939: 203b) ||
Ar �م ش���ىmašā ‘to walk’ (Hava 1982: 722);
~ Najd miša ‘to walk, to go’ (Sowayan 1992: 297) ~ Aleppo məši ‘marcher’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 789) ~ Palest miši ‘gehen, marschieren’ (Bauer 1957: 126)
~ Egypt miši ‘to go, walk, march’ (Spiro 1895: 569) ~ Tunis nḥabb nemši ‘je veux
aller’ (D. Cohen 1975: 43) ~ Morocco mši ‘departure’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963:
49) ~ Malta ⟨mixja⟩ ‘a walk; walking gait’ (own obs.).
681 m-ṭ-r
682 m-ġ-l
mnʿ.t (Pyr) ‘die Milchkühe’; mnʿ (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘säugen’; ‘nurse’; mnʿy ‘male
683 m-k-r¹
� �م كmakara ‘to dye s.th. red’; cf. � �غم�ر�ةmaġrah ‘terre rouge, sorte de boue rougeâtre’
mkrr ‘zwischen “schwarz” und “weiss” als Farbbezeichnung’ (Wb II 163) || Ar
�ر
(Hava 1982: 730; DAF II 1132);
~ Najd muġir (pl) ‘reddish, russet’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 461) ~ Aleppo məġra
‘ocre rouge’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 794) ~ Palmyra bmaġġrou b-būb ‘ils teignent
les portes en rouge’ (Cantineau 1934 II 24) ~ Egypt muġra ‘red ochre, red chalk’
(Spiro 1895: 575).
684 m-k-r²
mkꜣ ‘to be brave, to be determined’; ‘tapfer, kühn (vom Herzen)’ (Englund 1995;
� �م كmakara ‘agir avec ruse à l’égard de quelqu’un’ (DAF II 1138);
Wb II 50) || Ar �ر
~ Aleppo makkār ‘fourbe, trompeur’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 196) ~ Damascus
makər ‘shrewdness’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 49) ~ Lebanon mekkāṛ ‘trompeur’
(Feghali 1938: 831) ~ Palest makkār ‘durchtrieben, verschmitzt’; makr
‘Schlauheit’ (Bauer 1957: 81, 339, 259) ~ Egypt makar ‘deceive, practice arti-
fice’; makkār, pl makkārīn ‘deceitful, cunning’ (Spiro 1895: 577) ~ Algeria
makra ‘l’astuce’ (Lentin 1959: 281) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨makr⟩ ‘shrewdness, malice’
(Corriente 1997: 507).
685 m-l-ǧ
mnḏ (LE) ‘breast’; ‘die weibliche Brust; die Brust … besonders mit Bezug auf
Säugen (die Milch ist in den Brüsten; die Mutter reicht dem Kinde die Brust
312 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
und ähnlich)’; ḥr mnḏ ‘an der Brust (vom Säugling)’ (Wb II 92, 93; Ember 1911:
90); Nfr-mnḏ.wt ‘gut sind die Brüste’ (anthroponym; Scheele-Schweitzer 2014:
92; Ranke 1935: 196) ~ Copt ⲙⲛⲟⲧ ‘breast’ (Crum 1939: 176b) || Ar �م��ل��جmalaǧa
�
‘saisir avec le bout des lèvres le sein de la mère’ (DAF II 1143);
~ Aleppo malaš [< *mlž < mlǧ] ‘to chew something soft’ (Al-Asadī VII 195)
~ Lebanon malaš, yemloš ‘manger avec gloutonnerie; manger vite’ (Denizeau
1960: 502–3) ~ N. Yemen xubiz malūj ‘Fladenbrot aus Weizen und Đurah’
(Behnstedt 1987: 303) ~ Cypriot Ar lammeš, pilammeš ‘suck the breast; eat
avidly, gulp down, devour; grab’ (own obs.) ~ Ḥassāniyya meylej ‘têter goulû-
ment’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 143).
686 m-l-ḥ¹
ḥmꜣ.t/mariḥa ‘salt’; ‘Salz’ (Faulkner 1962: 170; Edel 1966: 22–23) || Ar �� �م��لmilḥ
ح
‘salt’ (Hava 1982: 732);
~ Aleppo məlḥ ‘sel’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 196) ~ Palest malḥ ‘Salz’ (Bauer
1957: 251) ~ Egypt malḥ ‘salt’ (Spiro 1895: 579) ~ Tunis məlḥ ‘sel’ (D. Cohen 1975:
141) ~ Malta ⟨melħ⟩ ‘common salt’ (Aquilina 1990: 805).
687 m-l-ḥ²
688 m-l-s
ّ
nms ‘to wipe’ (Quack 2012: 379–386) ~ Ge lamaṣa ‘be smooth’ (Leslau 1987: 316)
|| Ar �م��ل��سmallasa ‘polir, lisser, satiner, rendre uni’ (DAF II 1147);
Cf. Gk μᾰλάσσω ‘make soft’ (GEL 1077) > Mod Gk μαλάσσω/μαλάζω ‘knead, massage’ (Pring
2000: 111).
~ Najd limas ‘to feel, touch, handle’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 442) ~ Yemen lamas
‘toccare’ (Rossi 1939: 242) ~ Palmyra tlammas ‘toucher, tâter’ (Cantineau 1934 II
4) ~ Aleppo mallas, imalles ‘rendre doux au toucher, lisser’ (Barthélemy 1935–
69: 797) ~ Suxne lamas, yilmis ‘berühren’ (Behnstedt 1994: 368) ~ S.E. Anatolia
mēləs/məllūs ‘glatt’; mallas ‘glätten (Stein)’ (Vocke & Waldner 412) ~ Lebanon
malles ‘caresser, cajoler, flatter’ (Feghali 1933: 93) ~ Iraq ʾamlas, f malsa, pl
milis/malsīn ‘smooth, sleek’; limas ‘feel, handle’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 443,
441) ~ Palest malas ‘glatt’ (Bauer 1957: 70); tlammas ‘tasten’ (Schmidt & Kahle
1918: 297) ~ Marazig lmes ‘toucher, tâter’ (Boris 1958: 563) ~ Morocco mles/
males ‘to smooth’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 183) ~ Ḥassāniyya melles ‘aplanir’;
emles ‘lisse’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 24, 95, 91) ~ Malta ⟨melles imelles⟩ ‘to caress’
(Aquilina 1990: 806).
689 m-l-ʿ
mꜣʿ ‘to swallow’ (Takács 2008: 62); ʿm ‘verschlucken’ (Wb I 183) || Ar �م��لmalaʿa
ع
‘têter sa mère (se dit d’un petit chameau)’ (DAF II 1149);
~ Daθīna malaʿ ‘avaler’ (GD 2717).
690 m-l-l
mnj (MK) ‘Art Krug fur Wein, Bier, Öl, Früchte, Weihrauch u. a., auch wie ein
Maß’ (Wb II 66) ~ Ḥar malleh/melāl ‘bowl, basin’ (Johnstone 1977: 88);
~ Oman melle, pl mlāl ‘Schüssel’ (Reinhardt 1894: 71) ~ Daθīna melle, pl mlāl
‘Schale, Schüssel’ (GD 2712) ~ Khābūra melle ‘a china bowl used for keeping
coffee-cups under water’ (Brockett 1985: 198).
691 m-n
mn ‘so-and-so, someone’; ‘(Herr) Sowieso, ein gewisser Mann (als Ersatz des
Namens)’ (Faulkner 1962: 107; Hannig 1995: 334) ~ Dem mn ‘irgend einer’ (DG
314 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
158) ~ Copt ⲙⲁⲛ ‘certain thing, person’ (Crum 1939: 169b) || Ar � �م� نman ‘who,
whom, whoever’ (Hava 1982: 75);
~ Kəndērīb mən/məne ‘wer’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 138) ~ Aleppo men/mən/mīn
‘qui?’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 800, 810) ~ Damascus mīn ‘who?’ (Stowasser & Ani
1964: 263) ~ Palest mīn ‘Wer?’ (Bauer 1957: 360) ~ Egypt mīn ‘who? whom?’
(Spiro 1895: 587).
692 m-n-n
mn (OK) ‘Krank sein, leiden; der Leidende, der Elende’ (Wb I 67) || Ar �ّ �م� نmanna
‘to weary’; ‘das Kamel abmüden und schwächen’ (Hava 1982: 736; Wahrmund
II 912).
693 m-n-w
Mnw (Menu [> Gk Мιν]): ancient Egyptian god of fertility and male sexual
potency (from the predynastic period; 4th mill. BC) ‘Name des Gottes Min’
(Faulkner 1962: 108; 1969: 321; Wb II 72; Calice 1936: 64); Ḥry-i҆b-ḏw-n-Mnw ‘Der
ّ
im Hügel des Min ist’ (Leitz 2002: 355) ~ Akkad menû ‘to love, become fond of
someone’ (CAD X/2 19) || Ar � � نمmaniyy; �م��ن ي���هmanyah, pl � �مmuny ‘Samenfluss’
�ي ن�ي
(Wahrmund II 934);
Phallically represented, the fertility god Min (or Amun-Min) was the dominant deity of
the southern part of the Eastern Desert (cf. Kessler 2001: 418).
~ Iraq mani ‘sperm’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 446) ~ Najd mi/anwah ‘Wunsch’
(Socin 1901 III 311) ~ Egypt mani/many ‘semen’ (Spiro 1895: 583; Badawi &
Hinds 1986: 837) ~ Takrūna mənī ‘sperme’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 592)
~ Marazig mənī ‘id.’ (Boris 1958: 592) ~ Morocco māni ‘id.’ (Prémare XI 265)
~ Al-Andalus ⟨maniyy⟩ ‘semen’ (Corriente 1997: 514).
694 m-n-y
mni҆ (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘death’; (intr. vb) ‘to die, dead one’; ‘sterben, begra-
ben werden; der Tod’ (Faulkner 1962: 108, 107; DLE I 185; Hannig 1995: 336, 337)
ّة
~ Heb ְמנִ יMənī ‘god of fate’ (BDB 584) || Saf mny ‘to be decreed; Fate’ (Winnett
& Lankester 1978: 647; Al-Jallad 2015: 328) ~ Ar ���� �م��ن يmaniyyah, pl �م ن���اي�اmanāyā
‘death, fate’ (Hava 1982: 737);
692. m-n-n – 697. m-w- ʾ 315
695 m-h-l
i҆hm (MK) ‘linger, lag; restrain’; ‘langsam gehen’; i҆hm.t ‘detention’ (Faulkner
1962: 28; Wb I 118; Calice 1936: 24) || Ar ��م�ه�لmahala ‘to act at leisure, without
haste’ (Hava 1982: 738);
~ Kəndērīb ʿa mīt mahli ‘in aller Ruhe (1. sg.)’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 139) ~ Damas
cus sūq ʿala mahlak ‘drive slow!’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 214) ~ Lebanon
tmahhal ‘attendre, temporiser, accorder un délai’ (Feghali 1928: 506) ~ Palest
tmahhal ‘langsam gehen’; mahl ‘Langsamkeit’ (Bauer 1957: 188) ~ Egypt mahal
‘to give time, grant delay’; mahl ‘slowness’; muhla ‘delay interval’ (Spiro 1895:
584); mahhal ‘mach langsam’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 460) ~ Marazig
mhal ‘accorder un delai’ (Boris 1958: 592) ~ Morocco mehhel ‘to slow down’
(Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 182) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨amhal⟩ ‘to grant respite or
delay’; ⟨mahlā ʿalīk⟩ ‘take it easy!’ (Corriente 1997: 514).
696 m-h-y
ة
mḥi҆.t (Pyr) ‘cow, milch-cow’; ‘Milchkuh’ (Ember 1914: 110, fn 5; 1930: 76; Faulkner
1962: 113; Hannig 2003: 548) || Ar � ��م�ه�اmahāt, pl ��م�ه�اmahā ‘wild cow, antelope’
(Hava 1982: 738);
~ Najd mahāh ‘wild cow’ (Sowayan 1992: 298; Kurpershoek 1994: 339);
él-mahā (pl) ‘ebenfalls eine Bezeichnung für Gazellen im allgemeinen (nur
poetisch)’ (Hess 1938: 85) ~ Rwala baqar al-maha ‘Beatrix antelope’ (Musil
1928: 26) ~ Palest baqar el-wahā/mahā ‘Antilope (Oryx bubalis)’ (Dalman VI
77) ~ N. Yemen mahā ‘Tier mit einem Horn und großen schwarzen Augen’
(Behnstedt 2006: 1181).
697 m-w-ʾ
mi҆w (MK) ‘cat’; ‘der Kater’; mj.t ‘die Katze als heiliges Tier’ (Faulkner 1962: 104;
van der Plas & Borghouts 1998: 124; Wb II 42; Te Velde 1967); my (LE) ‘cat’ (DLE
316 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
ّة ئة
I 179) ~ Dem mj ‘Kater’; i҆mj ‘Katze’ (DG 30, 151) ~ Copt ⲉⲙⲟⲟⲩⲉ ‘cat’ (Crum 1939:
55b) ~ Akkad nīau ‘mew’ (Parpola 2007: 222) || Ar ��� �م�ا ��ئيmāʾiyyah/��� �م�ا ��ئmāʾiʾah
أ
‘chat’; �م�ا ءmāʾa ‘miauler (se dit du chat)’; � �موءʾamwaʾa ‘imiter le miaulement du
chat’ (DAF II 1146);
~ Yemen mawwē/mawwa, ymawwi ‘miagolare’; ‘miauen’ (Rossi 1939: 219;
Werbeck 2001: 629) ~ Palest mawwa ‘miauen’ (Bauer 1957: 205); īnawwī ‘(die
Katze) miaut’ [‘die Katze macht nau’] (Kampffmeyer 1936: 75) ~ Suxne nawwa,
ynawwi ‘miauen’ (Behnstedt 1994: 386) ~ Egypt nawwa ‘to mew (cat)’ (Spiro
1895: 617) ~ Kəndērīb nawwa ‘(Katze) miauen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 146) ~ Tunis
maġwa ‘miauen’ (Stumme 1896: 180) ~ Kfarʿabida nawwa ‘il a miaulé’ (Feghali
1919: 81) ~ Malta ⟨nawwan, jnawwan⟩ ‘miagolare’ (Vassalli 1796: 535).
698 m-w-h
mw/my [allgemein] ‘water’; ‘Wasser’; mwyt ‘Urin, Harn, das Harnen; Flüssigkeit’;
my ‘watery’; mwy ‘be watery’; ‘feucht’ (Ember 1930: 56; Faulkner 1962: 105;
Breasted 1930: 534; Hannig 1995: 329–330); myw/mw ‘seed of man’ (Wb I 36;
Faulkner 1962: 104, 105); mw ‘tears’ (DLE I 388) ~ Dem mn ‘das Wasser’ (DG 154)
~ Copt ⲙⲟⲟⲩ ‘water’ (Crum 1939: 197b) ~ Akkad mû ‘water, fluid’ (CAD X/2 149)
أ
~ Sab mw ‘water’ (Jamme 1962: 439) || Saf my ‘water, watering place’ (Winnett
& Lankester Harding 1978: 647) ~ Ar �م�ا ءmāʾ, pl � �موا هʾamwāh/ �مي���ا هmiyāh ‘water,
juice, sap of plants’ (Hava 1982: 740);
~ Kəndērīb ṃayy ‘Wasser, Saft, Brühe’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 140) ~ Daragözü
ṃṃōy ‘Wasser’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 417) ~ Hasköy mōy (Talay 2002: 77)
~ Sinai ṃāy ‘water, water source (well, cistern, pool in rocky ground)’ (Stewart
1990: 250) ~ Najd moyyāt ‘Wasser’ (Socin 1901 III 311) ~ Iraq ṃayy/ṃāy ‘water’
(Blanc 1964: 18).
699 m-w-t
700 m-w-s
mꜣs (Pyr) ‘Messer’; (Gr) verwunden, schlachten’ (Wb II 31, 32) || Ar �م�ا ��سmāsa
�م ����س���ا تmawsiyāt ‘razor’
‘to shave (the head)’; �مو��سىmūsā, pl �موا ��سmawāsin/� و ي
(Hava 1982: 740);
~ Najd mūs, pl mwuseh ‘Rasiermesser’ (Hess 1938: 132) ~ Yemen mūs, pl amwās
‘rasoio’ (Rossi 1939: 232) ~ Aleppo mūs, pl amwās ‘rasoir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69:
807) ~ Damascus mūs, pl mwās ‘knife (with movable blade)’ (Stowasser & Ani
1964: 132) ~ Palest mūs, pl muwās ‘Messer’ (Bauer 1957: 204) ~ Egypt mūs, pl
amwās ‘razor’ (Spiro 1895: 585) ~ Cherchell mūs ‘couteau’ (Grand’Henry 1972:
79) ~ Marazig mūs ‘Taschenmesser’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2005: 233) ~ Morocco
mūs ‘folding knife, razor, kitchen knife’ (Heath 2002: 443) ~ Ḥassāniyya mūs,
pl aṃṃwās ‘knife’ (Mali; Heath 2004: 149) ~ Malta ⟨mus, pl mwies⟩ ‘coltello’
(Vassalli 1796: 526).
701 m-w-l
أ
mnmn.t (MK) ‘cattle’; ‘die Herde, das Herdenvieh (Rinder, Ziegen)’ (Faulkner
1962: 109; Wb II 81) || Ar �م�ا لmāl, pl � �موا لʾamwāl ‘flocks, wealth, personal prop-
erty’ (Hava 1982: 740);
~ Daθīna māl ‘les troupeaux (chez les nomades)’ (GD 2725) ~ Chad māl/
amwāl ‘bêtes du troupeau’ (Pommerol 1999: 813) ~ Aleppo māl, pl mwāl
‘bien, avoir, fortune’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 807) ~ Egypt māl ‘property, for-
tune, wealth’ (Spiro 1895: 552) ~ Ūlād Brāhīm mowwöl ‘élever les troupeaux’
(W. Marçais 1908: 89).
702 m-y-n
ن
mnj.tj (LE) ‘Erdhacker’ (Calice 1936: 64) || Ar � �م�اmāna ‘die Erde zur Aussaat
pflügen’ (Wahrmund II 964).
703 m-y-ḥ
mḥwt ‘to give’ (Faulkner 1962: 170) || Ar �م�اmāḥa ‘to make a gift’ (Hava 1982:
ح
741).
318 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
704 n-ʾ-n-ʾ
أأ
nn ‘to be weary, inert; drag (of foot)’; nnw ‘weariness, inertness’ (Faulkner 1962:
136) || Ar �� ن�� نnaʾnaʾa ‘von schwachem Verstande und unberaten sein, langsam
handeln’ (Wahrmund II 972);
705 n-b-ʾ¹
أ
nmj (Pyr) ‘fahren, gehen’; durchfahren’; ‘to travel, traverse’ (Calice 1936: 163; Wb
II 265; Faulkner 1962: 133) || Ar �ن�ب�� �م� ن� … إ� لىnabaʾa min … ʾilā ‘to pass from (a
place) to (another)’ (Hava 1982: 743).
706 n-b-ʾ²
nb (LE) ‘lord, master, owner’; ‘der Herr’ (Faulkner 1962: 128; Wb II 229) ~ Copt
أ
ⲛⲏⲃ ‘lord’ (Crum 1939: 221a, b) ~ Mah nōb/nəyōb ‘big’ (Johnstone 1987: 306) ||
Ar �� �ن�بnabaʾa ‘to be high, lofty’; ن�ا ب��ئnābiʾ ‘prominent, high, lofty’; �ن�ب��ا ءnabāʾ ‘emi-
ة
nent’; � �ن�ب��ا وnabāwah ‘height’ (Hava 1982: 743, 744);
~ Sinai nābiy ‘prominent’ (Stewart 1990: 251) ~ Najd niba ‘to rise up, be ele-
vated, protrude from’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 447) ~ Rwala nābi ‘peak’ (Musil 1928:
318, 365).
707 n-b-b
أ أ
nbj.t (Med) ‘die Rohrpflanze’ (Wb II 243; Calice 1936: 65); nbit ‘reed’ (Faulkner
1962: 130) ~ Akkad ebbūbu ‘flute’ (Parpola 2007: 191) || Ar � � �ن��بو بʾunbūb, pl �� ن�ا ب���ي� ب
ʾanābīb ‘tube, pipe’ (Hava 1982: 743);
~ Damascus ʾambūbe ‘Röhre’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 63); ʾunbūb, pl ʾanābīb ‘small
pipe’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 173) ~ Palest ʾunbūb/yanbūb, pl ʾanābīb ‘Röhre’
(Bauer 1957: 246) ~ Iraq ʾunbūb, pl ʾanābīb ‘tube, pipe’ (Woodhead & Beene
1967: 18) ~ Aleppo ʾambūbe, pl -āt ‘tuyau’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 811) ~ Egypt
ʾambūba ‘Gasflasche’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1999: 359) ~ Tripoli (Libya) mbūba,
pl mbāyib ‘becco (di recipiente)’ (Griffini 1913: 29) ~ Malta ⟨lenbuba⟩ ‘cannello,
cannoncino’ (Vassalli 1796: 436).
704. n- ʾ -n- ʾ – 711. n-t-r 319
708 n-b-ḥ
bḥn [< *nbḥ] ‘to bark, growl, bellow, revile’; ‘bellen’ (Caminos 1954: 543; DLE I
138; Wb I 469) ~ Akkad nabāḫu ‘to bark’ (M. Cohen 2011: 16) ~ Heb נָ ַבחnābaḥ
‘to bark’ (BDB 613) || Ar � �ن� بnabaḥa ‘bark’ (Hava 1982: 744);
ح
~ Najd nbūḥ, pl nuwābīḥ ‘barking (of dogs guarding a camp)’ (Kurpershoek
1995: 447) ~ Palmyra nabaḥ ‘aboyer’ (Cantineau 1934 II 73) ~ Aleppo nabaḥ,
yəmbaḥ ‘id.’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 812) ~ Egypt nabaḥ, yinbaḥ ‘to bark’ (Spiro
1895: 590) ~ Cherchell nbaḥ ‘aboyer’ (Grand’Henry 1972: 71) ~ Algiers nbaḥ
‘id.’ (Tapiéro 1971: 150) ~ Morocco nbeḥ ‘bark’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 18)
~ Malta ⟨nbīħ⟩ ‘abbagliamento’ (Vassalli 1796: 537).
709 n-b-l
Faulkner 1962: 130) || Ar �ن�ب��لnabl, pl �ن�ب��ا لnibāl ‘arrow’ (Hava 1982: 747);
nbꜣ.t (19th Dyn.) ‘Tragstange für den Kornsack’; nbꜣ ‘carrying-pole’ (Wb II 243;
710 n-b-h
135); nhpw ‘früher Morgen; am Morgen etwas tun’ (Erman 1904: 64) || Ar �ن�ب��ه
nhp (LE) ‘früh auf sein’; ‘rise early in the morning’ (Wb II 284; Faulkner 1962:
711 n-t-r
ت
DLE II 38; Takács 2011b: 77) || Ar ن���رnatara ‘enlever, emporter, ravir’/ �ن�ت��لnatala
ntj (LE) ‘gefangen sein’; ‘in Bedrängnis sein’; ‘to be choked, stifled’ (Wb II 351;
without the help of a pulley or spool’ (Piamenta 1991: 478) ~ Takrūna nṭar
‘enlever, arracher qq.ch. brusquement, par une saccade’ (Marçais & Guîga
1958–61: 3989) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨natar⟩ ‘to pull off’ (Corriente 1997: 521).
712 n-t-š¹
أ �ت
sprengen’ (Ember 1930: 112; Faulkner 1962: 142; Wb II 356, 386; Takács 2011b: 79)
|| Ar ��� � ن�� شʾantaša ‘se gonfler après avoir été imprégné d’humidité et crever (se
dit de la graine, de la semence qui germe)’ (DAF II 1193);
~ Yemen nātaš ‘beschmutzen (schmutziges Wasser die Kleider)’ (Behnstedt
2006: 1192) ~ Daθīna nutša-dám ‘Blutstropfen’ (GD 2740).
713 n-t-š²
�ت
ntš (Gr) ‘to hit’ (Takács 2011b: 79) || Ar ��� ن�� شnataša ‘schlagen’ (Wahrmund II 981);
~ Egypt natašo ʿalqa ‘he gave him a ‘licking’’ (Spiro 1895: 592) ~ Kəndērīb
nataš ‘(ab)reissen, (heraus)zerren’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 141) ~ Lebanon natwaš
‘arracher’ (Denizeau 1960: 511).
714 n-t-f
ntf (LE) ‘unbind, loosen, let loose, release’; ‘(den Gefesselten) losbinden’ (DLE
II 253; Wb II 356; Takács 2011b: 78) ~ Copt ⲛⲟⲩⲧϥ ‘loosen, dissolve’ (Crum
1939: 232a) || Akkad naṭ/tāpu ‘to tear out, be plucked, torn out’; ‘herausreißen’
ف
(CAD XI/2: 128; von Soden 767) ~ Aram ntp ‘extraction, drawing’ (Tal 2000: 521)
~ Ge natafa/nattafa ‘tear to pieces, tear apart’ (Leslau 1987: 406) || Ar ���ن�ت
natafa ‘arracher, tirer (le poil, les plumes, la laine)’ (DAF II 1193);
~ Sinai natáf ‘to pluck out s.th.’ (Stewart 1990: 254) ~ Aleppo nataf ‘epi-
ler’; nadaf ‘plumer’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 814) ~ Iraq nittaf ‘pluck, pull out,
tear out; strike, hit’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 452) ~ E. Arabia nitaf ‘to pluck’
(Holes 2001: 512) ~ Lebanon natef ‘arracher’ (Feghali 1938: 834; Jiha 1964: 173)
~ Palest nattaf ‘Federn rupfen’ (Bauer 1957: 248) ~ Egypt nattif ‘pluck out one
hair or feather after another’ (Spiro 1895: 592) ~ Marazig nətaf ‘arracher (avec
les doigts et non la main entière)’ (Boris 1958: 598) ~ Malta ⟨nittef, inittef⟩ ‘to
pluck’ (Aquilina 1990: 917).
712. n-t-š ¹ – 717. n-ǧ-r ² 321
715 n-t-l
Takács 2011b: 80) ~ Heb נָ ַתרnātar ‘spring or start up’ (BDB 684) || Ar �ن�ت��لnatala
ntꜣ (Pyr) ‘laufen (von der Bewegung schneller Boten)’; ‘se hâter’ (Wb II 351;
‘to rush forth from the lines (soldier)’ (Hava 1982: 749);
~ Yemen natal ‘to rush out of the lines’ (Piamenta 1991: 478) ~ Daθīna ⟨ntr⟩
‘s’en aller fâché’ (GD 2740).
716 n-ǧ-r¹
nḏr (Pyr) ‘Holz bearbeiten, zimmern, Zimmermann’; nḏꜣw ‘chips of stone’ (Wb
II 382; Faulkner 1962: 144) ~ Akkad naggāru ‘carpenter’ ّ(M. نCohen 2011: 32)
�
�
~ Heb נַ ּגָ רnaggār ‘carpenter’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 876) || Ar �ج �ا رnaǧǧār ‘carpenter’
(Hava 1982: 751);
~ Ḥaḍramawt naǧǧār ‘master woodworker’ (Radionov 2007: 93) ~ Oman
neggār, pl negāgīr ‘Tischler’ (Reinhardt 1894: 75) ~ E. Arabia niǧar ‘cut, hew’
(Holes 2001: 513) ~ Yemen naǧar ‘scalpellare pietra tenera o legno’ (Rossi 1939:
235) ~ Aleppo naǧar ‘fermer une porte avec une barre de bois’ (Barthélemy
1935–69: 815) ~ Damascus naǧǧār ‘carpenter’ (Bauer 1957: 35) ~ Bišmizzīn
tinžīr ‘Tischlern’ (Jiha 1964: 161) ~ Rwala nijr xašab ‘wooden mortar’ (Musil
1928: 645) ~ Najd nijir, pl njūr/njār (Kurpershoek 1999: 463) ~ Yemen naggār
‘Zimmermann’ (Behnstedt 1999: 400) ~ Kəndērīb naǧǧaṛ ‘zuschneiden,
zurechtschneiden’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 141) ~ Lebanon tnaǧǧar ‘être travaillé,
menuisé (bois)’ (M. Feghali 1928: 123) ~ Palest naǧǧār ‘Zimmermann’ (Bauer
1957: 376) ~ Egypt naggar ‘trim (branch, wood); work (wood)’; naggār ‘carpen-
ter’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 849) ~ Tripoli (Libya) nežžār ‘falegname’ (Cesàro
1939: 101) ~ Morocco nžər ‘effectuer un travail de menuiserie; tailler (des
mosaïques, des pierres)’ (Prémare XI 316) ~ Ḥassāniyya nejjāṛ ‘rabot’ (Taine-
Cheikh 1990: 124) ~ Malta ⟨naġar, jonġor⟩ ‘asciare le pietre apparecchiandole
per la fabbrica’ (Vassalli 1796: 530).
717 n-ǧ-r²
nḏꜣ (MK) ‘parch with thirst’; ‘ersticken, verdursten, das Dürsten, der Durst’
(Faulkner 1962: 144; Ember 1926: 310; 1930: 3; DLE II 256; Wb II 377) || Saf nǧrن
‘to be parched with thirst’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 647) ~ Ar. �ج�ر
naǧara ‘von heftigem Durst ergriffen werden’ (Wahrmund II 986).
322 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
718 n-ǧ-y
nḏ/nḏy (Pyr) ‘to save, rescue, protect, guard against (magic), make good (harm);
show concern for’; ‘schützen vor … (Feinden, dem Stärkeren)’; nḏty ‘protector’
(Ember 1930: 66; Faulkner 1962: 143, 144; Hodge 1981: 407; Wb II 374) ~ Dem
nḏ ‘schützen’ (DG 235) ~ Soq ngy ‘délivrer’ (Leslau
ّ ن1938: 256) || Saf nǧy ‘escape’
(Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 647) ~ Ar. �� جnaǧǧā ‘to rescue’ (Hava 1982:
�ي
753);
~ Aleppo naǧǧa ‘sauver, préserver qqn’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 817) ~ Lebanon
nažža ‘sauver’ (Feghali 1938: 834) ~ Najd naǧǧa ‘rescue, deliver, save s.o. from
perdition’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 448) ~ Yemen naǧǧēʾ ‘salvare’ (Rossi 1939: 234);
najī/nijī ‘to escape, be saved’; naǧnaǧ ‘to succeed, get away or escape’ (Piamenta
1991: 479) ~ Tripoli (Lebanon) naǧa ‘se sauver’ (El-Hajjé 1954: 67) ~ Palest
naǧǧa ‘retten’ (Bauer 1957: 244) ~ Egypt nagga ‘save, rescue’; niǧi ‘sich retten,
gerettet werden’ (Spiro 1895: 594; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 465) ~ Takrūna
nžē ‘se tirer d’une situation périlleuse, pénible’; nažža ‘faire échapper qq à un
danger’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 3025).
719 n-ḥ-ḍ
nḥḏ.t (OK) ‘tooth’; ‘Zahn’ (Faulkner 1962: 137; Wb I 99; Calice 1936: 169) ~ Copt
ⲛⲁϫϩⲓ ‘tooth’ (Crum 1939: 249b) ~ Heb ָל ַחץlāḥaṣ ‘to squeeze, force, press’
ض ن
(M. Jastrow 1886: 704) [< nāḥaṣ] ‘das Drängen, Unterdrucken’ (Levy III 371) ||
�
�
Ar. ���� حnaḥaḍa ‘to sharpen’ (Hava 1982: 755);
~ N. Yemen naḥaz ‘pieksen, bohren, stoßen’ (Behnstedt 2006: 1197) ~ Daθīna
⟨naḥaz⟩ ‘piler, broyer’; ⟨minḥās⟩ < ⟨minḥāz⟩ ‘mortier à piler’ (GD 2751; cf.
Brockett 1985: 201).
720 n-ḥ-w
i҆nḥ (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘surround, enclose’; ‘umgeben; einen نOrt mit Mauern
� naḥā ‘to direct
�
umgeben’ (Faulkner ن1962: 14; Wb I 99; Calice 1936: 119) || Ar. ح�ا
� �ة
� naḥāt- ‘side، limit’ (Hava 1982: 756);
oneself towards’; ح�ا
~ Najd naḥa ‘to push in a certain direction’; nāḥa ‘to attack, charge, chase
s.o.’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 463) ~ Damascus nāḥ ‘towards’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964:
246) ~ Aleppo tnaḥḥa ‘s’écarter’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 818) ~ Palest naḥu ‘vers,
en direction de’ (Denizeau 1960: 513); nāḥye, pl nawāḥi ‘Richtung’ (Bauer 1957:
245) ~ Egypt nāḥya ‘direction’ (Spiro 1895: 588) ~ Ḥassāniyya naḥiyye ‘côté,
718. n-ǧ-y – 723. n-x-y 323
direction’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 45) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨naḥa⟩ ‘to head for’ (Corriente
1997: 523) ~ Malta ⟨naħa⟩ ‘vicino, presso, accanto; contrada, regione’ (Vassalli
1795: 530); ⟨inħawi⟩ ‘surroundings, neighbourhood’ (own obs.).
721 n-x-b
ّ ت�ن
nḫb (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘bestimmen’; nḫbt ‘titulary’ (Wb II 307; Faulkner 1962:
ن�ت
138) || Ar ��خ� ب
�� tanaxxaba/��خ� ب
�� � إʾintaxaba ‘choisir, faire une choix dans quelque
chose’ (DAF II 1219);
~ Iraq ntixab ‘to select, pick, choose’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 454)
~ Damascus intaxab ‘to elect’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 77) ~ Palest intaxabūh
rayyis ‘jemanden zu Vorsteher auswählen’ (Bauer 1957: 351) ~ Marazig nəxab
‘choisir, préoccuper, attirer l’attention de qqn.’ (Boris 1958: 603) ~ Morocco
ntaxeb to elect’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 62).
722 n-x-l
nqr(w) (Pyr) [< *nxl] ‘sift, sieve’; ‘durchsieben (Getreide, Zerstoßenes)’ (Faulk
نnqrw ‘strainer’ (DLE I 251) ~ Akkad
naḫālu ‘sift’ (Parpola 2007: 259) || Ar �خ�ل
ner 1962: 141; Breasted 1930: 543; Wb II 344);
� naxala ‘sift’ (Hava 1982: 755);
�
For the phonetic commutation of [*q] and [*x] in the history of this lexeme, cf. Sudan
Arabic xarya ‘Dorf’ < *qarya, naxra ‘ich lese’ < *naqra (Behnstedt 2006: 22) and the analo-
gous articulatory shift of Ar *ġarbal > Mzāb qarbal ‘il a tamisé’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 125).
~ Aleppo naxal ‘bluter (la farine)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 819) ~ Kəndērīb naxal
‘sieben’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 141) ~ Egypt naxal, yunxul ‘sift; sieben’ (Spiro 1895:
595; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 466) ~ Oman mōxal ‘Sieb’; noxxāle ‘Siebzeug’
(Reinhardt 1894: 50, 48) ~ Tunis noxxāla ‘son’ (D. Cohen 1975: 164) ~ Djidjelli
noxxāla ‘son, balle d’avoine’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 277).
723 n-x-y
724 n-d-d
ّ أ
nwd (MK) ‘sich bewegen, gelangen zu jemandem’ (Wb II 225; Calice 1936: 33)
|| Ar ن��د دnaddada/ � ن��د دʾandada ‘to disperse in a pasturage (sheep)’ (Hava 1982:
759);
~ Rwala yenadden ‘he (herdsman) drives the camels away from the water
after they have drunk their fill’ (Musil 1928: 340).
725 n-z-z
nss (MK) ‘do damage to (n)’; ‘beschädigen (Statuen, Inschrift)’ (Faulkner 1962:
ن�زا�ز
140; Wb II 336) ~ Copt ⲗⲱⲱⲥ ‘be bruised, crushed’ (Crum 1939: 145a) ~ Ge
naznaza ‘to vex, torment, cause pain’ (Leslau 1987: 353) || Ar � nizāz ‘zum Bösen
أ
bereit’ (Wahrmund II 1003); cf. � �ن�زnazaʾa ‘he excited discord between them’
(Lane 2783);
~ Aleppo nazz ‘faire bisquer (qqn)’; naznaz ‘narguer qqn’ (Barthélemy 1935–
69: 822, 824) ~ Egypt nazz ‘to grumble’ (Spiro 1895: 597).
726 n-z-f
ف
Ar �� �ن�زnazafa ‘sehr viel Blut verlieren’ (Wahrmund II 1005);
nspw ‘wounds’; ‘die Wunden’; nsp ‘Messer’ (Faulkner 1962: 139; Wb II 319) ||
~ Damascus nazaf ‘to bleed’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 24) ~ Aleppo nazīf
‘perte de sang, hémorragie utérine’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 822) ~ Palest nazf ed-
damm ‘Blutsturz’ (Bauer 1957: 63) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nanzaf nazaf⟩ ‘to draw blood’
(Corriente 1997: 526).
727 n-s-r
Dem nšr ‘Geier, Falke’ (DG 229) ~ Copt ⲛⲟϣⲣ ‘vulture, falcon’ (Crum 1939: 237a)
أن
~ Akkad našru ‘eagle’ (CAD X 79) ~ Heb נֶ ֶׁשרnešer ‘griffon-vulture, eagle’ (BDB
ن ن
676) || Ar ���سرnasr, pl � ���سرʾansur/ ���سورnusūr ‘vulture, eagle’ (Hava 1982: 766);
724. n-d-d – 729. n-š-d 325
728 n-s-n-s
ن �ن
nsns ‘Art Vögel (im Geflügelhof)’ (Hannig 1995: 432) ~ Akkad naṣnaṣu ‘a bird’
(CAD N/2 49) || Ar ���س���سnasnasa ‘schnell fliegen’ (Wahrmund II 1014);
~ Sinai nisnās, pl nasānīs ‘a legendary, elongated animal, or fleet bird’
(C. Bailey 1991: 454) ~ Egypt nisnās, pl nasānis ‘an ape’ (Spiro 1895: 599)
~ Al-Andalus ⟨nisnās/nisnīs, pl nasānis⟩ ‘fabulous one-legged one-armed ape-
like creature’ (Corriente 1997: 528).
729 n-š-d
wšd (MK) ‘to address, question someone; recognize’; ‘jemanden anreden, eine
ّ �ن
Ar ت�� ش����دtanaššada ‘s’informer, interroger sur une nouvelle, sur un fait’ (DAF II
Ansprache halten’ (Faulkner 1962: 71; DLE I 115; Wb I 375; Hannig 1995: 222) ||
1258);
~ Negev nišád ‘to ask’ (Blanc 1970: 148) ~ Sinai naššad ‘to ask for (infor-
mation about)’; nāšad ‘to greet someone vociferously’ (C. Bailey 1991: 454)
~ ʿAnazeh našad ‘demander, interroger’; manšada ‘demande’ (Landberg 1940:
81; 1942: 2771) ~ Ḥaḍramawt ⟨našad⟩ ‘demander’ (Landberg 1901: 722) ~ Najd
našad/naššad ‘fragen’; ‘to ask, inquire, question’; tinaššad ‘to interrogate’
(Socin 1901 III 314; Kurpershoek 1999: 465; Ingham 1994: 185) ~ E. Arabia nišad
‘ask, ask after’ (Holes 2001: 519) ~ Khābūra nešed ‘to question’; nešed ʿan ‘to
ask after s.o.’s health’ (Brockett 1985: 204) ~ Yemen našīd ‘canzone’ (Rossi 1939:
198) ~ Mosul našad ‘he asked’ (Al-Bakrī 1972: 484) ~ Harran-Urfa nišad ‘to ask’
(Procházka 2014: 344) ~ Aleppo našad ‘s’informer de (qqn)’ (Barthélemy 1935–
69: 827) ~ Palmyra naššad ‘interroger’ (Cantineau 1934 II 8) ~ Tripoli (Libya)
nšed ‘domandare, interrogare’ (Griffini 1913: 92, 153) ~ Tunis nəšda ‘question’;
nšād ‘action d’interroger’ (D. Cohen 1975: 147, 154) ~ Takrūna nišad ‘interroger,
questionner qq.’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 3967) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nanšud,
našadt⟩ ‘to adjure s.o. to do something’ (Corriente 1997: 528) ~ Ḥassāniyya
nəšde ‘adjuration’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 20).
326 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
730 n-š-r¹
nśr (Pyr) ‘flame’; ‘brennen; Feuer, Flamme’; nsr.t (BD) ‘flame’; nsry ‘be inflamed
(of wounds)’ (Faulkner 1962: 140; Wb II 335; Takács 2011c: 152);
~ Daθīna ⟨rišin⟩ ‘être allumé’; ⟨rišnat en-nār⟩ ‘le feu a pris, est allumé’ (GD
1281).
731 n-š-r²
ن
nš (Gr) ‘gehen nach (mit r), jemanden hinführen nach (mit r)’ (Wb II 321) ||
Ar � �ش�� رnašira ‘to disperse by night in a pasture (cattle)’ (Hava 1982: 769);
~ N. Yemen našar ‘nachmittags gehen’ (Behnstedt 1987: 306) ~ Rwala enšār
‘long journeys’ (Musil 1928: 286) ~ Najd nišar ‘to set out with the intention
of spending the entire day on the pasture ground’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 451)
~ Marazig ennašar ‘les jeunes chamelons au pâturage dispersés à l’écart de
leurs mères’ (Boris 1958: 610).
732 n-š-š
ّ ن
nš (Med) ‘vom einsinken des Fusses in (m) den Ackerboden’ (Wb II 320) ||
Ar ��� � شnašša ‘to sink into the earth (water)’; ‘das Wasser einschlucken, absor-
bieren (Boden)’ (Hava 1982: 768; Wahrmund II 1016);
~ Lebanon našnāše ‘source qui coule goutte à goutte’ (Denizeau 1960: 519)
~ Egypt našniš ‘to revive, refresh’ (Spiro 1895: 655).
733 n-š-ṭ
nḫt (Pyr) ‘be strong, firm’; ‘körperlich stark sein’ (Albright 1918: 96; Ember 1930:
ن
65; Wb II 314; Vycichl 1983: X) ~ Copt ⲛϣⲟⲧ ‘hardness, boldness’ (Crum 1939:
238a) || Ar � ش�����طnašiṭa ‘to be sprightly, lively, nimble’ (Hava 1982: 770);
~ Najd nišīṭ, pl nšāṭ ‘active, energetic, fresh and strong’ (Kurpershoek
1995: 451) ~ Yemen našūṭ ‘furbo’ (Rossi 1939: 240) ~ Aleppo nəšeṭ ‘vif, actif’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 828) ~ Damascus našāṭ ‘activity’; našīṭ, pl nəšaṭa ‘lively’
(Stowasser & Ani 1964: 3, 140) ~ Palest našāṭ ‘Energie’ (Bauer 1957: 92) ~ Egypt
našāṭ ‘energy, alertness’ (Spiro 1895: 601) ~ Morocco našeṭ ‘active’; našaṭ ‘activ-
ity’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 4).
730. n-š-r ¹ – 737. n-ṣ-t 327
734 n-š-m¹
ن
nšm.t (BD) ‘weissblauer Feldspat’; ‘green felspar’ (Wb II 339; Calice 1936: 67;
Faulkner 1962: 140) || Ar ��� � شnašima ‘mit schwarzen und weißen Flecken oder
م
Punkten bedeckt sein’ (Warmund II 1021);
~ Yemen nišam ‘Grewia velutina (Forsk.) Vahl.’ (Piamenta 1991: 486); našam
‘Grewia bicolor’ (Behnstedt 2006: 1213) ~ Morocco nšəm ‘peuplier, orme ou
frène’ (Prémare XI).
735 n-š-m²
nšm.t (Med) ‘Ausfluß’ (Hannig 1995: 435; Takács 2011c: 159) || Ar. naššama ‘lais-
ser sortir à sa surface et pour ainsi dire, suer l’eau (se dit de la terre)’ (DAF II
1265);
~ Lebanon naššam ‘pleurnicher’ (Denizeau 1960: 519).
736 n-š-y
šw/šwj (Pyr) ‘ascend’; ‘sich erheben( ن أauch zum Himmel)’ (Faulkner 1962: 263;
Wb III 431; Calice 1936: 205) || Ar ���� � شnašaʾa ‘to rise (cloud)’ (Hava 1982: 768);
~ Najd niša ‘(the cloud) rises and appears on the horizon’ (Kurpershoek
1999: 466).
737 n-ṣ-t
śmt (Pyr & LE) ‘etwas hören, jemanden verhören; erlauschen (auch neben
śḏm gebraucht)’; śmtmt ‘Lauschen’ (Wb IV 387, 388, 389, 144–145) ~ smtmt
ن
‘eavesdrop’ (Faulkner 1962: 229) ~ Dem stm (r) ‘hören’ (DG 478) ~ Copt ⲥⲱⲧⲙ̅
[*sōtem] ‘to hear’ (Crum 1939: 363b, 364a) || Ar � ش�����طnaṣata ‘schweigen und
hören’ (Wahrmund II 1025);
~ Ḥama ṣṣannat ‘belauschen’ (Lewin 1966: 215) ~ Āzəx ššannaṭ ‘zuhören,
lauschen’ (O. Jastrow 1978: 184) ~ Kəndērīb šṭanaṭ, yəšṭə́nəṭ ‘id.’ (O. Jastrow
2005: 82) ~ Aleppo ṭnaššat ‘écouter, à la personne de (qqn)’ (Barthélemy 1935–
69: 831) ~ Al-Balqāʾ ṣanat ‘to eavesdrop’ (Palva 1992: 172) ~ Negev ð̣ all miṣnit
‘he was listening’ (Henkin 2010: 320) ~ Egypt iṣṣanaṭ ‘jemanden belauschen’
(Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 269) ~ Morocco tṣenneṭ ‘to listen’ (Sobelman &
Harrell 1963: 116) ~ Ḥassāniyya ṣṣannet ‘écouter’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 57).
328 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
738 n-ṣ-ṣ
nḏ/nḏnḏ (MK) [*nṣṣ/nṣnṣ] ‘to confer, take counsel, ask advice, consult s.o.;
enquire about’; ‘fragen, beraten, befragen, um Rat fragen; jemanden verhören’
ّ ن
(Faulkner 1962: 143, 144; Wb II 371; DLE II 257; Caminos 1954: 562) || Ar ����ص
naṣṣa ‘déférer une chose à quelqu’un et la soumettre à son jugement; inter-
roger quelqu’un minutieusement, le presser de questions’; ‘he made the thing
apparent, manifest, plain, or evident’ (DAF II 1266; Lane 2797);
~ Iraq naṣṣ ʿala ‘to stipulate, specify, provide for’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967:
460) ~ Damascus naṣṣ, pl nṣūṣ ‘text’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 237) ~ Aleppo
naṣṣ ‘dicter une lettre à quelqu’un’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 831) ~ Egypt naṣṣ ‘to
make a stipulation’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 866) ~ Marazig naṣṣ ‘dire, annoncer
d’avance’ (Boris 1958: 611) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nunuṣṣ, naṣaṣt⟩ ‘to state or specify’
(Corriente 1997: 430).
739 n-ṭ-f
740 n-ʿ-s
ن
nḏs ‘little, small, dull’; ‘klein, gering’ (Ember 1930: 66; Faulkner 1962: 144; Wb II
384); nḏst ‘Kleinheit’ (Hannig 1995: 451) || Ar ��ع��سnaʿasa ‘être faible, infirme,
débile (se dit du corps ou de l’esprit); être somnolent, avoir envie de dormir’
(DAF II 1294);
738. n-ṣ-ṣ – 742. n- ʿ -m 329
~ Najd naʿas ‘take a nap, slumber, doze’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 452) ~ Aleppo
nəʿes ‘avoir sommeil’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 835) ~ Palest niʿis ‘schläfrig werden’
(Bauer 1957: 258) ~ Egypt niʿis ‘to be drowsy, sleepy’ (Spiro 1895: 606) ~ Algiers
nʿas ‘dormir’ (Tapiéro 1971: 156).
741 n-ʿ-š
(i) ʿnḫ (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘to live; make provision for someone’; ‘leben; leben
nach dem Tode (= wiederaufleben)’; ʿnḫw ‘the living’ (Faulkner 1962: 43, 44;
ن�� شnaʿš
~ Al-Andalus ⟨nanʿaš⟩ ‘I shall give life back’ (Corriente 1997: 533).
(ii) ʿnḫ ‘euphemistic for sarcophagus’ (Faulkner 1962: 44) || Ar ���ع
‘Totenbahre, Sarg, Katafalk, Leichenzug; Dauer, Leben’ (Wahrmund II 1038);
~ Ḥaḍramawt naʿš ‘wooden litter’ (Radionov 2007: 150) ~ Yemen naʿš, pl
nuʿūš ‘Totenbahre’ (Behnstedt 2006: 1220) ~ Sinai naggālit naʿáš ‘pall-bearers’
(Stewart 1990: 251) ~ Aleppo naʿš ‘brancard dans laquelle reposait le mort enve
loppé dans un linceul’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 835) ~ Kəndērīb naʿš ‘Totenbahre
(aus Holz)’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 143) ~ Palest naʿš, pl nʿūše ‘Totenbahre’ (Bauer
1957: 303) ~ Egypt naḥš ‘id.’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 465) ~ Marazig naʿaš,
pl nʿūš ‘civière en corde avec un cadre fait de bâtons’ (Boris 1958: 616) ~ Tunis
naʿš ‘cercueil’ (D. Cohen 1975: 141) ~ Djidjelli noʿš ‘brancard mortuaire’ (Ph.
Marçais 1956: 246) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨naʿš⟩ ‘bier’ (Corriente 1997: 533).
Late Egyptian nʿš ‘stark, laut’ (Wb II 209) evokes Ar anʿaša ‘rendre les forces’ (Dozy II 698)
citing Bocthor (1864).
742 n-ʿ-m
nḏm [*nʿm] (OK) ‘sweet (of flavour or odour); pleasant, pleasing; please, to be
easy, comfortable’; ‘süß von Geschmack (von Früchten, Fett, Wein); angenehm
von Geruch’: nḏm-i҆b ‘joyful, pleased’; nḏm-ʿnḫ ‘angenehm zu leben’; snḏm
(caus.) ‘make happy, pleasant’ (Breasted 1930: 544; Ember 1930: 66; Faulkner
1962: 144, 235; DLE I 256, 23; Wb II 378); nḏm i҆bk ‘Froh sei dein Herz’ (Lepper
330 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
ن
2008: 51) ~ Heb נָ ִעיםnāʿīm ‘pleasant’ (BDB 653) ~ Ugar nʿmt ‘delight’ (DUL 615)
|| Ar ��عnaʿama ‘in Wohlstand und vergnüglich leben’ (Wahrmund II 1039);
م
~ Aleppo neʿem ‘fin, menu’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 837) ~ Kəndērīb naʿīm
‘fein, dünn’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 143) ~ Khābūra nʿīm ‘fine, powdery’ (Brockett
1985: 206) ~ Damascus naʿīme ‘Wohltat’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 169) ~ Palest nāʿim
‘fein (: Mehl)’; niʿme ‘blessing’ (Bauer 1957: 109; Piamenta 1991: 243) ~ Egypt
niʿim, yinʿam ‘be smooth’; itnaʿʿam ‘enjoy life, lead a life of pleasure’ (Spiro 1895:
606) ~ Djidjelli noʿma ‘vie agréable, bonheur’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 119, fn 2).
743 n-ʿ-y
744 n-f-r
nfrw (MK) ‘young men of army, recruits’; ‘Jünglinge (besonders die Rekruten)’
(Faulkner 1962: 132; Wb II 258; Brockelmann 1932: 106) || Saf nfrt ‘a party of war-
أ
riors, kinsmen’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 649; Al-Jallad 2015: 330)
ْ
~ Ar ن���ف��رnafr ‘zusammengehörige Personen’; ن���ف��رnafar, pl � ن���ف���ا رʾanfār ‘Personen,
Leute, Schar die Einem folgt’; ‘simple soldat, ligne, rang auquel on appartient
(comme, par exemple, un rang de troupe); employé dans le sens de ṭāʾifah’
(Wahrmund II 1047; DAF II 1308; Fagnan 1923: 174);
~ Aleppo nafar ‘simple soldat, un homme (de troupe)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69:
839) ~ Egypt nafar ‘person, individual, labourer, private soldier’; il-ʾanfār ‘die
743. n- ʿ -y – 745. n-f-s 331
Landarbeiter’ (Spiro 1895: 608; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 477) ~ Oman nefer, pl
enfār ‘Person’; arbaʿit enfār ‘vier Leute’ (Reinhardt 1894: 72) ~ Mxašniyye nafar
‘Mann (milit.)’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 428) ~ Palest nafar ‘Person, gemeiner
Soldat’ (Bauer 1957: 228; 279) ~ Sudan nafar ‘individual, private soldier’ (LDA
493) ~ Darfur nafīr, pl nafāyir ‘voluntary working group’ (Roset 2018: 127).
745 n-f-s
nšp (MK) ‘pant’; ‘atmen, Luft atmen’ (Faulkner 1962: 140, 232; Wb II 339)
~ Copt ⲛⲟⲩϣⲡ ‘blow, agitate’ (Crum 1939: 236a) ~ Akkad našāpu/nušuppu
‘blow away, winnow’ (CAD XI/2: 56) ~ Heb ָףׁשנ ַ nāšap ‘to blow’ (BDB 676)
~ Amh naffaš ‘chaff blown away by the wind, removed in the winnowing’ (Kane
1990: 1085) ~ Argobba nəfas ‘wind’ (Leslau 1997: 215) ~ Soq nsf ‘vanner’ (Leslau
َأَ نْ َ ف
1938: 490) || Saf ʾnsf ‘to blow away’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 630)
ّ�ت ن ف ت
~ Ar ������سtanaffasa ‘respirer, tirer un soupir de sa poitrine’ (DAF II 1316); ����� ���س
ُّ
�‘ ا�لرthe wind blew violently, and raised the dust’ (Lane 1445); the wheat he
ِي
ح َأَ نْ َ ف َأَ ْ َ ف
has threshed’; � � ���سʾansafa ‘scatter (dust: wind)’; ��� � ����سنʾasnafa ‘blow violently
(wind); pulverize and scatter s.th.’ (Hava 1982: 766, 340; Ambros 2004: 267);
(i) ~ Palest bjunsuf ‘fortblasen, werfen’; itnaffas ‘atmen’ (Kampffmeyer 1936:
72; Bauer 1957: 25) ~ Yemen nasaf, yinsif ‘blow up’ (Qafisheh 1999: 580); (Jew)
nassaf ‘winnow’ (Piamenta 483) ~ Egypt nasaf ‘winnow’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986:
860) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨yansaf, nasaf⟩ ‘id.’; ⟨naffas⟩ ‘to breathe out’ (Corriente
1997: 526, 535) ~ Ḥama əddənye ʿam btənsof ‘es ist windiges Wetter’ (Lewin
1966: 227);
(ii) ~ Lebanon nafas ‘breath’; tnaffas ‘he blew’ (Nasr 1966: 180) ~ Damascus
nafas ‘breath’; tnaffas ‘to breathe’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 28) ~ Aleppo tnaf-
fas ‘respirer, reprendre haleine’; nafas ‘vanner’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 838, 825)
~ Najd nifas ‘to throw, toss, to push aside’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 451) ~ Iraq tnaffas
‘to breathe, inhale, exhale’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 465) ~ Damascus tnaffas
‘breathe’; nafas ‘breath’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 28) ~ Tangier tneffes ‘respirer’
(W. Marçais 1911: 479) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨nafas⟩ ‘to winnow’; ⟨naffas⟩ ‘to breathe
out’ (Corriente 1997: 527, 535) ~ Marazig nefas, pl anfās ‘respiration’ (Boris
1958: 619).
332 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
746 n-f-ḍ
npḏ (Pyr) ‘to slaughter’; ‘Tiere schlachten’ (Faulkner 1962: 130; Wb II 250; Calice
1936: 66); npḏ [in anthroponym] ‘Schlächter’ (Altenmüller 1975: 278) || Akkad
ض
napāṣu ‘strike, ّ ن فdash down’ (CAD XI/1 285) ~ Heb נָ ַפץnāpaṣ ‘to shatter’ (BDB
658) || Ar ��������� naffaḍa ‘secouer violemment, avec force’ (DAF II 1312);
~ Aleppo naffaḍ ‘secouer plusiers fois (un tapis); secouer (ses habits)’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 841) ~ Kəndērīb nafaḍ ‘abschütteln, abwerfen’ (Vocke &
Waldner 1982: 428) ~ Sinai nafaḍ ‘to shake, to shoot’ (Stewart 1990: 251) ~ Egypt
nafaḍoh ʿaṣāya ‘he gave him a blow with a stick’ (Spiro 1895: 609) ~ Mzāb nfaḍ
‘il a secoué (habit, pipe)’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 133).
747 n-f-f
nf (LE) ‘Hauch des Mundes, Atem, Wind’; nfj ‘ausatmen, hauchen’; nfꜣ ‘ausnie-
sen, ausschnauben’; nfy ‘to blow’; nft ‘breath, wind’; nfyt ‘fan’; snf (caus.) ‘make
ف ف
sen, Atem’ (DG 207) ~ Copt ⲛⲓϥⲉ ‘to blow (wind)’ (Crum 1939:ّ 238b) || Ar ���ن����� ن
to breathe’ (Wb II 250, 252; Faulkner 1962: 131, 232; DLE I 235) ~ Dem njf ‘bla-
نف نف ف ن
nafnaf, pl ���� ������اnafānif ‘air, atmosphère’ (DAF II 1317); cf. ������هnaffah ‘trombe,
tourbillon’ (Dozy II 702);
~ Daθīna ⟨naff⟩ ‘souffler en sifflant; eventer’ (GD 2804) ~ Najd naff ‘to blow,
carry away’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 453) ~ Rwala naff ‘a torrent which carries away
everything in its way’ (Musil 1928: 551) ~ Sinai naff ‘to sniff, pant, be short of
breath’ (Stewart 1990: 251) ~ Egypt naff ‘to blow the nose’; nafnif ‘to sniff’; yinōff
‘schneuzen’ (Spiro 1895: 607; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 478) ~ Tunis nəffa
‘tabac à priser, prise’ (D. Cohen 1975: 148).
748 n-q-r
749 n-q-m
ق
sein, Traurigkeit’ (Hannig 2003: 663; Wb II 344) || Ar � ن�اnāqama ‘to distress,
nqm.t (OK) ‘geplagt sein (verursacht durch Einfluss Übelgesinnter), traurig
م
harrass’ (Hava 1982: 796);
~ Palest nāqam ‘fâcher, faire enrager’ (Denizeau 1960: 528) ~ Morocco
nətqām ‘se fâcher de la conduite de qqn.’ (Prémare XI 455) ~ Al-Andalus
⟨niqmah⟩ ‘disgrace’ (Corriente 1997: 539).
750 n-k-y
njk/nk (Pyr) ‘be harmed, hurt, vanquished’; ‘strafen mit dem Tode; Bösewicht’
(Ember 1930: 100; Wb II 205; Hannig 1995: 394); ni҆k ‘evil-doer’ (Faulkner 1962:
126; 1969: 329) ~ Heb נָ ָכהnākā ‘to smite, scourge’ (BDB 644) ~ Ugar nky ‘beaten,
distressed’ (DUL 632) ~ Ge nakaya ‘injure, hurt, damage’ (Leslau 1987: 397)
~ Sab nky ‘suffering’ (Jamme 1962: 442) ~ Jibb enké ‘to hurt’ (Johnstone 1981:
ن� كnakā ‘verletzen, verwunden’ (Wahrmund II 1066);
189) || Ar �ى
~ Yemen nakī ‘il battere con fitte del male’ (Rossi 1939: 205) ~ Damascus
nakāye ‘spite’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 220) ~ Kfarʿabīda mönke ‘contrariant’
(Feghali 1919: 71) ~ Lebanon anka ‘le plus ennuyeux, le pire, le plus vexant’
(Denizeau 1960: 530); nikāye ‘any act intended to cause s.o. annoyance or
offence’ (Frayha 1973: 184) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨ankāni, yankī(h)⟩ ‘vexer, tourmenter’
(DA 1289) ~ Malta ⟨nkejja⟩ ‘spite’ (Aquilina 1990: 900).
751 n-h-b
nḥm (Pyr) [~ *nhb] ‘take away, carry of’; ‘wegnehmen, fortnehmen, rauben’
(Faulkner 1962: 136; Wb II 295; Calice 1936: 67) ~ Dem nhm ‘rauben’ (DG 222)
ن
|| Saf nhb ‘raid’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 649) ~ Jibb nɛhɛb ‘to take
by force’ (Johnstone 1981: 185) || Ar � ���ه� بnahaba ‘enlever, emporter, ravir, piller’
(DAF II 1351);
~ Najd nahab ‘to snatch, plunder’ (Sowayan 1992: 300) ~ Arabia náhab
‘rapine’ (Doughty 1888 II 488) ~ Iraq nihab ‘steal, plunder, take by force’
(Woodhead & Beene 1967: 472) ~ Oman nehub ‘berauben’ (Reinhardt 1894:
43) ~ Daθīna ⟨nuhbah⟩ ‘butin’ (GD 2825) ~ Yemen nihib ‘subdue, cause dam-
age’ (Piamenta 1991: 498) ~ ʿAnazeh ⟨nahb⟩ ‘rapt’ (Landberg 1940: 85) ~ náhab
‘rapine’ (Doughty 1888 II 488) ~ Negev yanhabaw baʿð̣ hum ‘they plunder each
334 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
other’ (Henkin 2010: 230) ~ Rwala tenhab qlūb ‘steals hearts’ (Musil 1928: 364)
~ Damascus nahab ‘rob’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 194) ~ Lebanon nahhāb ‘dépré-
dateur’; tnāhab ‘piller, dépouiller’ (Denizeau 1960: 531) ~ Palest tnāhabūh
‘haben ihn ausgeplündert’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 74) ~ Egypt nahab ‘rob, plunder’
(Spiro 1895: 615) ~ Marazig naháb ‘prendre indélicatement (presque voler) le
bien d’autrui en abusant de sa confiance; emprunter et ne pas rendre’ (Boris
1958: 627) ~ Morocco nhəb ‘piller, voler, saccager, spéc., soustraire au pil-
lage, enlever le bétail; voler, marauder’; nahhāb ‘brigand’ (Prémare XI 480)
~ Al-Andalus ⟨nanhab, nahabt⟩ ‘pilier, ravir’ (DA 1292) ~ Ḥassāniyya nheb
‘tomber sur’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 114).
752 n-h-r¹
nhr (LE) ‘stream (n); run, flow, flee, sail; river’; ‘laufen’ (DLE I 241; Wb II 286)
ن
~ Akkad nāru ‘river, canal’ (CAD XI 368) ~ Heb נָ ָהרnāhār ‘flow, stream’ (BDB
625) ~ Soq nóhor ‘passer, traverser’ (Leslau 1938: 261) || Ar ���هرnahara ‘to flow
ْن أ ْن
abundantly (blood, river)’; ���هرnahr, pl � ���هرʾanhur ‘river’ (Hava 1982: 803);
~ Aleppo nahr/nahar, pl ʾəṇhor/nhūr ‘rivière’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 852)
~ Damascus ṇahəṛ, pl ṇhūṛa/ʾəṇhoṛ ‘river’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 194) ~ S.E.
Anatolia ṇahəṛ ‘rivière’ (Grigore 2007: 93) ~ Palest nahaṛ ‘river’; ‘treiben’ (Palva
1965: 30; Bauer 1957: 114, 305).
753 n-h-r²
ن
hrw (LE) ‘day’; ‘Tag (allgemein)’ (Faulkner 1962: 159; Hannig 1995: 496) || Ar ���ه�ا ر
ْأ ن
nahār, pl � ���هرʾanhur ‘der helle Tag von Morgen bis Abend’ (Wahrmund II 1070);
~ Palest nhār ‘Tag’ (Bauer 1957: 296) ~ Egypt nahār, pl -āt ‘day, daytime’
(Spiro 1895: 615) ~ Takrūna nhāṛ ‘jour, portion des vingt-quatre heures éclai-
rées par le soleil’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 4068).
754 n-h-m
nhm (Pyr) ‘shout, thunder (of sky)’; ‘jauchzen, jubeln’; nhmhm (Pyr) ‘roar,
rejoice, dance for joy’; ‘Kriegsruf’ (Ember 1930: 65; Faulkner 1962: 135; DLE I 241;
ن
Wb II 285, 491) ~ Dem nhm ‘jauchzen’ (DG 221) ~ Copt ⲗϩⲏⲙ ‘roar’ (Crum 1039:
150a) ~ Heb נְ ָה ָמהnəhāmāh ‘growl, groan’ (BDB 625) || Ar � ���هnahama ‘to chide
م
camels; to roar (lion); to sigh’ (Hava 1982: 804);
752. n-h-r ¹ – 757. * n-w-y ¹ 335
~ Najd naham ‘to urge on a camel with shouts, to chide’; nahīm ‘chiding of
camels’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 455) ~ Sinai naham ‘to yell at, scold’ (C. Bailey 1991:
454) ~ Yemen naham ‘to cry out’; nahīm ‘roar (of lion)’ (Piamenta 1991: 499)
~ E. Arabia naham ‘sing a sea song’ (Holes 2001: 532) ~ Oman nehem ‘rufen’
(Reinhardt 1894: 146) ~ Sudan naham ‘call’ (LDA 501) ~ Negev nihīm ‘neighing
(of horse)’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Sinai naham ‘to yell at, scold’ (C. Bailey 1991: 454)
~ Khābūra naham ‘to call, shout’ (Brockett 1985: 209).
755 n-h-n-h
ن
nh/nhnh ‘schützen, beschirmen (eine Person)’ (Wb II 281, 286); nht ‘magical
protection’; nhw ‘protection of king’s arm’ (Faulkner 1962: 135) || Ar ���ه ن���هnah-
naha ‘abwehren’ (Brockelmann 1932: 107);
~ Yemen anha ‘protect against, to warn’ (Piamenta 1991: 499) ~ Sinai nahá
‘to restrain, warn s.o.’ (Stewart 1990: 252) ~ Egypt anha ‘to petition’ (Spiro 1895:
616).
756 n-w-m
mnm.t (Pyr) ‘Bett’ (Wb II 80); nmnmw (19th Dyn.) ‘Schlafzustand’ (Wb II 268)
~ Heb נִ ְמנֵ םnimnēm ‘to be drowsy, to doze’ (M. Jastrow 1886: 887) || Saf nm ‘fall
asleep’ (Winnett & Lankester Harding 1978: 649) ~ Ar ن�اnāma ‘to sleep’; �م ن���ا
م م
manām ‘dormitory’ (Hava 1982: 809, 810);
~ N. Yemen manāmah ‘Bett’ (Behnstedt 1987: 308) ~ Negev manām ‘bed’
(Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Palest manām ‘Schlafstelle’ (Bauer 1957: 258) ~ Egypt
manām ‘Schlafplatz’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1999: 402) ~ Aleppo ʿōḍet əlmanāme
‘la chambre à coucher, le dortoir, la chambrée’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 857)
~ Marazig mənām ‘sommeil’ (Boris 1958: 631) ~ Iraq manām ‘bedroom’ (van
Ess 1918: 126) ~ Najd manām ‘sleep’ (Kurpershoek 1995: 455) ~ Palmyra manēm
‘rêve’ (Cantineau 1934 II 3) ~ Morocco mnām ‘état de rêve’ (Prémare XI 502)
~ Lebanon mnām/bnām ‘rêve, sommeil’ (Feghali 1938: 839).
757 *n-w-y¹
1962: 125; Calice 1936: 65); njj ‘niederwerfen’ (Wb II 201) || Ar ن�ا ءnāʾa ‘to rise
ni҆ (Pyr) ‘rebuff; throw down (an enemy)’; ‘abweisen, zurückweisen’ (Faulkner
758 n-w-y²
أن
menewōt ‘rain cloud’ ~ Mah nēwət ‘rain’; mənwōt ‘dark raincloud’ (Johnstone
ن
1977: 89, 1987: 579) || Ar �وءnawʾ, pl � �وا ءʾanwāʾ ‘star foreboding rain, rain, storm’
(Hava 1982: 805);
~ Sinai naww ‘the winter-rain season introduced by the appearance of the
Pleiades in the evening sky in November’ (C. Bailey 1991: 454) ~ Negev nayy
‘water channel or conduit leading to a well’ (Borg & Bar-Zvi) ~ Najd naww ‘the
rains that come with the appearance of certain stars’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 470);
anwā ‘Winde und Regen bringen’ (Hess 1938: 65) ~ Aleppo nawwe ‘tempête’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 853) ~ Lebanon naw ‘id.’ (Feghali 1938: 838) ~ Egypt naww
‘Sturm, Südwind’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 485) ~ Sudan naw ‘South wind’
(LDA 501) ~ Djidjelli now ‘pluie’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 57, 364) ~ Ūlād Brāhīm now
‘pluie’ (W. Marçais 1908: 36) ~ Mzāb nu/naw ‘pluie’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 133)
~ Ḥassāniyya now(w) ‘ciel nuageux’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 103).
759 n-w-y³
ن
nwy ‘to return to (r) a place’ (Faulkner 1962: 127); nw (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘zurück-
kehren an einem Ort; (NK) kommen zu jemandem’ (WB II 222) || Ar �و�ىnawā
‘to emigrate from a place to another’ (Hava 1982: 810);
~ Sinai nāwā ‘to return to one’s home (camel)’ (C. Bailey 1991: 454).
760 n-w-y⁴
ن
220; Calice 1936: 65) || Ar �و�ىnawā ‘to intend’; إ� �ن�ت�و�ىʾintawā ‘to carry out a
nwi҆ (MK) ‘care for; take care of’; ‘für etwas sorgen’ (Faulkner 1962: 127; Wb II
761 n-y-s
762 n-y-k
763 h-b-b
ّ
hb (OK) ‘plough’; ‘der Pflug’ (Faulkner 1962: 158; Wb II 485; Calice 1936: 172) || (?)
Ar � �ه� بhabba ‘to cut, sever’ (Hava 1982: 812).
764 h-b-ǧ
hbq [~ *hbg] (Med) ‘beat up, triturate’; ‘zerstoßen’ (Faulkner 1962: 158; Calice
1936: 70) || Ar �ه ب����جhabaǧa ‘to strike with a stick’ (Hava 1982: 812);
�
~ Aleppo habbaǧ ‘gratter (le corps) jusqu’au sang’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 862)
~ Lebanon habaj/habaš ‘frapper, gifler’ (Denizeau 1960: 536; Feghali 1919: 42)
~ Palest habaǧ ‘to strike with a stick’; mahbāǧ ‘coffee pestle’ (own obs.) ~ Egypt
habfad ‘to knock down’ (Spiro 1895: 621) [< *hbd < *hbdž]; habag ‘mit der Faust
daraufschlagen’; habbāga ‘große Sichel’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 487).
338 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
765 h-d-d
766 h-d-m
hdm ‘zerbrechen’ (Calice 1936: 71) ~ Dem htm ‘destroy’ (DG 282) ~ Syr haddem
‘dismember, cut in pieces’ (CSD 100) || Ar �ه�دhadama ‘pull down (building)’
م
(Hava 1982: 820);
~ Aleppo hadam ‘démolir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 865) ~ Iraq hidam ‘tear
down, demolish, destroy’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 478); hadam ‘digest’ (van
Ess 1918: 137) ~ Palest hadam ‘zerstören (Gebäude)’ (Bauer 1957: 374) ~ Egypt
hadam ‘demolish’ (Spiro 1895: 123) ~ Sinai hadám ‘to destroy s.th.; to humiliate
s.o.’ (Stewart 1990: 228) ~ Rwala haddām ‘traitor’ (Musil 1928: 495) ~ Marazig
hadam ‘abattre (la tente), et surtout, au figuratif, ruiner, déshonorer’ (Boris
1958: 639) ~ Ūlād Brāhīm hădém ‘faire crouler’ (W. Marçais 1908: 77).
Cf. Ghomara (Berber) heddem ‘demolish’ (Mourigh 2016: 395).
765. h-d-d – 769. h-l-b 339
767 h-r-b
bhꜣ/bhn (MK) ‘flee’; ‘fliehen’; bhꜣw ‘fugitive’; ‘der Flüchtling, der Fliehende’; sbhꜣ
(caus.) ‘make to flee’ (Faulkner 1962: 83; Wb I 467) || Ar � �هر بharaba ‘fliehen,
ن
entfliehen, entkommen’; � �هرب�اharbān ‘Flüchtling’ (Hava 1982: 823);
~ Aleppo harab ‘fuir, s’enfuir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 866) ~ Palest harab
‘fliehen’ (Bauer 1957: 113) ~ Egypt harab ‘to escape, desert’ (Spiro 1895: 624)
~ Al-Andalus ⟨harab⟩ ‘to flee or run away’ (Corriente 1997: 548).
768 h-r-r
hr (LE) ‘to milk’; ‘melken (?)’; mhr ‘milk-jar’; ‘Milchkrug’ (Ember 1930: 76;
Faulkner 1962: 159, 152; Wb II 498; Hannig 2003: 548); mhr ‘Melker’ (Hannig
ّ
& Vomberg 1999: 530) ~ Copt ϩⲱⲣ ‘to squeeze out milk, to milk’ (Crum 1939:
697b) || Ar �هر�ه�ا رharhār ‘abundance of milk, water’; �هرharra ‘to flow’; �هر�هر
harhar ‘murmur of running water’; ‘avoir une violente diarrhée et en mourir’
(Hava 1982: 822–23; DAF II 1408);
~ Kəndērīb harr ‘rieseln, hinein- hinunterschutten’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 147–
8) ~ Lebanon harher ‘couler çà et là, se repandre’ (Feghali 1935: 160) ~ Palest
harr ‘Fließen (Tränen); Mehliges aus einem Sack rinnen; überströmen lassen
(Mund: Schmähungen)’; ihrār ‘Durchfall’ (Bauer 1957: 112, 245, 80; Kampffmeyer
1936: 76) ~ Egypt harr ‘to flow, drop, leak, relieve nature’ (Spiro 1895: 624);
hurār ‘Durchfall beim Esel’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1999: 402) ~ Ḥassāniyya
hṛāṛ ‘merde’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 96) ~ Khābūra harr ‘(of humans) to defecate’
(Brockett 1985: 211) ~ Aleppo harr ‘dégouliner, tomber (: poussière, etc.); avoir
la diarrhée’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 867) ~ Algeria harr ‘verser du grain, des
fruits, dans un sac, les répandre sur …’ (Lentin 1959: 299) ~ Ūlād Brāhīm haṛṛ/
mahṛāṛ ‘qui a la diarrhée’ (W. Marçais 1908: 121) ~ Morocco hrūr əl-ma ‘action
de tomber à flot’ (Prémare X II 46).
769 h-l-b
770 h-l-l
hnw ‘praise of god or king; jubilation’; hnw ‘jubeln’; ‘louange’; hnjwt ‘die Jublerin’
(Faulkner 1962: 159; Wb II 493; Lambert 1925: 107; Calice 1936: 71) ~ Akkad
alālu ‘praise,ّ acclaim (v)’ (M. Cohen 2011: 161) ~ Sab hll ‘réjouir’ (Avanzini 1962:
289) || Ar �ه�ل�لhallala ‘to praise God’ (Hava 1982: 832) ~ Najd halhal ‘to rejoice’
(Sowayan 1992: 301) ~ Daθīna hall ‘crier’; hallal ‘pousser des cris d’allégresse,
jubiler’ (GD 2876) ~ Aleppo halhal ‘pleurer un mort (Druse)’ (Barthélemy
1935–69: 872) ~ Kəndērīb halhal ‘(Frauen:) Jubeltriller ausstoßen’ (O. Jastrow
2005: 148) ~ Khawētna halhal ‘Freudengeschrei erheben’ (Talay 1999: 144)
~ Palest hallal ‘jauchzen’; thallal ‘jubilieren’ (Bauer 1957: 166, 306) ~ Egypt
hallil ‘to hoot, vociferate’; hilihli ‘jovial, hilarious’ (Spiro 1895: 627) ~ Marazig
lahlah ‘chanter avec des vocalises prolongées et sans paroles’ (Boris 1958: 564)
~ Malta ⟨tehlil⟩ ‘gioja’ (Vassalli 1796: 91; obs.).
771 h-m-s
1962: 157) || Ar �ه�م��س ب�ا �ل��ق���دhamasa bil-qadam ‘to tread the ground softly’; �ه�ا �م��س
hms ‘sich furchtsam nähern’ (Calice 1936: 71); hi҆ms (MK) ‘humbly’ (Faulkner
م ّ
hāmasa ‘to speak inaudibly’; �ه�م�ا ��سhammās ‘walking softly’; �ه�م��سhams ‘faint
sound, soft tread of camels’ (Hava 1982: 836);
~ Palest hamas ‘flüstern’; hams, mhāmasa ‘Gelispel’ (Bauer 1957: 114, 129)
~ Egypt hamas ‘to touch lightly’ (Spiro 1895: 628) ~ Damascus hamas ‘to
whisper’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 263) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨hams⟩ ‘mutter, mumble’
(Corriente 1997: 551).
772 h-m-h-m
hmhm (MK) ‘brüllen (von Month als Stier)’; hmhmt ‘Geschrei, Gebrüll’; ‘war-
shout; quacking of wild-fowl’; hmhm.tj ‘der Brüller (als Bezeichnung für den
Löwen)’; nhmhm ‘roar, thunder’ (Wb II 490–91; Faulkner 1962: 158, 135; Calice
1936: 13): hmhmt ‘eine, die erstauntes Raunen auslöst’ (Assmann 1969: 249)
~ Dem hmhm/hwhw ‘brüllen’ (DG 275, 271) ~ Copt ϩⲉⲙϩⲉⲙ ‘roar, neigh’ (Crum
1939: 682b) || Ar. � �ه��م�هhamhama ‘grommeler, grogner (se dit de la voix sourde
م
et repétée que l’on entend produire au bœuf, à l’âne, à l’éléphant)’ (DAF II 1449)
~ Amh həmhəmm alä ‘to murmur’ (Leslau 1969: 17);
~ Palest hamhame ‘Gebrumm’ (Bauer 1957: 124) ~ Bišmizzīn habhab ‘bel-
len’ (Jiha 1964: 145) ~ Damascus hamham ‘to hum’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 119)
770. h-l-l – 775. h-n- ʾ 341
~ Egypt hamham/hamhim ‘to mutter, mumble’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 913)
~ Morocco hamham ‘bredouiller, bougonner, marmotter’ (Prémare XII 87)
~ Al-Andalus ⟨hamham⟩ ‘to roar’ (Corriente 1997: 552).
773 h-m-m¹
i҆m (NK) ‘there, therein, therewith, therefrom’; ‘da, dort, dortwo, dorthin’
(Faulkner 1962: 17; Wb I 72; Gardiner 1957, §205);
~ Morocco hamma ‘dort’ (W-D. Fischer 1959: 127, fn 2) ~ Malta ⟨hemm⟩
[eːmm] ‘là, colà’ (Vassalli 1796: 236).
774 h-m-m²
i҆҆hm (MK) ‘to moan’; ‘Trauern (vom Herzen)’ (Faulkner 1962: 17; Wb I 118) ~ Dem
Ar. ّ �هhamm ‘souci, peine, préoccupation, chagrin, tristesse, chose grave’ (DAF
ꜣhm ‘Trauer, Betrübnis’ (DG 8) ~ Copt ⲁϩⲟⲙ ‘sigh, groan’ (Crum 1939: 24b) ||
م
II 1442);
~ Najd hamm, pl hmūm ‘concern, care, worry, distress’ (Kurpershoek 1999:
475) ~ Rwala hmūmi ‘one best by troubles’ (Musil 1928: 563) ~ N. Yemen
hamm ‘Sorgen bereiten’ (Behnstedt 1987: 209); himmeh ‘zelo’ (Rossi 1939:
246) ~ Aleppo hamm (v) ‘causer du souci à, préoccuper’; hamm, pl hmūm
‘souci, préoccupation, tintouin’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 873) ~ Lebanon hamm
‘worry’ (Nasr 1966: 194) ~ Palest hamm, pl ihmūm ‘Sorge’ (Bauer 1957: 280)
~ Egypt hamm, pl humūm ‘care, anxiety’ (Spiro 1985: 628) ~ Tripoli (Libya)
hamm ‘importare’; hamm, pl humūm ‘affanno, afflizione’ (Griffini 1913: 146,
5, 6) ~ Malta ⟨hemm, pl hmum⟩ ‘calamità, miserie, disavventura’ (Vassalli
1796: 236).
775 h-n-ʾ
(ii) hnjnj (Pyr) ‘jauchzen, jubeln’; hnjwt ‘die Jublerin’ (Wb II 493; Faulkner
1962: 159) || Ar. �ه�ن�ئhaniʾa ‘to rejoice at’ (Hava 1982: 837);
~ Rwala hanna ‘to congratulate’ (Musil 1928: 159) ~ Kəndērīb hanna ‘beglück-
wünschen’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 149) ~ Palest hniyye ‘Wohlbefinden’ (Kampffmeyer
1936: 77) ~ Lebanon hana ‘bonheur’ (Feghali 1938: 840) ~ Egypt hanna ‘to cause
to be happy’ (Spiro 1895: 629) ~ Malta ⟨hennæ, ihenni⟩ ‘felicitare’ (Vassalli
1796: 236).
776 h-w-y¹
777 h-w-y²
hj (Pyr) ‘husband’; ‘Gatte’ (Faulkner 1962: 157; Calice 1936: 36) || Ar �هو��يhawiya
‘to love or desire’ (Hava 1982: 842);
~ Rwala hawa ‘love, passion’; hawyān ‘an enamored one’ (Musil 1928: 158,
560) ~ Aleppo hawa ‘passion, amour’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 877) ~ Palest hawa
‘liebgewinnen, Verliebtheit’ (Bauer 1957: 194, 335).
778 h-y-f
ف
hjp ‘run’ (Edel 1955: 45; Takács 1999: 146) ~ Syr hawfā ‘a breath, puff of air’ (CSD
102) || Ar �ّ �هي�� فhayf ‘heisser trockener Süd-westwind aus Jemen’ (Wahrmund II
1142); cf. ��� �هhaffa ‘to whizz, hiss (wind); to walk quickly (man)’ (Hava 1982:
830);
776. h-w-y ¹ – 781. w-t-r 343
~ Rwala al-heyf ‘the hot south wind’; cf. haff ‘run through; to go and not
return; to rush, plunge down-hill and speed away’; hafāhīf ‘slender camels’
(Musil 1928: 12, 167) ~ Daθīna ahyaf, pl hīf ‘grand et élancé (: chameau)’; yihuff
šidda ‘il est bon marcheur’ (Landberg 1901: 1443) ~ ʿAnazeh hafhāfa, pl hafāhif
‘rapide’ (Landberg 1940: 90) ~ Najd haff ‘to run through, to go and not return’
(Kurpershoek 1999: 474) ~ Palmyra haff ‘eventer; agiter (une étoffe)’ (Cantineau
I 159, 160; II 7, 8) ~ Lebanon hāf ‘to blow (wind)’ (Frayha 1973: 190) ~ Sinai haff
‘to fan; to cause s.th. to flutter’ (Stewart 1990: 228) ~ Egypt haff ‘to blow with
the breath’: haffet hawa ‘a gust of wind’ (Spiro 1895: 626) ~ Douz habhab ‘leicht
werden (Wind)’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2014: 16) ~ Khābūra hēf ‘to let leaves fall
(plant)’ (Brockett 1985: 214).
779 w-b-š
wbḫ (MK) ‘be bright’ (Faulkner 1962: 59); ‘hell sein, leuchten (von Kleider die
sauber sind)’ (Wb I 295) ~ Dem wbš ‘hell sein, erhellen’; wbš ‘weiß’ (DG 85)
~ Copt ⲟⲩⲃⲁϣ ‘become, be white’ (Crum 1939: 476b) || Ar ��� وب� شwabiša ‘to be
white-spotted’ (Hava 1982: 847); wabš/wabaš ‘weiße Nagelflecke’ (Wahrmund
II 1150).
780 w-b-l
ْ
wbn (MK) ‘overflow’; ‘überquellen (vom Korn im Speicher), Quelle (in der
Oase)’ (Faulkner 1962: 68; Wb I 294; Calice 1936: 57) || Ar وب�لwabl/ وا ب�لwābil
‘heavy rain’ (Hava 1982: 8 4 7);
~ Rwala wabel ‘a downpour for several days, inundating whole plains’
(Musil 1928: 11) ~ Palest maṭar wābil ‘pluie abondante’ (Denizeau 1960: 549)
~ Al-Andalus ⟨šita an wābil⟩ ‘heavy rain’ (Corriente 1997: 556).
781 w-t-r
mtr (LE) ‘cordage’; mtr wʿb ‘spotless cordage’ (DLE I 215; Hoch 1994: 174) ~ Heb
أ
ָ ֵמmētār ‘cord (of a tent), string (of a bow)’ (BDB 452) ~ Syr
ֶ yeter cord’; יתר
יֶתר
yaθrā ‘string of a bow’ (CSD 200) || Ar وت�رwatar, pl � وت�ا رʾawtār ‘bow-string’
(Hava 1982: 893);
344 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
~ Iraq wattar ‘to stretch, draw tight’; watar, pl ʾawtār ‘string (of a bow or
musical instrument)’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 487) ~ Yemen witr ‘brace’
(Piamenta II 516) ~ Aleppo watar, pl utār ‘corde d’arc, corde d’un instrument
musical’ (corps)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 882) ~ Damascus watar, pl wtār ‘violin
string’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 228) ~ Palest watar, pl utār/awtār ‘Saite’ (Bauer
1957: 250) ~ Egypt watar, pl awtār ‘chord of musical instrument’; ‘kleinere Art
Teitsattel’; wattāṛa ‘Strick(e)’ (Spiro 1895: 632; Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 997)
~ Marazig watar, pl awtāṛ ‘corde du tambourin, collée à la peau et fixée au
cadre’ (Boris 1958: 658) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨watar, pl awtār⟩ ‘bow-string, string of
musical instrument’ (Corriente 1997: 556).
782 w-θ-b
i҆sbt (Amarna) ‘throne, stool’ (Faulkner 1962: 30) ~ Akkad šubtu ‘throne’
(M. Cohen 2011: 211) ~ Heb ‘ יָ ַׁשבto sit’ (BDB 442) || Ar � وث� بwaθaba ‘sich setzen’
(Wahrmund II 1154);
~ Yemen waθab ‘to sit’ (Piamenta 1991: 516) ~ Daθīna ⟨twaθθab⟩ ‘être assis
de la manière orientale’ (GD 2901).
783 w-θ-q
ث
i҆sq (NK) ‘linger’; ‘zögern, verweilen’ (Faulkner 1962: 31; Wb I 133) || Ar � و� قwaθuqa
‘fest, solid sein’ (Wahrmund II 1555);
~ Egypt yiwtag ‘fest werden’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 497) ~ Morocco
tiqa ‘trust’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 212) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨niwaθθaq⟩ ‘to con-
firm’ (Corriente 1997: 556) ~ Malta ⟨wettaq⟩ ‘rendere stabile, confermare’
(Vassalli 1796: 655).
784 w-ǧ-l
wḏnw (MK) ‘flood, inundation’; ‘Flut (des Wassers), Woge’ (Faulkner 1962: 76;
Wb I 409) || Ar و ج�ي���لwaǧīl/ �مو ج��لmawǧil ‘a pool of water’ (Hava 1982: 853);
~ N. Yemen waŝlah/waŝīl/‘erste Regentropfen’ (Behnstedt 1987: 312).
782. w-θ-b – 787. w-ḥ-d 345
785 w-ǧ-h
786 w-ǧ-ʿ
wgꜣ (MK) [< *wǧʿ] ‘Schwäche (Alters-, Herzschwäche); wehe!’; wgꜣ.t ‘Schädigung’
(Wb I 376) || Ar �� �جwaǧiʿa ‘Schmerz empfinden’ (Wahrmund II 1160);
وع
~ N. Yemen waǧiʿ ‘krank werden’ (Behnstedt 1987: 311) ~ Sinai wiǧiʿ ‘to fall ill’
(Stewart 1990: 278) ~ E. Arabia wuǧaʿ/wuyaʿ ‘hurt, cause pain’ (Holes 2001: 552)
~ S.E. Anatolia wəǧəʿ ‘avoir mal’ (Grigore 2007: 115) ~ Aleppo waǧeʿ ‘faire mal
à qqn (partie du corps)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 884) ~ Palmyra waǧaʿ ‘faire mal’
(Cantineau 1934: 5) ~ Palest ōǧaʿ ‘Schmerz erregen’ (Bauer 1957: 262) ~ Lebanon
twažžaʿ ‘il a souffert’ (Feghali 1938: 54) ~ Egypt wagaʿ ‘to ache’ (Spiro 1895: 633)
~ Tunis užáʿ ‘il a été douloureux’; twažžaʿ ‘il a souffert’ (D. Cohen 1975: 101, 54)
~ Malta ⟨weġgħa⟩ ‘dolore’ (Vassalli 1796: 655).
787 w-ḥ-d
w-ʿ (OK) ‘Zahlwort: eins’; m-wʿ ‘in privacy’ (Wb I 273; DLE I 93); wʿt ‘das Einzige,
die Einzige’ (Hannig & Vomberg 1999: 416) ~ Dem wʿ ‘Einer (substantivisch
gebraucht); einzig’ (DG 8l1) ~ Copt ⲟⲩⲁ ‘one, someone’ (Crum 1939: 469a) || Ar
وح�د هwaḥdahū, وح�د �ه�اwaḥdahā ‘he, she alone’ (Wehr 1961: 1236);
Lability of root-final *d in this Ancient Egyptian lexeme is paralleled in certain Arabic
vernaculars.
~ Egypt wēḥ ‘einer’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 176) ~ Oman wāḥi, f woḥde ‘1’;
keff wāḥi ‘eine Hand allein’; wāḥi wāḥi ‘endlich’ (Reinhardt 1894: 82, 417, 355)
~ Khābūra wāḥid/wēḥi ‘one’ (Brockett 1985: 216) ~ Damascus waḥd- + pron.
346 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
suff. ‘alone’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 7) ~ Kəndērīb waḥd- + pron. suff.: waḥdu
‘er allein’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 150) ~ Palest waḥd/wiḥd/la-waḥd ‘allein’ (Bauer
1957: 11).
788 w-ḥ-r¹
حة
wḥʿ.t (LE) ‘Skorpion’ (Calice 1936: 58; Wb I 351) ~ Copt ⲟⲩⲟⲟϩⲉ ‘scorpion’ (Crum
1939: 509a) || Ar ��ر وwaḥrah, pl �ر وحwaḥar ‘eine giftige Eidechse’ (Wahrmund
II 1164);
~ Najd wiḥir, pl wuḥāreh ‘Dornschwanzeidechse, Uromastix spinipes’ (Hess
1938: 84) ~ N. Yemen waḥarī ‘Agame (Eidechsenart)’ (Behnstedt 1987: 312).
789 w-ḥ-r²
ْ
ꜣwḥ (MK) ‘do violence’; ‘verdrängen von (mit r)’ (Faulkner 1962: 2; Wb I 5) || Ar
�ر
وحwaḥira ‘von Zorn und Wut erfüllt sein’; �ر
وحwaḥr ‘Zorn, Groll’ (Wahrmund
II 1164).
790 w-ḥ-š
wḥś/wśḥ (ME) ‘Feinde schlachten’ (Wb I 351, 365); wḥs ‘to quell tumult’
ّ 67) || Saf wḥš ‘be desolate’ (Winnett & Lankesterّ Harding
� ت�وtawaḥḥaša
(Faulkner 1962: 1978:
651) ~ Ar ���ح ش
� وwaḥḥaša ‘to desolate, depopulate (a land)’; ���ح ش
‘become savage, wild, unsociable’ (Hava 1982: 856);
~ Damascus waḥəš, pl wḥūš ‘beast, brute’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 20, 30)
~ E. Arabia waḥiš ‘rough, rude, uncouth’ (Holes 2001: 554) ~ Oman wḥiš ‘wild’
(Reinhardt 1894: 41) ~ Hijaz wiḥiš bad’ (Omar 1975: 279) ~ Iraq waḥiš ‘wild
animal’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 490) ~ Tenḥara (Yemen) waḥš ‘monstre’
(Vanhove 1995: 265) ~ S.E. Anatolia waḥš ‘wildes Tier’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982:
455) ~ Palest wiḥše ‘häßlich (Mädchen)’; uḥīšak ‘dein Schlechtes’ (Kampffmeyer
1936: 78) ~ Egypt istawḥaš ‘be savage, wild’; wiḥiš ‘bad, evil, ugly; unpleasant,
nasty’ (Spiro 1895: 635; Badawi & Hinds 1986: 927); waḥaš ‘beißen’ (Tier)’;
wuḥēš ‘schlecht’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 498; 1999: 403) ~ Douz wiḥaš
‘Angst machen’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2014: 2310) ~ Malta ⟨waħx, pl wħux⟩ ‘timore
grande, terrore’ (Vassalli 1796: 651).
788. w-ḥ-r ¹ – 793. w-x-y ² 347
791 w-ḥ-y
792 w-x-y¹
ّ ّ
wḫꜣ (OK) ‘to seek’; ‘suchen, wünschen, begehren’ (Faulkner 1962: 68; Wb I 353–
خ ً خ ض
4) || Ar ‘ و��ىetwas beabsichtigen; eifrig studieren’ (Wahrmund II 1168); و��ى ر��ى
ف ن
� ��لاwaxxā riḍan fulān ‘he endeavoured to please s.o.’ (Hava 1982: 858);
~ Lebanon wāxa ‘to fraternize with’ (Frayha 1973: 192) ~ Maghreb wāxa ‘con-
sidérer, traiter comme un frère’ (D. Cohen 1996: 525) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨natwaxxā⟩
‘to befriend’ (Corriente 1997: 560).
793 w-x-y²
(i) wḫꜣ (OK) ‘empty out, shake out, purge the body’; ‘ausleeren, ausschüt-
خ
teln’ (Faulkner 1962: 67; Wb I 353); > *ḫwꜣ > šwꜣ (Pyr) ‘poor’; šwꜣw ‘poor man’
(Faulkner 1962: 263) ~ Dem wḫꜣ ‘leeren’ (DG 99) || Ar *waxā < �و�ىxawā ‘to be
empty’ (Hava 1982: 190);
~ Morocco xwāt ‘it was empty’ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 105) ~ Najd xāwi
‘empty’ (Kurpershoek 1994: 257).
(ii) wḫꜣ (MK) ‘ignorant, incompetent person, fool; be foolish, act stupidly’;
خ
|| Ar �و�ىxawā ‘être faible’ (Dozy I 414); إ� خ�ت��و�ىʾixtawā schwachsinnig, kin-
‘töricht sein, der Törichte, der Unwissende’ (Faulkner 1962: 67; Wb I 354) *xwy]
خ
disch werden’ (Wahrmund I 635); و�وا خwaxwāx ‘weak, impotent, slothful’;
�
‘sot, imbécile’ (Hava 1982: 857; DAF II 1505).
~ Morocco ʿaqlo xāwi ‘son intelligence est dans un état de vide’ (Prémare IV
179).
348 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
794 w-d-r
795 w-d-y
ّ ( أtrees)’ (Wb
wd (OK) ‘legen, setzen, geben, darbringen’; wdi҆ ‘to place, put, plant
I 385; Faulkner 1962: 72) ~ Dem wtj ‘senden’ (DG 106) || Ar � د �ىʾaddā ‘he made
it … reach, … arrive’ (Lane 38);
~ Kəndērīb wadda ‘fortbringen, wegbringen, hinbringen’ (O. Jastrow 2005:
151) ~ Egypt wadwad ‘bringen’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 499) ~ Aleppo
wadda ‘faire parvenir soi-même, porter (qqe), conduire, mener (un enfant,
un animal)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 884) ~ Lebanon wadda ‘envoyer’ (Feghali
1938: 841) ~ Palest waddā ‘wegschicken’ (Bauer 1957: 356) ~ Sinai āda ‘to trans-
fer’; wadda ‘to send’ (Stewart 1990: 193, 276) ~ S.E. Anatolia wadda, ywaddi
‘emporter’ (Grigore 2007: 124) ~ Khābūra wdy ‘to take, transport’ (Brockett
1985: 218).
796 w-r-x
wꜣḫj (OK) ‘be inundated’; ‘wässerig sein; grünen’; ꜣḫ.t ‘season of inundation’;
ئ
jꜣḫw ‘überschwemmt sein’ (Faulkner 1962: 54; Wb I 258; Calice 1936: 56; Albright
ة
1918: 216) || Ar إ� ����ست��ور خʾistawraxa ‘become moist’; ���خ
� ور يwarīxah, pl Ar ورا �خ
�
� �
warāʾix ‘moist (earth), soft (dough)’ (Hava 1982: 862);
~ Egypt raxx to shower’; raxxa ‘a shower’; raxrax ‘to loosen’ (Spiro 1895: 220,
221) ~ Rwala arxa ‘to loosen, to pour down’ (Musil 1928: 355) ~ Damascus raxu
‘soft’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 216) ~ Palest tarāxi ‘Weichlichkeit’ (Bauer 1957:
357) ~ Kəndērīb raxu, f raxwe ‘weich, locker’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 56).
794. w-d-r – 800. w-r-q 349
797 w-r-d
i҆ꜣd.t (MK) ‘Viehweiden; Tau des Himmels, Wasser’; ‘dew, pouring rain’ (Wb I 35;
Faulkner 1962: 9; Calice 1936: 113) ~ Akkad arādu ‘to go or come down to lower
ground’ (CAD I/2 212); rādu ‘downpour’ (M. Cohen 2011: 170) ~ Heb יָ ַרדyārad
‘to come or go down’ (BDB 432) || Saf wrd ‘to go down’ (Al-Jallad 2015: 353) ~ Ar
وردwarada ‘to come to the water’ (Hava 1982: 863);
~ Aleppo warrad ʿla ‘descendre, aller à l’abreuvoir’ (Barthélemy 1935–69:
890) ~ Al-Balqāʾ mīrād ‘watering place’ (Palva 1992: 178) ~ ʿAnazeh tard
‘venir à l’abreuvoir’ (Landberg 1940: 93) ~ Najd wirid ‘to come to the water’
(Kurpershoek 1995: 462) ~ Rwala al-bel wurdat ‘the camels have moved to the
water’ (Musil 1928: 341).
798 w-r-š
Faulkner 1960: 70; Wb I 369) || Ar ��� ور شwaraša ‘to take food with the hand and
wšꜣ (OK) ‘to feed, fatten’; ‘mästen (Rinder, Wild, Geflügel)’ (Ember 1930: 12;
ْ
swallow it greedily’; ‘essen, begierig sein’; ��� ور شwarš ‘milk-food’ (Hava 1982: 863;
Wahrmund II 1176);
799 w-r-ʿ
wrḏ (LE) ‘be, grow weary, tire’; ‘müde werden’ (Faulkner 1962: 65; Wb I 337) ||
Ar ورwaraʿa ‘to be faint-hearted, weak’ (Hava 1982: 864);
ع
~ Najd wirʿ, pl wirʿān ‘child, child of less than five years of age; child up to
its seventh year’ (Hess 1938: 139; Musil 1928: 244) ~ N. Yemen wirʿin ‘Säugling’
(Behnstedt 1987: 312) ~ Daθīna ⟨twarraʿ⟩ ‘être lâche’ (GD 2919) ~ Egypt wariʿ
‘God-fearing’; itwarraʿ ‘to be reticent or reserved’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 933)
~ Morocco wārāʿ ‘piété scrupuleuse et craintive’ (Prémare XII 182) ~ Al-Andalus
⟨wariʿ, pl wurrāʿ⟩ ‘timid’ (Corriente 1997: 562).
800 w-r-q
wꜣḏ (MK) [< *wrǧ < *wrg/wrq] ‘papyrus plant; green, pale (of lips), make green,
fresh, raw (of food), green stone’; m wꜣḏ ‘successfully’; wꜣḏ.t ‘green linen’; ‘grün,
grün sein (von den Pflanzen, und vom Felde); allgemein von Dingen grüner
Farbe; frisch, Frisch sein’ (Faulkner 1962: 55; Wb I 151) ~ Akkad urqītu ‘greenery,
350 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
قة
verdure, vegetation’ (CAD XX 238) ~ Heb ‘ יֶ ֶרקgreenness’ (BDB 438) || Ar ���ور
ق أ
warqah, pl � � وراʾawrāq ‘Blatt’ (Wahrmund II 1177);
~ N. Yemen waragah ‘Blatt’ (Behnstedt 1987: 312) ~ Kəndērīb waraq ‘Blätter’
(O. Jastrow 2005: 151) ~ Ḥassāniyya uṛag ‘feuillage’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 69)
~ Al-Andalus ⟨yatwarraq⟩ ‘to be stripped of leaves’ (Corriente 1997: 562).
801 w-r-m
802 w-r-y
i҆ꜣ.t (OK) ‘Rücken’ (Wb I 26) ~ Sab hwry ‘derriére’ (Avanzini 1962: 298) || Ar ورا ء
warāʾ ‘beyond, behind, in front’ (Hava 1982: 861);
~ Palest wara ‘hinten’ (Bauer 1957: 158) ~ Egypt wara ‘behind’: wara l-bēt
‘behind the house’ (Spiro 1895: 637) ~ Morocco muṛa/mūr ‘behind; derrière’ <
*min-warāʾ (Sobelman & Harrell 1963: 20; W. Marçais 1911: 472) ~ Ḥassāniyya
mūṛ ‘behind (prep.)’ (Mali; Heath 2004: 149) ~ Malta ⟨lura⟩ ‘addietro, indietro’
(Vassalli 1796: 444) [< *l-wara].
803 w-z-z
zꜣ.t (OK) ‘goose’ (Ember 1930: 85; Wb III 422) ~ Akkad uzzu ‘swan’ (M.ّ Cohen
�ز
2011: 21) < Sumer uz ‘domestic goose or duck’ (Halloran 2006: 306) || Ar وwazz
‘goose’ (Hava 1982: 866);
~ Iraq wozza ‘Wildente’ (Weißbach 1930: 335); wazz (coll.) ‘goose, geese’;
wazza, pl -āt ‘goose’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 493); wazzi ‘a goose’ (Abu-Haidar
801. w-r-m – 805. w-s- ʿ 351
1991: 70) ~ Palmyra wazze ‘Oie (sauvage)’ (Cantineau 1934 II 74) ~ Damascus
wazze (coll.) (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 106) ~ Palest wazz ‘Gans’ (Bauer 1957: 121)
~ Egypt wazza ‘Gans’; wizz ‘Gänse’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 500) ~ Tripoli
(Libya) wazz ‘oca’ (Griffini 1913: 191) ~ Morocco wezza ‘goose’ (Sobelman &
Harrell 1963: 89) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨wazz, n.u. -ah⟩ ‘goose’ (Corriente 1997: 562)
~ Ḥassāniyya wəzze ‘canard’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 38) ~ Malta ⟨wiżż (coll.)⟩
‘oca’ (Vassalli 1796: 662).
804 w-z-n
wdn (OK) ‘be heavy, to weigh’; ‘schwer sein, lasten, gewichtig sein (Name,
�ز ن
Ansehen), auch schwierig werden (Zustände)’; wdnt ‘heavy block of stone’;
‘schwerer Steinblock’ (Faulkner 1962: 73; Wb I 390) || Ar � وwazana ‘weigh’
(Hava 1982: 867);
~ Damascus wzān ‘Gewicht’ (Grotzfeld 1965: 170) ~ Lebanon wazan ‘he
weighed’ (Nasr 1966: 176) ~ Āzəx wazan, yūzən ‘wiegen’: ūzən ‘wiege! (m)’
(Wittrich 2001: 60) ~ Ḥama wzān ‘abwiegen’ (Lewin 1966: 229) ~ Yemen wazan/
zān, yizīn ‘pesare’ (Rossi 1939: 227) ~ Iraq wuzan ‘to weigh’ (Clarity et al., 197)
~ Algiers uzen ‘peser, mesurer’ (Tapiéro 1971: 164, 162) ~ Djidjelli wezn ‘fait de
peser’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 87) ~ Malta ⟨wiżen⟩ ‘essere grave, pesante’ (Vassalli
1796: 661).
805 w-s-ʿ
wśḫ/śḫw (LE) [< *wsʿ/swʿ] ‘weit sein (räumlich) weit; geräumig (vom Haus,
Platz); Breite, Weite’; wśḫ.t n bnr ‘die Aussenhalle’ (Wb I 364, 365, 461; Ember
1912: 90) ~ swsḫ ‘widen’; ‘extend’ (Faulkner 1962: 69, 218; DLE II 22); sḫ.t ‘die
Breite’ (Calice 1933: 277); N wśḫ i҆s ‘it was not broad’ (Gunn 1924: 200) ~ Dem
wsḫ ‘breit sein’ (DG 101) ~ Copt ⲟⲩⲱϣⲥ ‘become, be broad; breadth’ (Crum
1939: 503b) || Ar و��سwasiʿa ‘be broad, ample, wide (place)’ (Hava 1982: 869);
ع
~ Sinai wisīʿ ‘broad, generous, tolerant’ (Stewart 1990: 280) ~ Baghdad wsīʿi
‘broad’ (Blanc 1964: 70) ~ Aleppo usīʿ, pl usāʿ ‘spacieux, vaste’ (Barthélemy
1935–69: 894) ~ Kəndērīb wəsəʿ ‘Umfang, Weite, Breite’ (O. Jastrow 2005:
152) ~ Daragözü wsīḥ ‘breit’ (O. Jastrow 1973: 81) ~ Āzəx wasīʿ ‘weit’ (Wittrich
2001: 101) ~ Çukurova wsīʿ ‘id.’ (Procházka 2002: 32) ~ Egypt wasaʿ ‘open
space’ (Spiro 1895: 641) ~ Tripoli (Libya) wassaʿ ‘allargare’ (Cesàro 1939: 225)
~ Tunis wāšaʿ ‘large, spacieux’ (D. Cohen 1975: 68) ~ Marazig wsāʿ ‘weit,
352 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
806 w-š-r
~ Akkad massāru/šaššāru ‘saw’ (M. Cohen 2011: 183) || Ar و� �ش� رwašara ‘to saw’;
wsy (OK) ‘to saw’; ‘sägen (Holz)’ (Faulkner 1962: 68, Ember 1930: 29; Wb I 358)
807 w-ṣ-d
ḏd (Pyr) ‘stable, enduring’ (Faulkner 1962: 325); ḏdj (Pyr) ‘dauern, fest sein’ (Wb
V 628) || Ar و�ص�دwaṣada ‘fest sein’ (Dieterici 1894: 176);
~ Daθīna waṣīdah, pl waṣāyid ‘une perche avec une fourche (šuʿbah) en haut,
ou l’on place les (ʿīdān) au milieu de la hutte (daymah)’ (GD 2924) ~ Morocco
oṣēd ‘enclos soigneusement fermé’ (Prémare XII 212).
808 w-ṣ-y
wḏi҆ (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘command’; ‘befehlen, Befehl erteilen, jmd. an einem
Dritten befehlen, anbefehlen, empfehlen’; wḏ wḏt ‘issue a command’ (Ember
1930: 37; Wb I 394; Faulkner 1962: 73); ḏwj ‘jemanden rufen’ (Wb V 550) ~ Dem
أ
wt ‘befehlen, Befehl, Erlass, Erklärung’ (DG 104) ~ Akkad (w)aṣû(m) ‘make
known, publicize’ (CDA 435) || Ar � و�صىʾawṣā ‘to order, command’; waṣṣā
‘bequeath’ (Hava 1982: 875);
806. w-š-r – 810. w-ḍ-y 353
The metathesis of this Egyptian lexeme (wḏ/ḏwi҆) is paralleled in both Heb ṣwh/wṣh
(Exodus I 22; Ezra VIII 17) and Arabic; note also Maghribī wāsa/sāwa ‘faire’. Ph. Marçais
1956: 117
~ Aleppo waṣṣa ‘recommander’; waṣīye ‘dernières recommendations’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 898) ~ Suxne waṣṣa, ywaṣṣi ‘empfehlen, beauf-tragen’;
ōṣa, yōṣi ‘vermachen’ (Behnstedt 1994: 395) ~ Damascus waṣṣa ‘will (property)’;
wṣiyye, pl -āt ‘testament’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 264, 237) ~ Lebanon uṣiyye
‘commandement’ (Feghali 1938: 842) ~ Palest tūṣāye ‘etwas, das anempfohlen,
anvertraut ist’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 78); waṣiyye ‘commandment’ (Piamenta
2000: 246) ~ Kəndērīb waṣṣa, ywaṣṣi ‘letzwillig bestimmen’ (O. Jastrow 2005:
153) ~ E. Arabia waṣiyya ‘request, order, (last) will, testament’ (Holes 2011: 560)
~ Yemen waṣiyyah ‘testamento’ (Rossi 1939: 242) ~ Tripoli (Libya) waṣṣa ‘deter-
minare, fissare’ (Griffini 1913: 80, 121) ~ Mzāb waṣṣa ‘il a commandé / recom-
mandé’ (Grand’Henry 1976: 135) ~ Djidjelli tweṣya ‘fait de recommander’ (Ph.
Marçais 1956: 230) ~ Malta ⟨wissa, jwissi⟩ ‘ammonire’ (Vassalli 1796: 661).
809 w-ḍ-ḥ¹
(i) wḏḥ (Pyr) ‘wean’; ‘entwöhnen; das kleine entwöhnte Kind’ (Faulkner 1962:
76; Wb I 410) || Ar �� وwaḍaḥa ‘glänzend weiße Milch geben (: Kamelin)’
ضح
(Wahrmund II 1193); � ّو
�ضḍawwaḥa ‘to give a.o. diluted milk’ (Hava 1982: 423);
حأ
�� وwaḍaḥ, pl � �ا
� و �ضʾawḍāḥ ‘milk, whiteness’ (Hava 1982: 875);
ضح ح
~ Najd waḍḍāḥ ‘Licht verbreitend’; awḍaḥ ‘weiss (von Kamelen, Pferden);
weiss glänzend (Gefäß)’ (Socin 1901 III 321) ~ awð̣ aḥ ‘white (: camel)’ (Borg
1999: 136) ~ Sinai awð̣ aḥ ‘white (: camel)’ (Stewart 1990: 276).
(ii) ḥḏ ‘white, bright; set forth at dawn’; ‘weiß, hell (von Milch, Sahne, Fett,
Honig)’; ḥḏt ‘white of the eye’; ḥḏḏwt ‘brightness’ (Faulkner 1962: 181, 182; Wb
ّ ض
III 206; Brockelmann 1932: 110) ~ Heb ַצחṣaḥ(ḥ) ‘dazzling, glowing, clear’ (BDB
850) || Ar �� ḍaḥḥ ‘light of the sun’ (Hava 1982: 414);
ح
~ Ḥama daḥḥ ‘scheinen (Sonne)’ [< ḍaḥḥ ‘Sonnenschein’] (Lewin 1966: 206)
~ Najd ð̣ āḥ ‘to appear, to shine, be bright’; ð̣ ōḥ ‘lightning, brilliance, luminos-
ity’; mið̣ wāḥ ‘lamp’; wað̣ ḥa, pl wið̣ ḥ ‘a pure white she-camel’ (Kurpershoek 1999:
416; 1995: 464) ~ N. Yemen ð̣ aḥð̣ aḥ ‘auftauchen (Sonne)’ (Behnstedt 1987: 274).
810 w-ḍ-y
wḏꜣ (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘heil sein, unverletzt sein, versehrt sein, wohlbehalten
sein’; ‘hale, uninjured, prosperous’; wḏꜣ b ‘be glad’; ʿnḫ wḏꜣ snb ‘may he live, be
354 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
�ض�ؤ
ّ ت ّ أ1962: 74) || Ar � وwaḍuʾa
prosperous, hale’ (Calice 1936: 141; Wb I 399; Faulkner
‘vor Reinlichkeit glänzen’ (Wahrmund II 1193); � � �و �ضtawaḍḍaʾa ‘to wash onself’
(Hava 1982: 875);
~ Aleppo wað̣ ð̣a ‘purifier, laver’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 899) ~ Kəndērīb
wað̣ ð̣a ‘jemanden rituell waschen’; lūwe ʿala wəð̣ u ‘wer im Zustand der ritu-
alen Reinheit ist’ (O. Jastrow 2005: 153) ~ Palest itwaḍḍa ‘sich rituell waschen’
(Bauer 1957: 354) ~ Egypt itwaḍḍa ‘to perform religious ablutions’ (Spiro 1895:
644).
811 w-ṭ-n
i҆҆wtn (LE) ‘ground’; ‘Erdboden, Erde, Grund, Grundstück’ (Faulkner 1962: 14; Wb
أ
I 58) ~ Dem i҆҆tn ‘Erdboden’ (DG 47) ~ Copt ⲉⲓⲧⲛ ‘ground, earth, dust, rubbish’
ن
(Crum 1939: 87b) || Ar � وط� نwaṭan, pl � � وط�اʾawṭān ‘dwelling’; � �موط� نmawṭin, pl
ن
�� �موا طmawāṭin ‘abode, dwelling, home’ (Hava 1982: 879);
~ Ḥassāniyya waṭan, pl owṭān ‘territoire’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 143)
~ Damascus waṭan, pl ʾawṭān ‘home’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 117) ~ Oman waṭan
‘Heimat’ (Reinhardt 1894: 43) ~ Egypt waṭan ‘native land, home’ (Spiro 1895:
645).
812 w-ṭ-y
244; Calice 1936: 216; Faulkner 1962: 294) || Ar. وط�ئwaṭiʾa ‘to tread underfoot’
(i) tjtj (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘niedertreten, zertreten’; ‘to trample on foe’ (Wb V
813 w-ð̣ -f
wdp (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘butler, cook’; ‘Aufwärter, Diener im Hause’; wdpwyt
‘serving-maid’; ‘Dienerin (die Wein darreicht)’ (Faulkner 1962: 73; Wb I 388) || Ar
�ظّ ف
��� وwað̣ ð̣afa l/ʿalā ‘die Speiserationen auf dem Tag bestimmen’ (Wahrmund
فة
II 1199); ������ و�ظ يwað̣ īfah ‘a daily allowance, or portion, of food’ (Lane 3056);
~ Ḥassāniyya wað̣ īve, pl wað̣ āyəf ‘fonctionnement’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 70)
~ Aleppo waẓẓaf ‘pourvoir d’une fonction, d’une charge, d’un emploi’
(Barthélemy 1935–69: 900) ~ Damascus waẓīfe, pl waẓāyəf ‘function’ (Stowasser
& Ani 1964: 99) ~ Lebanon metwaẓẓef ‘fonctionnaire’ (Denizeau 1960: 555)
~ Palest mitwað̣ ð̣if ‘Beamte(r)’ (Bauer 1957: 43) ~ Egypt waẓẓaf ‘to place in a
high official position’ (Spiro 1895: 645) ~ N. Yemen hāmitwað̣ ð̣af ‘angestellt’
(Behnstedt 1987: 313).
814 w-ʿ-b
i҆ʿb (OK) ‘be united, assemble, join, unite’; ‘das Getreide mit der Gabel zusam-
menharken; vereinigen’; ʿb ‘vereinigen’ (Ember 1930: 28; Wb I 40, 174; Faulkner
1962: 11) ~ Sab wʿb ‘finish, complete’ (Biella 1982: 133) || Ar � و�ع� بwaʿaba ‘sich des
Ganzen bemächtigen’ (Wahrmund II 1199);
~ Aleppo stawʿab ‘contenir (qqe: vase)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 900) ~ Al-
Andalus ⟨waʿab⟩ ‘to comprehend or embrace’ (Corriente 1997: 567) ~ Egypt
ʾistawʿab ‘to hold, to have room for’ (Badawi & Hinds 1986: 946).
815 w-ʿ-r
wʿrt (LE) ‘desert plateau’ (Faulkner 1962: 58) || Ar و�عرwaʿara ‘be hard, rugged,
uneven (soil)’ (Hava 1982: 880);
~ Najd waʿar ‘rough ground’ (Sowayan 1992: 303) ~ el-Kerak darbak waʿar
‘dein Weg ist abschüssig’ (Musil 1908: 440) ~ Daθīna ⟨twaʿʿar⟩ ‘être renfermé
dans un endroit presque impraticable dans la montagne’; ⟨wi/aʿār⟩ ‘rude’;
⟨waʿīr⟩ ‘rocailleux’; waʿrah ‘thicket’ (GD 2928; Stace 1893: 171) ~ Khābūra wʿāra
‘être méchant’ (Brockett 1985: 72) ~ Oman wʿor ‘wild, gefährlich’ (Reinhardt
1894: 63) ~ Iraq waʿir ‘rough, rocky, uneven, rugged’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967:
498) ~ Syria waʿir/wiʿir/wēʿir ‘krummer Weg’ (Behnstedt 1997a: 176) ~ Aleppo
waʿar ‘sol rocailleux’; waʿra ‘lieu ou chemin rocailleux, raboteux’ (Barthélemy
1935–69: 900) ~ Damascus wəʿer ‘bumpy’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 31) ~ Palest
356 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
waʿr ‘steiniges Gelände’; waʿr/wiʿr ‘Geröll(e)’ (Löhr 1905: 142; Bauer 1957: 132)
~ Negev waʿrih ‘rocky (f)’ (Henkin 2010: 248) ~ Egypt wuʿūra ‘ruggedness’
(Badawi & Hinds 1986: 947) ~ Marazig waʿaṛ, pl awʿāṛ ‘terrain où la marche est
difficile, dangereuse’; ūʿār, yūʿār ‘devenir difficile pour (ʿala)’ (Boris 1958: 671)
~ Morocco wāʿar ‘difficile, pénible (travail), ardu, escarpé’ (Prémare XII 231)
~ Sinai twaʿʿar ‘to get stuck’ (Stewart 1990: 276) ~ Sudan waʿra ‘forest, scrub,
low forest’ (LDA 531) ~ Douz wāʿir ‘schwer, schwierig’ (Ritt-Benmimoun 2014:
268) ~ Djidjelli wāʿōr ‘difficile, sévère’ (Ph. Marçais 1956: 262) ~ Cherchell
wāʿaṛ ‘méchant’ (Grand’Henry 1972: 102) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨waʿrah⟩ ‘lieu scabreux’
(DA 1354) ~ Malta ⟨imwiegħer⟩ ‘difficilis, salebrosus et asper locus’ (Vassalli
1796: 525).
816 w-ʿ-l
ْ
ʿr (Med) [< *wʿl] ‘Ziege’ (Wb I 208; Calice 1936: 54) ~ Sab ʾwʿl(n) ‘ibex, mountain
goat’ (Biella 1982: 135) || Saf wʿl ‘ibex’ (Winnett & Lankester 1978: 451) ~ Ar وع�ل
waʿl ‘antelope, mountain-goat’ (Hava 1982: 881); cf. 28. b-d-n;
~ Arabia waʿl, pl waʿūl ‘designation of the great wild goat in Syria and among
the Qaḥtān in Arabia’ (Doughty 1888: 685) ~ Rwala waʿal ‘ibex’ (Musil 1928:
25) ~ Yemen waʿl, pl ʾawʿāl ‘Bergziege’; waʿil ‘Steinbock, großer Hirsch; ibex’
(Behnstedt 2006: 1308); waʿl, pl wiʿālah ‘ibex’ (Piamenta 1991: 527) ~ Palest waʿl
‘Steinbock, Capra nubiana’ (Dalman VI 77) ~ Palmyra waʿl, pl wuʿūl ‘mouflon’
(Cantineau 1934 II 74).
817 w-ʿ-y
أ
ʿwy.t ‘pot’ (van der Plas & Borghouts 1998: 51) ~ Dem jʿ ‘waschen’ (DG 48) ~ Copt
ⲉⲓⲱ ‘to wash’ (Crum 1939: 75a) || Ar وع�ا ءwiʿāʾ, pl � و�عي���هʾawʿiyah ‘vessel’ (Hava
1982: 882);
~ Aleppo waʿa ‘vase’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 901) ~ Lebanon weʿe, pl wʿāya ‘vase,
récipient’ (Denizeau 1960: 556) ~ Damascus wāʿa, pl -āt ‘container’ (Stowasser
& Ani 1964: 52) ~ Palest waʿā, pl awʿiye ‘Gefäß’ (Bauer 1957: 125) ~ Egypt waʿāya
‘vessel, receptacle’; wiʿy ‘pots and pans’ (Spiro 1895: 646) ~ Çukurova wiʿi, pl
wʿāya ‘Gefäß’ (Procházka 2002: 290/2, 4) ~ Marazig ūʿē, pl ūʿāyāt ‘tout récipient
(à l’exception de ceux dits, māʿūn)’ (Boris 1958: 672) ~ Yemen waʿāʾ, pl awʿiyeh/
mūʿī, pl mawāʿī ‘Geschirr’; wiʿiʾ, pl ūʿiyih ‘großer Transportsack’ (Behnstedt 2006
II 1308); uʿa ‘Behälter’ (Goitein 1934: 49).
816. w- ʿ -l – 821. w-f-r ² 357
818 w-ġ-l
wʿrt [*wġlt/wġrt] ‘leg’; wʿr ‘flee, fly, rush forth’; ‘fliehen, fliehend, flüchtig’
أ �غ
(Faulkner 1962: 57, 58; Wb I 337; Brockelmann 1932: 103; DLE I: 95; Caminos
1954: 537) || Ar � و �لʾawġala ‘rasch schreiten’ (Wahrmund II 1203);
~ Lebanon twaġġal ‘pénétrer dans (un pays)’ (Denizeau 1966: 556) ~ Egypt
ʾitwaġġil ‘to make progress, advance, make (good) headway’ (Badawi & Hinds
1986: 948) ~ Marazig waġġar ‘aller, partir, marcher, se trouver au milieu de la
journée’ (Boris 1958: 672–3) ~ Morocco woġġəl ‘enfoncer (qqch.)’; twoġġəl ‘être
enfoncé’ (Prémare XII 234).
819 w-ġ-m
�غ ْ�غ
wʿm.t ‘etwas schlechtes (Zustand oder Handlung)’ (Wb I 285; Calice 1936: 57)
أ �غ
|| Ar � وwaġima ‘to breed hatred against’ (Hava 1982: 883); � وwaġm, pl � و �ا
م م م
ʾawġām ‘Tiefer Haß, Groll, Gewalttätigkeit’ (Wahrmund II 1203).
820 w-f-r¹
ف
pr.t ‘Frucht, fruchtbar sein’; ‘fruit, seed, offspring, posterity’ (Wb I 518, 530;
Calice 1936: 30; Faulkner 1962: 91) || Ar و�رwafara ‘reichlich in Hülle und Fülle
vorhanden sein’ (Wahrmund II 1204);
~ Marazig wafra ‘abondance; grand, bien developpé (arbre fruitier et céré-
ales exclusivement)’ (Boris 1958: 958) ~ Daθīna wafar/wafal, yōfar ‘être saturé
d’eau’ (GD 2931) ~ Iraq wufra ‘abundance, profusion, plenty’ (Woodhead &
Beene 1967: 499) ~ Aleppo wāfer, f wāfra ‘abondant’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 901)
~ Egypt wufra ‘abundance’ (Spiro 1895: 949) ~ Morocco wufra ‘chevelure abon-
dante’ (Prémare XII 236).
821 w-f-r²
فة
wpr.t ‘Seitenlocke des Kindes’ (Wb I 305; Takács 2016: 60) || Ar � و�رwafrah ‘hair
hanging down upon the ears, hair extending beyond / to the lobe of the ear or
to the ears’ (Lane 2956); ‘Haarlocke (besonders hinterm Ohr)’ (Wahrmund II
1205);
358 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
822 w-f-y
i҆p (LE) ‘count, reckon up’; ‘zählen; etwas zählen; etwas für vollzählig befin-
den; Einkünfte (Steuern) berechnen, auferlegen; jemanden erkennen, jeman-
den richtig bewerten’; i҆p n ‘jemandem etwas zuzählen, es ihm zuweisen’;
i҆pw.t ‘Zählung, Abrechnung’; i҆p r ‘charge against (of debts)’; i҆pw ‘payments’
(Faulkner 1962: 16; Wb I 66, 67; Gardiner 1957: 126; DLE I: 25) ~ Copt ⲱⲡ ‘count,
esteem; give account; give account’ (Crum 1939: 526a) ~ Akkad apû ‘be mani-
fest; elicit’ (Parpola 2007: 9) ~ Sab wfy ‘safety, to pay off’ (Jamme 1962: 435);
ف
hwfy ‘accomplissement d’une promesse’ (Avanzini 1962: 297) ~ Soq éfe ‘payer’
~ Mah ufā ‘executer’ (Leslau 1938: 69) || Ar و��ا ءwafāʾ ‘être fidèle à sa parole;
payer, acquitter (la dette)’;
~ Suxne wafa, yūfi ‘Schulden bezahlen’ (Behnstedt 1994: 396) ~ Aleppo wafa,
yūfi ‘payer, acquitter (une dette)’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 902) ~ Çukurova wafa,
yiwfi ‘bezahlen (Schuld)’ (Procházka 2002: 79) ~ Lebanon wefe, yūfe ‘payer,
s’acquitter de’; waffa ‘ganz bezahlen’ (Feghali 1938: 843; Grotzfeld 1965: 170)
~ Sinai waffa ‘to make up the remaining amount’ (Stewart 1990: 277) ~ Egypt
ufā, yūfa ‘zu Ende gehen, aufhören, fertig sein’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994: 183)
~ Tripoli (Libya) ufē ‘finire, esaurirsi’ (Cesàro 1939: 240) ~ Tunis ufa ‘il a cessé’
(D. Cohen 1975: 105) ~ Ḥassāniyya weffe ‘achever’; uve, yowve ‘être terminé’
(Taine-Cheikh 1990: 20, 142).
823 w-q-b
أ ق
wḏb (Med) ‘river bank, seashore’; ‘Ufer, Uferland; Ackerland am Ufer’ (Faulkner
ق
1962: 76; Wb I 409) [< *wǧb < *wgb] || Ar � و�� بwaqb, pl � � و��ا بʾawqāb ‘Felsgrube
mit stehenden Wasser, Höhlung’ (Wahrmund II 1207).
824 w-q-r
jqr (LE) ‘excellent’; ‘trefflich, vorzüglich’ (Faulkner 1962: 31; Wb I 137): jqr
dḏ ‘excellent speaker’ (Lichtheim 1996: 79) ~ Dem i҆qr ‘vortrefflich’ (DG 45)
822. w-f-y – 827. w-l-d 359
ق
~ Akkad aqru ‘rare, precious, valuable, dear’ (CAD I/2 207) ~ Heb יָ ָקרyāqār
‘precious, rare, splendid’ (BDB 429) || Ar و�رwaqira ‘respecter, vénérer’ (DAF
II 1583);
~ Aleppo waqqar ‘témoigner du respect à (qqn)’; mwaqqar ‘respecté, con-
sidéré, grave, imposant’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 903) ~ Lebanon uqār ‘respect’
(Feghali 1938: 843) ~ Palest waqār ‘Respekt, Achtung’: bi waqār ‘wurdevoll’
(Bauer 1957: 244, 370) ~ Egypt tawqīr ‘half mourning’ (Spiro 1895: 648).
Cf. Ghomara (Berber) weqqer ‘to respect’ (Mourigh 2016: 430).
825 w-l-ǧ¹
826 w-l-ǧ²
ة
و ��جلwalaǧah, ‘cave, cavern’
wndwt ‘hollow, depression’ (Faulkner 1962: 63) || Ar ���
أ
(Hava 1982: 892); pl و ج �لwalaǧ, pl � ولا جʾawlāǧ ‘Höhle, Grotte in der man Schutz
� �
vor Regen sucht’ (Wahrmund II 1218).
827 w-l-d
أ
i҆d (OK) ‘Jüngling, junger Mann’ (Wb I 151) || Ar و�ل�دwalad/wild/wald, pl � ولا د
ʾawlād ‘child, son, offspring, youngling’ (Hava 1982: 893);
~ Najd lād ‘sons’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 165) ~ Khābūra wed ‘a male offspring’
(Brockett 1985: 222) ~ Oman wed ‘Sohn’ (Reinhardt 1894: 10) ~ Aleppo walad, pl
ulād ‘enfant’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 907) ~ Palest walad, pl ulād(e) ‘Kind’ (Bauer
1957: 173) ~ Egypt walad, pl wilād/awlād ‘boy, child’ (Spiro 1895: 651).
360 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
828 w-l-m
wnm (Med) ‘to eat, eat of, feed on, consume, devour’; ‘essen, das Essen, Esslust,
Appetit, Einnehmen (Heilmittel)’; ‘manger’ (Faulkner 1962: 62; DLE I 102; Wb
I 320–1; Herbin 1994: 527); wnmt ‘food, fodder’; ‘Nahrung, Unterhalt’; wnmw
‘food, sustenance’; ‘Nahrung, Fütterung (Vieh)’; wnmy ‘right-hand, right’
(Faulkner 1962: 62; Hannig & Vomberg 1999: 524) ~ Dem wnm ‘essen, das Essen;
أ
rechts, rechte Seite’; wnm.t ‘Festessen, Nahrung, Futter’ (DG 91) ~ Copt ⲟⲩⲛⲁⲙ
‘right hand’ (Crum 1939: 478a, 483b) || Ar � ولʾawlama ‘donner un repas pour
م ة
fêter un événement heureux dans la famille’ (DAF II 1605); �� �ول�يمwalīmah, pl Ar
� ل ئwalāʾim ‘feast, dinner-party’ (Hava 1982: 894);
وا م
~ Yemen walīmeh ‘banchetto’; ‘Hochzeitsfest, Hochzeitsessen’ (Rossi 1939:
195; Behnstedt 2006: 1321) ~ Oman welm ‘günstiger Wind’ (Reinhardt 1894: 41)
~ Rwala wālmah, pl -āt ‘what is handy, ready for use, consumption’; al-wālmah
‘what is ready (coffee left over from the day before)’; wallam ‘to prepare, make
ready’ (Musil 1928: 320, 362, 467) ~ Khābūra wulem ‘to be ready for cutting’
(Brockett 1985: 223) ~ Daθīna ⟨wallam⟩ ‘préparer, mettre en ordre’; ⟨walīmah⟩
‘repas, festin en général, à n’importe quelle occasion’ (GD 2938–39) ~ Najd wālim
‘ready’ (Ingham 1994: 186) ~ Iraq walīma, pl walāʾim ‘banquet’ (Woodhead &
Beene 1967: 503) ~ Kəndērīb walīme ‘Gastmahl’; walīmət ʿərs ‘Hochzeitsmahl’
(O. Jastrow 2005: 154) ~ Aleppo wallam ‘donner un repas, un festin’; ulīme, pl
ulēyem ‘festin, banquet’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 908) ~ Damascus walīme, pl
walāyem ‘banquet’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 18) ~ Al-Balqāʾ twallam ‘to be pre-
pared’ (Palva 1992: 178) ~ Palest walīme, pl walāyim ‘Bankett, Schmaus’ (Bauer
1957: 41, 261) ~ Takrūna ulīma, pl -āt ‘repas offert à l’occasion d’une fête de
famille, aussi bien noce que circoncision ou première coupe de cheveux d’un
enfant’ (Marçais & Guîga 1958–61: 4381) ~ Tunis twāləm ‘il s’est accomodé de’
(D. Cohen 1975: 129) ~ Ūlād Brāhīm ulīma ‘festin’ (W. Marçais 1908: 31).
829 w-l-y
wꜣj (MK) ‘kommen’; wꜣ.t ‘road, way’; ‘Weg, Seite’ (Wb I 246; Calice 1936: 56;
Faulkner 1962: 52; Brockelmann 1932: 103) || Ar ولىwalā ‘einer Person oder
Sache sehr nahe sein, gleich daneben stehen oder kommen’; waly ‘Nähe,
Angrenzung’; waliyy ‘nahe, benachbart’; ‘être très proche, suivre immédiate-
ment après, détourner’ (Wahrmund II 1221; DAF II 1606);
~ Yemen walla ‘gehen’ (Behnstedt 2006: 1321) ~ Sinai wallā ‘to leave quickly,
take off’ (C. Bailey 1991: 457); wálaʾ, yawliy ‘to come near’ (de Jong 2011: 254)
828. w-l-m – 831. w-n-n 361
~ Daθīna ⟨wallā⟩ ‘aller, se rendre’ (GD 2940) ~ Najd walla ‘to go away, turn
away’; wala ‘to come next to’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 483) ~ Iraq walli ‘get lost!’
(Abu-Haidar 1991: 199) ~ Lebanon walla ‘partir’ (Feghali 1938: 844); wallet
iyyāme ‘mes jours déclinent, je deviens vieux’ (Denizeau 1960: 558) ~ Palest
mwalli ‘geht weg’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 79) ~ Tripoli (Libya) walla ‘andarsene
indietro’ (Griffini 1913: 13) ~ Mzāb twalli l-əṣ-ṣahṛa ‘tu retournes au désert’
(Grand’Henry 1976: 135) ~ Tangier wulla ‘s’en retourner, devenir’ (W. Marçais
1911: 499) ~ Algiers walla ‘devenir’ (Tapiéro 1971: 155) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨walayt fī⟩
‘to go in or enter’ (Corriente 1997: 571).
830 w-m-ḍ
wbd.t (OK) ‘burn (n.), burning’; ‘das Brennen, der Brand’ (Faulkner 1962: 59;
� ضwamaḍa ‘leicht schimmern’
Wb I 297); wbd ‘brennen, brennend sein; verbrennen, durch Feuer vernichten
(Feind)’ (Hannig & Vomberg 1999: 189) || Ar ����م و
(Wahrmund II 1223);
~ Al-Andalus ⟨yūmiḍ, awmaḍ⟩ ‘to shine’ (Corriente 1997: 573).
831 w-n-n
wnwn (OK) ‘sich hin- und herbewegen; umhergehen, sich bewegen (Kind
im Mutterleib)’; ‘to sway to and fro, nod, travel about, shake’; nmnm (Pyr)
[> mnmn] ‘sich bewegen, sich regen’; ‘quake, quiver, go to and fro’ (Ember 1930:
ّن ّأ ن
42; Wb I 318, II 267; Calice 1936: 57; Faulkner 1962: 61, 133) ~ Dem mnmn ‘sich
bewegen, zittern’ (DG 162) || Ar � وwanna ‘to hum, buzz’ (Hava 1982: 896) < � �
ʾanna ‘gémir, verser, répandre (l’eau, etc.)’; ʾannān ‘gémissement, qui gémit sans
cesse’ (DAF I 59); cf. 473. ʿ-n-n;
~ Aleppo wann ‘gémir en fendant l’air, siffler (: balle tirée, pierre lancée par
une fronde); wanwan ‘bourdonner, ronfler’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 910) ~ S.E.
Anatolia yānīn ‘stöhnen’ (Vocke & Waldner 1982: 18) ~ Lebanon wann ‘jeter,
pousser’ (Feghali 1919: 158) ~ Iraq wann ‘to moan’; wanwan ‘to moan repeatedly
and continually’ (Woodhead & Beene 1967: 504) ~ Khābūra winn ‘to groan’
(Brockett 1985: 223) ~ Rwala wanneyt ya daḥḥām tisʿīn wenne (poet.) ‘I mourn,
O Daḥḥām, with ninety laments’ (Musil 1928: 219) ~ ʿAnazeh nīne ‘gémisse-
ment’ (Landberg 1940: 3) ~ Al-Balqāʾ wanwan ‘to hum (sadly)’ (Palva 1978: 103)
~ Najd wannīn ‘wehklagend’; wann ‘stöhnen’; ‘to moan, lament, groan’ (Socin
1901 III 322; Kurpershoek 1995: 467) ~ E. Arabia wann ‘moan, groan’ (Holes
362 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
2001: 22) ~ Ḥama wann ‘pfeifen, schwirren’ (Lewin 1966: 230) ~ Palest anne
‘Seufzen’ (Kampffmeyer 1936: 2) ~ Egypt wann ‘buzz, hum’ (Spiro 1895: 652)
~ Marazig wann ‘mugir (chameleon), bourdonner (mouche), vagir (enfant)’
(Boris 1958: 681) ~ Malta ⟨venven⟩ ‘to vibrate, blow loudly (wind); hurl’ [< Ar
wanwan] (Aquilina 1990: 1503).
832 w-h-ǧ
ʿwg (BD) ‘rösten, dörren’ (Calice 1936: 127); ʿḏ ‘verbrennen, braten’ (Brockelmann
1932: 102) || Ar و ج�هwahaǧa ‘sich entzünden und brennen’ (Wahrmund II 1225);
�
~ Najd wāhiǧ ‘glowing, burning, blazing’ (Kurpershoek 1999: 484) ~ Aleppo
wahǧ ‘chaleur (du feu), ardeur (du soleil) réfléchie’; wahhāǧ ‘qui dégage une
très forte chaleur’ (Barthélemy 1935–69: 911) ~ Egypt wahag ‘to cause to be ner-
vous’ (Spiro 1895: 652) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨wahaǧ⟩ ‘ardour’ (Corriente 1997: 573).
833 w-h-r
wr (MK) < [*whr] ‘large, great, greatly, very great, important, Great One (epi-
thet of the Uraeus), magnate’; ‘groß, groß sein, Fürst’ (Faulkner 1962: 63, 64;
Wb I 326, 327; Schipper 2005: 45); pꜣ wr ‘the chief’ (Breasted 1930: 525); wrt
‘demon’ (Caminos 1954: 538); ‘greatness of rank’ (Faulkner 1962: 63, 64); whꜣhꜣ
‘arrogance (?)’ (op. cit., 65) ~ Dem wr ‘groß, der Große’ (DG 42) ~ Heb יָ ִהירyāhīr
‘proud, haughty’ (BDB 397) ~ Sab yhr ‘exaltation’ (Jamme 1962: 438) || Ar ي�هر ��
yahr ‘locus amplus’ (Freytag 1837: 694)/yahar ‘endroit vaste’; wahara ‘com-
mencer à s’amincir; devenir moins grand’ (DAF II 1614, 1637); و�هرwahar ‘blaze
of the sun’ (Rabin 1951: 28); ��تي���هورtayhūr, pl ��تي��ا �هي��رtayāhīr ‘vain, having a fond
ة �ذ
opinion of himself, proud’ (Lane 319); � و و�هرðū wahrah ‘imposant’ (Dozy II
845);
~ Oman wohr, f wohra ‘groß’ (Reinhardt 1894: 63) ~ Marazig uhér, fem. sing.
wéhrat, inacc. yāhar ‘grossir beaucoup, engraisser exagérément et s’alourdir
au point d’être incapable de se mouvoir (homme, animal)’ (Boris 1958: 682)
~ Palest wahret il-malāyče ‘die Erhabenheit der Engel’ (Schmidt & Kahle 1918:
12) ~ Egypt iywahhir ḥadd ‘jemanden erschrecken’ (Behnstedt & Woidich 1994:
509).
832. w-h-ǧ – 837. y-r-q 363
834 w-h-n
whn (MK) ‘escape, miss, fail, be undone of heart, be lacking’; ‘zerfallen (vom
Bauwerk und vom Menschen)’ (Faulkner 1962: 65; Wb I 345) || Ar � و�ه� نwahana/
wahina ‘to be weak’ (Hava 1982: 898);
~ Aleppo wəhne ‘faible, débile’; awhan ‘plus fragile’ (Barthélemy 1935–69:
911) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨wahan⟩ ‘weakness’ (Corriente 1997: 573) ~ Ḥassāniyya
mhīn ‘lent’ (Taine-Cheikh 1990: 90).
835 w-y-ḥ
wḥꜣt (LE) ‘oasis, oasis-region’; ‘Oase’; wḥꜣtyw ‘oasis-dwellers’ (Faulkner 1962: 66;
Wb I 347) ~ Dem wḥj ‘Oase’ (DG 97) ~ Copt ⲟⲩⲁϩⲉ ‘oasis’ (Crum 1939: 508b) ||
Ar وwāḥ, pl � اح�ا تwāḥāt ‘oasis’ (Hava 1982: 846);
اح و
~ Hijaz wāḥa ‘oasis’ (Omar 1975: 278) ~ Iraq wāḥa ‘id.’ (van Ess 1918: 187)
~ Damascus wāḥa, pl -āt ‘id.’ (Stowasser & Ani 1964: 160) ~ Palest wāḥa, pl -āt
‘Oase’ (Bauer 1957: 222) ~ Egypt wāḥ, pl -āt ‘oasis’ (Spiro 1895: 632).
836 y-ā
i҆ꜣ (interj.) (OK) ‘o’: i҆ꜣ i҆ḫ ‘was soll …’ (Wb I 25) || Ar ي�اyā ‘O!’ [vocative particle]
(Hava 1982: 900);
~ Palest yā ṣabi ‘o Knabe’ (Bauer 1957: 222) ~ Egypt ya ‘o’ (Spiro 1895: 653)
~ Al-Andalus ⟨ya⟩ (vocative marker) (Corriente 1997: 575).
837 y-r-q
jꜣq.t (MK) ‘leeks, vegetables (in general)’; ‘Lauch, auch allgemein, Grünzeug,
Gemüse’ (Faulkner 1962: 9; Wb I 34) ~ Akkad urqītu ‘vegetation’ (M. Cohen
2011: 225) ~ Heb יָ ר ֹקyārōq ‘green thing’ (BDB 438); cf. 800. w-r-q.
364 Glossary ( Ancient Egyptian – Arabic )
838 y-s-r
wsr (Urk. IV, 18th Dyn.) ‘strong, powerful; a wealthy man’; ‘mächtig, stark
sein, der Mächtige, reich; einflußreich, ranghoch’; wsrw ‘strength, power; oar’
(Faulkner 1962: 68, 69; Calice 1936: 138; Hannig 2003: 381; Hannig & Vomberg
1999: 415); wśr ‘die Starken’ [in anthroponym] (Altenmüller 1975: 291) || Ar ي���سر
yasar/yusur ‘Reichtum’ (Wahrmund II 1234); cf. 2. ʾ-θ-r;
~ Palest yusra ‘Reichtum’ (Bauer 1957: 242) ~ Cairo yusr ‘prosperity, suc-
cess, ease, comfort’ (Spiro 1895: 654) ~ Al-Andalus ⟨maysūr⟩ ‘wealthy, rich’
(Corriente 1997: 577).
839 y-m-n
šâlu 300
Amharic
šagāmu 306
šuḫnu 310
šabbiṭu 312 abbärä 173
šaṭāru(m) 316 afənčʾa 524
šapāru 319 angät 477
šappāru/sappāru 320 däbäläl 222
šakāku 323 dämməma 238
šeršerru 325 dəbəll 437
Index 367
h̠ mm 156 gbj 84
h̠ nm 203 gḥs.t 89
gsm 306
sjb 404 gš 549
sjf 349 gtn 553
sʿrt 373
sp 381 twn 435
smn 339 tb.t 66
smr 334 tbʿ 405
sms 388 tbn 437
smt 737 tpḥ 613
sbt 312 tm 75
snf 326 tmt 423
stf 369 tryꜣ 69
stm (r) 737
skꜣ 323 ḏꜣḏꜣ 191
ḏp 230
šʿr 317 ḏmpḥ 70
šʿrt 372 ḏnf 291, 610
378 Index